Technical Specifications For DM Plant - Kothagudem Tps

1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM TPS
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
VOLUME: II B & III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
DM PLANT
SPECIFICATION NO.: PE-TS-410-163-A001
BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LIMITED

POWER SECTOR
PROJECT ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
NOIDA, INDIA
TITLE: SPECIFICATION NO.: PE-TS-410-163-A001
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR VOLUME: II-B
DM PLANT SECTION:
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
CONTENTS
VOLUME-IIB & III
VOLUME-IIB
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

SECTION A SCOPE OF ENQUIRY 1-3
SECTION B PROJECT INFORMATION 4-7
SECTION C SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 8-116
SECTION C1 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL) 9-20

ANNEXURE I : QUALITY PLAN 21-23
ANNEXURE II : SUB VENDORS LIST 24-35
ANNEXURE III : FUNCTIONAL GUARANTEES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 36-51
ANNEXURE IV : DRAWING DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE 52-54
ANNEXURE V : PAINTING SPECIFICATION 55-67
ANNEXURE VI : MANDATORY SPARES LIST 67-70
DATA SHEET-A FOR DM PLANT 71-112
P&ID FOR DM PLANT 113-114
KEY PLAN FOR DM PLANT 115-116
SECTION C2 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL) 117-125
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPEFICIATION 118-119
ELECTRICAL SCOPE BETWEEN BHEL AND VENDOR 120-122
ELECTRICAL LOAD DATA FORMAT 123-124
CABLE SCHEDULE FORMAT 125-125
SECTION C3 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION) 126-129
SECTION D GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 130-617
SECTION D1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT (MECHANICAL) 131-451
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR DUAL MEDIA FILTERS AND 132-134
DM FEED PUMPS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR DM PLANT 136-157
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR LOW PRESSURE PIPING, 158-177
VALVES AND SPECIALITIES
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR LARGE DIAMETER LOW 178-202
PRESSURE PIPING, VALVES AND MISC. TANKS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR PIPING, FITTINGS AND 203-238
VALVES
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL 239-244
PUMPS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL 245-252
PUMPS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT 253-257
PUMPS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR SUMP PUMPS, DRIVES AND 258-276
ACCESSORIES
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR SCREW PUMPS 277-286
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR MISCELLANEOUS HOISTS 287-295
GENERAL QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 296-308
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR PROTECTIVE LINING AND 309-322
PAINTING
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR PLANT WATER SYSTEM 323-361
ALONGWITH POTABLE WATER PUMPS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR REQUIREMENTS OF SPARES, 362-366
TOOLS & TACKLE, LUBRICANTS/OIL/CONSUMABLES
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR PERFORMANCE 367-393
GUARANTEES
ADDITIONAL GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 394-417
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR ENGINEERING SERVICES 418-430
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR PROJECT MANAGEMENT 431-451
AND SITE SERVICES
SECTION D2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT (ELECTRICAL) 452-498
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LV MOTORS 453-485
QUALITY PLAN (MOTOR) 486-496
EXPLANATORY NOTES FOR FILLING UP CABLE LIST 497-498
SECTION D3 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT (CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION) 499-614
BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301

DM PLANT SECTION:
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PLC SPECIFICATION 500-504

PLC DATA SHEET 505-507
PLC CONFUGRATION DIAGRAM 508-509
PLC QAP AND FAT 510-518
ACTUATOR SPECIFICATION 519-524
ACTUATOR DATASHEET 525-529
Drive Control Philosophy 530-536
UPS SCHEME 537-538
INSTRUMENTATION DATASHEET 539-569
INSTRUMENTATION QUALITY PLAN 570-575
LCP AND JB DETAILS 576-602
PC SPECIFICATION 603-605
FURNITURE SPECIFICATION 606-607
CABLE BOQ 608-609
KKS PHILOSOPHY 610-614
SECTION D4 DRAWINGS 615-617
P&ID OF CONDENSATE TRANSFER SYSTEM 616-616
PLOT PLAN 617-617
VOLUME-III 618-630
SCHEDULE OF PRE BID CLARIFICATIONS 619-619
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION WITH COST OF WITHDRAWAL 620-621
DRAWING/DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION SCHEDULE 622-626
COMPLIANCE CUM CONFIRMATION SCHEDULE 627-627
SUGGESTIVE PRICE SCHEDULE 628-629
SCHEDULE OF DECLARATION 630-630
BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301

DM PLANT SECTION: A
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
SECTION A
SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 1 of 630

DM PLANT SECTION: A
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
1. SCOPE OF INQUIRY/ INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
1.1 This specification is intended to cover design, engineering, manufacture, fabrication, assembly, inspection &
testing at vendor's & sub-vendors works, painting, forwarding, supply and delivery at site including start up and
commissioning spares, mandatory spares, properly packed for transportation, unloading / handling and storage
at site, in site transportation, assembly, erection and commissioning, trail run, preparation and submission of
As Built drawings, site testing, carrying out performance guarantee tests at site and handover of DM PLANT
as per the details in different sections / volumes of this specification for 1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM
TPS,STAGE-VII, PALONCHA.
1.2 The contractor shall be responsible for providing all material, equipment & services, which are required to fulfil
the intent of ensuring operability, maintainability, reliability and complete safety of the complete work covered
under this specification, irrespective of whether it has been specifically listed herein or not. Omission of specific
reference to any component / accessory necessary for proper performance of the equipment shall not relieve
them of the responsibility of providing such facilities to complete the supply, erection and commissioning of
Condensate Polishing Units and external regeneration system.
1.3 It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design and manufacture. However, the equipment shall
conform in all respects to high standards of design, engineering and workmanship and shall be capable of
performing the required duties in a manner acceptable to purchaser who will interpret the meaning of drawings
and specifications and shall be entitled to reject any work or material which in his judgment is not in full
accordance herewith.
1.4 The extent of supply under the contract includes all items shown in the drawings, notwithstanding the fact that
such items may have been omitted from the specification or schedules. Similarly, the extent of supply also
includes all items mentioned in the specification and /or schedules, notwithstanding the fact that such items may
have been omitted in the drawing.
1.5 The general terms and conditions, instructions to tenderer and other attachment referred to elsewhere are
made part of the tender specification. The equipment materials and works covered by this specification are
subject to compliance to all attachments referred to in the specification. The bidder shall be responsible for and
governed by all requirements stipulated herein.
1.6 While all efforts have been made to make the specification requirement complete & unambiguous, it shall be
bidders responsibility to ask for missing information, ensure completeness of specification, to bring out any
contradictory / conflicting requirement in different sections of the specification and within a section itself to the
notice of BHEL and to seek any clarification on specification requirement in the format enclosed under Vol-III of
the specification within 10 days of receipt of tender documents. In absence of any such clarifications, in
case of any contradictory requirement, the more stringent requirement as per interpretation of BHEL/Customer
shall prevail and shall be complied by the bidder without any commercial implication on account of the same.
Further in case of any missing information in the specification not brought out by the prospective bidders as part
of pre-bid clarification, the same shall be furnished by BHEL/ Customer as and when brought to their notice
either by the bidder or by BHEL/ customer themselves. However, such requirements shall be binding on the
successful bidder without any commercial & delivery implication.
1.7 The bidders offer shall not carry any sections like clarification, interpretations and /or assumptions.
1.8 Deviations, if any, should be very clearly brought out clause by clause along with cost of withdrawal in the
enclosed schedule (in Vol III); otherwise, it will be presumed that the vendor's offer is strictly in line with NIT
specification. If no cost of withdrawal is given against the deviation, it will be presumed that deviation can be
withdrawn without any cost to BHEL/its customer.
1.9 In case all above requirements are not complied with, the offer may be considered as incomplete and would
become liable for rejection.
1.10 Unless specified otherwise, all through the specification, the word contractor shall have same meaning as
successful bidder/vendor and Customer/Purchaser/Employer will mean BHEL and/or Customer (TSGENCO:
Telangana State Power Generation Corporation Ltd.) including their consultant (Development Consultants Pvt.
Ltd.) as interpreted by BHEL in the relevant context. Bidder to refer GCC/SCC for more clarity.
1.11 The equipment covered under this specification shall not be dispatched unless the same have been finally
inspected, accepted and dispatch release issued by BHEL/Customer.
DM PLANT SECTION: A
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
1.12 BHELs/Customers representative shall be given full access to the shop in which the equipments are being
manufactured or tested and all test records shall be made available to him.
1.13 Pre-bid meeting shall be held before bid submission. Bidder to ask all their queries in pre-bid meeting.

DM PLANT SECTION: B
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION B
PROJECT INFORMATION


DM PLANT SECTION: B
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION: B
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION: B
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANALYSIS OF CLARIFIED WATER (TO BE USED TO DESIGN THE DM PLANT)

DM PLANT SECTION: C
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION C
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS


DM PLANT SECTION: C1
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
SECTIONC1

SPECIFICTECHNICAL
REQUIREMENT
REQUIREMENT MECHANICAL


REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

1.0 GENERAL
The DM Plant and associated accessories shall conform to the technical specification.
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (MECHANICAL)
Broad scope of supply (mechanical) for this package is detailed below and as indicated in relevant portion of
this specification. Please refer Electrical and C&I specifications also for respective scope of Electrical and C&I
items:
The DM Plant, as specified in Technical data sheets & technical specifcations, and shall consist of at least the
followings:
1) Three (3) numbers (3X50%) (2Working+2Standby) DM Feed pumps along with motors, piping, valves,
fittings, instrumentation & all other accessories as required.
2) Three (3) numbers (3X50%) (2Working+1Standby) Dual Media Pressure Filter Units, each complete with
internals, integral pipe works, valves, filter media, fittings, instrumentation and all other accessories as
required.
3) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Air Blowers for Dual Media Pressure Filter Units,
along with suction filter, silencer, motors, acoustic hood, piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and all
other accessories as required.
4) Complete valves, fittings, instrumentation and all other accessories required for one (1) no. Overhead
Backwash Water Storage Tank for Dual Media Pressure Filter Units.
5) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Activated Carbon Filters each complete with internals,
integral pipe works, valves, activated carbon, fittings, instrumentation and all other accessories as
required.
6) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Weakly Acid Cation Exchangers along with ion
exchange resin, integral pipe works, internals, resin traps, valves, fittings, instrumentation, and
accessories associated with the same.
7) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Strong Acid Cation Exchangers along with ion
exchange resin, integral pipe works, internals, resin traps, valves, fittings, instrumentation, and
8) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) forced draft Degasser Towers [One (1) nos. on each
Degassed Water Storage Tank] along with internals. integral pipe works, valves, fittings, instrumentation
and accessories associated with the same.
9) Three (3) numbers (3X50%) (2Working+1Standby) Degasser Air Blowers along with suction filter,
silencer, motors, acoustic hood, piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and all other accessories as
required.
10) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Degassed Water Storage Tank along with piping,
valves, fittings, instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
11) Three (3) numbers (3X50%) (2Working+1Standby) Degassed Water Pumps along with motors, piping,
12) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Weak Base Anion Exchangers along with ion
exchange resin, resin trap, integral pipe works, internals, valves, fittings, instrumentation and
13) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Strong Bases Anion Exchangers along with ion
exchange resin, resin trap, integral pipe works, internals, valves, fittings, instrumentation and
14) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Mixed Bed Exchangers along with ion exchange

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

resin, resin trap, integral pipe works, internals, valves, fittings, instrumentation accessories associated
with the same.
15) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Air Blowers for Mixed Bed Exchangers (common for
Neutralization Pit) along with suction filter, silencer, motors, acoustic hood, piping, valves, fittings,
instrumentation and all other accessories as required.
16) Two (2) nos of hose stations for unloading of Hydrochloric Acid. The hose station shall have two (2) nos
of 80 mm NB flexible hose connection.
17) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Hydrochloric Acid Unloading Pumps along with
motors, piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
18) Two (2) nos Bulk Hydrochloric acid Storage Tanks along with piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and
19) Two (2) nos Hydrochloric acid Measuring Tanks for Cation Exchangers along with piping, valves, fittings,
instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
20) One (1) no. Hydrochloric acid Measuring Tanks for Mixed Bed Exchangers along with piping, valves,
fittings, instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
21) One (1) no. Hydrochloric acid Measuring Tanks for Neutralisation at NPIT along with piping, valves,
fittings, instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
22) Two (2) nos Hydrochloric Acid Dosing ejectors for Cation Exchangers along with accessories. Both water
and acid shall be thoroughly mixed in the ejector.
23) One (1) no. Hydrochloric Acid Dosing ejectors for Mixed Bed Exchanger along with accessories. Both
water and acid shall be thoroughly mixed in the ejector.
24) Two (2) nos of hose stations for unloading of Caustic. The hose station shall have two (2) nos of 80 mm
NB flexible hose connection.
25) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Caustic Unloading Pumps along with motors, piping,
26) Two (2) nos Bulk caustic Storage Tanks along with piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and
27) One (1) no. Activated Carbon Filter for caustic each complete with internals, integral pipe works, valves,
activated carbon, fittings, instrumentation and all other accessories as required.
28) Two (2) nos Caustic Measuring Tanks for Anion Exchangers along with piping, valves, fittings,
29) One (1) no. Caustic Measuring Tanks for Mixed Bed Exchangers along with piping, valves, fittings,
30) One (1) no. Caustic Measuring Tanks for Neutralisation at NPIT along with piping, valves, fittings,
31) One (1) no. Brine solution preparation Tanks along with agitators, agitator motors, piping, valves, fittings,
32) One (1) no. Hot Water Tank along with Regeneration Water heaters, piping, valves, fittings,
33) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Alkali Transfer cum Recirculation Pumps along with
34) Two (2) nos Caustic Dosing ejectors for Anion Exchangers along with accessories. Both water and
Caustic shall be thoroughly mixed in the ejector.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

35) One (1) no. Caustic Dosing ejectors for mixed bed Exchangers along with accessories. Both water and
Caustic shall be thoroughly mixed in the ejector.
36) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Potable water Pumps along with motors, piping,
37) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) DM Regeneration water Pumps along with motors,
piping, valves, fittings, instrumentation and accessories associated with the same.
38) Neutralization Pit (RCC- By BHEL). However instrumentation, piping, valves, fittings and accessories
associated with the same shall be in bidders scope.
39) Two (2) numbers (2X100%) (1Working+1Standby) Neutralized Effluent Disposal Pumps along with
40) Safety equipments as per Data Sheet-A.
41) Two (2) nos. safety shower near acid/ caustic storage tanks.
42) One (1) no. Central Sampling Rack (to be located at express laboratory to be located at ground floor of
DM Plant building).
43) First fill of filter media, resin, and degasser tower packings for all the units complete with make-up filter
media, resin and packings for first three years of operation. Quantity of make-up resins shall be
calculated on the basis of 3% and 5% attrition loss per annum for cation and anion resin respectively.
For filter make-up a loss of 10% per annum shall be considered.
44) All vessels as per P&ID & Data Sheet-A complete with inlet and outlet connections, bed support cum
under drain system, inlets water distributors, all fittings and appurtenances etc. as specified and as
required.
45) External resin/media traps at the outlet of each of the vessels, designed for in place manual
backwashing.
46) All tanks as per P&ID & Data Sheet-A complete with inlet and outlet connections, drain system, inlets
water connection, all fittings and appurtenances etc. as specified and as required.
47) Bidder to note that the equipment, valves, instruments indicated in the P&ID (PE-DG-410-163-A001)
attached in the technical specification are minimum and are in bidders scope. During detailed
engineering, bidder to furnish complete and detailed scheme in all respects including all valves,
equipments etc. for smooth, safe, efficient and trouble free operation of the plant meeting the
specification requirement and also considering the applicable statutory requirement.
48) Necessary piping, fitting, valves, drains, vents, sampling etc. required for the complete DM Plant. Pipe
racks shall be provided by BHEL wherever available, wherever pipe racks are not available, pipe shall be
laid on pedestal to be provided by BHEL. However all auxiliary steel structure (U-clamps, nuts, bolts,
channels etc) for fixing pipes on pedestal or racks shall be in bidders scope.
49) All insert plates, rung ladder, nuts and bolts, and flanges and matching counter flanges wherever
applicable.
50) All necessary valves and fittings for the installations with the actuators necessary for their remote
operation.
51) Embedment plates with lugs shall also be provided by bidder as per system requirement.
52) All channels & brackets, mounting plates as required for mounting of motors, pumps, stirrers, tank etc
shall be in bidders scope.
53) Start-up and commissioning spares as required.
54) Mandatory spares as indicated elsewhere in the specification.
55) All special tools necessary for proper maintenance or adjustment of the equipment packed in permanent

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

box. Operating platforms, permanent ladders (not rugs), supports and other structural works for each
tanks, valves etc. to facilitate accessibility for operation and maintenance.
56) All necessary structural steel for pipe supporting structure, platforms, walkways / pathways and access
stairs, mechanical plant and equipment, mechanical services and pipe work associated with DM Plant.
57) Finish paints for touch up painting of equipments after erection at site in sealed container.
58) All Motorized valves with integral starter as per requirement and as indicated in the P&ID.
59) All pipes, fittings etc required for hand railing, platforms, and ladders shall be in the scope of bidder.
60) All handrails shall be of 32 mm nominal bore MS pipes (medium class) as per IS: 1161 galvanised using
750 gm/sq. m of zinc. Hand railing shall be a two-rail system with the top rail 1000 mm above the
walkway surface and the intermediate rail 450 mm below the top rail. Handrail post spacing shall be
limited to 1500 mm as far as possible but can be proportioned to the length of the opening. In such a
case spacing shall not exceed 1850 mm centre to centre of posts. Hand railing shall be shop fabricated
for specific locations and field welded or bolted to the erected structural steel. Railings shall be provided
with 100 mm wide and
61) 8 mm thick MS strip at bottom as toe guard all along the length of railing in horizontal plane. For RCC
stairs, hand railing with 20 mm square MS bar balustrade with suitable MS flat and Aluminium /
Teakwood handrail shall be provided, unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
62) Monitoring gadgets, instruments and equipments required for commissioning & maintenance (till PG test
and plant handover).
63) Instrument hook up material shall be in bidders scope.
64) Permanent ladder (not rungs) for approaching the top of tanks, valves for All steel inserts with lugs,
plates, bolts, nuts, sleeves, edge angles and all other embedding components etc as required to grout in
civil works and to support/hold the equipments being supplied under this specification for
opening/maintenance purpose.
65) Wherever pipe racks are not available, pipes shall run on pedestals or below ground. All auxiliary
structure & fixing items such as U clamps, nuts, bolts, channels, insert plates etc. required to lay the
pipes on pedestals shall be in bidders scope of work. Wrapping, coating and protection of all the buried
pipe is also in bidders scope.
66) Wrapping, coating and protection of the entire buried pipe shall be as per IS 10221 or AWWA C 203-93.
67) Any item/work either supply of equipment or erection material which have not been specifically
mentioned in but are necessary to complete the woks for trouble free and efficient operation of the plant
shall be deemed to be included within the scope of this specification and shall be in bidders scope
without any commercial, technical and delivery implication to BHEL.
68) All other items are also included in scope of supply as specified in other part of the specification.
69) All required elbow, tee, pipe fittings etc. required for erection of the complete system including piping
shall be in bidders scope. Bidder to provide the detailed BOQ during detail engineering
70) Bidder shall perform the guarantee parameters as per specification requirement to the
satisfaction of owner. The exact modalities of verifying guarantee for the parameters indicated in the
specification shall be finally as agreed with the owner during detailed engineering & mutually agreed.
71) Initial fill of resins, media and degasser tower packing for all vessels as required.
72) One no. Electric Hoist with Monorail of minimum 1000 kg capacity. Capacity of hoists shall be selected
considering a minimum margin of 10% over the maximum weight of the heaviest equipment / component
to be handled by the Hoist.
73) All the first fill and one Year's topping requirements of consumable such as greases, oil, lubricants, servo
fluids/control fluids etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered under the scope of

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

specifications, into successful commissioning / initial operation and to establish completion of facilities
shall be in bidders scope. Suitable standard lubricants as available in India are desired. Efforts should
be made to limit the variety of lubricants to minimum.
74) All blank flanges/counter flanges, isolations valves, tees etc. to interconnect the pipes at all terminal
points.
75) All necessary structural steel for pipe supporting structure, platforms, walkways / pathways and access
stairs for mechanical plant and equipment, mechanical services and pipe work associated with Effluent
Treatment Plant.
76) All steel inserts with lugs, plates, bolts, nuts, sleeves, edge angles and all other embedding components
etc as required to grout in civil works and to support/hold the equipments being supplied under this
specification for opening/maintenance purpose
3.0 PIPING
All the piping as listed below shall be in bidders scope. The below indicated pipes shall be designed,
supplied, erected, laid and tested by the bidder. Elbows, tees, flanges Hangers and supports, embedment
plates with lugs etc required for the below given piping shall also be provided by the bidder.
1) All piping within the DM Plant and potable water treatment plant.
2) Inlet and outlet pipes for each vessel, pumps, other equipments, etc. with pipe connections to the
respective vessels/equipments.
3) 800 meter DM plant feed piping from Clarified water pump house where (DM Feed pumps are located) to
DM plant. For details, please refer plot plan.
4) 200 meter DM water piping from DM plant to DM Water storage tanks.
5) 200 meter DM water recirculation piping from DM water regeneration pumps to each DM Water storage
tanks.
6) 80 meter DM water piping from common suction header of DM Water storage tanks to DM water
regeneration pumps. For details pls refer P&ID for Condensate transfer system (PE-DG-410-100-N109
REV 01) attached elsewhere in the specification.
7) 1100 meter filter back wash water piping from filter back wash sump in DM plant area to stilling
chambers in PT plant area.
8) 1300 meter neutralize effluent disposal piping from Neutralization pit in DM plant area to Central
monitoring basin in Effluent treatment plant area.
9) 800 meter Potable water piping from potable water pumps in DM plant area to potable water storage
tank in
tank in TG
TG area
area at
at 35.5
35.0 meter
meter elevation.
elevation.
10) Service water piping, instrument air piping, service air piping, etc. as applicable as per the Terminal
Points.
11) In addition, any additional piping and associated accessories required to complete the system shall also
be in bidders scope.
4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (ELECTRICAL)
Complete electrical as per specification and details indicated in Section C2 (Specific Technical Requirement
Electrical) and D2 (General Technical Requirement Electrical).
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (C&I)
Complete C&I as per specification and details indicated in Section C3 (Specific Technical Requirement C&I)
and D3 (General Technical Requirement C&I).

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

6.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (CIVIL)
Total Civil is in BHELs Scope of work, however complete grouting for equipment, fixing and any concreting
inside the vessels and lining shall be in bidders scope.
Also detailed Civil Input drawing shall be provided by bidder. Successful bidder shall furnish civil assignment
drawings. The corresponding CIVIL drawing prepared by BHEL / CIVIL agency, based on civil assignment
drawing of bidder will be furnished to the successful bidder for concurrence
7.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES
The bidders scope also includes following services for scope under this specification:
1) Erection and Commissioning, unloading, storage and handling at site.
2) Arrangement of all instruments, reagents, monitoring gadgets for monitoring, pre-commissioning,

carrying out trial run & commissioning and Performance guarantee test.
3) Monitoring gadgets, instruments and equipments required for maintenance.
4) Complete grouting for equipment, fixing and any concreting inside the vessels and lining.
5) All personnel required during maintenance, Commissioning and Performance guarantee test.
6) Trial run for requisite period.
7) Performance guarantee test.
8) Painting shall be as specified in Surface Preparation & Painting Sec-D1 of this technical specification.
Bidder to note that paint shed shall be finalized during detailed engineering as per customer & BHEL
requirement and any variation in the painting schedule as finally approved by customer shall be taken
care by bidder without any commercial and delivery implication.
9) Final touch up paint at site.
8.0 TERMINAL POINTS
1) 25 NB Instrument air supply at 5 to 7 kg/cm2 (g) At 5 meter distance from the DM Plant area. However
distribution and piping inside DM Plant area shall be in bidders scope.
2) 25 NB Service air supply at 5 to 7 kg/cm2 (g) - At 5 meter distance from DM Plant area. However
distribution and piping inside DM Plant area shall be in bidders scope.
3) Service water connection (50 NB connections) at 5 meter distance from DM Plant area. Piping inside DM
Plant area for mentioned services will be in bidders scope.
4) Drinking water (or potable water) of 25 NB connections - At 5 meter distance from the DM Plant area.
However distribution and piping inside DM Plant area shall be in bidders scope.
5) DM Water piping from DM plant upto nozzle flange of respective DM water storage tanks.
6) DM Water recirculation piping from DM water regeneration pumps upto nozzle flange of respective DM
water storage tanks.
7) Potable Water piping from DM plant upto nozzle flange of potable water storage tanks.
9.0 EXCLUSIONS
1) All civil works including foundation of equipment. However complete grouting for equipment, fixing and
any concreting inside vessels and lining shall be in the scope of the bidder. Also civil works including
operating / maintenance platforms and interconnection platforms (if any) with ladders / stairs & handrails,
structural supports and hangers for pipes / cables / ducts, crane rails, all embedments and inserts with

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

lugs including anchor fasteners, bolts etc., dressing of foundations, grouting of pockets and underpinning
of base plates for equipment / structures and fixing supports, filling and finishing of openings in walls,
floors, cladding, roof and trenches shall be in bidders scope.
2) Instrument air & service air up to terminal points.
3) All chemicals.
4) Air conditioning, ventilation & fire fighting facilities.
5) Other exclusions are mentioned in the electrical & C&I parts of this specification.
6) Drinking water (or potable water), service water up to terminal points.
7) Regeneration effluents and other drains from equipments, vessels, tank etc shall be drained to N-pit
through drain trenches. the required piping, valves fittings, instruments etc shall be in bidders scope.
10.0 QP AND SUB VENDOR APPROVAL
1) The quality assurance plan is enclosed elsewhere in technical specification. However requirement of
detailed QP, inspection checklist, certificate of conformance etc. for each equipment and sub-vendor
shall be finalized during detailed engineering stage; decision of BHEL/customer shall be binding on
vendor in this regard. Any changes/additional tests insisted upon by Owner during approval of QAPs
shall be accepted by bidder without any commercial and delivery implication to BHEL/Customer. Bidder
shall submit the quality plans in BHEL format during detailed engineering stage. Bidder to note further
that during detailed engineering all the QAPs/check lists etc. shall be submitted to Customer/BHEL for
approval. All inspection & testing etc. shall be carried out accordingly.
2) The sub vendor list enclosed elsewhere in technical specification is indicative only and is subject to
approval / acceptance by customer. Bidder to propose his sub vendor list with back up documents
(experience list, end user certificate as applicable) etc. The same shall subject to BHEL and Customer
approval during detailed engineering stage without any technical, commercial & delivery implication to
BHEL.
11.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST
The Performance guarantee test shall be as per Annexure-III/Section-C1.
12.0 DESIGN/ CONSTRUCTION
In addition to the requirements of Section C & D the following shall also be complied under scope of this
specification.
The P&ID for DM Plant (Dwg.No.- PE-DG-410-163-A001) is enclosed herein in this section for bidders
compliance.
The material of construction specified in data sheet-A are minimum requirements and material of construction
for other components not specified shall be similarly selected by the bidder for intended duty which shall be
subject to BHEL / Customer approval during detail engineering without any commercial & delivery implication
to BHEL.
13.0 DRAWING/DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENT
For the Drawings/Documents submission schedule, please refer Vol-III.
For the Drawings/Documents Submission Procedure, please refer Sec-C1. The bidder has to submit the
revised drawing/document along with the compliance sheet indicating enumerate reply to all BHEL and
customer comments or observations. Without compliance sheet the submission of the drawings/documents
will not be considered and the delay on this account will be solely on bidders side only. Bidder to comply with
the observations of the BHEL and CUSTOMER without price & delivery implication.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

14.0 SPARES
1. All the spares for the equipment under the contract provided by the vendor will strictly conform to the
specifications and documents and will be identical to the corresponding main equipment/components supplied
under the contract.
2. The quality plan and the inspection requirement finalized for the main equipment will also be applicable to the
corresponding spares.
3. The list of mandatory spares considered essential by the BHEL & Customer is indicated in Annexure VI. The
bidder shall indicate the prices in the 'Schedule of mandatory Spares' whether or not he considers it
necessary for the BHEL & Customer to have such spares. If the bidder fails to comply with the above or fails
to quote the price of any spare item, the cost of such spares shall be deemed to be included in the contract
price. The bidder shall furnish the population per unit of each item. Whenever the quantity is mentioned in
"sets" the bidder has to give the item details and prices of each item.
All mandatory spares shall be delivered at site at least two months before scheduled date of initial operation of
the first unit. However, spares shall not be dispatched before dispatch of corresponding main equipments.
Wherever quantity is specified both as a percentage and a value, the Bidder has to supply the higher quantity
until and unless specified otherwise.
4. Start-up and commissioning spares are in bidders scope of supply.

Start-up and Commissioning spares are those which would be required during equipment or system testing,
start-up and commissioning. All spares used until the plant is finally handed over by the bidder to the
customer come under this category. All start-up and commissioning spares as required shall be provided by
the bidder without any additional cost to the BHEL and customer. List of spares shall be furnished by BIDDER
along with the offer.
Bidder shall be responsible for the ready and timely availability for all the startup and commissioning spares
as required during various stages of testing, cleaning and commissioning up to handing over of each unit of
the total plant.
An adequate stock of start-up spares shall be available at the site such that the start-up and commissioning of
the equipment/systems, Performance guarantee test and handing over the equipment/ systems to the
customer will be carried out without hindrance and delay. All start-up spares which remain unused after the
taking over of the plant shall remain the property of the customer.
5. In addition to the spare parts mentioned above, the Bidder shall also provide a list of recommended spares for
3 years of normal operation of the plant and indicate the list and unit prices in Price Schedules. This list shall
take into consideration the mandatory spares specified Annexure VI and should be independent of the list of
the mandatory spares. The BHEL reserves the right to buy any or all of the recommended spares. The
recommended spares shall be delivered at project site at least two months before the scheduled date of initial
operation of first unit. However, the spares shall not be dispatched before the dispatch of the main equipment.
Price of recommended spares will not be used for evaluation of the bids. However, the Bidder shall be liable
to provide necessary justification for the quoted prices for these spares as desired by BHEL.
The vendor warrants:
(i) That all spares supplied will be new and in accordance with the contract document and will be free
from defects in design, material and workmanship and shall further guarantee as under:
(ii) In case of any failure in the original component/equipments due to faulty designs, materials and
workmanship, the corresponding spare parts if any, supplied will be replaced without any extra cost to
the BHEL and customer unless a joint examination and analysis by BHEL and/or customer of such
spare parts prove that the defect found in the original part that failed can safely be assured not to be
present in spare parts.
(iii) The long term availability of spares to the BHEL and the customer for the full life of the equipment
covered under the contract and that before going out of production of spare parts of the equipment
covered under the contract, vendor and his sub-vendors shall give the BHEL and the customer at
least 24 (Twenty Four) months advance notice so that the latter may order his bulk requirements of

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

spares, if he so desires. The same provision will also be applicable to the sub-vendors. Further, in
case of discontinuance of manufacture of any spares by the vendors or his sub-vendors the vendors
and his sub-vendors, will provide the BHEL and the customer, 2 (two) years in advance, with full
manufacturing drawings, material specifications and technical information required by the BHEL and
the customer for the purpose of manufacture of such items and also the right to manufacture such
spares for their own requirements.
(iv) Further in case of discontinuance of supply of spares by the vendors or his sub-vendors, the vendor
will provide the BHEL and the customer with full information for replacement of such spares with other
equivalent makes, if so required by the BHEL and the customer.
(v) Notwithstanding the above, the vendor shall be responsible for supply of spares for the lifetime of the
package at reasonable prices. The prices of all future requirements of spares shall be derived from
the corresponding ex-works price at which the orders for such spares have been placed by the BHEL
and the customer as a part of the mandatory or long term or any other kind of spares. The base
indices for calculating ex-works price shall be commissioning of last equipment under main contract.
6. The vendor will indicate the delivery period of the spares, which the BHEL and the customer may procure in
accordance with this clause.
7. In case of emergency requirements of spares, the vendor would make every effort to expedite the
manufacture and delivery of such spares on the basis of mutually agreed time schedule.
8. In case the vendor fails to supply the mandatory or long term or any other kind of spares on the terms
stipulated above, the BHEL and the customer shall be entitled to purchase the same from the alternate
sources at the risk and the cost of the vendor and recover from the vendor, the excess amount paid by the
BHEL and the customer over the rates as per the contract. In the event of such risk purchase by the BHEL or
the customer, the purchases will be as per the works and procurement policy of the BHEL and the customer
prevalent at the time of such purchases and BHEL & the customer at his option may include a representative
from the vendor in finalizing the purchases.
9. It is expressly understood that the final settlement between the parties in terms of relevant clauses of the
tender document shall not relieve the vendor of any of his obligations under the provision of long term
availability of spares and such provisions shall continue to be enforced till the expiry of 30 (thirty) years period
reckoned from the scheduled date of completion of trial operation of the last equipment unless otherwise
discharged expressly in writing by the BHEL or the customer.
15.0 BIDDER to furnish 4 sets of techno-commercial bid including following documents/information (For
Electrical and C&I please refer the respective section of the specification).
x Deviation if any in the enclosed Schedule of deviation with cost of withdrawal only with mention of
specification clause for which deviation is being asked. (Stamped & Signed).
x Equipment layout. (Stamped & Signed).
x Compliance certificate.(Stamped & Signed)
x Schedule of Declaration. (Stamped & Signed)
x Electrical Load data in BHEL format (Stamped & Signed)
x Price Schedule duly filled in. (Stamped & Signed).
x List of Start-up & commissioning spares. (Stamped & Signed).
x List of Recommended spares. (Stamped & Signed).
Any other documents submitted by bidder except as asked in the bids specification shall not be evaluated
& considered as null & void.
16.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENT
1. Wherever pipe racks are not available, pipes shall run on pedestals or below ground. All fixing items such as
U clamps, nuts, bolts etc. required to lay the pipes on pedestals shall be in bidders scope of work. Coating,

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

wrapping and protection required for buries pipes shall be in bidders scope of work.
2. Wherever pipes are running on pipe rack ,Bidder will consider 15 m static head + 10% margin ,in addition to
the losses in straight length and bend in pipes and valves etc. while selection of pump head during detailed
engineering.
3. All the first fill and one Year's topping requirements or 10 % of first fill quantity, whichever is more of
consumable such as greases, oil, lubricants, servo fluids/control fluids, gases and etc. which will be required
to put the equipment covered under the scope of specifications, into successful commissioning / initial
operation and to establish completion of facilities shall be furnished by the bidder. Suitable standard lubricants
as available in India are desired. Efforts should be made to limit the variety of lubricants to minimum.
4. Document approval by customer under Approval category or information category shall not absolve the
vendor of their contractual obligations of completing the work as per specification requirement. Any deviation
from specified requirement shall be reported by the vendor in writing and require written approval. Unless any
change in specified requirement has been brought out by the vendor during detail engineering in writing while
submitting the document to customer for approval, approved document (with implicit deviation) will not be
cited as a reason for not following the specification requirement.
5. In case vendor submits revised drawing after approval of the corresponding drawing, any delay in approval of
revised drawing shall be to vendors account and shall not be used as a reason for extension in contract
completion.
6. Bidders shall make Site visit in order to familiarize themselves with existing condition of site before submitting the
bid in order to make their offer complete. During detail engineering also, the successful bidder shall be responsible
for the correctness of details w.r.t. existing facility at site. Customer approval on any drawing having details of
existing facility shall not be cited by the successful bidder a valid reason for any shortcoming in the work by them.
BHEL shall also not entertain any cost implication for any lack of input data with regard to site during detail
engineering.
7. The Potable water chlorination plant shall be housed in the DM plant building. The space requirement for the same
is 2.0 meters X 2.5 Meters X 4.0 meters (clear height). The control of the Potable water chlorination plant shall be
done from DM plant PLC. The minim number of I/Os required for the Potable water chlorination plant is 50 numbers.
Bidder to consider this in the DM plant and design the DM plant accordingly.
8. Final Electrical Load list will be submitted by the successful bidder as per agreed drawing/ doc submission
schedule. Thereafter any change in the electrical load list shall be entertained only subject to its feasibility, and
BHEL reserves the right to debit the vendor cost of any changes necessitated in the switch gear /MCC on account of
changed loads.
9. Wherever CIVIL works is excluded from the bidders scope, successful bidder shall furnish civil assignment / scope
drawings. The corresponding CIVIL drawing prepared by BHEL / CIVIL agency, based on civil assignment drawing
of bidder will be furnished to the successful bidder for concurrence. In case any modification is required in the civil
work already carried out based on final civil inputs given by vendor, BHEL reserves the right to debit cost of such
rework to vendor.
10. The complete system shall be proven and necessary design documentation in support of proveness shall be
submitted by the successful bidder in support of the systems, if asked by the customer without any price and
delivery implication to BHEL and customer.
11. System to be designed to meet all the statutory requirements. Preparation of all necessary drawings/data/
documents for obtaining necessary Approval of statutory authorities like CCOE , IBR , Weight & Measures
Department and any other agency/ competent authority ,on behalf of the customer, related to installation of
DM plant (if required) is included in bidders scope. All expenses required to obtain the approval shall also be
borne by the successful bidder. Successful bidder shall inform customer well in advance requirement of
authority letter along with format for the same. After issuance of authority letter by customer, it will be
vendors responsibility to regularly follow up with the concerned authorities to obtain timely approval from
these authorities. Any delay on account of the same, unless any specific information related to above approval
to be furnished by customer is delayed by customer, shall be to vendors account and shall not be used as a
reason for extension in contract completion.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

12. Vendor to attend regular engineering meeting with BHEL and customer fortnightly in BHEL or customer office
as decided during detail engineering. Vendor will depute all his concerned engineering representative along
with the project manager for discussion and approval. Meeting can be held at site also.
13. Space available for D.M. plant (Vide ref. Dwg. No. PE-DG-410-163-A002) are attached in Section-C1 of this
specification. Bidder to accommodate their equipment within the space provided.
14. Bidder to submit BBU during detailed engineering after approval of Basic documents. BBU shall be equal to BOQ for
the package and there shall be no price and delivery implication is applicable to BHEL / CUSTOMER for the same.
None of the items supplied for the project as non-billable. Incomplete BBU shall not be review by BHEL.
15. Preparation of drawings / document / P&IDs in 3D modelling software and providing soft copy of same to
BHEL.
16. Training of plant Owners personnel, O&M operators personnel on plant operation and maintenance.
17. Relevant requirements as per GTR, GCC, ECC & SCC.
18. Any statutory requirement / clearance required for the packages from government / local body shall be in bidders
scope.
19. Service water shall be available near DM plant/ system building/ area at approximately 1.5 to 2.0 Kg/ Cm2.
Hence, bidder to take care for cooling/ lubrication of the pumps being supplied by the bidder under this
technical specification. If service water pressure requirement is more than available pressure, bidder to
consider two (2) nos. cooling pump for package.
20. In case of any conflict and repetition of clauses in the specification, the more stringent requirements among
them are to be complied with.
21. Latest version of all codes and standards to be followed.
22. All the vertical pumps shall be considered as self-lubricating type unless specifically mentioned.
23. The depth of the water pits shall be considered as 3.0 meters (minimum ) unless specifically mentioned.
24. Air distribution line to all final control elements like control valves, pneumatic dampers (both regulating /
on-off type), SOV operated valves shall be through SS manifolds and SS isolating valves only. These
valves shall be properly tagged also with KKS tag no. and description of final control element / instrument
for which they are intended.
25. SITE VISIT BEFORE SUBMISSION OF OFFER.
Bidders shall make Site visit in order to familiarize themselves with existing condition of site before
submitting the bid in order to make their offer complete. During detail engineering also, the successful bidder
shall be responsible for the correctness of details w.r.t existing facility at site. Customer approval on any
drawing having details of existing facility shall not be cited by the successful bidder a valid reason for any
shortcoming in the work by them. BHEL shall also not entertain any cost implication for any lack of input data
with regard to site during detail engineering.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE I
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR VOLUME II-B
DM PLANT SECTION C1
1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM TPS REV. NO. 00 DATE:

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
Note:1) The above mentioned requirement are bare minimum. However any additional comments provided by BHEL / Customer shall be adhered by successful bidder without any commercial and delivery implication to BHEL/Customer.

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE-II
INDICATIVE SUB-VENDOR LIST

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
S NO. ITEM SUPPLIERS PLACE

1. ATMOSPHERIC TANK FABTECH PUNE
(CS/SS) TECHNOFAB NEW DELHI
JASMINOT POLYMERTECH PUNE
PRESSURE VESSELS INDUSTRY PUNE
SPARKON ENGINEERING
BELCO POLLUTION CONTROL PVT LTD GREATER NOIDA
2. PRESSURE VESSEL FABTECH PUNE

TECHNOFAB NEW DELHI
R&C MUMBAI
ISGEC YAMUNANAGAR
ANUP ENGG. AHMEDABAD
3. TANK /PIPING FABTECH PUNE

FABRICATION TECHNOFAB NEW DELHI
BELCO POLLUTION CONTROL PVT LTD GREATER NOIDA
AQUATHERM KOLKATA
4. TANK (FRP) INDUSTRIAL SERVICE KOLKATA

SUNRISE BARODA
GANDHI & ASSOCIATES AHMEDABAD
MODERN EQUIPMENTS CHENNAI
EAGLE PLAST PUNE
OMEGA PLAST MUMBAI
5. METERING PUMPS/PRV MILTON ROY INDIA CHENNAI

VK PUMP NASIK
METACHEM MUMBAI
SWELORE AHMEDABAD
6. STROKE CONTROLLER V K PUMPS NASIK

METACHEM MUMBAI
SWELORE AHMEDABAD
MILTON ROY INDIA CHENNAI
7. SAFETY METACHEM MUMBAI

VALVES/RELIEF KEYSTONE BARODA
VALVES V K PUMPS NASIK
MILTON ROY CHENNAI
8. AGITATOR/STIRRER REMI MUMBAI

FIBRE & FIBRE PRODUTS
STANDARD ENGINEERS MUMBAI
CROMPTON GREAVES AHAMADNAGAR
9. STRAINER OTOKLIN MUMBAI

GRAND PRIX NEW DELHI
JAYPEE NEW DELHI

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
GREAVES COTTON MUMBAI

FILTRATION ENGINEERING MUMBAI
FLUID LINE VALVES MUMBAI
10. EJECTOR ESSEMM TECHNOLOGIES MUMBAI
11. HORIZONTAL BEST AND CROMPTON ENGG LTD. CHENNAI

CENTRIFUGAL PUMP BHARAT PUMPS & COMPRESSORS LTD ALLAHABAD
FLOWMORE LTD. GURGAON
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROLS PVT. COIMBATORE
LTD.
JYOTI LTD. VADODARA
KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD PUNE
WILO MATHER & PLATT PUMPS PVT. MUMBAI
LTD.
WPIL LIMITED KOLKATA
12. VERTICAL BHARAT PUMPS & COMPRESSORS LTD ALLAHABAD

CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS FLOWMORE LTD. GURGAON
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROLS PVT. COIMBATORE
LTD.
JYOTI LTD. VADODARA
WILO MATHER & PLATT PUMPS PVT. MUMBAI
LTD.
SULZER PUMPS INDIA LTD. THANE
WPIL LIMITED KOLKATTA
13. ORIFICE PLATE MICRO PRECISION FARIDABAD

INSTRUMENTAION LTD PALGHAT
CARLO DYNAMICS HYDRABAD
14. BUTTERFLY VALVES ADVANCE VALVES PVT. LTD. NOIDA

FLUIDLINE VALVES COMPANY PVT.LTD. GHAZIABAD
INSTRUMENTATION LTD. PALAKKAD-KERALA
INTERVALVE (INDIA) LTD. PUNE
R AND D MULTIPLES (METAL CAST) PVT MUMBAI
LTD
SURYA VALVES AND INSTRUMENTS MFG CHENNAI
CO.
PENTAIR VALVES AND CONTROLS INDIA NAVI MUMBAI
PRIVATE LIMITED
UPADHAYA VALVES MANUFACTURERS KOLKATA
PRIVATE LIMITED,
VENUS PUMPS AND ENGG. WORKS KOLKATA
WEIR BDK VALVES- A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA NEW DELHI
PVT. LTD.
15. CAST IRON A.V. VALVES LTD AGRA

GATE/GLV/NRV/SRV ATAM VALVES PVT. LTD. JALANDHAR
G.M. DALUI AND SONS PVT.LTD. HOWRAH
H.SARKER AND COMPANY HOWRAH

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
LEADER VALVES LTD. JALANDHAR

16. CONTROL VALVE SPX CORPORATION, USA USA

CONTROL COMPONENT INC. USA
DRESSER VALVE INDIA PVT. LTD COIMBATORE
DAUME REGELARMATUREN GMBH, GERMANY
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT CHENNAI
CHENNAI LIMITED
FORBES MARSHALL ARCA PVT.LTD. PUNE
WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS UK LTD. UK
HOLTER REGELARMATUREN GMBH & CO.KG GERMANY
KOSO INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED, NASHIK
LESLIE CONTROLS, INC USA
MIL CONTROLS LTD. KERALA
METSO SINGAPORE PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE
PARCOL S.P.A ITALY
R.K.CONTROL INSTRUMENTS PVT. LTD. THANE
RINGO VALVULAS S.L, SPAIN
SEVERN GLOCON INDIA PVT. LTD. CHENNAI
SHENJIANG VALVE CO. LTD. CHINA
VALVITALIA S.P.A. , ITALY
WALDEMAR PRUSS ARMATURENFABRIK GERMANY
GMBH
17. DUAL PLATE CHECK ADVANCE VALVES PVT. LTD. NOIDA

VALVES ASIAN INDUSTRIAL VALVES & CHENAI
INSTRUMENTS.
R AND D MULTIPLES (METAL CAST) PVT MUMBAI
LTD
18. STEEL A.V. VALVES LTD AGRA

GATE/GLOBE/NR ATAM VALVES PVT. LTD. JALANDHAR
VALVES FLUIDLINE VALVES COMPANY PVT.LTD. GHAZIABAD
M/S GM ENGINEERING RAJKOT
INTERVALVE (INDIA) LTD. PUNE
LEADER VALVES LTD. JALANDHAR
NITON VALVE INDUSTRIES PVT LTD MUMBAI
NSSL LIMITED. NAGPUR
STEEL STRONG VALVES (I) PVT.LTD. NAVI MUMBAI
VALTECH INDUSTRIES MUMBAI
V.K. VALVES PVT. LTD., JALANDHAR
WEIR BDK VALVES- A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA NEW DELHI
PVT. LTD.
19. ELECTRIC HOIST ARMSEL MHE PVT. LTD BANGALORE

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ALPHA SERVICES NEW DELHI

CONSOLIDATED HOISTS PVT LTD PUNE
CENTURY CRANE ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. FARIDABAD
EDDY CRANES PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
GRIP ENGINEERS PVT. LTD., FARIDABAD
GLOBAL TECHNOLOGIES HYDERABAD
HERCULES HOISTS LTD. RAIGAD
LIFTING EQUIPMENTS AND ACCESSORIES NEW DELHI
MANGLA HOISTS PVT LTD NEW DELHI
REVA INDUSTRIES LTD. FARIDABAD
ROCKWELL HOISTO CRANES PVT. LTD. JHAJJAR-HARYANA
SAFEX ENERGY PVT. LTD. AHMEDABAD
TUOBRO FURGUSON (INDIA) PVT LTD KOLKATA-
20. DC LEAD ACID / NI-CD AMCO SAFT INDIA LTD BANGLORE

BATTERIES EXIDE INDUSTRIES LTD NEW DELHI
HBL POWER SYSTEMS LTD HYDERABAD
HOPPECKE BATTERIEN GMBH & CO.KG, GERMANY
21. FLOW ELEMENT - HYDROPNEUMATICS PVT. LTD. GOA

NOZZLE INSTRUMENTATION LTD. PALAKKAD-KERALA
MICRO PRECISION PRODUCTS PVT. LTD. FARIDABAD
MINCO (INDIA) FLOW ELEMENTS PVT. LTD. GOA
STAR-MECH CONTROLS (I) PVT.LTD. PUNE
SEIKO FLOW CONTROL GMBH AUSTRIA
22. FLOW ELEMENT - FLOW STAR ENGINEERING PVT. LTD., FARIDABAD

ORIFICE HYDROPNEUMATICS PVT. LTD. GOA
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERS PVT LTD HYDERABAD
MICRO PRECISION PRODUCTS PVT. LTD. FARIDABAD
MINCO (INDIA) PRIVATE LIMITED GOA
STAR-MECH CONTROLS (I) PVT.LTD. PUNE
23. INSTRUMENT FITTINGS AURA INCORPORATED NEW DELHI

ASTEC VALVES & FITTINGS PVT. LTD., MUMBAI
ARYA CRAFTS & ENGINEERING PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
COMFIT & VALVE PVT. LTD. AHMEDABAD
FLUIDFIT ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
FLUID CONTROLS PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
HP VALVES & FITTINGS INDIA PVT. LTD. CHENNAI
PRECISION ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES MUMBAI
PANAM ENGINEERS, MUMBAI
PERFECT INSTRUMENTATION CONTROL MUMBAI
(INDIA) PVT. LTD.
VIKAS INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS NOIDA
24. JUNCTION BOX AJMERA INDUSTRIAL & ENGINEERING MUMBAI

WORKS
FLEXPRO ELECTRICALS PVT. LTD. GUJARAT

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
K.S.INSTRUMENTS PVT.LTD. BANGLORE

SUCHITRA INDUSTRIES BANGLORE
SHRENIK & COMPANY, GUJARAT
25. LEVEL SWITCH- BLISS ANAND PVT. LTD. GURGAON

CONDUTIVITY TYPE FLOWTECH INSTRUMENTS SERVICRS VADODRA
HI-TECH SYSTEMS & SERVICES LTD. KOLKATA
LEVCON INSTRUMENTS PVT. LTD. KOLKATA
RAMAN INSTRUMENTS PVT.LTD. MUMBAI
SIGMA INSTRUMENTS CO. MUMBAI
SOR INC. USA
SAPCON INSTRUMENT PVT LTD. INDORE
V. AUTOMAT & INTRUMENTS (P) LTD. NEW DELHI
26. PRESSURE GAUGE/ A.N. INSTRUMENTS PVT. LTD. KOLKATA

DIFF.PRESSURE ASHCROFT INDIA PVT LTD. GUJARAT
GAUGE BOSE PANDA INSTRUMENTS PVT.LTD. KOLKATA
FORBES MARSHALL (HYD) LTD. HYDERABAD
GAUGE BOURDON INDIA PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
H.GURU INDUSTRIES KOLKATA
H.GURU INSTRUMENTS (SOUTH INDIA) P. BANGALORE
LTD
BAUMER TECHNOLOGIES INDIA PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
27. PROGRAMMABLE GE INTELLIGENT PLATFORMS PRIVATE BANGALORE

LOGIC CONTROLLER LIMITED
HONEYWELL AUTOMATION INDIA LIMITED PUNE
,
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INDIA LTD GHAZIABAD
SIEMENS LIMITED MUMBAI
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC INDIA PVT.LTD. NEW DELHI
28. ROTAMETER EUREKA INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PUNE

PVT.LTD.
FLOW STAR ENGINEERING PVT. LTD., FARIDABAD
FLOWTECH INSTRUMENTS SERVICRS GUJARAT
SCIENTIFIC DEVICES (BOMBAY) PVT LTD, NAVI MUMBAI
29. SIGHT FLOW B.K.EQUIPMENTS PVT.LTD. CHENNAI

INDICATORS BLISS ANAND PVT. LTD. GURGAON
FLOWTECH INSTRUMENTS SERVICRS GUJARAT
SIGMA INSTRUMENTS CO. MUMBAI
SCIENTIFIC DEVICES (BOMBAY) PVT LTD, NAVI MUMBAI
TELACE EQUIPMENT PVT.LTD. CHENNAI
30. TEMPERATURE GOA INSTRUMENTS INDUSTRIES PVT.LTD., GOA

ELEMENT DETRIVE INSTRUMENTATION & MUMBAI
ELECTRONICS LTD.
PYRO ELECTRIC INSTRUMENTS GOA GOA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PVT.LTD.
TECHNO INSTRUMENTS GUJARAT
TEMPSENS INSTRUMENT (I) PVT LTD UDAIPUR
TM TECNOMATIC SPA ITALY
TOSHNIWAL INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., AJMER
THERMAL INSTRUMENT INDIA PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
31. TEMPERATURE A.N. INSTRUMENTS PVT. LTD. KOLKATA

GAUGE ASHCROFT INDIA PVT LTD. GUJARAT
BUDENBERG GUAGE CO.LTD. UK
FORBES MARSHALL (HYD) LTD. HYDERABAD
GOA INSTRUMENTS INDUSTRIES PVT.LTD., GOA
GOA THERMOSTATIC INSTRUMENTS GOA
PVT.LTD.
GAUGE BOURDON INDIA PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
H.GURU INDUSTRIES KOLKATA
H.GURU INSTRUMENTS (SOUTH INDIA) P. BANGLORE
LTD
32. TRANSMITTERS ABB LIMITED FARIDABAD

ENDRESS + HAUSER (INDIA) PVT. LTD., NEW DELHI
MOORE INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL INC. USA
NIVO CONTROLS PVT. LTD. INDORE
PUNE TECHTROL PVT. LTD. PUNE
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT (INDIA) MUMBAI
PVT.LTD.
SIEMENS LIMITED MUMBAI
SMART INSTRUMENTS LTD, BRAZIL MUMBAI
SBEM PVT. LTD. PUNE
HONEYWELL AUTOMATION INDIA LIMITED NEW DELHI
TOSHNIWAL INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., AJMER
V. AUTOMAT & INTRUMENTS (P) LTD. NEW DELHI
YOKOGAWA INDIA LIMITED, BANGLORE
33. BALL VALVE BDK HUBLI

LEADER JALANDHAR
BANKIM KOLKATA
H SARKAR KOLKATA
AV VALVES AGRA
HAWA VALVES MUMBAI
FLOW CHEM AHMEDABAD
STEEL STRON VALVES MUMBAI
AKAY VALVES LTD. MUMBAI
AQUA VALVES PVT.LTD. KARNATAKA
CRESCENT VALVES MUMBAI
FISHER SANMAR LIMITED CHENNAI
HABONIM VAAS AUTOMATION PVT CHENNAI
LTD.,CHENNAI
KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD. PUNE

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
KSB PUMPS LTD. MUMBAI

MICROFINISH VALVES PVT LTD. HUBLI
MICON VALVES (INDIA) PVT.LTD MUMBAI
PEC VALVES MUMBAI
34. SLUICE GATE H SARKAR KOLKATA

JASH ENGINEERING INDORE
YASHWANT MIRAJ
35. DIAPHRAGM VALVE PROCON ENGINEERES MUMBAI

HAWA VALVES MUMBAI
BDK VALVES HUBLI
FOURESS BANALORE
INERVALVE GUJRAT
36. 3 WAY VALVE HI TECH AHMEDABAD

ADVANCE VALVES PVT.LTD NOIDA
BDK HUBLI
FOURESS ENGG.INDIA LTD. MUMBAI
FLUIDLINEVALVES COMPANY PRIVATE MUMBAI
LTD.,
INSTRUMENTATION LTD. PALAKAD
KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD. PUNE
VENUS PUMP & ENGG. WORKS KOLKATA
SURYA VALVES AND INSTRUMENTS CHENNAI
MANUFACTURING COMPANY
STAFFORD CONTROLS LIMITED PUNE
37. PLUG VALVE FISHER SANMAR LIMITED CHENNAI

BDK HUBLI
LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD. MUMBAI
LEADER JALANDHAR
38. PIPING (SS/CS) CHOKSHI TUBES AHMEDABAD

REMI MUMBAI
RATNAMANI AHMEDABAD
JINDAL STAINLESS BAHADURGARH
TISCO JAMSEDPUR
SAIL
39. FITTINGS (CS/SS) BHARAT FORGE PUNE

RELIANCE FORGE
MS FITTINGS KOLKATA
40. FLANGES (SS/CS) BHARAT FORGE PUNE

RELIANCE FORGE
MS FITTINGS KOLKATA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
41. PIPE (CPVC) GEROGE FISHCHER IPING SYSTEMS DELHI

PVT LTD
ASTROL PLYTECHINC LTD AHMEDABAD
42. VALVES GEROGE FISHCHER IPING SYSTEMS DELHI

(GATE/GLOBE/NRV/BA PVT LTD
LL)-CPVC ASTROL PLYTECHINC LTD AHMEDABAD
43. RUBBER LINING FOR RISHI INDUTRIES SONEPET

PIPES/TANKS INDUSTRIAL LINING LTD BARODA
MIL CHENNAI
44. FILTER MEDIA GLOBAL ABSORBENT KOLKATA

BHARAT MINERALS
45. LT MOTORS CROMPTON GREAVES AHMEDNAGAR

LAXMI HYDRAULICS PVT. LTD BANGALORE / HUBLI*
RAJINDRA ELECT INDUSTRIES FARIDABAD* /
BANGALORE
GE-POWER
BHARAT BIJLEE MUMBAI
SIEMENS
NGEF
KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC CO LTD.
ASEA BROWN BOVERI
MARATHON KOLKATA
46. FUSES INDO ASIAN
47. PUSH BUTTONS BCH

CONTROL & SWITCHGEAR.
CANDS
L&T
SIEMENS
GEC
48. MCB MDS SWITCHGEAR LTD.

INDO ASIAN
S&S
POWER SWITCHGEAR LTD
49. LEVEL GAUGE LEVCON KOLKATA

SBEM PUNE
SIGMA MUMBAI
V. AUTOMAT DELHI
PUNE TECHTROL PUNE
CHEMTROLS GOA
DK INSTRUMENTS KOLKATA
SCIENTIFIC DEVICES MUMBAI
50. LEVEL TRANSMITTER E&H GERMANY

(CAPACITANCE TYPE LEVCON KOLKATA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PUNE TECHTROL PUNE

MAGNETROL BELGIUM
NIVO CONTROL INDORE
WIKA PUNE
51. LEVEL TRANSMITTER K TECH USA

(GUIDED WAVE E&H GERMANY
RADAR) EMERSON (SAB ROSEMOUNT) SWEDEN
MAGNETROL BELGIUM
EMERSON DAMAN
CHEMTROL GOA
52. LEVEL TRANSMITTER SIEMENS MILLTRONICS CANADA

(ULTRASONIC TYPE E&H AURANGABAD
KRISTLER MORSE USA
EMERSON USA / PAWANE
53. PRESSURE / DP / TEMP GAUGES BOURDON (I) MUMBAI

SWITCH INDFOS GHAZIABAD
SWITZER CHENNAI
TREFAG RANIPET
54. SILICA ANALYSER POLYTRON / HACH ULTRA FRANCE

ABB UK
HACH USA
55. SODIUM ANALYSER POLYTRON / HACH ULTRA FRANCE

ABB UK
ORION USA
SWAN USA / EUROPE
56. ANALYSERS HACH (POLYMETRON) SWITZERLAND

(PH/CONDUCTIVITY) ABB UK / USA
EMERSON USA / PAWANE
57. DENSITY INDICATOR EUREKA PUNE

SCIENTIFIC DEVICES THANE
58. TEMPERATURE INDFOSS GHAZIABAD

SWITCH DRESSER USA
SWITZER CHENNAI
SOR INC USA
TOSHNIWAL BRO NEW DELHI
VASU TECH NEW DELHI
59. FLOW TRANSMITTER EMERSON DAMAN

TOKOGAWA BANLORE
HONEY WELL
ABB FARIDABAD

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
60. TURBIDITY METER HACH

ABB
TOKOGAWA
ROSE MOUNT
61. LOCAL CONTROL INDSUSTRIAL SWITCHGEAR & CONTROL MUMBAI

PANEL POSITRONICS BARODA
ECS NOIDA
SWITCHING CIRCUIT KOLKATA
CONTROL & SCHEMATICS HYDRABAD
GE POWER BANGLORE
SIEMENS KOLKATA
C&S NOIDA
PYROTECH UDAIPUR
DELTA CONTROL MUMBAI
MUMBAI
62. PAINT BERGER
ASIAN PAINTS
SHALIMAR
J&N
63. CABLE M/S DOWELL MUMBAI

LUGS/FERRULES 3D UMBERGAON
CHETNA NASIK
64. PVC CONDUIT BIS LICENSEE/ISI MARKED WITH VALID

CML NUMBER
65. CABLE GLAND M/S SUNIL & CO KOLKATA
M/S ARUP ENGG KOLKATA
M/S COMET MUMBAI

M/S QUALITY PRECISION KOLKATA
M/S STANDARD METAL INDUSTRIES MUMBAI
M/S BRACO MUMBAI
66. SAFETY SHOWER UNICARE MUMBAI
67. EIP CONVERTER OR I/P NORGREN(WATSON SMITH UK

CONVERTOR INSTRUMENTATION)
EMERSON PAWANE
ABB FARIDABAD
68. SOLENOID VALVE ROTEX AUTOMATION BARODA

AVCON MUMBAI
ASCO CHENNAI
69. CABLE TRAYS & ACC. EROS METAL WORKS (P) LTD. NAGPUR
INDUSTRIAL PERFORATION (I) PVT.LTD. KOLKATA
INDIANA GRATINGS PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
INDIA ELECTRICALS SYNDICATE KOLKATA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
JAMNA METAL COMPANY DELHI

MAHESHWARI ELECTRICAL MFRS. PVT. NOIDA
LTD.,
NAMDHARI INDUSTRIAL TRADERS PVT. LUDHIANA
LTD
PREMIER POWER PRODUCTS (CAL) PVT. KOLKATA
LTD.
PATNY SYSTEMS (P) LTD SECUNDRABAD
PARMAR METALS PVT.LTD. RAJKOT
PASSIVE INFRA PROJECTS PVT. LTD. NEW DELHI
PENTAX FERRO INCORPORATE MUMBAI
RUKMANI ELECTRICAL & COMPONENTS KOLKATA
PVT LTD
RATAN PROJECTS & ENGINEERING CO. KOLKATA
PVT.LTD.
RABI ENGINEERING WORKS PVT. LTD. KOLKATA
SARAL INDUSTRIES RAE BARELI
UNITECH FABRICATORS AND ENGINEERS KOLKATA
PVT LTD
VINFAB ENGINEERS INDIA PVT. LTD. MUMBAI
NOTE:
1. THE SUB VENDOR LIST ABOVE IS INDICATIVE ONLY AND IS SUBJECT TO BHEL AND CUSTOMER
APPROVAL DURING DETAILED ENGINEERING STAGE WITHOUT ANY COMMERCIAL & DELIVERY
IMPLICATION TO BHEL.
BIDDER TO PROPOSE SUB VENDOR WITHIN 4 WEEKS OF PLACEMENT OF LOI. THEREAFTER NO

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL SUB-VENDOR SHALL BE ENTERTAINED.
2. DEALERS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR ANY ITEM OF THE PACKAGE. BIDDER SHALL PROCURE
ALL ITEMS INCLUDING PLATES, STRUCTURAL, FLANGES; COUNTER FLANGES ETC. FROM
APPROVED SUB VENDOR ONLY.
3. THE INSPECTION CATEGORY WILL BE INTIMATED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT BY

BHEL/CUSTOMER. HOWEVER THE SAME WILL BE ADHERED BY THE BIDDER WITHOUT ANY
COMMERCIAL AND DELIVERY IMPLICATION TO BHEL/ CUSTOMER.

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE III
FUNCTIONAL GUARANTEES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
4.00.00 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEES WHICH DO NOT ATTRACT LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR VARIOUS
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING [CATEGORY-B]:
4.00.01 DM PLANT
Performance Guarantee parameters for Demineralization System
a) Each pump shall be guaranteed for capacity, total dynamic head and power consumption.
b) All blowers shall be guaranteed for head and power consumption.
c) Activated Carbon Filter
(i) Each Activated Carbon Filter will have a rated continuous treated water output capacity of not less
than 60 m^3/hr (net) over and above the quantity of treated water required for backwash /
regeneration / rinse of itself and other units of the same stream or chain it belongs to. It shall be
backwashed once after every 18 hours of continuous service run.
(ii) Free chlorine content of treated water shall be nil.
d) Ion Exchange Units

(i) Each Ion Exchange Unit will have a rated continuous treated water output capacity of not less than 60
m^3/hr (net) over and above the quantity of treated water required for backwash / regeneration / rinse
of itself and other units of the same stream or chain it belongs to. Except Mixed Bed Units, each Ion
Exchange Unit shall be regenerated once after every 18 hours of continuous service run. Each Mixed
Bed Unit shall be regenerated once after every 126 hours of continuous service run.
(ii) Net output from each of Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger Unit, Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger Unit,
Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger Unit, Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger Unit between two regeneration
shall be not less than 1080 m^3 of treated water and that for each of Mixed Bed Exchanger Unit shall
be not less than 7560 m^3 of treated water for the design water analysis as exhibited elsewhere in
technical specification. In case water analysis is different from the design values, guaranteed quantity
shall be calculated as indicated elsewhere in this Specification and guarantee shall be applicable on
this calculated quantity.
(iii) Chemical consumption of the ion exchange units as indicated by the Bidder shall be guaranteed
against the regeneration level employed and resin volume provided without any tolerance.
The guaranteed values of chemical consumption shall hold good for chemicals conforming to following
specification :
a. Hydrochloric Acid IS-265 (Tech Grade)

b. Sodium Hydroxide IS-252 (Rayon grade available in Flakes)
(iv) The total time for backwash (as applicable) and regeneration of a stream of Demineralization System
Stream (for Activated Carbon Filter - Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger Strongly Acidic Cation
Exchanger - Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger - Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger) except the Mixed Bed
Exchanger shall not exceed 4 hours.
(v) The total time for complete backwash (as applicable) and regeneration of a stream of
Demineralization System Stream and (for Activated Carbon Filter - Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger -
Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger - Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger - Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger
Mixed Bed Exchanger) shall not exceed 6 hours.
(vi) Qualities of treated water from various units are envisaged as follows:
Water Quality at the outlet of MB Exchanger:

x Total Electrolyte 0.1 ppm, max.
x Total SiO2 0.01 ppm SiO2, max.
x Iron as Fe Nil
x Free CARBON DI-OXIDE ppm as Nil
CARBON DI-OXIDE

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
x Total Hardness Nil

x pH value at 250C 6.8 - 7.2
x Conductivity, micro mho/cm < 0.1 at 25 0C
Water Quality at the outlet of Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger:

x SiO2 <0.1 ppm as SiO2
x Conductivity, micro mho/cm < 5.0 at 25 0C
Water Quality at the outlet of Degasser Tower:

x CARBON DI-OXIDE content < 5 ppm as Carbon Di-Oxide.
Water Quality at the outlet of Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger:

x Sodium <1.0 ppm as CaCO3
x Hardness Not Detectable

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE IV
DRAWING DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
Note:
x Quantity of prints may change during detailed engineering stage based on BHEL / Customer requirement.
However the same will be adhered by the bidder without any delivery/commercial implication to BHEL.

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
x All the drawing documents along with the O&M manual (of all the revisions) are necessarily to be submitted in
soft copies in addition to hard copies.
x Bidder to submit soft copies of all the drawing and document along with quality plans for BHEL review and
approval.
x The date of submission of drawing documents shall be considered as the date of submission of hard and soft
copes whichever is later.
x All the drawings shall be prepared on computer auto cad and other documents (like datasheet etc.) on MS office
software. Bidder not complying to the requirement shall not be considered. For the execution of the contract
regular meeting (generally once in 15 days or as per project requirement) is required.
x Bidder has to come for meeting with the concerned dealing persons as per BHEL or customer requirement in a
short notice.
x Bidder to submit instrument schedule, cable schedule and valve schedule in MS- Excel format during detailed
engineering.
x Bidder to also furnish the auto cad copy / MS-word (as applicable)/MS-Excel (as applicable) of the following
documents after award of contract. However any other auto cad copy/MS-Excel/MS-word of any other
document as per the insistence of BHEL / customer will also be submitted by the bidder without any
delivery/commercial implication to BHEL.
P&IDs.
Equipment lay out.
Equipment Cable tray layout.
Civil scope drawings.
Piping lay out drawing.
Valve schedule.
Instrument schedule.

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE-V
PAINTING SPECIFICATION

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXURE-VI
MANDATORY SPARES LIST

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
LIST OF MANDATORY SPARES (AS APPLICABLE)
Remarks
Sl. No. Equipment/Package Name Quantity
1.0 Spares for Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
1.1 Shaft 1 No.
1.2 Shaft Sleeve 2 Nos.
1.3 Impeller 1 No.
1.4 Impeller locking nut and bolt 4 Nos.
1.5 Impeller wear ring 4 Nos.
1.6 Casing wear ring 4 Nos.
1.7 Oil Seal 4 Nos.
1.8 Oil Deflector 3 Nos.
1.9 Oil Ring 3 Nos.
1.1 Gland Packing 4
1.11 Lantern Ring 3 Nos.
1.12 Mech Seal Assembly 1 No.
Stationary/CarbonPackingandO"RingforM
1.13 echanical Seal" 3 Sets
1.14 Oil Level Gauge 3 Nos.
1.15 Coupling 2 Nos.
1.16 Rubber Bush for Coupling 2 Nos.
1.17 O" Rings " 2 Sets
1.18 Suction Strainers Element 3 Nos.
1.19 Bearing for Pump Motor 2 Sets
2.0 Spares for Vertical Type Centrifugal Pumps (at Neutralising Pit)
2.1 Complete Bowl assembly 1 Set
2.2 Impeller (s) 1 Set
2.3 Shafts 1 Set
2.4 Casing wearing (s) 1 Set
2.5 Impeller wear ring (s) 1 Set
2.6 Shaft Sleeves 2 Sets
2.7 Shaft Couplings 1 Set
2.8 Shaft nuts & keys 1 Set
2.9 Lantern rings 1 Set
2.10 Bell mouth liner 1 Set
2.11 Bearings 1 Set
2.12 Pump motor coupling 1 Set
3.0 Spares for Agitators
3.1 Gear Box Unit Complete 1 No.
3.2 Bearing for Gear Box Unit 1 Set
3.3 Coupling complete(Motor/Gearbox and 1 Set
gearbox/agitator)
3.4 Coupling Bolts 1 Set
3.5 Coupling shim pack (if applicable) 4 Sets
3.6 Oil seals 4 Sets
4.0 Spares for Valves
4.1 i) Manual Diaphragm valves 10% of total quantity used for each type
and size with minimum no. two(2) for each
type and size.
ii) Auto Diaphragm valves 10% of total quantity used for each type
type and size.
iii) Spare Diaphragm for above 10% of total quantity used for each type

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

type and size.
iv) Diaphragm 10% of total quantity used for each type

type and size.
4.2 i) Non return valves (NRV) 2 nos. of each size & type
ii) Flaps for above NRV 2 nos. of each size
4.3 Gate/Globe/Ball valves/plug valve/needle valve
i) Upto 4 10% of total quantity used for each type
type and size.
ii) Above 4 1 no. each type and size.

4.4 Butter fly valve
i) Upto 4 10% of total quantity used for each type
type and size.
ii) Above 4 1 no. each type and size

5.0 Spares for Filter Media/ ION Exchange Resins
5.1 Media for Dual Media Pressure Filters 10% of total quantity
5.2 Media for Activated Carbon Filters 10% of total quantity
5.3 Resins for each type of exchangers 10% of total quantity
5.4 Packings for Degasser Towers 10% of total quantity
5.5 Ejectors Two(2)nos.ofeachtypeincludingchlorinatio
n application.
6.0 Spares for Air Blowers
6.1 Impeller with shaft 1 Set
6.2 Bearings 1 Set
6.3 Oil seals 5 Sets
6.4 Filter 1 Set
7.0 Pneumatic Control Valve
7.1 Pneumatic Diaphragm for Diaphragm 2 Nos. for each type of Actuator
actuated valve
7.2 Gland Packing 1 set for each type of Control Valve
7.3 Plug, Seat, Cage, Stem etc. 1 set for each type of Control Valve
7.4 Retainer Ring, Seal Ring etc. 1 set for each type of Control Valve
7.5 Gasket 2 Sets. for each type of Control Valve
7.6 Position Transmitter complete set 10% of total quantity used in the system
for each type and model.
7.7 Control Valve E/P Positioner complete Set 10% of total quantity used in the system
for each type and model.
7.8 Complete Set of Solenoid Valve for 2 Nos. for each type & ratings
Pneumatic type On/Off Valve
7.9 Solenoid Coil for Pneumatic type On/Off 5 Nos. for each type & ratings
Valve
7.10 Position Limit Switch for Pneumatic type 10 Nos. for each type & ratings
On/Off Valve
8.0 Electrical Items

8.1 415 Volt Motor (above 30KW Rating upto 200KW)
8.1.1 End Shield Cover Driving & Non-Driving 1Set for each type and rating of Motor
End
8.1.2 Driving End & Non-Driving End Bearing 1Set for each type and rating of Motor

DM PLANT SECTION C1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
8.1.3 Cooling Fan 1No. for each type and rating of Motor
8.1.4 Motor Space Heater 1No. for each type and rating of Motor
8.1.5 Motor Terminal Block 1No. for each type and rating of Motor
8.1.6 Complete Set of Coupling 1Set for each Application
8.2 415 Volt Motor (Upto 30KW Rating)
8.2.1 Driving End & Non-Driving End Bearing 3Set for each type and rating of Motor
8.2.2 Cooling Fan 2No. for each type and rating of Motor
8.2.3 Motor Terminal Block 5No. for each type and rating of Motor
8.2.4 Complete Set of Coupling 1Set for each Application
9.0 C&I Items
9.1 PLC/ Proprietary Control System

9.1.1 Network cards, Communication Interface 5% for each type or but minimum 1 no.
cards
9.1.2 I/O Cards (Each type) 5% for each type but minimum 1 nos.
9.1.3 Controller Cards 2 nos.
9.1.4 SER Cards 5% for each type or but minimum 1 no.
9.1.5 All other Electronic Modules 5% for each type but minimum 1 no.
9.1.6 Relays 10% of total quantity
9.1.7 Power Supply Modules & Power Packs for 5% for each type and range but minimum
control system 1 no.
9.1.8 Network Items (Network switch/ LIU unit/ 10% for each type or but minimum 1 no.
Transceiver/ FO patch cord etc.)
9.1.9 MCB (Miniature case circuit breaker) 10% for each type or but minimum 1 no.
9.1.10 Fuses 200% each type and rating
9.1.11 Racks for housing I/O & Processor 1(One) no. each type used in the system
Modules
9.1.12 Prefab interconnecting cables with 10% of total nos. used in the system or
connectors minimum 4(four) nos. whichever is more
for each type.
9.1.13 Network communication cable with end 10% but minimum 1
connectors
9.1.14 I/O bus cables with connectors for remote 1 no. of each type & length
I/O units
9.1.15 Fibre optic cable Converter / Deconverter 1 no.
9.1.16 Cooling Fans 10% but minimum 1
9.1.17 Loose Connectors 5 nos. of each type
9.1.18 Colour TFT Monitor 1 no. complete set
9.1.19 Hard Disk Drive for the work Station 1 no. complete set
9.1.20 Key board , mouse / trackball with 1 no. each type.
connecting cables and plugs
9.1.21 Printers Cartridges 2 nos. of each type
9.1.22 SMPS for printers 1 no. of each type/ rating
9.1.23 SVGA cards for printers 1 no. of each type
9.1.24 Key Board & Cursor control device 1 no. of each type
9.1.25 Complete Set of Operators Work Station 1no. complete set
9.1.26 Terminal Block 10% of total nos. used in the system for
each type and rating.
9.1.27 Read-Write CD/DVD 10% but minimum 1
9.1.28 Blank CD/DVD 50 (fifty) nos.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

DATA SHEET-A FOR DM PLANT
1.00.00 DM FEED PUMPS

A) Number Three (3) (2Working +1Standby)
B) Description for each Pump
(i) Location Clarified water pump sump. Depth of clear water sump is 4.5
meters.
(ii) Fluid to be handled Clarified Water
(iii) Service To transfer clarified Water to Dual media pressure filters.
(iv) Duty Continuous and to be suitable for parallel operation.
(v) Type of Pump Vertical Centrifugal Non clog type
(vi) Type of Impeller Open/ semi open
(vii) Location Outdoor
(viii) Design temperature, in degree Celsius 60
(ix) Design Standard As per technical specification
(x) Rated Capacity, in m3/hr of each Not less than 85 m3/hr
pump
(xi) Suction condition Flooded
(xii) Minimum Head to be developed at To be specified by the Bidder considering 10% margin to meet
rated capacity MLC the requirements of the system as per Bid Specification. (C
should be considered as 120 to calculate frictional loss in pipe
as per Hagen Williams Equation).
(xiii) Shut Off Head To be suitable for stable operation at rated duty point.
(xiv) Range of operation 20 % - 120 %.
(xv) Pump speed 1500 RPM (maximum)
(xvi) Material of construction
x Casing Ni hard C.I. as per ASTM 532.
x Shaft EN-8 as per BS-970.
x Impeller Ni hard C.I. as per ASTM 532.
x Common Base plate Fabricated Steel as per IS 2062.
x Nuts and bolts SS-316 (under wetted condition) and MS Cadmium plated (in
other places)
(xvii) Type of drive Electrical Motor
(xviii) Criteria for selection of drive Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
taken and standard motor with next higher KW as available
shall be selected. This shall in no way be less than the
maximum power required by the Pump.
(xix) Rated speed (RPM) 1500 (Sync.) maximum.
(xx) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase,50 HZ (+3 to 5%).
Variation)
(xxi) Type of coupling between Pump & Flexible Spacer.
Motor
(xxii) Noise level (for complete set of Pump Not more than 85 db (At a distance of 1.0 m from the outer
& Motor) surface of Motor).
(xxiii) Painting for complete set of Pump &
Motor
x Primer As per the requirements of Painting Specification.
x Finish paint As per the requirements of Painting Specification.
x Shade As approved by BHEL.
(xxiv) Tests and Inspection

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xxv) Material Test required for Casing, Impeller, Shaft and Shaft Sleeve.
a) Hydro-test As per IS-1520 and IS-5120.
b) Dynamic Balancing Test Shall be provided by the Bidder
c) Performance Test Required
(xxvi) Instruments along with alarms, Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
interlocks and accessories line with Bid Specification and Drawings, enclosed with it.
(xxvii) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
local and remote Facility.
(xxviii) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
2.00.00 DUAL MEDIA PRESSURE FILTERS
A) Number Three (3) [Two (2) number is working and one (1) number is
standby].
B) Description for unit
(i) Type Vertical cylindrical with dished ends.
(ii) Location Indoor
(iii) Design Rated Service Flow Rate (Net) Not less than 75
in m3/hr
(iv) Time Period for each Service Cycle 18
between two consecutive
regenerations, in hrs
(v) Volume of treated water between two Not less than 1350
consecutive regenerations (Net), in
m3
(vi) Design surface flow rate in m3/m2/hr Not more than10
(vii) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
(viii) Design Pressure in kg/cm2 (g). Design pressure should be the maximum expected pressure to
which the vessel may be subjected plus 5% extra margin.
Maximum expected pressure for a vessel placed in the
discharge line of a pump shall be based on the shut-off head of
the pump plus static head at pump suction, if any.
(ix) Design Inlet Suspended solids, in ppm 15
(x) Design Outlet Suspended solids, in Not more than 2.0
ppm
(xi) Design Code IS 2825/ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2010
(xii) Code for Tests and Inspections Shall be hydraulically tested at 1.5 times of design pressure or 2
times of the working pressure, whichever is higher, for a period
not less than one (1) hour.
(xiii) Filter Media
a) Type Bed of Graded Sand and Anthracite supported over Graded
Gravel.
b) Characteristics of Anthracite Grade: To be indicated by the Bidder.
Bulk Density: 900 kg/m3.
Uniformity Coefficient: 1.7.
Ash (minimum): Less than 30 %.
c) Characteristics of Sand Grade: To be indicated by the Bidder.
Bulk Density: 1400-1600 kg/m3.
Acid Solubility: Not to exceed 5% [10% HCl & 24 hrs].
Effective size, mm : Around 0.45.
Uniformity Coefficient: 1.6-1.65.
Silica : 90 %.
(minimum)
d) Bed depth in mm Anthracite - minimum 350 and Sand -minimum 750.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

e) Percentage freeboard 75 % minimum.
(xiv) Details of Regeneration of Filter Media
a) Air Scour Air Scour by air from Air Blowers for Dual Media Pressure
Filters.
b) Air Scour Velocity 40 Nm3/hr/m2 (minimum) of filtration area at a suitable head.
c) Backwash Backwash by reversible flow of filtered water.
d) Backwash Velocity As per supplier design specific to meet the system
requirements.
(xv) Material of construction
a) Shell Carbon steel as per IS 2062 or ASTM A 515 Gr.60/70 or better.
b) Dished ends Carbon steel as per IS 2002 or ASTM A 515 Gr.60/70 or better.
(xvi) Protection
a) Internal
x Material Two (2) coats of solvent less epoxy primer with polyamide
hardener followed by three (3) coats (minimum) of solvent less
hi-build epoxy finished coat with approved hardener and final
painting with two (2) coats of synthetic enamel paint.
x Thickness Not less than 500 microns DFT.
b) External As per Painting schedule
(xvii) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xviii) Sight windows One (1) number in Backwash Space.
(xix) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of media inside.
(xx) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
isolation valves so that any of the units can be used for any
stream.
(xxi) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
line with Bid Specification and Drawings, enclosed with it.
3.00.00 AIR BLOWERS FOR DUAL MEDIA PRESSURE FILTERS
A) Number Two (2) (1Working +1Standby)
B) Description for each Blower
(i) Location Indoor
(ii) Fluid to be handled Ambient Air.
(iii) Service To scour the filter bed prior to backwash.
(iv) Duty Intermittent.
(v) Type of Blower Rotary Twin Lobe Oil Free.
(vi) Type of Impeller Involutes.
(vii) Design standard As per Bid Specification.
(viii) Service temperature in degree Celsius 60
(ix) Rated Capacity, (each) in m3/hr 100% requirement of each Bed of Dual media Filter
(x) Permissible tolerance in rated As per BS-1571-Part II.
capacity, in %
(xi) Head to be developed at rated Bidder to indicate, to ensure the desired performance.
capacity
(xii) Material of construction
a) Casing CI
b) Lobe CI
c) Common Base plate Fabricated Steel
d) Coupling Pulley C.I./Carbon Steel

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

e) Coupling Guard Carbon Steel
f) Safety Relief Valve SS-316
g) Nuts and bolts Carbon Steel
(xiii) Type of drive Electrical Motor
(xiv) Criteria for selection of drive Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
maximum power required by the blower.
(xv) Rated speed (RPM) 1500 (Sync.) maximum.
(xvi) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase, 50 (+5%), HZ
Variation)
(xvii) Type of coupling between Blower & V Belt.
Motor
(xviii) Noise level (for complete set of Blower Not more than 85 db (At a distance of 1.0 m from the outer
(xix) Tests and Inspection
a) Material Test required for Casing, Impeller and Shaft.
b) Hydro-test BS-1571-Part II.
c) Dynamic Balancing Test Shall be provided by the Bidder
(xx) Performance Test
a) Test Code BS-1571-Part II.
b) Tests to be done for determination Head-Capacity Curve and BHP-Capacity Curve.
of
c) Test to be carried out On prototype model at rated speed.
d) Test for satisfactory operation of Required.
Blower at site
(xxi) Instruments and alarm Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xxii) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder.
local and panel
(xxiii) Accessories Shall be provided by the
Common base frame, Pulley, Acoustic hood, V-Belt Guard,
Bidder Suction Filter, Suction Silencer, Discharge Silencer, Anti
Vibration Pad, Safety Relief Valve, Non Return Valve
4.00.00 OVERHEAD FILTER BACKWASH WATER STORAGE TANK
A) Numbers One (1) number
B) Description
(i) Type Rectangular and Overhead
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Filtered Water.
(iii) Material of Construction RCC with acrylic reinforced cementious flexible water proof
coating conforming to BS 1881 Pt 5 1983 DIN-1048 Water
penetration test.
(iv) Effective Capacity (each Suitable to hold the filtered water required for single backwash
compartment) of one (1) number Dual media Filter plus 20% margin or 50 m^3
whichever is higher + 50 M3 capacity of Potable water.
(v) Minimum Free Board, in mm 500
(vi) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
5.00.00 FILTER BACKWASH SUMP
A) Numbers One (1) no. in two compartments
B) Description
(i) Type Rectangular and flat bottom.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Backwash waste of Dual Media Filters
(iii) Effective capacity of each Suitable to hold backwash waste generated from single
compartment m^3 backwash of one (1) number Dual Media Filter in a day plus
20% margin or 50 m^3 whichever is higher.
(iv) Minimum Free Board, in mm. 500
(v) Material of Construction RCC.
(vi) Type of Protection
a) Internal Epoxy painted as per relevant sub section.
(vii) Sludge Flushing Arrangement Required through high pressure water and nozzles to ensure no
deposition / settling of sludge as per the Bid P&ID Water shall
be taken from service water pump discharge header. Booster
Pump if required, for producing high pressure water, shall be in
Bidders scope.
(viii) Accessories Shall be provided by the Bidder as per P&ID and bid
specification, enclosed with the Specification.
(ix) Instruments Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in

6.00.00 BACKWASH WASTE WATER DISPOSAL PUMPS

A) Number Two (2) [One (1) number to be under operation and the other as
standby].
(i) Type Vertical, Centrifugal Non Clog type
(ii) Type of Impeller Open/ semi open
(iii) Location Outdoor
(iv) Fluid to be handled Backwash water
(v) Duty Intermittent, suitable for parallel operation
(vi) Design Standard As per Bid Specification
(vii) Design Temperature, degree Celsius 60
(viii) Rated Capacity m^3/hr Not less than 25 m^3/hr
(ix) Suction Condition Flooded.
(x) Minimum Head to be developed at To be specified by the Bidder considering 10% margin to meet
rated capacity, MLC the requirements of the system as per Bid Specification. (C
(xi) Shut off Head To be suitable for stable operation at rated duty point.
(xii) Range of operation 20% - 120%
(xiii) Pump speed (RPM) 1500 maximum.
(xiv) Material of construction
x Casing Ni hard C.I. as per ASTM 532.
x Shaft EN-8 as per BS-970.
x Impeller Ni hard C.I. as per ASTM 532.
x Nuts and Bolts SS-316 (under wetted condition) and MS Cadmium plated (in
other places)
(xv) Type of drive Electrical Motor
(xvi) Criteria for selection of drive Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
(xvii) Rated speed (RPM) 1500 (Sync.) maximum.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xviii) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase, 50 HZ (+3 to 5%).
Variation)
(xix) Type of coupling between Pump & Flexible Spacer.
Motor
(xx) Noise level (for complete set of Pump Not more than 85 db (At a distance of 1.0 m from the outer
(xxi) Painting for complete set of Pump &
Motor
x Primer As per the requirements of Painting Specification.
x Finish paint As per the requirements of Painting Specification.
x Shade As approved by BHEL.
(xxii) Tests and Inspection
x Material Test required for Casing, Impeller, Shaft and Shaft Sleeve.
a) Hydro-test As per IS-1520 and IS-5120.
b) Dynamic Balancing Test Shall be provided by the Bidder
c) Performance Test Required
(xxiii) Instruments along with alarms, Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
interlocks and accessories line with Bid Specification and Drawings, enclosed with it.
(xxiv) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
local and remote Facility.
(xxv) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
7.00.00 ACTIVATED CARBON FILTERS
A) Number Two (2) [One (1) number is working and one (1) number is
standby].
B) Description for each unit
(ii) Location Indoor.
in m3/hr
(v) Volume of treated water between two Not less than 1080
consecutive regenerations (Net), in
m3
(vi) Design surface flow rate in m3/m2/hr Not more than 15.
Celsius
(ix) Design Inlet Water Quality As per the Design Clarified Water Analysis
(x) Design Treated Water Quality As indicated elsewhere in the Specification

(xi) Design Code ASME SEC-VIII DIV-I/ IS-2825.
(xii) Code for Tests and Inspections Shall be hydraulically tested at 1.5 times of Design Pressure or
2 times of the Working Pressure, whichever is higher, for a
period not less than one (1) hour.
(xiii) Filter Media
a) Type Activated Carbon.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

b) Characteristics of Activated Carbon Grade: De Chlorination Grade.
Bulk Density: Not less than 400 kg/m3 .
Particle Density wetted in water: 1.3-1.4 gm/cc. Effective size,
mm: 0.8-0.9 mm.
Uniformity Coefficient: 1.5-1.6.
Mean particle dia: 1.2-1.4 mm.
Total surface area: Not less than 850 m2/gm. Iodine number :
Minimum 900.
Carbon content: Not less than 90%.
Moisture content: 5% (max).
Ash content: 8% (max).
c) Bed depth in mm Activated Carbon -minimum 1200 and Support Gravel -
minimum 450.
d) Percentage freeboard 100% minimum.
(xiv) Details of Regeneration of Filter Media
a) Backwash Backwash by reversible flow of filtered water.
b) Backwash Velocity To be specified by the Bidder.
(xvi) Protection
a) Internal
x Material Two (2) coats of solventless epoxy primer with polyamide
hardener followed by three (3) coats (minimum) of solventless
hi-build epoxy finished coat with approved hardener and final
painting with two (2) coats of synthetic enamel paint.
x Thickness Not less than 500 micron DFT.
b) External As per attached painting schedule
(xvii) Cleats for internal support MOC-SS-316
(xviii) Carbon Traps Two (2) numbers for each vessel, One (1) at service water
outlet and one (1) at backwash outlet.
(xix) Under Drain System
a) Type Header Lateral or Strainer on plate, designed to avoid any non-
uniformity of flow.
b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header: MSEP & Lateral: PP/PVC (double
decker replacable type) For Strainer on plate, Plate: MSEP and
Strainer: PP/PVC (double decker replacable type).
c) Special feature For Strainer on plate system, an additional manhole Shall be
provided by the Bidderto give access below the bed plate.
(xx) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(for each vessel).
(xxi) Sight windows One (1) number in Backwash Space.
(xxii) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal
of Activated Carbon.
(xxiii) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
(xxiv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
8.00.00 WEAKLY ACIDIC CATION EXCHANGERS

standby].

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

in m3/hr
(v) Volume of treated water between two Not less than 1080 (Based on 10 % deration on exchange
consecutive regenerations (Net), in capacity of the resin).
m3
(vii) Design Temperature in degree 60 (for Mechanical Design)
Celsius Temperature for Regeneration and Backwash are mentioned
elsewhere in the Specification.
(ix) Design Inlet Water Quality As per the stipulations of Tender Specification.
(x) Design Treated Water Quality As per the stipulations of Tender Specification.
(xi) Design Code ASME SEC-VIII-DIV-I / IS-2825
(xiii) Ion Exchange Resins
a) Type Cross linked polyacrylic matrix with carboxylic acid as functional
group (gel type with particle size 0.3 to 1.2 mm)
b) Bed depth in mm Effective Bed Depth: Minimum 1000.
c) Percentage freeboard 100 % minimum.
(xiv) Details of Regeneration of Ion Exchange Resins
a) Regenerant Thorough fare by Hydrochloric Acid

b) Regeneration mode Co Current.
c) Injection By hard ebonite lined Ejector. One (1) number Density Indicator
shall be provided by the Bidder at outlet of the Ejector.
d) Accessories Each ejector shall be provided by the Bidder with flow indicator
on Power Water supply line as well as flow indicator cum
transmitter on discharge line.
f) Regeneration Level Should be optimum and suitable to prevent leakage of ions.
(xvi) Protection
a) Internal
x Material Natural rubber [shore hardness 60o 70o A], suitable to
withstand the design temperature.
x Thickness 4.5 mm in three (3) layers.
b) External As per attached paintings schedule
(xvii) Resin Traps Two (2) numbers for each vessel one (1) at service outlet and
other at backwash & rinse outlet.
(xviii) Regenerant Distributor

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC/Hastalloy-C
(xix) Interface Collector
a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with pp
strainers ( double decker replaceable type)
b) Location 150 mm below the top of total Resin bed i.e. at the interface of
inert & effective resin bed.
(xx) Cleats for Internal Support SS-316
(xxi) Under Drain System
(a) Type Header Lateral or Strainer on plate, designed to avoid any non-
uniformity of flow.
(b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header: MSRL-RC and Lateral: PP/PVC
(double decker replacable type) For Strainer on plate,
Plate:MSRL & Strainer :PP/PVC (double decker replacable
type).
(c) Special feature For Strainer on plate system, an additional manhole Shall be
provided by the Bidder to give access below the bed plate.
(xxii) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xxiii) Sight windows Two (2) numbers One at resin top level and other at backwash
space.
(xxiv) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Ion Exchange
Resins.
(xxv) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
(xxvi) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
9.00.00 STRONGLY ACIDIC CATION EXCHANGERS

A) Number Two (2) [one (1) number is working and one (1) number is
standby].
in m3/hr
m3
(xi) Design Code ASME SEC-VIII-DIV-I / IS-2825

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

a) Type Styrene-divinyl benezene matrix with sulphonates as functional
group (gel type with particle size 0.5 to 0.65 mm).
b) Bed depth in mm Effective Bed Depth: Minimum 1000.
Inert Bed Depth: Minimum 150 at top of Effective Bed.
a) Regenerant Hydrochloric Acid (IS-265).

b) Regeneration mode Counter Current.
is Shall be provided by the Bidder at outlet of the Ejector.
d) Dilution Ratio Suitably selected by the Bidder to ensure desire concentration
for dosing.
d) Accessories Each ejector shall be provided by the Bidder with flow indicator
transmitter on discharge line.
(xvi) Protection
(xvii) a) Internal
(xviii) Resin Traps Two (2) numbers for each vessel one (1) at service outlet &
other at backwash & rinse outlet
(xix) Regenerant Distributor
a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
Strainers (double decker replaceable type)
(xx) Interface Collector
a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
b) Location 150 mm below the top of total Resin bed i.e. at the interface of
inert & effective resin bed.
(xxi) Cleats for Internal Support SS-316
(xxii) Under Drain System
uniformity of flow.
(b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header :MSRL-RC and Lateral: PP/PVC
Plate:MSRL & Strainer: PP/PVC (double decker replacable
type).
(xxiii) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xxiv) Sight windows Two (2) numbers One at resin top level and other at backwash
space.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xxv) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Ion Exchange
Resins.
(xxvi) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
(xxvii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
10.00.00 DEGASSER TOWER

A) Numbers Shall be provided by the Two (2) [One (1) number is working and one (1) number is
Bidder standby].
B) Description for each Tower
(i) Type Forced Draft Type Vertical Cylindrical Packed Tower. Each
Tower shall be mounted on each Degassed Water Storage
Tank (described hereinafter).
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Decationised Water.
(iii) Location Outdoor
(iv) Design Rated Capacity (Net), m3/hr Not less than 60
(v) Maximum and minimum capacity 120% and 20% of normal capacity
(vi) Carbon Di-Oxide content at outlet of Carbon Di-Oxide content shall not be more than 5.0 ppm as
Tower Carbon Di-Oxide
(vii) Design Pressure, Kg/cm2.g Atmospheric
(viii) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
(ix) Design Code IS-803
(x) Code for Tests and Inspections As specified elsewhere in the Specification
(xi) Material of Construction Carbon steel as per IS 2062 or ASTM A 515 Gr.60/70 or better.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
x Distributors, Collectors MSRL-RC
(xiii) Fill Material Polypropylene Raschig/Pall rings.
(xiv) Provided with accessories as follows:
a) Inlet Shall be provided by the Bidder.
b) Outlet Shall be provided by the Bidder.
c) Vent Shall be provided by the Bidder
d) Manhole Shall be provided by the Bidder, 500 NB
e) Rain protection Necessary arrangement in order to prevent rainwater entry
needs Shall be provided by the Bidder.
f) Sample Collection Point Shall be provided by the Bidder.
g) Platform complete with handrails for Shall be provided by the Bidder.
operation
h) Staircase Shall be provided by the Bidder.
i) Special accessories Air outlet duct shall be suitably extended to avoid acid water
dripping on buildings, structures and vessels.
11.00.00 DEGASSER AIR BLOWERS
A) Number Three (3) [two (2) numbers are working and One (1) number is
standby].

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(i) Location Outdoor.
(iii) Service To transfer Ambient Air, to Degasser Tower.
(iv) Duty Continuous.
(v) Type of Blower Centrifugal, oil free
(vi) Type of Impeller Fan Blade.
(vii) Design standard As indicated elsewhere in the Specification.
(viii) Service temperature in degree Celsius 60 maximum.
(ix) Rated Capacity 50% requirement for one (1) number Degasser Tower.
(x) Permissible tolerance in rated As per IS-4894.
capacity, in %
(xi) Head to be developed at rated Bidder need to indicate, to ensure the satisfactory performance.
capacity
(xii) Permissible tolerance in efficiency at As per IS-4894.
rated capacity, in %
(xiii) Material of construction
a) Casing Cast Iron or Carbon Steel.
b) Impeller Cast Iron or Carbon Steel.
c) Shaft EN-8 to BS-970.
d) Common Base plate Fabricated Steel as per IS 2062.
e) Coupling Guard Carbon Steel.
f) Nuts and bolts Carbon Steel.
(xiv) Type of drive Electrical Motor
(xv) Criteria for selection of drive motor Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
shall be selected. This shall in no be less than the maximum
power required by the Blower.
(xvi) Rated speed (RPM) 1500 (Sync.) maximum.
(xvii) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase, 50 HZ (+5%)
Variation)
(xviii) Type of coupling between Blower & Direct through flexible coupling.
Motor
(xix) Noise level (for complete set of Blower Not more than 85 db (At a distance of 1.0 m from the outer
(xx) Painting for complete set of Blower & As per attached painting schedule
Motor
(xxi) Tests and Inspection
a) Material Test required for Casing, Impeller and Shaft.
b) Dynamic Balancing Test Shall be provided by the Bidder.
(xxii) Performance Test
a) Test Code As per IS-4894.
b) Tests to be done for determination Head-Capacity Curve and BHP-Capacity Curve.
of
Blower at site
(xxiii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xxiv) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
local and panel Facility.
(xxv) Start interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
(xxvi) Accessories Shall be provided by the Common Base Frame, acoustic hood, Suction Filter, Suction
Bidder Silencer, Discharge Silencer, Discharge Damper.
12.00.00 DEGASSED WATER STORAGE TANK
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the Two (2) [one (1) number for each chain].
Bidder
B) Description for each Tank
(i) Type Vertical cylindrical with roof.
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Decationised and Degassed Water.
(iii) Effective capacity, in m3 Suitable to store quantity of water required for operation of one
(1) number DM stream for an hour and power water
requirement for single regeneration of one (1) number complete
DM Stream plus overall 20% margin or 100 whichever will be
higher.
(iv) Minimum Free Board, in mm 300
(v) Design Pressure, Kg/cm2.g Design pressure should be the maximum expected pressure to
(vi) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
(vii) Design Code IS-803
(viii) Code for Tests and Inspections Shall be tested by filling up with water up to the highest level for
a period not less than 8 hours.
(ix) Material of Construction
a) Shell Carbon steel as per IS 2062 or ASTM A 515 Gr.70.
b) Dished Ends Carbon steel as per IS 2002 or ASTM A 515 Gr.70.
(x) Thickness, in mm Not less than 8.
(xi) Protection
a) Internal
(xii) Provided with accessories as follows:
c) Drain Shall be provided by the Bidder.
d) Overflow Shall be provided by the Bidder.
e) Vent Shall be provided by the Bidder.
f) Manhole Two (2) on shell Each of minimum 500 mm NB and Davit
type.
g) Sample Collection Point Shall be provided by the Bidder.
h) Platform complete with handrails for Shall be provided by the Bidder.
operation
i) Staircase Shall be provided by the Bidder for access from ground floor to
top of Tank.
(xiii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xiv) Shall be provided by the Bidder as per the Tender Specification

Inlet Control Valve
and Tender P&ID.
13.00.00 DEGASSED WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
A) Number Three (3) [one(1) number under operation another number kept
as regeneration stand by and other as maintenance standby]
(i) Location Indoor.
(ii) Fluid to be handled Decationized and Degassed Water.
(iii) Service To transfer Decationized and Degassed Water from Degassed
Water Storage Tank to Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers.
(v) Type of Pump Horizontal Centrifugal Non Clog type
(vi) Type of Impeller Closed
(vii) Design standard As per IS-5659 & IS-5120.
(viii) Service temperature, in degree 60
Celsius
(ix) Rated Capacity, in m3/hr Not less than 70
(x) Permissible tolerance in rated As per IS-5659 & IS-5120.
capacity, in %
(xi) Range of operation 20 % - 120 %.
(xii) Suction Condition Flooded.
(xiii) Head to be developed at rated As per system requiremnet to meet the requirements as per
capacity Tender Specification (C should be considered as 120 to
calculate the frictional loss in pipe as per Hagen Williams
Equation).
(xiv) Shut Off Head To be suitable for stable operation at rated duty point.
(xv) Permissible tolerance in efficiency at As per IS-5659 & IS-5120.
a) Casing AISI-316.
b) Impeller AISI-316.
c) Shaft AISI-316.
d) Mechanical Seal AISI-316.
e) Common Base plate Fabricated Steel as per IS 2062.
f) Nuts and bolts AISI-316.
(xviii) Criteria for selection of drive motor Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
(xx) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase, 50 HZ (+5%)
Variation)
Motor
(xxiii) Tests and Inspection
a) Material Test required for Casing, Impeller, Shaft and Shaft Sleeve.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
b) Hydro-test As per IS-5120.

(xxiv) Performance Test
a) Test Code Hydraulic Institute Standard.
b) Tests to be done for determination Head-Capacity Curve, BHP-Capacity Curve and Efficiency-
of Capacity Curve and NPSH-Capacity Curve.
pump at site
(xxv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xxvi) Suction Strainer along with flushing Required. Material of construction of each strainer shall be
connection SS316.
(xxviii) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
14.00.00 WEAKLY BASIC ANION EXCHANGERS
standby].
in m3/hr
m3
(vii) Design Temperature in degree 60. (for Mechanical Design)
(xi) Design Code ASME SEC-VIII-DIV-I/IS:2825
a) Type Macro-porous cross linked polystyrene matrix with tertiary
amine (minimum 90%) as functional group. (gel type with
particle size 0.3 to 1.2 mm).
b) Bed depth in mm Minimum 1000.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
a) Regenerant Sodium Hydroxide (IS-252).

b) Regeneration mode Co-Current and Thoroughfare with Strongly Basic Anion
Exchanger.
for dosing.
e) Accessories Each ejector Shall be provided by the Bidder with flow indicator
transmitter on discharge line. Temperature indicator on each
discharge line Shall be provided by the Bidder for Caustic
dosing line.
(xvi) Protection
a) Internal
(xvii) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xviii) Resin Traps Two (2) numbers one (1) at service outlet and other at
backwash & rinse outlet.
(xix) Regenerant Distributor
x Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
uniformity of flow.
b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header :MSRL-RC and Lateral: PP/PVC
Plate:MSRL & Strainer :PP/PVC (double decker replacable
type).
(xxii) Sight windows Two (2) numbers
(xxiii) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Ion Exchange
Resins.
(xxiv) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
15.00.00 STRONGLY BASIC ANION EXCHANGERS

standby].

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(ii) Location Indoor
in m3/hr
m3
(xi) Design Code IS 2825/ASME SEC-VIII-DIV-I
(xii) Ion Exchange Resins
a) Type Type-I and have macro-porous styrene-divinyl benezene matrix
with quaternary ammonium (minimum 95%) type functional
group. (gel type with particle size 0.5 to 0.65 mm)
b) Bed depth in mm Effective Bed Depth: Minimum 1000. Inert Bed Depth:
Minimum 150 at top of Effective Bed.
(xiii) Details of Regeneration of Ion Exchange Resins
a) Regenerant Sodium Hydroxide (IS-252).

b) Regeneration mode Counter Current.
for dosing.
e) Accessories Each ejector Shall be provided by the Bidder with flow indicator
transmitter on discharge line. Temperature indicator on each
discharge line Shall be provided by the Bidder for Caustic
dosing line.
(xv) Protection
a) Internal
(xvi) Resin Traps Two (2) numbers one (1) at service outlet and other at

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xvii) Regenerant Distributor
Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
(xviii) Interface Collector
(a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
(b) Location 150 mm below the top of total Resin bed i.e. at the interface of
inert and effective resin bed.
(xix) Cleats for Internal Support SS-316
(xx) Under Drain System
uniformity of flow.
b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header: MSRL-RC & Lateral: PP/PVC
(double decker replacable type) For Strainer on plate, Plate:
MSRL & Strainer: PP/PVC (double decker replacable type).
(xxi) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xxii) Sight windows Two (2) numbers
(xxiii) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Ion Exchange
Resins.
(xxiv) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
16.00.00 MIXED BED EXCHANGERS

standby].
in m3/hr
m3
(xi) Design Code IS2825/ASME SEC-VIII-DIV-I
(xii) Code for Tests and Inspections Vessel shall be hydraulically tested at 1.5 times of Design

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Pressure or 2 times of the Working Pressure, whichever is
higher, for a period not less than one (1) hour
a) Type Strongly Acidic Polystyrene Resin with DBV cross-linking and
High capacity strongly basic Type-I polystyrene resin with DVB
crosslinking and quaternary ammonium functional group.
b) Bed depth in mm Cation Resin: 500 (minimum)
Anion Resin: 500(minimum)
a) Regenerant Hydrochloric Acid (IS-265)
Sodium Hydroxide (IS-252).
b) Regeneration mode Co Current.
c) Injection By hard ebonite lined Ejectors. One (1) number Density
Indicator is Shall be provided by the Bidder at outlet of each
Ejector.
for dosing.
e) Accessories Each ejector Shall be provided by the Bidderwith flow indicator
on Power Water supply line as well as flow indicator on
discharge line. Temperature indicator on each discharge line
Shall be provided by the Bidderfor Caustic dosing line.
(xvi) Protection
a) Internal
(xvii) Resin Traps Two (2) numbers one (1) at service outlet and other at
(xviii) Regenerant Distributor
x Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
(xix) Interface Collector
(a) Material of Construction MSRL-RC Header with PP/PVC Laterals complete with PP
(b) Location At interface of Cation and Anion Resin Bed
uniformity of flow.
(b) Material of Construction For Header Lateral, Header :MSRL-RC and Lateral: PP/PVC
(double decker replacable type) For Strainer on plate, Plate
:MSRL & Strainer :PP/PVC (double decker replacable type).
(xxii) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xxiii) Sight windows Two (2) numbers
(xxiv) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Ion Exchange

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Resins.
(xxv) Interconnection facility The outlet of the units shall be interconnected with necessary
stream.
17.00.00 AIR BLOWER FOR MIXED BED (COMMON FOR NEUTRALIZATION PIT ALSO)
standby].
(i) Location Indoor.
(iii) Service Resin Mixing operation for MB Exchangers and Mixing of
Regeneration Waste and Chemicals for effecting neutralization
for N.Pit.
(iv) Duty Intermittent
(v) Type of Blower Rotary, twin lobe
(vi) Type of Impeller Fan Blade.
(vii) Design standard As indicated elsewhere in the Specification.
(viii) Service temperature in degree Celsius 60 maximum.
(ix) Rated Capacity 100% requirement for Two (2) numbers MB Exchangers and
N.Pit.
(x) Permissible tolerance in rated As per BS-1571
capacity, in %
(xi) Head to be developed at rated Bidder to indicate, to ensure the satisfactory performance.
capacity
(xii) Permissible tolerance in efficiency at As per BS-1571
(xiii) Material of construction
x Casing CI to IS 210 FG 260
x Lobes CS to BS 970, EN9 Forged
x Shaft CS to BS 970, EN9 Forged
x Common Base plate Fabricated Steel as per IS 2062.
x Coupling Guard Carbon Steel.
x Nuts and bolts Carbon Steel.
(xiv) Type of drive Electrical Motor
(xv) Criteria for selection of drive motor Minimum 15 % margin over BKW at rated duty point shall be
shall be selected. This shall in no be less than the maximum
power required by the Blower.
(xvi) Rated speed (RPM) 1500 (Sync.) maximum.
(xvii) Voltage, Phase & Frequency ( % 415 V (+10%), 3 Phase, 50 HZ (+5%)
Variation)
(xviii) Type of coupling between Blower & Direct through flexible coupling.
Motor
(xix) Noise level (for complete set of Blower Not more than 85 db (At a distance of 1.0 m from the outer
(xx) Painting for complete set of Blower & As per attached painting schedule
Motor
(xxi) Tests and Inspection

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
a) Material Test required for Casing, Lobe and Shaft.

b) Dynamic Balancing Test Shall be provided by the Bidder.
c) Performance Test To be provided.
d) Test Code As per IS-1571
e) Tests to be done for determination Head-Capacity Curve and BHP-Capacity Curve.
of
f) Test to be carried out On prototype model at rated speed.
g) Test for satisfactory operation of Required.
Blower at site
(xxii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xxiii) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
(xxiv) Accessories Shall be provided by the Common Base Frame, Acoustic hood, Suction Filter, Suction
Bidder Silencer, Discharge Silencer, Discharge Damper.
18.00.00 REGENERATION WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
A) Number Two (2) numbers [One (1) number is working and one (1)
number is standby].
(i) Location Indoor
(ii) Fluid to be handled DM Water
(iii) Service To supply DM Water from DM Water Storage Tank for
regeneration of Weakly Basic Anion , Strongly Basic Anion and
MB Exchangers
Celsius
(ix) Rated Capacity, in m3/hr Suitable to meet the system requirements.
capacity, in %
(xiii) Head to be developed at rated As per system requirement to meet the requirements as per
capacity Tender Specification (C should be considered as 120 to
calculate the frictional loss in pipe as per Hagen Williams
Equation).
a) Casing AISI-316.
c) Shaft AISI-316.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Variation)
Motor
d) Performance Test
x Test Code Hydraulic Institute Standard.
x Tests to be done for Head-Capacity Curve, BHP-Capacity Curve and Efficiency-
determination of Capacity Curve and NPSH-Capacity Curve.
e) Test to be carried out On prototype model at rated speed.
f) Test for satisfactory operation of Required.
pump at site
(xxiv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xxv) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
(xxvi) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
19.00.00 ACID UNLOADING PUMPS
standby].
(ii) Fluid to be handled Commercial (30 33 %) Hydrochloric Acid.
(iii) Service To transfer Commercial Hydrochloric Acid from Tank Car to
Hydrochloric Acid Storage Tank.
(iv) Duty Intermittent and to be suitable for parallel operation.
(vi) Type of Impeller Semi Open or Open
Celsius
(x) Permissible tolerance in rated As per IS- IS-5639 & IS-5120.
capacity, in %
(xiii) Head to be developed at rated Minimum 20 mlc. If necessary, higher value needs to be
capacity considered by Bidder to meet the requirements as per Tender
Specification (C should be considered as 120 to calculate the
frictional loss in pipe as per Hagen Williams Equation).

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xv) Permissible tolerance in efficiency at As per IS- IS-5639 & IS-5120.
a) Casing Polypropylene.
b) Impeller Polypropylene.
c) Shaft Hardened Carbon Steel EN-8 PP Lined
d) Mechanical Seal Polypropylene.
f) Nuts and bolts SS-316
Variation)
Motor
(xxiii) Painting for complete set of Pump & As per attached painting schedule
Motor
(xxv) Performance Test
pump at site
(xxvii) Suction Strainer along with flushing Shall be provided by the Bidder.
connection
(xxviii) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
(xxix) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
(xxx) Accessories to be provided
a) Suction Strainer Required. Material shall be of PP.
b) Hoses Two (2) numbers, acid resistant reinforced rubber hoses each
80 mm NB and 20 m (min) long type-2 hose as per IS- 198 / IS-
7654.
20.00.00 ACID STORAGE TANK
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the
Two (2).
Bidder

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(i) Type Horizontal cylindrical with dished ends, over ground
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Commercial (30 33 %) Hydrochloric Acid.
(iii) Effective capacity of each tank, in m3 Adequate to hold the quantity of regenerant required for
regeneration as well as neutralization (if required) with
reference to full load operation of overall DM plant for 15 days
plus 20% margin.
(iv) Minimum Free Board, in mm 300.
(v) Size Bidder need to indicate.
(vi) Design Pressure, Kg/cm2.g As per Tender Specification.
(vii) Design Temperature in degree
60
Celsius
(viii) Design Code As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(ix) Code for Tests and Inspections As indicated elsewhere in the Specification.
(x) Material of Construction
(xi) Thickness, in mm Not less than 8.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
(xiii) Provided with accessories as follows:

d) Overflow Shall be provided by the Bidder complete with Overflow Seal.
e) Vent Shall be provided by the Bidder complete with Fume Absorber.
f) Manhole Two (2) on shell Each of minimum 500 mm NB and Davit
type.
h) Platform complete with handrails for Shall be provided by the Bidder.
operation
i) Staircase Shall be provided by the Bidder for access from ground floor to
top of Tank.
(xiv) Instruments Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xv)
Accessories Shall be provided by the Fume absorbers, manhole, vent, drain, sample connection,
Bidder level transmitter, operating platform, ladders , lifting lugs (4 nos
minimum) etc.
21.00.00 ACID MEASURING TANK FOR STRONGLY ACIDIC CATION EXCHANGERS
Two (2).
Bidder
(i) Type Vertical cylindrical with flat bottom.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(iii) Effective capacity, in m3 of each unit Suitable to meet the requirement for double regenerations of a
Weakly Acidic Cation & Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers plus
20% margin.
(iv) Minimum Free Board, in mm 300 in addition to above specified margin.
60
Celsius
(viii) Design Code As specified elsewhere in the Specification
(ix) Code for Tests and Inspections As specified elsewhere in the Specification.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
All fume absorbers shall be externally and internally rubber
lined and fasteners shall be of acid proof material.
(xiv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xv)
Accessories Shall be provided by the Fume absorbers, vent, drain, sample connection, level
Bidder transmitter, operating platform, ladders , lifting lugs (4 nos
minimum) etc.
22.00.00 ACID MEASURING TANK FOR MB EXCHANGERS
One (1).
Bidder
(iii) Effective capacity, in m3 Suitable to meet the requirement for single regeneration of a
MB Exchanger plus 20% margin.
60
Celsius

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(viii) Design Code As specified elsewhere in the Specification.
(ix) Code for Tests and Inspections As specified elsewhere in the Specification.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
(xv)
Bidder. transmitter, operating platform, ladders , lifting lugs (4 nos
minimum) etc.
23.00.00 ACID MEASURING TANK FOR NEUTRALIZATION PIT
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the One (1).
Bidder
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Commercial (30-33 %) Hydrochloric Acid.
(iii) Effective capacity, in m3 Suitable to meet the requirements for neutralization of excess
alkali present in regeneration waste effluent from two DM
chains plus 20% margin or 1M3 whichever is higher.
(iv) Minimum Free Board, in mm 300 in addition to above specified margin
(viii) Design Code As specified elsewhere in the Specification
(ix) Code for Tests and Inspections As specified elsewhere in the Specification
(xii) Protection

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

a) Internal
(xv)
minimum) etc.
24.00.00 CAUSTIC UNLOADING PUMPS
standby].
(ii) Fluid to be handled Commercial (40 48 %) Sodium Hydroxide.
(iii) Service To transfer Commercial Sodium Hydroxide from Tank Car to
Alkali Storage Tank.
(iv) Duty Intermittent and to be suitable for parallel operation.
(vi) Type of Impeller Semi Open or Open
(viii) Service temperature, in degree 60 maximum.
Celsius

capacity, in %
(xiii) Head to be developed at rated 20 mlc minimum. If necessary, higher value needs to be
capacity considered by Bidder to meet the requirements as per Tender
Specification (C should be considered as 120 to calculate the
frictional loss in pipe as per Hagen Williams Equation).
a) Casing AISI-316
b) Impeller AISI-316
c) Shaft SS-410

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

maximum power required by the Pump
Variation)
Motor
(xxiii) Painting for complete set of Pump & As per attached painting schedule
Motor
(xxv) Performance Test
pump at site
(xxvii) Suction Strainer along with flushing Shall be provided by the Bidder.
connection
(xxviii) Start and stop facility provided both at Shall be provided by the Bidder in conjunction with Auto Start
(xxix) Trip interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder.
(xxx) Accessories to be provided
Required. Material of construction of each strainer shall be
a) Suction Strainer
SS316.
b) Hoses Two (2) numbers, alkali resistant reinforced rubber hoses each
80 mm NB and 20 m long (min) type-2 hose as per IS- 198 / IS-
7654.
25.00.00 CAUSTIC STORAGE TANK
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the Two (2).
Bidder
(i) Type Horizontal cylindrical with dished ends.
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Commercial (40 48%) Sodium Hydroxide.
(iii) Effective capacity of each tank, in m3 Adequate to hold the quantity of regenerant required for
regeneration as well as neutralization (if required) with
reference to full load operation of overall DM plant for 15 days
plus 20% margin.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Celsius
(ix) Code for Tests and Inspections As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(xii) Protection
a) Internal

e) Vent Shall be provided by the Bidder complete with Breather.
(xv)
Accessories Shall be provided by the CO2 absorbers, vent, drain, sample connection, level
minimum) etc.
26.00.00 CAUSTIC MEASURING TANK FOR STRONGLY BASIC ANION UNITS
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the Two (2).
Bidder
(ii) Type of fluid to be handled Commercial (40 - 48 %) Sodium Hydroxide.
(iii) Effective capacity of each tank, in m3 Adequate to hold the quantity of regenerant required for double
dose regeneration of Weakly Basic Anion & Strongly Basic
Anion Exchangers plus 20% margin.

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

c) Thickness, in mm Not less than 6.
d) Protection
Internal
x Material Natural rubber [shore hardness 60o - 70o A], suitable to
x External As per attached painting schedule
(xi) Provided with accessories as follows:
(xii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
(xiii)
Stirrer per tank Slow speed stirrer driven by motor drive and reduction gear.
Speed of stirrer = 200 RPM Max.
Material of Construction of each stirrer and agitator = Stainless

Steel 316.
(xiv)
Accessories Carbon dioxide absorber, vent, drain, sample connection, level
transmitter, operating platform, ladders, lifting lugs (4 nos
minimum) etc.
27.00.00 CAUSTIC MEASURING TANK FOR MB UNITS
Bidder
(iii) Effective capacity of each tank, in m3 Adequate to hold the quantity of regenerant required for single
regeneration of MB Exchangers + 20% margin.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

b) Material Natural rubber [shore hardness 60o 70o A], suitable to
c) Thickness 4.5 mm in three (3) layers.
External As per attached painting schedule
(xv)

Steel 316.
(xvi)
minimum) etc.
28.00.00 CAUSTIC MEASURING TANKS FOR NEUTRALIZATION PIT
Bidder
(iii) Effective capacity, in m3 Adequate to hold the quantity of regenerant required for
neutralizing excess acid of one regeneration of two DM chains
+ 20% margin or 1M3 whichever is higher.
(xii) Protection
a) Internal
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xv)

Steel 316.
(xvi)
minimum) etc.
29.00.00 ACTIVATED CARBON FILTER FOR ALKALI SERVICE
A) Number One (1).
(iii) Effective Capacity in m^3/hr Not less than 10
(iv) Time Period for each Service Cycle 24.

(v) Design surface flow rate in m3/m2/hr Not more than 15.
(vi) Design Temperature in in degree
60.
Celsius
(vii) Design Pressure in kg/cm2 (g). Same as Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger
(viii) Design Inlet Alkali Quality Bidder need to specify.
(ix) Design Treated Alkali Quality Bidder need to specify based on requirements with reference to
safe use for regeneration of ion exchange resins. .
(x) Design Code As per the requirements of Tender Specification.
(xi) Code for Tests and Inspections As per the requirements of Tender Specification.
(xii) Filter Media
a) Type Activated Carbon.
Grade : Suitable Grade.
Bulk Density : Not less than 400 kg/m3 .
Particle Density wetted in water : 1.3-1.4 gm/cc. Effective size,
mm : 0.8-0.9 mm.
Uniformity Coefficient : 1.5-1.6.
b) Characteristics of Activated carbon
Mean particle dia : 1.2-1.4 mm.
Total surface area : Not less than 850 m2/gm. Iodine number :
Minimum 900. Carbon content : Not less than 90%.
Moisture content : 5% (max).
Ash content : 8% (max).
c) Bed depth in mm Activated Carbon -minimum 1200 and Support Gravel -
minimum 300.
d) Percentage freeboard 75 % minimum.
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

(xiii) Details of Regeneration of Filter Media
a) Backwash Backwash by de-anionized water.
b) Backwash Velocity To be specified by the Bidder.
(xv) Protection
a) Internal
x Material Three (3) coats of Solvent Free Epoxy.
x Thickness As per the requirements of Tender Specification.
(xvi) Design code ASME SEC-VIII Div-I
(xvii) Hydrostatic Test Pressure 1.5 times of Design Pressure.
(xviii) Influent Distributor Material SS-316
(xix) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xx) Sight windows One (1) number in Backwash Space.
(xxi) Hand hole One (1) number of 150 mm dia. for removal of Activated
Carbon.
(xxii) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
30.00.00 ALKALINE BRINE SOLUTION PREPARATION TANK

Bidder
(iii) Type of fluid to be handled Alkaline Brine Solution.
(iv) Effective capacity, in m3 Not less than five (5) bed volumes of resin in one (1) number
Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger.
(v) Minimum Free Board, in mm 300 in addition to above specified margin.
(vi) Size Bidder need to indicate.
(vii) Design Pressure, Kg/cm2.g As per Tender Specification.
(viii) Design Temperature, degree Celsius 60
(ix) Design Code As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(x) Code for Tests and Inspections As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(xi) Material of Construction
(xii) Thickness, in mm Not less than 6.
(xiii) Protection
a) Internal
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Shall be provided by the Bidder. Slow speed agitator driven by
motor drive and reduction gear. Speed of stirrer = 200 RPM
f) Agitator along with drive motor
Max.
and other accessories
All wetted parts of the Agitator Hastealloy C
or SS-316 L.
Solution Preparation Basket of SS-316 Construction needs to
h) Special accessories
be provided.
(xv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
31.00.00 DILUTION WATER HEATER FOR ALKALI

A) Number One (1).
(i) Type Vessel - vertical cylindrical with dished ends.
Heater Immersion Coil or Nichrome type
(iii) Type of fluid to be handled Treated water from Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger.
(iv) Effective Capacity in m^3 Not less than the volume of power water required for single
regeneration of one (1) number Strongly Basic Anion
Exchanger at 40 degree C plus 20% margin.
(v) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
(vi) Design Pressure in kg/cm2 (g). Same as Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger
(vii) Design Code IS2825/ASME SEC-VIII DIV-I
(viii) Code for Tests and Inspections As indicated elsewhere in the Specification.
(ix) Material of construction
a) Shell SS-316.
b) Dished ends SS-316.
(x) Manhole Two (2) numbers minimum each of Davit type and 500 mm dia.
(xi) Adequately insulated to restrict the outside temperature to 60
deg. C with 25 mm thick (mm) mineral wool insulation on all
external surfaces, covered with 16 gauge galvanized iron sheet
jacketing.
Insulation
(xii) Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
Instruments, alarm and Interlock
32.00.00 HEATER DATA
A) Type Immersion Coil type with Thermostat
B) Number of Heating element As required to get the desire heating
(i) Insulation Material MGO fused powder or equivalent refractory block
(ii) Heating Time in hrs. Maximum 4
(iii) Instrumentation
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

x Pressure Relief Valve Shall be provided by the Bidder
x Temperature Indicator Local as well as panel mounted
x Temperature indicator controller One (1) no, panel mounted to control the water temperature.
Controller shall have auto and manual selection mode.
(iv) Control Valves
a) Number and Location Two (2) nos., at the inlet line of the Heat Exchanger
b) Material Stem, Plug and Seat: SS-316 Body : Cast Iron
c) Actuators Pneumatic with local handwheel. Valve shall be modulating
type.
33.00.00 NEUTRALIZATION PIT
A) Numbers Shall be provided by the One (1) with two compartments.
Bidder
(ii) Type Underground and rectangular in cross-section.
(iii) Type of fluid to be handled Regeneration Waste Water.
(iv) Effective capacity of each Suitable to hold waste effluent generated from regeneration of
compartment, in m3 one (1) number complete DM chain + 20% overall margin.
(vi) Liquid depth in m 3.5 (minimum)
(vii) Free board in mm 500 (minimum)
(viii) Design Temperature, C 60
(ix) Design Code As indicated elsewhere in the Specification.
(x) Code for Tests and Inspections As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(xi) Material of Construction RCC.
(xii) Thickness, in mm As indicated elsewhere in the Specification
(xiii) Protection
a) Internal Acid and Alkali Proof Tiles / Lining
c) Platform complete with handrails for Shall be provided by the Bidder
operation
d) Special accessories Shall be provided by the Bidder
x Air Grid Arrangement Required in each chamber for air agitation to achieve better
mixing and economy in chemical consumption.
x Inlet Gate (bidders scope) Separate Inlet Gate Shall be provided by the Bidder for each
Compartment
(xv) Instruments, alarm and Interlock Shall be provided by the Bidder as per system requirements in
34.00.00 NEUTRALIZED EFFLUENT DISPOSAL PUMPS
A) Number Two (2) numbers [one (1) number to be under operation and
the other as standby]
(ii) Fluid to be handled Regeneration waste.
(iii) Service Recirculation of regeneration waste and disposal of neutralized
regeneration waste.
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Celsius
(ix) Rated Capacity, in m3/hr Not less than 50.
capacity, in %
(xii) Suction Condition Suction Lift required.
(xiii) Head to be developed at rated Suitable to meet the system requirements.
capacity
a) Casing AISI-316.
c) Shaft AISI-316.
Variation)
(xxi) Type of coupling between Pump &
Flexible Spacer.
Motor
c) Dynamic Balancing Test To be provided
(xxiv) Performance Test
pump at site
(xxvi) Suction Strainer along with flushing Shall be provided by the Bidder. Material of each strainer shall
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

connection be SS316.
(xxviii) Trip interlock To be provided.
35.00.00 POTABLE WATER PUMPS
(i) Service Drinking/ potable water
(ii) Designation Potable water Pumps
(iii) Duty Intermittent
(iv) Location Indoor
(v) Number of Pumps required Two (2)
(vi) Number of pumps working One (1)
(vii) Number of pumps standby One (1)
(viii) Liquid handled Filtered Water
(ix) Design Temperature in degree 60
Celsius
(x) Suction Lift/ Head available (MLC) Flooded suction shall be ensured
(xi) Pump Performance Requirements
Not less than 50 M3/Hr.
a) Rated Capacity (Cu.m/hr)
b) Total Dynamic Head as per IS- To be specified by the Bidder considering 10% margin to meet
5120 at Rated Capacity (MLC) the requirements of the system as per Bid Specification. (C
c) Static head in MLC (minimum) 42 meters
d) Rated Speed (rpm) Max 1500
e) Noise Level 85 dBA
f) Permissible Tolerance in Rated
As per IS:6595
Capacity (%)
g) Permissible Tolerance in Efficiency No Negative tolerance
at Rated Capacity (%)
h) Range of Operations between 75% to 130% of rated capacity
(xii) Design Standard Hydraulic Institute Standard /IS-5120/ Equivalent Standard
(xiii) Impeller Type Closed
(xiv) Type of Gland Lubrication and Sealing Self-water
(xv) Shaft Sealing Arrangement Mechanical Seal
(xvi) Type of Pump-motor Connection Direct
(xvii) Type of Coupling Flexible
(xviii) Mode of Pump Starting Discharge Valve Fully Closed
(xix) Material of Construction
a) Casing IS 210 FG 260
b) Casing Liner ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M
c) Diffuser ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M
d) Impeller ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M
e) Wearing Rings ASTM-A743 Gr. C440
f) Shaft ASTM-A276 Gr.410
g) Shaft Seal ASTM-A276 Gr.316
h) Mechanical Seal Manufacturers Standard
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

i) Base Plate IS 2062
j) Wetted Fastner Stainless Steel AISI-304
(xx) Supply of Accessories & Services
a) Base Plate Shall be provided by the bidder
b) Foundation Bolts, Nuts, Sleeves etc. Shall be provided by the bidder
c) Suction and Discharge Companion Shall be provided by the bidder
Flanges with Bolts, Nuts and Gaskets
d) Gland Sealing and Cooling Shall be provided by the bidder
Arrangement
e) Bearing Lubrication and Cooling Shall be provided by the bidder
Arrangement
f) Suction and discharge pressure Shall be provided by the bidder
Indicator
g) Priming Connection with 3- way SS Shall be provided by the bidder
Isolating Valve
h) Pump-motor Coupling Guard Shall be provided by the bidder
i) Vent with 3-way SS Isolating Valve Shall be provided by the bidder
j) Drain Connection with Valve Shall be provided by the bidder
k) Eye-bolts, Lifting Tackle etc. Shall be provided by the bidder
(xxi) Inspection and Testing As indicated elsewhere in the specification.
DATASHEET OF PIPING & VALVES FOR DM PLANT

1.0 PIPING
SL
SERVICE MATERIAL
NO.
Raw water piping,
Carbon Steel IS-1239 Heavy Grade upto 150 mm NB and IS-3589 for sizes
1.1 Clarified Water piping,
above 150 mm with minimum pipe thickness of 6 mm.
service water piping
Carbon Steel IS-1239 Heavy Grade upto 150 mm NB and IS-3589 for sizes
1.2 Potable Water piping. above 150 mm with minimum pipe thickness of 6mm. The pipes shall be
galvanized as per IS-4736.
Demineralised water, Stainless Steel as per ASTM A- 312 Gr. 304.
1.3
Service and Size- as per schedule 40 ANSI B36.10
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

Instrument Air Piping
less than and equal to
50 mm NB.
Demineralised water,
Service and
Instrument air piping Stainless steel as per ASTM A-312 Gr. 304. Size-upto 150 mm NB as per
1.4
for sizes equal to schedule 10S, ANSI B-36.10.
greater than 65 mm
NB.
Filtered Water,
Degassed Water,
ERW Carbon Steel Pipe to ASTM 53 Gr. B / IS-1239, Part-I heavy grade for pipe
1.5 Neutralized
size up to 150mm NB and IS-3589 for 200mm NB & above (inside rubber lined)
Wastewater, De
cationized water
Hydrochloric Acid
(concentrated),
1.6 Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Hydrochloric Acid
(dilute)
Sodium Hydroxide
(concentrated),
1.7 Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Sodium Hydroxide
(dilute)
1.8 Sampling Pipe Stainless Steel to ASTM Schedule-10.
Notes:
1. For demineralised water, stainless steel shall be used for sizes of 50mm NB and below.
For small diameter pipe (<=50NB), where rubber lining is difficult, CPVC Sch. 80 (minimum) shall be used
for hydrochloric acid and stainless steel pipe instead of rubber lined steel pipe shall be used for other
services.
2.0 VALVES & GATES
2.1 Raw water, clarified CAST IRON BODY BUTTERFLY VALVES :
water, filtered water. i. Basic Design Code: All the Butterfly valves shall be of double flanged type
of low leakage rate confirming to AWWA-C-504 class 150 (min.).
ii. Material of construction
x Body: 2% Ni Cast Iron as per IS-210 Gr. FG260 with 2% Ni.
x Valve Disc: 2% Ni Cast Iron as per IS-210 Gr. FG260 with 2% Ni.
x Shaft: Stainless Steel ASTM-A-479 type 304.
x Seat ring: Clamping ring Stainless Steel ASTM-A-479 type 304.
x Shaft Bearing: Ferrobestos LA-33.
x Gland Packing: Impregnated Teflon
x Seal: Nitrile Rubber
iii. Construction: Cast Body and Disc
iv. Valve classification Code: CIBF
v. Pressure: To be suitably chosen by the Bidder according to requirement, but
not less than class 75A as per AWWA-C-504.
vi. All the butterfly valves shall be provided by the Bidder with Hand wheel or
lever as per the requirements.
vii. End preparation: Flanged, Drilled as per ANSI B16.1. Necessary counter
flange nuts, bolts, gaskets are to be provided with each valve.
viii. Testing: As per AWWA-C-504. However valve disc strength for both forward
reverse flow is to be carried out as per BS5155. Certificate for proof of design
test for similar type of valve is to be furnished by the bidder.
ix. All the butterfly valves shall be provided by the Bidder with an indicator to
show the position of the disc.
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

2.2 Decationised, Butterfly valves or Diaphragm valves shall be used for this application.
Deanionised and Diaphragm Valve
Demineralised water The Diaphragm shall conform to following requirement
application
i) Design standard: BS:5156 or equivalent of required rating/class. (minimum
rating of valves shall be PN 10).
ii) Type: Flanged and lined body ends, sealed bonnet, weir pattern, tight shut off
type
iii) Material of Construction
a. Body , Bonnet: Cast iron IS 210 Gr. FG 260 or equivalent or
Cast steel ASTM A-216 Gr. WCB
b. Body lining : Soft natural rubber, ebonite , Polypropelene
c. Handwheel : Cast Iron
d. Compressor : Stainless Steel
e. Stem and Bush : Stainless Steel
Butterfly Valve
The butterfly valves shall conform to CL Number 2.1 above except for the
following requirements:
a) Body shall be lined (minimum 3 mm) with natural rubber,
ebonite, polypropylene or PVDF.
b) Disc shall be lined with PVDF, Polypropylene or natural rubber.
c) Seat rings shall be of Nitrile rubber or Hypalon.
2.3 Acid and alkali serviceValves shall be of Diaphragm type.

These valves shall conform to above (sl number 2.2) except that the diaphragm
shall be of reinforced Teflon, EPDM/Black Butyl/ approved equivalent for acid
services and reinforced neoprene/Hypalon/approved equivalent for alkali
services and body and bonnet shall be of SS316.
2.4 Non return valve These valves shall be swing check type or dual plate type
Swing check type (non corrosive application)
Body and disc : Cast iron
Hinge pin and door/disc pin: Cast steel ASTM A216 Gr.WCB
Disc facing ring: stainless steel
Body Seat ring: Stainless steel
For application of lime, corrosive water (DM water, decationised /deanionised
water), and air,the body,cover and disc shall be lined with natural rubber,PTFE
or Viton. Bolting shall be stainless steel.
For acid services, the valves shall be of lined construction as specified above
and body/disc facingring shall be of resilient materials such as natural rubber,
PTFE or Viton.
For alkali service, the complete valve shall be stainless steel construction
(SS316).
2.5 Service Water, CAST IRON BODY GATE/GLOBE/CHECK VALVE
Clarified Water, i. Size: For sizes 65mm NB and above.
Potable Water. ii. Valve Classification Code : CIGC
i. Basic Design Code
x Gate valve - IS 780 for 50 mm - 300 mm NB
x Gate valve - IS2906 for 350 mm NB and above or as per MSS-SP-70
x Globe valve - MSS - SP 85
x Check valve - IS-5312/MSS - SP -71
x Ball - BS-5351
iii. Pressure Class - To be suitably chosen considering the pressure
requirement as indicated below:
Unless otherwise specified, all pipe work shall be suitable for a
minimum pressure of 10.0 kg/sq. cm(g) at 80 deg. C or as required by
the design of the different piping system, if higher.
iv. Construction: Cast body and bonnet / cover
v. Material of Construction
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

x Body & Bonnet/ cover: IS 210 Gr. FG 260
x Trim / Disc.: IS-210 Gr. FG 260
x Seating surface: 13% Cr steel as per IS 1570
x End Preparation: Socket welded for size equal to and below 50mm NB
and flanged with counter flanges for 65mm NB and above.
vi. Testing
x Gate: As per IS - 780 for 50 mm - 300 mm NB
x Gate:IS-2906 for sizes equal to and above 350 mm NB
x Globe: Hydrostatic Test as per MSS-SP-85
x Check: S-5312/MSS-SP-71
2.6 Potable Water, Service STAINLESS STEEL BODY/ GATE/GLOBE /CHECK/BALL VALVE
and Instrument Air. i. Service: Potable Water, Service and Instrument Air.
ii. Sizes:
x Potable Water - For sizes less than and equal to 50 mm NB.
x Service and Instrument Air- For all sizes. Ball valves shall be used in air
line.
iii. Valve Classification Code : SSGC
iv. Basic Design Code
x Gate valve - ANSI-B-16.34
x Globe valve - ANSI-B-16.34
x Check valve - ANSI-B-16.34
x Ball - BS-5351
v. Pressure Class - To be suitably chosen considering the pressure
requirement as indicated below:
Unless otherwise specified, all pipe work shall be suitable for a minimum
pressure of 10.0 kg/sq. cm(g) at 80 deg. C or as required by the design of the
different piping system, if higher.
vi. Construction: Forged body up to 50mm NB and Cast body above that
vii. Material of Construction
x Body & Bonnet/ cover: ASTM-A-182 F304 for Ball Valves:
x Body & Bonnet/ cover: A351 CF8M for cast body, A 182 F304 for forged
body,
x Trim / Disc.: ASTM-A-182 F304 for Gate, Globe, Check valves and
351CF 8M for Ball valves.
x Seating surface: 13% Cr steel as per IS 1570. For Ball valves PTFE
seats and seals.
x End Preparation: Socket welded for size equal to and below 50mm NB
and flanged with counter flanges for 65mm NB and above.
vii. Testing : As per ANSI B-16.34
2.7 Isolation Gates For i. Four numbers gate Shall be provided by the Bidder.
Filter Backwash ii. Design standard for each gate shall be IS:3042 or Eqv.
Sump iii. The gates shall be rectangular or square sluice, rising spindle type
conforming to class-1 of IS:3042.
iv. Material of Construction of each gate:
x Frame and Door: Cast Iron IS:210 Gr. 20
x Spindles, bolts & nuts : M.S. to IS:2062
x Face & seat rings: Gun metal (as per IS:3042).
x All the parts of each gates shall be applied with the coats of heavy duty
bitumastic paint.
x Each of the gates shall be provided by the Bidder with hand wheel, and
a position indicator.
x Each gate shall be FRP coated on both sides.
2.8 Isolation Gates For i. Four numbers gate Shall be provided by the Bidder.
Neutralisation pit ii. Design standard for each gate shall be IS:3042 or Eqv.
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

iii. The gates shall be rectangular or square sluice, rising spindle type
conforming to class-1 of IS:3042.
iv. Material of Construction of each gate:
x Frame and Door: Cast Iron IS:210 Gr. 20
x Spindles, bolts & nuts : M.S. to IS:2062
x Face & seat rings: Gun metal (as per IS:3042).
x All the parts of each gates shall be applied with the coats of heavy duty
bitumastic paint.
x Each of the gates shall be provided by the Bidder with hand wheel, and
a position indicator.
x Each gate shall be FRP coated on both sides.
Notes:
1) Other valves used in Acid / alkali service, the material of complete valve shall be of SS316 only.
PUMPS AND PIPE SELECTION CRITERIA
Pipe Size Velocity in m/sec

Below 50 mm 50 mm - 150 mm 200 mm & above
Pump Suction for Water 1.2 - 1.5 1.2 - 1.8
Pump Discharge for Water 1.2 - 1.8 1.8 - 2.4 2.1 - 2.5
Header 1.5 - 2.4 2.1 -2.4
Compressed air below 2 15 - 20 20 - 30 25 - 35

Kg/cm2(g)
Compressed air 2 Kg/cm2 & 20 - 30 25 - 40 35 - 45

above
Suction to compressor/ Blowers 7-8
Pump Suction for Chemical 1.0 - 1.2 1.1 - 1.3

Solution
Pump Discharge for Chemical 1.2 - 1.4 1.3 - 1.5

Solution
Note:
1. Pipe line under gravity flow shall be restricted to a flow velocity of 1 m/sec generally.
2. Channels under gravity flow shall be sized for a maximum flow velocity of 0.6 m/sec.
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
P&ID FOR DM PLANT
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
KEY PLAN FOR DM PLANT
Page 116 of 630
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION C2
ELECTRICAL

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ELECTRICAL SCOPE BETWEEN BHEL & VENDOR
THIS IS A PART OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO.-PE-TS-410-163-A001
REV-0, DATE: 09.03.2015

ELECTRICAL SCOPE BETWEEN BHEL AND VENDOR
DM/ PRE-TREATMENT/
PACKAGES: DM PLANT EFFLUENT TREATMENT / SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
SCOPE OF VENDOR: SUPPLY, ERECTION & COMMISSIONING OF VENDORS EQUIPMENT
PROJECT: 1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM TPS
S.NO DETAILS SCOPE SCOPE E&C REMARKS
SUPPLY
1 415V MCC BHEL BHEL 240 V AC (supply feeder)/415 V AC (3 PHASE 4 WIRE) supply shall be
provided by BHEL based on load data provided by vendor at contract
stage for all equipment supplied by vendor as part of contract. Any other
voltage level (AC/DC) required will be derived by the vendor.
2 Local Push Button Station (for motors) BHEL BHEL Located near the motor.
3 Power cables, control cables and screened control cables 1. For 3.b) & c): Sizes of cables required shall be informed by vendor at
for contract stage (based on inputs provided by BHEL) in the form of cable
a) both end equipment in BHELs scope BHEL BHEL listing. Finalisation of cable sizes shall be done by BHEL. Vendor shall
b) both end equipment in vendors scope BHEL Vendor provide lugs & glands accordingly.
c) one end equipment in vendors scope BHEL BHEL 2. Termination at BHEL equipment terminals by BHEL.
3. Termination at Vendor equipment terminals by Vendor.
4 Junction box for control & instrumentation cable Vendor Vendor Number of Junction Boxes shall be sufficient and positioned in the field to
minimize local cabling (max 10-12 mtrs) and trunk cable.
5 Any special type of cable like compensating, co-axial, Vendor Vendor Refer C&I portion of specification for scope of fibre Optical cables if used
prefab, MICC, optical fibre etc. between PLC/ microprocessor & DCS.
6 Cable trays, accessories & cable trays supporting system BHEL BHEL Local cabling from nearby main route cable tray (BHEL scope) to
equipment terminal (vendors scope) shall be through 100/ 50 mm. cable
100/ 50 mm cable trays/ Conduits/ Galvanised steel cable Vendor Vendor trays/ conduits/ Galvanised steel cable troughs, as per approved layout
troughs for local cabling drawing during contract stage.
7 Cable glands ,lugs and bimetallic strip for equipment Vendor Vendor 1. Double compression Ni-Cr plated brass cable glands
supplied by Vendor 2. Solder less crimping type heavy duty tinned copper lugs for power and
control cables.
8 Conduit and conduit accessories for cabling between Vendor Vendor Conduits shall be medium duty, hot dip galvanised cold rolled mild steel
equipment supplied by vendor rigid conduit as per IS: 9537.
9 Lighting BHEL BHEL
10 Equipment grounding (including electronic earthing) & BHEL BHEL Refer note no. 4 for electronic earthing
lightning protection
11 Below grade grounding BHEL BHEL
Page 1 of 2
Page 121 of 630

REV-0, DATE: 09.03.2015

ELECTRICAL SCOPE BETWEEN BHEL AND VENDOR
DM/ PRE-TREATMENT/
PACKAGES: DM PLANT EFFLUENT TREATMENT / SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
SCOPE OF VENDOR: SUPPLY, ERECTION & COMMISSIONING OF VENDORS EQUIPMENT
PROJECT: 1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM TPS
S.NO DETAILS SCOPE SCOPE E&C REMARKS
SUPPLY
12 LT Motors with base plate and foundation hardware Vendor Vendor Makes shall be subject to customer/ BHEL approval at contract stage.
13 Mandatory spares Vendor - Vendor to quote as per specification.
14 Recommended O & M spares Vendor - As specified elsewhere in specification
15 Any other equipment/ material/ service required for Vendor Vendor
completeness of system based on system offered by the
vendor (to ensure trouble free and efficient operation of
the system).
16 a) Input cable schedules (Control & Screened Control Vendor - Cable listing for Control and Instrumentation Cable and electronic earthing
Cables) cable in enclosed excel format shall be submitted by vendor during
b) Cable interconnection details for above Vendor - detailed engineering stage.
c) Cable block diagram Vendor -
17 Electrical Equipment & cable tray layout drawings Vendor - For ensuring cabling requirements are met, vendor shall furnish Electrical
equipment layout & cable tray layout drawings (both in print form as well
as in AUTOCAD) of the complete plant (including electrical area) indicating
location and identification of all equipment requiring cabling, and shall
incorporate cable trays routing details marked on the drawing as per PEM
interface comments. Cabling arrangement of the same (wherever
overhead cable trays, trenches, cable ducts, conduits etc.) shall be
decided during contract stage. Electrical equipment layout & cable tray
layout drawing shall be subjected to BHEL/ customer approval without any
commercial implications to BHEL.
18 Electrical Equipment GA drawing Vendor - For necessary interface review.
NOTES:
1. Make of all electrical equipment/ items supplied shall be reputed make & shall be subject to approval of BHEL/customer after award of contract.
2. All QPs shall be subject to approval of BHEL/customer after award of contract without any commercial implication.
3. In case the requirement of Junction Box arises on account of Power Cable size mis-match due to vendor engineering at later stage, vendor shall supply the Junction
Box for suitable termination.
4. Vendor shall indicate location of Electronic Earth pit in their Civil assignment drawing.
Page 2 of 2
Page 122 of 630

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ELECTRICAL LOAD DATA FORMAT
RATING (KW / A) Nos. CABLE VERIFICATI KKS NO
ON FROM
MOTOR
MAX. CONT
BOARD REMA LOAD DATASHEE
LOAD TITLE NAME CONT. LOCATION SIZE ROL T (Y/N)
NO. NOs RKS No.
PLATE DEMAND CODE CODE
(MCR)
UNIT (U)/STN (S)

RUNNING
STANDBY
VOLTAGE CODE*
FEEDER CODE**
EMER. LOAD (Y)
CONT.(C)/ INTT.(I)
STARTING TIME
>5 SEC (Y)
BLOCK CABLE
DRG. No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
ANNEXURE-II
NOTES: 1. COLUMN 1 TO 12 & 18 SHALL BE FILLED BY THE REQUISITIONER (ORIGINATING AGENCY); REMAINING COLUMNS ARE TO BE FILLED UP BY PEM (ELECTRICAL)/ CUSTOMER
2. ABBREVIATIONS : * VOLTAGE CODE (7):- (ac) A=11 KV, B=6.6 KV, C=3.3 KV, D=415 V, E=240 V (1 PH), F=110 V (cc): G=220 V, H=110 V, J=48 V, K=+24V, L=-24 V
: ** FEEDER CODE (8):- U=UNIDIRECTIONAL STARTER, B=BI-DIRECTIONAL STARTER, S=SUPPLY FEEDER, D=SUPPLY FEEDER (CONTACTER CONTROLLED)
JOB NO. 410 ORIGINATING AGENCY PEM (ELECTRICAL)
LOAD DATA PROJECT TITLE 1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM TPS NAME DATA FILLED UP ON
(ELECTRICAL) SYSTEM DM/ PT/ ET/ STP
DM PLANT SIGN. DATA ENTERED ON
DEPTT. / SECTION MAX SHEET 1 OF 1 REV. 00 DES SIGN. & DATE
Page 124 of 630

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
CABLE SCHEDULE FORMAT

ANNEXURE III
CABLE PATH CABLE TENTATIVE

UNIT SCOPE CABLE NO CABLE LENGTH
FROM TO PURPOSE REMARKS
CABLE NO (BHEL PEM/ SIZE
VENDOR)
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION C3
C&I

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA
DM PLANT SECTION: D
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION D
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

MECHANICAL
DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR

DUAL MEDIA FILTERS AND DM FEED PUMPS
DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR DUAL MEDIA FILTERS
1) Dual Media Filters will remove the residual suspended impurities in clarified water and the major part of
filtered water will be fed to the Activated Carbon Filters (ACF) of Demineralization System and rest part of
filtered water will be led to Overhead Filter Backwash Reservoir (located at vicinity of DM Plant Building) and
suction of Potable Water Pumps.
2) On completion of a service cycle, Dual Media Filters shall be air scoured by means of Air Blowers and then
backwashed with filtered water by means of Overhead Filter Backwash Reservoir as envisaged for
Demineralization System.
3) The backwash water generated from Filter(s) as addressed above will be collected in a Filter Backwash
Sump. Backwash Water will be pumped from Filter Backwash Sump by means of two (2) numbers
Backwash Waste Water Disposal Pumps to recycle back the water to Stilling Chamber.
4) Flow from Clarified Water Reservoir to Dual Media Filter(s) shall be by pumps.
5) The design surface flow rate shall not exceed 10.0 m^3/hr per m^2.
6) Filter Bed shall consist of Sand and Anthracite. Filter Bed shall be suitable to withstand the maximum
pressure drop encountered during the operation without breakdown.
7) The Inlet Distribution system shall be designed to give uniform distribution of water over Filter Bed. The
under Drain Collection System shall be designed for uniform collection of filtered Water and distribution of
backwash water.
8) Dual Media Filters shall be located in Demineralization System Building.
9) Air Blower for Dual Media Filter
Air Blowers for Dual Media Filters shall be located in Demineralization System Building.
Blowers shall be of Rotary Twin Lobe / Centrifugal type.
10) Overhead Filter Backwash Reservoir
The Overhead Filter Backwash Reservoir shall be constructed over ground.

Flow of filtered water from Dual Media Filter(s) to Overhead Filter Backwash Reservoir shall be by
pressure available at outlet header of Dual Media Filter(s).
11) Filter Backwash Waste Sump
The Filter Backwash Sump shall be constructed underground.
Flow of backwash from Dual Media Filter(s) to Backwash Sump shall be by gravity.
12) Backwash Waste Water Disposal Pumps
Backwash Water Disposal Pumps shall be located in Backwash Pump House.

Pumps shall be of vertical centrifugal type.
13) DMF Unit will be automatically isolated from the system under the conditions as follows:
DMF Unit : On output of predetermined volume of treated water or high turbidity, whichever occurs earlier.
DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

14) Performance Guarantee Test Procedure for Dual Media Filtration System:
Necessary pumps shall be started and flow shall be established through all the streams. Valves shall be
adjusted so as to have equal and rated distribution of flow through all the streams.
One (1) stream shall be running at a time. Samples of water will be drawn every hour from the outlet of DMF
and then tested in the laboratory. The results shall be compared against the required parameters stipulated
elsewhere under this specification.
Exhaustion of each Unit shall be indicated by the features described under Operation and Control
Philosophy for River Water Pre Treatment System. Units shall then be backwashed at the specified
conditions.
The backwashed stream shall be again put into service and tests in item will be continued. At the end of run
(as determined in above, total amount of water treated will be noted from the flow integrators.
Quantity of treated water as determined by tests as in above shall be checked against guaranteed quantity
of treated water during service cycle as in above and must be equal to or more than the guaranteed amount.
All the above mentioned tests shall be separately done for each of the streams of the DMF Units.
Each DMF Unit will have a rated continuous treated water output capacity of not less than 75 m^3/hr (net)
over and above the quantity of treated water required for backwash / regeneration / rinse of itself
and other units of the same stream or chain it belongs to. It shall be backwashed once after every 18 hours
of continuous service run.
For each DMF Unit, the guaranteed quantity of filtered water shall not be less than 1350 m^3 between two
successive backwashes.
Treated water quality from Solid Contact Clarifiers and Dual Media Filters shall be guaranteed as per
Annexure-I.
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR DMF FEED PUMPS
1) DMF Feed Pumps shall be located in Clarified Water Pump House.
2) Pumps shall take suction from Clarified Water Reservoir and be of vertical centrifugal type.
DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
ANNEXUREI
DM PLANT SECTION D1

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR DM PLANT
Telangana State Power Generation Corporation Ltd. EPC Bid Document

1x800 MW Kothagudem TPS e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15
VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-II
DEMINERALISATION SYSTEM & POTABLE WATER

TREATMENT SYSTEM
(PART-A): DEMINERALISATION SYSTEM
1.00.00 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The schematic arrangement of the DM System has been detailed in P&I

diagram enclosed with this document. The general description of the DM
System is given below:
The DM Water consumptions for various requirements are as follows:

i DMCW.
i Heat Cycle Make-Up.
i Chemical Feed System
i Condensate Polishing System.
The DM System consists of two (2) X 100% each parallel demineralization

streams along with necessary regeneration and storage arrangement. Capacity
of each DM stream shall not be less than 60 m^3/hr (net). Under normal
condition, one (1) number stream is envisaged to be kept in operation.
However under emergency situation, both the streams may be kept under
simulataneous operation.
From the Dual Media Filters, filtered water pass through the Activated Carbon
Filters, Activated Carbon Filters remove the residual chlorine, present in the
water.
The filtered water from Activated Carbon Filters enters to Weakly Acidic
Cation Exchangers and then Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers where the
resin exchanges hydrogen ions with other cations. The treated water from
Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers thus contains acids of chloride, sulphate,
bicarbonate etc. This water is then led into Degasser Towers where it enters
at the top.
Weakly Acidic Cation Exchangers will be regenerated in co-current and

thoroughfare mode with Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers. On exhaustion, a
Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger is regenerated in counter current mode with
hydrochloric acid...
The Degasser Tower is a packed column and air is blown from the bottom by
Degasser Air Blowers. Here the unstable carbonic acid is stripped into carbon
di-oxide and water. Carbon di-oxide is vented out. Water from Degasser Tower
is collected to the Degassed Water Storage Tank by gravity.
Degassed water from Degassed Water Storage Tank is pumped to the

Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers Resins of Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-II: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15 -V-IIIC-Sec-II DM.doc)
Page 137 of 630


exchange anion of strong acids with hydroxyl ions. The Water then enters to
the Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers for further exchange of anions.
Resins in Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers exchange remaining chloride,

carbon-di-oxide, silica etc. with hydroxyl ions. The water then enters into the
Mixed Bed Exchangers.
Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger will be regenerated in co-current and

thoroughfare mode with Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger. On exhaustion,
Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger is regenerated in counter current mode with
sodium hydroxide.
Hot Water Tank with electrical heating arrangement is provided for heating
the power water used for regeneration of strongly basic anion resins. This is
to ensure the regeneration at elevated temperature for complete elution of
silica from the resin bed.
Facility for Alkaline Brine Rejuvenation has been envisaged for removal of
organic matter from the strongly basic anion resin bed.
The Mixed Bed Exchanger contains both strongly acidic cation and strongly
basic anion resins. Any slip of cations/anions are exchanged and removed in
Mixed Bed Exchanger, which acts as polisher. The demineralized water, thus
produced is stored in DM Water Storage Tank.
On exhaustion, Mixed Bed Exchanger is regenerated using hydrochloric acid

and sodium hydroxide.
Regeneration waste from DM system shall be led to the Neutralization Pit for
further disposal. The regeneration waste of DM System shall be generally self
neutralizing. It consists of two compartments. Once a compartment gets full, the
Neutralized Waste Disposal Pumps are started and kept in recirculation mode.
pH of the effluent is measured and acid/alkali is added as required. The blowers
are run to mix the added chemicals. Once the pH value become in the
acceptable range, the neutralized effluent is disposed to Central Monitoring
Basin.
The regeneration facilities as envisaged for Ion Exchange Units are as follows:
a) Acid Unloading System through Pumps, Acid Storage Tanks and

Measuring Tanks etc. for regeneration of Cation Resins.
b) Alkali Unloading System through Pumps, Caustic Storage Tanks,

Measuring Tanks, etc. for regeneration of Anion Resins.
All regeneration wastes and other drainages from Ion Exchange Units are led to
Neutralisation Pit, each compartment of which shall be capable to hold
regeneration effluent generated from One (1) complete chain plus 20% margin.
2.00.00 SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND SERVICES
The equipment and accessories to be furnished and put into operation and all
other required services are detailed herein under. The items, though not
specifically mentioned but needed to make the system complete in all respects

Page 138 of 630


and reliable for safe and smooth operation and guaranteed performance, shall
also be treated as though included and the same shall be furnished, unless
otherwise specifically excluded elsewhere.
2.01.00 Two (2) numbers Activated Carbon Filters, each complete with internals, integral
pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.02.00 Two (2) numbers Weakly Acidic Cation Exchangers, each complete with
internals, integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.03.00 Two (2) numbers Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers, each complete with
2.04.00 Two (2) numbers forced draft Degasser Towers [One (1) number on each
Degassed Water Storage Tank], each complete with internals, integral pipe
works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.05.00 Three (3) numbers Degasser Blowers, each complete with electrical drive motor
and all other accessories as required.
2.06.00 Two (2) numbers Degassed Water Storage Tanks, each complete with integral
2.07.00 Three (3) numbers Degassed Water Transfer Pumps, each complete with
electrical drive motor and all other accessories as required.
2.08.00 Two (2) numbers Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers, each complete with
internals, integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required
2.09.00 Two (2) numbers Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers, each complete with
2.10.00 Two (2) numbers Mixed Bed Exchanger s, each complete with internals, integral
2.11.00 Two (2) numbers Air Blowers for Mixed Bed Exchangers (common for
Neutralization Pit), each complete with electrical drive motor, suction filters,
suction & discharge silencers, relief valve and all other accessories as required.
2.12.00 Two (2) numbers hose stations for unloading Hydrochloric Acid. The hose
station shall have two (2) Numbers 80 mm NB rubber hose connection.
2.13.00 Two (2) numbers Hydrochloric Acid Unloading Pumps each complete with
2.14.00 Two (2) numbers Hydrochloric Acid Storage Tanks each complete with integral
2.15.00 Two (2) numbers Hydrochloric Acid Measuring Tanks for Cation Exchangers,
complete with integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.16.00 One (1) number Hydrochloric Acid Measuring Tank for Mixed Bed Exchangers,

Page 139 of 630


2.17.00 Two (2) numbers hose stations for unloading Caustic. The hose station shall
have two (2) numbers 80 mm NB rubber hose connection.
2.18.00 Two (2) numbers Caustic Unloading Pumps, each complete with electrical drive
motor and all other accessories as required.
2.19.00 One (1) number Activated Carbon Filter for caustic, complete with internals,
integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.20.00 Two (2) number Caustic Storage Tanks, each complete with integral pipe works,
valves and all other accessories as required.
2.21.00 Two (2) numbers Caustic Measuring Tanks for Anion Exchangers, complete
with integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.22.00 One (1) number Caustic Measuring Tank for Mixed Bed Exchangers, complete
with integral pipe works, valves and all other accessories as required.
2.23.00 One (1) number Brine Preparation Tank, complete with integral pipe works,
valves and all other accessories as required.
2.24.00 One (1) number Regeneration Water Heater for regeneration of anion resins,
2.25.00 Two (2) numbers Regeneration Water Pumps, each complete with electrical
drive motor and all other accessories as required.
2.26.00 One (1) number Acid Measuring Tank for neutralization, complete with integral
2.27.00 One (1) number Caustic Measuring Tank for neutralization, complete with
2.28.00 One (1) number Neutralization Pit (with two compartments), complete with
2.29.00 Two (2) numbers Neutralized Effluent Disposal Pumps, each complete with
2.30.00 Two (2) numbers safety showers near acid/ caustic storage tanks.
2.31.00 One (1) number Central Sampling Rack (to be located at Express Laboratory to
be located at ground floor of DM Plant Building)
2.32.00 First fill of filter media, resins, and degasser tower packings for all the units
complete with make-up filter media, resin and packings for first three years of
operation. Quantity of make-up resins shall be calculated on the basis of 3%
and 5% attrition loss per annum for cation and anion resin respectively. For filter
make-up a loss of 10% per annum shall be considered.
2.33.00 All consumables, bulk chemicals like hydrochloric acid etc., required for pre
comissioning, PG test till taking over along with topping up required for 3 months
of operation shall be in the scope of the Bidder.

Page 140 of 630


2.34.00 All integral and interconnected pipe works, valves, strainers, pressure relief
valves, instrument stubs, specialties, sumps, gates, all types of pipe supports,
pipe racks, pipe bridges etc. for the entire system.
2.35.00 Supply and application of shop painting and final painting at manufacturer's
works and at site for the entire system as specified elsewhere in Volume III-C of
this Bid Document.
2.36.00 All instrumentations and controls complete with accessories as addressed in

Technical Specifications for Instrumentation and Control - Volume -VI of this Bid
Document.
2.37.00 All electrical equipment and accessories as required for this system shall be
supplied. These equipment and accessories shall meet the technical
requirements of individual equipment specification covered under Electrical
Equipment & Accessories - Volume -V of this Bid Document.
2.38.00 All civil as well as structural design, construction and architectural works as
addressed in General Specification and Design Criteria for Civil and Structural
Work - Volume VII / A, General Specification and Design Criteria for
Architectural Work - Volume - VII / B & Technical Specification for Civil,
Structural and Architectural Work Volume- VII / C of this Bid Document.
2.39.00 All equipment and accessories as addressed in Specifications for Ventilation

and Air Conditioning System - Volume III-D of this Bid Document.
2.40.00 All consumables (lubricating oil, inhibitor for oil), mandatory spares,
recommended spares, spares required for erection and commissioning of
complete system, new set of special tools and tackles, fixtures etc. required for
regular operation and maintenance of the system as addressed in Lead
Specification - Volume II-A of this Bid Document.
2.41.00 Services included under this Specification
All services as addressed in Lead Specification - Volume II-A of this Bid

Document need to be considered as included with reference to Demineralization
System, under the scope of Specification:
3.00.00 EXCLUSIONS
Following items shall be considered as excluded from the scope:
3.01.00 Supply of river water.
3.02.00 Supply of construction water and construction power.
3.03.00 For exclusions with reference to electrical equipment and accessories, Bidder
may please refer to Technical Specifications for Electrical Equipment &
Accessories - Volume -V of this Bid Document.
3.04.00 For exclusions with reference to civil as well as structural design, construction
and architectural works, Bidder may please refer to General Specification and
Design Criteria for Civil and Structural Work - Volume VII/A, General
Specification and Design Criteria for Architectural Work - Volume VII/B &
Technical Specification for Civil, Structural and Architectural Work - Volume

Page 141 of 630


VII/C of this Bid Document.
4.00.00 INTERFACE POINTS
Not Applicable.
5.00.00 SALIENT DESIGN FEATURES
5.01.00 The clarified water analysis to be adopted for the design of DM System has
been furnished in Annexure-I enclosed along with this document.
5.02.00 Design qualities of treated water from various Units of DM System as

envisaged have been described elsewhere in this specification.
5.03.00 Ion Exchange Resin
a) Resins shall be of reputed make and must have been in use in

demineralising systems capable of producing water as specified or
better.
b) The resin charge shall consist of material properly selected, washed,

processed and graded to provide the guaranteed capacity and life,
and shall have adequate resistance to attrition losses during its
guaranteed quality output life.
b) The resin shall be insoluble in acids, alkalis or common solvents. The

resin shall be able to withstand a temperature of 60 degree C
minimum.
c) All Resins shall be supplied in manufactures own sealed containers.

No broken drum/containers or loose packing for resins will be
accepted.
d) The Bidder shall provide all details and calculations, inclusive of resin
characteristic curves marked-up with duty/design points etc., as back-
up with reference to selection of at regeneration levels, designed resin
quantities, quality of treated wateretc. The Bidder should consider
10% (minimum) deration over the corrected exchange capacity,
obtained from the published manufacturers resin literatures to arrive
at operating exchange capacities for different kinds of resins.
e) The cation resins for Weakly Acidic Cation Exchangers shall have
cross linked polyacrylic matrix with carboxylic acid as functional group.
The same shall be suitable for thorough-fare and co-current
regeneration.
The cation resins for Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers shall have
styrene-divinyl benezene matrix with sulphonates as functional group.

Page 142 of 630


The same shall be suitable for counter current regeneration.
The attrition loss of the cation resins shall be guaranteed not to

exceed three (3) percent per year for the five (5) years of operation.
Suitable regeneration levels and resin quantities for Weakly Acidic

Cation Exchangers and Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers shall be
selected to ensure minimum leakage of cations as specified
elsewhere in this specification.
f) The anion resins for Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers shall have
macro-porous cross linked polystyrene matrix with tertiary amine
(minimum 90%) as functional group. The same shall be suitable for
thorough-fare and co-current regeneration.
The anion resins for Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers shall be Type-I
and have macro-porous styrene-divinyl benezene matrix with
quaternary ammonium (minimum 95%) type functional group. The
same shall be suitable for counter current regeneration.
The attrition loss of the anion resins shall be guaranteed not to exceed
five (5) percent per year for the first five (5) years of operation.
Suitable regeneration levels and resin quantities for Weakly Basic

Anion Exchangers and Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers shall be
selected to ensure minimum leakage of anions and silica as specified
5.04.00 The type of mixed bed cation & anion resins shall be as described above for
Strongly Acidic Cation and Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers. The resins
shall be suitable for co-current / counter-current regeneration.
5.05.00 The physical and chemical properties of ion exchange resins shall be tested
by the methods as specified in IS: 7330.
5.06.00 For the regeneration of weak and strong cation exchanger units, power water
used shall be degassed water.
5.07.00 For the regeneration of weakly/ Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers and Mixed
Bed Exchangers, power water used shall be demineralized water.
5.08.00 Cation resin of DM System shall be regenerated by hydrochloric acid (30-33%

w/v) and anion resins by sodium hydroxide available in lye (40-48% w/v) form.
All chemicals shall be as per the requirements of technical grade as per
relevant IS.
5.09.00 The total time of regeneration of a DM Stream (Activated Carbon Filter,

Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger, Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger, Weakly
Basic Anion Exchanger and Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger) except the
Mixed Bed Exchanger shall not exceed four (4) hours.

Page 143 of 630


5.10.00 The total time of regeneration of a complete DM Stream (Activated Carbon

Filter, Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger, Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger,
Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger, Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger and Mixed
Bed Exchanger Unit) shall not exceed six (6) hours.
5.11.00 Counter-current regeneration for Strongly Acidic Cation Exchangers and

Strongly Basic Anion Exchangers shall be adopted. For Weakly Acidic Cation
, Weakly Basic Anion Exchangers , regeneration may be co-current. For MB
Exchangers, regeneration may be co-current / counter-current.
5.12.00 Regeneration level in Strongly Acidic Cation and Strongly Basic Anion in DM
system to be so adopted that the resultant effluent become self neutralizing.
Moreover the regeneration effluent from MB Unit shall individually be self
neutralizing in nature.
5.13.00 Regeneration levels in Strongly Acidic Cation and Strongly Basic Anion
Exchanger shall be so adopted such that regeneration waste generated from
cation and anion exchangers of a DM stream is self neutralized in nature.
5.14.00 Regeneration levels in MB Exchanger shall be so adopted such that that

regeneration acidic and alkaline waste from MB Exchanger of a DM stream is
self neutralizing in nature.
5.15.00 A min. of 300 mm freeboard shall be provided for all the atmospheric tanks.
5.16.00 Under drain system shall be either header lateral or strainer on plate type. In
case of header lateral system, no subfill shall be used which may come in
contact with water. In case of strainer on plate type design, an additional
manhole shall be provided to give access below the bed plate.
5.17.00 For calculations of anion exchange capacity and silica leakage, the
temperature of alkali for regeneration should be taken as 25 degree C for
regeneration of Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger only.
5.18.00 The regeneration level, resin quantity, treated water quality and chemical
consumption for the Weakly Basic Anion and Strongly Basic Anion
Exchangers shall be designed, selected and guaranteed based on
regeneration of the same at ambient temperature i.e. 25 degree C. However,
all ion exchangers, degassifying tower and filters shall be designed for inlet
water temperature of 10 degree C.
5.19.00 Further specific salient design features of major equipment and accessories
have been furnished under Annexure- II
In addition to above, required general technical features for Pressure Vessels,
Storage Vessels, Piping, Fittings, Valves, Miscellaneous Pumps, Protective
Lining, Painting, Mechanical Erection, Testing and Commissioning have been
addressed under Sections VII to XIV as attached elsewhere in Volume III-C of
this Bid Document.
6.00.00 OPERATION AND CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
6.01.00 DM system shall be controlled and monitored from PLC based control system

Page 144 of 630


(DM PLC) through PC based workstations located in Control Room inside

Demineralization System Building and 2 nos. LVS provided.
6.02.00 The basic mode of operation of Demineralization System is envisaged to be

semiautomatic and sequential mode in nature Potable Water Treatment
system shall also be controlled & monitored from the DM PLC. DM PLC shall
be connected to the common BOP network for remote operation / monitoring
from CCR. BOP network shall be interfaced with DDCMIS through soft links.
1 no OWS shall be placed in CCR control room in TG building for monitoring
purpose of shift charge engineer.
6.03.00 Filters/Ion exchange units will be automatically isolated from the system under
the conditions as follows:
Activated : On output of predetermined volume of treated water or

Carbon Filter high differential pressure across the filter bed,
whichever occurs first
Weakly Acidic : On output of predetermined volume of treated water
Cation
Exchanger
Strongly Acidic : On output of predetermined volume of treated water or
Cation high sodium leakage, whichever occurs first.
Exchanger
Weakly Basic : On output of predetermined volume of treated water
Anion
Exchanger
Strongly Basic : On output of predetermined volume of treated water or
Anion abnormal pH or high conductivity or high silica,
Exchanger whichever occurs first.
Mixed Bed : On output of predetermined volume of treated water or
Exchanger abnormal pH or high conductivity or high silica,
whichever occurs first.
6.04.00 On exhaustion, the particular filter/exchanger will be completely isolated from

the system automatically and an alarm status be displayed on the Operators
station.
6.05.00 The operator will initiate the operation of backwashing /regeneration/rinsing/ of

a particular filter /ion-exchange unit, and the change from one step of the
sequence to the next will be automatic. The system will employ a logical
system, which will link the various steps such as closing/opening of different
valves, starting/stopping of various pumps, which make a sequence. The
logical system will adhere to the correct sequence of operation and the
pre-determined (adjustable) time-intervals. The system will be interlocked so
that the necessary pre-requisite for each step, are completed prior to
proceeding to the next step. The automatic sequence of operations shall be
interruptible at any time by the operator and operator shall be able to take over
the control to manual from that step onwards.
6.06.00 During regeneration, the progress of different sequence/sub-process shall be

displayed to the operator in the form of step description, which is in progress,
the set time for that step, the elapsed time for that step, etc. Failure in any
operation will also be indicated.

Page 145 of 630


6.07.00 It shall be possible for the operator to extend the time of a particular step. The
timer will restart once the operator puts back the system in auto and the other
steps will then follow as programmed. The progress of the sequence shall be
displayed to the operator. The system will incorporate the necessary safety
systems, locking systems and manual emergency system. On failure of logic
system in between, the failure shall be displayed to the operator and the valves
corresponding to that unit, being regenerated will automatically open or close
as required.
6.08.00 Once a filter/exchanger has been backwashed/regenerated it will not be put

back into service automatically, but operator will have to manually put back into
service through a Selection Key.
6.9.00 Apart from complete automatic regeneration which includes fixed time rinsing
facility, separate rinsing facility shall also be provided for each of the exchanger
units to carry out rinsing remote manually, which will be required in cases:
i) When a regenerated unit had been off the service for quite some time.
ii) When additional rinsing during the regeneration operation apart from
the fixed programmed rinsing of automatic regeneration process is
required to be carried out.
6.10.00 During automatic progress of the sequence the opening and closing of different
valves shall also be indicated to the operator. The pumps which will be under
operation in course of regeneration, need to be interlocked with reference to
the required parameters for safe regeneration. To provide additional manual
over-ride facility for individual type of filter or exchanger, each of them shall be
provided with "Auto-Off-Manual" Key. Automatic sequential operations shall be
carried out with individual A/M Key in Auto position only.
6.11.00 However, A/M keys in "Manual" position shall permit over riding facility for
respective unit through "Service-Off-Regeneration-Off-Extra Rinse-Off" key
provided for each filter/ ion-exchanger unit and another Multi Position Manual
Regeneration Key common for particular type of filter/exchanger. For cation
and anion exchangers a separate key shall be provided for backwash, which is
an optional step in a regeneration sequence. A "Double Regeneration Key"
shall also be provided for these exchangers. Indication on Operators station
display shall be there for each step of "Service-Off-Regeneration-Off-Extra
Rinse-Off" Selection Key.
6.12.00 All the above functions shall be carried out by A/M Keys and Selection Keys
pertinent to interlock & sequence logic.
6.13.00 The options in Operator Station display unit as described hereinafter shall be
provided as minimum:
a) Auto-Manual Selection Keys for each filter/exchanger.
b) Auto-Manual Selection Keys for all drives.
c) Tank selection, drive selection, valve selection etc. as required.
d) Regeneration Advance, Hold, Hold Reset, Stop, Skip, etc.
6.14.00 A separate graphic depicting the complete process operations shall be

provided in LCD monitor. This graphic on monitor shall indicate the different

Page 146 of 630


filters, exchanger units, measuring tanks, opening / closing of different valves,

ON/OFF status of different pumps and blowers, etc. Colour coding shall be
used to differentiate lines for different services, such as, service water line,
backwash lines, acid/alkali lines, etc.
6.15.00 Quality parameters, such as pH, conductivity, Silica etc. and, level and flow rate
shall also be displayed on the LCD monitor.
6.16.00 Pneumatically operated valves will be installed at inlet, outlet, back wash,
regeneration and rinse line of each filter, ion-exchange units etc. The valves
will be closed or opened, as required, in automatic cycles by PLC. Pneumatic
operated valves not connected with semi-automatic regeneration system, shall
have individual open/ close Selection Key at monitor.
6.17.00 Air Vent valve of all filters/exchangers shall have open/close Selection Key at
monitor. This shall also be connected to PLC.
6.18.00 All on-off type control valves shall be diaphragm type with diaphragm actuator.
The valves shall be provided along with the accessories like air filter regulator,
air lock relay, position transmitter as applicable & detailed elsewhere in this
specification and shall have facility for operation from housing itself.
6.19.00 All bleed valves coming on backwash water line and regenerant chemical line,
and also air vent valve of each filters / exchanger vessels will be "Spring to
Open - Air to Close" type. The valves coming on inlet and outlet lines of filters /
exchanger units, regenerant chemical inlet lines and all other lines except those
mentioned above shall be "Spring to Close - Air to Open" type. The pump
recirculation valve will however be "Spring to Open - Air to Close" type.
Solenoid valves for all "Spring to Open - Air to Close" type valves shall be de-
energized to open while those for "Spring to Close - Air to Open" valves shall
be energized to open. The valves will be closed or opened, as required, in
automatic cycles.
6.20.00 All actuators shall be slow acting type to prevent water hammer in the system
and pipeline. Each auto-valve shall have limit switch for indication of opening
and closing status in the LCD monitor.
6.21.00 All pneumatic/motor-operated valves shall also have local device for
emergency local manual operation.
6.22.00 All pumps, discharge valves of all pumps, pneumatic valves, drive motors, shall
have facility for remote manual operation from Operators Station LCD.
Fail safe operation shall be ensured. Specially when power failed and power
restored times, and air failure/air restoration times all the valves in total system
shall go to fail safe mode so that the water already avilable in system shall not
be contaminated.
6.23.00 Solenoid valves shall be mounted in the racks of the local panels. The valves
shall be provided with all accessories such as isolating cocks, filters, air supply
headers as required & detailed elsewhere in this specification. and shall have
facility for operation from rack itself. Name plates with tag number shall be
provided for each and every valve.
6.24.00 Separate conductivity cells shall be employed for measuring the conductivity in

Page 147 of 630


the service outlet and in the rinse line of ion exchanger units for normal and
rinsing operation. The cell in the rinsing line shall be automatically isolated
during the first half of the rinsing cycle and shall be connected automatically
during the second half of rinsing cycle when the conductivity is less than 100
micromhos / cm excess over the rinse water conductivity.
6.25.00 All drive motors shall be provided with arrangement of local starting and
stopping. Local starting shall be possible through remote/local Selection facility
in MCC. Tripping of drive motors from local Push-Button stations shall be
permissible irrespective of the position of remote/local Selection facility. Local
Stop Push-Button shall be locked after tripping the motor from local. All pumps
and blowers shall also be provided with Auto-off-Manual Selection Key except
Transfer pumps. All motors, valves, etc. shall be connected to PLC and all the
above functions described above shall be performed (even local operation as
required) in PLC except the drives as enlisted below:
a) Transfer pumps No PLC operation.
b) A/C and Ventilation System fans, pumps and other drives No PLC
operation.
6.26.00 Although the basic operation of Demineralization System is semiautomatic in

nature, following operations shall be performed manually.
a) Transfer of Acid
i) Hydrochloric acid will be unloaded from the road tank-cars by

operation of any one of the Acid Transfer Pumps and will be
stored in Acid Storage Tanks. Operation shall be controlled
from local panel.
ii) Hydrochloric acid, stored in tanks, will be led remote manually

or by automatic sequence by gravity to the Acid Measuring
Tanks for cation, mixed bed units to fill up to the desired level.
Necessary tank selection key shall be provided in Operator
Station display unit. Subsequent transfer of acid from the
Measuring Tanks to the Ion-Exchanger Units as required in
regeneration operation is however automatic.
b) Transfer of Alkali
i) Sodium hydroxide in lye form shall be unloaded from road tank

cars by operation of one of the Alkali Transfer Pumps and will
be stored in Alkali Storage Tank. Operation shall be controlled
from local panel.
ii) Transfer of alkali from Storage Tanks to the respective

Measuring Tanks for Anion and Mixed Bed Exchanger Units
will be done remote manually or by automatic sequence by
gravity. Necessary Selection key shall be provided for this in
Operator Station display. However, subsequent transfer of
alkali to respective Ion Exchanger Units will be automatic.
c) Neutralization of Waste from DM System

Page 148 of 630


i) After completion of regeneration the waste generated during

regenerations will be thoroughly recirculated in the
neutralization pit and if necessary acid/alkali will be added to
make the pH of waste within permissible range.
ii) When required pH of waste solution has been reached, the

waste solution will be disposed to Waste Water Treatment
system. The pump will automatically be tripped when the level
in neutralization pit reaches very low.
7.00.00 QUALITY CONTROL & SURVEILLANCE
With reference to requirements and stipulations for Quality Assurance, Bidder

may please refer to Lead Specification - Volume II-A of this Bid Document.
8.00.00 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING, PERFORMANCE

GUARANTEE
8.01.00 Shop Tests
Shop tests shall include all tests to be carried out at Bidder's works, works of
their sub-vendors and at works where materials to be used for fabrication of
equipment are manufactured. The tests to be carried out shall include but not
be limited to the following:
a) Composition of all material, castings, forgings, etc.
b) Hydraulic tests for pressure vessels, pipes, valves, pump casing etc.
c) Tests to check faults in protective lining and painting.
d) Static balancing test for agitators, stirrers, paddles etc.
e) Static and dynamic balancing tests on all impellers.
f) Performance tests (Head, Capacity and Power) for each of pumps and
blowers.
g) Tests for physical and chemical characteristics of activated carbon and

ion exchange resins.
h) All tests with reference to instrumentations and controls complete with

accessories as addressed in Technical Specifications for
Instrumentation and Control - Volume -VI of this Bid Document.
i) All tests with reference to electrical equipment and accessories as

addressed in Technical Specifications for Electrical Equipment &
8.02.00 Tests before Trial Run

Page 149 of 630


Bidder shall carry out tests at site to prove to the Purchaser that individual
equipment of all the System complies with the requirements stipulated and is
erected in accordance with requirements specified. Before the System is put
on trial run, the Bidder will be required to conduct tests to demonstrate to the
Purchaser that each individual item is capable of correctly performing the
functions for which it has been designed for. These tests may be conducted
concurrently with those required under commissioning sequence. Tests
required shall in general be as follows:
a) The tests to be carried out for the fabricated storage vessels shall
include:
i. During fabrication and before lining:
a) Bottom testing for leakage by soap solution, after the bottom

and at least the bottom course of the shell plate have been
welded.
b) Hydraulic shell testing for leakage.
c) Fixed roof test for leakage by soap solution.
ii. After lining:
Water leakage test for storage tank shall be carried out by filling it
with water up to the overflow level.
b) All piping and valves, after installation, will be tested hydrostatically at

one and half times of the maximum attainable pressure in the system to
check against leak tightness.
c) All valves/isolation gates shall be operated throughout 100% of the

travel and these should function without any trouble whatsoever.
d) Each of all pumps and blowers shall be run with the specified fluid from
shut off condition to valve wide-open condition. Head developed will be
checked from the discharge pressure gauge reading. Capacity may be
checked from flow indicator where available. Otherwise capacity shall
be checked from the volume of fluid handled (determined from level
indicator reading of concerned tank) wherever applicable and duration
of test.
e) Each of pumps and blowers shall be tested at site to run smoothly

without undue vibration, flow pulsation, temperature rise in bearing
parts, noise etc.
f) Each of all the agitators and other rotating/moving devices shall be run
at the rated speed with water/chemicals up to the normal water level for
a period of twenty four (24) hours. During this period all the components
shall function smoothly without any unbalance, vibration, overheating at
bearing parts etc.
g) All the rubber lining are to be subjected to the following tests as per
relevant code:

Page 150 of 630


i. Adhesion test
ii. Resistance to bleeding
iii. Thickness measurement
iv. Shore hardness
v. High voltage spark test
h) Epoxy painting shall be checked by dry type thickness gauge.
i) All monorail hoists shall be subjected to full working load during all
motions without showing any sign of defect.
j) Visual check on all structural components, welding, painting etc.
j) All tests with reference to instrumentations and controls complete with

accessories as addressed in Technical Specifications for
Instrumentation and Control - Volume -VI of this Bid Document.
k) All tests with reference to electrical equipment and accessories as

addressed in Technical Specifications for Electrical Equipment &
8.03.00 Performance Guarantee Test Procedure for DM System
a) Necessary pumps shall be started and flow shall be established through

all the streams. Valves shall be adjusted so as to have equal and rated
distribution of flow through all the streams.
b) One (1) stream shall be running at a time. Samples of water will be

drawn every hour from the outlet of Activated Carbon Filter, Weakly
Acidic Cation Exchanger, Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger, Degasified
Water Storage Tank, Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger, Strongly Basic
Anion Exchanger and Mixed Bed Exchanger and then tested in the
laboratory. The results shall be compared against the required
parameters stipulated elsewhere under this specification.
c) Exhaustion of each Unit shall be indicated by the features described

under Operation and Control Philosophy for Demineralization System.
Units shall then be backwashed / regenerated at the specified
regeneration level. Total amount of chemicals required for regeneration
and the duration of chemical injection /regeneration of each Ion
Exchange Unit shall be noted against the guaranteed figures.
d) The regenerated stream shall be again put into service and tests in item
will be continued. At the end of run (as determined in above, total
amount of water treated will be noted from the flow integrators.
e) Inlet water analysis is determined by making arithmetic average of all

hourly readings of clarified water taken during the test.
f) Based on this inlet water analysis, regeneration level employed, resin

volume provided and characteristic curves of the resins employed, the
capacity of each stream in terms of total volume of treated water (m^3)

Page 151 of 630


between two (2) successive regenerations shall be calculated. Resin

volume shall not include the buffer and inert layers provided. The
calculation shall be approved by the Purchaser / Engineer.
g) Quantity of treated water as determined by tests as in above shall be

checked against calculated quantity of treated water during
regeneration as in above and must be equal to or more than the
calculated amount.
h) All the above mentioned tests shall be separately done for each of the
streams of the complete DM System.
8.04.00 Performance Guarantee parameters for Demineralization System
a) Each pump shall be guaranteed for capacity, total dynamic head and
power consumption.
b) All blowers shall be guaranteed for head and power consumption.
c) Activated Carbon Filter
i) Each Activated Carbon Filter will have a rated continuous

treated water output capacity of not less than 60 m^3/hr (net)
over and above the quantity of treated water required for
backwash / regeneration / rinse of itself and other units of the
same stream or chain it belongs to. It shall be backwashed
once after every 18 hours of continuous service run.
ii) Free chlorine content of treated water shall be nil.
d) Ion Exchange Units
i) Each Ion Exchange Unit will have a rated continuous treated

water output capacity of not less than 60 m^3/hr (net) over and
above the quantity of treated water required for backwash /
regeneration / rinse of itself and other units of the same stream
or chain it belongs to. Except Mixed Bed Units, each Ion
Exchange Unit shall be regenerated once after every 18 hours
of continuous service run. Each Mixed Bed Unit shall be
regenerated once after every 126 hours of continuous service
run.
ii) Net output from each of Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger Unit,
Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger Unit, Weakly Basic Anion
Exchanger Unit, Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger Unit between
two regeneration shall be not less than 1080 m^3 of treated
water and that for each of Mixed Bed Exchanger Unit shall be
not less than 7560 m^3 of treated water for the design water
analysis as exhibited in Annexure-I. In case water analysis is
different from the design values, guaranteed quantity shall be
calculated as indicated elsewhere in this Specification and
guarantee shall be applicable on this calculated quantity.

Page 152 of 630


iii) Chemical consumption of the ion exchange units as indicated

by the Bidder shall be guaranteed against the regeneration
level employed and resin volume provided without any
tolerance.
The guaranteed values of chemical consumption shall hold

good for chemicals conforming to following specification :
i) Hydrochloric Acid IS-265 (Tech Grade)
ii) Sodium Hydroxide IS-252 (Rayon grade available in

Flakes)
iv) The total time for backwash (as applicable) and regeneration
of a stream of Demineralization System Stream (for Activated
Carbon Filter - Weakly Acidic Cation Exchanger - Strongly
Acidic Cation Exchanger - Weakly Basic Anion Exchanger -
Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger) except the Mixed Bed
Exchanger shall not exceed 4 hours.
v) The total time for complete backwash (as applicable) and

regeneration of a stream of Demineralization System Stream
and (for Activated Carbon Filter - Weakly Acidic Cation
Exchanger - Strongly Acidic Cation Exchanger - Weakly Basic
Anion Exchanger - Strongly Basic Anion Exchanger - Mixed
Bed Exchanger) shall not exceed 6 hours.
vi) Qualities of treated water from various units are envisaged as

follows:
Water Quality at the outlet of MB Exchanger:

Total Electrolyte 0.1 ppm, max.
Total SiO2 0.01 ppm SiO2, max.
Iron as Fe Nil
Free CARBON DI-OXIDE ppm as Nil
CARBON DI-OXIDE
Total Hardness Nil
0
pH value at 25 C 6.8 - 7.2
Conductivity, micro mho/cm < 0.1 at 25 0C
Water Quality at the outlet of Strongly Basic Anion
Exchanger:
SiO2 <0.1 ppm as SiO2
Conductivity, micro mho/cm < 5.0 at 25 0C
Water Quality at the outlet of Degasser Tower:
CARBON DI-OXIDE content < 5 ppm as Carbon
Di-Oxide.

Page 153 of 630


Water Quality at the outlet of Strongly Acidic Cation

Exchanger:
Sodium <1.0 ppm as CaCO3
Hardness Not Detectable
9.00.00 BID EVALUATION CRITERIA
With reference to Bid Evaluation Criteria, Bidder may please refer to Lead
Specification - Volume I of this Bid Document.
10.00.00 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TOLERANCE AND PENALTY
10.01.00 Liquidated Damages (LD) for Additional Power Consumption
With reference to Additional Power Consumption, Bidder may please refer to

Lead Specification - Volume II-A of this Bid Document.
10.02.00 Liquidate Damages (LD) for Non Achievement of Specific Performance:
The performance Guarantee parameters for Demineralisation System have

been indicated elsewhere in this specification.
No negative tolerance in respect flow, head and other performance guarantee

parameters are acceptable to the Purchaser. In case, any equipment of
Demineralisation System is not able to achieve the performance guarantee
parameters during the Performance Guarantee Tests, Bidder shall make
necessary modifications or replace the Equipment/ Plant or any part within
three months period from the date of conducting PG test. If even after
rectification, the Equipment/Plant is not able to achieve the guaranteed
performance parameters, the Purchaser shall have right to reject the
Equipment/Plant. In such case, the Bidder shall pay back the total amount
paid to them with reference to the Equipment/Plant (with all taxes and duties
as applicable) to the Purchaser.
10.03.00 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN DELIVERY & COMMISSIONING
10.04.00 With reference to Liquidated Damages for Delay in Delivery & Commissioning
, Bidder may please refer to Conditions of Contract - Volume I of this Bid
Document.
11.00.00 SPARES
With reference to Spares, Bidder may please refer to Lead Specification -

Volume II-A of this Bid Document.
12.00.00 TOOLS & TACKLES
With reference to Tools and Tackles, Bidder may please refer to Lead
Specification - Volume II-A of this Bid Document.
13.00.00 DRAWINGS / DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER

Page 154 of 630


The Bidder's formal proposal must be accompanied by the following

Documents/Drawings/Information:
13.01.00 All the details as addressed under Bid Proposal Sheets under Schedule-IX-B
of Volume-IX of the EPC Bid Document.
13.02.00 Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the complete system.
13.03.00 Dimensional General Arrangement Drawing for the complete system.
13.04.00 Electrical Load List for the complete system.
13.05.00 Schedule of terminal points and their characteristics.
13.06.00 Quality assurance plan.
13.07.00 Requirement of construction power & water with the required characteristics,
quantum etc.
13.08.00 Experience list addressing the details complete with the locations where
Bidder have supplied and commissioned similar systems for similar
application under similar duty conditions as specified under this EPC Bid
Document.
13.09.00 List of imported items, if any.
13.10.00 List of proposed Sub-Vendors.
13.11.00 In case Bidder is offering equipment/plant/test procedures as per International

Standards not mentioned specifically in the Bid Documents, he should furnish
at least three (3) copies of English Version of the same along with the offer,
for consideration.
13.12.00 All Documents/Drawings/Information as addressed in Technical

Specifications for Instrumentation and Control - Volume -VI of this Bid
Document.

Specifications for Electrical Equipment & Accessories - Volume -V of this Bid
Document.
13.14.00 All Documents/Drawings/Information as addressed in General Specification

and Design Criteria for Civil and Structural Work - Volume VII/A, General
13.15.00 All Documents/Drawings/Information as addressed in Specifications for

Ventilation and Air Conditioning System - Volume III-D of this Bid Document.
14.00.00 DRAWINGS / DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED AFTER AWARD OF

CONTRACT
The Bidder need to comply with all Documents/Drawings/Information already

furnished in their Bid and subsequent correspondences/clarifications if any till
the date of issue of notice of award of Contract. Revision of any data must

Page 155 of 630


meet the approval of the Purchaser.
Requirements of Documents/Drawings/Information (not limited to) from the

successful Bidder after finalization of contract in respect of individual
equipment as well as the complete system covered under the specification
are furnished below:
Requirements of Documents/Drawings/Information under Approval category
14.01.00 Process Design Calculations, Mechanical Design Calculations (Sizing

Calculations for each equipment, miscellaneous Hydraulic Calculations,
miscellaneous Pressure Drop Calculations, miscellaneous Thickness
Calculations, etc).
14.02.00 Process and Instrumentation Diagram for the entire system complete with all
kinds of details.
14.03.00 Dimensional General Arrangement Drawing for the entire system complete
with all kinds of applicable details.
14.04.00 Dimensional General Arrangement and Cross Sectional Drawing for each of
all major equipment and each of all buildings complete with all kinds of
applicable details.
14.05.00 Indoor and Outdoor Piping Layout with suitable sectional views for the
complete system.
14.06.00 Procedures for Performance Guarantee Tests.

Document.

Document.


Requirements of Documents/Drawings/Information under Information

Category
14.11.00 Pipe Schedule for the complete system.
14.12.00 Valve Schedule for the complete system.
14.13.00 Isometric Piping Drawings the complete system.

Page 156 of 630


14.14.00 Data Sheets, Dimensional General Arrangement and Cross Sectional

Drawing for each of pumps, blowers, agitators, valves, isolation gates,
monorail hoists, etc.
14.15.00 Following test certificates/test curves/data shall be furnished :
a) Material test certificates.
b) Performance tests results and characteristics curves of pumps, fans and

electric drive motors.
c) Hydraulic test results of pressure vessels, pipes, valves, fittings, etc.
d) Test results to anticorrosive coatings.
e) Nondestructive test results as applicable.

Document.

Document.


The Bidder shall submit a complete list of documents and drawings along with
the category for review/approval by Purchaser.
Before manufacturing of the equipment, the Bidder shall have to take

approval of the relevant design calculations/drawings from the Purchaser.
Any manufacturing done prior to approval of the of the relevant design
calculations/drawing shall be at risk of the Bidder and in case of any
discrepancy with reference to approved design calculations/drawings
rectification shall be made by the Bidder at their own cost without any
violation of delivery schedule.
It is to be noted by the Bidder that approval or release of Documents /

Drawings by Purchaser does not include the checking for drafting and other
errors, but only review of basic concepts and general principles involved.
Approval does not relieve the Bidder from responsibility for correctness of
design, details and dimensions.
15.00.00 DEVIATION
15.01.00 Should the Bidder opt to deviate from this specification in anyway, specific

Page 157 of 630


Kothagudem TPS Stage -VII, Unit #12 (1X800 MW) e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15
VOLUME: IIIE
SECTION-V
LOW PRESSURE PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALITIES
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS
(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15-Vol IIIE-Sec-5)
Page 158 of 630


CONTENT
CLAUSE NO. DESCRIPTION
1.00.00 GENERAL INFORMATION
2.00.00 CODES AND STANDARDS
3.00.00 SCOPE OF WORK
4.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
5.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, INFORMATION &

MANUALS
6.00.00 BROAD GUIDELINES FOR ERECTION AND

INSTALLATION OF L.P. PIPING
ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE-I SPECIFICATION OF PIPES FOR

DIFFERENT SERVICES
ANNEXURE-II SERVICE OF VARIOUS CATEGORIES

OF VALVES
ANNEXURE-III SPECIFICATION OF VALVES
Page 159 of 630


VOLUME : IIIE
SECTION-V
LOW PRESSURE PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
This section covers all the low-pressure piping up to 400mm NB size,

associated valves and specialties that include but is not limited to the
following systems.
1.01.00 Service Air System - shall consist of distributions service air to different
buildings.
1.02.00 Instrument Air System - shall comprise of distribution of instrument quality air
to pneumatically operated instruments/ valves/dampers.
1.03.00 Demineralised Water Supply system including hot well make-up water piping
from condensate storage tank.
1.04.00 Demineralised Water closed cycle cooling system.
1.05.00 Service water system.
1.06.00 Potable water system.
1.07.00 Any other low pressure piping as found necessary during detail engineering
shall also be included.
2.01.00 In addition to the requirements spelt out in Volume IIA, the design,
manufacture, inspection and testing of the piping, fittings, valves and
specialties covered under this specification shall conform, in general, to the
standards and codes (latest edition) mentioned below:
2.01.01 IS-1239 : Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel
[Part-I & II] fittings.
2.01.02 IS-3589 : Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage (150 to 2000 mm nominal diameter)
2.01.03 IS-554 : Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints
are required on the threads.
2.01.04 IS-1363 : Hexagonal head bolts, screws and nuts (size range M5
[Part-I & II] M36)
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.IIIE/S-V : 1

Page 160 of 630


2.01.05 IS-1364 : Precision and Semi-precision hexagon bolts, screws,
nuts and lock nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm)
2.01.06 IS-3138 : Hexagon bolts & nuts (M42 to M150)
2.01.07 IS-5312 : Swing check type reflux (non-return) valves.
2.01.08 IS-2379 : Colour code for the identification of pipelines.
2.01.09 IS-2016 : Plain washers
2.01.10 IS-2712 : Compressed asbestos fibre jointing
2.01.11 ANSI B-16.5 : Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings
2.01.12 ANSI B-16.9 : Wrought steel Butt welding flanged
2.01.13 ANSI B-16.11 : Forged steel fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded.

ANSI B-36.10 : Steel pipes thickness
2.01.14 API-600 : Steel gate valves
2.01.15 BS-2633 : Class I Arc welding of ferrite steel pipe work for
carrying fluids.
2.01.16 BS-534 : Specification for steel pipes and specials for water and
sewage.
2.01.17 BS-5351 : Specification for Ball valves.
2.01.18 AWWA-C-504 : Specification for Butterfly valves.
2.01.19 AWWA-C-208 : Dimension for fabricated steel water pipe fittings.
2.02.00 Other international codes and standards may also be offered by bidder.
However, same may be subject to acceptance by the Purchaser.
3.01.00 The equipment and materials to be supplied shall include but not be limited to
the following:
a) Supply of all low pressure piping including bends, elbows, tees,

branches, laterals, crosses, reducing union, couplings, caps, saddles,
shoes, flanges, blank flanges, Y-pieces etc. as required for the piping
system under the scope of this section.
b) Matching pipes, matching pieces like reducers/enlargers etc., counter

flanges with bolts, nuts, washers, temporary and permanent gaskets,
threaded union etc.
c) Supply and machining work of flanges, pipe spools and matching pipes
to connect flow measuring orifices/nozzles with the main pipe work.
Page 161 of 630


d) All isolating and regulating valves, non-return valves, steam/air traps,

relief/safety valves (wherever applicable), strainers, pressure reducing
orifices etc. complete with the counter flanges and matching
connecting pieces as required within the entire low pressure piping
system.
e) Anchors, hangers and supports, etc. as required. Any platform

necessary for maintenance and operation of valve and equipment
located 1.5 m above any permanent floor or platform including access
ladders, supporting structures etc.
f) All secondary structural steel members required for pipe supports

from building steel structures and from embedded steel wherever
provided including pipe supports in trenches. However, trench piping
should be avoided to the extent possible.
g) Funnels, tundishes for drips and drains including all miscellaneous

drain piping and drain piping from tundish outlet up to drain points. All
drain and vent lines shall be conveniently terminated to floor drain
points/permanent drain trenches.
h) Flanges, counter flanges, blank flanges, bolts, nuts, washers,

temporary and permanent gaskets, fasteners caps etc. as required for
interconnecting piping, valves & fittings.
i) Cleaning and Painting of all piping, valves & specialties at

manufacturer's shop.
3.02.00 Following general requirements shall however be provided
a) Instrument Connections including instruments, root valves, sensing

lines etc.
b) Pipe stubs and blanking plates etc. required for chemical cleaning and
hydro testing.
For conducting acceptance test, the required pressure, temperature, flow

measurement points shall be provided.
3.03.00 All miscellaneous instruments
4.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
4.01.00 General Considerations
4.01.01 The piping systems included in this section shall be designed to operate
continuously without replacement during the plant service life of 30 years.
4.01.02 The piping system shall be complete in every detail and in accordance with
the highest standard of workmanship.

Page 162 of 630


4.01.03 All design and fabrication shall be in accordance with codes/standards

specified.
4.01.04 No pipe work shall be run in trenches carrying electrical cables.
4.01.05 Pipe size above 50 NB shall be shop fabricated and of size 50 NB and below
shall be field run.
4.01.06 All piping shall be identified by means of colour strips and by adequate
lettering, conveniently spaced and located. Identification colours and lettering
shall be as approved.
4.01.07 Air release and drain branches shall be provided wherever necessary
depending upon the layout and arrangement so that the drains and air
release valves are located for easy operation.
4.01.08 Unless otherwise specified, all pipe work shall be suitable for a minimum
pressure of 10.0 kg/sq. cm(g) at 80 deg. C or as required by the design of the
different piping system, if higher.
4.01.09 Drain Pipe Work
a) Low pressure drains shall have an isolating valve at the point of

take-off from the pipe or vessel to be drained, or as near as possible
for conventional operation.
b) Unless otherwise stated, all drain piping shall be of 25 mm NB

minimum and all vent pipings shall be of 15 mm NB size minimum.
For pipes up to 50mm NB, pipe wall thickness shall be as per
schedule 80 of ANSI B36.10.
c) Unless otherwise stated, wherever a main or branch of any pipeline is

terminated with a valve, such terminal valve shall be provided with a
blank flange/blanking cap at the free end.
4.01.10 Specification of pipes used in different services included in the L.P piping
section has been detailed in Annexure-I.
4.02.00 Material Specification
4.02.01 Materials for pipes and fittings shall be as stipulated in Annexure-I. In case
bidder wants to offer alternative piping material, same may be accepted by
the Purchaser depending on the merits of alternative material.
4.02.02 Pipe attachments for supports, anchors and restraints, which are coming in
direct contact with pipes, shall have similar materials as the piping
concerned. All other materials of supports, anchors and restraints shall be of
tested quality and as per manufacturer's standards.

Page 163 of 630


4.03.00 Fabrication
Except where otherwise specified all piping shall have butt-welded

connections with a minimum of flanged joints necessary for maintenance.
Where flanges are adjacent to welded fittings, weld neck flanges shall be
used.
Branches shall, in general, be formed by welding. Standard fittings may be

used in positions and for sizes where approval has been given in detail
drawings. Pipe bends and tees shall be truly cylindrical and of uniform
section. all welded branches shall be reinforced where needed as per the
applicable codes/regulations.
4.03.01 Piping shall be fabricated in the shop in the largest transportable sections to
minimize the number of field weld joints. The choice of field weld joints
locations shall be based on the traverse of the pipe through walls, floors,
sleeves or other restrictive areas. Support attachments for major piping shall
be done at shop.
4.03.02 All pipes bends shall be made true to angle with no negative tolerance and
shall have a smooth surface free of flat spots, crease and corrugations. A
cross section through any bent portion of the pipe shall be true in diameter,
within plus or minus 3% of the pipe diameter. Pipe bends shall be made from
straight pipe pieces of sufficiently higher thickness so that after thinning, the
minimum thickness of bends shall not be less than the minimum thickness
required for the straight pipe. Thinning allowance shall be considered as per
the relevant code.
4.03.03 For bends in pipes straight piece of pipes shall be bent by the contractor to
required bend radius. However, forged bends (Bend radius = 1.5 x pipe
diameter) wherever required shall be provided.
4.03.04 The ends of Pipe and welded fittings shall be bevelled according to details
shown in the relevant piping code. All welding shall be made in such a
manner that complete fusion and penetration are obtained without an
excessive amount of filler metal beyond root area. The reinforcement shall
be applied in such a manner that it shall have a smooth contour merging
gradually with the surface of adjacent pipe and welded fittings. Backing rings
shall not be used on any pipe welds, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
4.03.05 Cutting and Bevelling
a) Carbon steel piping - End preparation for butt welding shall be done
by machining/flame cutting.
b) Socket welding - Socket weld and preparation shall be done by saw or

machine cutting.

Page 164 of 630


4.04.00 Hangers, Supports, Anchors
Normally pipe supports and anchors shall be selected at those points in the
buildings where provision has been made for the loads imposed. The cutting
of floor/roof beams or the reinforcement in slabs will not be permitted. Piping
attached to a plant item shall be supported in such a way that the weight of
the piping is not taken by the plant item.
4.04.01 Support spacing shall be as per good engineering practice. However in no

case it shall be less than support spacing stipulated in ANSI B31.1.
4.04.02 Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the required
supporting force at each hanger location and the pipe weight load at each
equipment connection.
4.04.03 All large pipes and all long pipes shall have at least two supports each
arranged so that any length of pipe or valve may be removed without any
additional supports being required.
4.04.04 Support steel shall be of structural quality. Perforated strap, wire or chain
shall not be used. Support components shall be connected to support steel
by welding, by bolting or by beam clamps. Bolt holes shall be drilled not
burned. Support components may be bolted to concrete using approved
concrete anchors.
4.05.00 Valves and Accessories
4.05.01 General Requirements
a) All valves shall be of approved make and type and shall have
cast/forged bodies with covers and glands of approved construction
and materials as specified in Annexure-II & III. In general all pumps
(other than sump pumps), discharge valves shall be motor operated
only. Tank inlet valves shall be motor operated only.
b) Valves and specialties to be supplied under this specification will be

used for various air and water services and will be located
indoor/outdoor and on horizontal/vertical runs of the pipelines.
However, mounting of valves in vertical pipe runs should be avoided
as far as possible.
c) All valves shall, unless otherwise stated, have the internal diameter
same/as the internal diameter of the pipes to be joined.
d) All valves shall receive tests at manufacturer's or contractor's works in

accordance with the specific requirements of the approved Codes of
Practice. Valves shall be rising stem or otherwise as approved by the
Purchaser.
e) Gate valve and Ball valve have been specified with the intention of
achieving isolation and tight shut-off. In full open condition, these
valves should offer minimum of resistance to fluid flow.
Page 165 of 630


f) Globe valves have been specified with the intention of achieving good
control of fluid passing. The plug and seat will have therefore suitable
profiles for obtaining such controlling action.
g) Check valves have been specified in order to prevent reverse flow

through them.
h) All valves shall function smoothly without sticking, rubbing or vibration

on opening or closing and shall be suitable for most stringent service
conditions i.e. flow, temperature and pressure under which they may
be required to operate.
i) Material, design, manufacture, testing etc. for all valves and

specialties along with the accessories shall conform to the latest
editions of codes.
j) By pass valves shall be provided for larger size valves as per

standards followed and as felt necessary for smooth and easy
operation, even though not specifically mentioned in the specification.
k) All flanged valves and specialties to be supplied under this section shall
be provided with two (2) counter flanges, bolts, nuts, washers, gaskets
etc.
l) All valves shall be of approved design and manufacture. Where

valves are of similar size and type they shall be interchangeable with
one another. Valves shall have welded or flanged connections subject
to the Purchaser's approval.
m) All valves shall have outside screwed spindles and screwed thread of
spindle shall not pass through or into the stuffing box. Where valves
are exposed to the weather, protective covers shall be provided for
the spindles, which shall be subject to approval.
n) Gate, Globe and Ball valves shall be provided with the following
accessories in addition to other standard items:
i) Hand wheel with embossed open and shut directions.

ii) Local position indicator.
iii) Motorised operation as specified by Engineer.
o) Gate valves, in addition shall be provided with following extra features
i) Bypass valve for larger valves

ii) Draining arrangement
iii) Enclosed Gear operators for valves 300 mm size and above
for ease in operation.
iv) Motorised operation as specified by Engineer.
p) All gate and globe valves shall be rising stem type.

Page 166 of 630


q) All valves shall be provided with hand-wheels, chain, operator,

extended spindle and floor stand wherever required so that they can
be operated manually by a single operator from the nearest operating
floor either at a lower or higher elevation as the case may be. If such
a valve is provided with integral bypass then similar arrangement shall
be done for the bypass valve also.
r) All valves and specialties shall be provided with brass Tag Discs
indicating Tag numbers and nomenclature of the valve including duty
or service intended and the function of the valves specialties.
s) Stems shall preferably be arranged vertically with gland at the top,

however, in no circumstances must the stem be inclined downward
from horizontal or gland be at the bottom. Globe valves shall be
installed with the pressure under the disc. Valves shall not be fitted in
inverted position.
t) Where necessary, for accessibility, grease nipples shall be fitted at

the end of extension piping and where possible these shall be
grouped together and mounted on a common panel situated at a
convenient position. A separate nipple shall be provided to lubricate
each point. The Bidder shall supply the first fill of oil or grease for
these parts. The Bidder shall supply a suitable manually operated
grease gun for the standard type of nipple provided.
u) The spindles for all valves for use outside the building shall have
weatherproof protection covers of approved construction.
v) All valves shall be fitted with indicators so that it may be readily seen
whether the valves are open or shut. In the case of those valves fitted
with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted both to the extended
spindles and to the valve spindles.
w) Plastic or bakelite valve hand wheels will not be accepted.
x) All valves shall be closed by rotating the hand wheel in a clockwise

direction when looking at the faces of the hand wheel. The face of
each hand wheel shall be clearly marked with the words 'Open' and
'Shut' with arrows adjacent to indicate the direction of rotation to which
each refers.
y) Wherever practicable heavy valves of total weight including actuator,

drive motor, integral by-pass etc., equal to or greater than 500 kg.
shall be provided with suitable lugs to permit direct suspension by
hanger rod or direct resting on bottom support, as applicable.
z) Special attention shall be given to the operating mechanism for large

size valves in order that quick and easy operation is obtained and
maintenance is kept to a minimum.
aa) Eyebolts shall be provided where necessary to facilitate handling

heavy valves or parts of valves.
Page 167 of 630


bb) The Bidder shall supply with his bid and in addition during the course
of the Contract, comprehensive drawings showing the design of
valves, test pressure and working pressure/temperatures. They
should include a parts list referring to the various materials used in the
valve construction.
cc) All sampling and root valves shall be of integral body bonnet type.
4.05.02 For Design Requirements for different valves refer Annexure-II & III.
4.06.00 Safety/Relief Valves
Safety/Relief valves shall be of direct spring loaded type and shall have a
tight, positive and precision closing.
All safety valves shall be provided with manual lifting lever.
Valves used for air and any other compressive fluid shall be of pop type.
Safety/Relief valves shall be constructed and adjusted to permit the fluid to

escape without increasing the pressure beyond 10% above the set blow off
pressure. Valve shall reset at a pressure not less than 2.5% and more than
5% of the set pressure.
Releasing capacity of the safety/relief valves shall be as per the applicable

codes and standards and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The seat and disk of safety valves shall be of suitable material to resist
erosion. The seat of valve shall be fastened to the body of the valve in such a
way that there is no possibility of the seat lifting.
4.07.00 Hosepipe and Accessories
4.07.01 Hose valves for service water system shall be Gate valves and service air
system shall be Globe valves.
4.07.02 Hose pipes with fittings for Service Water System:
a) The water hose shall be as per IS-444 (Type-3).

b) Length of each hose shall be 15 metres.
c) For each hose, one end shall be fitted with M.S. female coupling with
swiveling nuts and soft seating ring suitable for connection to male
end of hose valve and other end shall be made threaded for joining
with the swiveling nut of a second hose whereby two hose lengths
may be joined.
4.07.03 Hose pipes with fittings for Compressed air System
a) The compressed air hose shall be as per IS-911 (Type 2).

Page 168 of 630


b) The length and type of each end shall be similar to as specified in
above clause no. (4.07.02) above.
5.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, INFORMATION & MANUALS
5.01.00 Drawings, data, Information to be furnished by the Bidder besides those

already mentioned in volume : IIA with the offer.
5.01.01 A complete list of all piping and fittings of various sizes with their quantities
and details e.g. nominal size, O.D., I.D. (as applicable) thickness, design
pressure, design temperature, material of construction/code/standards etc.
5.01.02 A complete list of all valves with their type, quantities & ratings.
5.01.03 Manufacturer's catalogue indicating complete range of available size and

rating of pipes & fittings.
5.01.04 Descriptive literature on the manufacturing process and quality control

procedures highlighting the manufacturing, fabricating and testing facilities
available in the shop.
5.02.00 After Award of Contract
Detail drawings including fabrication drawings of all shop fabricated piping

system indicating design parameters and complete bill of material (Relevant
Standards and grades to be indicated) and information/data pertaining to the
hydrostatic and non-destructive test requirements to be submitted
progressively.
5.02.01 Detail dimensioned drawing of each valve, specialties, indicating tag no.,
pressure rating, manufacturing standard, the bill of materials and hydrostatic
test pressures. The drawing shall include the end preparation details and shall
indicate the position of the hand wheel/operator. Technical particulars of motor
operators wherever applicable shall also be indicated.
5.02.02 General arrangement drawing for each hanger/support/anchor etc. indicating

identification number, auxiliary supporting structural details, other details &
information as required in the specification.
5.02.03 Wiring diagram for all limit switches of motor operated valves.
5.02.04 The loading data required for design of structures shall be furnished well in
advance to suit Purchaser's time schedule.
6.00.00 BROAD GUIDELINES FOR ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF LP PIPING
6.01.00 All fittings like "T" pieces, flanges, reducers etc. shall be suitably matched with
pipes for welding. The valves will have to be checked, cleaned or overhauled
in full or in part before erection, after chemical cleaning and during
commissioning.
6.02.00 Adjustments like removal of oval ties in pipes and opening or closing the
fabricated bends of high pressure piping to suit the layout shall be considered
Page 169 of 630


part of work and is required to carry out such work as per instruction of
Owner, which shall include specified heat-treatment procedures, etc. also
wherever required.
6.03.00 Certain adjustments in length may be necessary while erecting high pressure
pipelines and the contractor should remove the extra lengths to suit the final
layout after preparing edges afresh and adopting specified heat treatment
procedures.
6.04.00 Suspension for piping, pressure parts, etc., will be supplied in running lengths,
which shall be cut to suitable sizes and adjusted as required.
6.05.00 All the valves, lifting equipments, actuators, power cylinders, etc., shall be
serviced and lubricated to the satisfaction of Engineer before erecting the
same and also during pre-commissioning. Even after commissioning, the
equipments, if there are problems in the operation, they have to be attended
to by the Bidder during the tenure of the contract. Welding or jointing of
extension spindle for valves to suit the site conditions and operational facility
shall be part of erection work.
6.06.00 All tubes and pipes shall be cleaned and blown with compressed air and
shown to the engineer before lifting. Bigger size pipes should be cleaned with
flexible wire brush, wherever necessary. After cleaning is over the end caps
shall be put back in tube openings till such time they are welded to other
tubes.
6.07.00 Fine fittings, drain piping, oil systems & other small bore piping have to be
routed according to site conditions and hence shall be done only in position.
As such, layout of small-bore piping shall be done as per site requirement.
There is a possibility of slight change in routing the above pipelines even after
completion of erection, which shall be carried out by the Bidder without any
extra cost to the Purchaser. Work shall also include fabrication of small bends
at site from straight lengths to suit the site conditions.
6.08.00 No temporary supports shall be welded on the pressure parts. Welding of

temporary supports, cleats, etc., on the building columns shall also be
avoided. In case of absolute necessity, Contractor shall take prior approval
from Engineer. Further, any cutting or alteration of member of the structure or
platform or other equipments shall not be done without specific prior approval
of Engineer.
6.9.00 a) All piping shall be grouped wherever practicable and shall be routed to
present a neat appearance.
b) The piping shall be arranged to provide clearance for the removal of

equipment for maintenance and for easy access to valves,
instruments and other piping accessories required for operational
maintenance.
c) Piping shall be routed above ground unless otherwise specifically

indicated/ approved by the Engineer. In such special case, the piping
may be arranged in trenches, or buried and properly protected as per
AWWA Standards.
Page 170 of 630


d) Overhead piping shall have a minimum overhead clearance of 4

meters above walkways and working areas and 7 meters above
roadways unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
e) Drains shall be provided at all low points and vents at high points as
per actual layout regardless of whether some have been shown in
respective drawings or not. The pipelines shall be sloped towards the
drain points.
6.10.00 All drips and drains for piping and equipment whether shown in the drawings
or not shall terminate on the ground floor up to station drain unless otherwise
specified. Leading such drains up to station drainage is also the responsibility
of the Contractor.

Page 171 of 630

TABLE-1

ANNEXURE-I
SPECIFICATION OF PIPES FOR DIFFERENT SERVICES
A B C D
1. Clarified Water piping 1. Drinking/ Potable Water 1. Demineralised Water, 1. Demineralised Water,
Services Supply, piping (Clarified Service and Instrument Air Service and Instrument
2. DMCW piping water, chlorinated) Piping less than and equal air piping for sizes equal
to 50 mm NB to greater than 65 mm
NB
1.00.00 Carbon Steel IS-1239 Carbon Steel as per IS-1239 Stainless Steel as per ASTM A- Stainless steel as per ASTM
Material Heavy Grade upto 150 mm NB Heavy Grade for sizes upto 312 Gr. 304. A-312 Gr. 304. Size-upto
of Pipe and IS-3589 for sizes above 150 mm NB and IS-3589 for Size- as per schedule 40 ANSI 150 mm NB as per schedule
150 mm with minimum pipe sizes above 150 mm NB with B36.10 10S, ANSI B-36.10.
thickness of 6 mm. minimum pipe thickness of 6
mm. The pipes shall be
galvanized as per IS-4736
2.00.00 ERW / Seamless ERW / Seamless ERW ERW

Construct
ion
3.00.00 Slip-on Flange and butt weld Screwed flange for sizes 65 Socket welded for size 50 NB Slip-on flange and butt weld
Joints for size 65 mm NB and above mm NB and above and and below joint.
and Socket weld joint for size screwed socket for size 50
50 mm NB and below. mm NB and below.
4.00.00 Pipe Sizes > Pipe Sizes < Pipe Sizes > = Pipe Sizes <
Fittings = 65 mm NB = 50 mm NB 65 mm NB = 50 mm NB

Page 172 of 630

A B C D
1.
1. Raw
Clarified
waterWater Clarified
piping, piping 1. Drinking/ Potable Water 1. Demineralised Water, 1. Demineralised Water,
Services Water piping, sludge handling Supply, piping (Clarified Service and Instrument Air Service and Instrument
2. DMCW piping
piping water, chlorinated) Piping less than and equal air piping for sizes equal
2. DMCW piping to 50 mm NB to greater than 65 mm
NB
4.01.00 ASTM-A-234 ASTM-A-105 ASTM-A-234 ASTM-A-105 ASTM-A-182 F304 ASTM-A-351-CF8
Materials Gr. WPB Gr. WPB galvanised
galvanized as as per IS-
per IS-4736 4736
4.02.00 Welded/ Forged Welded/ Forged Forged Welded/Seamless

Construct Seamless Seamless
ion
4.03.00 ANSI-B-16.9 ANSI-B- ANSI-B-16.9 ANSI-B-16.11 ANSI-B-16.11 MSS-SP-43

Standard for 16.11
fabricated
fitting AWWA-
C-208
4.04.00 Pipe size Pipe size Pipe size Sizes <=50
End >=65mm NB <=50 mm NB >=65 mm NB mm
details
Butt welded as Socket Screwed Screwed Socket welded Slip - on flanges
per ANSI-B- welded as Flanged socketed as
16.25 per ANSI-B- per ANSI-B-
16.11 16.11All
fittings shall
be
galvanized.

Page 173 of 630

A B C D
1.
1.Raw
Clarified
water Water Clarified
piping, piping 1. Drinking/ Potable Water 1. Demineralised Water, 1. Demineralised Water,
Services Water piping, sludge handling Supply, piping (Clarified Service and Instrument Air Service and Instrument
2. DMCW piping
piping water, chlorinated) Piping less than and equal air piping for sizes equal
2. DMCW piping to 50 mm NB to greater than 65 mm
NB
5.00.00 150 lb class as per ANSI-B- As per ANSI-B-16.5 pressure As per ANSI-B-16.5 pressure 150lb class, flat face, as per
Flanges 16.5 complete with nuts, bolts class 150lbs - galvanised- class 150lb complete with nuts, ANSI-B-16.5 complete with
and gaskets complete with nuts, bolts and bolts and gaskets. Material as nuts, bolts and gaskets.
gaskets. per class 4.01.00.
Pipes which fall under IS:1239 shall be hydrostatically tested according to the said code, for others refer Section-V, Vol.: II-A.

Page 174 of 630


ANNEXURE-II
SERVICES OF VARIOUS CATEGORIES OF VALVES
Valve Classification Service
A. Cast iron body i) Service Water For sizes 65mm NB and

Gate/Globe/Check above.
Valve ii) Clarified Water
iii) Drinking/ Potable Water
iv) Inhibited Demineralised

Water
B. Stainless steel body/ i) For Demineralised water For all sizes

Gate/Globe /Check/Ball
Valve
ii) Potable/ Drinking Water For sizes less than and
equal to 50 mm NB
iii) Service and Instrument For all sizes. Ball valves

Air to be used in air line.
C. Steel Body valves i) Clarified Water For sizes less than and
equal to 50 mm NB
ii) Inhibited Demineralised

Water for DMCW system
D. Cast Iron body butterfly i) For Demineralised Water For butterfly valve
valve specification refer
ii) Raw water Annexure II, Sec.IV of
Vol. IIIE. For DM water
iii) Clarified Water line rubber lining/
EPDM/equivalent
iv) Filtered Water protection to be
provided
v) Inhibited Demineralised
Water for DMCW system

Page 175 of 630

ANNEXURE-III
SPECIFICATION OF VALVES
A. Cast Iron Body Gate/ B. Stainless steel Body C. Steel Body Gate/
Globe/Check Valve Gate/Globe/Check/Ball Globe/Check Valve/
Valve Ball Valve
1.00.00 Valve Classification CIGC SSGC STGC

Code
2.00.00 Basic Design Code
a) Gate a) a, b, c) ANSI-B-16.34 i) API 600 for 50mm

i) IS 780 for 50 mm - 300 mm NB
ii) IS2906 for 350 mm NB and above ii) API 602 for size
or as per MSS-SP-70
b) Globe b) MSS - SP - 85 b) BS-1873/ANSI-B-16.34
c) Check c) IS-5312/MSS - SP -71 c) BS-1868/ANSI B16.34
d) Ball d) BS-5351
3.00.00 Pressure Class To be suitably chosen considering the pressure requirement. Refer Clause No. 4.01.08 in this
regard.
4.00.00 Construction Cast body and bonnet / cover Forged body up to 50mm NB Same as Group-B
and Cast body above that
5.00.00 Material
5.01.00 Body & Bonnet/ cover IS 210 Gr. FG 260 ASTM-A-182 F304 for Ball ASTM-A-216
Valves: Gr. WCB for cast body &
A351 CF8M for cast body, A ASTM-A-105 for forged body
182 F304 for forged body.
Page 176 of 630

A. Cast Iron Body Gate/ B. Stainless steel Body C. Steel Body Gate/
Globe/Check Valve Gate/Globe/Check/Ball Globe/Check Valve/
Valve Ball Valve
5.02.00 Trim / Disc. IS-210 Gr. FG 260 ASTM-A-182 F304 for Gate, 13% Cr Steel as per ASTM-A-
Globe, Check valves and 182 Gr. F6 heat treated and
351CF 8M for Ball valves. hardened(min 250 NB) for cast
For DKW system : body and ASTM-A-105 Hard
ASTM-A-182 F6A (min. 250 faced with Stellite (min 350
HB) HB) for forged body
5.03.00 Seating surface 13% Cr steel as per IS 1570 For Ball valves PTFE seats 13% Cr. Steel as per ASTM-A-
and seals. 182 Gr. F6
6.00.00 End Preparation Socket welded for size equal to and below 50mm NB and flanged with counter flanges for 65mm NB and above.
7.00.00 Testing
a) Gate i) As per IS - 780 for 50 mm - 300 mm API-598

NB
ii) IS-2906 for sizes equal to and above As per ANSI B-16.34
350 mm NB
b) Globe Hydrostatic Test as per MSS-SP-85 BS-1873
c) Check IS-5312/MSS-SP-71 BS--1868

Page 177 of 630


VOLUME : IIIE
SECTION-IV
LARGE DIAMETER LOW PRESSURE PIPING,
VALVES AND MISC. TANKS
Page 178 of 630


CONTENT
3.00.00 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & SPECIFIC

REQUIREMENTS
5.00.00 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
6.00.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
7.00.00 CIVIL WORKS
8.00.00 TESTING AND INSPECTION
9.00.00 PAINTING
10.00.00 DRAWINGS, CURVES AND INFORMATION

REQUIRED
ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE-I SPECIFICATION OF MISCELLANEOUS TANKS
ANNEXURE-II BUTTERFLY VALVE SPECIFICATION
Page 179 of 630


VOLUME : IIIE
SECTION-IV
LARGE DIAMETER LOW PRESSURE PIPING,

VALVES AND FABRICATED TANKS
1.00.00 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
This specification is intended to cover the design, supply of steel plates,

structural steel and all accessories as required, associated civil works, paints
and protective paintings as specified and as required, fabrication, erection,
painting, testing of the following items with accessories as specified.
1.01.00 The Large Diameter Piping to be fabricated and installed shall include the
following pipe lines having sizes 450 mm NB and above:
a) Circulating Water Piping
b) Auxiliary Cooling Water Piping
c) Raw Water Piping
d) DM Closed Cooling Water Piping
e) Cooling Tower Make-up Water Piping
1.02.00 The different steel storage tanks are :
a) Demineralised Water make up tank.
b) Potable Water Storage Tank.
c) Service Water RCC Tank.
d) Demineralised Water storage tanks
e) Condensate Storage Tank
f) Fire Water Storage Tanks
1.03.00 Rubber Expansion Joints
1.04.00 Spring supports for CW pipes
In addition to the requirements spelt out in Vol.-IIA, the equipments to be

supplied under this section shall conform to the following Codes and
Standards as required.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.IIIE/S-IV : 1

Page 180 of 630


2.01.00 Large Diameter Piping
2.01.01 Material of pipe : IS-2062 - Code for Structural Steel
2.01.02 IS-817 : Code of practice for Training and testing

of metal arc welders
2.01.03 IS-1367 : Technical supply conditions for threaded

steel fasteners
2.02.00 Steel Storage Tanks
The design, manufacture and testing of tanks shall comply with the
requirements of one or more of the following standards as applicable.
2.02.01 IS - 803 : Code of practice for design, fabrication, and erection of

vertical mild steel cylindrical welded oil storage tank.
2.02.02 IS - 804 : Rectangular pressed steel tank
2.02.03 IS - 805 : Code of practice for use of steel in gravity water tank.
2.02.04 IS - 816 : Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for
general construction in mild steel.
2.02.05 IS - 823 : Code of procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild
steel.
2.02.06 IS-2825 : Code for unfired pressure vessels.
2.02.07 API-12D : Large welded production tanks
2.02.08 API-12F : Small welded production tanks
2.02.09 API-620 : Recommended rules for design and construction of

large welded, low pressure storage tanks.
2.02.10 API-650 : Welded steel tank for oil storage.
2.02.11 BS-1564 : Pressed steel tank
2.02.12 BS-2594 : Carbon steel welded horizontal cylindrical tank
2.02.13 AWWA-C-504 : Butterfly valve
The design, material requirement, manufacture, testing and performance

requirements of the Expansion Joints shall generally conform to one or more
of the following codes and standards/ documents :
2.03.01 Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association (EJMA), USA, Standards.

Page 181 of 630


2.03.02 Fluid Sealing Association, U.S.A.: Technical Handbook-Rubber Expansion

Joints and Flexible pipe connectors.
2.03.03 Other International Standards, equivalent to above.
2.04.00 Spring supports for C.W. pipe - Spring supports shall conform to the following
codes and standards as applicable:
2.04.01 IS-1570 : Schedule for wrought steel
2.04.02 IS-2062 : Weldable Structural Steel
2.05.00 The technical requirements of the various equipments shall be guided by the
design criteria and the Data specification sheets. In case of any contradiction
between the aforesaid standards and stipulations of the design criteria and
data specification sheets, the stipulations of design criteria and the data
specification sheets shall prevail.
3.00.00 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
3.01.00 The different large diameter piping systems are as follows :
3.01.01 The Circulating Water Piping will be used for supplying water for condenser
cooling from the CW pump house sump by C.W. Pumps to the condenser and
also for taking out the hot water from the outlet of condenser to the inlet of hot
water distribution system of cooling towers. The scheme of C.W. piping has
been shown in drawing no 13A06-DWG-M-001G.
3.01.02 Auxiliary cooling water piping will be used for supplying cooling water from the
sump of C.W. pump house by Auxiliary C.W. pumps for cooling the closed
cycle cooling DM water through Plate Heat Exchangers. ACW piping shall also
be used for taking out the hot water from these coolers to the cooling towers.
The scheme of Auxiliary C.W. piping has been shown in drawing no 13A06-
DWG-M-001G.
3.01.03 Raw water piping will be used for supplying water to clarifier from the Raw
water Reservoir.
3.01.04 DM closed cooling water piping will be used for supplying cooling water to
boiler and turbine auxiliary equipments as well as for other auxiliary
equipments like compressors etc.
3.01.05 Cooling tower make-up water piping used for supplying make-up water to
cooling tower.
3.02.00 The details of Miscellaneous steel tanks for storage of water at atmospheric
pressure to be fabricated and erected under this section of specification are
given as follows :
3.02.01 One (1) potable water tank will be installed on the power house roof.

Page 182 of 630


3.02.02 One (1) Demineralised water (DMCW) make-up tanks will store demineralised
water for supplying make-up quantity to the demineralised closed cooling
circuit of the Plant. These tanks will be located at an elevated level, in the
Power House.
3.02.03 One Service water RCC tank shall be located at a suitable height in the power
plant.
3.02.04 One Condensate Storage Tank (CST) will store demineralised water for
supplying DM water for power cycle make up.
3.02.04 Two Demineralised water Storage Tanks will store demineralised water for
supplying DM water to condensate storage tank for power cycle make up.
3.02.05 Two Fire water Storage Tanks will store clarified water for supplying to fire
fighting system. The MS fire water tank sizing to be done by the EPC
contractor during detail engineering meeting the TAC/ NFPA requirement.
However, each fire water tank capacity shall not be less than 1500 cum.
3.03.01 The expansion joints will be used on C.W Pipes at inlet and outlet of
condenser to absorb relative movement between C.W Pipes and condenser
and at discharge header of each CW & ACW pumps.
3.03.02 The expansion joints shall be designed for the maximum pressure that may
appear in the C.W and ACW system considering shut-off, water hammer,
back wash and other operating conditions. The condenser shall be designed
to withstand the maximum axial thrust from the inlet and outlet nozzles and
pressure compensation type expansion bellow shall be provided for CW inlet
and outlet of condenser.
3.04.00 Spring supports if required shall be provided for supporting C.W pipes at inlet
to and outlet from the condenser.
4.01.01 Supply and Installation of all piping system as mentioned against Clause
3.01.00 above, and shown in relevant drawings complete with all
interconnections including connections with pump flanges and condenser/
equipment flanges wherever required, bends, reducers, tees, distant pieces
etc. of all sizes and shapes as required for complete installation of the piping
system. The nominal size of various pipes in different sections to be
fabricated from steel plates are 450 mm N.B and above.
4.01.02 Erection of all vents, drains, instrument tapping points with stubs up to root
valves and thermometer well etc.
Drains, vents, thermometer wells and instrument stubs up to root valves etc.
Connected with the above pipelines may be erected from straight length of
piping. All bends, reducers, distant pieces, tees, etc. of all shapes and sizes
Page 183 of 630


shall, however, have to be fabricated as necessary. All materials required for
the same shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.01.03 Valves, Flanged butterfly valves, strainers, flanges, root-valves other

accessories shall be provided. Butterfly valves at condenser inlet and outlet
shall be provided with Power actuators. Over and above, those specified
above, the Bidder shall provide additional valves/strainers etc. if required for
safe and trouble-free operation of the systems. All the slip-on type counter
flanges, blank flanges, caps, etc. necessary for the piping, shall be fabricated
and installed by the Contractor to make the installation complete in all
respect. All materials for the same shall be supplied by the Contractor at his
own cost. All necessary bolts, nuts & gaskets required for installation of the
system shall also be supplied by the Contractor. For details of Motor
Actuators, Volume-V shall be referred.
4.01.04 All flanged manhole and manhole covers, flanged tees with blank flanges
appearing on above piping are included in the scope of work. Also all flanged
tees and blank flanges for tapping water supply from these pipelines to meet
the necessity of Owner's other equipment are included. All materials required
for the same shall be supplied by the Contractor.
4.01.05 Steel hanger, supports, saddles, clamps etc. required for all the pipes at
locations as indicated in the attached drawings and as required will be
designed, fabricated and erected by the Contractor after approval of the
relevant drawings. Supports, clamps etc. for pipeline in pipe trenches, if any
and other places are also to be designed by the Contractor and fabricated
and erected by Contractor after approval of his relevant fabrication drawings.
All materials required for the same and also the trenches shall be made by
the Contractor at his own cost.
4.01.06 All angle rings and annular rings that are to be welded in the piping for
grouting in the wall openings are included. All necessary seating plates for all
pipe supports with anchoring arrangement including steel straps, wearing
plates to be welded to the piping system etc. are included. The concrete
pedestal, thrust blocks etc. where required, shall have to be provided by the
Contractor. The seating plate shall also be grouted by the Contractor.
Necessary anchor bolts, nuts, sleeves etc. shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
4.02.00 Miscellaneous Steel Tanks
The miscellaneous steel tanks to be designed, supplied, fabricated and

erected under this specification.
4.02.01 The connections, accessories and fittings to be supplied with each tank shall
be as indicated in the respective drawings, specification and as required. The
piping material required inside or outside up to the flanged terminal shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
Tank connections shall be provided with suitable counter flanges with

necessary bolts, nuts & gaskets by the Contractor.

Page 184 of 630


4.02.02 The tank, where applicable, shall be complete with supporting structure, legs
or pedestals, base plate, anchor bolts, nuts & sleeves etc. as required.
4.02.03 The special fittings, e.g. conservation vent valves, level indicators etc. shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
4.03.00 Preparation of detailed design, fabrication drawings, bill of materials, tag and
piece numbers, welding procedure, etc.
General layout showing pipe routing, location of expansion joints, butterfly

valves, etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor.
4.04.00 This specification covers supply of steel plates, structural steel, pipes etc. as
required for complete installation.
4.05.00 The scope of work under this specification shall include excavation and
backfilling work required for installation of pipes running underground.
4.06.00 Minor concrete works like pipe supports, thrust blocks, etc. as required will be
supplied and erected by the Contractor at his own cost. Necessary steel work
at supports shall also be supplied, fabricated and erected by the Contractor.
4.07.00 The final fixing grout over the concrete support or through the opening left in
the concrete work shall be done by the Contractor.
The scope of supply under this specification shall be as below. Items not
mentioned but deemed necessary by the Bidder for making the system
completely reliable and efficient shall also be included.
4.08.01 Expansion joints with retaining rings and requisite nos. of fixing bolts, nuts,
washers gaskets connection, bellow with the companion/equipment flange.
4.08.02 Various accessories like companion flanges, control rod/unit assembly

including stretcher plates, limit rods, washers nuts, bolts etc.
4.09.00 Required number of spring supports as detailed shall be supplied.
5.01.01 The pipe sizes chosen shall be the next higher size to that calculated by
taking velocity of water as 2 m/s.
5.01.02 All piping to be fabricated under this section shall be made of tested quality
mild steel plates having thickness not less than that stated below :
Pipe Dia. (O.D) Plate Thickness (Minimum)
Upto 800 mm 10 mm
Page 185 of 630


Above 800 mm 12 mm
For pipe diameter greater than 2500 mm NB, RCC duct with MS plate inside
lining may be used. Bidder may also provide alternate MOC for these size
range subject to however, Owners approval.
5.01.03 All plates used will be of mild steel quality conforming to IS-2062 Gr B (latest
revision) or equivalent.
5.01.04 Flanges should be machined on both faces. Fabrication of flanges from

segment plates should be avoided. However, if under special circumstances
flanges from segment plates are to be provided, on specific instructions of the
Owner/Consultant, such flanges should be completely stress relieved after
welding and all welds shall be subject to dye penetration test. These flanges
should also be machined.
5.01.05 All welds are to be continuous single V butt with finished head of size equal to
thickness of plate. All welding shall be as per IS- 817 (latest revision).
5.01.06 The pipe circumferential weld shall be done in such a way that the
longitudinal welds become staggered in any two consecutive sections.
5.01.07 Pipe sections in straight lengths delivered at erection site shall be of suitable
length to minimise field joints as far as possible. End preparations shall be
done at the fabrication yard to facilitate site welding.
5.01.08 The piping shall be prepared cold rolled to true cylindrical shapes in a number
of passes in a plate bending machine so that no undue stresses are
developed.
5.01.09 Manholes shall be provided wherever required and the sizes shall conform to
the requirement. All manholes shall be provided with flanged covers with
handle, gasket, bolts, nuts etc. Manhole pits shall be provided for buried
piping at regular intervals of 100 m. Valve pit, if required shall be provided for
buried piping system for accessibility and maintenance of the valves. The
design of the valve pit shall be approved at the detail Engineering Stage.
5.01.10 Gaskets shall be 3 mm thick full-face rubber.
5.01.11 Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal head conforming to IS-1367 (latest
revision).
5.01.12 The pipe sections shall be carefully placed on the sand bed prepared as
specified before and then welded. The method of holding the pipe sections in
position for welding during erection shall be approved by the engineer. All
joints before welding shall be thoroughly cleaned and requisite welding gap
maintained.
5.01.13 Welding shall be carried out as per provisions laid down in IS-816 (latest
revision). Welding shall be done by experienced and good operators who
have been qualified by tests as specified in IS-817 (latest revision).

Page 186 of 630


5.01.14 Welding sequence shall be done in such a way so as to minimise the distortion
due to welding shrinkage. Any distortion will be duly rectified by the Contractor.
5.01.15 Welding shall not be carried out when the surface of the parts to be welded
are wet for any cause and during periods of rain and strong winds unless the
welder and work are properly shielded.
5.01.16 The unpainted ends of pipe surface shall be painted after completion of
jointing. Precaution shall be taken to prevent any crack or damage in the
external coating during installation. Pipes shall be laid in trenches excavated
along the route and the overground portion shall be installed as per final
layout drawings furnished to the Contractor.
5.01.17 On completion of all welding in the pipe lines, the same shall be tested
hydrostatically and after successful testing, shall be covered by sand
wrapping and backfilling with earth as specified elsewhere in this
specification.
5.01.18 Installed pipe shall be closed up at both ends at the end of each day by
watertight plug or other means approved by the Owner to prevent debris/
animals/human beings from entering the pipe.
5.02.00 Steel Storage Tanks
5.02.01 Tanks shall be suitably constructed for safe, proper and continuous storage of
liquid described. The design code, material standard, minimum plate
thickness, size and other details shall be as per the specified Codes and
Standards as applicable.
5.02.02 For cylindrical tanks, the plates shall be cold rolled through plate bending
machine by several number of passes to true curvature. For rectangular
pressed steel tank, the plates shall be heated uniformly in a furnace and
formed in a press, each of which is capable of taking the whole part at a time.
Alternatively, the plates may be pressed cold, the flanges made by V-die and
the corners welded provided no cracks are developed.
5.02.03 Vessel seams shall be so positioned that they do not pass through vessel
connections. For cylindrical vessels consisting of more than two sections,
longitudinal seams shall be offset.
5.02.04 Where possible, the inside seam weld shall be ground smooth, suitable for
application of corrosion resistant primer.
5.02.05 For vessels with dished ends, Bidder shall submit in his quotation details of
the proposed dished ends. The details shall comprise of the following :
a) The method of manufacture.
b) Knuckle and crown radii and length on straight.
c) Whether dished ends are fabricated in one piece or segmented.

Page 187 of 630


d) A sketch showing number of segments and seam arrangement, if
segmented ends are proposed.
5.02.06 Proper means shall be provided against the chance of over-turning effect of
wind on an empty vertical cylindrical tank.
5.02.07 Due consideration for wind load and/or earthquake effect shall be given by
the Contractor in the design of tanks. Data for wind load and earthquake
shall be taken as indicated in the Vol. IIA. Maximum allowable stresses for
design loadings combined with wind or earthquake shall not exceed 133% of
stress permitted for the design loading condition but in no case shall exceed
80% of specified minimum yield strength of the material.
5.02.08 Except where otherwise indicated in the Owner's drawings/ specifications, if

the stiffening of the shell and/or roof is necessary the same shall be stiffened
from outside.
5.02.09 Reinforcement pads in tank connections shall be provided as per applicable

code & the reinforced connection shall be completely preassembled into a
shell plate. The completed assembly including the connection shall be
thermally stress-relieved as per API Standard 620 if specified.
5.02.10 All welding shall be done as per IS803, 817, 823 and IS:816, latest revision
as applicable. All welds are to be continuous welds. Bidder shall clearly state
in his offer the make and type of welding rods proposed by him for fabrication.
Inspection of welding shall be carried out in accordance to IS-822, IS-823.
Welding sequence shall be adopted in such a way so as to minimise the
distortion due to welding shrinkage, Contractor shall indicate in his Drawing
the sequence of welding proposed by him, which should meet prior approval
of the Engineer.
5.02.11 Tank Connections
a) Bidder shall furnish all piping material required for the tank
connections.
b) Unless otherwise specified, for all flanged connections Bidder shall

furnish suitable counter flanges and the necessary nuts, bolts, gasket.
c) Flange faces of all nozzles shall be machined and square with the
vessel centrelines.
d) Unless otherwise stated bolts and nuts shall be of hexagonal head

conforming to IS:1367, latest revision.
The material and thickness of gaskets shall be suitable for the

specified service. On completion of hydraulic test, contractor shall
replace the gaskets used during testing at his own cost.
e) All tanks shall be provided with connections for drains, vent and
overflow. Condensate storage tank shall be provided with pump
recirculation connections. Blank flanged spare inlet and outlet- 2 (two)
each shall be provided for condensate storage tank and one (1) each
Page 188 of 630


for others. Each of the above spare connections shall be provided with
isolating valves.
5.02.12 Accessories
The tanks shall be provided with accessories as indicated in the Specification.

All the accessories shall conform to relevant Indian Standard. The following
broad guidelines are given for some of the accessories.
a) Conservation Vent Valve/Breather
Where continuous venting to atmosphere directly is not permitted for

the stored liquid, a conservation vent valve or a breather of approved
make & design shall be provided on each of the vent/overflow
connection of the condensate storage tank. The conservation vent
valves where provided, shall be designed to relieve the pressure or
vacuum corresponding to plus or minus 55mm water gauge in the
space above liquid in the tank. Detail cross-sectional drawing
indicating materials of construction shall be submitted along with the
proposal.
b) Level Indicator
Float operated or tubular gauge glass type indicator of high-grade

workmanship shall be provided on each tank. Tank of height not
exceeding 3m shall have tubular gauge glass and others float
operated level Indicator. For tubular gauge glass, isolating valves and
protective guards against mechanical shock shall be provided.
c) Level Switch
Where specified level switch of approved make & type shall be

furnished along with instrument root valves. Repeat accuracy of
operation shall be +
_ 1% of the full range. At least two level switches
one for High-level actuation and other for Low Level actuation shall be
provided for each tank to motor operated gate valves at inlet lines of
specified tank.
d) Dip Hatch
Each large dia cylindrical tank shall be fitted with one dip hatch. Dip
hatch shall have screwed end and shall be fitted with brass cap and
chain.
e) All tanks shall be provided with vertical rung ladder. In addition to this,
internal vertical ladder is to be provided in all tanks where the tank
height exceeds 3M, vertical ladder is to be provided with cage.
f) Top Manhole shall be provided in all tanks. Besides manhole at the

side of tank shall be provided in case of condensate storage. Manhole
size shall be 600mm NB(min.).

Page 189 of 630


5.02.13 When installation of tank is specified the recommendation regarding
installation in IS:803 shall be followed in general. In addition to those
recommendations, the following shall also be taken care of.
5.02.14 The finished tank grade for cylindrical tank shall be crowned from the outer
periphery to the centre with a slope. The sloping factor shall be taken as 1:36
unless otherwise specified.
Sufficient number of plugged holes shall be provided in the bottom plate of

the vertical tanks for bottom testing as specified in IS-803.
5.02.15 Welding shall be done in accordance with IS-803, IS-817 & IS-823.
5.02.16 Welding sequence shall be adopted in such a way so as to minimise the

distortion due to welding shrinkage. Contractor shall indicate in his drawing
the sequence of welding proposed by him, which should meet prior approval
of the Engineer.
Design of the Expansion Joint shall take care of the axial, angular or rotational
movement of the bellow and/or the equipment vibration. Axial compression or
elongation of RE joint under design pressure from free condition shall be 10
mm (max.). Lateral deflection of RE joint under design pressure from free
condition shall be 10-mm. Lateral deflection with simultaneous axial elongation
and compression shall be 10 mm. These figures shall be confirmed based on
the final details of condenser and C.W. pumps. Pressure compensating
expansion bellow shall be designed to suit the requirement of condenser.
The general design and constructional features of various components of the

Expansion Joints shall be as follows :
5.03.01 Body
a) Expansion bellow shall be manufactured from abrasion resistant

natural or synthetic rubber.
b) The Expansion Joints shall have integral flanges at both ends

complete with split retaining rings. The flanges shall be made of tough
non-compressible duck to resist stresses set up when the flange bolts
are tightened. The flange compound shall be designed to resist flow
under bolting pressure. The boltholes drilled on the flanges shall be
thoroughly coated with self-vulcanizing rubber so that edges of the
plies are not exposed.
c) 2 sets of split retaining rings shall be installed on each Expansion

Joint to increase resistance to pressure. The rings shall be made of
rolled steel IS-2062, split, bevelled and galvanized. They are to be
placed directly against the flange of the Expansion Joint and bolted
through it to the metal flange of the pipe. Steel washers shall be used
at the points where the rings are split.

Page 190 of 630


5.03.02 Carcass
Fabrics of high strength synthetic fibers (High quantity canvas duck and
polyester chord, reinforced) shall be used in suitable number of plies to hold
the shape of the bellow at the working condition. All fabric plies shall be
impregnated with rubber or synthetic components to permit flexibility between
them.
Copper coated steel wire or solid endless rings embedded in the carcass
shall be used for reinforcement of the expansion bellow.
5.03.03 Cover
The exterior and interior surfaces of the bellow shall be of Neoprene 3 mm

thick shore hardness 65+ _ 5 deg. durometer. Protective hypalon coatings shall
be applied at the exterior.
5.03.04 Control rod assembly
Expansion Joint shall be supplied with control rod assembly to prevent

excessive elongation or contraction of the bellow. Control rod assembly shall
consist of long bolt, nuts & lock nuts, washers/spherical washers, connecting
plates (gusset plate) for fixing the assembly with companion flanges.
Control rod assembly shall allow transverse and rotational movements under
limiting axial conditions of the expansion joints.
Design of the control rod assembly shall take care of the maximum axial
thrust across the bellow calculated on the basis of maximum fluid internal
pressure and the internal diameter of the arch.
5.03.05 Joints shall be provided with companion flanges. Companion flanges shall be
flat faced, slip-on and shall be fabricated from steel plates or forged.
5.04.00 Spring Supports
5.04.01 The spring rate for the springs to be adopted shall be around 40 Kg/mm. The
no. of springs and their initial compression for each type of support shall be
selected accordingly. The above details shall be furnished along with the offer.
5.04.02 Each spring selected shall not be loaded more than 60% of its maximum
rated load while carrying the load.
5.04.03 The spring supports shall be taken from the ground floor and the method of
attachment shall be detailed by the Bidder.
5.04.04 The material of construction of component parts shall be equal to or superior

than the following :
a) Spring : Spring steel conforming to IS-1570

Gr.50 Cr.1 V-23 or equal

Page 191 of 630


b) Spring housing : Carbon Steel to IS-2062
c) Base plate, anchor : Carbon Steel Hot dip galvanised bolts,

nuts, etc.
d) Saddle : Carbon Steel to IS-2062
e) Support Table : Carbon Steel to IS-2062
All other materials used shall be compatible with the service requirement and
shall be of tested quality. In case resilient seating is found necessary, details
of same with hardness, material etc. shall be indicated in the tender.
5.04.05 All the mounting plates, base plates, along with foundation bolts, nuts,
washers etc. as required shall be supplied by the Tenderer. All items required
for completing the installation of the spring assemblies shall be supplied
under this section.
5.04.06 The support saddles shall be welded to the respective C.W. pipe at site by the
Bidder. Bidder shall ensure that the supports can be placed in their respective
position with the C.W. pipes already installed.
5.04.07 The spring assemblies shall be set at shop for loads when filled up with water.
The design shall, however, permit that at site load adjustment to an extent of
+
_ 10% of specified loads shall be possible and even after this adjustment, the
system will allow free movement of C.W. pipes under loaded and empty
conditions. The offer shall clearly indicate method of adjustment proposed.
5.04.08 The locking device to be provided for the spring assemblies should be such
that it is possible to easily unlock the springs even when there is certain
amount of unbalance between the load applied on the springs and the spring
reactions. This is very important as there might always be certain difference
between the theoretically calculated load for which the springs will be pre-
compressed at shop and the actual load that will be applied on the springs
during operating conditions.
5.04.09 After installation of the spring supports at site with pre- compressed springs in
locked condition, the C.W. pipes will be filled up with water and then the
springs will be released by unloading the springs. If water in C.W. pipe is
required to be drained out for any repairs/maintenance works, the springs will
be locked first and then the water from the pipes will be drained out so as to
avoid undue upliftment of the pipe because of loss of weight due to draining
of water from the pipe. The system will be restored after repair/maintenance
works by filling up the pipes with water and then releasing the locks of the
springs.
The above operation of the spring supports shall have to be demonstrated by

the tenderer at site to the entire satisfaction of the Owner.
5.04.10 It shall be possible to take out the whole spring assembly for maintenance.
Arrangement for lubrication of springs and other frictional parts shall also be
provided to reduce frictional resistance.

Page 192 of 630


The spring box housing shall have drain plugs to allow draining of
accumulated water/other liquid etc.
5.05.00 Butterfly Valve
5.05.01 Butterfly valve and its operator shall be of heavy duty construction and shall
be designed to withstand all working conditions i.e. shall be able to open/
close or hold from/at any intermediate disc position, as required, without any
difficulty under different combinations of flow and pressure.
5.05.02 The design of the valve shall take into consideration the Water Hammer effect
for accidental closure of the valve disc.
5.05.03 Shaft of butterfly valves may be of single piece extending completely through
the valve disc or in two pieces, stubbed into the disc hubs. The shaft diameter
shall take into consideration the maximum differential pressure across the
valve disc when the valve is closed and the shock load due to accidental
closure of the valve disc.
5.05.04 Disc of butterfly valve shall have no external ribs transverse to the direction of
flow. The disc shall be of a design that permits removal and replacement at
site and shall be securely clamped on the body or disc of the valve.
5.05.05 Each butterfly valve shall be fitted with two (2) sleeve type shaft bearings,
contained in the hubs of the valve body. Bearings shall be of self-lubricated
type and shall not have any harmful effect due to handling fluid.
5.05.06 Shaft seals for butterfly valves shall be provided both at drive and non drive
end of the shaft to prevent fluid flow to valve bearings.
5.05.07 Design of the gear reducers for butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA
standard.
5.05.08 Butterfly valves to be used for flow regulation/control shall be designed to

accommodate extra velocity through the valve passage to ensure normal
service life. The design shall take care of the pressure drop across the valve
disc due to control of fluid flow and shall take care of the erosion and
cavitation effect on the body and the disc due to such operation.
For detail specification refer Annexure-II.
6.00.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
6.01.00 Scope
This specification covers excavation in pipe trenches in all types of soil

(including rock) including shoring, dewatering, back filling under pipes,
transportation of earth within station premises, backfilling the excavated
trenches with selected spoils, concrete encasement of pipe, compaction of
fills and approaches, protective fencing, lighting and other safety measures as
may be applicable, removal of surplus spoils to selected areas etc. and other
works for underground pipe installations. The scope of work also covers
Page 193 of 630


protection of adjacent structures and protection, maintenance or removal of
other pipes and conduits.
6.02.01 Materials to be used
Earth to be used for filling under pipes shall be clean, graded and free from
harmful and deleterious material. Borrow material, if required, for backfilling
the excavated trenches, shall be excavated from approved locations and
levels, and shall consist of granular material free from roots, vegetations,
decayed organic matter, harmful salts and chemicals, free from lumps and
clods.
Materials for shoring shall be of best commercial variety and approved by the
Engineer and the same shall be arranged by the Contractor at their own cost.
Shoring materials required for the work under this clause shall be arranged by
the Contractor at his own cost.
6.03.00 Execution
6.03.01 Setting out & levels
On receiving the approval from the Engineer on working drawings the

Contractor shall set out the work from the control points furnished by the
Engineer and fix permanent points and markers for ease of future checking.
These permanent points and markers will be checked by the Engineer and
certified by him after whom the Contractor will proceed with the work.
The Contractor will help the Engineer with men, materials, tools & instruments
for checking purpose. It should be noted that this checking by the Engineer
prior to start of the work will in no way absolve the Contractor of his
responsibility of carrying out the work to true lines and levels and grades as
per drawings and subsequent corrections, if necessary, free of cost to the
Owner in case any errors are noticed in the Contractor's work at any stage.
The clearance for starting excavation work in different areas within the work
may be given separately by the Engineer in co- ordination with other Project
work. As such prior approval of the Engineer shall be obtained by the
Contractor in each individual case.
6.03.02 Cleaning and Grubbing etc.
The area to be excavated shall be cleared out of fence, trees, logs, stumps,
bush, vegetation, rubbish, slush etc. and levelled up. Trees up to 300 mm
girth shall be up-rooted.
6.03.03 Excavation in Trenches
All excavation shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for

safety and working facility, wherever necessary and/or as directed by the
Engineer, shoring - `close' or òpen' type - shall be provided depending upon
the nature of soil, the depth of trench and location of adjacent structures

Page 194 of 630


already constructed. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take all
necessary steps to prevent the sides of trenches and pits from collapsing.
The rough excavation may be carried up to a maximum depth of 150 mm

above the final level. The balance shall be excavated with special care. If the
excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the drawing due to
the Contractor's fault, the excess depth shall be filled up to the required level
at the latter's cost with cement concrete not leaner than 1:4:8 ordinary
concrete or richer as directed by the Engineer.
The excavation must be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient
manner.
6.03.04 Dewatering
All excavations shall be kept free of water. Grading in the vicinity of

excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water running into
excavated areas. The Contractor shall remove by pumping or other means
approved by the Engineer any water inclusive of rainwater and subsoil water
accumulated in excavation and keep the trench dewatered until the
installation and backfilling work are complete. All pumps, cables and other
materials required for dewatering shall be arranged by the Contractor at his
own cost.
6.03.05 Backfilling in trenches with earth
Earth used for filling shall be free from salts, organic or other foreign matter.
All clods of earth shall be broken to small pieces or removed. Filling shall be
done on the sides and on top of pipes in layers not exceeding 150 mm,
watered (if required depending upon moisture content of the fill material),
rammed and consolidated, taking care that no damage is caused to the pipe.
Here also, the fill should rise the same on each side and coincidentally be
tamped in layers. As the backfilling is progressed, temporary bracings and
struts supporting the shoring planks may be dismantled progressively. The
ultimate removal of shoring planks shall only be done after the backfilling
work on both sides of the pipe is complete.
Earth for backfilling may be obtained from :
a) The excavated spoils being stacked at a suitable nearby place as

directed by the Engineer.
b) Some borrow pits at distance as specified by the Engineer.
c) Stacks of excavated spoils left by other agencies.
The final surface shall be trimmed and levelled to proper profile as desired by
the Engineer.

Page 195 of 630


6.03.06 Testing and Acceptance Criteria for Backfilling work
The degree of compaction required will be as per the stipulation laid down in
IS:4701. The density of soil in field shall be determined in accordance with
IS:2720 (Part-XXVIII) or IS:2720 (Part-XXIX). The work of backfilling will be
accepted after the Engineer is satisfied with the degree of field compaction
achieved. The Engineer at his discretion may ask the Contractor for
performing the Standard compaction tests at some specified locations for
determining the degree of compaction. The Contractor shall do the testing at
some approved laboratory at his own cost and forward test results, in
triplicate, to the Owner.
6.03.07 Disposal of Surplus Spoil
Surplus material from excavation, which is not required for backfilling, will be
disposed of in designated disposal areas. The spoils shall be dumped in a
systematic manner and spread in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick and
consolidated with the help of compacting equipment.
7.00.00 CIVIL WORKS
All Plain and Reinforced Concrete work covered in this section shall generally
conform to Specification for Cement Concrete (Plain & Reinforced) :
Volume VII unless noted otherwise.
8.00.00 TESTING AND INSPECTION
8.01.01 After complete pipe lines have been laid and joined, the same shall be tested
hydrostatically as specified in Vol.-II A, for hydrostatic test pressure of
circulating water piping, Auxiliary Cooling Water Piping.
8.01.02 All the longitudinal and circumferential welded seams shall be subjected to
chalk and kerosene test prior to hydraulic testing of the complete pipe line.
This shall be done at the presence of the Owner/Consultants. In addition to
this, test coupons shall have to be provided for each longitudinal seams for
mechanical tests (tensile and bend), if considered necessary by the Owner.
The test coupons are to be broken in presence of the Owner. Contractor
shall satisfy the Owner that work is being carried out in accordance with the
specification drawings and other conditions. Owner shall have full access to
the Contractor's working area.
8.02.00 Performance Tests for Steel Storage Tanks
8.02.01 Vertical Cylindrical Storage Tanks shall be tested generally as per IS:803
(latest edition) including the following :
a) Spot radiography if joint efficiency factor of 0.85 is specified.

Page 196 of 630


b) Bottom plate testing by air or vacuum box.
c) Shell testing by filling with water.
d) Fixed roof testing by air.
8.02.02 Horizontal cylindrical tanks manufactured in accordance with BS:2594 shall

be tested hydraulically at 0.7 bar at the top of tank, unless otherwise
specified.
8.02.03 Pressed steel tanks shall be hydraulically tested by filling with water up to the
top of tank as per IS:804.
8.02.04 Radiography & hydrostatic tests shall be guided by IS:2825 for pressure
vessels.
8.02.05 Hydraulic & other performance tests shall be conducted on all accessories of
the tank as per applicable standard.
8.02.06 All tanks shall be leak tested twice, after completion of fabrication and after
application of anti-corrosion painting/ lining. The tanks shall be filled up with
water in stages as directed by the Engineer. The duration of leakage test shall
not be less than eight (8) hours.
8.03.00 Shop Inspection and Testing for Expansion Joints
8.03.01 The manufacturer shall conduct all tests requirement to ensure that all the
component parts of the Expansion Joints offered conform to the requirements
of applicable codes and standards.
8.03.02 Dimensional inspection
Each Expansion Joint shall be inspected for dimensional accuracy

acceptance limits of which shall be mutually agreed upon.
8.03.03 Hydrostatic pressure test & leakage test
All Expansion bellows shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure test

at a value of one and a half (1.5) times the design pressure for a period of 10
min. under each of the following conditions :
a) Free position of the bellow
b) With permitted (design) elongation & lateral deflections and
c) With design contraction and lateral deflection.
Inspection for leakage from the bellow shall be carried out during pressure
test.
After the hydro test is over, the bellow shall be dimensionally inspected to
check deformation, if any.
Page 197 of 630


During the test, the control assembly shall be suitably adjusted to obtain the
test conditions of the bellow.
8.03.04 Vacuum Test
All Expansion Joints shall be subjected to vacuum test at a pressure of 700

mm of Hg for a period of 10 min. under each of the three conditions
mentioned in clause 8.03.03 above.
8.03.05 Chemical Analysis
Test for chemical composition of the bellow material, split retaining ring,
control rod assembly shall be carried out, if asked for in data sheets.
9.00.00 PAINTING
9.01.00 For Large Diameter Piping
9.01.01 Before application of the paint, the internal and external surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned with wire brush or white metal blasting as per SA 2.0
standard as required for removal of loose dirt, mill scales etc. Manufacturer's
recommendation shall strictly be followed in the application of paint.
9.01.02 Inner surface of each section of the pipe shall be given adequate number of
coats of epoxy resin based red oxide primer paint or approved equal so as to
achieve a dry thickness of minimum 0.8 mm. Inner surface painting shall be
applied at the fabrication yard before laying the pipes in position, leaving
about 200 mm at both ends for welding of joints. This portion shall be painted
after completion of laying and jointing.
9.01.03 Outside surface of pipes and fittings including hangers and supports that will
be overground or in a pit shall be given one (1) coat of red lead primer before
despatch from fabrication yard. After installation, the part of the pipeline from
where priming coat has been rubbed off shall be retouched with primer. Then
two coats of Synthetic Enamel paint of approved quality and colour shall be
applied.
9.01.04 Outside surface of buried pipes and fittings shall be provided with corrosion
protection as follows :
Rapping coating shall be done conforming to AWWA-C-203/IS15337 or

approved relevant codes/ standards. Contractor shall submit detailed protection
procedure for approval.
9.01.05 The pipes that will be buried underground shall be spark tested after
completion of wrapping of each sections/field jointing to check the quality of
insulation that has been provided on the pipe.
9.02.00 Painting for Steel Storage Tanks
9.02.01 Surface preparation :Internal white metal blasting and external wire brushing.
Page 198 of 630


9.02.02 Primer - i) internal - epoxy based Zn rich primer
ii) external - Synthetic Red lead.
9.02.03 Finish Coat - i) internal - Coal tar epoxy
ii) external - Synthetic enamel
9.02.04 Outside of bottom surface shall have 3 coats of Bitumastic paints.
10.00.00 DRAWINGS, CURVES & INFORMATION REQUIRED
10.01.00 The Tenderer shall submit with his formal proposal the following besides the
different information required elsewhere under this section of specification.
10.01.01 Outline and fabrication drawings of the tanks indicating plate thickness,
details of structural support, stiffeners and details of connections provided.
10.01.02 Illustrative literature and drawings and the equipments supplied for the
accessories supplied with tanks.
10.01.03 General Arrangement and Sectional drawings with data on weight and
material of construction for each category of Expansion Joints with control rod
assemblies.
10.01.04 A comprehensive write-up or brochure on the manufacturing and testing

facilities in the shop of the manufacturer for rubber expansion joints.
10.01.05 Complete technical details of each type of spring support. The Bidder shall
also submit outline drawings showing the support arrangements indicating
principal dimensions and weight of the supports. Whenever necessary,
cross-sectional details shall be furnished showing the details of assembly of
components and their material of construction.
10.01.06 The Bidder shall clearly indicate for each type of support the number of spring
used, rated load of springs, actual load to be carried, initial compression
requirement, etc. The Bidder shall also indicate maximum and minimum
spring compressions within which his design will permit spring movement for
loaded and empty working conditions.
10.02.00 After finalisation of contract, various drawings, data and instruction manual
shall be submitted for review/approval of Owner and afterwards for final
distribution in quantities following the procedure as set up in the applicable
clauses in General Conditions of Contract.
The various drawings/data to be furnished shall include the following :
10.02.01 Detailed fabrication drawing showing the sizes, materials and weld edge
preparation etc. The fabrication drawings shall give all necessary information
for fabrication; erection and painting of steel work in accordance with
provisions of this specification. Welding symbols used shall be in accordance
Page 199 of 630


with the requirements of IS:813 - latest revision and shall be consistent
throughout. Weld lengths called on the drawings shall be net effective
lengths.
10.02.02 Tenderer shall submit working drawing for excavation and backfilling purpose
as mentioned earlier.
10.02.03 The Contractor shall also submit detailed calculations in support of the final
pipe thickness adopted.
10.02.04 Instruction Manuals covering maintenance, repair and replacement of

equipment fabricated and supplied by them.
10.02.05 Details of welding procedure and weld roots to be used.
10.02.06 Design calculations for plate thickness etc., considering all applicable loads,
seismic effect, wind load etc.
10.02.07 Test procedures for tanks and test certificates.
10.02.08 General Arrangement drawing of each size and type of Rubber Expansion Joint
with control rod assembly giving principal dimensions and weights.
10.02.09 Cross-sectional assembly drawing of each size and type of Rubber

Expansion Joint complete with data on materials of construction, control rod
assembly etc.

Page 200 of 630


ANNEXURE-I
SPECIFICATION OF MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TANKS
Sl. Description Shape Size Nominal Nos.

No. Capacity Reqd.
(Cu.M)
Minimum
1. DM Water make up Tank Horizontal 5 1

in DM CW system Cylindrical
With flat ends
2. Potable water Tank Rectangular/ 50 1

Cylindrical
with flat roof
3. Service Water Tank RCC Over 300 1

head tank
4. Condensate Storage Tank Vertical 1000 1
5. DM Water Storage Tank Vertical 2000 2

Page 201 of 630


ANNEXURE-II
CAST IRON BODY BUTTERFLY VALVE
1.00.00 Valve classification Code : CIBF
2.00.00 Basic Design Code : AWWA-C-504
3.00.00 Pressure : To be suitably chosen by the Bidder

according to requirement, but not less
than class 75A as per AWWA-C-504.
4.00.00 Construction : Cast Body and Disc
5.00.00 Material
a) Body : 2% Ni Cast Iron as per IS-210 Gr.

FG260 with 2% Ni.
b) Valve Disc : -Do-
c) Valve Shaft : Stainless Steel ASTM-A-479 type 304
d) Seat ring : Clamping ring Stainless Steel ASTM-A-

479 type 304
e) Shaft Bearing : Ferrobestos LA-33
f) Gland Packing : Impregnated Teflon
g) Seal : Nitrile Rubber
6.00.00 End preparation : Flanged, Drilled as per ANSI B16.1.

Necessary counter flange nuts, bolts,
gaskets are to be provided with each
valve.
7.00.00 Testing : As per AWWA-C-504. However valve

disc strength for both forward reverse
flow is to be carried out as per BS5155.
Certificate for proof of design test for
similar type of valve is to be furnished.

Page 202 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-VIII
GENERALTECHNICAL
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPING, FITTINGS AND VALVES
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-VIII: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15 -V-IIIC-Sec-VIII.doc)
Page 203 of 630


CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1.00.00 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION 1 OF 34
2.00.00 SCOPE 1 OF 34
3.00.00 CODE & STANDARDS 2 OF 34
4.00.00 DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, FABRICATION 6 OF 34

AND ERECTION
5.00.00 TESTS & INSPECTION 32 OF 34

Page 204 of 630


SECTION: VIII
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPING, FITTINGS & VALVES
1.00.00 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, inspection, shop testing,

erection, testing and commissioning at site of all the piping, fittings, valves and all
other accessories as specified and as further required.
2. 00.00 SCOPE
The items & materials to be supplied shall include but not be limited to the following:
2. 01.00 Pipes, bends, elbows, tees, branches laterals, crosses, reducing unions, couplings,
cap, expansion joints, flanges, blank flanges, saddles, shoes, sampling connections
etc. necessary for making a reliable piping system.
2. 02.00 Gaskets, ring joint, backing rings, jointing material etc. as required.
2. 03.00 Instrument tapping connection, stub and thermowells.
2. 04.00 Supply and machining work of flanges, pipe spools and matching pipes to connect
flow measuring orifice nozzles etc., pressure accumulators as necessary.
2. 05.00 Valves and Isolation Gates, to start/stop and control / regulate flow.
2. 06.00 Strainers.
2. 07.00 Anchor blocks (for buried / over ground piping), support brackets, clamps, support
trestles, hangers, vibration dampener etc. for the piping under the scope of contract.
2. 08.00 Bolts, nuts, fasteners as required for interconnecting piping, valves and fitting as well
as for terminal points.
2. 09.00 Steel for pipe supports and embedded steel. Also pipe supports and necessary
embedment required to be embedded in concrete for underground / above ground
pipes.
2. 10.00 Painting, anti-corrosive coatings, etc. inside and outside of pipes as necessary and
as specified.
2. 11.00 All embedded parts required for all tanks/water retaining structures made of RCC
including puddle pipes shall be supplied by the Bidder.

Page 205 of 630


3. 00.00 CODE & STANDARDS
The design, manufacture, fabrication shop testing & inspection, erection, testing and
commissioning of piping fittings and valves shall conform to the latest revisions of the
following Indian / International codes / standards and other applicable statutory
codes / ordinances, rules, regulations as well as safety codes, in addition to other
codes / standards if any as addressed elsewhere in the Tender Specification.
Other National / International Standards may also be considered acceptable (subject

to specific approval by Purchaser) with reference to any specific situation /
requirement provided they are recognized to be equivalent or superior to the
Standards as stipulated in the Tender Specification.
ANSI - B 16.5 : Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings.
ANSI - B 16.9 : Wrought steel Butt welding fittings
ANSI - B 16.11 : Forged steel socket welding and screwed fittings
ANSI - B 16.21 : Non Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ANSI - B 16.25 : Butt welding ends
Wrought Steel Butt Welding short radius elbows

ANSI - B 16.28 :
and returns
ANSI - B 31.1 : Power Piping code.
ANSI - B 36.10 : Welded & seamless wrought steel pipe
ANSI - B 36.19 : Stainless steel pipe
API - 5L : Specification for Line Pipe
ASME - Section II Ferrous Materials Specification
ASTM - A 53 : Seamless carbon steel.
ASTM - A 106 : Grade C Seamless carbon steel pipe.
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

F441 /
ASTM - : Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and
F441M - 09
80
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

ASTM - F439 - 11 :
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

Page 206 of 630


Coal tar protective coatings and linings for steel

AWWA - C-203 :
water pipe lines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied
AWWA - C-208 : Dimensions for Steel Water pipe fittings
AWWA - C-504 : Standard for butterfly valve.
Specification for steel check valves (flanged and

BS - 1868 : butt-welding ends) for the petroleum, petrochemical
and allied industries
BS - 5158 : Specification for cast iron plug valves
BS - 5353 : Specification for steel plug valves
BS EN - 593 : Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves
Plastics piping systems for water supply with or

without pressure. Glass-reinforced thermosetting
BS EN - 1796 :
plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated polyester
resin (UP)
Industrial valves. Diaphragm valves made of

BS EN - 13397 :
metallic materials
BS EN - 13789 : Industrial valves. Cast iron globe valves
Plastics piping systems for drainage and sewerage

with or without pressure. Glass-reinforced
BS EN - 14364 : thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated
polyester resin (UP). Specifications for pipes,
fittings and joints
BS EN Industrial valves. Diaphragm valves of

- 16138 :
ISO thermoplastics materials
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GRP)

pipe fittings and joint assemblies - Requirements for
DIN - 16966 :
and testing of bushes, flanges, and flanged and
laminated joints
IS - 210 : Grey Iron Castings
IS - 318 : Leaded Tin Bronze Ingots and Castings
Precast Concrete Pipes (with and without

IS - 458 :
reinforcement).
Pipe Threads where Pressure Tight-Joints are

IS - 554 : made on the Threads Dimensions, Tolerances
and Designation.

Page 207 of 630


Copper Alloy Gate, Globe and Check Valves for

IS - 778 :
Waterworks Purposes.
IS - 783 : Code of Practice for Laying of Concrete Pipes.
Steel Tubes, Tubulars and other Wrought Steel

1239 Fittings - Specification
IS - :
Part 1 Part 1 Steel Tubes
Specification Steel Tubes, Tubulars and other Steel

1239 Fittings
IS - :
Part 2 Part 2 Steel Sockets Tubular and other Steel Pipe
Fittings
Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product

IS - 1363 :
Grade C.
Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product

IS - 1364 :
Grades A and B.
Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Steel

IS - 1367 :
Fasteners.
Indian Standard for Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron

IS - 1536 :
Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas and Sewage.
Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes for Water Gas

IS - 1537 :
and Sewage.
Cast Iron Fittings for Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas

IS - 1538 :
and Sewage.
Water Fittings - Copper Alloy Float Valves

IS - 1703 :
(Horizontal Plunger type)
IS - 1879 : Malleable Cast Iron Fittings
IS - 2016 : Plain washers
Hot Rolled Low, Medium and High Tensile

IS - 2062 :
Structural Steel.
Recommended practice for Hot dip galvanising of

IS - 2629 :
iron and steel
Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc

IS - 2633 :
coated articles.
IS - 2379 : Colour Code for Identification of Pipe Lines.

Page 208 of 630


Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and

IS - 2685 :
Maintenance of Sluice Valves.
Gaskets and Packings- Compressed Asbestos

IS - 2712 :
Fibre Jointing.
IS - 2825 : Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels.
Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes and

IS - 3006 :
Fittings.
IS - 3042 : Single Faced Sluice Gates (200 to 1200 mm size).
IS - 3114 : Code of Practice for Laying of Cast Iron Pipes.
Steel Pipes for Water and Sewage (168.3 to 2540

IS - 3589 :
mm Outside Diameter).
IS - 4038 : Foot Valves for Waterworks Purposes.
4682 Code of practice for lining of vessels and equipment

IS - :
(Part I) for chemical - rubber lining.
IS - 4736 : Hot-dip Zinc Coatings on Mild Steel Tubes.
High Density Polyethylene Pipes for Potable Water

IS - 4984 :
Supplies.
Unplasticized PVC Pipes for Potable Water

IS : - 4985 :
Supplies.
Swing Check Type Reflux (non-return) Valves for

IS : - 5312 :
Water Works Purpose.
Code of practice for laying of electrically welded

IS : - 5822 :
steel pipes for Water supply.
Code of practice for cathodic protection (Part-II) of

IS : - 8062 :
steel structure
Code of practice for coating and wrapping of

IS : - 10221 :
underground mild steel pipes
Sluice Valve for Water Works Purposes (50 to 1200

IS : - 14846 :
mm Size).

Page 209 of 630


4. 00.00 DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, FABRICATION AND ERECTION
4.01.00 The piping system, fittings and accessories supplied shall conform to high standards
of engineering, design, workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation in a manner acceptable to Purchaser.
4.02.00 All the piping systems, fittings and accessories supplied under this package shall be
designed to operate without replacement and with normal maintenance for a plant
service life of 25 years and shall withstand the operating parameter fluctuations and
cycle variations which can be normally expected during this period.
4.03.00 Material of construction for pipes under different services shall be as below:
Service Recommended
Material of Construction
River Water Carbon Steel
Clarified Water Carbon Steel
Filtered Water Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Degassed Water Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Demineralised Water Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Service Air Galvanized Steel
Instrument Air Stainless Steel (schedule 40)
Potable Water Galvanized Steel
Chlorine (liquid under pressure) Seamless Carbon Steel (schedule 80)
Chlorine (dry gaseous under Seamless Carbon Steel (schedule 80)

pressure)
Chlorine under vacuum CPVC (schedule 80)
Chlorine in water CPVC (schedule 80) / Carbon Steel

(inside rubber lined)
Sodium Hydroxide Solution CPVC (schedule 80) / Carbon Steel

Alum Solution CPVC (schedule 80) / Carbon Steel


Page 210 of 630


Service Recommended
Lime Solution Galvanized Steel
Polyelectrolyte Solution CPVC (schedule 80) / Carbon Steel

Hydrochloric Acid (concentrated) Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Hydrochloric Acid (dilute) Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Sodium Hydroxide (concentrated) Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Sodium Hydroxide (dilute) Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Sulfuric Acid Solution (concentrated) Carbon Steel
Sulfuric Acid Solution (dilute) Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)
Scale Inhibitor Solution Stainless Steel (schedule 40) / CPVC

(schedule 80)
Corrosion Inhibitor Solution Stainless Steel (schedule 40) / CPVC

(schedule 80)
Biocide Solution Stainless Steel (schedule 40) / CPVC

(schedule 80)
Filter Backwash Wastewater Carbon Steel
Ammonia Solution Seamless Stainless Steel (304 grade)
Hydrazine Solution Seamless Stainless Steel (304 grade)
Oxygen Line Aluminum
Crude Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)

Condensate
Treated Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)

Condensate
Demineralized Water with ion Stainless Steel (304 grade)

exchange resins
Non Oily Sludge Cast Iron (underground)

Carbon Steel (overground)
Neutralized Wastewater Carbon Steel (inside rubber lined)

Page 211 of 630


Cooling Tower Blowdown Carbon Steel
Boiler Blowdown Carbon Steel
Crude Oily Wastewater Seamless Carbon Steel
Treated Oily Wastewater Seamless Carbon Steel
Rainfall Runoff Carbon Steel
Equalized Wastewater Carbon Steel
Oily Sludge Seamless Carbon Steel
The portion of pipe lines at the downstream of isolation valves, conveying

flushing water shall be of the material & type same as those of the pipelines
which are being flushed.
4.04.00 Material & Dimensional Standards for Piping and Fittings
4.04.01 The welded Carbon Steel Pipes shall conform to the following codes / standards:
Pipes Material Dimension

Code / Standard Code / Standard
50 mm NB and Mild Steel, ERW, IS-1239 Part- IS-1239 Part-1. Plain ends for
below 1 / ASTM-A 53 Grade B Socket Welding.
(Welded), Type-E, Schedule
80.
65 mm to 150 Mild Steel, ERW, IS-1239 Part- IS-1239 Part-1. Bevelled ends
mm NB 1 / ASTM-A 53 Grade B for Butt Welding.
(Welded), Type-E, Schedule
40.
200 mm to 450 Mild Steel, ERW, IS-3589 IS-3589. Bevelled ends for Butt
mm NB Grade Fe 410 / ASTM-A 53 Welding.
Grade B (Welded), Type-E,
Schedule 40.
500 mm NB Rolled and Butt Welded from IS-3589. Bevelled ends for Butt
and above IS-2062 Grade A plates or SA- Welding.
285 Grade C or Equivalent
(subject to approval by
Purchaser). / Spiral Welded
pipes.

Page 212 of 630


Elbows Material Dimension

(R=1.5 D) Code / Standard Code / Standard
50 mm NB and Forged carbon steel from SW ends to ANSI-B 16.11

below ASME-SA 105 / Carbon Steel (3000#) / IS-1239 Part-2.
to IS-1239 Part-2 (Heavy
grade).
65 mm to 150 ASME-SA 234 Grade WPB / BW ends to ANSI-B 16.9 / IS-
mm NB Carbon Steel to IS-1239 Part-2 1239 Part-2.
(Heavy grade).
200 mm to 350 ASME SA-234 Grade WPB BW ends to ANSI-B 16.9 / IS--
mm NB 1239 Part-2.
Mitre Bends Material Dimension

(R=1.5 D) Code / Standard Code / Standard
400 mm NB Fabricated from parent pipe. ANSI-B 31.1 / AWWA-C 208.

and above 900 - 3 cut, 4 piece
constructions.
450 - 2 cut, 3 piece
constructions.
Tees Material Dimension
50 mm NB & Forged Carbon Steel to ASME- SW ends to ANSI-B 16.11

below SA 105 / ASME-SA 234 Grade (3000#) / IS-1239 Part-2.
WPB / Carbon Steel to IS-1239
Part-2 (Heavy grade).
mm NB Carbon Steel IS-1239 Part-2 1239 Part-2.
(Heavy grade).
200 mm NB ASME-SA 234 Grade WPB / ANSI-B 16.9
and above Fabricated from parent
pipe.(set in / set on type).
Reducers Material Dimension
50 mm NB & Forged carbon steel to ASME- SW ends to ANSI-B 16.11

below SA 105 / ASME-SA 234 Grade (3000#) / IS-1239 Part-2.
WPB / Carbon Steel to IS-1239
Part-2 (Heavy grade).
mm NB Carbon Steel to IS-1239 Part-2 1239 Part-2.
(Heavy grade).

Page 213 of 630


200 mm NB ASME-SA 234 Grade WPB / ANSI-B 16.9

and above Fabricated from parent
pipe.(set in / set on type)
Slip On Material Dimension
Flanges / Code / Standard Code / Standard
Blind Flanges
All sizes IS-226 / IS-2062 Grade A / Dimensions / Drilling as per
ASME-SA 105 / ASTM-A 216 ANSI-B 16.5, Pressure rating
Grade WCB. 150# / 300# or otherwise as
Flanges shall be either applicable, generally Flat face.
machined or forged from plate /
casting.
Bolts & Nuts Material Dimension
All sizes IS -1367 Cl 4.6 for bolts IS -1367

IS-1367 CI 4 for nuts
Gaskets Material Dimension

All sizes 3 mm thick wire reinforced ANSI-B 16.21.

rubber. Material shall contain
no asbestos.
4.04.02 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM-A 106 Grade C (Schedule 80) /
ASTM-A 53 / API 5L. Fittings shall conform to applicable codes / standards and be in
conformity with the code / standard for the parent pipe.
4.04.03 Galvanized Steel Pipes and Fittings shall conform to the clause 4.02.01 above and
be galvanized to IS-4736. Ends of all fittings will however be screwed as per IS-554.
Mitre Bends shall not be used. Pipe joints shall be screwed for lower size and
flanged for higher size. No hot work on G.I. pipes shall be done. Flanges shall be
screwed and hot dipped galvanized.
.
4.04.04 Pipes and Fittings which shall be rubber lined, need to conform the clause 4.02.01
above. The inside surfaces of the items shall be completely debeaded and made
suitable for lining. The items will be inside rubber lined with 3 mm thick (minimum)
natural rubber in two layers as per IS-4682. Flanges shall be flat face as per ANSI-B
16.5 and full face rubber lined. Pipe to Pipe joint will be flanged only. For small size
fittings, SS-316 fittings shall be used if rubber lined carbon steel fittings are not
available.
4.04.05 Stainless Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM-A 312 of specified grade (Schedule 40)
with dimensions as per ANSI-B 16.39. Fittings shall conform to applicable codes /
standards and be in conformity with the code / standard for the parent pipe. Mitre
Bends shall not be used. Elbows / Tees / Reducers shall be of Forged Stainless
Steel (ASME-SA 182) with SW ends to ANSI-B 16.11 (3000#).

Page 214 of 630


4.04.06 Cast Iron pipes shall conform to IS-1536. Fittings shall conform to applicable codes /
standards and be in conformity with the code / standard for the parent pipe.
4.04.07 PVC Pipes shall conform to IS-4984 Class 4. Fittings shall conform to applicable
codes / standards and be in conformity with the code / standard for the parent pipe.
4.04.08 High density Polyethylene Pipes shall conform to IS-4984 Class 5. Fittings shall
conform to applicable codes / standards and be in conformity with the code /
standard for the parent pipe.
4.04.09 CPVC pipe (Schedule 80) shall be produced from compounds which conform to and
are specified in ASTM-D 1784. CPVC Pipe shall be manufactured in strict
compliance with ASTM-F 441. Pressure-Rated CPVC Pipe shall be manufactured in
strict compliance with ASTM-F 442. All CPVC piping shall be manufactured from
NSF approved compounds and NSF Listed for potable water use. CPVC Fittings
(Schedule 80) shall be as per ASTM-F 437 and F 439.
4.04.10 Pipe lines carrying water, chemicals, air etc. shall be sized generally based on the
following ranges of velocities. However pipe size if any for any particular service is
addressed in the Tender Drawings / Data Sheets, the selected size for the applicable
service shall not be less than the specified size.
Pipe Size Velocity in m/sec

Below 50 mm 50 mm - 150 mm 200 mm & above
Pump Suction for 1.2 - 1.5 1.2 - 1.8

Water
Pump Discharge for 1.2 - 1.8 1.8 - 2.4 2.1 - 2.5

Water
Header 1.5 - 2.4 2.1 - 2.4
Compressed air 15 - 20 20 - 30 25 - 35
below 2 Kg/cm2(g)
Compressed air 20 - 30 25 - 40 35 - 45
2 Kg/cm2 & above
Suction to 7-8
compressor/
Blowers
Pump Suction for 1.0 - 1.2 1.1 - 1.3

Chemical Solution
Pump Discharge for 1.2 - 1.4 1.3 - 1.5

Chemical Solution
4.05.00 Pipe line under gravity flow shall be restricted to a flow velocity of 1 m/sec generally.
Channels under gravity flow shall be sized for a maximum flow velocity of 0.6 m/sec.

Page 215 of 630


4.06.00 The following " C" Value shall be used in WILLIAM & HAZEN formula for calculating
the friction loss in piping and fittings.
i) Carbon Steel Pipe : 100

ii) C.I Pipe : 100
iii) Carbon Steel Pipe (inside rubber lined) : 120
iv) PVC / HDPE / GRP / CPVC pipes : 140
For calculating the pump head, atleast 10% margin shall be taken over the pipe
friction losses.
4.07.00 Piping Layout
4.07.01 Piping shall be grouped together as far as practicable and routed to present a neat
appearance and orientation. All piping shall generally be installed perpendicular or
parallel to the major equipment, building structure and floor. Pipe routing shall be
such as to provide sufficient clearance for removal and maintenance of equipment,
easy access to valves, instruments and other accessories. The piping shall not
encroach on the withdrawal space of other equipment. Piping shall be routed to
avoid interferences with other pipes, hangers, structures, equipment electrical trays,
HVAC ducts etc. Convenient supporting points, adequate flexibility for thermal
expansion and neat appearance shall be considered in piping layout work.
4.07.02 Provision shall be made while preparing piping layout to accommodate all system
accessories such as valves/ expansion bellows/instrument stubs/instruments/
specialties as per P&ID.
4.07.03 All local instruments on the pipeline shall be located such that the reading can be
observed without inconvenience.
4.07.04 Overhead indoor piping shall have a vertical clearance of minimum 3.0 m above
finished floor level of working areas / walkways. Overhead outdoor piping shall have
a vertical clearance of minimum 4.0 m above finished ground level and minimum 7.5
m above finished road level unless addressed otherwise elsewhere in this
specification. When several pipe lines are laid parallel, flanged joints must be
staggered. Welded and flanged joints should as far as possible located at one third
span from supports. If the support is situated right under the welded joints this joint
must be reinforced with a strap. Flanged and welded joints must be avoided in the
middle of the span. Valves should be located in such a manner so as to ensure their
convenient operation from the floor or the nearest platform.
4.07.05 In specific cases (subject to instruction by Purchaser for any site specific reason),
pipes may be routed overground on RCC pedestals with bottom of pipes minimum
300 mm above finished ground level.
4.07.06 Pipe, when specifically addressed, shall be laid in trenches or buried. All buried pipes
in general shall be laid with the top of the pipe 1.2 m to 1.5 m below the finished
ground level unless mentioned otherwise. Full length of buried piping shall be
provided with 100 mm thick sand bed.
4.07.07 Openings provided to accommodate pipelines must be closed with bricks and mortar
with 10 mm to 12 mm clearance between brick work and pipe. The clear space must

Page 216 of 630


be filled with felt or approved filling compound. The details of wall sealing
arrangement shall be approved by Purchaser.
4.07.08 Drains shall be provided at low points and at pockets in piping such that complete
drainage of system is possible. Vent connections shall be provided at high points
where air or gas pockets may occur. Vent for use during hydrostatic test shall be
plugged after the completion of the test. Vents shall not be less than 15 mm size.
Plugs / cocks required for vent/drain system shall form part of the piping system and
shall be supplied by Bidder as per finalized flow diagram. All vent valves & drain
valves shall be arranged with easy reach of operation. All pipelines shall be given
proper slope towards the drain points.
4.07.09 To facilitate dismantling of piping at the valves and equipment, break up

flange/unions shall be provided. The location shall be decided as per the system
requirement during detailed engineering.
4.08.00 Line Joints
Line Joints shall be envisaged as follows:
CS and SS pipes Welded (socket welded for 50 mm NB & below &

:
butt welded for 65 mm NB and above)
Galvanized Pipes : Screwed
Rubberlined Pipes : Flanged
4.08.01 Welded joints
For making welded joints (socket weld or butt weld) the welding shall be performed
by manual shielded metal arc process. Any welder employed for carrying out
welding shall be qualified as per ASME-Section IX for the type of joints to be welded.
Jointing by butt weld or socket weld shall depend upon the respective piping material
specification.
For Stainless Steel piping atleast the root run shall be welded with Tungsten Inert
Gas (TIG).
Butt welding edge preparation shall be done as per ANSI-B 16.25.
All welding electrodes and welding rods including special ones, if any shall be
furnished by the Bidder.
4.08.02 Screwed joints
Threading of pipes shall be carried out after bending, heat treatment etc. If not
possible, threading may be done prior to these operations but proper care should be
taken to protect them from damage. Threads shall be to ANSI-B 2.1 (taper) NPT / IS
554, unless specified otherwise.
Teflon tapes shall be used to seal screwed joints and it shall be applied to the male
threads only. Threaded parts shall be wiped clean of oil or grease (with appropriate

Page 217 of 630


solvent if necessary) and dried before applying the sealant. Pipe ends shall be
reamed or filed out to size of bore and all chips shall be removed. Screwed flanges
shall be attached by screwing the pipe through the flange and the pipe as well as the
flange shall be refaced accurately.
4.08.03 Flanged joints
All flanges and flange drilling shall be to ANSI-B 16.5 of applicable pressure/
temperature class. However in case of interface with the pipe of Purchaser, the
flange/interconnection details shall be designed to match the applicable interface
piping and concerned details.
When weld neck or socket weld flanges are used, their bore must be made the same
as that of the pipe being welded to. Socket welded or threaded flanges may be
used, with the appropriate piping system for connection of pipe to the flanged
equipment.
Drilling of flanges on piping must match with the drilling of flanges on the valves
/equipments to which the piping is to be connected.
While fitting the mating flanges, care shall be taken to properly align the pipes and to
check the flanges to trueness so that the faces of the flanges can be pulled up
together without producing any stress on the adjacent pipes and equipment flanges.
Flanges shall be generally Slip-On / Blind Flat Face type. The packing ring or gasket
of the flanged joint shall be of full face type. Flanged joints shall not be buried.
4.08.04 With reference to maintenance for carbon steel pipes, three piece socket welded
unions for sizes 50 mm NB and below shall be used. For higher sizes, flanged joints
shall be used.
4.09.00 Fabrication of Pipes
4.09.01 General Requirements
The Bidder shall prepare necessary fabrication drawings based on approved piping
layouts.
Flanges and their contact surfaces shall be concentric with the pipe axis and shall be
accurately machined and drilled true to template.
Where welded pipe and fittings are used, the longitudinal weld seams of adjoining
sections shall be staggered by 90 degree.
Prefabrication shall be carried out in the fabrication shop to ensure quality of work
and to minimize work on the field.
Where fabricated reducers have been specified, they shall be fabricated from parent
pipes by the cut and shut method.

Page 218 of 630


All bends, tees and reducers shall be fabricated as per the latest edition of power
piping code, ANSI-B 31.1 or approved equivalent. Reinforcement wherever required,
shall be provided.
Only shop fabricated mitre bends or mitre fittings shall be acceptable. Mitre bends
will not be accepted for steel pipes of 350 NB and below. For sizes 400 mm NB and
above, the mitre bends shall conform to BS-534.
For easy handling & removal of equipment, valves etc. and for maintenance
purpose, break up flanges shall be provided for 65 mm NB and above. For flanged
joints of 50 mm NB and below, suitable type of compression flexible coupling shall
be provided.
4.09.02 Rolled and Welded /Spiral Welded Pipes
Pipes of larger diameter shall be fabricated from steel plates conforming to IS-2062
by rolling and welding or spiral welded pies shall be used.
Where pipe lengths need to be erected before the circumferential joints is welded,
the pipe ends at these joints shall be beveled so that the top half is welded mostly
from outside and the bottom half mostly from inside of pipe.
Beveled (single V / double V) ends shall be provided for butt welding as per Welding
Procedure Specification.
4.09.03 Fabrication of flanges for large diameter pipes (sizes 600 mm NB and above)
Flanges fabricated from plates shall conform to AWWA-C 207 / BS-4504 / ANSI-B
16.47.
All welds in fabricated flanges shall be subjected to 10% radiographic examination.
Flanges shall be flat faced machined to 10 microns surface finish. Back face of the
flanges shall also be machined to 25 microns surface finish.
Inspection holes shall be provided at suitable locations for pipes 800 mm NB and
above as required for periodic observations and inspection purposes.
4.09.04 Rubber Lined Pipes
All rubber lined pipes shall be seamless or bead removed ERW pipes. Inside surface
of the pipes shall be completely cleaned and made suitable for lining.
All rubber lined pipes shall have flanged joints. Pipes shall be welded with flanges
before rubber lining.
For rubber lined pipe, natural rubber lining should be applied in two (2) layers on the
inside surface of pipes, giving a total thickness not less than 3 mm. Surface
hardness of rubber lining shall be 65 + 5 Shore A class.
4.09.05 Welding
Welding shall be carried out by manual shielded metal arc and Tungsten Inert Gas

Page 219 of 630


Welding process. Electrodes used shall be of Purchaser approved make. Electrodes

shall be kept dry and electrode containers shall be protected against moisture.
Electrodes that show sign of deterioration or damage shall not be used. Automatic or
semiautomatic welding shall be done with the specific approval of Purchaser.
The Bidder shall submit procedures for welding, stress relieving, dye penetrant
testing radiography etc. for prior approval of the Purchaser.
Weld shall not be made in pipe bends.
4.10.00 Supports for Overground Pipe
4.10.01 Complete supporting system for the pipe line shall be designed, fabricated and
supplied by the Bidder. Inside the building, the overhead portion of the pipe line may
be supported from the building structures. No support shall be taken from the brick
wall. Outdoor pipes shall run on steel trestles wherever required. All the steel
structure for the pipe rack and the supporting posts/trestles along with all necessary
hangers, clamps, connecting steel, fixing bolts, nuts etc. shall be supplied and
erected by the Bidder.
4.10.02 Hangers and supports shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently acting
loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow
pipe line movements as necessary. All guides, anchors, braces, dampener,
expansion joint and structural steel to be attached to the building/structure, trenches
etc. shall be provided. Type of hangers and components for all piping shall be
selected and approval obtained from the Purchaser.
4.10.03 The supports shall meet the general guidelines indicated in the following code /
standards:
MSS-SP 58 : Pipe hangers & supports - Materials, design and

manufacture.
MSS-SP 69 : Pipe hangers & supports Selection and application.
ANSI-B 31.1 : Power Piping Codes
4.10.04 Bidder shall locate, design, fabricate, supply and erect all supports, restraints and
anchors required for supporting of over ground portion of piping under this contract
4.10.05 Support drawings for piping shall be got approved from the Purchaser. BOM for
each support shall also be submitted.
4.10.06 All material for supports shall be of tested quality.
4.10.07 All structural steel required for supports shall be provided by the Bidder at no extra
cost to the Purchaser.
4.10.08 All pipe supporting element, guides, sliding support, beams, channel section,
attachment to supports, beam clamps etc. shall be provided by the Bidder.
4.10.09 Support locations will be shown in the layout drawing to be submitted by the Bidder.
4.10.10 Fabrication, supply and installation of brackets, pipe shoes, saddles etc. shall be

Page 220 of 630


included in the scope of Bidder and the same shall be carried out as per approved
drawings.
4.10.11 If an outdoor saddle support is assumed to permit sliding movement of piping over
the support, consideration shall be given in selection of supporting material at the
interface so that no rust formation takes place and the actual sliding movement is
feasible in practice.
4.10.12 All pipe supports shall be designed to fully sustain the pipe in normal operating
position, allow free and ample expansion or contraction except where anchored and
prevent excessive stress.
4.10.13 Sway braces, cushioned clamps or other vibration control equipment shall be used
in order to prevent unwanted movements of the piping due to vibration, shock or
other causes. These shall be of such design as to protect piping against these
movements regardless of direction.
4.10.14 The supports shall be so interspaced as to minimize sagging of the pipes and to
keep them with in permissible limits where pipes are full with the conveying media.
4.10.15 All piping supports shall be designed to avoid interference with other piping hangers,
electrical conduits equipment and structures etc.
4.10.16 Saddles, supports etc. shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrent acting
loads and shall be fabricated from plates/pipes sections conforming to SA 53 / IS-
2062 or equivalent. They shall be designed to provide the requirement of supporting
effects and allow pipe line movements as necessary. The structural work shall be as
per IS-800 / BS-4360.
4.10.17 The maximum spans of the supports of straight lengths shall not exceed the
recommended values indicated in ANSI-B 31.1. The spans shall be suitably reduced
considering the following:
a) Point loads due to valves and specialties, branch lines etc.
b) Pipe bends
c) Structural Steel beams.
d) Facilities for maintenance of flanged joints.
e) Minimum loads on equipment.
4.10.18 All vertical lines shall be properly supported on the vertical run and additionally
provided with adequate number of lateral-restraints where the length of vertical run
exceeds 5M.
4.10.19 At all sliding surfaces of restraints and supports Bidder shall provide a teflon lining to
minimize sliding friction.
4.10.20 Pipe clamps shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm for indoor piping and 6 mm for
outdoor piping.
4.11.00 Erection

Page 221 of 630


4.11.01 The Bidder shall coordinate the erection of the piping system as required with the
erection schedule of other concerned systems. The sequence of work shall be
carefully planned to minimize interference with other groups working in the same
area. The actual sequence to be followed shall be to the approval of Purchaser who
may at any time, direct the Bidder to reschedule his work as per the status of work
site
4.11.02 Prior to making interface connections with equipment / system supplied by others,
the Bidder shall obtain the approval of the concerned authority.
4.11.03 All workmanship shall be accomplished using accepted methods and procedures of
the highest recognized fabrication and erection code / standards. Workmanship not
conforming to the intent of this specification shall be liable to rejection by the
Purchaser at any time, during the progress of work. The Bidder shall correct the
workmanship immediately at no extra cost to the Purchaser.
4.11.04 The Bidder shall make all interface joints of the piping system, covered under this
specification at the connecting points with equipment/piping supplied by others.
4.11.05 It is the responsibility of the Bidder to ensure correct orientation of all valves,
instrument stubs etc. in line with final piping drawings.
4.11.06 The Bidder shall utilize the existing structures if any, to support the piping as far as
practicable. All auxiliary steels required shall be supplied by the Bidder.
4.11.07 Before performing any welding, all corrosion products, dust, grease and other
foreign material shall be cleaned from the surfaces to be joined.
4.11.08 Piping on both sides of the joint shall be adequately supported during all welding.
Temporary supports, if used shall be so designed that no stress due to pipe weight
comes on the joints during the joining.
4.11.09 All pipes shall be located and laid in accordance with the approved layout drawings.
No deviation will be allowed unless written consent is issued by Purchaser in specific
case(s).
4.11.10 Before laying the pipes, the coordinates and levels of the pipes shall be checked by
the Bidder. Any discrepancies between the execution and approved drawings shall
be brought to the notice of the Purchaser and corrections shall be carried out as per
his instructions.
4.11.11 During erection of piping, the Bidder shall provide proper number and size of bolts
and nuts as per drawings and specification. The Bidder shall provide approved
quality of grease mixed with graphite powder thoroughly on all the bolts, nuts and
washers immediately after erection and when the flange joints are dismantled for
flushing, testing and alignment of equipment etc. to prevent rusting of nuts, bolts and
gaskets. The grease and graphite powder shall be supplied by the Bidder
4.12.00 Cleaning and Flushing
The exterior and interior surface of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all sand,
mill scale, grease, oils, dirt and other foreign materials. After cleaning, the interior
surfaces of all piping shall be thoroughly blown dry and protected with a completely

Page 222 of 630


water soluble preventive coating.
Flange faces shall be coated with an easily removable rust preventive coating.
Machined surface shall be coated witif h rust preventive paint. The paint shall be
consumable in the welding process.
4.13.00 Pipes and Fittings if any, coming under purview of IBR, should meet its requirements
and getting the approval from IBR in respect of the same shall be under the scope of
the Bidder.
4.14.00 Valves & Isolation Gates
Valves will be used to start/stop or control flow.
All valves, shall be suitable for service conditions i.e. flow, temperature and pressure
under which they are required. The valves shall be of standard pressure rating as
per the applicable code/ standard. The pressure rating of diaphragm valves shall be
selected considering the maximum expected operating differential pressure. Sample
valves will be used in sample collection lines.
Gates will be primarily used for isolation of flow in open channels although these
should be capable of throttling the flow too.
For location and type of Valves / Isolation Gates, Bidder need to refer to the
P&I drawings enclosed with this specification.
4.14.01 Sluice / Gate Valves (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar
application)
Sluice / Gate valve shall conform to IS-14846 PN1.6 minimum. Stem, seat ring and
wedge facing ring shall be of stainless steel construction. Other parts shall be as
per IS-14846. Valves shall be of outside screw and rising stem type. Ends will be
flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150 (minimum) piping flanges.
Sluice / Gate valves for sizes 50 mm NB and below shall conform to IS-778 Class-2 /
ANSI-B 16.34 straight, rising stem; with outside screw.
Sluice / Gate valves shall be provided with the following accessories in addition to
the standard items.
a) Hand wheel
b) Gear Reduction Unit Operator for valves 250 mm NB and above.
c) Bypass valve for valve of sizes 300 mm NB and above.
d) Draining / Flushing arrangement wherever required.
e) Arrow indicating flow direction.
f) Position indicator.
Sluice / Gate Valves shall be provided with back seating bush to facilitate gland
renewal during full open condition.

Page 223 of 630


For lower sizes, the gate valves will be screwed bonnet with outside screw rising
stem as per IS-778. The material of construction will be gun metal body, with brass
stem and trim. Ends will be screwed to ANSI-B 2.1.
Gate valve on galvanized iron pipe shall be gun metal construction as per IS-778
Class 2. Ends will be screwed to ANSI-B 2.1.
4.14.02 Butterfly Valves (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar application)
Butterfly valves shall be of double flanged or lugged wafer type of low leakage rate
conforming to AWWA-C 504 class 150 (min.) or BS-5155 PN 10 / class 150
(minimum)
The various components of butterfly valves shall be of the following:
i) Body : Cast Iron ASTM-A 48 Cl.40;

BS-1452 Grade220
SG Iron BS-2789.
Cast Iron IS-210 Grade FG 260
Cast Steel ASTM-A 216 Grade WCB;
BS- 1504 or Equivalent grade (subject to approval by
Purchaser).
ii) Disc : Cast Iron ASTM-A 48 Cl.40;

BS-1452 Grade220
SG Iron BS-2789.
Cast Iron IS-210 Grade FG 260
Cast Steel ASTM-A 216 Grade WCB;
BS-1504 or Equivalent grade (subject to approval by
Purchaser).
iii) Shaft : ASTM-A 296 Grade CF 8M / AISI 316:

AISI-420;
BS-970 Grade 316;
BS-970 Grade 420 S45.
iv) Seat rings : Nitrile rubber, EPDM (Ethylene propylene rubber),

Hypalon.
Butterfly valves shall be fitted with sleeve type bearing such as PTFE. Valves of size
350 mm NB and above shall be provided with one or two thrust bearings to hold the
disc securely in the centre of valve seat without hydraulic or external axial shaft
loads. Sleeve and other bearings fitted into the valves body shall be of self
lubricated materials that do not have any effect on the fluid handled and other
components of the valves.
All the butterfly valves shall be provided with Hand wheel or lever/wrench operated
as per the requirements.
The use of lever operators shall be limited to valves requiring a maximum of 90

degree stem rotation from full open to full closed position. For lever/wrench operated
valves, means shall be provided for positively holding the disc in not less than three
intermediate positions

Page 224 of 630


For larger sizes i.e. 150 mm NB and above, hand wheel shall be provided.
Manually operated valves shall be provided with reduction gear unit for valves of
size 250 mm NB and above. Valve provided with motorised or pneumatic actuator
shall be provided with a hand wheel for manual operation.
All the valves shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical stop-limiting devices to
prevent over travel of the valve disc in the open and closed positions. The valve
operators (Handwheel or Gear reduction unit or Motor actuator etc.) shall be
designed as per applicable International Standard.
All the butterfly valves shall be provided with an indicator to show the position of the
disc.
Ends will be flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150 (minimum) piping
flanges.
4.14.03 Butterfly Valves (for decationized water / deanionized water / demineralized water /
desalinated water / similar application)
The butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements addressed under Cl. No.
4.14.02 above along with the requirements delineated below:
a) Body shall be lined (minimum 3 mm) with natural rubber, ebonite, polypropylene
or PVDF.
b) Disc shall be either lined with PVDF, polypropylene, or natural rubber or shall
conform to ASME-SA 479 Grade 316.
4.14.04 Ball Valves (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar application)
Ball valves may be used for sizes 40 mm NB and below. Ball valves shall conform
to the
following technical specifications:
a) Design Standard BS:5351
b) Type Screwed / Welded / Flanged ends; Full Bore: Split

Body & Seat supported construction
c) Material of
Construction
Body Carbon Steel to ASME-216 WCB / Cast Iron to IS-
210 Grade 220 or better.
Ball Stainless steel ASME-SA 479 Grade 316 or
410.
Seat ring PTFE
Stem Stainless steel ASME-SA 479 Grade 304 or
316 or 410.
Seats Nitrile rubber; PTFE
d) Valves shall be designed to be directly operable by a wrench / hand lever.

Page 225 of 630


e) Suitable stops shall be provided for both the fully open & close condition.
f) All the valves shall be provided with an indicator for showing the position of
the ball port.
g) Ends will be flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150 (minimum)
piping flanges
4.14.05 Globe Valves (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar application)
Globe valves shall conform to the following technical specifications:
For sizes 50 mm NB and below
i) Design Standard : IS-778 Class-2 / BS-1873
ii) Type : Straight, rising stem, with

outside screw.
iii) Material of Construction
i) Body, Bonnet, Leaded Tin Bronze con forming IS-

Stuffing Box & seat 318 Grade 2
rings
ii) Stem Stainless Steel, AISI-316
iii) Disc IS-318 Grade 2/AISI-316
Note: However, valves in the flushing water lines shall be of type and
material specified for the chemicals which are being flushed by the
line.
For sizes above 50 mm NB
i) Design Standard : BS-13789 PN 10 (minimum).
ii) Type : Double Flanged or wafer body,

outside screw and rising stem
type.
iii) Material of construction
a) Body : Cast iron: IS-210 Grade FG260 /

BS-1452 Grade14.
b) Stem : Stainless steel AISI-410 / 13%

chrome steel.
c) Disc : Cast iron IS-210 Grade 260 /

BS-1452 Grade 14.

Page 226 of 630


d) Packing : PTFE
e) Seat & seat rings : 13% chromium steel
f) Gland & gland nut : AISI-420
g) Hand wheel : Cast Iron or Malleable Iron
iv) Back seat shall be provided on the stem or on the disc.
v) Renewable disc assembly shall consist of disc holder, disc, disc

guide, check nut and disc retaining nut with washer.
vi) Disc of globe valve may be provided with renewable rubber seating
ring.
vii) Handwheels shall be marked with the word. OPEN or SHUT with
arrow to indicate direction of opening or closing.
Ends will be flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150
(minimum) piping flanges
Globe valve on galvanized iron pipe shall be gun metal construction as per IS-778
class 2. Ends will be screwed to ANSI-B 2.1.
Note: However, valves in the flushing water lines shall be of type and material
specified for the chemicals which is being flushed by the line.
4.14.06 Diaphragm Valves (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar
application)
Metallic Unlined Diaphragm valves (manual / auto as specified elsewhere in this

specification) may be used for isolation purposes.
The Metallic Unlined Diaphragm valves shall conform to the requirements addressed
under Cl. No. 4.14.07 below except the requirements with reference to lining for
body and integral flanges.
4.14.07 Diaphragm Valves (for decationized water / deanionized water / demineralized water
/ desalinated water / dilute and concentrated acidic solution / dilute and concentrated
alkaline solution / similar application)
Metallic Diaphragm valves (manual / auto as specified elsewhere in this

specification) may be used for isolation purposes.
The metallic diaphragm valves shall conform to the following requirements.
a) Design Standard : BS EN-13397 or Equivalent (subject to

approval by Purchaser) of required

Page 227 of 630


rating/class. (minimum rating of valves

should be PN 10).
b) Type : Flanged and lined body ends, sealed

bonnet, weir pattern, tight shut off type.
c) Material of Construction
Body/Bonnet : Cast Iron IS-210 Grade FG.260 or

Equivalent (subject to approval by
Purchaser).
Cast steel ASTM-A 216 Grade WCB.
Body lining : Soft Natural rubber - 3 mm thick as per

IS-4682 (hardness 85-90 on shore A),
Ebonite polypropylene, PVDF.
Diaphragm : Reinforced rubber, Hypalon
Handwheel : Cast Iron
Compressor : Stainless Steel
Stem & Bush : Stainless Steel
d) Ends will be flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150 (min.) piping
flanges, full face rubber lined and shall be cast / integral with the body.
e) Handwheels shall be marked with the direction of closure.
f) Valves shall be provided with a position indicator to show the open and
closed condition.
h) Valves provided with pneumatic actuators shall be provided with a

handwheel for manual operation. The valves operators shall be designed as
per applicable International Standard.
i) The testing of valves will be as per BS EN-13397 and rubber lining will be
tested as per IS-4682.
Note: For valves which may come in contact with concentrated acid/ alkali, the
material of construction of diaphragm shall be as follows:
Diaphragm shall be of reinforced Teflon, EPDM for acid services and

reinforced Neoprene / Hypalon for alkali services.
Use of Nonmetallic Diaphragm Valves for any specific / critical application shall be
subject to approval by Purchaser and shall conform to the requirements of BS EN
ISO 16138 - Industrial valves. Diaphragm valves of thermoplastics materials.
4.14.08 Plug Valves (for lime solution / sludge / similar application)
The plug valves shall conform to the following requirements.

Page 228 of 630


a) Design Standard BS-5158 or Equivalent (subject to approval

by Purchaser)
b) Type Flanged and non lubricated, regular pattern,
plug valves.
c) Material of Construction
Body Cast Iron IS-210 Grade FG 260 or

Equivalent (subject to approval by
Purchaser)
Plug Stainless Steel AISI-316
Body Sleeve or Seat PTFE
Seat PTFE
Gland AISI-304 / AISI-316
Cover Cast Steel ASTM-A 216 Grade WCB
Gland Nut AISI-304 / AISI-316
d) Valves shall be operated by permanently fitted wrench or Hand lever.

Wrench shall be mounted so that they are parallel to the valve bore axis
when the valve is in fully open condition.
e) All valves shall be provided with an indicator for the position of the plug
part.
f) Suitable stops shall be provided for the fully open and fully closed
positions of the valve.
g) Valves of size of 250 mm NB and above shall be provided with a suitable

reduction gear unit.
h) Ends will be flanged and compatible with AISI-16.5 Cl. 150 (minimum)
piping flanges.
4.14.09 Non Return or Check Valve (for river water / clarified water / filtered water / similar
application)
Non return valves shall be of swing check (reflux) type or dual plate type.
The valves shall conform to the following specifications.
i) Design Standard : IS-5312, BS-1868, BS-5153, API-594 / API-60 or

equivalent (subject to approval by Purchaser)
ii) Type : Swing check Type and Flanged ends.
iii) Material of Construction:

Page 229 of 630


a) Body & Cover Cast iron IS-210 Grade FG 260 / Cast Iron
Hinge Disk/Door BS-1452 Grade 220 or equivalent (subject to
approval by Purchaser)
b) Hinge Pin and Cast steel ASTM-A 216 Grade WCB

Door / Disc Pin High tensile Brass IS-320 HT 2 or
BS-2872 equivalent (subject to approval by
Purchaser)
c) Disc facing ring Stainless steel
d) Body Seat ring Stainless steel
e) Bearing bushes Leaded Tin Bronze IS-318 Grade 2
f) Bolts Carbon Steel
Ends will be flanged and compatible with ANSI-B 16.5 Cl. 150 (minimum) piping
flanges. .
Body shall be permanently marked with an arrow inscription indicating the direction
of motion of the fluid for all the check valves.
For sizes 50 mm NB and below, check valves shall be gun metal body swing type as
per IS-778. Ends will be screwed type to ANSI-B 2.1.
4.14.10 Non Return Valve (for decationized water / deanionized water / demineralized water
/ desalinated water / dilute and concentrated acidic solution / dilute and concentrated
alkaline solution / similar application)
The valves shall conform to Cl. No. 4.09.00 above along with the following
requirements:
a) The body, cover & Disc shall be lined with natural Rubber, PTFE or Viton.
The Hinge, Hinge Pin & Disc Pin shall be coated with PVDF, or suitable
elastomer. The bearing bushes shall be PTFE or Equivalent (subject to
approval by Purchaser) material (subject to approval by Purchaser). Bolting
shall be of stainless steel. In the absence of lining/coating, the complete
valve shall be of stainless steel construction (AISI-316).
b) For only acid services Non- Return valves shall be of lined construction &
Flap type.
c) For alkali services, the complete valve shall be stainless steel construction
(AISI-316) or of lined construction as specified above.
4.14.11 Valves for Sampling / Instrument Isolation Service
Each sampling valve / instrument isolation valve shall be full bore ball type.
Ball valves shall conform to the requirements stipulated under Cl.4.04.00 above.
However, Body material shall be Stainless Steel (AISI-316).

Page 230 of 630


4.14.12 Valves for Air Service
For Air services globe valves or Ball valves may be used for sizes 50 mm NB and
below.
For sizes higher than 50 mm NB, either Butterfly valve or Ball valves shall be used.
Globe valves shall generally conform to Cl. 4.05. 00 above.
Ball valves shall conform to the requirements stipulated in Cl.4.04.00 above.

However, Body material shall be leaded Tin Bronze (IS-318 Grade2) or stainless
steel (AISI-304 / 316).
Butterfly valves shall conform to the Cl.4.03.05 to 4.03.09 of this section. However,
the body & Disc shall be either cast iron lined with elastomer such as PVDF or PTFE
or stainless steel construction (AISI-304 / 316).
4.14.13 Safety / Relief Valves
The safety valves / relief valves at the downstream of positive displacement type
metering pumps shall be of the standard type manufactured by the pump
manufacturer and the material of construction shall suit to the fluid handled.
4.14.14 Valves for Resin Transfer Line
In resin transfer line two way eccentric plug valve shall be used. The valves, shall
have type 316 stainless steel body and bearings, resilient faced plug and flanged
ends.
4.14.15 Isolation Gates
Design standard for gates shall be IS-3042 or Equivalent (subject to approval by

Purchaser).
The gates shall be rectangular or square sluice, rising spindle type conforming to
class-1 of IS-3042.
i. Frame and Door Cast Iron IS-210 Grade 20
ii. Spindles, bolts & nuts M.S. to IS-2062
iii. Face & seat rings Gun metal (as per IS-3042).
All the parts of gates shall be applied with the coats of heavy duty bitumastic paint.
Each of the gates shall be provided with handwheel, and a position indicator.
The gates for DM plant drains shall be rubber lined to a minimum thickness of 4.5
mm.

Page 231 of 630


4.15.00 Strainers
4.15.01 Basket Strainers
a) Basket strainers of simplex design shall have the following materials of

construction for raw/clarified/filtered water application.
i. Body Fabricated mild steel : IS-2062 (Tested quality)
ii. Strainers Wire shall be stainless steel (AISI:316 18 BWG

30 mesh suitably reinforced. Reinforcement
material shall also be of stainless steel
construction.
iii. Drain Plug / Nuts Gun metal
b) Inside and outside of basket body shall be protected with one coat of high
build zinc phosphate primer and three coats of Chlorinated rubber paint to a
total thickness of 200 microns.
c) Suitable Vent and drain valves shall be provided for the strainers.
d) Screen (strainer) flow area shall be at least four times pipe sectional area.
Flow area in any portion of Basket strainer assembly shall not be less than
the pipe cross sectional area.
e) Pressure drop in clean condition shall not be more than 1.0 mwc at full flow.
f) Basket Strainer shall be provided with lifting lugs and suitable mounting
arrangement.
g) For DM water service, body shall be rubber lined to minimum 4.5 mm

thickness (soft rubber of shore Hardness 65 5A).
4.15.02 Y-Type Strainer
a) Y-Type strainer for water application shall be constructed of following

materials:
i. Body Cast Iron IS-210 Grade FG 260
ii. Strainers Wires of stainless steel AISI-316, 18 BWG 30

mesh suitably reinforced. Reinforcement material
shall also be of stainless steel construction.
iii. Drain Plug / Nuts Gun metal (threaded construction)
b) Y-Type strainers shall also conform to Cl. 4.15.01 (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f).
c) Body of the Y-type strainers of alkali, and demineralised water shall be of

Cast Iron (IS-210 Grade FG 260) and lined with soft or hard rubber to a
thickness of 3 mm.

Page 232 of 630


d) For acid services, apart from the rubber lined body material, the screen
material, shall be Polypropylene or HDPE wire cloth of suitable mesh and
thickness.
4.16.00 Resin Traps
The resin traps for the Ion exchange vessels shall be provided for the collection of
Ion exchange resin shall conform to the following:
4.16.01 The body shall be of mild steel (IS-2062) and lined internally with rubber (Hard/Soft
rubber), Saran or polypropylene. The internals (rod and screen) for all resin traps
shall be of AISI-316 construction. All screen components shall be welded at each
intersection of wire and support rod for good strength, Resin traps screen opening
shall not exceed 120 percent of the associated process vessel under
drain/backwash collection header nozzle screen opening and shall be suitably
selected to retain even the minimum size of the resin selected for the process.
4.16.02 The resin traps shall be provided with a draining arrangement with a valve for
collection of trapped resins. Resin trap body shall have lifting lug for easy handling
during maintenance/erection.
4.17.00 General Requirements for Valves, Gates, Strainers and Resin traps
4.17.01 All the items shall be suitable for service conditions i.e. flow, temperature and
pressure to which they may be subjected to.
4.17.02 All the items shall be of proven design for the duty conditions and the Bidder or
manufacturer shall have sufficient experience in using the above equipment in water
treatment application in the plants supplied earlier by them.
4.17.03 In case Purchaser desires, the experience list/feedback from the users shall be
made available to Purchaser for any or all the equipments during the detailed
engineering phase.
4.17.04 Valves will be used to start/stop or control flow. Gates will be primarily used for
isolation of flow in open channels although these should be capable of throttling the
flow too. Sample valves will be used in sample collection lines.
4.17.05 All valves shall be suitable for service conditions i.e. flow, temperature and
pressure under which they are required. All the valves shall be of standard pressure
rating of the applicable design code / standard. Non standard pressure rating shall
not be accepted. The pressure and temperature rating of the valve shall not be less
than the maximum expected pressure and temperature plus 5% additional margin of
the system in which valves are proposed to be installed.
4.17.06 Valves pressure classes, sizes, types, body materials, and end preparation shall
generally be as described herein, unless mentioned otherwise elsewhere in Bid
Specification. All valves shall conform to the requirements of the governing codes,
and the requirements specified.
4.17.07 Valves (including safety, relief and control valves) body materials shall be
compatible with the piping with which they are used. If the body material is not of the
same type as the material of the connecting pipe work, the valves shall be fitted with
suitable welding nozzles to avoid dissimilar butt welds at site.

Page 233 of 630


4.17.08 Each modulating control valve shall be provided with isolation valves. Manual
bypass valve shall be provided for each modulating control valve to achieve safe
and reliable manual operation.
4.17.09 All the actuators of the valves shall be designed to handle the maximum expected
pressure differential across the valves and to overcome friction forces and
unbalance forces due to the flow through valve.
4.17.10 Valve bodies and bonnets shall be designed to support the valve operators
(handwheel, gear, or motor) with the valve in any position without external support.
4.17.11 Valve ends and size limitations are as follows:

a) 50mm NB and smaller valves - Class 800 minimum with socket weld ends. (For
instruments connections/ isolation valves screwed ends may be acceptable)
b) 65mm NB and larger size valves - Class 150 minimum (butt-weld ends or flanged
or wafer style).
c) Flanged steel butterfly valves - 750mm and larger size; pressure class per
AWWA / BS-5155.
4.17.12 Gate, globe and angle valves shall be outside stem and yoke construction.
4.17.13 Valves sizes 65 mm NB and larger shall have a non-rising handwheel.
4.17.14 All the actuator operated valves shall be fitted with handwheel for manual operation.
The pneumatic actuators shall be selected based on the available air pressure and
operating air pressure (maximum and minimum). The supporting calculations for
selection of actuators shall be furnished for Purchaser's approval before finalization
of all the actuators.
4.17.15 Valves coming under the purview of IBR if any shall meet its requirements and the
approval of the same shall be obtained by the Bidder.
4.17.16 Sizes of the valves shall be same as that of the interconnected pipe sizes except for
the control valves.
4.17.17 The various items shall be installed such so that they are easily approachable for the
operating and maintenance personnel. All valves shall be accessible without chain
pulls, as far as possible. Generally Valves shall be located about 1.2 meter to 1.5
meter from the operating platform and also they shall not be located below the
ground level such as beneath the trenches etc. In such cases, extended spindle
shall be provided with chain operating from operating floor. Valves which are
installed below the ground floor shall be provided with a floor mounted pedestal at
the top of the operating floor. Valves which are installed below the ground floor shall
be provided with a floor mounted pedestal at the top of the operating floor. The
position indicator for such valves shall be also provided along with the stand.
4.17.18 All valves shall be provided with hand wheels. Wherever necessary, chain operator
shall be provided so that the valve may be operated from the ground floor.
4.17.19 All valves shall be provided with cast heat marks on casting of Body and Bonnet.

Page 234 of 630


4.17.20 Whenever screwed valves will be installed in a pipe line, it will always be followed by
screwed three piece union of same material as that of pipe.
4.17.21 Short pieces used for welding of different pipe fittings and valves shall not be less
than 80 mm in length.
4.17.22 However valves which are provided (in the buried pipe line) with a valves chamber
shall have manual operator/Handwheel inside the valve chamber. The valve
chamber shall be provided with built in ladders/staircases and sufficient operating
space within the chamber shall also be provided for easy operation of such valves.
4.17.23 All the valves, strainers, resin traps etc. shall be provided with external painting as
that of the interconnected piping as specified in Clause 3.03.14 above. However,
surfaces such as Stainless Steel, aluminium, copper, brass, bronze and other non-
ferrous materials shall not be painted. No paint or filter shall be applied until all
repairs, hydrostatic tests and final shop inspections are completed, but shall be
applied prior to shipment.
4.18.00 Rubber Expansion Joint
4.18.01 The inner cover (i.e. the tube) and also the outer cover shall be made up of natural
or synthetic rubber of adequate thickness. The carcass between the tube and the
cover shall be made up of high quality cotton and rayon cord having suitable number
of plies and impregnated with rubber or synthetic compounds. Moreover, to ensure
adequate strength, reinforcements consisting of metal rings embedded in the
carcass, shall be provided.
4.18.02 In all cases, the expansion joints shall be integral flanges at both ends complete
with split retaining rings.
4.18.03 Each of the expansion joint shall be provided with adequate number of limit rod
assemblies which shall be tightened after erection of the entire suction branch of
the pumps, in order to avoid transmittal of undue pressure thrust on to the pump
foundation. Each of these limit rod assemblies shall consist of a long bolt and two
connecting plates which are, in turn securely bolted to opposite flanges. Each plate
is to be drilled with three holes, two for bolting to the flange, the third for passage of
the stretcher belt. Rubber washers backed with metal washer shall be placed under
the head of the bolt and under the nut.
4.19.00 Protective Lining and Painting
The supply and application of Protective Lining and Painting with reference to
Piping, Fittings and Valves need to be as per Sub Section: Section-XIII of V.III-C
Technical Specification for Protective Lining and Painting, attached herewith.
5.00.00 TESTS AND INSPECTION
5.01.00 Tests & Inspection for Pipes and Fittings
5.01.01 Shop Tests
Shop test shall include all tests to be carried out at supplier's work, works of sub

Page 235 of 630


suppliers and at works where raw materials supplied for manufacture of equipment
are produced. The supplier shall carryout a comprehensive inspection and testing
program during manufacture at works. Necessary Manufacturing and Field Quality
Plans shall be prepared by supplier and submitted for approval by Purchaser for all
checks conducted on raw materials, fabrication etc.
Calibrated instruments required for measuring / testing of pipes shall be arranged by

manufacturer at their works during inspection.
Purchaser shall be given full access to all tests. The manufacturer shall inform
Purchaser of the testing well in advance so that Purchaser at own option may
witness the test.
All the test certificates and reports shall be submitted to Purchaser for approval.
All the mechanical and chemical tests including optional tests if any as per the
applicable codes / standards shall be carried out and the test certificates for the
same shall be submitted for approval by Purchaser. Material Certificate shall be
furnished for each grade / lot of pipes. All material test certificates shall carry
material specification, size, class, length, chemical composition, physical properties
and heat number or other acceptable reference to enable correlation of the
certificate with the pipe. IBR / CCE / TAC approval certificates / any other statutory
approval certificates as required shall be furnished.
Welding procedure and welder performance qualifications shall be carried out.

Mechanical and chemical tests shall be carried out as per code. Spot radiography
check shall be carried out for all butt welds. D.P.T shall be carried out for all root run
welds. Segmented flanges exceeding 30 mm thickness shall be stress relieved.
Tensile test, eddy current test, bend test, flattening test and dimensional checks as
per applicable code shall be carried out.
All rubber lining is to be subjected to the following tests as per IS-4682 Part I:
a) Adhesion test.
b) Tests to check resistance to bleeding.
c) Measurement of thickness of lining.
d) Shore hardness test.
e) Spark test at High voltage 5 KV / mm of thickness.
Galvanizing shall be carried out as per IS-4736 / IS-2629 and tested as per IS-2633 /
BS- 729. The test shall include weight of coating, uniformity of thickness and
adhesion test.
All pipes and fittings shall be subjected to hydraulic tests as per applicable code /
standard. When rubber lined, hydraulic tests shall be carried out before and after
rubber lining.
Buried pipes where wrapping and coating is done, material for wrapping and coating
shall be tested as per applicable code. Procedure for wrapping and coating and its
testing shall be submitted for approval by Purchaser. Entire wrapping and coating
shall be checked for thickness and Holiday test. Peel test shall be done to ensure

Page 236 of 630


proper bonding of coating to surface.
5.01.02 Site Test
Hydraulic tests of the piping system at 1.5 times the design pressure or twice the
working pressure whichever is higher shall be carried out for a period of minimum 30
minutes. However, if the Code / standard of supplied piping specifies more stringer
requirements than the above criteria, then the hydraulic tests shall be conducted as
per the applicable piping code / standard.
Pneumatic tests shall be carried out for ail pressure piping that shall not be
subjected to water filling.
The Bidder shall make all temporary closures/connections as required for hydro-
static/pneumatic testing and clean/remove the same after successful completion of
the test.
The procedure for hydro test and pneumatic test shall be submitted by the Bidder for
review and approval by Purchaser.
All tests as indicated in FQP approved by Purchaser shall also be carried out.
5.02.00 Tests & Inspection for Valves / Gates / Strainers
5.02.01 Shop Tests
Chemical composition of all material, castings, forgings, etc. shall be tested for
various components of the valves, gates, strainers and test certificates shall be
submitted for approval by Purchaser.
Mechanical tests including optional tests if any shall be performed as per the
applicable code / standard and the test certificates for the same shall be submitted
for approval by Purchaser. The performance requirements of the valves shall also
be tested as per the applicable code / standard.
Elastomer wherever coated or lined for the valves shall be tested for the corrosion
resistance against the medium for which those are selected as per applicable code /
standard and the test certificates shall be furnished for approval by Purchaser.
Rubber lining on Valves / Gates / Strainers / Resin Traps shall be checked in

accordance with IS-4682 Part I including Spark Testing at high voltage (5 KV/mm of
thickness).
All the valves shall be hydraulically tested for the body, seat, back seat and all
valves shall be pneumatically tested for seat as per the applicable code / standard to
which these are designed irrespective of the working pressure for which valves are
selected.
Wherever specifically required, pressure drop across each type and each size of the
valve at various flows shall be conducted, and test reports shall be submitted for
approval by Purchaser. Type test report for this test (if already carried out by the
manufacturer) may be submitted to fulfill this requirement.
Gates shall be tested against leakage and strength as required in the code /
standard.

Page 237 of 630


Strainer shall be hydraulically tested its strength and the pressure drop across the
strainer assembly shall be verified at design flow for clean condition.
5.02.02 Site Tests
All valves, gates, resin traps, strainers and other fittings after erection at site shall be
tested to hydraulic test pressure of two times the operating pressure or 1.5 times the
maximum allowable pressure whichever is higher for a period of 120 minutes.
All valves / gates (Manual / Automatic) shall be operated throughout 100% of the
travel manually and as well as from control panel and these should function without
any trouble whatsoever.

Page 238 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-IX
GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-IX: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15-V-IIIC-Sec-IX.doc)
Page 239 of 630


SECTION: IX
FOR
CONTENTS
1.00.00 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION 1
2.00.00 CODES AND STANDARDS 1
3.00.00 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 1
4.00.00 TESTING 4

Page 240 of 630


SECTION : IX
FOR
The specification covers the design, performance, manufacturing, shop testing,

erection, testing and commissioning at site, of the horizontal centrifugal pumps.
2.01.00 The design, manufacture and performance of the horizontal centrifugal pumps shall
conform to the latest revisions of the following codes and Indian standards, in
addition to other stipulations and standards mentioned elsewhere in the specification
:
a) IS-1520 : Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear cold fresh water.
b) IS-5120 : Technical requirement rotodynamic special purpose

pumps.
c) IS-5639 : Pumps handling chemicals and corrosive liquids.
d) IS-5659 : Pumps for process water.
e) Standards of Hydraulic Institute, U.S.A.
2.02.00 The material of construction for the various components of the pumps shall conform
to the applicable standards like "American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM)"
and Indian Standards.
3.01.00 Pumps shall be of horizontal/vertical split casing with speed preferably be limited to
1500 RPM. Design and construction of various components of the pumps shall
conform to the following general specifications. For material of construction of the
components, data sheets in Appendix-I of SECTION-III may be referred to.
3.01.01 Casing
The casing shall be structurally sound to provide housing for the pump assembly and
shall be designed hydraulically to minimize radial loads at part load operations.
3.01.02 Impeller

Page 241 of 630


The impeller shall be as per the proven design of the manufacturer. It shall be keyed
to the shaft and locked in position. The rotor assembly shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and designed with critical speed substantially above the
operating speed.
3.01.03 Impeller/Casing Wearing Rings
Replaceable type wearing rings shall be provided at suitable locations for each pump.
The rings shall be so fitted as to prevent turning while the pump is in operation.
3.01.04 Shaft
The shaft shall be adequately sized to withstand all stress from rotor weight and
hydraulic loads etc. The shaft shall be ground and polished to final dimensions.
3.01.05 Shaft Sleeves
Pump shafts shall be protected by renewable type shaft sleeves which shall extend
well beyond the pump glands. The sleeves shall be highly polished and shall be
securely fastened to the shaft to prevent any loosening.
3.01.06 Bearings
Heavy duty bearings, adequately designed for the type of service specified and for
long and trouble-free operations, shall be furnished. The design shall be such that
the bearing lubricating oil does not contaminate the liquid being pumped.
3.01.07 Thrust Bearings
Adequately designed thrust bearings to absorb pump thrust or other unbalanced

force, if any, shall be provided.
3.01.08 Lubrication system shall be designed in such a way that in case of total power failure,
there will not be any damage while coasting down to stop.
3.01.09 Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing boxes of packed ring construction or of mechanical seal type as desired in

the Data Sheet - Appendix-II attached with this specification shall be provided. The
necessary piping, valves, fitting etc. for the gland sealing connection shall be
provided. For mechanical seals, the mating surfaces shall be suitably hard faced to
ensure long life.
3.01.10 Pump Shaft-Motor Shaft Coupling
The pump shaft and motor shaft shall be connected with a suitably designed flexible
coupling of approved design preferably with a spacer to facilitate dismantling of the

Page 242 of 630


pump without disturbing the motor. Necessary coupling guards for the coupling shall
also be furnished.
3.01.11 Base Plate
A common base plate for mounting the pump and the corresponding driver motor
shall be furnished. The base plate shall be of fabricated steel and of rigid
construction, properly ribbed as required. Driplip with drain tap suitable for type of
service specified shall be furnished.
3.01.12 Drain, Vent and Priming Connections
Each pump shall be provided with a casing drain, vent and priming connection at
suitable locations.
3.01.13 Drive Motor and Its Control
Please refer Electrical Specification enclosed herewith this specification.
3.01.14 Anchor Bolts, Sleeves, Inserts, Lifting Lugs, Eye Bolt, etc.
All anchor bolts, foundation plates, sleeves, nuts, inserts etc. to be embedded in
concrete for the equipment are to be supplied. The length of the foundation bolts
shall be liberally sized to reach below the reinforcement level.
Each equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting lugs, eye bolts etc. to facilitate
maintenance.
3.02.00 Consistent with good operating characteristics and high efficiency, each pump shall
have a continuously rising head capacity characteristics curve without any zone of
instability. Power flow characteristic shall preferably be non-overloading type beyond
rated duty point. The characteristic curves of each set of pumps shall match each
other for equal sharing in case of parallel operation. The pump motor set shall be
designed in such a way that there is no damage due to reverse flow through the
pump which may occur due to any mal-operation of the system.
3.03.00 The pumps shall be suitably designed also for smooth and trouble free continuous
solo operation in the event of trip out of the remaining pumps running in parallel.
3.04.00 The pumps shall be designed to have best efficiency at the rated duty point. The
pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation within a wide range above and
below the rated duty point. Such range of operation within which category of pumps
can satisfactorily operate on continuous basis, shall be clearly indicated.
3.05.00 Drive motors for each category of pumps shall be suitable for use on 415V 10%, 30/
, 50 Hz 5% and neutral grounded system. Drive motors shall have 15% spare
margin over the maximum power requirement of the pump within the range of
operation.

Page 243 of 630


4.00.00 TESTING
4.01.00 Testing and Inspection at Manufacturer's Works
4.01.01 All tests required shall be conducted to ensure that the equipment furnished shall
conform to the requirements of this specification and in compliance with requirements
of the applicable codes.
The particulars of the proposed tests and the procedures for the tests shall be
submitted for approval before conducting the tests.
4.01.02 The representatives of Purchaser shall be given full access to all tests. Prior to pump
performance tests, the manufacturer shall inform the Purchaser allowing adequate
time so that if the Purchaser desires, his representatives can witnesses the test.
4.01.03 All materials and casting used for the equipment shall be of tested quality. The test
certificates shall be made available to Purchaser.
4.01.04 The pump casing shall be hydraulically tested at 200% of pump rated head or at
150% of shut-off head, whichever is higher. The test pressure shall be maintained for
at least half an hour.
4.01.05 The pump rotating parts shall be subjected to static and dynamic balancing tests.
4.01.06 All pumps shall be tested at the shop for capacity, head efficiency and brake horse
power and cavitation. The tests are to be done according to the requirement of the
"Hydraulic Institute" of USA, ASME Power Test Code PTC-8.2 (latest edition) and
Indian Standards as applicable.
4.01.07 The pump accessories e.g. the thrust bearing, the motor pump shaft coupling etc. will
be subjected to tests as per Manufacturer's standard.
4.01.08 The combined vibration of pump and motor should be restricted to the limits specified
by Hydraulic Institute Standards, USA, when the pump is in operation at any load
singly or in parallel.
4.01.09 Tests on motors shall be conducted as per electrical specification enclosed herewith
this specification.
4.01.10 The reports and certificates of all the above mentioned tests to ensure satisfactory
operation of the system shall be submitted to the Purchaser before despatch.
4.01.11 Cast heat marks are to be provided on castings for casing and impeller.
4.02.00 Tests at Site
After erection at site, pumps under different services shall be operated to prove
satisfactory performance as individual equipment as well as a system.

Page 244 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-X
GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-X: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15 -V-IIIC-Sec-X.doc)
Page 245 of 630


SECTION : X
FOR
CONTENTS
2.00.00 CODES AND STANDARDS 1
3.00.00 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 1
4.00.00 TESTING 4

Page 246 of 630


SECTION: X
FOR
The specification covers the design, performance, manufacturing, shop

testing, erection, testing and commissioning at site, of the vertical
centrifugal pumps.
2.01.00 The design, manufacture and performance of the vertical centrifugal pumps
shall conform to the latest revisions of the following codes and Indian
Standards in addition to other stipulations and standards mentioned
elsewhere in the specification :
a) IS-1710 : Vertical turbine pumps for clear, cold, fresh

water.
b) IS-5120 : Technical requirement for rotodynamic

special purpose pumps.
c) IS-5639 : Pumps handling chemicals and corrosive

liquids.
d) IS-5659 : Pumps for process water.
e) Standards of Hydraulic Institute, USA.
2.02.00 The material of construction for the various components of the pumps shall
conform to the applicable standards like "American Society of Testing &
Materials (ASTM)" and Indian Standards.

Page 247 of 630


3.01.00 Pump Type
The pumps shall be vertical wet pit type with open shaft or enclosed shaft
construction depending on the type of liquid to be pumped. Material of
construction shall be as per the data sheets in Appendix-II. The pump shed
shall preferably be limited to 1500 RPM.
3.02.00 Discharge Head Assembly
The pump shall have fabricated discharge head disposed above the
ground. The head shall be capable of supporting the pump and motor on
the foundation; expansion joint shall be provided immediately at the pump
discharge; but no thrust block shall be provided for the unbalanced
hydraulic thrust thus developed. The anchor bolts and pump fixing
arrangement shall be suitably designed to take up the back thrust due to the
expansion joint.
The head shall contain a packed type stuffing box to prevent any leakage.
A water stinger may be fitted to the top shaft to protect the motor from water
spray.
3.03.00 Bowl
In addition to housing the impellers properly, the bowls shall provide a

smooth path to water passage and shall be hydraulically designed to
minimise radial thrust.
3.04.00 Impeller
The impeller shall be closed or open as per standard design of the

manufacturer. All rotating parts including the impeller shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. The critical speed of all the rotating parts shall be
substantially above the design speed.
3.05.00 Pump Shaft and Motor Shaft Coupling
The pump shaft shall be connected to motor shaft by a heavy duty flexible
coupling.
3.06.00 Column Pipe and Shaft

Page 248 of 630


The line shaft and the shaft enclosing tube shall be made in convenient
sections and shall be joined securely by union couplings. The column pipe
shall also be made in sections and shall be joined by flanged coupling. In
case of flanged joint gaskets shall be provided at each connection.
For sludge handling, vertical cantilever pump with no submerged bearing

shall be provided.
Replaceable shaft sleeves shall be furnished. The shaft sleeve shall be

securely locked to shaft to prevent loosening while in operation.
3.08.00 The necessary supporting frame, base-plates, sole-plates, mounting-

plates, etc. as required shall be supplied under this specification, alongwith
anchor bolts, foundation bolts, pipe sleeves etc.
3.09.00 Thrust Bearings
Thrust bearing of adequate design shall be furnished for taking the pump
weight as well as maximum hydraulic thrust. The bearing may be lubricated
by grease or oil. The design should be such that the bearing lubricating oil
does not contaminate the liquid being pumped. Cooling of thrust bearing, if
necessary, shall be done by liquid tapped from the discharge of the pump
itself. The thrust bearing shall be designed on the basis of 20,000 working
hours minimum for the load corresponding to the duty point.
3.10.00 Line Shaft and Bowl Bearing
Adequate number of properly designed bearings shall be furnished to

prevent undue vibration.
3.11.00 Lubrication system shall be designed in such a way that in case of total
power failure, there will not be any damage while coasting down to stop.
3.12.00 Shaft Enclosing Tube
For sludge/turbid/dirty water/chemical services, the pump shaft shall be of

enclosed tube construction. For the lubrication of shaft necessary
clarified/filtered water required shall be arranged. Necessary piping, valves,
fittings, booster pumps etc. as required shall be included in scope.

Page 249 of 630


3.13.00 Suction Bell
The pump shall be complete with adequately dimensioned suction bell to

guide and streamline intake fluid.
3.14.00 Adjustment of Impeller
The pump shaft shall have suitable arrangement for vertical adjustment of
impeller position from an accessible point.
3.15.00 Pump Characteristics
Head capacity curve should be rising upto the shut-off head condition.
Power versus capacity curve shall be non-overloading type beyond rated
duty point.
The characteristic curves of each set of pumps shall match each other for
equal load sharing in case of parallel operation. The pump shall however,
be also designed for smooth and trouble-free continuous solo operation in
the event of trip-out of the remaining pumps running in parallel.
3.16.00 The pumps shall be designed for reverse flow through them. The drive
motor shall be capable of bringing the pump to its rated speed in the normal
direction from the point of maximum possible reverse speed when power to
the drive is restored.
3.17.00 The pumps shall be designed to have best efficiency at the rated duty point.
The pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation within a wide range
above and below the rated duty point. Such range of operation within which
the pumps can satisfactorily operate on continuous basis, shall be clearly
indicated.
3.18.00 Drive motors for the pumps shall be suitable for use on 415V 10%, 30/ , 50
Hz, 5% and neutral grounded system. Drive motors shall have 15% spare
margin over the maximum power requirement of the pump within its range
of operation.
4.00.00 TESTING
4.01.00 Testing and Inspection at Manufacturer's works

Page 250 of 630


4.01.01 All tests required shall be conducted to ensure that the equipment furnished
conforms to the requirements of this specification and is in compliance with
requirements of the applicable codes. The particulars of the proposed tests
and the procedures for the tests shall be submitted to Purchaser for
approval before conducting the tests.
4.01.02 The representatives of Purchaser shall be given full access to all tests.
Prior to pump performance tests, the manufacturer shall inform the
Purchaser allowing adequate time so that if the Purchaser so desires, his
representative can witness the test.
4.01.03 All materials and casting used for the equipment shall be of tested quality.
The test certificates shall be made available to the Purchaser.
4.01.04 The pump casing shall be hydraulically tested at 200% of pump rated head
or at 150% of shut-off head, whichever is higher. The test pressure shall be
maintained for at least half an hour.
4.01.05 The pump rotating parts shall be subjected to static and dynamic balancing.
4.01.06 All pumps shall be tested at the shop for capacity, head, efficiency, brake
horse power and cavitation. The tests are to be done according to the
requirements of the Hydraulic Institute of USA, ASME Power Test Code,
Indian Standards, as applicable.
4.01.07 The pump accessories e.g. the thrust bearing, the motor pump shaft
coupling etc. will be subjected to tests as per manufacturer's standards.
4.01.08 The combined vibration of pump and motor should be restricted within limits
specified by Hydraulic Institute Standards, USA when the pump is in
operation at any load singly or in parallel.
4.01.09 Tests on motors shall be conducted as per electrical specification enclosed

with this specification.
4.01.10 Test reports and certificates of the above mentioned tests to ensure
satisfactory operation of the system shall be submitted to the Purchaser
before despatch.
4.01.11 Cast heat marks shall be provided on castings for casing and impeller.
4.02.00 Test at Site

Page 251 of 630


After erection at site, pumps under different services shall be operated to

prove satisfactory performance as individual equipment as well as a
system.

Page 252 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-XI
GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-XI: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15 -V-IIIC-Sec-XI.doc)
Page 253 of 630


SECTION : XI
FOR
CONTENTS
2.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES 1
3.00.00 TESTING 2

Page 254 of 630


SECTION: XI
FOR
This specification covers the design, performance, manufacturing, shop testing,

erection, testing & commissioning at site, of the positive displacement pumps.
2.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES
This specification provides guideline for design, manufacturing and testing of positive
displacement pumps with variable capacity to inject chemicals, generally used in the
treatment of water in metered amounts.
2.01.00 Pumps shall be simplex/duplex type, positive displacement hydraulically operated

diaphragm design, driven by squirrel cage induction motor through suitable speed
reduction unit.
2.02.00 The stroke shall be continuously adjustable to give a capacity variation 0-100%
range, while the pump is running or stopped. Adjustment of capacity shall be done
automatically, wherever required, by pneumatic stroke positioner in proportion to a
0.2 - 1.0 Kg/Sq.Cm air signal or manually. For automatic pumps, in addition to the
automatic control, manual control facility shall also be provided. Manual control
facility shall be of micrometric adjusting type.
2.03.00 Capacity variation may be effected by changing eccentricity of the driving crank or by
suitable hydraulic circuit. Pump accuracy shall be industry standard,+
_ 1% of capacity
setting.
2.04.00 Pumps shall be provided with an integral relief valve, spring operated, to release
pressure when delivery line blockage occurs.
2.05.00 Crank case shall be constructed of high quality cast iron, which will also house the
gear box and guides for cross head.
2.06.00 Material of construction should be as follows :
i Crank case Cast iron.

i Pump head Polypropylene.
i Valve and valve housing Polypropylene.
i Wheel Cast iron to a 48.

Page 255 of 630


i Worm AISI 4142.

i Shafts ( worm ) En 19.
i Diaphragm Chemically inert teflon.
i Base plate MS.
i Foundation bolts MS.
2.07.00 Suitable gland seal should be provided to prevent leakage.
2.08.00 Electric drive motor particulars should follow Electrical Specification, enclosed
herewith.
3.00.00 TESTING
3.01.00 Testing and Inspection at Manufacturer's Works
3.01.01 The Manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment
furnished conforms to the requirements of this specification and is in compliance with
requirements of the applicable codes.
The particulars of the proposed tests and the procedures for the tests shall be
submitted to Purchaser for approval before conducting the tests.
3.01.02 The representatives of Purchaser shall be given full access to all tests prior to pump
performance tests. The Manufacturer shall inform the Purchaser allowing adequate
time so that if the Purchaser so desires, his representatives can witness the test.
3.01.03 All materials and castings used for the equipment shall be of tested quality. The test
certificates shall be made available to Purchaser.
3.01.04 The pump casing shall be hydraulically tested at 200% of pump operating pressure or
15 Kg/Sq.Cm(g) whichever is higher. The test pressure shall be maintained for at
least half an hour.
3.01.05 The rotating parts of pump drive shall be subjected to static balancing.
3.01.06 All pumps shall be tested at the shop for capacity volumetric accuracy, repeatative
accuracy, power and volumetric efficiency. The tests are to be done according to the
requirements of the "Hydraulic Institute" of U.S.A. ASME Power Test Code and
Indian Standards or as per API.- 675.
3.01.07 The pump accessories e.g. gear box, speed reduction unit etc. will be subjected to
tests as per Manufacturer's standards.
3.01.08 The combined vibration of pump and motor should be restricted within limits specified
by Hydraulic Institute Standards, USA, when the pump is in operation singly or in
parallel.

Page 256 of 630


3.01.09 Test reports and certificates of all the above mentioned tests to ensure satisfactory
operation of the system shall be submitted to the Purchaser before despatch.
3.01.10 Performance test shall be carried out for the setting of pressure relief valve.
3.02.00 Test at Site
After erection at site, pumps under different services shall be operated to prove
satisfactory performance as individual equipment as well as a system.

Page 257 of 630


VOLUME : IIIF
SECTION-I
SUMP PUMPS, DRIVES AND ACCESSORIES
(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15-Vol IIIF-Sec-1)
Page 258 of 630


CONTENT
2.00.00 CODES & STANDARDS
3.00.00 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
6.00.00 INSPECTION AND TESTING
7.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, INFORMATION REQUIRED
ATTACHMENTS
ANNXURE-I DATA SPECIFICATION SHEET
ANNXURE-II SCHEDULE OF SUMP PUMPS
Page 259 of 630


VOLUME : IIIF
SECTION-I
SUMP PUMPS, DRIVES AND ACCESSORIES
1.01.00 Sump pumps specified hereinafter shall be used to dewater various sump pits
in the power house and other plant area where gravity draining will not be
envisaged and to ensure general housekeeping. Sump pumps of coal
handling plant and ash handling plant are being covered under specification
of respective packages.
1.02.00 Sump Pumps under this specification have been divided into following four (4)
groups according to different duty envisaged and location of sumps/pits. Also
Sewage Transfer Pumps are considered separately which will be located in
the sewage lifting stations.
1.02.01 Group - A
The Group - A pumps shall be electric motor driven permanently installed

vertical wet pit bottom suction volute type and will handle drainage water,
containing solid particles with sludges, polluted liquid etc. from the area where
they are installed. These pumps will run continuously by the use of high and
low level switches in the sump. Particle size in the water will not exceed 15
mm. These pumps should be installed in the sumps/pits at the following
locations:
a) Power house ground floor sump pit near condenser.
b) Underground Conveyor tunnel in the Mill Reject System
c) Drain oil pit in transformer yard.
The pumps under serial no. (c) above should be capable to handle significant
amount of transformer / fuel oil also.
Group-A pumps shall also be provided to all indoor sumps of the plant and
outdoor sumps of capacity 5 cu.m and above and underground cable vaults
except Ash Handling Plant.
1.02.02 Group - B
These pumps shall be horizontal centrifugal electric motor driven portable

type. Each pump set along with control panel etc. shall be mounted on a
trolley for ease of transportation. These pumps shall be suitable for handling
drainage water containing hard solid particles, sludge, polluted liquid,
significant amount of fuel oil etc. and particle size will not exceed 20 mm.
These types of pumps shall be used in different plant areas e.g. fuel oil
pressurizing pump house.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.IIIF/S-I : 1

Page 260 of 630


1.02.03 Group - C
The Group - C pumps shall be vertical submersible portable type pump motor
sets with suitable arrangement for carrying to any place and for lowering to
and raising from various water reservoirs and pits. The pump motor set shall
be suitable for handling water containing muds/sludge, solid particles, cotton
waste, silica, ash particles, coal particles, polluted liquid etc. The particle size
in water will not exceed 20 mm. These pumps will be utilised to dewater
various deep sumps/pits (e.g. C.W pump house, Plant Service water pump
house etc.) in case of any eventuality.
1.02.04 Group - D
These pumps shall be similar to Group - A pumps except that these pumps
will be used to handle water containing solid particles, sludges, ash polluted
liquids, etc. Particle size in the water will not exceed 25 mm. These pumps
should be installed in the sumps/pits at the Ash Handling Plant Buildings.
These pumps shall also be provided to all other indoor sumps and outdoor
sumps of capacity 5 cu.m and above.
1.02.05 Sewage Transfer Pumps shall be located in the sewage lifting stations which
will transfer sewage from sewage lifting station to sludge collection pit. These
pumps shall be vertical submersible type. The capacity, head and no. of
pumps shall be finalized by the bidder.
NOTE: Total numbers and rating of all the groups of sump pumps are given in
Annexure- II and Annexure-III enclosed with this specification.
However, the number of permanently installed sump pumps shall be
15 (minimum) for usage and portable sump pumps shall be 10
(minimum) conforming to the standards.
2.01.00 The design, manufacture and performance of the sump pumps and drives
specified, hereinafter, shall comply with the requirements of all applicable
codes, the latest applicable Indian/British/American/DIN Standards, in
particular the following:
2.01.01 IS-1710 : Vertical Turbine Pumps for clear cold and fresh water.
2.01.02 IS-5120 : Technical Requirements - Rotodynamic special

purpose pumps.
2.01.03 IS-5600 : Sewage and drainage pumps.
2.01.04 Hydraulic Institute Standards of USA.
2.02.00 The materials of the various components shall conform to the applicable
IS/BS/ASTM/DIN Standards.

Page 261 of 630


3.00.00 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
3.01.00 The pumps shall be designed to have best efficiency at the specified duty
point. The pump set shall be suitable for continuous operation at any point
within the "Range of Operation" as stipulated by the manufacturer.
3.02.00 Pumps shall have a continuously rising head capacity characteristics from the
specified duty point towards shut off point, the maximum head being at shut
off.
3.03.00 Permanently installed vertical pumps shall be suitable for parallel operation.
The head vs capacity, the BHP vs capacity characteristics etc. shall match to
ensure equal load sharing and trouble free operation throughout the range.
Drive Motor shall not be overloaded when pump discharge is more than rated
condition.
3.04.00 The static head requirement of portable submersible type sump pump may
have a considerably wide range of variation depending upon the depth of pit
being dewatered. While the pump shall have adequate capacity at the
maximum head, the motor shall be sufficiently rated to cater for any
overloading during the pump operation at its minimum possible head, i.e.,
maximum discharge.
3.05.00 Pump motor set shall run smooth without undue noise and vibration.
Acceptable peak to peak vibration limits shall generally be guided by
Hydraulic Institute Standards (latest edition).
4.01.00 Pumps under groups A, B, C, and D as listed in the - II along with drive
motors, couplings and other accessories mentioned below, as also those
needed to make the pump-motor sets complete in all respect, for proper
operation and maintenance. All motors in outdoor duty will be provided with
IP-55 enclosure. The accessories shall include among other things of the
following :
4.02.00 For the Vertical Group - A Sump Pump Motor Sets
a) Discharge of sump pump under sl. no. à, `b & `c shall be led to the
nearest surface drain, Common Effluent Treatment Drain (CETD) & oil
water separator respectively. This shall include a non-return valve and
an isolating valve for each pump, necessary pipes, fittings, flange
connections and counter flange with bolts, nuts and gaskets.
b) A common baseframe for the purpose of supporting the pump motor

sets in each sump, utilising embedded curb angle around the top of
the sump. The base frame shall also be used to support each
discharge piping.
c) Three (3) nos. electrode type capacitance level switches per sump;
one for low level, the second for high level and the third for very high
Page 262 of 630


level, along with necessary junction box, local control panel, control
cables etc. to achieve automatic startings/stopping of the sump
pumps, and also ON/OFF indication for sump pump shall be
monitored at DCS. The entire assembly being mounted on the same
base frame as mentioned above (item "b"). The control panel shall
also be equipped with start/stop push button for starting/stopping
individual sump pumps manually. Local control panel and cable shall
be as per Volume-V of the specification.
4.03.00 For each of the Trolley Mounted Horizontal Group-B Sump Pump Motor
Sets
a) One (1) no. 7.5 meters long hose for the pump suction and one (1) no.
30 meters long hose for the pump discharge, either ends of each hose
being provided with female hose coupling.
b) One (1) no. 500 mm long straight pipe piece, with both ends flanged,
one end matching with the pump suction nozzle.
c) Two (2) nos. male type hose couplings, one of which is suitable for
coupling with the above mentioned 500 mm pipe piece on one side
and the 7.5 meters long suction hose on the other side, whereas the
other is suitable for coupling with the pump discharge nozzle on one
side and the 30 metres long hose on the other side. The pump
suctions pipe-piece and discharge nozzle shall be of flanged type. As
such each coupling end that is to match with the pipe/pump nozzle
shall also be flanged and shall be equipped with necessary bolts, nuts
& gaskets.
d) A foot valve (of Bidder's recommended size) with suction strainer,

necessary coupling and matching piece/reducer (if necessary) to
couple with the 7.5 meter long suction hose end.
e) A starter panel complete with incoming switch/contactor, fuse,

overload relays, start-stop push button, O/L reset push button, cable
gland, wiring terminals, red and green indication lamps (LED type),
necessary control cables etc., and also 50 metres length of flexible
power cable with power plug at one end and arrangement to connect
the other end with the starter panel.
f) The pump motor set with a baseframe along with the starter panel,
power cable, suction & discharge hoses etc., as mentioned above,
shall be mounted on a suitable trolley with swivelling front wheel and
having adequate fixing arrangement for all equipment, for operation
without any undue vibration and with facility for being handled by a
single operator.
4.04.00 For each of the portable submersible Group-C sump pump motor sets.
a) Two (2) nos. 30 metres long discharge hose, having female hose
coupling at both ends.

Page 263 of 630


b) One (1) no. 500 mm long pipe piece with both ends flanged, one end
connected by necessary bolts, nuts & gaskets with the flanged
discharge nozzle of the sump pump.
c) One (1) no. male type hose coupling, one end of which is suitable to
couple with the discharge hose and the other end is flanged, matching
with the above mentioned 500 mm long pipe end and connected
therewith by necessary bolts, nuts & gaskets.
d) Suitable attachment for temporary seat of the pump motor set on the
floor at sump bottom.
e) One (1) no. 25 metres long submersible type power cable having a
power plug at one end and a harmetically sealed (water proof) cable
gland for connection with the pump drive- motor at the other end.
f) Suitable lugs and other attachments on the pump motor assembly

frame, for hoisting and lowering of the pump motor set from and to the
sump.
g) One starter panel, having a plug socket as receptacle of the above

mentioned power plug (item "e"), a 25 metre long incoming power
cable with switch/contactor and fuse, start- stop push buttons, red and
green LED type indication lamps, over load relays, O/L reset push
button, cable gland etc., and also a suitable arrangement for
temporarily mounting the starter panel, near the sump, where the
portable sump pump-motor set is to work. The incoming 25 metre long
power cable shall also be provided with a suitable power plug at one
end.
4.05.00 For the vertical Group - D sump pump motor sets, the scope of supply should
be similar to Group - A sump pump motor sets, except that the discharge
piping from pump nozzles should be taken upto the following areas:
a) For ESP Control Building, the sump pump discharge shall be taken to
Ash Slurry Sump.
4.06.00 Vertical submersible pump and motor along with accessories shall be
provided for sewage lifting stations. Each sewage lifting station shall have
2x100% capacity pumps. The pump capacity, head and total no. of pumps in
the plant shall be finalized by the bidder based on number of sewage lifting
stations in the power plant.
4.07.00 Other accessories to be supplied with the pump-motor sets are as follows :
a) One discharge pressure gauge with 3 way SS isolating valve for each
pump of Group-A and Group-D and all other instrumentation as required
for safe and trouble free operation. Suction and discharge pressure
gauge for Group-B pump.
b) All integral/internal piping, valves, fittings etc. for lubrication, cooling and
sealing for each pump wherever required.

Page 264 of 630


c) All equipment, accessories and consumable required for erection,
testing and commissioning.
4.08.00 All electrical equipment and accessories supplied shall meet the technical
requirements covered under Electrical Equipment and Accessories, Volume-
V of this specification.
4.09.00 All control & instrumentation complete with all accessories as addressed in
technical specification of control & instrumentation Volume-VI of this
specification.
4.10.00 Lubrication of one (1) initial fill and one additional fill after commissioning.
4.11.00 Rust inhibiter paint at Manufacturer's works.
4.12.00 Any additional accessories not mentioned hereinabove but specified in

enclosed technical specification for sump pumps, as applicable and those
indicated in sump pump data specification sheets and electric motor
specification should also be supplied.
5.01.00 The design, construction testing and other details of the sump pumps and
related accessories shall be in line with the stipulations and data in this
section and the lead specification (Vol. II A)
5.02.00 Each sump pump shall be equipped and coupled with a drive motor, with
rating so selected as to have at least 15% margin over the maximum power
required by the pump, throughout its range of operation. All other
requirements of the drive motors shall be as stipulated in the Volume-V.
The discharge rate of sump pump is uncontrolled. As such pump should be

capable to operate even under a condition of as low as 25% of specified total
head. Motors of group-B pumps should be designed to cater such eventuality.
5.03.00 All electrical items shall conform to the stipulations of Volume-V.
5.04.00 All piping shall be as per IS-1239 of medium or heavy grade (as suited for the
maximum operating pressure) and shall be either galvanised or painted with
approved rust inhibiting paint. Pipe size shall be as per Annexure-II. Any
matching piece/reducer required to match the pipe with pump nozzle, hose,
etc. shall be provided.
5.05.00 All valves shall be steel body type as per applicable IS/BS/ANSI standard,
with pressure class compatible with the maximum working pressure.
5.06.00 All hoses shall be of steel wire reinforced type. Pump suction hose shall be
suitable for working under vacuum. Pump discharge hose shall be suitable to
withstand the maximum pressure that it may be subjected to in all working
conditions, including hydrostatic testing of the sump pump discharge line.
5.07.00 Pump suctions strainer shall have openings large enough just to permit the
Page 265 of 630


entry of solids having maximum size as stipulated under clause no. 1.02.00.
5.08.00 Pressure gauges shall be of Bourdon type, with sealing diaphragm to prevent
ingress of the working fluid. Selected range of pressure gauge shall be such
that the entire range of working pressure covers about 1/3rd to 2/3rd to its
range. Accuracy of measurement shall be within 1% of scale range. The
suction pressure gauge shall be compound type. Pressure gauge dial size
shall be 100 mm or more.
5.09.00 Pumps
5.09.01 Pumps under Group-A shall be wet pit type, vertical shaft, centrifugal, vertical
submerged suction, non-clog volute type complete with enclosed shaft,
discharge pipe, head assembly thrust bearing and drive assembly, cover
plates etc.
5.09.02 Pumps under Group-B shall be of horizontal shaft, single stage, end suction,
radially split casing, centrifugal, non-clog design complete with common base
plate, drive assembly etc. These pumps shall be trolley mounted portable
type.
5.09.03 Pumps under Group-C shall be submersible pump-motor type, single stage
and non-clog design and shall be portable type.
5.09.04 Pumps under Group-D shall be similar to Group-A pumps.
5.09.05 Casing
a) Casing shall be so designed to allow free passage of specified

maximum size of solid.
b) Casing shall be designed to withstand the maximum shut-off pressure

developed by the pump.
c) The casings shall be cast, free from blow holes, sand holes, other
detrimental defects. The casing shall be complete with suction and
discharge connections.
d) For pumps under Group-A and Group-D adequate seal arrangement

shall be made to keep leakage of liquid from casing to column
assembly to minimum and adequate drain shall be provided in column
assembly to permit escape of the leakage flow. The casing shall also
include the bearing housing of the bottom pump shaft bearing.
e) Casing of pumps under Group-B shall be provided with vent

connections and drain connections with valves. These pumps shall be
manually primed.
5.09.06 Impeller
a) The impeller shall be open/semi-open non clog type, cast in one piece
and specially designed to `pass large solids or unscreened liquids.
The clearance between stationary and moving parts should be such
Page 266 of 630


as to allow sustained performance without exclusive maintenance.
b) Impellers of pumps under Group-A and Group-D shall have provision

for adjustment from an accessible location and for pumps under
Group-C shall be capable of passing fibrous material like cotton
waste, jutes, etc.
5.09.07 Pump Shaft
a) Shaft size selected shall be such that critical speed is at least 20%
away from the operating speed and the runway speed.
b) The shaft shall be ground and polished to final dimension and of

ample size to withstand all stresses resulting from rotor weight,
hydraulic loads and across the line starting. Shaft shall be provided
with renewable sleeves particularly under stuffing boxes and other
locations as recommended by pump manufacturers.
c) The coupling between shafts shall be so designed that they become

tight during pump operation.
5.09.08 Column Pipe (for pumps under Group-A and Group D)
The discharge pipe shaft assembly shall be flanged or screwed as per

manufacturer's standard and standard length of each piece of column pipe
shall be in conformity to the shaft piece lengths from consideration of easy
handling.
5.09.09 Bearings
a) Adequate nos. of properly designed bearings shall be furnished.

Bearings for pumps shall be antifriction type and lubricated by grease.
Line shaft bearings of vertical pumps shall also be grease lubricated.
All necessary grease gun, grease cup and tubing shall be included.
b) Thrust bearing of adequate design shall be furnished for taking the

entire pump thrust arising from all probable conditions of continuous
operation through out its "range of operation" and also the shut-off
condition. The life of thrust bearing shall be 20,000 working hour
minimum for the load corresponding to the duty point. The bearings
shall be lubricated by grease from a location conveniently accessible.
Design shall be such that the lubricant cannot contaminate the
handling liquid.
5.09.10 Wearing Ring/Liner Plate
Renewable wearing rings/liner plates shall be provided either on impeller or

on the casing or on both impeller and casing.
5.09.11 Stuffing Box
Stuffing Box of pumps under Group-A and Group-D shall be of mechanical

packing type. For pumps under Group-B and Group-C mechanical seal of
Page 267 of 630


reliable design shall be provided.
5.09.12 Coupling
Pump and motor shall be connected with a suitable flexible coupling.

Coupling shall be provided with coupling guard.
5.09.13 Mounting Plate for Group-A and Group-D Pumps and Base Plate for pumps
under Group-B.
Each pump under Group-A and Group-D shall be provided with a suitable
mounting plate. The mounting plate shall be adequately sized to
accommodate the level switches, discharge pipe, grease cups etc. if any.
Pumps and motor under Group-B shall be mounted in one base plate. Base
plate shall be of rigid construction properly ribbed as needed. Suitable drain
with valve and drain funnel shall be furnished by the Bidder.
The necessary supporting plate, mounting frame, base plate etc. as required
shall be supplied under this specification, along with anchor bolts, foundation
bolts, pipe, sleeves etc. Lifting lug, eye bolts, etc. as required for the proper
handling of each pump set shall be furnished.
5.09.14 Suction Bell
The pumps under Group-A, C and D shall be complete with adequately

dimensioned suction bell to guide and streamline intake fluid.
5.09.15 Material of Construction
For material of construction of various parts of data specification sheet -1

shall be referred to.
6.01.00 All pumps shall be tested at the shop for capacity, head, efficiency and brake
horse power. These tests are to be done according to the requirements of
"Hydraulic Institute Standard" and as per MQP to be approved by Owner
during detail engineering.
6.02.00 The pump integral accessories like thrust bearing, pump motor coupling etc.
shall be subject to tests as per manufacturer's standard and / or applicable
national / international standard.
6.03.00 Test on motors, control panels, starter panels, cables shall be conducted as
per the requirement of Volume-V of this specification and as per MQP to be
approved by Owner during detail engineering.
6.04.00 After delivery/erection at site, pumps shall be operated to prove satisfactory

and trouble free performance.
6.05.00 In addition to these tests also refer lead specification Vol. IIA.
7.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, INFORMATION REQUIRED

Page 268 of 630


7.01.00 Location and dimension of all sumps which requires assisted evacuation,
present in the areas covered under Main Plant Package.
7.02.00 General Arrangement drawing & Cross-sectional drawing of sump pump.
7.03.00 For Mandatory Spares, Spares required for erection and commissioning,
Recommended Spares, Special Tools And Tackles, fixtures etc., as required
for regular operation and maintenance of the equipment offered and supply of
first charge of lubricating oil, inhibitor oil and also adequate quantity of the
consumables, please refer Technical Specification Volume-II A.
7.04.00 List of location of Group-A and Group-D pumps.
7.05.00 Characteristic curves of pumps showing effective head, pump input power,
efficiency, submergence and NPSH, against capacity ranging from shut-off
condition to 125% or rated capacity for Group A, B & D pumps and to 150%
of rated capacity for Group C pumps.
7.06.00 Speed vs. torque curve of the pump corresponding to recommended mode of
pump starting, super-imposed on speed vs. torque of the motor,
corresponding to 80% and 100% rated voltage.
7.07.00 Diagram showing the type of lubrication system etc.

Page 269 of 630


ANNEXURE-I
DATA SPECIFICATION SHEET
Group-A Group-B Group-C Group-D

1. Pumps
1.1 Rated Capacity (Cu.M/hr.) <------------------- Refer - II ------------------>
1.2 Total Head at rated Capacity <----------------------------- DO ------------------------------>

(MLC)
1.3 Nos. Required <----------------------------- DO ------------------------------>
1.4 Duty <--------------------------- Intermittent ---------------------->
1.5 Pump Design Standard <------------------------ IS-5120/ IS:1710------------------>
1.6 Parallel operation required Yes No No Yes
1.7 Material of Construction
a) Base plate/Cover Plate <------------------ M.S. IS-2062 / Equivalent ------------>
b) Column Pipe <------------------ M.S. IS-2062 / Equivalent ------------>
c) Casing <--------- 2% NiCI, IS-210, FG-260 (*)---------->
d) Impeller <------------- 2% NiCI, IS-210, FG-260 (**)------->
e) Pump/Impeller Shaft <------------------------ SS. AISI-316 ---------------------->
f) Shaft Sleeve <---------------- SS. AISI-316 (Hardened) --------------->
g) Shaft Coupling <------------------------ SS. AISI-410 ---------------------->
h) Shaft Bearing BUSH GM as per IS-306 Gr.1 / Equivalent
i) Gland <----- C.I., IS-210, FG-260/Equivalent ---------------->
j) Gland Packing <------ Braided Graphite-free Teflon --> ***
k) Fasteners coming in <------------------------ SS. AISI-304 ---------------------->

contact with water
l) Fasteners not coming in <------------------------ Carbon Steel ---------------------->

contact with water
Note : * Alloy CI (min 30 mm thick) BHN 350 min

** Ni-hard (min 25 mm thick) BHN 550 min.
Page 270 of 630


Group-A Group-B Group-C Group-D
*** S.S. Wire reinforced/impregnated graphite teflon.
m) Discharge pipe MS IS-1239/Equivalent -- -- MS IS-1239/

Equivalent
n) Motor stool <---------------------- Close Grained C.I.----------------->
1.8 Range of Operation <----------------------- Refer -II ---------------->
1.9 Tests and Inspection <-- As per Cl. No. 6.00.00 and lead specification -->
1.10 Supply of Accessories &

Services (Wherever
Applicable) for each group and
each rating of Pumps
a) Base plate Yes
b) Sole Plate Yes
c) Foundation bolts, nuts, Yes

sleeves etc.
d) Companion flanges with Yes

nuts, bolts & gaskets
e) Unions for external water Yes, if required

for cooling/sealing/
lubrication
f) Cooling/ sealing/lubrication Yes, if required

system with all accessories,
complete with pipes, valves
and with instruments
g) Discharge pressure gauge Yes
h) Suction pressure gauge Yes, for Group-B only
i) Pump-motor coupling and Yes

guard
j) Eye bolts, lifting tackle etc Yes
k) Pre-lubrication tank and Yes, if required

accessories
l) Suction bell Yes

Page 271 of 630

ANNEXURE-II
SCHEDULE OF SUMP PUMPS
GROUP-A PUMPS : PERMANENTLY INSTALLED VERTICAL SUMP PUMP
Sl. Location Numbers Capacity Total head Pit size in which Type of Remarks
No. required (cum/Hr.) Each (MLC) pumps are to be liquid to be
(Total) installed (in mm) handled
1. These pumps Two pumps Capacity of each To be calculated To be decided by As described Discharge pipe sizing
should be located (100% capacity) pump should be with 10% margin the bidder in cl. no. should be done taking
in the following are to be located so selected to over total 1.02.01 minimum water velocity
areas as minimum : in each sump pit empty the sump dynamic head to be 2m/sec but should
pit in 10 to 15 (TDH = static not be less than 50 NB.
i) Power house minutes head + friction One gate valve and one
ground floor losses) non return valve should
sump pits near be provided at pump
condenser discharge.
ii) Underground
conveyor tunnel
in mill reject
system
iv) Any other
places felt
necessary by
Bidder.
These pumps will
also be provided in
all indoor sumps
and outdoor sumps
of capacity 5
cu.m.& above and
Page 272 of 630

underground cable
vaults (if any)
except Ash
Handling Plant.
GROUP-B PUMPS : HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL TROLLEY MOUNTED PORTABLE SUMP PUMP
1. Pumps will be used Two (2) Ten (10) Six (6) To be finalised by As mentioned To be supplied with
in various sumps of (Working Range: the Bidder in clause no. suction & discharge
the plant area like 0 to 125%) 1.02.02 pressure gauge and
fuel oil transfer and other accessories as
pressurising pump specified and shall be
house trolley mounted. Suction
hose should be of 80 NB
size. Discharge hose
should be of 65 NB size.

Page 273 of 630

GROUP-C PUMPS : VERTICAL SUBMERSIBLE PORTABLE SUMP PUMP
Sl. Location Numbers Capacity Total headPit size in which Type of liquid Remarks
No. required (cum/Hr.) Each (MLC) pumps are to be to be handled
(Total) installed (in mm)
1. Pumps will be used Two (2) 100 (Working Twenty (20) To be finalised by As mentioned To be supplied with
in various deep range as per (Range 5 to 25) the Bidder in clause no. discharge pressure
sumps / pits (e.g. pump 1.02.03 gauge and 500 mm
CW pump house, characteristic M.S. pipe spool at
Clarified Water curve for full discharge as specified.
pump house, etc.) range of head Discharge hose should
in case of variation). be of 100 NB size.
eventuality.
GROUP-D PUMPS : PERMANENTLY INSTALLED VERTICAL SUMP PUMP
Sl. Location Numbers Capacity Total head Pit size in which Type of liquid Remarks
1. These pumps Two pumps Capacity of each To be To be decided by As described Discharge pipe sizing
should be located (100% capacity) pump should be calculated with the Bidder in cl. no. should be done taking
in the Ash Handling are to be located so selected to 10% margin 1.02.04 minimum water velocity
Plant Buildings in each sump pit empty the sump over total to be 2m/sec but should
pit in 10 to 15 dynamic head not be less than 80 NB.
minutes (TDH = static one gate valve and one
head + friction non return valve should
losses) be provided at pump
discharge.
ii) Any other places
felt necessary by
the Bidder.

Page 274 of 630

Sl. Location Numbers Capacity Total head Pit size in which Type of liquid Remarks
These pumps will

also be provided in
all indoor sumps
and outdoor sumps
of capacity 5 cu.m
and above.

Page 275 of 630


ANNEXURE-II
DATA SPECIFICATION SHEET OF SEWAGE TRANSFER PUMP
1.0 Number required in each Two (2) [One working and one stand-by].
sewage lifting station
2.0 Type Vertical Submersible
3.0 Location Outdoor
4.0 Fluid to be handled Sanitary Waste water
5.0 Duty Continuous
6.0 Suction Condition Flooded suction
7.0 Rated capacity, m3/hr By Bidder
8.0 TDH at rated capacity, By Bidder
MLC
9.0 Range of Operation (%) 30-120
10.0 Pump Speed, RPM 1500 preferred
11.0 Material of Construction
Casing SS 316
Impeller SS 316
Shaft SS 316

Page 276 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-XII
GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SCREW PUMPS
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-XII: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15-V-IIIC-Sec-XII.doc)
Page 277 of 630


CONTENTS
1.00.00 GENERAL 1
2.00.00 CODES AND STANDARD 1
3.00.00 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1
4.00.00 TEST 6

Page 278 of 630


SECTION-XII
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SCREW PUMPS
01.00.00 GENERAL
This section covers general requirement of design, construction

features. manufacture, inspection and performance testing of screw
/ gear pump for water, oily water, fuel oil and sludge applications.
The equipment supplied shall comply with the latest applicable

Indian Standards listed below. Other national standards are
acceptable provided they are established to be equal or superior to
the Indian Standards mentioned herewith.
IS : 5120. 1977 Technical requirements of rotodynamic

purpose pumps
BS : 599. 1966 Method of testing for pumps
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards, USA
API: 676. 1980 Positive Displacement Pumps - Rotary
VDMA 24284. 1970
Positive Displacement Pumps - Code
for Acceptance
Test
IS: 210.1993 Grey Iron Castings
IS : 2062, 1992 Steel for general structural purposes
ANSI B16.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ASME Sec II Engineering
Materials
03.00.00 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
03.01.00 Design & Performance Requirements

Page 279 of 630


03.01.01 The pump shall be horizontal, rotary, positive displacement type

with gear or screw as rotary element.
`
03.01.02 The pump shall be capable of developing the required total head at
rated flow under continuous operation. The maximum efficiency of
the pump shall be within + 10% of rated flow.
03.01.03 Pumps of a particular category shall be identical and shall be

suitable for parallel operation with equal load sharing. Components
of identical pumps shall be Interchangeable.
03.01.04 Pumps shall run smoothly without undue noise and vibration. The
noise level at a distance of 1 m from the equipment shall not
exceed 85 dBA.
03.01.05 The pumps shall be suitable to handle fluid of characteristics as

indicated in technical data sheet.
03.01.06 The pumps shall be suitable to handle the specified fluid for the
complete range of operating conditions. The pump capacity shall be
selected based on lowest possible viscosity and driving motor
power shall be selected based on highest possible viscosity.
03.01.07 Each pump shall be connected to its drive motor directly and shall
be mounted on a common base plate. The pump set along with
drives shall be designed to permit rapid and economical
maintenance.
03.01.08 All pumps shall be provided with suitable mechanical seals of

proven design and material.
03.01.09 The supplier shall assume full responsibility in the operation of

pump and motor as a unit.
03.02.00 Construction Requirements
03.02.01 Pump Casing

Casing and supports shall be designed to have sufficient strength
and rigidity to prevent any adverse effect on internal clearances
and to limit change of alignment to 50 micrometers at the coupling

Page 280 of 630


flange caused by the worst combination of pressure, torque or

allowable piping stress.
Pump casing shall be provided with a vent connection along with

piping, fittings & valves unless pump is self-venting by the
arrangement of nozzles. Casing drain, as required, shall be
provided complete with drain valves, piping and plugs. It shall be
provided with a connection for suction and discharge pressure
gauge as standard feature.
Jacket for cooling or heating shall be provided, if specified in

technical particulars. Passages shall not open into casing joints.
Inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged. Flanges shall be
raised face and shall conform to ANSI B 16.5. Counter flanges with
necessary bolts. nuts. gasket etc. shall be supplied along with the
pump.
03.02.02 Rotating Elements

Rotating parts shall be properly aligned. Rotor and shaft shall be
stiff enough to prevent contact between the rotor bodies and the
casing. It shall be of material that have wear, corrosion and erosion
resistance compatible with the application.
03.02.03 Mechanical Seals

The Pumps shall generally be employed with mechanical seals,
which shall be arranged that replacement of seal should be
possible with minimum downtime. T sealing faces should be highly
lapped surfaces of materials known for their frictional coefficient
and resistance to corrosion against the liquid being pumped
The seal end plate or rotating cover and bolting shall be designed
to retain the Sl with sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion that might
impair seal operation. T stationary seal member shall be positively
retained to prevent its rotation. For 1 seals under vacuum service,
the seal design must ensure sealing against atmospheric pressure
even when the pumps are not operating.
If seal flushing and cooling is provided by the pumped fluid, the
pump supplier $hall ensure that sufficient flow reaches the primary
seal faces to provide for cooling and maintenance of a stable film at
Page 281 of 630


the seal faces.
03.02.04 Stuffing Box
Stuffing box, if provided, should permit replacement of packing

without removing any part other than the gland. Asbestos shall not
be used as a packing material.
Stuffing Boxes of packed ring construction type preferably to

accommodate five rings of packing (minimum four rings of packing)
plus a lantern ring shall be provided wherever specified. Packed
ring stuffing boxes shall be properly lubricated and sealed as per
service requirements and manufacturer's standards. If external
gland sealing is required, it shall be done from the pump discharge.
The Bidder shall provide the necessary piping valves, fittings etc. or
the gland sealing connection.
03.02.05 Bearing
Heavy duty antifriction bearings, adequately designed for the type

of service specified in the technical data sheet and for long, trouble
free operation shall be furnished.
The bearings offered shall be capable of taking both the radial and
axial thrust coming into play during operation. Antifriction bearings
shall be designed for a rated life of either 25000 hours with
continuous operation at rated conditions or 16000 hours at
maximum axial and radial loads and rated speed.
Proper lubricating arrangement for the bearings shall be provided.

The design shall be such that the bearing lubricating element does
not contaminate the liquid pumped. Where there is a possibility of
liquid entering the bearings suitable arrangement in the form of
deflectors or any other suitable arrangement must be provided
ahead of bearing assembly.
Bearings shall be easily accessible without disturbing the pump

assembly. A drain plug shall be provided at the bottom of each
bearing housing.

Page 282 of 630


03.02.06 Pump & Motor shaft Coupling
The pump and motor shafts shall be connected with an adequately

sized flexible coupling of proven design with a spacer to facilitate
dismantling of the pump without disturbing the motor. Necessary
coupling guards shall also be provided.
03.02.07 Base plate
A common base plate for the pump and motor shall be provided.
The base plate shall be of fabricated steel (minimum 6 mm
thickness) and of rigid construction suitably ribbed and reinforced.
Base plate and pump supports shall be constructed and the piping
unit so mounted as to minimize misalignment caused by
mechanical forces such as normal piping strain, internal differential
thermal expansion and hydraulic piping thrust. The base plate shall
be suitability drilled for the anchor bolts. The base plate shall have
drip pan and suitable draining arrangement.
03.02.08 Relief Valve
To protect against damage due to accidental closure of discharge

valve, each pump shall be provided with a relief valve of adequate
capacity,
Relief valve shall be able to handle the pump rated capacity when
fully open, at a pressure not more than 10 percent above the set
pressure.
03.02.09 Material of Construction
The material of construction of various components shall be as

indicated in technical particulars. These are to be considered as
minimum requirement and it is the responsibility of supplier to
select and offer proper material of construction for the required
service,
03.02.10 Assembly and Dismantling
Assembly and dismantling of each pump with drive motor shall be

possible without disturbing the grouted base plate or alignment.
Page 283 of 630


03.02.11 Drive Motor
The motor shall be sized to meet the maximum specified operating

conditions. including external gear and/or coupling losses.
Continuous Motor rating (at 50 0 C ambient) shall be atleast ten
percent (10%) above the maximum load demand of the pump in the
entire operating range including the run out condition to take care of
the system frequency & voltage variation.
The enclosure of motor shall comply various requirements of flame

proof construction as per IS-2148 and degree of protection shall be
as per IP-55.
Other design and construction features of the drive motor shall be

as specified, elsewhere, under Standard Electrical Specifications.
4.00.00 TESTS
Material test certificates from recognized laboratories shall be

furnished for review\for various components.
Following are the minimum shop and site tests to be conducted by

the supplier:
4.01.00 Shop Tests
4.01.01 Hydrostatic Test
Pressure containing parts, including cooling and heating jackets,

shall be test hydrostatically with liquid at a minimum of 1.5 times
the maximum allowable working pressure but at not less than 1.38
bar gauge.
Tests shall be maintained for a sufficient period of time to permit

complete examination of parts under pressure. The hydrostatic test
shall be considered satisfactorily when no leaks are observed for a
minimum of 30 minutes.

Page 284 of 630


4.01.02 Mechanical Balancing
All rotating components of the pumps shall be subjected to static

and dynamic balancing at shop as per ISO 1940. The dynamic
balancing shall be done at or near the operating speed and the
supplier shall furnish its acceptance norms for approval before
conducting the test.
4.01.03 Non-destructive Testing
Non-destructive testing of the pump components shall be

conducted in accordance with relevant standards. Prior to testing,
the test procedure and repair procedure shall be submitted for
approval. All components subjected to testing shall be identified
and only those which are tested successfully shall be used for the
manufacture of final product. All test results shall be submitted by
the supplier for approval
All cast iron parts shall be tested in accordance with IS - 210. Test
bars shall be cast or physical tests from the same ladle of metal as
the casting they represent.
Steel forgings used in pump shall be tested for both physical

properties and chemical composition. steel forgings shall be
ultrasonically tested.
4.01.04 Performance Testing
All pumps shall be performance tested at the Manufacturer's Works

as per testing code. The test shall be conducted to determine the
following characteristics:
a) Speed
b) Discharge Pressure
c) Suction Pressure
d) Capacity
e) Power
The test shall be conducted preferably with the tested job motor.

Page 285 of 630


Noise and vibration shall be measured during the performance

04.02.02 For pumps operating in parallel, the load sharing should not vary by
more than 5%.
testing, for reference purposes.
The pumps showing any abnormal behaviour during the

performance testing or the pumps as required shall be stripped
down for a thorough examination after the performance test. The
performance test report shall be prepared by the supplier and
submitted for approval, before despatch of the pumps.
04.02.00 Site Tests
04.02.01 After installation, the pumps supplied shall be operated to prove

satisfactory performance as individual equipment as well as a
system. The noise and vibration level of the pumps shall be
measured and it should be within the design values. For pumps
operating in parallel, the load sharing should not vary by more than
5%. If performance at site is found to be unsatisfactory, then the
supplier shall rectify or replace the equipment.
04.02.03 Test Procedure Instruments
The test procedures to be followed and instruments to be used for

testing shall be subject to the approval. All instruments to be used
for stage and performance testing shall be calibrated at reputed
third party laboratories.

Page 286 of 630


VOLUME : IIIF
SECTION-III
MISCELLANEOUS HOISTS
Page 287 of 630


CONTENT
4.00.00 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA AND INFORMATION
ATTACHMENT
ANNEXURE-I LIST OF LOCATION FOR

MONORAIL HOISTS
Page 288 of 630


VOLUME : IIIF
SECTION-III
MISCELLANEOUS HOISTS
1.01.00 The hoists will be used for erection and maintenance of various equipment in
different buildings.
1.02.00 Hoists are divided into two separate groups - (a) Hand operated and (b) Electric
operated.
The design, manufacture and testing of the equipment covered under this
specification shall conform to the latest editions of the following Indian
Standards:
2.01.00 IS : 3832 : Specification for Hand Operated Chain

Pulley-blocks.
2.02.00 IS : 807 : Code of Practice for Design, Manufacture, Erection

and Testing (Structural Portion) of Cranes and
Hoists.
2.03.00 IS : 6216 : Short link Chain, Grade T(8) for Pulley-blocks &
other Lifting Appliances.
2.04.00 IS : 4164 : Lifting C Hooks with Eye Capacity upto 25 tonnes.
2.05.00 IS : 2429 (part -I) : Non-calibrated Load Chain for Lifting Purposes.
2.06.00 IS : 3938 : Specification for Electric Wire Rope Hoists. and

other Indian Standards referred to in the above
standards.
3.01.00 Hoists shall be provided in all areas where any equipment/component weighing
above 500 kg is installed and needs to be handled for maintenance purposes.
Number of monorail beams shall be such that the centre line of the hoist and
the centre line of equipment to be handled shall be not more than 500 mm.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.IIIF/S-III : 1

Page 289 of 630


3.01.01 The location and no. of hoists is to be finalised during detailed engineering.
Final arrangement is subject to approval of Owner/Consultant.
3.01.02 Monorail hoists shall at least be provided in the areas mentioned in Annexure-I.
The list is indicative only and not an exhaustive one.
3.02.00 All drive motors and driving gears as necessary.
3.03.00 Limit switches for electrical hoist as necessary.
3.04.00 Trailing cable with all supporting fixtures as necessary for electric hoists.
3.05.00 Pendent control station with all accessories for electric hoists.
3.06.00 Lifting lug, eye bolts etc., for handling hoist parts.
3.07.00 Protection guard as specified.
3.08.00 Lifting hook block assembly for hoists.
4.00.00 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.01.00 Lifting capacity
4.01.01 Capacity of each hoist shall be 1.2 times the maximum working load.
4.01.02 Hoists of capacity upto 5 tones shall be manual hoists.
Hoists of capacity above 5 tones shall be electric hoists.
4.02.00 Effort for Mechanical Hoists
4.02.01 Hoisting
Hoisting effort for hoists upto 3 tones capacity shall not be more than 20 kg.
Hoisting effort for hoists above 3 tones capacity shall not be more than 25 kg
4.02.02 Trolley Motion
Effort for trolley motion for hoists upto 3 tones capacity shall not be more than
15 kg.
Effort for trolley motion for hoists above 3 tones capacity shall not be more
than 20 Kg.
4.02.03 For Electric operated hoist both hoisting and trolley motion shall be motor
operated.
4.03.00 Lift

Page 290 of 630


4.03.01 Lift above operating floor
Highest position of the hook shall be such that during operation of hoists, the
vertical distance between bottom of any equipment handled and top of any
permanent structure or equipment in the operating area shall be at least one
metre.
4.03.02 Approach below operating floor
To be decided by the Bidder for safe and reliable handling of any equipment
above half ton below the operating floor.
4.04.00 Length of Monorail Hoist
To be decided by the Bidder depending on the floor and machine layout. The
horizontal distance between the centre line of the hoist and centre line of any
installed equipment in its operating shall not be more than half metre.
5.01.00 All parts requiring replacement or lubrication shall be easily accessible without
the need for dismantling of other equipment and structures.
Robust construction and ample rating merging which experience has shown to
be necessary shall be ensured throughout manufacture.
5.02.00 All components of hoists of identical capacity and duty shall be

interchangeable. The hoists of identical capacity and duty shall be identical in
all respects unless otherwise required. The hoist design shall be such that
these can be quickly removed from one monorail beam and fixed on another
beam without disassembling major components.
5.03.00 All machinery and equipment included under this specification must be
equipped with safety devices and clearances to comply with recognized
standards and specification requirements.
5.04.00 Cast iron parts wherever used, shall conform to IS:210 - FG 260. Also no wood
or other combustible materials shall be used.
5.05.00 Defects in material like fractures, cracks, blowholes, laminations, pitting etc. are
not allowed. Rectifications of any such flaw is permissible only with the approval
of the Purchaser.
5.06.00 Each hoist shall be permanently and legibly stamped with the tag number,
manufacturer's name, safe working load, grade of load chain (where
applicable), range of lift etc.

Page 291 of 630


5.07.00 Load chain (where applicable) shall be of grade T(8) as per IS:6216 and Hand
chain shall be as per IS:2429 (Part-I) grade 30.
5.08.00 Wheels in trolley unit travel shall be single flanged with straight/tapper/barrel
shaped tread to suit the monorail. Wheels should be preferably of forged steel
construction. Material of construction for wheels of traversing block and hoist
gear for hoist used in hazardous areas shall be of non-ferrous material to avoid
spark during operation.
5.09.00 All gears shall be hardened and tempered steel with machine out teeth.
5.10.00 Hoist (Manually Operated)
5.10.01 Manually operated hoists shall be of spur gear chain pulley block type. It shall
be suspended from the trolley by a hook. The design of the hoist shall conform
to IS:3832 (Specification for hand operated chain pulley blocks). The hooks and
brakes of hoist shall conform to the requirements stipulated in (a) and (b) below
a) Hooks shall conform to and IS:3832. The load hook shall be swievelling
type fitted with a locking device.
b) The pulley blocks shall be fitted with an automatic mechanical load

brake to prevent self lowering of load in all working positions. The load
brake shall also allow smooth lowering of load without serious
overheating.
c) All manually operated hoists, unless stated otherwise, shall be trolley

suspended type.
5.10.02 The trolley of hoists shall be manually operated.
5.10.03 The hoists shall be of Mechanism class 2 as per IS:3832.
5.11.00 Electric Hoist
5.11.01 Electric hoist shall be electric wire rope trolley suspended type. The design,
operation, testing of electric hoist shall conform to IS:3938 (Specification for
electric wire rope hoist).
Minimum speed for hoisting shall be 3 m/min. and that of for trolley motion shall
be 15 m/min.
5.11.02 Lifting hook shall conform to IS-4164 as applicable.
5.11.03 Wire rope for hoists shall conform to IS-2266.
5.11.04 Electro-mechanical brakes of fail to safety type shall be provided for hoist
motion as well as per trolley motion for electrically driven trolley. Load brake
shall allow smooth lowering of load and arrangement shall be such as it can not
be released accidentally. Capacity of brake and other relevant data shall
conform to IS:3938.
Page 292 of 630


5.11.05 The trolley of the hoists shall be electrically driven.
5.11.06 For other components of hoist such as rope, sheave, drum, bearings, gears
etc. stipulations of IS: 3938 shall be followed.
5.11.07 Motor shall be rated for duty S4. Service class of motor shall be "M8" as per
IS:3177. Conditions given in IS:3938 for hoist motor shall be followed over and
above the specification of electric motor in Volume-V. In case of any
contradiction of the aforesaid standard and the motor specification, the
conditions which are more stringent shall be considered. All the motors shall
be suitable for reversing, frequent starting and braking. Motors shall be
provided with suitable space heating arrangement.
5.11.08 Hoist shall be designed so that remote control can be effected by means of
pendant push button switch from the operating floor. Operation, arrangement
etc. of pendant push button switch shall conform to IS:3938.
5.11.09 Micro-speed attachment in hoist shall be provided if considered necessary by

the Bidder.
5.11.10 The hoists shall be of mechanism class 2 as per IS-3938.
5.12.00 Ball and roller bearings of reputed make shall be used throughout.
5.13.00 Suitable lubrication system shall be provided for all gear drives.
5.14.00 Other Electrical Items
5.14.01 The cross conductor on monorail for power supply to the hoist shall be of
festoon type flexible insulated cable conductors. All fixtures and accessories
shall be provided by the Bidder for this purpose.
5.14.02 Necessary insulators, supports, clamps and all other accessories shall be
provided as per standard design.
5.14.03 Each hoist shall be provided with a starter panel with protective relays.
5.14.04 One main isolating switch shall be used to cut-off the supply to the hoist
assembly.
5.14.05 One main electro-magnetic contactor together with magnetic overload relay
(hand reset) for each motor circuit shall be housed in the protection panel.
5.14.06 The operation of overload relay shall interrupt the main magnetic contactor.
5.14.07 Adequate short circuit protection shall be provided for main and individual
circuits.
5.14.08 415V 10%, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hz 5%, power supply for the hoist shall be
arranged through MCCB unit mounted at standing height at a convenient
location near each hoist.
Page 293 of 630


5.14.09 Transformers to step down the voltage and rectifiers as necessary shall be
provided by the Bidder.
5.14.10 All external and internal power, control and auxiliary circuit wiring of the
electrical drive and accessories and panels shall be provided. The wiring shall
be done with 1100 V grade PVC insulated stranded aluminium conductor cable
of suitable size not less than 2.5 sq.mm nominal equivalent copper area of
cross-section. All control and auxiliary circuit wiring shall be done with 1100 V
grade PVC insulated, 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductor. Control wire
terminations to the panels shall be made with compression type connectors.
Multiway terminal blocks shall be furnished for terminating panel wiring and
outgoing cable.
5.14.11 The hoist structure, motor frame and metal cases of all electrical equipment
including metal conduit shall be effectively connected to earth. All grounding
materials shall be supplied under this specification to grounding risers.
5.14.12 Single speed control shall be used for both hoist and trolley travel in each
direction of motion.
6.01.00 The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment
furnished shall conform to the requirements of the specification and in
compliance with the requirements of the latest edition of IS:3832 or equivalent
standards for manually operated hoists and shall be as per IS:3938 for
electrically operated hoist.
6.02.00 All the mono-rail hoists shall also be tested at site as per the stipulation of
relevant Indian Standards.
7.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA AND INFORMATION
7.01.00 General arrangement drawings incorporating all dimensions information on

head rooms, lift, wheel loads, hook suspension arrangement and other relevant
data for all the hoists.
7.02.00 For Mandatory Spares, Spares required for erection and commissioning,
Recommended Spares, Special Tools And Tackles, fixtures etc., as required
for regular operation and maintenance of the equipment offered and supply
of first charge of lubricating oil, inhibitor oil and also adequate quantity of the
consumables, please refer Technical Specification Volume-II A.
7.03.00 Design calculation for selection of electric motor capacities for electric hoist.
7.04.00 Complete list of location, number and capacity of hoists provided.

Page 294 of 630


ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF LOCATION FOR MONORAIL HOISTS
1. Power House
a) For all equipments above 500 Kg in ground floor and mezzanine floor.
b) A/C Plant Equipment Room Area.
2. Fuel Oil Pressurizing Pump House.
3. FO Transfer Pump House.
4. Condensate Transfer Pump House.
5. C. W. Pump House Electrical Room.
6. Boiler Area
a) I.D. fan, motor & VFD.
b) F.D. fan, motor.
c) P.A. fan, motor.
d) Mills & gear boxes.
e) Air heater areas.
6. E.S.P. Transformer Rectifier Sets.
7. Electrical Switch Gear Rooms.
Note:
1. The above requirement of Hoist is minimum and any other area not
specifically mentioned above where requirement may arise, shall be finalised
during detail engineering.
2. For Coal Handling System, Ash Handling System and Water and Effluent
treatment system refer relevant section of the specification.

Page 295 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VII
GENERAL QUALITY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS
Page 296 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
2.00.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS QUALITY

ASSURANCE
3.00.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
4.00.00 INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION

CERTIFICATES
ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE-I FORMAT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE

PROGRAMME
ANNEXURE-II FIELD WELDING SCHEDULE
Page 297 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VII
QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.00.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
1.01.00 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of Contract
whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor's works or at his
Sub-contractor's premises or at the Owner's site or at any other place or work
are in accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable
quality assurance programme to control such activities at all points, as
necessary. Such programmes shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be
finally accepted by the Owner/Authorised representative after discussions
before the award of contract. A quality assurance programme of the
Contractor shall generally cover the following :
a) His organisation structure for the management and implementation of

the proposed quality assurance programme.
b) Documentation control system.
c) Qualification data for Bidder's key personnel.
d) The procedure for purchase of materials, parts, components and

selection of Sub-contractor's services including vendor analysis,
source inspection, incoming raw-material inspection, verification of
materials purchased etc.
e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection control including

process controls and fabrication and assembly controls.
f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.
g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and all site related
works.
h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing

equipments.
i) System for quality audit.
j) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Owner.
l) System for handling storage and delivery.
m) System for maintenance of records.
Page 298 of 630

n) Furnishing of quality plans for manufacturing and field activities

detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted for
controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of
equipment/component as per format enclosed at Annexure-I to this
section for Owners approval
o) Internal standards, if referred in the quality plans shall generally be

compatible with National / International standards and shall be
mentioned in the quality plans. Alternatively bidder shall furnish
extracts of the internal standards detailing out acceptance norm for
the product / material.
2.00.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.01.00 All materials, components and equipment covered under this specification
shall be procured, manufactured, erected, commissioned and tested at all the
stages, as per a comprehensive Quality Assurance Programme. An indicative
programme of inspection/tests to be carried out by the Contractor for some of
the major items is given in the respective technical specification. This is
however, not intended to form a comprehensive programme as it is the
Contractor's responsibility to draw up and implement such programme duly
approved by the Owner/Consultant. The detailed Quality Plans for
manufacturing and field activities should be drawn up by the Bidder,
separately in the format attached at Annexure-I and will be submitted to
Owner/Authorised representative for approval. Schedule of finalisation of
such quality plans will be finalised before award.
Contractor shall furnish list of Manufacturing Quality Plans of major

equipments indicating proposed inspection catagorisation indicating items
that will be offered for Owners inspection etc and the Field Quality Plans
2.02.00 Manufacturing Quality Plan for all the major equipment will detail out their
respective important components, their in-process various tests/inspection &
final inspection / tests, to be carried out as per the requirements of this
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices and
procedures followed by Contractor's Quality Control organization. The
relevant reference documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection
documents raised etc., during all stages of materials procurement,
manufacture, assembly and final testing/performance testing are to be
comprehensibly documented by Contractor.
Manufacturing Quality Plan for all major equipments/ items will be approved
by owner. In these approved quality plans, Owner / Authorised
representative shall identify customer hold points (CHP), test / checks which
shall be carried out in presence of the Owners Engineer or his authorised
representative and beyond which the work shall not proceed without
consent of Owner / Authorised representative in writing. Inspection/ Test
reports are to be submitted to owner as specified in final approved
Manufacturing Quality Plans.
2.03.00 Field Quality Plans / Procedures for all field activities shall be submitted to
Page 299 of 630

owner for review / approval. These Quality Plans / procedures will detail out,
for all equipment, the quality practices and procedures etc. to be followed by
the Contractor's site Quality Control organisation, during various stages of site
activities from receipt of materials/ equipment at site.
2.04.00 The Bidder shall also furnish copies of the reference documents/plant
standards/acceptance norms/tests and inspection procedure etc., as referred
in Quality Plans along with Quality Plans. These Quality plans and reference
documents/standards etc. will be subject to Owner's approval without which
manufacture shall not proceed. These approved documents shall form a part
of the contract. In these approved quality plans, Owner/Authorised
representative shall identify customer hold points (CHP), test/checks which
shall be carried out in presence of the Owners Engineer or his authorised
representative and beyond which the work will not proceed without consent of
Owner/Authorised representative in writing. All deviations to this specification,
approved quality plans and applicable standards must be documented and
major deviations in the form of Non Conformity Report shall be referred to
Owner/Authorised representative for approval and dispositioning.
2.05.00 No material shall be despatched from the manufacturer's works before the
same is accepted subsequent to pre-despatch final inspection including
verification of records of all previous tests/inspections by Owner's Engineer/
Authorised representative for CHP and W points marked in quality plans ,
and duly authorised for despatch by issuance of Material Despatch Clearance
Certificate (MDCC). For items which is not under owners inspection the
contractor shall apply for despatch clearance (MDCC) from owner by
submitting their internal inspection reports and quality records
2.06.00 All materials used or supplied shall be accompanied by valid and approved
materials certificates and tests and inspection report. These certificates and
reports shall indicate the sheet serial numbers or other such acceptable
identification numbers of the material. The material certified shall also have
the identification details stamped on it.
2.07.00 Castings and forgings used for construction shall be of tested quality. Details
of results of chemical analysis, heat treatment record, mechanical property
test results shall be furnished.
2.08.00 All welding and brazing shall be carried out as per procedure drawn and
qualified in accordance with requirements of ASME Section - IX (latest
edition) or other International equivalent standard acceptable to the Owner.
All brazers, welders etc. employed on any part of the contract at Contractor's/
Sub-Contractor's works or at site shall be qualified as per ASME Section-IX
(latest edition) or equivalent international standard approved by the Owner.
Such qualification tests shall be conducted in presence of Owner / his
authorised representative or owner approved Third Party Inspection
Agency(TPIA). Previously qualified WPS & PQR shall be acceptable if
witnessed by owners approved TPIA.
For welding of pressure parts and high pressure piping coming under IBR
purview, the requirements of IBR shall also be complied with.
Page 300 of 630

2.09.00 All non-destructive examination (NDT) shall be carried out in accordance

with LIST OF STANDARDS FOR REFERENCE as given below in this section.
The NDT operator shall be qualified as per SNT-TC-IA (of American Society
of non- destructive examination). Results of NDT for the list major equipments
/ items identified for owners inspection shall be properly recorded and
submitted for review and approval. Other items not covered under owners
inspection, contractor shall review and approve the NDT results and such
reports shall be submitted to owner in the final documentation of the items /
equipments
2.10.00 All the sub-vendors proposed by the Contractor for procurement of major
bought out items including castings, forgings, semi-finished and finished
components/equipment list of which shall be drawn up by the Contractor and
finalised with the Owner shall be subject to Owner's approval. Quality Plans of
the successful vendors shall be discussed, finalised and approved by the
Owner/Authorised representative and form part of the Purchase Order
between the Contractor and the Vendor.
2.11.00 All the purchase specifications for the major bought-out items, list of which
shall be drawn up by the Contractor and finalised with the Owner shall be
furnished to the Owner for comments and subsequent approval before orders
are placed.
Owner reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of
the systems and procedures of the Contractor's or their sub-vendor's quality
management and control activities. The Contractor shall provide all necessary
assistance to enable the Owner carry out such audit and surveillance.
Quality audit/approval of the results of tests and inspection will not prejudice
the right of the Owner to reject equipment not giving the desired performance
after erection and shall not in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of
the Contractor in earning satisfactory performance of equipment as per
specification.
2.12.00 Quality requirements for main equipment shall equally apply for spares and
replacement items.
2.13.00 Repair/rectification procedures to be adopted to make any job acceptable

shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
2.14.00 For quality assurance of all civil works refer to the specifications for civil
works.
3.00.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
3.01.00 The Contractor shall be required to submit two (2) copies and two (2) sets of
microfilms / CDs of the following Quality Assurance documents within three
(3) weeks after despatch of the equipment:
a) Material mill test reports on components as specified by the

specification.
Page 301 of 630

b) The inspection plan with verification, inspection plan check points,

verification sketches, if used and methods used to verify that the
inspection and testing points in the inspection plan were performed
satisfactorily.
c) Non-destructive examination results /reports including radiography

interpretation reports.
d) Factory tests results for testing required as per applicable codes and
standards referred in the specification.
e) Welder identification list listing welder's and welding operator's

qualification procedure and welding identification symbols.
f) Sketches and drawings used for indicating the method of traceability

of the radiographs to the location on the equipment.
g) Stress relief time temperature charts.
h) Inspection reports duly signed by QA personnel of the Owner and

Contractor for the agreed inspection hold points. During the course of
inspection, the following will also be recorded :
i) When some important repair work is involved to make the job

acceptable.
ii) The repair work remains part of the accepted product quality.
i) Letter of conformity certifying that the requirement is in compliance

with finalised specification requirements.
4.00.00 INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES
4.01.00 The Owners Engineer, or his duly authorised representative and/or an

outside inspection agency acting on behalf of the Owner shall have access
inside the workshops, test labs, establishments at all reasonable times to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the works during its
manufacture or erection and if part of the works is being manufactured or
assembled on other premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain for the
Owners Engineer and for his duly authorised representative permission to
inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor's
own premises or works.
4.02.00 The Contractor shall give the Owners Engineer/ Authorized Inspector
twenty one (21) days written notice for CHP / W points of any material
being ready for testing by owner engineer / Authorized inspector. Such
tests shall be to the Contractor's account except for the expenses of the
Inspector. The Engineer/ Inspector, unless the witnessing of the tests is
virtually waived, will attend such tests within fifteen (15) days of the date on
which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection. If owners
Engineer / Authorised Inspector fail to attend the inspection, next mutually
convenient date for test shall be agreed with Contractor. Contractor shall, in
Page 302 of 630

no case proceed with the test without owner or his authorized inspectors,
unless the witnessing is officially waived and advised Contactor to proceed
with the test. Contractor shall forthwith forward duly certified completed test
report and a product quality certificate in six (6) copies to owner upon
completion of such test.
4.03.00 The Engineer or Inspector shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of
Inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the Contractor, or any
objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which is
in his opinion not in accordance with the contract / QAP or other approved
quality documents. The Contractor shall give due consideration to such
objections and shall either make modifications that may be necessary to meet
the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the Engineer/Inspector giving
reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to comply with the
contract / QAP or other approved quality documents.
4.04.00 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor's or
sub-contractor's works, the Engineer/Inspector shall issue a certificate to this
effect fifteen (15) days after completion of tests excluding the test completion
date subject to submission of all certified documents related to the test, If the
tests are not witnessed by the Engineer/Inspectors, the certificate shall be
issued within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of the Contractor's test certificate
by the Engineer/Inspector. Failure of the owners Engineer/Inspector to issue
such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the
works. The completion of these tests, or the issue of the certificates shall not
bind the Owner to accept the equipment should it, on further tests after
erection be found not to comply with the contract / QAP or other approved
quality documents.
4.05.00 In all cases where the contract provides for tests whether at the premises or
works of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, the Contractor, except where
otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour,
materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may
be reasonably demanded by the owners Engineer/Inspector or his authorised
representatives to carry out effectively such tests on the equipment in
accordance with the Contract / QAP or other approved quality documents.
Contractor and shall give facilities to the owners Engineer/ Inspector or to his
authorised representative to accomplish testing.
4.06.00 To facilitate advance planning of inspection in addition to giving inspection

notice as per Clause 4.02.00, the Contractor shall furnish quarterly inspection
programme indicating proposed schedule dates of inspection at customer
hold point and final inspection stages. Updated quarterly inspection plans will
be made for each three consecutive months and shall be furnished before
beginning of each calendar month.
Page 303 of 630

LIST OF STANDARDS FOR REFERENCE
a) International Standards Organisation (ISO).
b) International Electro-technical Commission (IEC).
c) American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME)
d) American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
e) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
f) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
g) American Welding Society (AWS).
h) Architecture Institute of Japan (AIJ).
i) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
j) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
k) Japanese Electro-technical Committee (JEC).
l) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
m) Federal Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA).
n) Instrument Society of America (ISA).
o) National Electric Code (NEC).
p) Heat Exchanger Institute (HEI).
q) Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association (TEMA).
r) Hydraulic Institute (HIS).
s) International Electro-Technical Commission Publications.
t) Power Test Code for Steam Turbines (PTC).
u) Applicable German Standards (DIN).
v) Applicable British Standards (BS).
w) Applicable Japanese Standards (JIS).
x) Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI).
y) Standards of Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS)
Page 304 of 630

z) Bureau of Indian Standards Institution (BIS).
aa) Indian Electricity Rules.
bb) Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR).
cc) Indian Explosives Act.
dd) Indian Factories Act.
ee) Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC) rules.
ff) Emission regulation of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
gg) Pollution Control regulations of Dept. of Environment, Govt. of India
hh) Central Board of Irrigation and Power (CBIP) Publications
Page 305 of 630

ANNEXURE-I
FORMAT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
MANUFACTURING QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN DOC NO: XXXXX-CAL-QAP-M-0001

VENDOR'S LOGO , NAME &
ADDRESS REV NO : 0 1 2 3 4
ITEM : DATE :
CLIENT : LOCATION :
PROJECT : REFERENCE PURCHASE ORDER NO. & DT :
VENDOR : REFERENCE APPROVED DATA SHEET :
SUB VENDOR : REFERENCE APPROVED DRAWING. NO. :
ABBREVIATIONS : AGENCY : GENERAL REMARKS
1 THE ITEMS WHICH ARE FALLING UNDER ANY
QAP - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN, MATL - MATERIAL, 1 - DCPL/PROJECT AUTHORITY
STATUTORY AUTHORITYS (LIKE I.B.R. ETC.) SCOPE SHALL
CR - CRITICAL, APP - APPROVED, 2 - SUPPLIER BE SUBJECTED TO THAT STATUTORY AUTHORITY'S
MA - MAJOR, DWG - DRAWING, 3 - SUB-SUPPLIER INSPECTION CLEARENCE.
MI - MINOR SUPL - SUPPLIER, 4 - MANUFACTURER
SPEC - SPECIFICATION, PROC - PROCEDURE 5 - THIRD PARTY INSPECTION AGENCY
TC - TEST CERTIFICATES
P - PERFORM
w - WITNESS
V - VERIFY
CHP - CUSTOMER HOLD POINT
NOTES:
1. EXACT MATERIAL / PROCESS / INSPECTION / TESTS FOLLOWED BY THE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE SPECIFIED
2. EXACT REFERENCE DOCUMENT/ACCEPTANCE STANDARD SHALL BE SPECIFIED
3. IN CASE SPECIFIED ACCEPTANCE STANDARD / NORMS IS OTHER THAN NATIONAL / INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
. STANDARD / COPY OF THE ACCEPTANCE NORMS FOLLOWED BY THE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR
REVIEW RECORD
4 FINAL INSPECTION DOSSIER SHALL BE PREPARED BY MANUFACTURER & SHALL BE ENDORSED BY INSPECTIONTION
AGENCY
Prepared by Checked by Approved By
Revision R0 R1 R2 R0 R1 R2 R0 R1 R2
DATE
Page 306 of 630

DOC NO:
VENDOR'S LOGO, NAME & ADDRESS ITEM : REV NO : R0 R1 R2
DATE :
CHECKS FORMAT
SL NO. DESCRIPTION CATEGORY REF DOCS ACCEPTANCE NORM OF AGENCY REMARKS
RECORD
TYPE METHOD QUANTUM P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15
1.00
Notes:
Prepared by Checked by Approved By

Revision R0 R1 R2 R0 R1 R2 R0 R1 R2
DATE
Page 307 of 630

ANNEXURE-II
FIELD WELDING SCHEDULE
PROJECT : FWS NO :
CONTRACTOR : REV NO. :
PACKAGE : FIELD WELDING CODE :
SYSTEM : PAGE NO. :
Heat
Drawing
Treat-
No. for Descrip-
Pro- Electrode Minimum ment NDT NDT Accep-
Weld tion of Material Type
Dimen- cess of Filler WPS Pre-heat Tempe- Method Speci- tance Re-
Sl Locations parts to specifica of
sions Weld- Specifica No. Tempera- rature Quantu fication Norm marks
No. & Identi- be -tion Weld
ing -tion ture [Holding m Number Ref.
fication welded
Time in
mark
secs]
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Field Welding Schedule should be submitted for :
o Pressure Parts
o Tanks/Vessels
o Piping
o Heavy/Important Structural Steel
o Heat Exchangers
o Bus Ducts
Page 308 of 630


VOLUME : III-C
SECTION-XIII
GENERALTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PROTECTIVE LINING AND PAINTING
Page 309 of 630


SECTION-XIII
FOR
CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
2.00.00 CODES & STANDARDS 1
3.00.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2
4.00.00 EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND SERVICES TO 4

BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER
5.00.00 COATING PROCEDURE AND APPLICATION 7
6.00.00 TEST REQUIREMENTS 8
7.00.00 INFORMATION / DATA REQUIRED 12
Page 310 of 630


SECTION-XIII
FOR
1.01.00 This specification addresses the requirements of all labour, material, and
appliances necessary with reference to preparations for lining / painting,
application as well as finishing of all lining / painting for all mechanical and
electrical equipment, piping and valves, structures etc. included under the scope
of this Package.
1.02.00 The Bidder shall furnish and apply all lining, primers including wash primers if
required, under-coats, finish coats and colour bands as described hereinafter or
necessary to complete the work in all respects.
2.01.00 The Bidder shall follow relevant Indian and International Standards wherever
applicable in cleaning of surface, selection of lining material / paints and their
application. The entire work shall conform to the following standards /
specifications (latest revision or as specified).
a) SSPC SP 10 / NACE 2 / : Near White Blast Cleaning

b) S 2 PA 2
SSPC : Measurement of dry film Coating Thickness
with magnetic gauges.
c) ASTM D 4541 : Method for pull off strength using portable
Adhesion Tester.
d) NACE RP 0274 2004 : High-Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline
Coatings
e) NACE SP 0188 2006 : Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New
Protective Coatings on Conductive
Substrates
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.III-C/S-XIII: 1

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15-V-IIIC-Sec-XIII.doc)
Page 311 of 630


f) NACE RP 0169 2002 : Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
g) AWWA C 210 2007 : Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior
and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
h) IS 3589:2001 Annexure : Steel Pipes for Water and Sewage
B Specification.
i) AWWA C222-2000 : Polyurethane Coating for the Interior and
Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings.
j) IS 13213 : 2000 : Polyurethane Full Gloss Enamel (Two pack)
3.00.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.01.00 The steel surface preparation prior to actual commencement of coating shall
conform to SSPC SP 10 / NACE 2 / Sa2 (near white metal) with sand blasting.
3.02.00 The contractor shall submit a detailed written description in the form of a manual
covering coating equipment, procedures, materials inspection test, and repair
etc. to Owner/Consultant for approval.
3.03.00 The contractor shall also provide copies of test reports from NABL approved
laboratory (like National Test House, Kolkata) in support of the paint/primer
materials to be used shall conform to the specification requirement.
3.04.00 The contractor shall also provide certificates from paint/primer manufacturer
mentioning the batch numbers, date of manufacture and shelf life etc. of the
materials to be used. In addition to that Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) and
Field Quality Plan (FQP) shall also be submitted prior to commencement of
supply of material and field application.
3.05.00 Paint/coating application work at site shall be done either by paint manufacturer
or by their authorized applicator. The authorized applicator shall have proper
training & certification from manufacturer. Applicator shall possess all the
necessary specialized equipment and manpower experienced in similar job.

Page 312 of 630


3.06.00 Applied coating shall be tested for dry film thickness, holiday (electrical
inspection for continuity) and adhesion as per relevant standard such as SSPC
PA 2, NACE RP 0274 and ASTM D 4541.
3.07.00 If necessary, the material may be heated and applied by airless spray / plural
component spray system.
3.08.00 Manufacturer's specific recommendation, if any, shall be followed during

application of lining / paints.
3.09.00 In areas where there is danger of spotting automobiles or other finally finished
equipment or building by wind borne particles from paint spraying, a Purchaser
approved method shall be adopted.
3.10.00 The colour scheme of the entire Plant, covered under this specification shall be
approved by the Purchaser in advance before application.
3.11.00 All indoor and outdoor piping, insulated as well as uninsulated will have approved
colour bands painted on the pipes at conspicuous places throughout the system,
as approved by Purchaser.
3.12.00 Inside surfaces of vessels / tanks shall be protected by anticorrosive paints or

rubber lining as required / specified elsewhere in the specification. External
surfaces of all vessels / tanks shall be protected by anti corrosive painting.
3.13.00 For vessels / tanks requiring lining and epoxy painting all inside surface shall be
blast cleaned using non-siliceous abrasive after usual wire brushing.
3.14.00 Natural rubber lining shall be provided on the inside of vessels / tanks as
required / specified elsewhere in the specification, in three layers resulting in a
total thickness not less than 4.5 mm.
3.15.00 Surface hardness of rubber lining shall be 65 +/- 5 deg. A (shore).
3.16.00 After the lining is completed, the vessels / tanks shall not be subjected to any
prolonged exposure to direct sunlight in course of its transportation, erection etc.
They shall not be stored in direct sunlight. No further lining or burning shall be
carried out on the vessel, after application of the lining.

Page 313 of 630


3.17.00 All lining projecting outside of the vessel shall be protected adequately from
mechanical damages during shipment, handling storage etc.
3.18.00 Suitable warnings, indicating the special care that must be taken with respect to
these lined vessels shall be stenciled on their outside surface with the letters at
least 12 mm high.
3.19.00 All insulated piping shall have aluminium sheet jacketing.
4.00.00 EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND SERVICES TO BE FURNISHED BY THE

BIDDER
4.01.00 After erection at site, the outside surfaces of all equipment having a shop coat
shall be given further priming coat and finished coats of paint as detailed in
following clauses. However, if the painting system is such that the shop coat and
primer coat to be applied at site are not compatible, then shop coat has to be
removed from the surface of equipment before application of primer coat with
prior blasting.
All factory finished paints shall be touched up at site as required.
All uninsulated piping shall be finished with final paintings after use of proper
wash primer and primer. Aluminium sheet jacketed piping need not be painted.
Colour bands of Purchaser's approved shade shall however be applied on
jacketed piping near walls or partitions, at all junctions, near valves and all other
places as instructed by the Purchaser. All structures shall be painted with
approved paint.
4.02.00 Surface Preparation
4.02.01 Unless mentioned otherwise, all rust and mill scale shall be removed by blasting
to Sa 2-1/2 Swiss Standard before applying the primer.
4.02.02 Special care shall be taken to remove grease and oil by means of suitable
solvents like Trichloroethylene or Carbon Tetrachloride.
4.02.03 The minimum degree of surface preparations for all equipment, piping, fittings,
valves, structures etc. shall be "Near White" according to Steel Structure,
Painting Council-SSPC-SP-10 before application of any primer/paint.
4.03.00 Painting

Page 314 of 630


4.03.01 Specification for application of paints for external surfaces protection of vessels /
tanks / equipment / piping / fittings / valves etc. to be installed indoor shall be as
follows :
a) Surface preparation shall be done either manually or by any other approved

method.
b) Primer Coat shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of 50 microns) of

chlorinated rubber based zinc phosphate.
c) Intermediate Coat (or Under Coat) shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of
50 microns) of chlorinated rubber based paint pigmented with Titanium
Dioxide.
d) Top Coat shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of 50 microns) of

chlorinated rubber paint of approved shade and colour with glossy finish.
e) Total DFT of paint system shall not be less than 150 microns.
4.03.02 Specification for application of paints for external surfaces protection of vessels /
tanks / equipment / piping / fittings / valves etc to be installed outdoor shall be as
follows :
a) Surface preparation shall be done by means of sand blasting, which shall

conform to Sa 2-1/2 Swiss Standard.
b) Primer Coat shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of 100 microns) of
epoxy resin based zinc phosphate primer.
c) Intermediate Coat (or Under Coat) shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of
100 microns) epoxy resin based paint pigmented with Titanium Dioxide.
d) Top Coat shall consist of one coat (minimum DFT of 75 microns) of epoxy
paint of approved shade and colour with glossy finish. Additional one coat
(minimum DFT of 25 microns) of Finish Coat of polyurethane shall be
provided.
e) Total DFT of paint system shall not be less than 300 microns.
4.03.03 Specification for application of paints for external surfaces protection of steel
pipes and fittings which are buried underground / laid inside a hume pipe &
or submerged Under Water and laid under Pipe Trenches (in road/rail/pipe or
trench crossings) shall be as follows :

Page 315 of 630


External surface of the pipe, fittings, specialties etc. handling raw water/clarified
water/filter water shall be painted with one coat of two part chemically cured
polyurethane primer of min 50 micron dry film thickness followed by three or
maximum four coats of two part solvent less polyurethane to build up coating of
dry film thickness of 2000 micron including primer coat.
4.03.04 Specification for application of paints for internal surface protection of large
diameter pipes (sizes above 600 mm NB and above) if any, shall be as follows :
a) All Internal surfaces of steel pipes, fittings, specialties etc. buried

underground or located within pipe trenches shall be given epoxy coating to
protect them from (except for drinking water service, where the compatible
painting shall be so selected to meet relevant quality standards) corrosion.
b) Internal surface of the pipe should be coated with one coat of two part epoxy
primer with not less than 50 micron DFT (dry film thickness) followed by two
part polyamide cured solvent less epoxy.
c) The minimum dry film thickness (DFT) of internal lining shall be 600 micron.
4.03.05 Specification for application of paints for protection of internal surfaces of DM

Water Storage Tank(s) shall be as follows :
a) Primer - One coat of epoxy primer containing high level of Zinc Phosphate
anticorrosive pigment. Total Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of primer shall not be
less than 125 microns.
b) Finish Paint - Three (3) coats Polyamine HB Epoxy Paint. Total Dry Film
Thickness (DFT) of finish paint shall not be less than 125 microns per coat.
c) Total thickness of primer and paint should not be less than 500 microns.
4.03.06 All motors, local push button stations, cable racks, structures used for supports
etc. are to be painted with acid proof paint.
4.03.07 The following surfaces shall not be painted - stainless steel, galvanized steel,
aluminum, copper, brass, bronze and other nonferrous materials.
4.03.08 No painting or filler shall be applied until all repairs, hydrostatic tests and final
shop inspection are completed.
Page 316 of 630


4.03.09 All machined surfaces shall have two (2) coats of water repellant grease after
thorough cleaning.
5.00.00 COATING PROCEDURE AND APPLICATION
5.01.00 Surface Preparation :
Pipe shall be blast cleaned by sand. The cleanliness achieved prior to application
shall be in accordance with the requirement of SSPC SP 10 / NACE 2 / Sa2 of
ISO 8501 (near white metal)
a) The blast pattern or profile depth shall be 40 to 100 micron and shall be
measured by dial micrometer.
b) Before sand blasting is started or during blasting or coating, temperature

of the pipe surface should be more than 3C above dew point
temperature. Blast cleaned surface should be primed within 4 hours and
shall be protected from rainfall or surface moisture and shall not be
allowed to flash rust. If the rust occurs, the surface again to be prepared
by sand blasting or wire brushing.
5.02.00 Application of Epoxy Coating

a) Coating shall be applied when
i) When the pipe surface temperature shall be atleast 3C above dew point
temperature.
ii) The temperature of mixed coating material and the pipe at the time of
application shall not be lower than 10C or greater that 50C.
b) Material preparation shall be in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations.
c) Application of epoxy coating system :
The epoxy coating system shall be applied as per recommendation of the

manufacturer and shall be applied by airless spray / plural component spray
machine. For more than one coat, the second shall be applied with the time
limits as recommended by the manufacturer.
5.03.00 Application of PU Coating

Page 317 of 630


a) PU coating shall be applied when the pipe surface temperature atleast 3C

above dew point temperature (when R.H is more than 85%).
b) Material preparation and application shall be done as per manufacturer

recommendation.
6.00.00 TEST REQUIREMENTS :
6.01.00 Measurement of dry film thickness
Measurement of dry film thickness of coating : Coating thickness shall be in the

range of 20% and as per SSPC PA 2.
6.01.01 Apparatus / Instrument:-
The instrument used for dry film thickness may be Type 1 pull of gauges or Type
2 electronic gauges.
6.01.02 Procedures:-
a) Number of measurements:
For 100 square feet (9.29 square meters), five (5) spots per test area (each
spot is 3.8 cm) in diameter. Three gauge readings per spot (average
becomes the spot measurement).
b) If the structure is less than 300 square feet, each 100 square feet should be
measured.
c) If the structure is between 300 and 1000 sq ft, select 3 random 100 square
feet test areas and measure.
d) For structure exceeding 1000 square feet, select 3 random 100 square feet
testing areas for the first 1000 sq ft and select 1 random 100 square feet
testing area for each additional 1000 square feet
e) Coating thickness Tolerance: Individual reading taken to get a representative

measurement for the spot are unrestricted (usually low or high readings are
discarded). Spot measurements (the average of 3 gauge readings) must be
within 80% of the minimum thickness and 120% of the maximum thickness.
Area measurement must be within specified range.
6.02.00 Electrical Inspection (Holiday) Test

Page 318 of 630


6.02.01 All the coated / lined pipes shall be tested with an approved high voltage holiday
detector preferably equipped with an audio visual signaling device to indicate any
faults, holes, breaks or conductive particles in the protective coating.
6.02.02 The applied output voltage of holiday detector shall have a spark discharge of
thickness equal to at least twice the thickness of the coating to assure adequate
inspection voltage and compensate for any variation in coating thickness. The
electrode shall be passed over the coated surface at approximately half the spark
discharge distance from the coated surface only one time at the rate of
approximately 10 to 20m/min. The edge effect shall be ignored. Excessive
voltage shall be avoided as it tends to induce holiday in the coated surface
thereby giving erroneous readings.
6.02.03 While selecting test voltages, consideration should be given to the tolerance on
coating thickness and voltage should be selected on the basis of maximum
coating thickness likely to be encountered during testing of a particular pipe.
The testing voltage shall be calculated by using following formula. (as per NACE
0274 : 2004)
Testing Voltage V = 7900 T 10 percent where T is the average coating

thickness in mm.
6.02.04 Any audio visual sound or spark leads to indicate pinhole, break or conductive
particle.
6.03.00 Adhesion Pull off Test :

After holiday the coated surface is subjected to adhesion pull off test as per
ASTMD 4541.
6.03.01 Apparatus / Instrument: Adhesion tester consists of three basic components:
A hand wheel, a black column containing a dragging indicator pin and scale in
the middle and a base containing three legs and a pulling Jaw at the bottom
and also dollies.
6.03.02 Prepare the test surface :
Once test area is selected, test area shall be free of grease, oil, dirt, water. The
area should be flat surfaces and large enough to accommodate the specified
number of replicate test.
6.03.03 Prepare Dolly (Test Pull Stub) :

Page 319 of 630


The dolly is a round, two sided aluminium fixture. Both sides of the dolly looks
same, however, one side sloped on top surface while flat on bottom surface. As
the surface of the dolly is polished aluminium, roughen the same using a coarse
sand paper.
6.03.04 Select an adhesive:
Use araldite, a 100% solid epoxy adhesive. This adhesive requires at least 24
hours at room temperature to cure.
6.03.05 Attach the dolly to the surface.
a) Using a wooden stick, apply an even layer of adhesive to the entire contact
surface area of the dolly.
b) Carefully remove the excessive adhesive by using a cotton swab. Allow the
adhesive to fully cure before performing the adhesion test.
c) Attach the dolly to the coated surface and gently push downward to displace
any excessive adhesive.
d) Push the dolly inward against the surface, then apply tape across the head
of the dolly.
6.03.06 Adhesion Test Procedure

a) Attach the adhesion tester to the dolly by rotating the hand wheel counter
clockwise to lower the jaw of the device.
b) Slide the jaw completely under the head of the dolly. Position the three legs
of the instruments so that they are sitting flat on the coated surface.
c) Slide the dragging indicator pin on the black column to zero by pushing it
downward.
d) Firmly hold the base of the instrument in one hand and rotate the handwheel
clockwise to raise the jaw of the device that is attached to the head of the
dolly. The dragging indicator pin will move upward on the black column as
the force is increased and will hold the reading. Apply the tension using a
moderate speed. Continue to increase the tension on the head of the dolly
until (a) the minimum PSI/MPa/Kg/cm required by project specification is
exceeded and the test is discontinued, (b) the maximum PSI/MPa/Kg/cm of
adhesion tester has been achieved and dolly is still attached, (c) The force
applied by the adhesion tester causes the dolly to dislodge.

Page 320 of 630


e) Read the scale and record the adhesion value.
6.04.00 Coating Repair
Defective Coating shall be repaired in accordance with the following subsections.
6.04.01 Surface Preparation:
Accessible areas of pipe requiring coating repairs shall be cleaned to remove

debris and damaged coating using surface grinders or other means. The
adjacent coating shall be feathered by sanding, grinding or other method.
Accumulated debris shall be removed by blowing with contaminant free air or
wiping with clean rags.
6.04.02 Areas not accessible for coating repair such as interior surfaces of small
diameter pipe shall be reprocessed and recoated.
6.04.03 Coating Application :
The coating system shall be applied to the prepared areas in accordance with
procedure.
6.04.04 Repair Inspection :
Repaired portion shall be electrically inspected using a holiday detector.
6.05.00 Welded Field Joints
6.05.01 Preparation :
The weld joints shall be cleaned so as to be free from mud, oil, grease, welding
flux, weld spatter and other foreign contaminants. The cleaned metal surfaces of
the weld joint shall then be blasted or abraded using rotary abrading pads. The
adjacent liquid Epoxy / PU coating shall be feathered by abrading the coating
surface for a distance of 25 mm.
6.05.02 Electrical Inspection :
After curing the coating system applied to the welding joints shall be holiday
tested. Any holidays indicated by the detector shall be marked with chalk to
identify the area of repair.
Page 321 of 630


7.00.00 INFORMATION/DATA REQUIRED
The Bidder shall submit complete list of paints and primers proposed, giving
detail information, such as, chemical composition, drying time etc. and also unit
rates for application of each type of paint along with supply shall be furnished.

Page 322 of 630

VOLUME : IIIB
GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
PLANT WATER SYSTEM & POTABLE
PLANT WATER SYSTEM WATER PUMPS
Page 323 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 INTRODUCTION
4.00.00 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
5.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
7.00.00 CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION
9.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, CURVES AND INFORMATION
ATTACHMENT
ANNEXURE-I RECOMMENDED VELOCITY CHART FOR PIPE SIZING
ANNEXURE-II DATASHEET FOR HORIZONTAL PUMPS
ANNEXURE-III DATASHEET FOR VERTICAL PUMPS
Page 324 of 630

VOLUME : IIIB
FOR
PLANT WATER SYSTEM
1.00.00 INTRODUCTION
This section presents the general description, basic design criteria and
performance requirements, broad scope of supply and Instrumentation &
Control of the following Plant water systems to be provided for 1x800 MW
Kothagudem Thermal Power Station (KTPS), Stage-VII, Unit-12 would be set
up by Telangana State Power Generation Corporation Ltd. (TSGENCO) at
Kothagudem, Telangana.
1.01.00 Raw Water Transportation System
1.02.00 Clarified Water Transportation System
1.03.00 DM Water Transportation System
Consumptive water for 1x800 MW Kothagudem Thermal Power Station

(KTPS), Stage-VII, Unit-12, will be made available by pumping from Godavari
river water though existing pump house located at Burgumpahad and existing
GRP pipe line to Plant raw water reservoir of capacity 150000 m which is
sufficient for 3 days. The existing GRP pipe line passing through the new
plant area will be re routed using MS pipe line by TSGENCO. Tentative
alignment proposal will be finalised by TSGENCO. TSGENCO shall take care
of re-routing the same during detail engineering. Inside diameter of GRP pipe
line is 1200 mm. New MS pipe used shall be of same diameter of 10 mm
thick. The approximate length of GRP pipe to be replaced is 1.50 KM and the
length of new proposed MS line which will be finalized during detailed
engineering to avoid fouling will be of approximate 2KM length.
River raw water will be utilized to produce clarified water through clarifier.
Finally clarified water will be stored in the Clarified water storage tank.
Clarified water will be used as cooling water for main turbine condenser and
the auxiliary cooling water system and its make-up, DMF input, Potable Water
Treatment Plant input. It shall also be used make-up water for AC and
Ventilation and other misc. purpose.
Total River raw water requirement is estimated at about 2192 cum/hr and
total clarified water requirement is estimated as 2189 cum/hr. The water
Balance Diagram is shown in Drg. No. 13A06-DWG-M-001Q. The scheme for
Plant water System is presented in Drg. No. 13A06-DWG-M-001R.
Page 325 of 630

Raw water will be pumped through 3 (2W+1S) 1350 cu.m/hr capacity

vertical pumps to clariflocculator. After pre-treatment, clarified water will
be stored in the clarified water storage tank. A tap off line shall be
taken from raw water pump main discharge header for ash water
sump. This line shall be used for first 1-2 years after plant commissioning,
after getting recycled ash water from ash pond; this line may be used
intermittently as per system requirement.
The pump house shall be constructed and sized by the contractor as per
stipulation of BHRA and Hydraulic Institute, which is subject to approval of
Owner/Consultant during detail engineering stage. MCC/Control Room for the
pumping station shall be suitably located adjacent to the pump house. Raw
water pump house shall be made with balancing chamber.
2.02.00 Clarified Water (CLW) Transportation System
The clarified water from discharge of clarifier will be stored in Clarified water
storage tank.
The Clarified water system shall cater the following services:
i) Cooling Tower make-up
ii) Service water
iii) DMF Plant
iv) Drinking/ Potable water
v) APH/ESP wash
2.02.01 Cooling Tower Make-up
Clarified water will be transferred to the Cooling water (CW) system for
Cooling Tower make up from Clarified water storage tank by means of Two
(2) numbers (one working & one stand by) vertical centrifugal type CT make-
up pumps.
2.02.02 Service water
Two (2) - (1 working + 1 standby) 100% capacity adequate head service

water pumps of vertical type to supply clarified water to service water
distribution network all over the plant building through a minimum 300 cum
capacity RCC overhead tank suitably located at a suitable height in the Power
Plant. Each pump capacity shall be of capacity 160 M3/hr. Service water
system shall cater the following services:
i) Quenching water for unit flash tank and MRH system
ii) Seal water in vacuum pump house, ash slurry pump house and clinker
grinder seals
Page 326 of 630

iii) AC make-up in ESP control room building and turbine building
iv) Service water for chemical house
v) Service water for plant building washing and toilets
vi) Fire water
2.02.03 Drinking water/ Potable water
Two (2) (1 working + 1 standby) 100% capacity water pumps sets of

horizontal type for supplying drinking water/ potable water after filtration
through dual media filter (DMF) & chlorination. This pump shall be installed
near DMF plant. Dringking water/ potable water shall be stored in the over
head potable water tank of 50 cum capacity.
2.02.04 AHP/ESP Wash
Two (2) (1 working + 1 standby) 100% capacity service water pumps of

vertical type to supply clarified water to AHP/ESP WASH region each of
capacity 155 M3/hr.
2.02.05 DMF Feed pump
Three (3) nos. adequate capacity DMF feed pumps of vertical type to supply
clarified water to dual media filter (DMF). For detail refer to Volume-IIIC,
Section-1.
2.03.00 Demineralised Water (DMW) Transportation System
DM water from DM plant will be stored in the DM water storage tank located
in the DM plant area. The DM Water Transportation System shall convey DM
water from DM water Storage Tanks by means of two numbers (one working
& one stand by) horizontal centrifugal type DM water Transfer Pumps to the
Condensate Storage Tanks for meeting cycle make up and other
requirements. DM water transfer pumps are placed in the vicinity of DM water
storage tanks. Condensate storage tanks are located close to boiler area.
3.01.00 The design, manufacture and performance of the pumps as specified

hereinafter, shall comply with the requirements of the following codes and
standards and shall include all its latest amendments subsequent to the year
of publication as mentioned below. In addition, to the following codes and
standards, other applicable codes of practice as mentioned in Volume: IIA of
this specification shall also be applicable.
3.01.01 IS-6595 : Horizontal Centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh
Part-2 water (General purpose).
3.01.01 IS-1710 : Vertical Turbine Pumps for Clear, Cold and Fresh
Water.
Page 327 of 630

3.01.02 IS-5120 : Technical requirements - Rotodynamic special purpose

pumps.
3.01.03 IS-5639 : Pumps for handling chemicals and corrosive liquids.
3.01.04 IS-5659 : Pumps for process water.
3.01.05 IS-6536 : Pumps handling volatile liquids.
3.01.06 IS-9137 : Code for acceptance for centrifugal, mixed flow and
axial flow pumps - Class `C'.
3.01.07 BS EN ISO : Acceptance tests for Centrifugal, mixed flow and

9906 : 2000 axial flow pumps - Class 'C' Tests.
3.01.08 BS EN ISO : Acceptance tests for Centrifugal, mixed flow and

9906 : 2000 axial flow pumps - Class 'B' Tests.
3.01.09 ANSI B 73.2M : Vertical inline centrifugal pumps for chemical process.
3.01.10 API 610 : Centrifugal pumps for general refinery services.
3.01.11 Hydraulic Institute Standards of USA.
3.01.12 PTC 8.2 : Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps.
3.01.13 Other accepted International Standards such as DIN/JIS/GOST etc. which

may be equivalent or superior to those specified above.
3.02.00 In case of any contradiction between the above standards and this section
with its annexures, the stipulations in this section and annexures shall prevail
and shall be binding to the Contractor.
4.00.00 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The broad scope of supply in Plant water System shall be as below. Items not
specifically mentioned but deemed necessary to make the systems and
sub-systems completely reliable and efficient shall also be included. For
detailed scope of supply, respective sections enclosed hereinafter shall be
referred to.
Raw Water Transportation system consist followings:

a) Raw water pump house. Raw water pump house shall be made with
balancing chamber.
b) Three (3) vertical Raw water Pumps complete with electric motor
drives and all other accessories as specified in this section and in the
annexure attached herewith.
c) Isolation gates for pump house and isolation gates as required for
Page 328 of 630

each pump sump.
d) Fixed screens as required for each pump sump.
e) Electric overhead traveling crane.
4.02.00 Clarified Water Transportation System
Clarified Water from Clarified water reservoir and from reservoir to various
consumption points.
a) Clarified water reservoir comprising of two (2) compartments. The

reservoir shall be overground and covered type. Capacity of the
reservoir shall be finalized by the Bidder.
b) Clarified water pump house on the Clarified water reservoir.
c) Two (2) vertical centrifugal type cooling tower make-up pumps

complete with electric motor drives and all other accessories as
specified in this section and in the annexure attached herewith.
d) Three (3) nos. adequate capacity DMF feed pumps of vertical type to
supply clarified water to dual media filter (DMF). For detail refer to
Volume-IIIC, Section-1.
e) Two (2) vertical centrifugal type service water pumps complete with
electric motor drives and all other accessories as specified in this
section and in the annexure attached herewith.
f) Two (2) horizontal centrifugal type potable water pumps complete with
g) Two (2) vertical centrifugal type APH/ ESP pumps complete with
h) One (1) no. service water RCC over head tank of minimum capacity of
300 m3 and One (1) no. potable water tank of minimum capacity of 50
m3.
i) Overhead traveling crane. Two (2) Under-slung type.
4.03.00 Demineralised Water Transportation System
a) Two (2) nos. Demineralised water Storage Tanks of minimum capacity

of 2000 m3 of each tank.
b) Two (2) Horizontal centrifugal Pumps to supply DM water to

Condensate storage tank.
c) One (1) no. Condensate Storage Tank of min. capacity of 1000 m3.
Page 329 of 630

d) Monorail and Hoist.
4.04.00 All interconnecting piping in plant water system and fabricated steel tanks
complete with valves, fittings, instruments and all other accessories as
represented in enclosed Flow diagrams and as per Section-IV and Section-V
of Volume IIIE.
4.05.00 All electrical equipment and accessories as required for this system shall be
supplied. These equipment and accessories shall meet the technical
requirements of individual equipment specification covered under Electrical
Equipment & Accessories - Volume V of this Bid Document.
4.06.00 For general guidelines regarding detailed scope of works and services
Volume-II-A of this specification shall be referred to.
4.07.00 All instruments and central systems (Volume-VI) for efficient and reliable
operation of the plant.
4.08.00 Any other Horizontal Centrifugal pumps complete with electric motor drives
and all other accessories, if included by the Bidder within the scope of Plant
Water System package.
4.09.00 Any other Vertical pumps complete with electric motor drives and all other
accessories, if included by the Bidder within the scope of Plant Water System
package.
5.00.00 GENERAL DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
5.01.00 All the Water Transportation Systems described shall be capable of

conveying their rated capacities as per pipe sizing criteria specified in
Annexure-I of this section.
5.02.00 Pipe sizes unless specified otherwise shall be selected by the Bidder based
on optimization studies. The procedure and results of the optimization studies
shall be furnished by the Bidder as part of his Bid proposal. However, for the
purpose of such pipe sizing, recommended velocities at pump suction and
discharge will be guided by the velocity chart in Annexure-I of this section.
Unless otherwise specified, manufacturer shall provide standard pipes in

respect of size, in all services covered under this specification.
5.03.00 All piping and related accessories shall be designed to withstand a pressure
not less than the shut off head of the respective system pumps.
Bidder shall also conduct water hammer analysis of the piping systems in
different transient conditions such as closure of valves, tripping of pumps etc.
Bidder shall also consider such transient pressure surges in designing of the
piping systems. The procedure and results of water hammer analysis shall be
furnished to purchaser for his information and approval.
5.04.00 CT make up water pipes shall be designed for maximum surface temperature
of 50 Deg.C and minimum surface temperature of 3 Deg.C. These pipes shall
be laid underground.
Page 330 of 630

5.05.00 Following valves, fittings and appurtenances shall be provided by the Bidder
as minimum requirement for each of the pumping systems, as applicable:
a) Motorized discharge butterfly valves, quick closing power packed

check valve, gate valves/check valves as required for respective
pumps.
b) Anti-vacuum Valve - This shall serve the function of air release and air
inlet.
c) Air Cushion Valve - These valves will admit air in the pipeline and
prevent any partial vacuum near the pumps.
d) Isolating butterfly valves shall be provided at suitable intervals and at

suitable locations to isolate a particular section of pipeline for
maintenance which will be mutually decided by Owner/Consultant and
contractor during detail engineering stage.
e) Scour or drain valves of suitable size at suitable locations for

adequate drainage of pipelines.
f) Thrust blocks and expansion joints/loops at suitable locations.
g) Pipe supports/racks complete with all accessories, as specified.
h) Any other accessories as required for safe and reliable operation of

respective pumping system.
Bidder shall furnish a write up, adequately substantiating the use of the above
appurtenances, as per applicability, in each water transportation system.
5.06.00 Butterfly valve design pressure and opening/closing time shall take into
account all effects of water hammering and surge
5.07.00 The total dynamic head (TDH) of all pumps shall be obtained by conducting
detailed system resistance calculations. Bidder shall furnish these
calculations and system resistance curves superimposed on pump
characteristic curves alongwith his Bid proposal. However, actual TDH shall
be finalized by the bidder and following general guidelines shall be adhered to
by the Bidder towards computation of same.
a) Static head in each pumping system shall generally be obtained by

considering the minimum suction level and maximum discharge point
elevation. It shall also take into account all the highest levels
encountered in the route.
b) Frictional losses in pipes shall be calculated based on pumping

capacity as specified in Annexure-II, assuming C = 120 on Hazen and
Williams Formula for design purpose. A minimum of ten (10) percent
margin shall be provided over and above the calculated frictional
losses.
Page 331 of 630

5.08.00 Pumps shall preferably be designed to have the best efficiency at the
specified duty point. The pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at
any point within the "Range of Operation" as stipulated in the annexure-II and
annexure-III attached with this section.
5.09.00 Pumps shall preferably have a continuously rising head-capacity

characteristics from the specified duty point towards shut-off point, the
maximum being at shut-off to enable parallel operation.
Under all circumstances, the "range of operation" of the pumps shall exclude
any unstable operating zone of the head - capacity curve.
5.10.00 Wherever specified in the annexure attached herewith pumps of each

category shall be suitable for parallel operation. The head vs. capacity, the
BHP vs. capacity characteristics etc. shall be identical to ensure equal load
sharing and trouble-free operation of any pump when the other pumps
working in parallel with it trip.
5.11.00 The pump set along with the drive motor shall run smooth without undue
noise and vibration. Acceptable peak to peak vibration limits shall be
generally guided by the Hydraulic Institute Standards of USA.
5.12.00 Clarified water reservoir shall be overground and covered and shall consist of
two (2) compartments. The reservoir shall have adequate capacity
considering the following:
i. Eight (8) hours clarified water requirement for complete plant,

equipments and systems.
5.13.00 All pump houses accommodating vertical wet pit pumps shall be designed by
the Bidder in accordance with the following layout criteria as generally
specified below:
a) The pump sumps in each respective pump house shall be designed in

strict conformance to the recommendations of Hydraulic Institute
(USA)/British Hydraulic Research Association/equivalent standards.
Dimension of sump shall be substantiated by the Bidder in his Bid
Proposal.
b) If there is an intake fore bay at the entry to any of the pump houses,
the angle of inclination of the side walls of the fore bay with the
direction of water flow shall not exceed twenty (20) degrees under any
circumstances.
c) If not specified elsewhere in this specification, the minimum water

level of a particular sump shall be guided by the minimum
submergence required by the respective pumps. The highest water
level in a sump shall be such as to ensure a minimum clearance of
300 mm below the lowest concreted portion of the floor in the pump
house. Under all circumstances, the net positive suction head
available shall be sufficiently greater than the net positive suction
head required, by each pump.
Page 332 of 630

d) Adequate provision shall be made in each of the pump sumps so as to

facilitate insertion of isolation gates as and when required. Gates shall
be fabricated of mild steel, shall be of watertight type and shall
preferably be of identical size/dimensions to facilitate
interchangeability. Sump gates shall generally be accessible by the
pump house overhead crane.
e) The respective pump house shall also accommodate the following

equipment/facilities, as applicable.
i. All auxiliary equipment related to pump sets such as discharge

piping complete with valves and specialties, electric motor drives
etc.
ii. Ventilation system for the entire pump house.
iii. Separate bays for unloading and maintenance.
iv. All necessary electrical equipment and accessories as required for

this system.
v. Overhead Crane complete with all accessories, as specified in

Volume-IIIF,, Section-II of this specification.
vi. Sump pumps, as specified in Volume-IIIF, Section-I of this

specification.
vii. Fixed Screens and accessories located suitably.
viii. Necessary toilets and operator's cabins with drinking water facility.
f) Other general layout criteria as specified in Volume IIA of this

specification shall also be adhered to while designing the pump
house.
5.14.00 All Horizontal and Vertical Pumps of Plant Water System shall have 10%
margin on capacity and 20% margin on Total Dynamic Head.
6.01.00 Horizontal Pumps
6.01.01 Pump Casing
Pump casing shall be provided with adequate number of vents and priming
connections with valves unless the pump is made self- venting and priming.
Casing drain, as required, shall be provided complete with drain valves.
Pump design must ensure that the nozzles are capable of withstanding
external reactions not less than those specified in API-610.
In cases where an expansion joint is located at pump discharge, the pump

assembly will be subjected to an additional thrust which will be transmitted to
Page 333 of 630

the foundation. This additional thrust shall be taken into consideration during
pump design.
6.01.02 Impeller
The rotor assembly shall be dynamically balanced and designed with critical
speed substantially above the operating speed.
6.01.03 Wearing Rings
Replaceable type wearing rings shall be furnished to prevent damage to

impeller and casing.
6.01.04 Shaft
Shaft size shall be selected considering that the critical speed shall be away
from the operating speed as recommended in applicable Code/Standard. The
critical speed shall also be at least 10% away from runaway speed.
Renewable type fine finished shaft sleeves shall be provided at the stuffing
boxes/mechanical seals. Length of the shaft sleeves must extend beyond the
other faces of gland packing or seal end plate so as to distinguish between
the leakage past shaft and shaft sleeve and that past the seals/glands.
Shaft sleeves shall be properly fastened to the shaft to prevent any leakage
or loosening. Shaft and shaft sleeve assembly should ensure concentric
rotation.
6.01.06 Bearings
Bearings shall be easily accessible without disturbing the pump assembly. A

drain plug shall be provided at the bottom of each bearing housing.
Heavy duty sleeve/ball/roller type bearings shall be provided to take care of

the radial loads.
In case of sleeve type radial bearings, axial thrust shall be absorbed in

suitable hydraulic devices and/or thrust bearings.
Bearings and hydraulic devices (if provided for balancing axial thrust) shall be
of adequate design for taking the entire pump load arising from all probable
conditions of continuous operation. Life of the bearings shall be guided by the
design standard of the pump. Thrust bearing shall be capable of running
continuously at maximum load.
6.01.07 The bearings shall be oil/grease lubricated. Suitable lubricating arrangement

for the bearings shall be furnished with the pump complete with all
accessories like pump, filters, pipings, fittings, valves, interlocking and
supervising instruments etc. as necessary. The design shall be such that the
bearing lubricant does not contaminate the liquid being pumped.
Page 334 of 630

6.01.08 Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing box design shall permit replacement of packing without removing any
part other than the gland.
Stuffing boxes shall be sealed/cooled by the fluid being pumped. All

necessary pumps, piping, fittings, valves, instruments etc. as required for safe
and trouble-free operation of the pumps shall be included in the scope of
supply.
6.01.09 Mechanical Seals
Mechanical seals shall be provided if specified in the Annexure attached with

this section. The pump supplier shall co-ordinate with the seal maker in
establishing the circulation rate for maintaining a stable film at the seal face in
the chamber. The seal piping system shall form an integral part of the pump
assembly.
For the seals under vacuum service, the seal design must ensure sealing
against atmospheric pressure, even when the pumps are not operating.
6.01.10 Drive Unit
The pumps shall be driven by electric motor directly coupled. A heavy duty
flexible coupling along with coupling guard shall be provided between the
pump and drive unit. For details regarding specification of drive unit Volume-V
of this specification will be referred.
Unless otherwise specified drive unit power rating shall be the maximum of
the following requirements.
a) 15% (for LT motor) or 10% (for HT motor) margin over the pump shaft
input power at the rated duty point.
b) 5% margin over the maximum pump shaft input power required within
the "Range of Operation".
c) Pump shaft input power required considering the overloading of the
pump assuming single pump operation in the event of tripping of one
or more of the pumps operating in parallel.
6.02.00 Vertical Pumps
Pumps shall be of vertical shaft, complete with bowl, column pipe, discharge
head and base plate with all accessories, as applicable. General design and
constructional features of the pumps shall be as follows:
6.02.01 Bowl Assembly
This will be either a single or multi-stage centrifugal, mixed flow or axial flow
type with discharge co-axial with shaft. Type of impeller shall be chosen on
the basis of the pump specific speed and the characteristics of the handling
fluid.
Pump(s) shall have provision for adjustment of impellers in vertical direction
Page 335 of 630

from an accessible location, preferably at the housing (where separate thrust

bearing for the pump is provided). The adjustment mechanism must take into
consideration the extension of the line shaft due to hydraulic down thrust,
weight of the shaft and impeller.
6.02.02 Discharge Head
Pump(s) shall be either above floor or below floor discharge type, as specified
in the annexure, attached to this section.
In case, expansion joint is to be used at the pump discharge, pump base

plate shall either be adequately designed to take the unbalanced forces and
moments from the use of such expansion joint or a separate thrust block at
the pump discharge head shall be provided to transmit these forces to the
external supporting structure. Calculation of thrust load shall be done
considering the highest pressure seen by the pump and internal diameter of
the arch of the expansion bellow.
6.02.03 Column pipe
Column pipe shall be flanged and of bolted connection. Column pipes shall be
designed for full internal vacuum.
In case the annexure ask for the pump with below floor discharge, and the
water level is at or above the discharge valve level, the column pipe piece
located at the intermediate floor level shall be provided with suitable floor
sealing device.
In case of multi-piece column pipe and shaft assembly, the design shall
permit raising/lowering of the pump assembly piece by piece without any
difficulty. Any fixtures, clamps, etc. necessary for such purpose shall be
supplied by the Contractor under this section. The Contractor shall also
submit a write-up describing clearly the procedure of handling the pump.
6.02.04 Impeller shaft, line shaft and head shaft
Shaft size shall be selected on the basis of maximum torque to be applied on

the pump shaft.
Critical speed of the shaft shall be sufficiently away from the pump operating
speed and in no case shall lie between 90% and 110% of the rated speed.
Impeller shaft shall be guided by bearings provided in each bowl or above

and below the impeller shaft assembly. The butting faces of the shaft shall be
machined square to the assembly and the shaft shall be chamfered at the
edges.
Line shaft may be of single or multiple pieces as required. In case of multiple

pieces, line shaft shall be coupled as per the standard practice of the
manufacturer.
For screwed coupling, screw directions shall permit tightening of the joint
during pump operation.
Page 336 of 630

Replaceable shaft sleeves shall be furnished at applicable locations,

particularly under stuffing box and at other locations, as considered
necessary.
6.02.05 Shaft enclosing tube
Shaft enclosing tube shall be required, unless self lubricated (and cooled)
type of shaft bearings are asked for. Length of the shaft enclosing tube shall
be in conformity with the shaft piece lengths.
6.02.06 Seal rings
Replaceable seal/wear rings both on impeller and on casing shall be provided

in case it is asked for in the annexure.
6.02.07 Bearings
a) Shaft bearings
Adequate number of properly designed bearings shall be provided for

smooth and trouble-free operation of the pump. Number of bearings
shall consider the number of shaft pieces used and the critical speed
of the shaft. Bearings shall be either lubricated by external clear
water/oil/grease or self lubricated as specified in the Annexure.
In case of external water/oil lubrication, complete lubrication

arrangement shall be furnished with the pump. If the annexure calls
for pre-lubrication of the shaft bearings, pre-lubrication tank and other
accessories shall be within the scope of supply of the Bidder/
Contractor.
b) Thrust Bearing
Thrust bearing of adequate size and capacity shall be provided to take

the vertical thrust of the impeller arising out of the pump operation and
dead weight of the rotating components. Life of the thrust bearing
shall be guided by the design standard of the pump. Thrust bearing
shall be capable of running continuously at maximum load.
Thrust bearings shall be either grease or oil lubricated. Lubrication

arrangement shall be such that the lubricant does not contaminate the
handling fluid. The arrangement shall also be adequate to protect the
bearing, while the pump coast down to stop in case of power failure of
the station. Pre-lubrication of the thrust bearing, if recommended by
the pump manufacturer, shall be taken care of in designing the
lubrication system.
Cooling of the thrust bearing if necessary, shall be done by the

handling fluid/external water, depending on the fluid handled.
Location of the thrust bearing may be at the pump body or at the

driver, or at both depending on the requirement of annexure or as per
Page 337 of 630

the recommendation of the pump manufacturer (and approved by

Purchaser).
6.02.08 Reverse Rotation
Following provision shall be provided to prevent damage due to reverse

rotation of the pump motor assembly:
1. Non reversible ratchet mechanism
2. Necessary switch to detect reverse rotation will be provided to prevent

motor switching ON while rotating in reverse direction. Alarm will be
provided in owners TFT based monitor.
6.02.09 Drive Unit
a) The pump will be driven by electric motor.
A heavy duty coupling shall be provided between the drive unit and
the driven equipment (except for belt drive).
b) Unless otherwise specified in annexure, drive element power rating

shall be the maximum of the following requirements.
i. 15% (for LT motor) or 10% (for HT motor) margin over the pump
shaft input power at the rated working condition.
ii. 5% margin over the maximum pump shaft input power required
within its operating range including the shut off point.
iii. Pump shaft input power required considering overloading of the

pump assuming single pump operation in the event of tripping of
the other pump(s) operating in parallel.
c) The drive equipment shall preferably be air cooled. In case the

pumping fluid is water, free of abrasive and corrosive matter, the same
can be used for cooling purpose. The arrangement shall be within the
scope of the equipment supplier.
6.03.00 For design and construction of piping, Section-IV and Section-V of Volume
IIIE shall be referred to.
6.04.00 For design and construction of tanks, Section-IV of Volume IIIE of this volume
shall be referred to.
6.05.00 For design and construction of reservoirs, Volume-VII shall be referred to.
Page 338 of 630

7.00.00 CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION
Complete instrumentation and control system including all accessories shall

be provided for safe, reliable and trouble-free operation of the plant. For
details Bidder shall refer to volume VI, Specification for Controls &
Instrumentation.
8.01.00 The Contractor shall carry out the following specific tests and inspections to
ensure that the equipment furnished shall conform to the requirements of this
section and in accordance with relevant codes and standards. Test
certificates for all tests shall be submitted to the Owner for approval.
8.02.01 Material Identification and Testing
i) All materials used for pump construction shall be of tested quality.

Material shall be tested as per the relevant standards. Components on
which material test has been done shall be stamped for identification.
ii) Tests for each pump included under this section shall also include but
shall not be limited to the following:
x The entire surface of the impeller castings shall be subjected to Dye

Penetration Test as per ASTM Specification no.: E165-65.
x Shaft shall be subjected to Dye Penetration and Ultrasonic Tests.
x Wearing rings shall be subjected to Dye Penetration Test.
x Verification of material, witnessing of pouring, casting and inspection

of finalised fabricated/cast castings.
x Inspection of finished castings for impeller and verification of

materials.
x Inspection of pump shaft and verification of material.
x Witnessing of NDT/review of NDT reports.
x Static balancing test for impeller and dynamic balancing of complete

rotating parts as per ISO- 1940.
x Complete inspection of assembled pump

.
8.02.02 Hydrostatic Testing
The pump casing and all other applicable pressure parts shall be
hydrostatically tested at 150% of the pump shut-off pressure. Pressure shall
be maintained for a period of not less than one (1) hour. While arriving at the
Page 339 of 630

above values maximum suction pressure shall be taken into account.
8.02.03 Dynamic Balancing
All rotating components shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

Dynamic balancing tests shall be carried out at a speed not less than the
rated rpm of the pump. Test procedure and acceptance limits shall be guided
by the relevant testing codes and standards.
8.02.04 Performance Test at Shop
i) Each pump shall have to be tested to determine the performance curves

of the pumps. These tests are to be conducted in presence of
Purchaser's representative as per the requirements of the Standards of
Hydraulic Institute of USA (ASME-Power Test Code PTC 8.2/BS EN ISO
9906) or any other equivalent standard but the tolerances on head,
discharge and power shall be as specified in HIS, USA. Prior to
performance test, the pump supplier shall furnish the procedures and
methods of testing to the Purchaser for approval.
ii) Performance tests are to be conducted to cover the entire range of

operation of the pumps. These shall be carried out to span 130% of rated
capacity upto pump shut-off condition. A minimum of five combinations of
head and capacity are to be achieved during testing to establish the
performance curves, including the design capacity point, shut-off point
and the two extremities of the range of operation as specified in the
annexure. After completion of performance test, all pumps shall be
stripped down for inspection of internals.
iii) Tests shall be conducted at the rated rpm.
Mechanical run test shall be carried out on all pumps to determine the
vibration levels, noise levels etc. This test shall be conducted at site also.
However, test value at site shall be used for the acceptance of the equipment.
8.03.01 Material Identification and Testing
i) Material identification and testing shall include, but shall not be limited to
the following components :
x Bowls and suction bells.
x Impeller and wearing rings.
x Shafts and shaft sleeves.
x Couplings.
x Bearings.
x Column pipes.
Page 340 of 630

x Discharge heads.
x Bowl Assembly.
x Any other components in the pump assembly.
ii) Tests shall also include but shall not be limited to the following:
x The entire surface of the impeller castings shall be subjected to Dye

Penetration Test as per ASTM-E-165.
x Shaft shall be subject to Dye penetration and Ultrasonic test.
x Wearing rings shall be subjected to Dye Penetration Test.
x Witnessing of NDT/review of NDT reports.
x Static balancing test for impeller and dynamic balancing of complete

rotating parts as per ISO-1940.
x Complete inspection of assembled pump.
8.03.02 Dynamic Balancing
Rotating components of the pump shall be statically and dynamically

balanced. Dynamic balancing tests shall be carried out for the impeller at a
speed not less than the rated rpm of the pump. Test procedure and
acceptance limits shall be guided by the relevant testing codes and
standards.
8.03.03 Hydrostatic Testing
Hydrostatic test shall be done for the following components (as minimum) at
150% of shut-off pressure. Pressure shall be maintained for a period of not
less than one (1) hour. While arriving at the above values, maximum suction
pressure shall be taken into account.
x Bowls/Suction bells.
x Column pipe.
x Discharge head.
x Any other applicable pressure parts.
8.03.04 Performance Test at Shop
i) Each pump shall have to be tested to determine its performance curves.

These tests are to be conducted in presence of Purchaser's
representative as per the requirements of the Standards of Hydraulic
Institute of USA (ASME-Power Test Code PTC 8.2/BS-599) or any other
equivalent standard but the tolerances on head, discharge and power
shall be as specified in HIS, USA.
Page 341 of 630

ii) Performance tests are to be conducted to cover the entire range of

operation of the pumps. These shall be carried out to span 130% of
rated capacity upto pump shut-off condition. A minimum of five (5)
combinations of head and capacity are to be achieved during testing to
establish the performance curves, including the design capacity point,
shut-off point and the two extremities of the range of operation specified.
After completion of performance test, all pumps shall be stripped down
for inspection of internals.
iii) Tests shall be conducted at the rated rpm.
iv) The Bidder shall submit in his proposal the facilities available at his
works to conduct performance testing.
v) Mechanical run test shall be carried out on all pumps to determine the
vibration levels, noise levels etc. This test shall be conducted at site
also. However, test value at site shall be used for the acceptance of the
equipment.
vi) Reports and test certificates of above tests shall be submitted to the
Purchaser for approval.
9.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA, CURVES AND INFORMATION
The Bidder shall submit the following along with his formal proposal besides
the different information plate required as indicated elsewhere in this
specification
9.01.00 Piping and instrumentation diagram of Plant water system.
9.02.00 General arrangement drawing of Jackwell pump house, raw water transfer
pump house, clarified water pump house.
9.03.00 General arrangement of clarified water reservoir.
9.04.00 General Arrangement drawing of service water, potable water tank, DM water
storage tank and condensate storage tank.
9.05.01 Drawings
a) General arrangement and outline drawings showing the principal

dimensions, weight and location of the suction and discharge
connections of the pumps offered. Details of lubrication and sealing
arrangement shall also be included.
b) Typical cross-section drawing showing various components of the

pumps offered, materials of construction etc.
9.05.02 Data and Curves
Page 342 of 630

a) Determination of pump total dynamic head at rated capacity as per

guidelines specified in Section-I of this Volume. Detailed calculations
for computing static head and frictional lossed shall be furnished by
the Bidder.
b) Anticipated performance curves showing the following characteristics:
i. Capacity vs. head

ii. Capacity vs. power
iii. Capacity vs. efficiency
iv. System resistance curves
c) Speed vs. torque curve of the pump corresponding to recommended

mode of pump starting superimposed on speed vs. torque curves of
the drive unit corresponding to 80%, 90%, 100% of the rated voltage
(applicable only in the cases of pumps with drive motor power rating of
100 KW and above).
d) Completely filled-in Technical Proposal Particulars enclosed under

Volume-IX of this specification.
e) Details of manufacturing and testing facilities in pump manufacturer's

works and illustrative literature regarding the pumps offered.
9.06.01 Drawings/Data
a) Determination of respective pump total dynamic head and capacity as

per guidelines of this specification. Detailed calculations for obtaining
static head and frictional losses shall be submitted by the Bidder.
b) Outline drawings of the pump showing the various dimensions, suction

and discharge locations.
c) Typical cross sectional drawing of the pump to be supplied, showing

various components, bearings, seal rings etc. and materials of
construction for all items.
d) Lubrication arrangement drawings for external lubrication.
9.06.02 Anticipated performance curves and test curves for:
a) Capacity Vs Head.
b) Capacity Vs. Power & Capacity Vs. Efficiency.
c) System resistance curves.
d) Speed Vs. torque requirement of the pump (for pump sets with drive
motor rating of 100 KW or more) together the drive motor
speed-torque characteristic.
Page 343 of 630

9.07.00 Completely filled up schedules enclosed under Volume-IX of this

specification.
9.08.00 Descriptive and illustrative literature regarding the pumps offered.
9.09.00 A comprehensive write-up or brochure regarding the details of manufacturing

and testing facilities in the shop of the manufacturer.
9.10.00 A write-up describing clearly the procedure for installing the pump with its
column pipe - piece by piece and also for overhauling the pump in a like
manner. A diagram showing the required pump house crane hook lift above
the pump operating floor has also to be furnished.
9.11.00 The successful Bidder shall furnish the following drawings/data/ manuals for
Purchaser/Engineer's approval after award of the contract.
9.11.01 Final versions of all the drawings, documents as specified in the clauses above.
9.11.02 Principal dimensions of the pump sump indicating clearance dimensions for
the suction bell from back wall and side walls, minimum submergence
required for the pump etc.
9.11.03 Pump foundation details along with all design loads with static and dynamic
loads, direction and points of application.
9.11.04 Pump and drive sealing, bearing lubrication and cooling arrangement
drawing.
9.11.05 Drive data.
9.11.06 Test reports, test certificates, performance curves and other particulars.
9.11.07 Instruction Manuals.
9.11.08 Any other applicable drawings and documents as specified in Volume-IIA of

this specification.
Page 344 of 630

ANNEXURE-I
RECOMMENDED VELOCITY CHART FOR PIPE SIZING
Velocity (M/Sec.) Velocity (M/Sec.) Velocity (M/Sec.)

Sl.
Description of pipe Pipe size Below Pipe size 50-150 Pipe size 200 mm
No.
50 mm mm & above
Pipeline at pump
1. - 1.2 1.5 1.2 1.8
suction for water
Pipeline at pump
2. 1.2 - 1.8 1.8 2.4 2.1 2.5
discharge for water
3. Header for water -- 1.5 2.4 1.8 - 2.4
Instrument air below

4. 15 - 20 20 - 30 25 - 35
2 Kg/Sq.cm (g)
Instrument air at
5. 2 Kg/Sq.cm (g) & 20 - 30 25 40 35 - 45
above
Page 345 of 630

ANNEXURE-II
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (PART-1)
Sl.
Description DM Transfer Pumps Drinking/ potable water Pumps
No.
1. Service DM Transfer Drinking/ potable water
2. Designation DM Transfer Pump Drinking/ potable water Pumps
3. Duty Continuous Intermittent
4. Location Outdoor Indoor
5. Number of Pumps required Two (2) Two (2)
6. Number of pumps working One (1) One (1)
7. Number of pumps standby One (1) One (1)
8. Number of pumps working in NA NA

parallel
9. Liquid handled DM Water Clarified Water
<------------------------- (For analysis refer Vol.IIA, Section-IX of this specification ) ----------------------------->
10. Design Temperature 50qC 50qC
11. Suction Lift/ Head available Flooded suction shall be ensured Flooded suction shall be ensured
(MLC)
Page 346 of 630

Sl.
No.
12. Pump Performance Requirements
a) Rated Capacity (Cu.m/hr) By Bidder By Bidder
b) Total Dynamic Head as per By Bidder By Bidder

IS-5120 at Rated Capacity
(MLC)
c) Rated Speed (rpm) Max 1500 1500
d) Noise Level 85 dBA 85 dBA
e) Permissible Tolerance in
As per IS:6595
Rated Capacity (%)
f) Permissible Tolerance in
Efficiency at Rated Capacity <---------------------------------------------- No Negative tolerance ------------------------------------------------------>
(%)
g) Range of Operations <-----------Bidder to indicate, preferably between 75% to 130% of rated capacity------------->
13. Design Standard <------------------------------ Hydraulic Institute Standard /IS-5120/ Equivalent Standard -------------------------->
14. Impeller Type Closed Closed
15. Type of Gland Lubrication Self-water Self-water

and Sealing
Page 347 of 630

Sl.
No.
16. Shaft Sealing Arrangement <------------------------------------------------------ Mechanical Seal ------------------------------------------------------>
17. Type of Pump-motor Direct Direct

Connection
18. Type of Coupling Flexible Flexible
19. Mode of Pump Starting <------------------------------------------------- Discharge Valve Fully Closed ------------------------------------------>
20. Material of Construction
a) Casing ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M IS 210 FG 260
b) Casing Liner <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M --------------------------------------------------->
c) Diffuser <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M --------------------------------------------------->
d) Impeller <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A743 Gr. CF8M --------------------------------------------------->
e) Wearing Rings <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A743 Gr. C440 --------------------------------------------------->
f) Shaft <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A276 Gr.410 ----------------------------------------------------->
g) Shaft Seal <--------------------------------------------------- ASTM-A276 Gr.316 ----------------------------------------------------->
h) Mechanical Seal <-------------------------------------------------- Manufacturers Standard ----------------------------------------------->
i) Base Plate <------------------------------------------------------------ IS 2062 ---------------------------------------------------------------->
Page 348 of 630

Sl.
No.
j) Wetted Fastner Stainless Steel AISI-304 Stainless Steel AISI-304
21. Supply of Accessories & Services
a) Base Plate Yes Yes
b) Foundation Bolts, Nuts, Yes Yes

Sleeves etc.
c) Suction and Discharge Yes Yes

Companion Flanges with
Bolts, Nuts and Gaskets
d) Gland Sealing and Cooling Yes Yes

Arrangement
e) Bearing Lubrication and Yes Yes

Cooling Arrangement
f) Suction and discharge Yes Yes

pressure Indicator
g) Priming Connection with 3- Yes Yes

way SS Isolating Valve
h) Pump-motor Coupling Guard Yes Yes
i) Vent with 3-way SS Isolating Yes Yes

Valve
Page 349 of 630

Sl.
No.
j) Drain Connection with Valve Yes Yes
k) Eye-bolts, Lifting Tackle etc. Yes Yes
22. Inspection and Testing <---------------------------------- As per clause no. 8.00.00 of this section ----------------------------------------------->
Page 350 of 630

ANNEXURE-III
VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (PART-1)
Sl
Description Raw Water Pumps
No
1. Service Raw Water supply
2. Designation Raw water Pumps
3. Duty Continuous
4. Location Indoor
5. No. of Pumps required 3x50%
6. No. of Pumps working Two (2)
7. No. of Pumps standby One (1)
8. No. of Pumps working parallel Two (2)
9. Liquid handled Raw water

For analysis refer Vol.IIA, Section-IX of
this specification
10. Temperature 50qC (design)
11. Motor pedestal floor elevation Bidder to indicate
12. Level of bottom of sump Bidder to indicate
13. Normal water level (M) Bidder to indicate
14. Minimum water level (M) Do
15. Maximum water level M) Do
16. Pump performance requirement
a) Performance standard IS-1710
b) Rated capacity (Cu.M/Hr.) Bidder to indicate
c) Total dynamic head at rated Bidder to indicate

capacity (MLC)
d) Static head of pumping system Do

(MLC)
e) Pump shut off head (MLC) Do
Page 351 of 630

Sl
No
f) Permissible tolerance in rated r 2.5 percent at rated head

capacity (%)
g) Permissible tolerance in efficiency No negative tolerance

at rated capacity
h) Range of operation Bidder to indicate preferably between

75% to 130% of rated capacity
i) Suction specific speed Shall be limited to 9000 US units
j) Noise level 85 dBA (max)
17. Design and constructional features
a) Design Standard IS-1710/ Equivalent standard
b) Pump type Vertical Wet Pit Type Pump
c) Impeller type Closed
d) Reverse flow through pump to be Yes

considered for pump design
e) Head at reverse flow Bidder to indicate
f) Type of gland lubrication and sealing By self water
g) Location of thrust bearing Separate for pump and motor
h) Thrust bearing to be designed for Yes

pump shut off operation
i) Type of coupling Flexible
j) Gland lubrication and sealing By Self water
k) Bearing cooling By Self water
18. Material of construction
a) Casing 2% Ni-C.I.
b) Column pipe IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 mm thick)
c) Discharge elbow IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 mm thick)
d) Impeller ASTM-A-351 Gr.CF8M
Page 352 of 630

Sl
No
e) Shaft sleeve AISI-410 (Hardened)
f) Shaft bearing Cutless Rubber
g) Base plate IS-2062
h) Stuffing box C.I.
i) Line shaft AISI-410
j) Impeller shaft AISI-410
k) Shaft coupling AISI-410 (Hardened)
l) Fasteners SS-316
m) Companion flange IS-2062
19. Supply of accessories and services
a) Sole plate YES
b) Foundations bolts, nuts, sleeves YES

etc.
c) Discharge flanges with nuts, bolts YES

and gaskets
d) Gland sealing/ cooling and bearing YES

cooling/ lubrication system
complete with pipes, valves, fittings
and instruments as required
e) Suction strainers NO
f) Pre-lubrication tank and NO

accessories
g) Thrust block Yes, if applicable
h) Pump motor coupling and guard YES
i) Eye bolts, lifting tackle etc. YES
j) Discharge pressure gauge with YES

isolating cock
k) Instrument connections YES
l) Vent with isolating cock YES
Page 353 of 630

Sl
No
m) All other accessories & services YES
20. Inspection and Testing
a) Material testing of casing, impeller YES

and shafts
b) Hydrostatic testing YES
c) Dynamic balancing test Required
d) Sump model test at shop Required
e) Tests on casing/shaft Yes, Radiography/ UT Test for above 50

mm dia. DP test/ MPI for below 50 mm
dia.
f) Test on impeller Dye penetration Test
g) Vibration and noise measurement YES
h) Performance Tests YES
i) Performance test to be done on Proto type at full speed
j) Performance test required for Head Vs. capacity, BHP Vs. capacity,
determining Efficiency Vs. capacity, submergence Vs.
capacity curves
k) Field performance test YES

required
l) Other tests as per applicable YES

clauses of this specification
Page 354 of 630

VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (PART-2)
Sl CT Make-up
Description Service Water Pumps APH/ESP Wash Pump
No Pumps
1. Service Cooling Tower Service water APH/ESP Wash

make-up
2. Designation CT Make-up Pump Service Water Pump APH/ESP Wash Pump
3. Duty Continuous Intermittent Intermittent
4. Location Indoor Indoor Indoor
5. No. of Pumps required Two (2) Two (2) Two (2)
6. No. of Pumps working One (1) One (1) One (1)
7. No. of Pumps standby One (1) One (1) One (1)
8. No. of Pumps working parallel NA NA NA
9. Liquid handled Clarified Water Clarified Water Clarified Water
<--------- (For analysis refer Vol.IIA, Section-IX of this specification ) ------------------>
10. Temperature 50qC 50qC 50qC
11. Motor pedestal floor elevation Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate
12. Level of bottom of sump Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate
13. Normal water level (M) Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate
Page 355 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
14. Minimum water level (M) Do Do Do
15. Maximum water level M) Do Do Do
16. Pump performance requirement
a) Performance standard IS-1710 IS-1710 IS-1710
b) Rated capacity (Cu.M/Hr.) Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate
c) Total dynamic head at Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate

rated capacity (MLC)
d) Static head of pumping Do Do Do

system (MLC)
e) Pump shut off head (MLC) Do Do Do
f) Permissible tolerance in r 2.5 percent at r 2.5 percent at rated r 2.5 percent at rated head
rated capacity (%) rated head head
g) Permissible tolerance in No negative No negative tolerance No negative tolerance

efficiency at rated capacity tolerance
h) Range of operation Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate preferably

preferably between preferably between 75% between 75% to 130% of
75% to 130% of to 130% of rated capacity rated capacity
rated capacity
Page 356 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
i) Suction specific speed Shall be limited to Shall be limited to 9000 Shall be limited to 9000 US
9000 US units US units units
j) Noise level 85 dBA (max) 85 dBA (max) 85 dBA (max)
17. Design and constructional

features
a) Design Standard IS-1710/ Equivalent IS-1710/ Equivalent IS-1710/ Equivalent standard

standard standard
b) Pump type Vertical Wet Pit Vertical Wet Pit Type Vertical Wet Pit Type Pump
Type Pump Pump
c) Impeller type Closed Closed Closed
d) Reverse flow through pump Yes Yes Yes

to be considered for pump
design
e) Head at reverse flow Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate Bidder to indicate
f) Type of gland lubrication and By self water By self water By self water
sealing
g) Location of thrust bearing Separate for pump Separate for pump and Separate for pump and motor
and motor motor
h) Thrust bearing to be Yes Yes Yes

designed for pump shut off
operation
Page 357 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
i) Type of coupling Flexible Flexible Flexible
j) Gland lubrication and By Self water By Self water By Self water

sealing
k) Bearing cooling By Self water By Self water By Self water
18. Material of construction
a) Casing 2% Ni-C.I. 2% Ni-C.I. 2% Ni-C.I.
b) Column pipe IS-2062 (MS) (Min. IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 mm
10 mm thick) mm thick) thick)
c) Discharge elbow IS-2062 (MS) (Min. IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 IS-2062 (MS) (Min. 10 mm
10 mm thick) mm thick) thick)
d) Impeller ASTM-A-351 ASTM-A-351 Gr.CF8M ASTM-A-351 Gr.CF8M

Gr.CF8M
e) Shaft sleeve AISI-410 (Hardened) AISI-410 (Hardened) AISI-410 (Hardened)
f) Shaft bearing Cutless Rubber Cutless Rubber Cutless Rubber
g) Base plate IS-2062 IS-2062 IS-2062
h) Stuffing box 2% Ni-C.I. 2% Ni-C.I. 2% Ni-C.I.
i) Line shaft AISI-410 AISI-410 AISI-410
Page 358 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
j) Impeller shaft AISI-410 AISI-410 AISI-410
k) Shaft coupling AISI-410 (Hardened) AISI-410 (Hardened) AISI-410 (Hardened)
l) Fasteners SS-316 SS-316 SS-316
m) Companion flange IS-2062 IS-2062 IS-2062
19. Supply of accessories and

services
a) Sole plate YES YES YES
b) Foundations bolts, nuts, YES YES YES

sleeves etc.
c) Discharge flanges with nuts, YES YES YES

bolts and gaskets
d) Gland sealing/ cooling and YES YES YES

bearing cooling/ lubrication
system complete with pipes,
valves, fittings and
instruments as required
e) Suction strainers NO NO NO
f) Pre-lubrication tank and NO NO NO

accessories
g) Thrust block Yes, if applicable Yes, if applicable Yes, if applicable
Page 359 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
h) Pump motor coupling and YES YES YES

guard
i) Eye bolts, lifting tackle etc. YES YES YES
j) Discharge pressure gauge YES YES YES

with isolating cock
k) Instrument YES YES YES

connections
l) Vent with isolating YES YES YES

cock
m) All other accessories & YES YES YES

services
20. Inspection and Testing
a) Material testing of casing, YES YES YES

impeller and shafts
b) Hydrostatic testing YES YES YES
c) Dynamic balancing test Required Required Required
d) Sump model test at shop Required Required Required
Page 360 of 630

Sl CT Make-up
No Pumps
e) Tests on casing/shaft Yes, Radiography/ Yes, Radiography/ UT Yes, Radiography/ UT Test

UT Test for above Test for above 50 mm for above 50 mm dia. DP test/
50 mm dia. DP test/ dia. DP test/ MPI for MPI for below 50 mm dia.
MPI for below 50 below 50 mm dia.
mm dia.
f) Test on impeller Dye penetration Dye penetration Test Dye penetration Test
Test
g) Vibration and noise YES YES YES

measurement
h) Performance Tests YES YES YES
i) Performance test to be Proto type at full Proto type at full speed Proto type at full speed
done on speed
j) Performance test required Head Vs. capacity, Head Vs. capacity, BHP Head Vs. capacity, BHP Vs.
for determining BHP Vs. capacity, Vs. capacity, Efficiency capacity, Efficiency Vs.
Efficiency Vs. Vs. capacity, capacity, submergence Vs.
capacity, submergence Vs. capacity curves
submergence Vs. capacity curves
capacity curves
k) Field performance YES YES YES

test required
l) Other tests as per YES YES YES

applicable clauses of this
specification
Page 361 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VIII
REQUIREMENTS OF SPARES, TOOLS & TACKLE,
LUBRICANTS/OIL/CONSUMABLES
Page 362 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 TOOLS AND TACKLE
2.00.00 SPARES
ATTACHMENT
ANNEXURE-I MANDATORY SPARE LIST
Page 363 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VIII
REQUIREMENTS OF SPARES, TOOLS & TACKLE,

LUBRICANTS/OIL/CONSUMABLES
1.00.00 TOOLS & TACKLE
The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of special
tools and tackle as required for the erection, assembly, dismantling &
maintenance of the equipment. These special tools will also include special
material handling equipment, jigs & fixtures for maintenance and calibration/
readjustment, checking & measurement aids etc. A list of such tools & tackle
shall be submitted by the Bidder along with the offer. Detailed description of
each tools/tackle, its function along with the equipment/part for which it is
meant for and the price of each tools/tackle shall also be indicated in the offer.
These tools & tackle shall be separately packed and sent to site before the first
unit commissioning. The Bidder shall also ensure that these tools are not used
for erection purpose.
2.00.00 SPARES
2.01.00 General
The Bidder shall indicate and include in his scope of supply all the necessary
start-up, commissioning and recommended spares in addition to mandatory
spares as specified elsewhere in the specification. The Owner reserves the
right to buy any or all mandatory and recommended spares. The Contractor
shall also state for each item of spares both mandatory and recommended, the
normal expected service life.
2.01.01 All spares supplied under this contract shall be strictly interchangeable with the
parts for which they are intended to replace. The spares shall be treated and
packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the site, e.g.
small items shall be packed in sealed transparent plastic bags with dessicator
packs as necessary.
2.01.02 Each spare part shall be clearly marked or labelled on the outside of the
packing with the description. When more than one spare part is packed in a
single case, a general description of the contents shall be shown on the outside
and a detailed list enclosed. All cases, containers and other packages must be
suitably marked and numbered for the purposes of identification.
2.01.03 All cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for examination
as may be considered necessary by the Engineer.
2.01.04 All mandatory spares shall be delivered to site within one to three months prior
to the scheduled date of the trial operation of the plant. However, they shall not
be despatched before the despatch of the associated main equipment.
Page 364 of 630

2.01.05 The Bidder shall also guarantee supply of spare parts, which will be made,
based on manufacturer's drawings on special order from the Purchaser for 30
years after commissioning of the plant.
2.01.06 Warranty period for all kinds of spares shall be six thousand (6000) hours of
operation, except normal wear or eighteen (18) months from the date of receipt
at site, whichever is earlier. In case of failure or non-conformance to
specifications, the Contractor shall replace them free of cost.
2.02.00 Recommended Spares
2.02.01 The Contractor shall provide a list of recommended spares giving unit prices
and total prices for 2 years of normal operation of the plant for spares of
indigenous origin, and for 5 years of normal operation for spares of
non-indigenous origin. This list shall take into consideration the mandatory
spares specified elsewhere in the specification and should be a separate list.
2.02.02 The price of recommended spares will not be used for the evaluation of bids.
The price of these spares shall remain valid for a period as specified elsewhere
in the specification from the date of Award of the Contract. Where the
recommended spares are the same as mandatory spares, the prices shall be
the same. The prices of any recommended spares, which are not common with
mandatory spares, shall be subject to review by the Owner, and shall be
finalised after mutual discussion.
2.03.00 Start-up Commissioning Spares
2.03.01 Start-up commissioning spares are those spares which may be required during
the start-up and commissioning of the equipment/system. All spares used until
the plant is handed over to the Owner shall come under this category. Said
spares, properly marked, shall be supplied together with the main equipment
and shall be used by the Contractor, if needed, during erection &
commissioning stage. All such spares which remain unused till issuance of
Taking Over Certificate by the Owner, along with an equipment-wise
quantitative consumption report shall be returned to the Owner during time of
handover. The list of commissioning spares to be brought by the Contractor to
ensure smooth commissioning of the plant shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
2.03.02 The Contractor shall submit a complete BBU list inclusive of recommended,
mandatory, initial start-up and commissioning spares. Costs of the above
spares, which are consumed before the handing-over of the plant, shall be
deemed to have been included in the lump sum proposal price of the package,
and the Contractor shall have no claim on this account to the Owner.
2.04.00 Mandatory Spare Parts
2.04.01 The Owner considers some of the spares are essential for running the
equipment irrespective of whether they are included in the list of recommended
spares by the Bidder as mentioned above.
Since the components involved can not be foreseen at the bidding stage, only
Page 365 of 630

broad requirements of the Owner in this respect are outlined hereinafter. The
bidder shall include his proposal, on the basis of this guideline, an item-wise list
of all components and the quantity, unit prices & total price thereof, offered as
mandatory spares for each and every equipment. This list shall be separate
from the list of recommended spares and shall be used for bid evaluation
purposes. Any clarification in this respect may be obtained by the Bidder at the
pre-bidding stage.
2.04.02 The mandatory spares should be supplied to the Owner at least one month
before the trial run. The despatch programme is subject to approval of the
Owner/Consultant after award of contract.
2.04.03.1 Criteria for selection of Quantity of Mandatory Spares :
For Mandatory Spares refer Annexure-I.
2.04.04 Purchaser will have the option to procure any or all of the mandatory spares at
his discretion.
Page 366 of 630

VOLUME : X
SECTION - I
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES FOR
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES
Page 367 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES, PERFORMANCE/ ACCEPTANCE

TESTS & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR SHORTFALL IN
PERFORMANCE
2.00.00 START-UP, INITIAL OPERATION, RELIABILITY RUN AND

PERFORMANCE TESTS
3.00.00 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEES WHICH ATTRACT LIQUIDATED

DAMAGES [CATEGORY-A]
4.00.00 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEES WHICH DO NOT ATTRACT

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES [CATEGORY-B]
Page 368 of 630

VOLUME : X
SECTION-I
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES
1.00.00 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES, PERFORMANCE/ACCEPTANCE TESTS

& LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR SHORTFALL IN PERFORMANCE
1.01.00 The Bidder shall guarantee that the equipment offered shall meet the ratings
and performance requirements stipulated for various equipment covered in this
specification. The guarantees are categorised as:
a) Those which attract liquidated damages, as listed below (Category-"A").

The Bidder shall furnish signed declarations in the manner prescribed in
the bid proposal schedules for these guarantees.
b) Those which do not attract liquidated damages, as listed below

(Category-"B"). This guarantee list indicated in this section is not
exhaustive and the Owner reserves the right to call upon the Bidder to
demonstrate any parameter, operation, etc. of any equipment as specified
and as required to meet the duty conditions.
1.02.00 The guaranteed parameters shall be without any tolerance values. The Bidder
shall demonstrate all the guarantees covered in various volumes and sections
of this specification during Performance/Acceptance test. In case during tests it
is found that the equipment/system has failed to meet the guarantees, the
Contractor shall carry out all necessary modification to make the
equipment/system comply with guaranteed requirements. However, if the
Contractor is not able to demonstrate the guarantees, even after the
modifications within ninety (90) days of notification by the Owner, the Owner
will at his discretion :
i. reject the equipment and recover the payment already made or accept
the equipment only after levying liquidated damages as identified in this
section for those guarantees which are covered under category "A".
OR
ii. reject the equipment and recover the payment already made or accept
the equipment only after assessing and deducting from the contract price
an amount equivalent to the deficiency of the equipment/system as
assessed by the Owner, for those guarantees which are covered under
Category-B.
1.03.00 All guaranteed parameters shall necessarily be quoted by the Bidder based on
the established proven results obtained from similar units in successful
operation. Evidence for this shall necessarily include the test codes used,
acceptance test results, accuracies of various instruments used for the
performance test, details of tolerances, if allowed, etc. While quoting the
guaranteed parameters, the Bidder shall keep in view the requirements
Page 369 of 630

specified in the specification especially regarding the reliability, operability and

maintainability of the equipment proposed. The Owner reserves the right to
evaluate the parameters quoted by the Bidder based on his experience and
published material available.
1.04.00 The liquidated damages shall be calculated prorata for the fractional parts of
the unit unless stated otherwise.
1.05.00 The turbine generator, boiler, auxiliaries, and all other plant equipment and
system shall perform continuously without the noise level (individual or
collectively) exceeding the values specified in respective equipment
specification over the entire range of output and operating frequencies.
1.06.00 Performance/Acceptance Tests
1.06.01 The performance/acceptance tests for various equipment and systems shall be
carried out as specified under the respective equipment specifications and
those specified below shall be specifically applicable. All the guarantees shall
be tested together as far as practicable.
1.06.02 In case of systems with stand-by equipment the liquidated damages for
non-performance will be levied for normal operating number of equipment only.
However, for this purpose all the equipment including standby equipment shall
be tested and average values arrived at.
1.06.03 For instrument inaccuracies during PG Test, refer subsequent clauses of this
section.
1.06.04 For Total Auxiliary Power Consumption, the transformers listed under the
respective clauses, shall be taken together for purposes of guarantee and not
individually.
2.00.00 START-UP, INITIAL OPERATION, RELIABILITY RUN AND

PERFORMANCE TESTS
For the purpose of Taking over of the Plant, the following activities shall have
to be completed successfully.
i) Mechanical Completion
ii) Preliminary Operation
iii) Initial Operation
iv) Reliability Operation
v) Trial Operation
vi) Performance Guarantee Tests
2.01.00 Mechanical Completion
(a) Mechanical completion is defined as the state of readiness of works

and completeness of Field Quality checks under the scope of contract
to undergo the pre-commissioning checks, followed immediately
thereafter by commissioning including preliminary operation, initial
operation, reliability operation, performance tests including unit
characteristics tests for functional or operational occupation of the
Page 370 of 630

works.
(b) Mechanical completion shall be deemed to occur when the contract

erection/installation/construction and Field Quality check works are
completed as per specifications for all equipment / systems including
standby. It also include but not limited to the following:
(i) all installation/erection and Field Quality checks duly carried out
and individual protocol viz. erection, FQA (Field Quality
Assurance) and commissioning protocol to be signed.
(ii) all defects/deficiencies notified by the Purchaser during

installation/erection rectified to the satisfaction of Purchaser
which, in the opinion of the Purchaser, will not affect the safe
operability and maintainability of the works, and
(iii) the contract works, in the opinion of Purchaser, subject to sub-

clause (ii) above, being fit, sound, safe and operable for
undertaking the pre-commissioning checks, preliminary
operation, initial operation, reliability operation and performance
tests including unit characteristics tests followed by subsequent
commercial operation without interruption for reason of
defect/deficiency or unfulfilled obligations of the Contractor in
the erection/installation work.
2.02.00 Specific Requirements of Mechanical Completion
(a) Mechanical completion in different disciplines shall be determined

based on the following characteristics, signifying the readiness of the
works/plants and systems for undertaking the pre-commissioning
checks and subsequent preliminary operation, initial operation,
reliability operation and performance tests including unit characteristics
tests as applicable to the contract works:
(i) All plant construction/installation in various disciplines, as

detailed under (b) below and as applicable to the contract are
completed including aesthetic and workmanship and safety
aspects, with all installation/construction checks as per
specification, relevant codes, standards and practices ensuring
conformity to contract and meeting any applicable statutory
requirements.
(ii) All contractual obligations up to the stage of completion of

construction / installation are fulfilled to the satisfaction of the
Purchaser.
(b) All contract works or otherwise ready to be taken into service, or for
functional or operational occupation save pre-commissioning/
commissioning checks, preliminary operation, initial operation, reliability
operation, performance tests, unit characteristics tests are to be carried
out as per approved commissioning procedure submitted by the
contractor including but not limited to the following:
Page 371 of 630

(i) Areas inclusive of all roads, accesses, structures, housings,

platforms, walkways, stairs, ladders, safe approach to
equipments, safety/ protective guards, covers, hand rails and
such items of work are constructed as per specification and
approved for use.
(ii) Drains, sewers, waste disposal channels, vents, chutes, ducts

and such works are constructed and connected to treatment
and other disposal systems.
(iii) Equipment and piping in different systems/disciplines with all

appurtenances, auxiliaries and accessories along with
supporting structures, hangers, mounts, etc., are erected/
installed, supported, anchored, aligned, grouted and adjusted
for operating conditions.
(iv) Electrical power supply, control, communication and lighting

equipment along with control panels, control desks, switchgear,
local starters and such accessories along with protective
systems, interlocks and integral and auxiliary systems are
permanently installed, aligned and adjusted, with megger,
continuity and specified installation checks duly carried out.
(v) Cables are laid, routed, supported, dressed, clamped, tagged,

ferruled and terminated with clamp terminals designated and all
continuity and megger checks duly carried out.
(vi) Safety/relief valves are calibrated and set to operating

conditions and tried out. All safety systems are installed,
calibrated, checked and accepted.
(vii) Plant identification numbers, colour codes, tags, nameplates

are duly mounted / painted/affixed.
(viii) All painting, lining and insulation works are completed with
specified checks to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
2.03.00 Other Prerequisites for Mechanical Completion
The Contractor shall also meet the following prerequisites for mechanical
completion:
(a) Submit a compilation of all reports of shop tests, material tests and
various stage inspection establishing total compliance to contract
specification in manufacturing items of supply of contract.
(b) Submission of a certificate by the Contractor in a format agreed by the

Purchaser that the contract works have been designed, selected,
manufactured, furnished and installed under the full responsibility of the
Contractor.
(c) All erected plants, structures, equipment and systems are maintained
and preserved in sound condition and are fit and sound to undertake
Page 372 of 630

pre-commissioning checks and tests before commercial operation for

operational and functional occupation immediately thereafter.
(d) All areas and constructed works are cleared daily upto the satisfaction
of the Owner of all construction materials, temporary works, debris,
rubbish water and all such impediments to render the contract works
safe, sound and operable.
(e) All safety features and safety equipment are functional.
(f) Fire prevention and fire extinguishing system in all fire prone areas are
to be made functional.
(g) Any specific statutory approvals pre-requisite to commissioning of the

plant are duly obtained.
2.04.00 Preliminary Operation
Preliminary operation shall mean all activities undertaken as part of

commissioning after mechanical completion upto commencement of initial
operation and shall include mechanical and electrical checkouts, calibration of
instruments and protection devices, commissioning of sub/supporting systems
covered under the contract.
2.05.00 Initial Operation
Initial operation shall include all operations undertaken as part of

commissioning after completion of preliminary operation upto commencement
of reliability operation. It shall be the first integral operation of the complete
BOP integrated with Boiler, Turbine Generator package covered under the
contract and shall include first light up / initial equipment rolling, equipment
stretch-out, dry-out no-load / partial load /full loads runs for mechanical /
electrical tryout and gathering of operational data, calibration, setting and
commissioning of controls systems; and shutdown inspection and adjustment
after running trails of the plant under the contract.
During initial operation each and every activity wise commissioning protocols
are to be jointly signed by the Purchaser and Contractor commissioning team.
The auto loop control tuning shall continue upto the commencement of 72 hour
full load operation of trial run.
The initial operations shall include operation of unit as a whole under normal
operating conditions for twenty four (24) consecutive hours at the 100%
TGMCR load or twelve (12) consecutive hours for two (2) consecutive days at
the 100% TGMCR load unless otherwise agreed to by the Purchaser or
restricted by system load conditions. The completion of initial operation will be
certified in writing by the Purchaser.
2.06.00 Reliability Operation
(a) After the initial operations, the plant shall be on reliability operation.
During the reliability operation, the Contractor will be allowed to make
Page 373 of 630

minor adjustments as may be necessary, provided that such

adjustments do not interfere with or prevent the commercial use of the
plant or result in significant reduction of output. The duration of the
reliability operation of plant shall be spread over a period of thirty (30)
days. The maximum number of interruption attributable to Contractor
shall be of four (4) numbers each not exceeding four (4) hours duration.
In case either the number of interruptions, attributable to the Contractor,
exceeds four (4) or the duration of any of the four (4) interruptions
exceeds four (4) hours the reliability test shall be repeated.
(b) For the period of reliability operation, the time of actual operation shall
be counted. In case the duration of actual continuous operation of any
of the above modes is discontinued for reasons, which are not due to
Contractors fault or negligence, that particular test would be deemed to
have satisfied the reliability operation test. However, should the test be
discontinued due to Contractor fault, the test shall be restarted for that
particular case.
(c) Should any failure (other than of an entirely minor nature) due to or
arising out of faulty design, materials, or workmanship (but not
otherwise) occur in any item of the plant, sufficient to prevent
commercial use of the plant, the reliability test period of thirty (30) days
shall recommence for that item after the defect has been remedied by
the manufacturer/Contractor. The onus of proving that any failure is not
due to faulty design, materials and workmanship will lie with the
Contractor.
(d) A reliability operation report comprising observations and recordings of

various parameters measured in respect of the reliability operation
shall be prepared and submitted to the Purchaser. This report, besides
recording the details of various observations during reliability operation
shall also include the dates of start and finish of the reliability operation
and shall be signed by the representatives of both the parties. The
report shall have recordings of all details of interruptions that occurred,
adjustments made and any repairs carried out during the reliability
operation.
Also a punch list is to be prepared during the reliability test and the
defects are to be rectified by the contractor before commencement of
72 hour operation at full load during trial operation.
(e) Should any failure or interruption occur in any portion of the tests due to
or arising from faulty design, materials, workmanship, omissions,
incorrect erection, or inadequate instructions by the Contractors
supervisors, sufficient to prevent safe commercial use of the plant, the
reliability operation test at the particular load shall be considered void
and the reliability test shall recommence after the Contractor has
remedied the cause of the defect.
(f) During the reliability operation all the equipments, Raw/ DM water
system and sub-systems, control loops, interlocks and protection
including switchyard installations will be in service and change over to
standby equipments are to be done on running condition of the unit.
Page 374 of 630

(g) The reliability operations shall be considered successful, provided that

each item of plant can meet the above requirements.
(h) Upon the completion of reliability operations, as soon as practicable,

or at such time as may be otherwise agreed to by the parties
concerned, the Contractor shall notify in writing to the Purchaser that
the Plant is ready for performance tests.
2.07.00 TRIAL OPERATION:
1. On completion of erection of any major items along with its auxiliaries,

the same shall be thoroughly inspected by the Contractor together
with the TSGENCOs Engineers for correctness and completeness
and acceptability for pre-commissioning tests. Though the
TSGENCOs Engineers associate themselves with such inspection,
the responsibility for declaration for correctness, completeness and
acceptability shall rest with the Contractor and the pre-commissioning
tests and inspections shall be carried out after such declaration. The
pre-commissioning tests to be performed at site as well as necessary
documentation and formats for the protocols to be signed during and
after the tests shall be prepared by the Contractor taking into account
relevant Indian/International/ Manufacturers standard as applicable
and finalized by the TSGENCO sufficiently in advance through mutual
discussions. On conclusion of satisfactory pre-commissioning tests of
each individual equipment, the trial operation of the unit shall start
consistent with parameters of the technical specifications.
2. The duration of trial operation shall be for 14 days during which period
the unit shall be run from half to full load or any other load cycle
mutually agreed to during which period the unit shall run at full load for
72 hours continuously. However, if required, the Purchaser and the
Contractor may mutually agree for economical load operation for 48
hours continuously. Any interruption caused by the Contractor up to
24 hours will not effect the period of 14 days indicated above. In case
of such interruption occurring for more than 24 hours, the above
period shall be extended correspondingly. During the above trial
operation the standby auxiliary equipment shall also be run for a
minimum period of more than 72 hours during which period the
equipment shall run at its rated capacity for a minimum period of 24
hours. Further the above trial operation shall be carried out in full
fledged manner with the associated instruments and controls. The
unit is deemed to be commissioned on successful completion of the
above trial operation.
3. A document shall be prepared on the results of trial operation. This

document besides recording of the details of the various observations
during the trial run will also include the date of start and finish of the
trial operation and will be signed by the representative of both the
parties. The document of the trial operation shall have log sheets and
all adjustments, repairs, interruptions etc., shall be recorded therein. If
any major adjustment is carried out which has been changed from the
initial operation value, then the reason for it is to be furnished in the
Page 375 of 630

report in detail.
The Purchaser and the Contractor will observe the plant overall
reliability and shall test the equipment runback, rundown, auto start of
equipments, CMC function and its reliability, complete automation of
the plant system etc.
4. The readiness of the unit for the trial operation shall be intimated by
written notice to the TSGENCO after mutual discussions. After receipt
of such notice if the trial operation could not be performed or could not
be completed due to any reasons not attributable to the Contractor
and if the situation continues, the Contractor shall be absolved of the
responsibility for the delay and the plant shall be deemed to have
been taken over by the TSGENCO at the end of 60 days after the
Contractors notifications of readiness of the same.
5. The trial operation shall be carried out in compliance with relevant

manufacturers standards and/or relevant Indian/International
standards and manufacturers operation directions before starting
them.
6. Defects which are minor in nature and do not endanger the safe
operation of the plant, shall not be considered as reasons for not
taking over the plant by the TSGENCO. These defects shall be listed
in the above mentioned documents and shall be rectified by the
Contractor in accordance with the agreement made in this respect.
2.08.00 Performance Tests
(a) PG test notification to be given by the contractor to the purchaser after

COD. The performance tests shall be conducted at site on all major
systems by the Contractor. The Contractors commissioning Engineers
shall make the entire plant ready for such tests and assist the
Purchaser in operation during the tests. The test shall be commenced
after the Plant/Equipment has attained stable operation at the end of
reliability operation. The date of commencement of the performance
tests shall be as soon as practicable on completion of the reliability
operation or as may be mutually agreed upon between the Contractor
and Purchaser.
Final trail operation shall be carried out for a period of seventy two (72)
hours at 100% TGMCR before taking over.
(b) Independent Inspector
The Purchaser reserves his right to appoint an independent inspector

at his own cost as his representative to discuss the test programme, to
approve the instrumentation, to witness the tests and to analyze the
test results.
(c) The tests shall be binding on both the parties of the contract to
determine compliance of the plant/equipment with the performance
Page 376 of 630

guarantees.
(d) The performance tests shall be carried out to prove the guarantees.
The purpose of the performance tests is to check whether the plant
meets the guaranteed performances.
(e) The performance test procedure, the instrumentation to be installed, the

instrument accuracy classes, including the definition of the calculation
method to be used, the areas of responsibility and the items which
specifically require preparation and agreement shall be submitted by
the Contractor for review and approval during detail engineering phase.
The schematics identifying the guarantee test instrumentation shall be
submitted along with procedure. It shall be ensured that necessary test
points and spool pieces are installed during the detail-engineering
phase and also identified in process and instrumentation drawings.
Code of the PG test is to be fixed up during detail engineering stage.
The Contractor shall furnish detail test programme during detail
engineering stage.
(f) The performance test instruments shall be of precision type with

instrument accuracy limits as required and defined in the applicable
performance test codes such that measurement uncertainty does not
exceed the values agreed to by the Contractor in the Schedule of
Performance Guarantees.
(g) All test instrumentation for the performance tests as required shall be
supplied by the Contractor on loan basis. All costs associated with the
supply, calibration, installation and return of the test instrumentation are
deemed to have been included in the contract price. The test shall be
in accordance with those specified or as per agreed performance test
codes. Batch calibration shall not be accepted.
(h) Any special equipment, tools and tackle required for successful
completion of the performance tests shall be provided by the
Contractor.
(i) It is Contractors responsibility to co-ordinate for carrying out the

performance tests. The duration of the test shall be in accordance with
the agreed test codes. All other tests to prove the guarantees as
indicated in the Contractors offer shall also be conducted.
(j) The plant parameters during the performance test shall be adjusted as
far as practicable to the guaranteed performance test conditions. The
tests shall be conducted to provide guaranteed parameters as defined
in the contract.
(k) Category-B tests are to be completed before Category-A PG test.

Protocols are to be signed jointly by the Purchaser and Contractor for
each Category-B test.
(l) Reporting of Test Results
(a) Within two weeks after the conclusion of the performance test,
Page 377 of 630

the Contractor shall submit ten (10) copies of test reports to the
Purchaser stating whether the plant passed or failed such
test(s), accompanied by sufficient test data and calculations to
demonstrate the level of performance attained with respect to
each of the tested parameters.
(b) The report(s) shall include as a minimum, the following:-
(i) Scope
(ii) Various guaranteed parameters & tests as per the

contract.
(iii) Codes/standards used
(iv) . Description of the test procedures
(v) Full schematic diagrams with indication of test

instruments locations and identification tags of same.
(vi) Instrumentation details and calibration.
(vii) Duration of test, frequency of readings and number of

test runs
(viii) Test logs and summary of test readings used for

performance calculations.
(ix) Full set of correction curves.
(x) Computation of test results.
(xi) Sample calculation
(xii) Performance calculation
(xiii) Computations to prove measurement uncertainty is

within acceptable limits.
(xiv) Acceptance criteria
(xv) Any other information required for conducting the

test
(xvi) Conclusions of performance tests.
(m) Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of such test report(s), the Purchaser
shall submit a notice to the Contractor stating either:-
(i) That Purchaser concurs with the information provided in the test
report(s), or
(ii) That Purchaser disputes some or all of the information provided
Page 378 of 630

in the Contractors test report(s), the areas being disputed, and

the levels of performance being disputed.
(n) If Purchaser concurs with the information in the Contractors test

report(s), the Purchaser shall, within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the
test report, provide a written notice to the Contractor accepting the
results of the tests.
(o) If Purchaser disputes any or all of the results contained in the

Contractors test report(s), the Contractor and Purchaser shall meet
within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of the Purchaser notice at a
mutually acceptable location to review and discuss the dispute.
All the category-B test results are to be computed and to be submitted along
with the PG test report for detail study by the Purchaser.
2.08.00 Notice of Tests
The Contractor shall issue 21 days notice to the Purchaser of the date after
which he will be ready to commence the tests and the Contractor shall
commence the tests promptly thereafter.
2.09.00 Delayed Tests
(a) If the tests could be carried out but are being unduly delayed by the
Contractor, the Purchaser may by notice inform the Contractor to
conduct the tests within 14 days after the receipt of such notice. The
Contractor shall conduct the tests on such days within that period as
the Contractor may fix and of which he shall issue notice to the
Purchaser.
(b) If the Contractor fails to conduct the tests within such notice period, the
Purchaser may himself proceed with the tests. All tests so conducted
by the Purchaser shall be at the risk and cost of the Contractor and the
cost thereof shall be deducted from the contract price or charged to the
Contractor. The tests shall then be deemed to have been conducted
by the Contractor and the test results shall be binding on the
Contractor.
(c) Facilities for Tests on Completion
Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and

bear costs for these items, as may be required to carry out the tests on
completion.
(d) Retesting
If the plant fails to pass the test (which in the case of performance tests
means not achieving the acceptable limits), the Purchaser may require
such tests to be repeated on the same terms and conditions save that
only reasonable notice of the date and time of such tests shall be
required to be given by the Contractor to the Purchaser.
Page 379 of 630

(e) Disagreement as a Result of Tests
If the Purchaser and the Contractor disagree on the interpretation of the

test results, each shall give a statement of his views to other within 14
days after such disagreement arises. The statement shall be
accompanied by all relevant evidence.
3.00.00 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEES WHICH ATTRACT LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

[CATEGORY-A]
Sl. No. Plant/ Parameter for Performance Liquidated

System Guarantee Damages
3.01.00 Plant
3.01.01 Efficiency of Efficiency of the steam generator at As per Volume-I.

steam 100% & 80% TMCR while firing the
generator Design coal at rated steam
parameters, rated coal fineness and
rated excess air. (Refer Note-1 for
estimation of weightage factor.)
Design coal shall be blended coal
(50% imported coal + 50%
indigenous coal).
3.01.02 Steam Steam generating capacity in T/hr of As per Volume-I.
generating steam at rated steam parameters at
capacity superheater outlet (with any
combination of mills working) with
the coal being fired from within the
range specified.
3.01.03 Turbine Cycle Turbine Cycle Heat rate in kcal/kWh As per Volume-I.
Heat rate under rated steam conditions,
design condenser pressure with zero
make up at 100% & 80% of rated
load (Refer Note-1 for estimation of
weightage factor.)
3.01.04 Output Continuous output (MW) of 100% As per Volume-I.
TMCR at Generator terminals under
rated steam conditions at Turbine
Inlet (247 kg/cm2(a), 565C, 593C)
and CW temperature of 33C with
0% make-up with excitation power
deducted
3.01.05 Condenser Condenser pressure in mm Hg (abs) As per Volume-I.
Pressure under VWO conditions, 3% make up,
design CW temperature and CW
flow.
Page 380 of 630

Sl. No. Plant/ Parameter for Performance Liquidated

System Guarantee Damages
3.01.06 Total Auxiliary The total auxiliary power As per Volume-I.
Power consumption for all the auxiliaries of
Consumption boiler, turbine Generator and turbine
cycle equipments required for
continuous unit operation at 100%
and 80% of rated load under rated
steam conditions and at design
condenser pressure with 0% make-
up. (Refer Note 1, 2, 3 & 4 for the
basis of computation of Auxiliary
power)
3.01.07 Cooling Tower Cooling tower cold water at 100% As per Volume-I.
Cold Water TMCR under rated steam conditions
Temperature and at design condenser pressure.
Note :
1. The weightage factor shall be estimated considering the following:
a) 80% rating for 2000 hrs in a year,
b) 100% rating for 6300 hrs in a year.
2. For computation of Auxiliary Power, output measured at Generator

terminals minus sent out power measured downstream of Generator
Transformer, applicable Losses (No load loss + Load loss+ auxiliary loss
for coolers) for Standby Transformers, Unit Transformers and Bus duct
losses shall be considered.
3. The equipment for auxiliary power consumption to be considered by the

bidder shall include the equipment as per Annexure-C of Volume-I as
minimum.
4. Power consumption for Fire Pumps, Sump Pumps, Elevators, EOT Cranes
shall not be considered in the Auxiliary Power consumption estimate.
5. Heat Rate of TG Cycle : Maximum 1850 Kcal/kwh with Steam

Turbine driven BFP.
6. Steam Generator Efficiency : Not less than 85%
7. Auxiliary Power Consumption shall be limited to 6% with Steam Turbine

driven BFP and NDCT.
8. Normal Availability of the Plant : 98% (2% forced outage)
9. Plant Reliability : Minimum 95%
10. The condenser pressure measurement while conducting the guarantee

tests for Cl Nos 3.01.03, 3.01.04 and 3.01.05 above shall be measured at
300 mm above the top row of condenser tubes.
Page 381 of 630

4.00.00 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEES WHICH DO NOT ATTRACT LIQUIDATED

DAMAGES FOR VARIOUS EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT
LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING [CATEGORY-B]:
4.01.00 Steam Generator
4.01.01 Capacity in T/hr of steam at rated steam parameters at superheater outlet (with
any combination of mills working as per Owners discretion) and the coal being
fired within range specified, corresponding to 100% BMCR at 33C CW
temperature.
4.01.02 Efficiency in percentage at 100% & 80% TMCR and 27C ambient air
temperature and 60% RH with zero make-up, condenser vacuum of 77 mm
Hg(a) or better while firing the Design coal at rated steam parameters at
Superheater and Reheater outlet and rated excess air and with any
combination of mills working as per Owners discretion. Design coal shall be
blended coal (50% imported coal + 50% indigenous coal).
4.01.03 Air heater air-in-leakage after 3000 hrs. of operation from taking over date. To
be demonstrated.
4.01.04 NOx emission
NOx emission from the unit shall not be more than 365 ppm or 750 mg/Nm3
(equivalent NO2) at the ESP outlet at 6% excess oxygen.
4.01.05 Mill capacity at rated fineness.
4.01.06 Gas tightness efficiency of Guillotine dampers.
4.01.07 No fuel oil support shall be required above 30% of BMCR.
4.01.08 Performance characteristics of pumps, fans, etc. viz; capacity, head developed
etc.
4.01.09 Capabilities of all drives.
4.01.10 Margins on fans. Through operation of single fan at a time.
4.01.11 Equal load sharing of pumps/fans while running in parallel shall be

demonstrated.
4.01.12 Run back capabilities.
4.01.13 Ramp/sudden load change withstand capability.
4.01.14 Life of mill wear parts
4.01.15 Furnace Exit Gas Temperature
The Bidder shall demonstrate by direct measurements that the Furnace Exit
Gas Temperature (FEGT) at the specified location does not exceed the
Page 382 of 630

specified maximum temperature of BMCR. The test equipment to be used for

this demonstration shall be latest, state of the art, to the approval of Owner.
4.01.16 Flue Gas Temperature
The Bidder shall also demonstrate that the flue gas temperature at the entry
and exit of various boiler heating surfaces and also the variation across the
cross section perpendicular to gas flow do not exceed the values considered
for the pressure parts design.
4.01.17 Steam Temperature Imbalance
The Bidder shall guarantee and demonstrate that at SH and RH outlets (in case
of more than one outlet) the temperature imbalance between the outlets does
not exceed 10C.
4.01.18 SH/RH Attemperation System
The Bidder shall guarantee and demonstrate that the spray water flow to SH
attemperation system does not exceed the value considered for design (to be
indicated in the bid) while maintaining the rated SH outlet steam temperature at
BMCR. The Bidder shall also guarantee and demonstrate that the RH
temperature is maintained at the rated value without any spray water
requirement, for the secondary attemperation system, at all loads for which the
specified RH steam temperature is required to be maintained at the rated
value.
4.02.00 Electrostatic Precipitator
4.02.01 Pressure drop across the electrostatic precipitator.
4.02.02 Collection efficiency and outlet dust concentration shall be as per cl. no.
3.01.00 of Section-II in Volume-II-B.
4.03.00 Turbine Generator
4.03.01 Turbine Generator-Set Capability
The steam turbine generator unit shall be capable of delivering continuously at

generator terminals the output as indicated by the Bidder in the following heat
balances detailed out elsewhere with equipment specification submitted
alongwith the bid.
a) Output corresponding to top HP heaters out of operation.
b) Output corresponding to all HP heaters out of operation.
c) Output corresponding to VWO flow, at rated steam conditions with

condenser CW temperature 33C & condenser of vacuum 77 mm HgA or
better with 0% make-up.
d) Output corresponding to overpressure operation of the

boiler-turbine-generator set, at rated main steam and hot reheat steam
Page 383 of 630

temperature with condenser CW temperature corresponding to

Condenser vacuum of 77 mm HgA or better with zero percent make-up.
4.03.02 Operating Frequency Range
As per the stipulations of Cl. No. 7.06.00 Vol. II-C, Section-I.
4.03.03 Constant Pressure and Sliding Pressure Operation
The constant pressure operation and sliding pressure operation from 30%
turbine MCR to VWO condition of the unit in conjunction with the steam
generator, HP-LP bypass system and instrumentation & control system shall
be demonstrated.
In sliding pressure mode of operation, during quick load increase the idle
control valve (s) must respond rapidly to pick up 20% of operating load, so that
immediate increase of boiler pressure is not required. The load response
capability shall be demonstrated in steps of 5 %.
Change-over from constant pressure mode to sliding pressure mode and vice-
versa shall also be demonstrated.
4.03.04 Start-up, Loading, Unloading and Shutdown Capabilities
Start-up, loading, unloading and shutdown characteristics and startup time and
loading capabilities for the steam turbine generator and steam generator both
operating as a unit for cold start conditions (greater than 36 hours shutdown),
warm start conditions (between 8 and 36 hours shutdown) and hot start
conditions (less than 8 hours shutdown) under constant pressure and variable
pressure mode and suitability for cyclic operation as indicated by the Bidder in
the offer and accepted by the Owner shall be demonstrated ensuring the
parameters of vibration, differential expansion, etc.
4.03.05 Vacuum Pulling time
Vacuum pulling time from condenser at atmospheric pressure to rated vacuum

compatible to start Steam Turbine
4.03.06 Sudden Total Loss of External Load
On occasions, the steam turbine generator system may experience sudden

total loss of all external load. Under these conditions, the steam turbine
generator unit shall not trip on overspeed but shall continue in operation under
the control of its speed governor to supply power for the plant auxiliary load
station transformers, while staying within the prescribed permissible limits of
steam metal temperature mismatch, exhaust hood temperature, absolute and
differential expansion, vibration and eccentricity acceptable to the Owner.
4.03.07 Capacity with Reduced Hydrogen Pressure
Generator shall be capable of operating at reduced capacity at reduced

generator hydrogen pressure in accordance with values furnished by the
Bidder in his proposal and accepted by the Owner.
Page 384 of 630

4.03.08 HP/LP Bypass Capabilities
i. HP/LP bypass capacity and capabilities under various modes of operation

shall be demonstrated.
ii. Condenser performance with HP-LP Bypass operating at rated

conditions.
4.03.09 Lube Oil Purification System - Capacity and Purity
Lube oil purification system capacity and the purity of purified oil at the outlet of
the centrifuge and the outlet of the polishing filter, shall be demonstrated. If
purity check is not possible at site, this shall be carried out at Vendors works.
4.03.10 Extraction and CRH NRVs
Operation of the valves under turbine trip and high water level in the heaters,
shall be demonstrated.
4.03.11 The performance of the condenser, i.e., the back pressure achieved at design
CW flow and inlet temp. and cleanliness factors, VWO heat load shall be
demonstrated.
4.03.12 Temp. of condensate at outlet of condenser shall not be less than saturation
temp. corresponding to the condenser pressure at all loads.
4.03.13 Oxygen content in condensate at hot-well outlet shall not exceed the limit
prescribed by HEI over the entire load range and shall be determined according
to an internationally approved codes/standard.
4.03.14 When one half of the condenser is isolated, condenser capability shall be
demonstrated to take at least 60% T.G. load under TMCR conditions.
4.04.00 Deaerator
4.04.01 The dissolved oxygen content in feed-water measured at deaerator outlet shall
not exceed 0.005 cc/litre at all loads from no load to VWO condition with 3%
cycle make-up with normal pressure and overpressure with incoming
condensate presumed to be saturated with oxygen (without any chemical
dosing).
4.04.02 Free carbon dioxide in deaerator effluent shall be non-traceable at all loads
from zero to VWO with 3% cycle make-up with normal pressure according to
ASTM standards.
4.05.00 Power Cycle Pumps
Performance of each pump (flow, head, vibration, noise, parallel operation) to

be demonstrated.
4.06.00 Automatic On Line Turbine Testing (ATT) System
Page 385 of 630

Demonstrated without disturbing normal operation.
4.07.00 Coal Handling Plant
Refer Cl. No. 10.00.00 in Volume-IV-A.
4.08.00 Water Treatment System
Performance Guarantee of Chemical Feed System shall be in accordance with

Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-IV, Volume-II-B of the EPC Bid Specification.
Performance Guarantee of Condensate Polishing System shall be in

accordance with Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-VI, Volume-II-C of the EPC Bid
Specification.
Performance Guarantee of River Water Pre-Treatment System shall be in

accordance with Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-I, Volume-III-C of the EPC Bid
Specification.
Performance Guarantee of Demineralisation System shall be in accordance

with Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-II, Volume-III-C of the EPC Bid Specification.
Performance Guarantee of Circulating Water Treatment System shall be in

accordance with Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-III, Volume-III-C of the EPC Bid
Specification.
Performance Guarantee of Waste Water Treatment System shall be in

accordance with Cl. No. 8.04.00 in Section-IV, Volume-III-C of the EPC Bid
Specification.
4.09.00 Instrumentation and Control
The Bidder shall demonstrate that the Instrumentation and Control system
meets all the functional/performance requirements, specified in technical
specifications.
4.10.00 Noise Level
The Bidder shall demonstrate Noise Level of various

plants/equipments/systems as per Clause no. 17.02.00 in Section-IV of
Volume-II-A.
4.11.00 Air Conditioning & Ventilation system
The rating and performance figures of the AC & Ventilation system &
equipment as indicated in the respective technical specification shall be
guaranteed by the Bidder. In the event of any deficiencies in meeting the
guarantees as indicated in the technical specification after conducting the
performance test, the bidder shall put all his efforts to rectify the deficiencies or
will replace the equipment / accessories to achieve the specified performance
parameters within a reasonable time.
Page 386 of 630

VOLUME : X
SECTION - II
PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING PG TESTS
Page 387 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 STEAM GENERATOR
2.00.00 MILL PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
3.00.00 ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
4.00.00 TURBINE GENERATOR
5.00.00 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
6.00.00 REMAINING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Page 388 of 630

VOLUME : X
SECTION-II
PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING PG TESTS
1.00.00 STEAM GENERATOR
The performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest version
of ANSI PTC 4.0 except for the specific requirements brought out herein below.
This test shall be done simultaneously with PG test of Turbine Generator set.
During this test, Boiler unit shall be fully on automatic control under steady load
condition.
1.01.00 The efficiency tests shall be carried out with the steam generator operating at
the guaranteed point condition i.e. corresponding to 100%, 80% Turbine rated
loads, or at the agreed loads as near these as possible, with the boiler
operating at the rated excess air, rated SH/RH attemperation flows, flue gas
temperature, coal fineness, etc. corresponding to the loads on boiler. At control
load, the stable and efficient operation of the unit with the rated excess air,
rated mill outlet coal fineness, while achieving the rated S/H, R/H steam
parameters shall be demonstrated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
1.02.00 For finding out the performance values, two sets of consistent reading shall be
taken and the average of the above values shall be considered for the
guarantee purpose.
1.03.00 Corrections shall be applied to the tested efficiency, to correct it to the design
conditions, for variations in the following parameters only :
a) Feed water temperature at economiser inlet.
b) Ambient air temperature
c) Relative humidity of ambient air.
d) Hydrogen in coal.
e) Moisture in coal.
f) Gross calorific value of coal.
The Bidder shall furnish correction curves, for Owner's approval, covering the
expected ranges of variations for all these parameters for the range of coals
specified.
1.04.00 In all other aspects, not spelt out above, or in specifications, where ANSI code
stipulates agreement between the parties concerned before the test, Bidder
shall get these approved by the Owner.
Page 389 of 630

1.05.00 No negative tolerance on account of instrument in-accuracies or otherwise shall

be allowed on the guaranteed values.
1.06.00 Performance tests shall also be conducted to prove the steam generating
capacity of the steam generator at rated parameters at stipulated loads.
1.07.00 Necessary write ups, schemes, instrument schedules, detailed procedures

clearly indicating periods of tests, frequency of observations, etc. shall be
prepared and submitted for all the tests for Owner's review and shall be got
specifically approved from the Owner within one year of LOI issue.
2.00.00 MILL PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
2.01.00 Performance testing shall be done on the mill towards establishing its capacity
specified at the specified fineness applying corrections for the variations in coal
characteristics i.e. HGI, moisture, etc.
2.02.00 The Bidder shall guarantee a capacity output not less than the offered value, at
each mill outlet, with coal fineness of not less than 70% through 200 mesh and
not less than 98% through 50 mesh screen, when grinding coal having
specified grindability index, total moisture content including surface moisture,
etc. Bidder shall guarantee that the above capacity will be maintained and
demonstrated with the originally installed grinding elements in nearly wornout
condition as mutually agreed for the purpose of ascertaining wear life of any of
the wear parts or when pulveriser grinding elements have successfully
completed the specified guaranteed hours of operation as mentioned by the
Bidder, whichever is earlier. During the above mentioned operating period of
the mill, manufacturer's operation instructions will be followed and mill will be
operated with the specified range of coal without any such readjustment that
requires a shutdown of the mill or reduction of the load and/or any replacement
of any mill wear parts.
For the purpose of testing to demonstrate the capacity, if grindability and

surface moisture vary from those given above, the pulveriser measured
capacity shall be corrected using the capacity correction curves furnished by
the Bidder alongwith the offer. HGI vs grindability factor curve shall be
furnished for HGI variations upto a value above which the capacity remains
constant.
Capacity guarantee shall be conducted on all the mills. However, should the
results of test as conducted above indicate that deficiency in capacity
guarantee is observed in case of one or two mills only and that Owner is
further, convinced that such deficiency does not occur out of reasons
attributable to mill manufacture and supplier, Owner may waive off the
requirement of demonstration of capacity guarantee for such mills only.
2.03.00 Mill Wear part life guarantee
The Bidder shall guarantee the wear life of all wear parts of the mill when
grinding the specified range of coals. For this purpose the wear parts shall be
defined as those parts of the mill which are in contact with coal or coal dust and
are likely to wear out during the operation of the mill (except for the grinding
Page 390 of 630

media balls). The guarantee shall be demonstrated on each mill during the
guarantee trial period (GTP) commencing after establishing successful
operation of the mill continuously for a period of not less than 24 hours at or
near its guaranteed rated capacity. The guarantee trial period shall be atleast
five years or the wear life of any wear part, whichever is higher. The
establishment of the guarantee will be based on actual total hours of operation
of the mill regardless of the specified range of coal or fuel loading. The mill
wear parts shall be considered to have passed their guaranteed operating life
when they have demonstrated their capability to meet the full load rated
capacity of the mill at the rated power consumption at the end of the guarantee
trial period. In case any of the wear parts has worn out to such an extent that
either the normal and safe operation of the mill is jeopardised if it is not
replaced/repaired or its continued use may lead to exposure or wear of other
parts which are not meant for the purpose, that part shall be deemed to have
completed its life for the purposes of checking the short fall in wear life even if
there is no reduction in mill rated capacity and rated power consumption shall
be as quoted by the Bidder when grinding the coal having parameters specified
in Section-V and achieving the grind fineness of not less than 70% through 200
mesh and 98% through 50 mesh.
The Contractor shall provide to the Owner so as to compensate for the shortfall
in wear life for a plant life of 30 years as has been established or the cost of
such wear parts based on the prices quoted by him in his offer for spares
escalated as applicable for respective items at the discretion of the Owner.
3.00.00 ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
3.01.00 The performance test on electrostatic precipitator will commence after

completion of reliability run along with the testing of Boiler and Turbine. During
the interval between the commencement of trial operation and the
commencement of performance test only routine maintenance shall be carried
out. No physical or chemical cleaning of ESP shall be permitted during this
period or immediately before the conductance of the performing tests.
3.02.00 The test efficiency shall be based on the overall performance of the
electrostatic precipitator over a mutually agreed period of operation under the
conditions given in this specification and following the normal operation of the
unit including rapping and normal soot blowing and/or warm up guns. Outlet
dust concentration of ESP shall be as specified in relevant section under Steam
Generator subject to applicable modification adopted by Environmental
Department, Government of India, at the time of project execution.
3.03.00 The performance tests shall be carried out in accordance with Method-17 of
EPA (Environmental Protection Agency of USA) code. The details of the tests
shall, however be mutually agreed upon between the Owner and the
Contractor.
3.04.00 All calibration procedures and standards shall be subjected to the approval of
the Owner. The protecting tubes, pressure connections and other test
connections required for conducting guarantee test and maintenance testing
shall conform to the relevant codes. The Bidder shall fully elaborate, in his
proposal, the provisions made to this effect. Method of measurement for all air
Page 391 of 630

leakage test and power consumption test proposed by the Bidder shall be
clearly indicated in his offer, and shall be subject to Owner's approval.
4.00.00 TURBINE GENERATOR
4.01.00 The performance test for the turbine generator set will be conducted in
accordance with the latest edition of ASME-PTC-6.
For determination of primary flow to the turbine, low beta ratio throat tap nozzle
assembly including required machined straight length meeting the requirements
of ASME-PTC-6 shall be provided.
4.02.00 The performance tests shall be carried out to determine compliance with the
following heat balance conditions :
a) 100% output under rated steam conditions at condenser CW temperature

33o C and condenser vacuum 77 mm HgA with zero make-up.
b) 80% MW output under rated steam conditions at condenser CW

temperature 33o C and condenser vacuum 77 mm HgA with zero
make-up.
4.03.00 The test heat rate under the above load conditions shall be computed as per
relevant clause of T.G. Specification.
The performance test shall be carried out with Turbine driven BFPs in service.
To account for the conditions during the conductance of the test which do not
correspond to the specified conditions, necessary corrections shall be applied.
4.04.00 No tolerance shall be applied to the final test results for testing inaccuracy. For
measurement inaccuracies (including instrument tolerance) as ascertained by
the Owner from the codes/standards, the test heat rates will be corrected
upwardly reflecting the same (e.g. in case of any inaccuracy of 0.1%, the test
heat rate will be corrected by 0.1% upwardly).
4.05.00 The tests shall be arranged in a manner such that the Owner's operation is not
disrupted. Duplicate test run will be performed at the 100% and 80% unit loads.
The test results of corrected heat rate of the duplicate test runs shall agree
within 0.25%. If they differ by more than 0.25% a third test shall be run at the
same test points. Corrected results of anyone of the three test runs which
deviates from the corrected average heat rate of all the runs by more than
0.25%, shall be eliminated, otherwise the results of the test with the highest
heat rate figure will be considered.
The test for TG test capacity shall be carried out alongwith the heat rate test.
Instrumentation and other details shall comply as above.
4.06.00 Condenser
Performance test for the condenser shall be conducted in accordance with the
latest edition of ASME PTC-12.2. The condenser pressure shall be measured
at 300 mm above the top row of tubes under VWO condition, 3% make-up and
Page 392 of 630

design CW flow and CW inlet temperature corresponding to guranteed

vacuum. The cleanliness factor shall be determined in accordance with the
latest edition of ASME PTC-12.2.
4.07.00 Feed Water Heaters and Drain Cooler
Performance test for feed water heaters shall be conducted in accordance with
the latest edition of ASME PTC-12.1.
4.08.00 Deaerator
Performance test for deaerator shall be conducted in accordance with the latest
edition of ASME PTC-12.3.
The dissolved oxygen content in feed water at outlet of deaerator shall be

determined by ASME-D 888. Reference Method A and any recognised
modification thereof.
Free carbondioxide content of deaerator effluent shall be measured by APHA

method.
5.00.00 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
All parameters of plant, equipment & facilities which are under jurisdiction of
Statutory Authorities, like MOEF, TPCB etc., shall be guaranteed.
Conformance to the performance parameters under statutory requirement is
mandatory.
6.00.00 REMAINING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
For other equipment, plants and systems, the performance test shall be carried
out as per the respective equipment specification and the applicable codes.
Page 393 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-IV
ADDITIONAL GENERAL
GENERAL TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS
Page 394 of 630

CONTENT
2.00.00 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGN
3.00.00 NAME PLATES (RATING PLATES)
4.00.00 SAFETY AND SECURITY
5.00.00 GUARDS
6.00.00 LOCATION AND LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
7.00.00 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND

AVAILABILITY CONSIDERATIONS
8.00.00 MATERIALS
9.00.00 LUBRICATION
10.00.00 LUBRICANTS & CONTROL FLUIDS
11.00.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
12.00.00 PLANT LIFE AND MODE OF OPERATION
13.00.00 PACKAGING & MARKING
14.00.00 PROTECTION
15.00.00 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION AND NOISE LEVEL REQUIREMENT
17.00.00 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
18.00.00 DEVIATIONS
ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE-I LIST OF STANDARDS FOR REFERENCE
ANNEXURE-II CRITERIA FOR LAYOUT
Page 395 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-IV
1.01.00 Except where otherwise specified, the Plant shall comply with the appropriate
Indian Standard or an agreed internationally accepted Standard Specification
as listed in the annexure to this Section and mentioned in detailed
specifications, each incorporating the latest revisions at the time of tendering.
Where no internationally accepted standard is applicable, the Bidder shall give
all particulars and details as necessary; to enable the Owner to identify all of
the Plant in the same detail as would be possible had there been a Standard
Specification.
1.02.00 Where the Bidder proposes alternative codes or standards he shall include in
his tender one copy (in English) of each Standard Specification to which
materials offered shall comply. In such case, the adopted alternative standard
shall be equivalent or superior to the standards mentioned in the specification.
1.03.00 The plant will be designed in compliance with applicable National and
International Codes and Standards such as ASME, ASTM, DIN, BS, IEC, IEEE,
IS, etc. Wherever specified or required the Plant shall conform to various
statutory regulations such as Indian Boiler Regulations, Indian Explosives Act,
Indian Factories Act, Indian Electricity Act, Environmental Regulations, etc.
Wherever required, approval for the plant supplied under the specification from
statutory authorities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.04.00 In the event of any conflict between the codes and standards referred above,
and the requirements of this specification, the requirements, which are more
stringent, shall govern.
1.05.00 In case of any change of code, standards and regulations between the date of
purchase order and the date the Contractor proceeds with manufacturing the
Owner shall have the option to incorporate the changed requirements. It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to advise Owner of the resulting effect.
1.06.00 Successful Bidder to furnish two (2) sets of latest of national/inter-national

codes and standards to owner.
2.00.00 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGN
2.01.00 The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the design of the whole and
every portion of the Plant, whether or not the design work was undertaken
specifically in relation to the Contract and whether or not the Contractor was
directly involved in the design work.
Page 396 of 630

2.02.00 Notwithstanding the Owner's wish to receive the benefits of new, advanced and
improved technologies, a prime requirement is that all the systems and
components proposed shall have been already adequately developed and shall
have demonstrated good reliability under similar, or more arduous conditions
elsewhere, at least for continuous 2 years in two different power station.
2.03.00 The successful bidder shall have to carry out surge analysis, BFP transient
analysis and other transient condition studies as may be necessary and as
required by the Owner as per proven engineering practice.
2.04.00 The Bid shall include a detailed discussion on the development status of, and
the reasons for any changes made in proposed systems or components for the
Plant, as compared with similar items previously supplied in other installations
cited by the bidder as reference plants.
2.05.00 The Bidder may also make alternate offers, provided such offers are superior in
his opinion in which case adequate technical information, operating feed back,
etc. are to be enclosed with the offer, to enable the Owner to assess the
superiority and reliability of the alternatives offered. In case of each alternative
offer, its implications on the performance, guaranteed efficiency, auxiliary
power consumptions, etc. shall be clearly brought out to the Owner to make an
overall assessment. In any case, the base offer shall necessarily be in line with
the specifications i.e. Base offer shall be as per the technical specifications and
the same will be considered for techno-commercial evaluation.
3.00.00 NAME PLATES (RATING PLATES)
3.01.00 Instruction plates, name plates or labels shall be permanently attached to each
main and auxiliary item of plant in a conspicuous position. These plates shall
be engraved with the identifying name, type and manufacturers serial number,
together with the loading conditions under which the item of plant has been
designed to operate.
3.02.00 Items such as valves, etc. which are subject to hand operation, shall be
provided with nameplates so constructed as to remain clearly legible
throughout the life of the plant giving due consideration to the difficult climatic
conditions to be encountered. Nameplates shall be securely mounted where
they will not be obscured in service by insulation, cladding, actuators or other
equipment. Direction of flow is also to be engraved.
3.03.00 All trade nameplates and labels shall be in English language. All
measurements shall be in M.K.S. Units.
3.04.00 The size and location of nameplates shall be subject to Approval of the
Engineer.
4.00.00 SAFETY AND SECURITY
4.01.00 The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the
safety of all personnel and for the safety and security of all persons and
Page 397 of 630

property. The design shall comply with all appropriate statutory regulations
relating to safety. All structures and equipment shall be designed and
constructed to withstand every foreseeable static and dynamic loading
condition, including loading under earthquake conditions, with an adequate
margin of safety.
4.02.00 Ready and safe access with clear head room shall be provided to all parts of
the plant for operation, inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
4.03.00 Escape routes and clear ways shall be provided to allow speedy evacuation of
the plant in the event of fire or explosion, and the plant layout shall allow for
ease of access to all parts of the Works by rescue and fire fighting teams. The
plant layout shall be designed to localise and minimise the effects of any fire or
explosion. The recommendations of NFPA, OSHA, and TAC etc. as necessary
shall be followed in all respects.
4.04.00 The use of corrosive, explosive, toxic or otherwise hazardous materials shall be
kept to a minimum during construction and the design of the plant shall
minimise the requirement for such materials during operation and maintenance.
Where such materials must be used, all necessary precautions shall be taken
in the design, manufacture and layout of equipment to minimise the resulting
hazard, and all equipment necessary for the protection and first-aid treatment
of personnel in the event of accidents shall be provided. Particular attention is
drawn to avoid the use of materials containing asbestos in any form.
5.00.00 GUARDS
5.01.00 Effective guards and fences must be provided to prevent injury to operators
through accident or malpractice.
5.02.00 Mesh guards which allow visual inspection of equipment with the guard in place
are generally preferable. The guards shall be constructed of mesh attached to
a rigid framework of mild steel rod, tube, or angle and the whole galvanised to
prevent loss of strength by rusting or corrosion. The guards shall be designed
to facilitate removal and replacement during maintenance.
5.03.00 All drive belts, couplings, gears, sharp metallic edges and chains must be
safely guarded. Any lubricating nipple requiring attention during normal running
must be positioned where they can be reached without moving the guards.
5.04.00 Guards for couplings and rotating shafts shall be in accordance with BS
5304-1975 or similar approved standard. All rotating shafts and parts of shafts
must be covered.
5.05.00 Suitable fencing shall be provided to enclose all openings or doorways used for
the hoisting and lowering of machinery etc. This fencing must be securely fixed
but quickly detachable when required. A secure hand hold must be provided
on each side of the opening or doorway.
Page 398 of 630

6.00.00 LOCATION AND LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
The majority of plant and equipment (excluding steam generator and some
other auxiliaries) shall all be of indoor installation. A broad list of buildings
housing such equipment is given elsewhere in this specification. Layout should
facilitate access for operation-maintenance and inspection of any one or more
equipment/components at a time without disturbing the operation or installation
of rest of the plant. Further, Bidder should comply with the criteria given under
the various equipment and system specifications as well as those stipulated in
Annexure-II attached to this section.
Enclosed General Layout and other tender layout drawings show the location of
major installations and auxiliary buildings. The Bidder shall try to retain these
locations as far as practicable. The layout of equipment within the power house
as shown in the tender drawings is indicative. The Bidder may, subject to
Owner's approval alter the same to suit the space requirement of the
equipment offered.
Bidder may give as an alternative his own preferred layout clearly indicating the
advantages and other implications, if any. Such alternative will not be
considered for evaluating the bid, but may be considered with the successful
Bidder if Owner/Engineer finds the proposal more attractive in terms of
techno-economic consideration.
While developing the layout of buildings the following criteria shall be given
effect :
a) The minimum width of clear access corridors around equipment shall be

1.2 meter.
b) Each building shall have an identified vacant space for equipment

unloading and maintenance and preferably a separate bay altogether in
buildings housing heavy equipment. Provision for handling equipment
by monorail hoist and/or overhead crane shall be made as specified.
c) The minimum clear height available between two consecutive floor

slabs shall not be less than five (5) meters. A clear head room of 2.5m
shall be maintained between the floor and any overhead piping/ cables
or other obstruction. Adequate provision for natural ventilation and
illumination shall be made as per good engineering practices.
d) There shall be at least two (2) nos. main access doors, one on either
side of each building, of which one shall be minimum 3 meters wide
with rolling shutters for equipment entry. For multistoried buildings, at
least two (2) nos. regular staircases diagonally opposite to each other
shall be provided connecting all the floors and roof. These minimum
requirements shall be augmented as required depending on the floor
area, statutory requirements and TAC recommendations.
e) All buildings shall have provision for toilet and associated effluent
discharge system together with facility for drinking water. The criteria for
ventilation, fire protection and illumination of building spaces specified
Page 399 of 630

elsewhere in this specification shall be complied with.
f) All rail/road crossings for pipe/cable racks shall be done with minimum
8 meters headroom from top of rail/road to bottom of rack. Similarly top
cover over underground pipes/cables shall be minimum one (1) meter.
For other detail refer to Annexure-II.
g) Cubicle for operating personnel shall be located at safe place near the
equipment.
h) Interplant cable routing will be on overhead cable trays on pipe cum

cable trestle or on cable trestle except where approved by
purchaser/consultant. In exceptional case, small stretch of outdoor run
of interplant cable routing may be taken through cable trench only with
the Employers prior approval.
i) Concept of various mechanical and electrical equipment location and

building dimensions (including column-row spacing) as shown in Plot
Plan/Floor Plan drawing are to be adhered to. Any departure from this
suggestive layout is primarily not recommended.
7.00.00 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE & AVAILABILITY CONSIDERATIONS
7.01.00 Equipment/works offered shall be designed for high availability, high reliability,
low maintenance and ease of operation & maintenance. The Bidder shall
specifically state the design features incorporated to achieve high degree of
reliability, availability, operability and ease of maintenance. He shall also furnish
details of availability records in plants stated in his experience list.
7.02.00 Ample space for ease of operation and maintenance including equipment
removal, tube bundle/cartridge/rotor pulling etc. shall be provided. All valves,
gates, dampers and other devices shall be located and oriented in such a way
that they are accessible from operating floor levels. Where this cannot be
adhered to, platforms and walkways with access ladders shall be provided to
facilitate operation and maintenance.
7.03.0 Motorised lifting devices, i.e. hoists, chain pulleys, jacks, etc. shall be provided
for handling and carrying out maintenance of any equipment and/or part having
weight in excess of 3000 Kg. Suitable beams, hooks etc. for this purpose shall
be provided in the buildings.
No lifting arrangement is necessary for part having weight less than 500 Kg.
Hoist shall be well protected by environment. Suitable painting and coating
covering hoist at outdoor shall be provided.
Lifting devices like lifting tackles, slings, etc. to be connected to hook of the
hoist/crane shall be provided by the Bidder for lifting the equipment,
accessories covered under this specification.
7.04.00 All similar parts of the equipment shall be made to gauge and shall be
interchangeable with and shall be made of same material and workmanship as
the corresponding parts of the equipment. Where feasible common
Page 400 of 630

components shall be employed in different pieces of equipment in order to

optimize the spares inventory and utilization.
8.00.00 MATERIALS
8.01.00 In selecting materials of construction of equipment, the Contractor shall pay

particular attention to the atmospheric conditions existing at the Site and the
nature of material/fluid handled. Wherever deviations are taken in respect of
materials specified, the reasons shall be spelt out clearly in the proposal.
All materials shall be new, and shall be of the quality most suited to the
proposed application.
8.02.00 In as far as is possible; materials shall be in accordance with Indian or

international standard specifications and shall be used in accordance with
Indian or international codes of practice. Where such standards or codes of
practice are not available sufficient information shall be provided to allow the
Owner to assess the suitability of the material for the particular application.
All materials used shall have performed lengthy satisfactory service in similar or
more arduous conditions to those proposed by the Contractor.
8.03.00 All parts which could deteriorate or corrode under the influence of the
atmospheric, meteorological or soil conditions at the Site, or under the
influence of the working conditions shall be suitably and effectively protected so
that such deterioration or corrosion is a minimum over the life of the plant.
9.00.00 LUBRICATION
9.01.00 Provision shall be made for suitable efficient lubrication where necessary to
ensure smooth operation free from undue wear.
9.02.00 Non ferrous capillary tubing shall be used throughout.
9.03.00 Gear boxes and oil baths shall be provided with filling and drain plugs, both of
adequate size. An approved means of oil indication including level switches
and temperature indication shall be provided.
9.04.00 All high speed gears shall be oil bath lubricated. Low speed gears shall be
lubricated by means of soft grease. Removable and accessible drip pans shall
be provided to collect lubricant which may drop from operating parts.
9.05.00 All lubrication points shall be conveniently situated for maintenance purposes. It
must be possible to carry out lubrication from a gangway or landing and without
the removal of guarding or having to insert the hand into it. Where accessibility
to a bearing for oiling purposes would be difficult a method of remote lubrication
shall be fitted.
9.06.00 The Contractor shall supply grease gun equipment suitable to service each
type of nipple fitted.
Page 401 of 630

10.00.00 LUBRICANTS AND CONTROL FLUIDS
10.01.00 The Contractor shall provide a detailed and comprehensive specification for all
lubricating oils, greases and control fluids required for the entire plant. A
sufficient supply of these shall be provided by the Contractor for initial
commissioning, first fill and till COD of the unit.
10.02.00 The Contractor shall supply a detailed schedule giving the lubricant testing,
cleaning and replacement procedures. All equipment and facilities necessary
for the testing, cleaning and changing of lubricants and control fluids shall be
provided. The Contractor shall endeavor to reduce the varieties and grades of
required lubricants and control fluids to a minimum, matching them where
possible to those already in use in the generating station in order to simplify
procurement and minimise storage requirements. All lubricants and control
fluids shall be of internationally recognised standards and shall be easily
obtainable from a large number of Indian suppliers. Bidder shall also indicate
the equivalent Indian Standard for the above for easy procurement in future.
10.03.00 No lubricant or control fluid shall have toxic or other harmful effects on
personnel or on the environment.
11.00.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
11.01.00 The plant shall be designed and constructed so that operation and
maintenance manpower requirements are minimised.
The design and layout shall facilitate inspection, cleaning, maintenance and
repair. The importance of continuity of operation is second only to that of safety.
11.02.00 Spare parts for equipment shall be interchangeable with the original
components and, so far as possible, be of common design and manufacture.
11.03.00 All similar standard components/parts of similar standard equipment provided

shall be interchangeable with one another. Further identical equipments shall
be provided for similar duties so that the same are interchangeable with one
another in totality and component wise.
11.04.00 All heavy parts (500 Kg and above) must be provided with a convenient
arrangement for slinging and handling during erection and overhaul. Any item
of plant normally stripped or lifted during periods of maintenance and weighing
one tonne or above, shall be clearly marked with its weight.
11.05.00 On completion of commissioning, a complete set of tools for the maintenance

of the entire plant shall be provided by the Contractor. This shall include all
necessary spanners, special wrenches, extraction equipment and any special
tools reasonably required by the Engineer. Tools used during erection and
commissioning shall not be accepted except with the specific approval of the
Engineer.
11.06.00 All equipment and major valves should be provided with adequate maintenance
approach and facility.
Page 402 of 630

12.00.00 PLANT LIFE AND MODE OF OPERATION
The complete plant including all the equipment and systems individually and
collectively shall be designed for continuous operation for an economic service
life of thirty (30) years under the prevailing site conditions and for the type of
duty intended.
The critical components of the Steam Generator, Turbine-Generator and

Auxiliary equipment, the life of which is limited by time and temperature
dependent mechanisms such as thermal stress, creep and low cycle fatigue,
are to be designed considering expected (hot, warm and cold) start-up, shut-
down and cyclic load variations.
The allowable stresses shall be reduced so that life expectancy to minimum

2,00,000 hours of operation can be achieved. The Bidder shall discuss this
aspect in his technical proposal.
The unit would be operated on base load with cyclic load variation. The load
variation is expected to be as per schedule depending on power demand.
The expected start-ups should be considered as minimum

(Based on HPT metal temperature)
Cold start-up ( >72 hrs. shutdown) : 6 per year
Warm start-up (between 10 to 72 hrs. of shutdown) : 40 per year
Hot start-up (Iess than 10 hrs. shutdown) : 160 per year
13.00.00 PACKAGING & MARKING
All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and
crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage
at site till the time of erection. While packing all the materials, the limitations
from the point of view of availability of railway wagon sizes in India should be
taken account of. The details of various wagons normally available with Indian
Railways for transportation of heavy equipment shall be considered by the
Bidder. The Contractor shall be responsible for all loss or damage during
transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing.
As per the information available, the dimensions of OD consignment for

transportation of the equipment by rail (if any equipment to be handled through
rail transportation) are as below :
a) Width of the Package : 3.2 Meters

(from centre-line of rails
- 1.6 metres on both sides)
b) Height of the package from rail top : 4.47 Meters
The above indicates the dimensions which can be normally transported on the
Page 403 of 630

wagons without infringement of the "moving gauge". This is however not

indicative of the consignment which can be carried out with infringement of
"moving gauge" duly authorised and approved by the Indian Railways. There
may be difference between the "moving gauge" and the "fixed structure gauge"
and consignments infringing the "moving gauge" can be moved after
investigation regarding possible infringement with the fixed structures. As the
critical fixed structures in each route are different, consignments infringing
moving dimensions have to be individually investigated to select a route and
also determine the restrictions under which such movement is to be carried out.
Such routes selected or other mode of transport envisaged is to be clearly
brought out in the proposal wherever transport of over dimensional equipment
is involved.
Bidder to consider unloading of material delivered through rail transportation,

at near by railway station/ site unloading siding. The subsequent
transportation up to project work place shall be considered by road only. All
unloading and handling equipment both at railway station siding and at project
site shall be arranged by the Bidder. Necessary arrangement to be organized
with the railway authority for such purpose shall also be under the scope of
services of the Bidder. Bidder may consider entire material delivered up to
site through rail transportation only.
The identification marking indicating the name and address of the consignee
shall be clearly marked in indelible ink on two opposite sides and top of each of
the packages. In addition the Contractor shall include in the marking gross and
net weight, outer dimension and cubic measurement. Each package shall be
accompanied by a packing note (in weather proof paper) quoting specifically
the name of the Contractor, the number and date of contract and names of the
office placing the contract, nomenclature of contents and Bill of Material.
For imported equipment and material, suitable port facilities may be used in
which case material may be transported from the port by tractor-trailer. Bidder
may consider this aspect.
14.00.00 PROTECTION
Equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be protected by weather-

tight enclosures. Coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion,
discoloration and other damages. Surfaces that are damaged shall be
repainted.
Electrical equipment, controls and insulations shall be protected against

moisture and water damages. All external gasket surfaces and flange faces,
couplings, rotating equipment shafts, bearings and like items shall be
thoroughly cleaned and coated with rust preventive compound as specified
above and protected with suitable wood, metal or other substantial type
covering to ensure their full protection. All exposed threaded parts shall be
greased and protected with metallic or other substantial type protectors.
All piping, tubing and conduit connections on equipment and other equipment
openings shall be closed with rough usage covers or plugs. Female threaded
openings shall be closed with rough usage covers or forged steel plugs. The
closures shall be taped to seal the interior of the equipment. Open ends of
Page 404 of 630

piping, tubing and conduit shall be sealed and taped.
Returnable containers and special shipping devices shall be returned by the

manufacturer's field representative at the Contractor's expense.
15.00.00 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION AND NOISE LEVEL REQUIREMENT
15.01.00 Environment Protection
The plant shall be designed for installation and operation in harmony with the
surrounding environment and all measures of pollution control shall be ensured
by the Bidder to restrict pollution from the liquid effluent and stack emission
within the limits as given below with due consideration of Environment
(Protection) Rules 1986 as amended till date.
In case the Ministry of Environment & Forest stipulate any other conditions not
specified hereunder while clearing the project shall be complied with the plant
by the contractor.
15.01.01 For Liquid Effluent
a) Provision laid down in schedule-I for Thermal Power Plants and also in
Schedule-VI. General Standards for discharge of Environmental
pollutants Part-A : Effects of Environmental (protection) Rules 1986, as
amended till date.
b) Any specific requirement of State Pollution Authorities over and above

the above stipulation.
15.01.02 For Air Emission
a) Suspended Particulate Matter i.e. dust burden at chimney outlet -

Maximum 50 mg/Nm3 (with worst coal and one field out at TMCR).
b) NOx - 365 ppm Max. or 750 mg/Nm3 (Equivalent NO2).
c) SO2 - Concentration based standard 2000 mg/Nm3. Load based

standard 0.2 metric tonne /MWe/day (for first 500 MW and 0.1
metric tonne/MWe/day for rest of the capacity above 500 MW)
In absence of Indian Standard for emission from power plants as on date, for
certain gaseous effluents, the internationally accepted World Bank Standard is
to be followed. Indian Standard for emission of power plants are under
formulation. Should this standard is published before finalisation of the
contract, the bidder has to comply the more stringent of the above norm or the
new Indian Standard.
The bidder shall include in his scope all necessary equipment and measuring
instruments to comply with above requirements. Location and accessibility of
the instruments shall be properly coordinated.
Page 405 of 630

15.02.00 Noise Level Requirement
The plant will be designed, constructed and provided with suitable acoustic
measures to ensure the noise level criteria as per the following stipulations.
a) Maximum noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A) when measured at

1.0M away from the noise emission source.
b) Maximum noise level from its source within the premises shall not
exceed 70 dB (A) as per Environment (Protection) Rules 1986,
Schedule-III, Àmbient Air Quality Standards in respect of noise.
c) Any statutory changes in stipulations regarding noise limitation that may

occur in future according to State Pollution Control Board or Central
pollution Control Board or Ministry of Environment & Forest regulation
during tenure of the contract, the contractor shall comply with the
requirement.
An exception will be made for the plant at startup operations and other big
pressure reducing devices operating during emergency periods and for the
safety valves.
16.01.00 Inspection and Tests during Manufacture
16.01.01 The method and techniques to be used by the Contractor for the control of
quality during manufacture of all plant and equipment shall be agreed with the
Owner prior to the Award of Contract.
16.01.02 The Owners general requirements with respect to quality control and the
required shop tests are set out elsewhere in this specification.
16.01.03 Before any item of plant or equipment leaves its place of manufacture the
Owner shall be given the option of witnessing inspections and tests for
compliance with the specification and related standards.
16.01.04 Advance notice shall be given to the Owner as agreed in the Contract, prior to
the stage of manufacture being reached, and the piece of plant must be held at
this stage until the Owner has inspected the piece, or has advised in writing
that inspection is waived. If having consulted the Owner and given reasonable
notice in writing of the date on which the piece of plant will be available for
inspection, the Owner does not attend the Contractor may proceed with
manufacture having forwarded to the Owner duly certified copies of his own
inspection and test results.
The Contractor shall forthwith forward to the engineer duly certified copies of
the Test Certificates in six copies (one to the Purchaser and five to the
Consulting Engineer) for approval. Distribution of six (6) copies of Test
Certificates for approval will be two(2) copies to owner and four(4) copies to
consultant. These four(4) copies will be further distributed by consultant after
approval to owner, site and bidder. One copy will be retained with the
Page 406 of 630

consultant for record purpose.
Further, nine (9) copies of Shop Test Certificates shall be bound with
Instruction Manuals referred to elsewhere. Distribution of nine (9) copies of
Shop Test Certificates for approval will be Two (2) copies to owner, Three (3)
copies to site, Two (2) copies to consultant, Two (2) copies to owners library /
record.
16.01.05 Under no circumstances any repair or welding of castings be carried out

without the consent of the Owners Engineer. Proof of the effectiveness of each
repair by radiographic and/or other non-destructive testing technique, shall be
provided to the Engineer along with Defect Map.
16.01.06 All the individual and assembled rotating parts shall be statically and
dynamically balanced in the works.
Where accurate alignment is necessary for component parts of machinery

normally assembled on site, the Contractor shall allow for trial assembly prior to
despatch from place of manufacture.
16.01.07 All materials used for the manufacture of equipment covered under this
specification shall be of tested quality. Relevant test certificates shall be made
available to the Purchaser. The certificates shall include tests for mechanical
properties and chemical analysis of representative material or any other test as
required by approved QAP/ Material specification.
16.01.08 All pressure parts connected to pumping main shall be subjected to hydraulic
testing at a pressure of 150% of shut-off head for a period not less than one
hour. Other parts shall be tested for one and half times the maximum operating
pressure or as required by design code of that part, for a period not less than
one hour.
16.01.09 All necessary non-destructive examinations shall be performed to meet the

applicable code requirements.
16.01.10 All welding procedures adopted for performing welding work shall be qualified
in accordance with the requirements of Section-IX of ASME code or IBR as
applicable. All welded joints for pressure parts shall be tested by liquid
penetrant examination according to the method outlined in ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel code. Radiography, magnetic particle examination
magnuflux and ultrasonic testing shall be employed wherever
necessary/recommended by the applicable code. At least 10% of all major
butt welding joints shall be radiographed.
16.01.11 Statutory payments in respect of IBR approvals including inspection for design
and manufacturer of equipment shall be made by the Bidder. All payment for
erection and testing at site (i.e. under IBR jurisdiction) shall also be made by
the Bidder. In such case Contractors scope shall also be extended to
preparation of all necessary documents, co-ordination and follow-up with IBR
authorities for above approval.
16.02.00 Performance Tests at Site
Page 407 of 630

16.02.01 The full requirements for testing the system shall be agreed between the
Owner and the Bidder prior to Award of Contract. The completely erected
System shall be tested by the Contractor on site under normal operating
conditions. The Contractor shall also ensure the correct performance of the
System under abnormal conditions, i.e. the correct working of the various
emergency and safety devices, interlocks, etc.
16.02.02 The Bidder shall provide complete details of his normal procedures for testing,
for the quality of erection and for the performance of the erected plant. These
tests shall include site pressure test on all erected pipe work to demonstrate the
quality of the piping and the adequacy of joints made at site.
16.02.03 The Contractor shall furnish the quality procedures to be adopted for assuring
quality from the receipt of material at site, during storage, erection, pre-
commissioning to tests on completion and commissioning of the complete
system/equipment.
16.03.00 For details of specific tests required on individual equipment refer to respective
section of this specification.
17.00.00 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
The Contractor shall extend all possible assistance and co-operation to the
Purchaser regarding the transfer of technology and developing expertise in the
area of engineering operation and maintenance of the Plant.
Number of man-days of training as mentioned below shall be included in his

Tender.
17.01.00 Training at Contractor's Premises
The Contractor shall conduct training of sixty (60) engineers of the Owner on
engineering, operation and maintenance of the Plant at the Contractor's or
Associates or Sub-contractor's premises where adequate training facilities are
available during the design and manufacturing stage of the Contractor.
The total man-months for training of engineers shall be maximum sixty (60),
having following indicative break-up :
Discipline No. of Engineers No. of Man-month
Operation 20 heads 20
Maintenance 20 heads 20
Boiler, Turbine, Mechanical
Electrical Maintenance 8 heads 4
Control & Instrumentation 8 heads 4
Maintenance Planning 4 heads 2

------------- --------
Page 408 of 630

60 heads 60
------------- --------
However, the details of the training programme will be discussed and finalised
with the successful Bidder.
The training may also be arranged by the Contractor in any Plant where the
equipment manufactured by the Contractor or his Associates is under
installation, operation or testing to enable the trainees to become familiar with
the equipment being furnished by the Contractor. All expenses inherently
related to the training shall be borne by the Contractor and shall include but not
limited to travel expenses (international and inland fares), lodging and per diem
charges as well as medical insurance, instructors fee, programme and
miscellaneous cost to be incurred during the training.
The training programme shall be adequate for the trainees to acquire the
necessary expertise and competence in the area of engineering, operation and
maintenance and as trainers for in-house technology transfer programme of the
Purchaser.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the development of the Training Module
and Programme Schedule which shall be submitted to the Purchaser for
approval.
The components of the training modules shall include but not be limited to the
training procedures/methodology, instructional materials such as audio visual
materials, CDs and slides and manuals for each trainee.
Three (3) sets of the materials included in the training modules shall be handed
over to the Purchaser upon completion of the training. An evaluation shall be
jointly undertaken by the Contractor and the Purchaser's representative on the
adequacy, appropriateness and relevance of the training and the programme
effectiveness after the training. The training material shall be in English
language only.
The content of the training programme shall include but not be limited to:
1. Coal fired thermal plant principles in management and practice for

operators, technicians and maintenance personnel.
2. Plant operation and systems training for operators including simulator

training as applicable.
3. Maintenance training programme covering electrical, mechanical and

instrumentation and control.
Said training programme shall be submitted to the Purchaser for approval.
The timing of the training should be such that the participants will be conversant
with sufficient know-how to participate in the pre-commissioning and
commissioning tests of the Plant.
The Contractor shall provide qualified English speaking instructors and training
Page 409 of 630

coordinator(s) during the tenure of the training programme.
17.02.00 Operation and Maintenance Training at Site
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive training programme related to

design application, plant management, operation and maintenance, including
trouble shooting, of the Contractor's supplied system and equipment at the Site
starting from Start of Commissioning and thereafter up to the Final Acceptance
of the first Unit.
The following instructors shall be at the Site continuously during the training :
a) One (1) for Steam Generator and Auxiliaries ;
b) One (1) for Turbine Generator and Auxiliaries ;
c) One (1) for Electrical Works ;
d) One (1) for Instrumentation and Control (Boiler and Auxiliaries) ;
e) One (1) for Instrumentation and Control (Turbine and Auxiliaries).
17.03.00 On-the-Job Training
During the period of pre-commissioning, commissioning and trial operation, the

Purchaser shall provide operation and maintenance personnel to assist the
Contractor in the operation and maintenance of his supply and work under the
direction of the Contractor for the purpose of on-the-job training.
The Purchaser shall have the right to send to the Site his employees later
intended to operate and maintain the equipment supplied under this Contract.
The Contractor shall, without additional cost, use his site staff to instruct these
employees on the operation and maintenance of the equipment. All instructions
shall be in the English language.
17.04.00 For detail C&I training refer to Volume-VI, Section-9.
18.00.00 DEVIATIONS
The Bidder is required to submit with his proposal in the relevant schedules a
detail list of any and all deviations taken by him clearly without any ambiguity. In
the absence of such a list it will be understood and agreed that the Bidder's
proposal is based on strict conformance to this specification and no post-contract
negotiations would be allowed in this regard.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated in the deviation list, it will be construed

and agreed that details indicated in documents & drawings furnished by the
Bidder along with the offer is in-line with the specification requirement.
Page 410 of 630

ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF STANDARDS FOR REFERENCE
a) International Standards Organisation (ISO).
b) International Electro-technical Commission (IEC).
c) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
d) American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
e) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
f) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
g) American Welding Society (AWS).
h) Architecture Institute of Japan (AIJ).
i) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
j) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
k) Japanese Electro-technical Committee (JEC).
l) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
m) Federal Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA).
n) Instrument Society of America (ISA).
o) National Electric Code (NEC).
p) Heat Exchanger Institute (HEI).
q) Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association (TEMA).
r) Hydraulic Institute (HIS).
s) International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) Publications.
t) Power Test Code for Steam Turbines (PTC).
u) Applicable German Standards (DIN).
v) Applicable British Standards (BS).
w) Applicable Japanese Standards (JIS).
Page 411 of 630

x) Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI).
y) Standards of Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS).
z) Bureau of Indian Standards Institution (BIS).
aa) Indian Electricity Rules.
bb) Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR).
cc) Indian Explosives Act.
dd) Indian Factories Act.
ee) Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC) rules.
ff) Emission regulation of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
gg) Pollution Control regulations of Dept. of Environment, Govt. of India
hh) Central Board of Irrigation and Power (CBIP) Publications.
ii) The Air Prevention and Control of Pollution Act.
jj) The Environmental Protection Act
kk) The Public Liability Insurance Act.
ll) The Forest Conservation Act
mm) The Wildlife protection Act.
nn) The EIA Notification, 1994.
oo) IS: 14665-Specification for Electric Traction Lift
pp) Any other statutory Codes/Standards/Regulations
Page 412 of 630

ANNEXURE-II
CRITERIA FOR LAYOUT
PLOT PLAN LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
ITEM SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENT
A. Site conditions to be considered
1. Prevalent wind direction See wind-rose in plot plan.

Also refer Metrological Data.
B. Layout Requirements
1. Maximum permissible slope in
a) Rail track 1 in 400
b) Road 1 in 30
c) Sides of unpaved embankment 1 in 2
2. Required road width
a) Main roads Refer VII-A, B, C.
b) Auxiliary interconnections Refer VII-A, B, C.
c) Road to the power house unloading bay :
Only for entry to the unloading bay Yes
To pass through the unloading bay No
3. Required minimum horizontal distance

between the nearest points of
a) Plant boundary and the boundary of (Local municipality/factory rule)

residential area
b) Electrical transformer and any other As per the Tariff Advisory

building/facility Committee/ LPA Rules
c) Fire water supply installation and any As per the Tariff Advisory
building/facility subject to fire risk. Committee/ LPA Rules
d) Inflammable liquid (fuel oil, etc.) storage Rules of the Indian Explosive
& handling installation and their fencing (Indian Explosives Act) and
and other buildings/facilities. Indian Petroleum Code
Page 413 of 630

4. Required minimum vertical clearance
a) Under pipes/cable racks at road crossings 8.0 Metres
b) Soil coverage over underground pipes 1.0 Metre (minimum)
5. Railway Wagon clearance Rules of the Indian Railways
6. Minimum Clearance between any road edge 3 Metres

and building/structure/ any fixed installation.
7. Required level, above the local developed

grade level, of
a) top of all roads 150 mm above FGL
b) all outdoor paved areas 100 mm above FGL
c) Temporary storage areas, workshops,

offices, residence etc. required at the
time of erection work. Yes
d) Green belt around power plant area As per environmental guidelines

of MOEF, Govt. of India.
BUILDING/ EQUIPMENT LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum clear space required at all working and

walking areas for operating & maintenance personnel
1. Horizontal, in all directions
a) Adjacent to any electrical equipment, electrical

cables, running (rotating/reciprocating) equipment,
safety valve or vent/drain pipe outlet, pipe/
equipment of surface temperature exceeding 60qC. 1200 mm
b) Adjacent to any other plant facilities (including

walls/structures) 1000 mm
2. Vertical (head-room clearance)
a) Under any pipe/equipment surface

of temperature exceeding 60qC and any
electrical cables or other electrical items. 2.5 Metre
b) Under any other plant facilities (including

structures, pipes etc.) 2.5 Metre
Page 414 of 630

3. For all areas where any equipment (including Minimum 500 mm

trucks, trolleys and other material handling clear in all direction
equipment) will move or maneuver. from the outer edges of the
equipment
4. Minimum clear hand space required for
a) The application of thermal insulation 100 mm
b) Welding work 150 mm
c) Bolt tightening 150 mm
B. Floors, platforms, staircase, ladders, walls,

doors & windows
1. Statutory Requirement As per the regulations of Tariff

Advisory Committee, Indian
National Building Code, Indian
Factories Act, Local Municipal
Rules, etc.
2. Operation & Maintenance Requirement
a) Adequate floor space shall be kept to permit

dismantling, temporary storing and in-situ
maintenance of plant & equipment parts, satis-
fying the clear space requirements stated above.
A separate unloading bay for such purpose is
required. Yes
b) Floors or fixed/portable platforms with stairs/

ladders shall be provided for easy approach to
any plant item, including valves, instruments,
etc. to be operated, observed and/or to be
frequently (more than once a month) maintained. Yes
3. Plinth level of all buildings, above 500 mm

the finished grade level
4. Minimum access opening required 3.5M wide x 4M high or,

(with rolling shutter) for transportation, more depending upon the
wherever entry of truck for material equipment size to be handled.
handling is envisaged
Page 415 of 630

C. Other Maintenance Requirement
1. Generator stator handling

In case the Generator stator cannot be
handled by the turbine house crane, all
provisions for its overhauling, including the
arrangement to slide the stator on the turbine
house floor, the foundation work for stator jacking
/lowering assembly, dismantling of building end
walls/structures etc. shall be kept. Yes
2. Maintenance of the internals/impellers of Shall be possible without

all important equipment, like boiler feed pumps, disconnecting or dismant-
feed water heaters, Surface Condenser, fans ling any piping/ducting.
of the boiler draft plant, Intake and circulating
water pumps, cooling water pumps, coal mills,
compressors, blowers, heat exchangers, fuel
oil pumps, filters etc.
3. Overhauling and handling of the casings for the Shall be possible without
above items disturbing/dismantling any
piping/ducting not directly
connected to them.
4. Crane Approach
Wherever required the unobstructed approach

of the crane hook/other hoisting equipment hook to
various plant & equipment shall be possible. Yes
D. Central Control Room
All electronic equipment other than those directly

associated with control, operation or presentation
of displays shall be mounted external to the control
room in air conditioned control equipment room. Yes
The bidder shall describe in his bid the proposed

layout philosophy of the Central Control Room and
Control Equipment Room and the arrangement of
equipment best suited for the system offered by him
and as per good ergonomically consideration.
However, as a guide line, following features are given :
a) False ceiling and false flooring shall be provided.
b) Uniform height, colouring schemes for cabinets etc.

shall be available.
Page 416 of 630

c) The total area of floor space covered by Control

Consoles/Panels in the Control Room shall not
exceed 15% of floor area.
d) No opening shall be provided from Boiler side.
e) Two double leaf doors, suitably located for

entering the Control room shall be provided
with opening towards the turbine floor.
f) Cable entry for the panels/consoles shall be from

bottom and suitable openings shall be provided.
g) The Control Room lighting shall be designed to

provide a glare free uniform illumination. The level
of illumination shall be minimum 400 LUX.
h) Necessary Air Conditioning shall be provided

for Central Control room, Control Equipment Room
and SWAS room etc.
i) Basic amenities like toilet, Tiffin rooms, wash

basins, rest rooms etc. shall be provided near
the Control Room.
E. Toilet and drinking water facility Required in all buildings and on

all floors wherever operating
personnel are to be deployed.
Page 417 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VI
ENGINEERING SERVICES
Page 418 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 GENERAL
2.00.00 DESIGN COORDINATION MEETING
3.00.00 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER

CONTRACTORS AND CONSULTING
ENGINEERS
4.00.00 GUIDELINES FOR ENGINEERING

SERVICES
5.00.00 OPERATING MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS
6.00.00 PLANT HANDBOOK
7.00.00 CONTRACT STAGE DOCUMENT

SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL PROCEDURE
8.00.00 TENDER STAGE DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE-1 DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
Page 419 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-VI
ENGINEERING SERVICES
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 As part of the overall project management activity, the Contractor shall be
responsible for proper engineering and co-ordination of activities during
various phases of execution of the contract. The Contractor shall identify a
person, designated as Project Manager, with whom the Owner, the
Consulting Engineer or the Review Consultant shall interact on matters
related to engineering as well as execution of the contract. The Project
Manager shall be the single-point contact person on behalf of the Contractor
and shall be responsible for all engineering co-ordination. The
Owner/Consultant/Review Consultant shall interact with the Project Manager
only on all matters of co-ordination between the Owner and the Contractor or
on matters involving the Contractor, his manufacturing units and sub-vendors.
For the purpose of expediting the Owner or his representative may
sometimes interact with the manufacturing units or sub-vendors of the
contractors. However such interaction will not, under any circumstance, dilute
the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a fully engineered and
co-ordinated package under this contract.
1.02.00 On finalization of the contract, a procedure for exchange of engineering

information will be mutually agreed and finalized between the Owner and the
Contractor.
2.00.00 DESIGN COORDINATION MEETING
The Contractor and his sub-vendors will be called upon to attend design
co-ordination meetings with the Engineer, other Contractors and the
Consultants of the Owner during the period of execution of contract. The
Contractor including his sub-vendors shall attend such meetings at their own
cost at Owner's or Consultants office in Kolkata or at mutually agreed venue
as and when required and fully cooperate with such persons and agencies
involved during those discussions.
3.00.00 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AND CONSULTING

ENGINEERS
The Contractor shall agree to cooperate with the Owner's other Contractors
and Consulting Engineers and freely exchange with them such technical
information as is necessary to obtain the most efficient and economical
design and to avoid unnecessary duplication of efforts. The Engineer shall be
provided with copies of all correspondences addressed by the Contractor to
other Sub- contractors and Consulting Engineers in respect of such exchange
of technical information.
Page 420 of 630

4.00.00 GUIDELINES FOR ENGINEERING SERVICES
4.01.00 Prior to commencement of the engineering work as part of design

submissions, all aspects of design viz., criteria for selection and sizing of all
equipment and systems, design margins etc. including that for structural steel
and civil work shall be outlined and these shall form the basis for the detailed
engineering work.
4.02.00 Engineering work shall be performed on modern and proven concepts and
internationally accepted good engineering practices but fully compatible with
the Indian environments. Owner shall have the right to review and approve
the engineering work by themselves and/or through consultant and ask for
any clarifications and changes/modifications to the work performed by
Contractor.
4.03.00 At any stage during the performance of assignment, the Contractor may be
required to make certain changes/modification/improvements in design/
drawing/other documents which are applicable to 800 MW Unit, which in the
opinion of the Owner could result in better improved design, layout,
operability, plant availability, maintainability, reliability or economy of the plant
and its systems/sub-systems in view of revised and more accurate
information/data available at a later date(s) or feedback(s) received during
execution / operation of similar units. Such changes / modifications/
improvements required could be identified by Owner and/or consultant and
mutually discussed. Owner requires the Bidder to incorporate such action in
the subject assignment appropriately without any additional cost liability and
time implication to the Owner and same shall be within the responsibilities
and scope of the Contractor.
4.04.00 During the course of review of detailed engineering stages, it may be

essential in the opinion of Owner to obtain certain classified data for review
purposes only. In case Owner so desires, the Bidder shall submit such data to
Owner.
4.05.00 During the course of review of detailed engineering, it may be essential in

Owner's opinion to obtain data and information on similar equipment and
plants engineered by the Bidder. In case Owner so desires the Bidder shall
submit such data and information to the Owner.
4.06.00 It is not the intent to give details of every single task covered in the total
engineering work to be carried out by Contractor, however, all engineering
work required for the satisfactory completion of the plant/systems as specified
shall be carried out by the Contractor. Broadly, the following are the minimum
requirements in respect of scope of major items of work:
4.06.01 Preparation, updating and finalisation of scheme drawings, control and

interlock diagrams, detailed and fully dimensioned layout drawings (plant
layout and equipment layout detailed plan, elevation and cross-sectional
drawings at different elevations / floor levels) covering all mechanical,
electrical, C&I, civil and structural items, equipment, systems and facilities.
Drawings and Schedules prepared by the Contractor from time to time, as
detailed designs are developed, shall be submitted for Owner's / Consultant's
Page 421 of 630

approval before the work is taken up. Revisions, corrections, additions to

drawings and schedules shall not be considered to change the scope of work.
4.06.02 Preparation of detailed technical specifications including data sheets, tender

drawings and bill of material for all bought out items, as also finalisation of
corresponding sub-contractors.
4.06.03 Review of sub-contractor's data, drawings, design calculations, schedules, bill

of materials, instruction manuals etc. for all equipment, before forwarding
them to Owner/Consultant for approval.
4.06.04 Preparation of civil construction drawings for all equipment showing

foundation details and full details regarding equipment loads, floor openings,
details of embedments etc. required for preparation of civil construction
drawings and also as referred at relevant sections of Scope, Terminal Points
& Exclusions. These documents shall be preceded by appropriate design
calculations, static and dynamic analysis as necessary.
4.06.05 Preparation and finalisation of process piping and instrumentation diagrams

and schematics, complete in all respects for all systems/packages of the
power plant.
4.06.06 Preparation of consolidated schedules and bills of materials, including line

numbers, tag numbers, source of supply, service conditions, specifications,
materials, types and connections details, quantities for items of the plant
including dampers, steam traps, strainers, instrumentations, ducting.
4.06.07 Sizing of all piping and equipment as per the stipulated design criteria;
carrying out of flexibility analysis/dynamic analysis as necessary; hangers &
support engineering.
4.06.08 Final revision of all documents including preparation and compilation of

Instruction Manuals for installation, commissioning, operation and
maintenance for all equipment and systems. Refer clause 5.00.00 for the
specific requirement in this regard.
4.06.09 Certification and submission of final as-built drawings for all areas.
4.06.10 Preparation and compilation of all drawings, schedules and instructions which
may be required at site, whether separately mentioned or not.
4.06.11 All erection and assembly drawings which may be required at site.
4.06.12 For all bought out item packages, the Contractor shall provide complete
material / component list along with detail specification, drawings, component
part no. etc. during detail engineering stage prior to final approval. Such
approved drawing/document shall be made available at site in adequate
number prior to commencement of work. Moreover, such document/drawing
shall be provided in soft form (CD)
4.06.13 Preparation of necessary documentation, design calculations etc. required for

submission to statutory authorities like IBR, Chief Electric Inspector, Factory
Inspector etc.
Page 422 of 630

5.00.00 OPERATING MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
5.01.00 The Contractor shall provide at least six (6) months before the time of
commissioning and before taking over of the plant and equipment, all
necessary maintenance manuals and operating instructions. The instruction
manual shall be submitted in the form of one (1) soft copy in CD and 15 hard
copies as per distribution schedule (Annexure-1).
5.02.00 The information provided, which shall be contained in loose leaf stiff backed
covers, shall include :
a) A complete inventory of all main items of plant, with identification

details.
b) Service manuals for all plant and equipment giving full descriptions of
the main items and auxiliary items such as power packs, hydraulic
equipment, actuators, lubricating pumps, etc.
c) A separate electrical manual covering items such as switchgear,

cabling, instrumentation, controls, cabling layouts and wiring
diagrams.
d) A schedule of recommendations for routine maintenance of all

electrical and mechanical equipment, recommended inspection point,
information on detection, cause and rectifications of troubles & faults.
e) A lubrication schedule with all necessary drawings diagrams to identify

the lubrication points.
f) Manufacturer's literature.
5.03.00 The instruction manual shall be subject to the approval of Owner.
6.00.00 PLANT HANDBOOK
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a preliminary plant handbook

preferably in A-4 size sheets which shall contain the design and performance
data of various plant, equipment and systems covering the complete project
including single line flow diagrams, within twenty four (24) months from the
date of his acceptance of the Letter of Intent. The final plant handbook
complete in all respects shall be submitted by the Contractor six (6) months
before start-up and commissioning activities. The plant handbook shall be
submitted as per distribution schedule.
7.00.00 CONTRACT STAGE DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL

PROCEDURE
7.01.00 Within fifteen (15) days to one month of issue of Letter of Intent (LOI) by the
Owner, the Contractor shall furnish a schedule of drawings and design
Page 423 of 630

document to be submitted by him to the Owner/Engineer indicating dates

against each document.
The documents shall be divided into two categories : a) for approval and b)
for information/further engineering and co-ordination by the Owner.
In preparing this schedule, the Contractor shall allow two (2) weeks from date
of receipt for review and comments by the Owner/Engineer for each
submission of a document.
This document submission schedule shall require approval by the Owner/

Engineer.
7.02.00 All contract documents shall be marked, without fail, with the name of the
Owner, the Project, the specification title and number and the unit
designation.
All dimensions shall be in metric units.
All notes, markings etc. shall be in English.
7.03.00 Documents/Drawings, submitted during tender stage, shall be revalidated or

revised as required and submitted as certified contract document for approval
/ information of the Owner/Engineer.
7.04.00 Unless specified otherwise, the following categories of documents/drawings

would require approval of the Owner/Engineer:
a) List of sub-vendors (from Owner only)
b) System scheme and instrumentation diagrams
c) Design basis justifying selection of equipment & process parameters

where not specified in the Contract
d) Equipment data sheets and general arrangement drawings
e) Materials of construction
f) Layout drawings.
g) Operation logic diagrams.
h) Typical control circuit.
i) Drawings of Instrumentation and control.
7.05.00 Unless specified otherwise, the following categories of documents/ drawings

would be treated for information/further engineering by the Owner/Engineer.
The Contractor shall, however, incorporate all additional information and
clarifications in these documents / drawings as and when desired by the
Owner/Engineer.
Page 424 of 630

a) Equipment foundation drawings.
b) Equipment cross-section drawings, product literature etc. which are of

proprietary nature.
c) Predicted performance curves of equipment.
d) Various bills of quantity, schedules etc.
e) Piping fabrication drawings, isometrics etc.
f) Panel wiring diagrams.
g) Instruction/Operation manuals.
h) Service manuals and trouble shooting guide for C & I system including
field instruments.
i) Cable schedule and interconnection chart.
j) Drive/feederwise control scheme showing all external interfaces.
In essence, the Contractor is solely responsible for corrections and adequacy

of design & engineering for documents under this category.
7.06.00 Upon review, the Owner/Engineer shall put his remarks and one of the
following action stamps on the drawing/document:
a) A - Drawing submitted as approved, proceed with fabrication
b) B - Drawing approved subject to comments noted, proceed with

fabrication, considering our comments. Correct as necessary and
resubmit for record.
c) C - See attached memo.
d) D - Correct your original drawing incorporating our comments and

resubmit for approval.
e) E - Information furnished is noted.
f) F - Prints not enclosed
For action stamps in category (c) & (d), documents must be resubmitted for
review by the Owner/Engineer. For action stamp in category (b), further
review by Owner/Engineer would not be necessary provided the Contractor
agrees & incorporates the comments made on the document.
Except for action stamp under category (c) & (d), the Contractor can proceed
with manufacturing and other sequential activities for those areas of a
drawing/document which do not have any review comment by the Owner/
Engineer.
Page 425 of 630

The Owner/Engineer may accord approval in category (c) or (d) in more than
one submission of a document till he is satisfied that the intent of the
specification has been fully complied with. The Contractor shall be
responsible for delay in such cases and no extension of time shall ordinarily
be allowed on such grounds. Approval of contract documents by the Owner/
Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any errors
and fulfillment of contract requirements.
The Contractor's work shall be in strict accordance with the finally approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without written approval of the
Owner/Engineer.
7.07.00 Except key plan/general yard plan, any layout drawing requiring scrutiny shall
not be drawn to a scale less than 1:50.
7.08.00 For review by the Consulting Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish soft
copies of drawings & documents and three (3) prints of each drawing/
document. Two (2) prints of such submission shall also be sent to the Owner.
After review, comment/approval will be sent to the Contractor. Upon action
under category (a) or (e), the Contractor shall directly distribute the
documents to the various offices of the Owner and other agencies in number
of copies as specified in the contract document. Such distribution copies shall
be marked with the reference and date of the letter by which the Owner/
Engineer has accorded his final approval. Penal action shall be taken against
the Contractor for any unauthorised revision in the drawings so distributed
from the drawings approved by the Owner/Engineer. The contractor shall
furnish three (3) CDs of all as built/final drawings for Owner/Consultant site.
7.09.00 In case of contradiction between the stipulations above and those stated
elsewhere in the specification, the stipulations herein shall prevail.
7.10.00 For details of documentation for Civil, Structural and Architectural works,
VII-A, VII-B and VII-C may be referred.
8.00.00 TENDER STAGE DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
8.01.00 The Bidder shall submit along with his bid all documents/drawings as
requested in respective specifications. The documents shall include but not
be limited to the following :
a) All Bid proposal sheets duly filled up.
b) Detailed experience list and financial resources of the prime bidder his
collaborators/associates in this bid as well as the sub-vendors
proposed.
c) Scheme drawings indicating scope of supply and service as offered by

the Bidder indicating clearly exclusions, if any.
d) List of terminal points of the package offered together with quality and
quantity of various input (i.e. water, air, electricity etc.) as required
from the Owner at such interfaces.
Page 426 of 630

e) Equipment GA, Layout, Design Calculations, interlock and other

write-up, catalogues/literature etc. as required for clear understanding
of the bid submitted.
f) L-1 network indicating target dates for intermediate milestones and

final commissioning of equipment supplied; This network shall be
supplemented by a detailed write-up on proposal procedure of project
implementation, deployment schedule for Key personnel with their
bio-data, schedule of construction machinery etc.
g) List of suppliers for all bought out items.
Page 427 of 630

ANNEXURE-1
DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
TSGENCO M/S DCPL, KOLKATA Equipment

Remarks
Vendor
S.
Description Director Director CE/Civil CE/ TPC-I, CE/ SE/ SE/E&M DE Kolkata HYD KTPS
No
Projects Technical Thermal Hyd O&M/ Civil / KTPS Constr.
Projects KTPS KTPS KTPS
Hyd.
A Letter Of Intent or 1 1 1 S 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
Contract Documents
B Vendor Drawings
1. Preliminary 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 12 1 - S
2. Return preliminary with - - 1 2 1 1 1 1 S 1 - 1
comments
3. Final and any revision
thereof
a. Civil 1 1 6+1T 1 1 6+1T 1 - 2+1T 1 1 S
b. E&M 1 1 1 6+1T 1 1 6+1T 1 2+1T 1 1 S
C. Design Drawings
1. Preliminary
a. Civil 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 S
b. E&M 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 S
2. Released for construction
a. Civil 1 1 2 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 2 S
b. E&M 1 1 1 1 2 1 6 1 1 1 2 S
3. Return marked As built
a. Civil - - 1 - - 1 - - 1 1 S 1
b. E&M - - - 1 - - 1 1 1 1 S 1
4. As built drawings
a. Civil - - 1+1T - 2+1T 5+1T - 1 1+1T - 1 S
b. E&M - - 1 2+1T 2+1T - 5+1T 1+1T 1+1T - 1 S
Page 428 of 630

TSGENCO M/S DCPL, KOLKATA Equipment
Remarks
Vendor
S.
Description Director Director CE/Civil CE/ TPC-I, CE/ SE/ SE/E&M DE Kolkata HYD KTPS
No
Projects Technical Thermal Hyd O&M/ Civil / KTPS Constr.
Projects KTPS KTPS KTPS
Hyd.
D Progress Report Monthly
1. Equipment vendor 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 S
2. M/s DCPL, Kolkata 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 S 1 1 Nil
E Test & Inspection
Reports
1. Equipment manufacturer
a. Civil 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 - 11 1 1 S
s b. E&M 1 1 - 2 1 - 1 1 11 1 1 S
2. M/s DCPL, Kolkata 1 1 - 2 1 - 1 1 S - 1 -
F Instruction Manuals/Data
Books
1. Equipment manufacturer
a. Civil 1 1 1+1T 1 1 6+1T 1 1 2+1T 1 1 S
b. E&M 1 1 - 3+1T 1 - 6+1T 2 3+1T 1 1 S
2. M/s DCPL, Kolkata 1 1 - 10+1T 1 - 15+1T - S 1 1 Nil
G M/s DCPL, Kolkata 1 1 1 8+1T 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 S
Criteria
H Design Calculations 1 1 1 8+1T 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 S
I Final consulting 1 1 1 10 1 1 2 1 S 1 1 Nil
Engineering Report
S Source, T Transparency & Soft Copy on CD,
TSGENCO : Telangana State Power Generation Corporation Limited
Director, Projects, Hyd : Director/ Projects, TSGENCO, Vidyut Soudha, Hyderabad 500 082
Page 429 of 630

Director, Technical, Hyd : Director/ Technical, TSGENCO, Vidyut Soudha, Hyderabad 500 082
CE/ Civil, Hyd : Chief Engineer/Civil, Thermal Projects, TSGENCO, Vidyut Soudha, Hyderabad 500 082
CE/ TPC-I, Hyd : Chief Engineer/TPC, TSGENCO, Vidyut Soudha, Hyderabad 500 082
CE/ O&M/ KTPS : Chief Engineer(O&M), KTPS, Kothagudem, Telangana
SE/Civil, KTPS : Superintending Engineer (Civil), KTPS, Kothagudem, Telangana
SE/E&M, KTPS : Superintending Engineer (E&M), KTPS, Kothagudem, Telangana
DE/Constr./ KTPS : Divisional Enginer/Constrcution, KTPS, Kothagudem, Telangana
M/s DCPL, Kolkata : M/s DCPL, Kolkata.
M/s DCPL, Hyd : M/s DCPL, Hyderabad.
M/s DCPL, KTPS : M/s DCPL, KTPS, Kothagudem, Telangana
Page 430 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-V
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SITE SERVICES
Page 431 of 630

CONTENT
1.00.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SERVICES
2.00.00 SITE SERVICES
3.00.00 PROJECT INFORMATION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM,

INCLUDING DCOUMENT MANAGMENT SERVER (DMS)
Page 432 of 630

VOLUME : IIA
SECTION-V
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SITE SERVICES
1.00.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SERVICES
1.01.00 Responsibility
The Bidder shall identify a separate and independent project management

team headed by a Project Manager for the execution of this project.
Responsibilities of this project Management team shall cover the areas listed
below :
a) Planning and Monitoring
b) Engineering Management
c) Contracts Management
d) Project Safety Management
e) Quality Assurance, Inspection & Expediting
f) Construction Management
g) Spares Management
h) Erection & Commissioning Management
Detailed responsibilities in the above areas are discussed below :
1.02.00 Organisation
1.02.01 Headquarters
The headquarters of the project management team shall be headed by a

senior level executive designated as the Project Manager who shall be
responsible to Owner for the execution of the project. He should have
adequate financial power and authority to give decision.
Separately, designated leaders shall be identified for each of the areas

mentioned under 1.01.00, who, in turn, will report to the Project Manager for
all matters relative to this contract.
1.02.02 Central Co-ordination Cell
The central coordination cell shall have sufficient technical personnel to

coordinate technical matters and to quickly resolve day to day queries or
Page 433 of 630

references made by Owner and his Consultants without having the need to
refer to his headquarters each time.
1.02.03 Site Organisation
The site should have a competent construction manager for all site operations
with adequate financial power and sufficient level of authority to take site
decisions. The organisation chart for site should indicate the various levels of
experts to be posted for supervision in the various fields in civil construction,
erection, commissioning etc.
1.02.04 Organisation Chart
The Bidder shall furnish a detailed organisation chart for the project
management team, clearly identifying the key personnel in each of the areas
mentioned at 1.01.00 above. The expected number of executives at different
levels shall also be indicated, separately for headquarters, central
coordination cell and site organisation.
1.03.00 Implementation Schedule
The schedule for the completion of the Project would be as follows :
Period in Months from Zero date (Taken as

advance payment date of EPC Package)
a) Boiler Hydro-test By Bidder
b) Boiler light up By Bidder
e) Commercial operation 50
To achieve these targets, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, various
schedules as defined below:
1.03.01 Engineering Schedules
These schedules shall cover various design submissions indicating different

engineering activities to be performed. Such schedules shall be furnished by
the Bidder for each and every plant/systems/ equipment item covered in the
scope of this specification.
1.03.02 Manufacturing Schedule
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his manufacturing and delivery
schedules for all equipment within thirty (30) days from the date of issue of
the Letter of Intent (LOI). Such schedules shall be in line with the detailed
network for all phases of the work of the Contractor. Such schedules shall be
reviewed, updated and submitted to the Engineer, once in every two months
thereafter, by the Contractor. Schedules shall also include the materials and
equipment purchased from outside suppliers.
Page 434 of 630

1.03.03 Erection Schedules
In order to achieve the overall completion schedule, the Contractor shall

provide the Owner all the information covering erection sequence, testing and
commissioning activities. These schedules may be based on the
recommended erection procedures and will be subject to discussions/
agreements with the Owner subsequent to the award of contract.
1.03.04 The successful Bidder shall have to provide all the above schedules (i.e.
1.03.01, 1.03.02 & 1.03.03) in a tabular form in addition to that in the form of
L2 & L3 networks and these shall necessarily include information not limited
to the earliest and latest dates for various activities/submissions and also any
related constraints. However, the Bidder shall include in his proposal a Level-
1 (L-1) network showing the major activities and various milestones to
achieve the above mentioned completion schedule.
1.03.05 The Contractor shall provide the Owner the original disc/software for all such
schedules alongwith requisite no. of copies (as required by the Owner) within
an agreed time schedule. This time schedule will be agreed between
Owner/Bidder at the time of award of contract. The Contractor's project
management software shall be compatible with that of the Owner and the
input data shall be furnished to the Owner in a manner compatible with
Owner's project management software, SAP.
1.04.00 Detailed Responsibilities
1.04.01 Planning & Monitoring
a) Planning
The Bidder shall prepare a Master Network Schedule in the form of

PERT network.
The network shall be prepared on a Work Breakdown Structure for the

project which sub-divides the project into a set of manageable
systems/sub-systems. The master network will identify milestones of
key events for each system/package in the areas of engineering,
procurement, manufacture and despatch and erection and
commissioning. The master network shall represent the Level-I plan
and will form the basis for development of detailed second and third
tier execution plans. The master network shall conform to the overall
schedule prescribed by Owner.
The master network should be submitted along with the bid which
would be mutually discussed and finalised before the Award of
Contract. This master network would clearly indicate the responsibility
of the Bidder and project management team. This master network
would form a part of the contract. The master network shall also
identify a complete list of inputs to be furnished by the Owner which
may be required for proper interfacing and tie-up. Scheduled dates for
providing such inputs shall also be indicated, which will be mutually
discussed and finalised.
Page 435 of 630

b) Monitoring & Progress Reporting
The progress reports would be emanated every month, one from the
head office of the Contractor and another from the site office. The
progress report emanating from the head office should necessarily
include the following sections:
i) Report on key milestones.
ii) Management summary indicating critical areas with details of

actions initiated and effect of any on the project.
iii) Action needing attention of the Owner/Consultant.
iv) Detailed packagewise status of engineering submissions,

quality plan submissions and approval, procurement
manufacture and despatch.
The monthly report generated from the site office should necessarily
include:
i) Report on key milestones.
ii) Management summary indicating critical areas with details of

actions initiated and effect if any on the project.
iii) Action needing attention of the Owner/Consultant.
iv) This report would also cover the areas pertaining to the receipt
of the equipment at the port, port clearance, transport, receipt
at site, erection and commissioning.
In addition to the above, as the project execution progresses, the

Contractor shall also be responsible for generating more frequent
reports in the form of fax/e-mail information on progress in critical
areas so that actions can be expedited. The exact format of the
progress report shall be finalised after award of Contract.
1.04.02 Engineering Management
Based on the master network for the project (L-1) the Contractor will prepare
an exhaustive list of engineering activities for the equipment/systems covered
in his scope and a detailed programme of accomplishing the same within the
time frame specified in the master network. This schedule will form the
Level-2 (L-2) network for engineering activities.
Based on (L-2) network, the Contractor shall further develop the Level-3 (L-3)
network for engineering activities which will indicate schedule for data
availability, drawing release date and document submission dates.
Page 436 of 630

Detailed (L-2) and (L-3) networks would be submitted sequentially by the

Contractor within two months from the date of issue of Letter of Intent and
finalised within one (1) month thereafter.
All such networks shall be provided in MS PROJECT software as well as in

other format / software suitable to Owner.
The engineering management team should also co-ordinate all interface

engineering activity between the Contractor and the equipment sub-vendors
so as to ensure the correctness and completeness of related engineering
documentation before the same is submitted to the Owner.
TSGENCO is implementing SAP ERP. Hence the bidder apart from

submission of the hard copies shall upload all the documents, drawings etc. in
soft format in the relevant C- folder environment (web based) and comply with
the additional requirements, if any.
1.04.03 Contracts Management
Based on the master network, the Contractor shall submit L-2 programmes of
manufacture and despatch. In addition, the master network shall also include
periods considered for site activities viz. erection, commissioning etc. These
L-2 programmes would be submitted in 2 months time from the date of award
of contract and finalised within one (1) month thereafter. The Contractor will
also submit site mobilisation plan. This programme would be submitted at the
time of finalisation of award of contract and agreed immediately thereafter so
that immediate development of the various activities at site could take place.
The Contractor should also submit L-3 programmes for the manufacturing,
despatch of the various items. These networks shall also show the customer
hold points (CHP) which have to be cleared by Owner or their authorised
representative(s) before further manufacture can take place. These L-3
programmes for the manufacture and despatch would clearly identify
responsibilities of the Contractor, sub-Contractor and Owner. These networks
shall be submitted within one (1) month of the date of finalisation of the
various sub-contracts by the Contractor.
In case all the manufacture is being done by the Contractor then the L-2
programmes would be themselves amplified to cover details of the
manufacture, inspection, clearance by Owner and despatch.
The Contractor shall also submit the programme for procurement of

boughtout items, detailed shipping schedule and cash flow statement for
Owner's approval.
1.04.04 Quality Assurance, Inspection and Expediting
The Contractor shall submit the list of manufacturers/sub-vendors from whom

the equipment are expected to be procured and the quality assurance plans
thereof for the manufacture shall be approved by the QA group of Owner
before the manufacture is commenced. The list of major suppliers would be
submitted along with the bid and this shall be mutually discussed and
approval will be given by the Owner during contract negotiation meeting prior
Page 437 of 630

to placement of Letter of Intent. This approved list will be binding to the

bidder. In the said list, Owner reserves the right to include reputed/reliable
vendors of his own choice. Regarding the various other sub-vendors, the list
would be submitted within six (6) months of the award of the contract that
shall be scrutinized by the Owner to accord approval. In such list Owner
reserves the right to include vendors of his own choice. No further vendor
approval will be given after twelve (12) months. On the quality plans, the
customer hold points will also be identified based on which Owner would give
clearance for the manufacture to proceed further.
Quality assurance/Inspection group of Owner or its representative would

issue a material despatch clearance certificate (MDCC) after the inspection
clearance which will enable the Contractor to despatch the equipment and
claim the payment. In the despatch programme, the Contractor shall indicate
a schedule of estimated programme, tonnages specifically identifying various
oversize dimensioned consignments (ODC). Further the Contractor will also
be required to ensure at all stages of shipment that packing of all shipments
despatched are suitable for ocean freight to India, handling at the port of
entry, inland transportation and preservation at site upto erection. All
despatch details & item lists shall be made available to both Owner & site
immediately after shipping.
The Contractor shall also expedite all despatches from their own works/works
of their sub-vendors, so as to match with the various activities mentioned at
1.04.03 above.
1.04.05 Construction Management
Based on the L-1 Master Network Programme, within two (2) months of the
issue of Letter of Intent, the Contractor shall submit a programme of
construction/ erection/ commissioning, either in continuation with the
manufacture and despatch or separately for the implementation. These
programmes would be amplified showing when the civil drawings shall be
released by him and construction of civil works shall be completed by him to
facilitate start of erection and subsequent activities and shall form the basis
for site execution and detailed monitoring. The three monthly rolling
programme with the first month's programme being tentative based on the
site conditions would be prepared based on these L-3 programmes. The
Contractor shall also be involved along with the Owner to tie up detailed
resource mobilisation plan over the period of time of the contract matching
with the performance targets.
The L-3 programme would be jointly finalised by the site in charge of the
Contractor with the Owner's project coordinator as well as the site planning
representative. The erection programme will also identify the sequential
erectable tonnages that are required for various equipment which should be
taken care of in the despatch programmes.
Erection and commissioning of the equipment shall also be done under the
supervision of experts from the respective equipment/ system supplier.
1.04.06 Spares Management
Page 438 of 630

Alongwith the proposal for the plant and equipment, the Contractor shall also
submit proposals/schedule for the following:
a) Mandatory spares
b) Recommended spares
While the award for mandatory spares will be finalised at the time of the
award of contract, recommended spares will be finalised thereafter.
1.05.00 Project Progress Review Meetings
Keeping in mind the overall responsibility of the Contractor it is intended that

periodic progress reviews on the entire activities of execution of the project
will be held initially at least once in two (2) months at Hyderabad/site/ at the
discretion of the Owner.. During peak period it may be held once in a month.
These meetings will be attended by reasonably higher officials of the
Contractor and their leading sub- contractors and will be used as a forum for
discussing all areas where progress needs to be speeded up. Actions will be
placed on the concerned agencies and decisions will be taken to
expedite/speed up the progress. Minutes of such meetings will be issued
reflecting the major discussions and decisions taken and circulated to all
concerned for reference and action. The Contractor shall be further
responsible for ensuring that suitable steps are taken to meet various targets
decided upon such meetings.
In addition to the above, and to streamline the construction and erection at

site, a suitable frequency and forum of periodic meetings between the
Contractor and the Owner will be decided upon as part of erection
coordination procedure. Site co-ordination meeting may be held on weekly
basis.
1.06.00 Owner's Consultant
The Owner would appoint a consultant to assist him in some of the areas
mentioned at 1.01.00 above. The details of interaction and procedures for
coordination between Owner / Owners Consultant and Contractor/
Contractor's project management team shall be finalised during contract
negotiations.
1.07.00 Commissioning Management
1.07.01 For commissioning of the various equipment/system covered under the scope
of contract, Owner will form an organisation structure which may consist of
the following committees. The Contractor shall nominate his representative on
one or more of the committee as decided by the Owner:
a) Steering Committee
b) Commissioning Panel.
c) Working Parties
d) Testing Teams.
1.07.02 Commissioning documents shall be prepared by the Contractor in the
Page 439 of 630

following manner and submitted for Owner's approval :
a) Field Quality Plan
This document shall be prepared for the various equipment/ systems

under commissioning and shall have the following objectives to fulfill
and shall be submitted for Owner's approval at least six (6) months
before their actual commissioning :
i) Establish design data against which Plant Performance will be

compared.
ii) Set-out the testing objectives and proposals.
iii) Define the documentation required.
b) Testing/Commissioning Schedule
These shall be prepared for the various equipment/systems under

consideration and shall contain sections like detailed testing method,
programme, safety, individual responsibility and results.
c) Standard Check Lists
Standard check lists are intended for use at the completion of erection
to ensure correct erection, testing and to a limited extent operation for
repetitive items.
1.07.03 Test Reports
After the completion of commissioning activity of equipment/ systems, the

Contractor shall prepare the test reports which shall include all the relevant
information related to various commissioning checks, tests carried out, any
deviations/commissions noticed with respect to the intended design
requirements, sequence of various commissioning activities as actually
adopted vis-a-vis as recommended in the procedures, programme schedules
achieved and any other such information as required. These test reports shall
be submitted in requisite number of copies to the Owner and this should be
duly signed jointly by the Owner/Consultant and the Contractor/Equipment
supplier, who are involved during the commissioning activities.
2.00.00 SITE SERVICES
These services shall be rendered by the Bidder as part of the overall project
management service. The services shall broadly include but not be limited to
the following :
2.01.00 Arranging material despatch from the shop by rail/road and/or sea as
applicable.
2.02.00 Monitoring movement of materials & follow-up as necessary with Railways,

road transport, port clearance etc. from the time of despatch F.O.R. works/
F.O.B. port of shipment by Contractor till receipt of the same at site.
Page 440 of 630

2.03.00 Unloading of materials at Railway Station/Railway Siding inside project area/

Road Transportation, transportation to site store, assessment of lost/
damaged items in transit and arranging insurance claims and replacement of
lost/damaged items. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a report
detailing all the receipts during the week as well as storing, preservation of
material at site.
2.04.00 Issuing materials from site store/open yard from time to time for erection as
per the construction programme. The Contractor shall be the custodian of all
the materials issued till the plant is officially taken over by the Owner after
complete erection and successful trial run & commissioning.
2.05.00 Transportation of materials to their respective places of erection and erection

of the complete plant & equipment as supplied under this specification.
2.06.00 Trial run and commissioning of individual equipment/sub-systems and the

plant as a whole to the satisfaction of the Owner, including supply of
temporary equipment & services for chemical cleaning, steam blowing as well
as performance guarantee tests.
Apart from Boiler, proper chemical cleaning shall be carried out in

following pipe lines/equipment before commissioning
a) Deaerator
b) Boiler feed suction, recirculation leak-off lines
c) Boiler Feed discharge line by passing heaters
d) Attemperation lines
e) Condensate suction & discharge piping upto deaerator

by passing the feed water heaters.
f) Fuel oil lines.
Provision for preservation of individual equipment after trial run and

commissioning e.g. Nitrogen blanketing etc. as necessary shall also be in the
scope of the Bidder.
Safe disposal of effluent after chemical cleaning shall be done by the

contractor.
2.07.00 Supply and application of the final paints and first fill lubricants on all the
equipment to be erected under this specification. Supply of chemicals, lub oils
and other consumables upto COD.
2.08.00 For the purpose of erection and commissioning the Contractor's scope of
work shall include but not be limited to the following :
2.08.01 Deployment of all skilled and unskilled manpower required for erection,
supervision of erection, watch & ward, commissioning and other services to
Page 441 of 630

be rendered under this specification.
2.08.02 Deployment of all erection tools & tackle, construction machinery,

transportation vehicles and all other implements in adequate number and
size, appropriate for the erection work to be handled under the scope of this
specification.
2.08.03 Supply of all consumables, e.g. welding electrodes, cleaning agents, diesel
oil, grease, lubricant etc. as well as materials required for temporary supports,
scaffolding etc. as necessary for such erection work except those listed under
exclusion elsewhere in this specification.
2.08.04 Construction of all civil/structural/architectural works, including construction of

foundation for all equipment supplied as required, grouting of equipment on
foundation after alignment, and all other incidental civil activities as detailed
elsewhere.
2.08.05 All structural steel fabrication and erection work as detailed elsewhere in the
specification.
2.08.06 Providing support services for the Contractor's erection staff e.g. construction
of site offices, temporary stores, residential accommodation and transport to
work site for erection personnel, insurance cover, watch & ward for security
and safety of the materials under the Contractor's custody etc. as required.
2.08.07 Maintaining proper documentation of all the site activities undertaken by the
Contractor as per the proforma mutually agreed with the Owner; submitting
monthly progress reports as also any such document as and when desired by
the Owner; taking approval of all statutory authorities e.g. Boiler Inspector,
Factory Inspector, Inspector of Explosives, Electrical Inspector etc. for
respective portions of work under the jurisdiction of such statutes or laws.
2.08.08 The Contractor shall provide Ìndustrial Relations' unit and `Medical' unit to
take care of his erection staff and the Owner shall have no obligation in the
regard.
2.08.09 The successful Bidder shall arrange for Tower cranes of adequate capacity
for speedy erection activities.
2.09.00 Site Organisation
The Contractor shall maintain a site organisation of adequate strength in

respect of manpower, construction machinery and other implements at all
times for smooth execution of the contract. This organisation shall be
reinforced from time to time, as required, to make up for slippages from the
schedule without any commercial implication to the Owner. The site
organisation shall be headed by a competent construction manager having
sufficient authority to take decisions at site.
On award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a site

organisation chart indicating the various levels of experts to be deployed on
the job. The Owner reserves the right to reject or approve the list of personnel
Page 442 of 630

proposed by the Contractor. The persons, whose bio-data have been

approved by the Owner, will have to be posted at site and deviations in this
regard will not generally be permitted.
The Contractor shall also submit to the Owner for approval a list of
construction equipment, erection tools, tackle etc. prior to commencement of
site activities. These tools & tackle shall not be removed from site without
written permission of the Owner.
2.10.00 General Guidelines for Field Activities
2.10.01 The Contractor shall execute the works in a professional manner so as to

achieve the target schedule without any sacrifice on quality and maintaining
highest standards of safety and cleanliness.
2.10.02 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Owner and other Contractors
working in site and arrange to perform his work in a manner so as to minimise
interference with other Contractors' works. The Owner's engineer shall be
notified promptly of any defect in other Contractor's works that could affect the
Contractor's work. If rescheduling of Contractor's work is requested by the
Owner's engineer in the interest of overall site activities, the same shall be
complied with by the Contractor. In all cases of controversy, the decision of
the Owner shall be final and binding on the Contractor without any
commercial implication.
2.10.03 The Engineer shall hold weekly meetings of all the Contractors working at
Site at a time and a place to be designated by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall attend such meetings and take notes of discussions during the meeting
and the decisions of the Engineer and shall strictly adhere to those decisions
in performing his Work. In addition to the above weekly meeting, Engineer
may call for other meetings either with individual contractors or with selected
number of contractors and in such a case the Contractor, if called will also
attend such meetings.
2.10.04 Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible
for performance of his Work in accordance with the specified construction
schedule. If at any time the Contractor is falling behind the schedule, he shall
take necessary action to make good of such delays by increasing his work
force or by working overtime or otherwise accelerate the progress of the work
to comply with the schedule and shall communicate such action in writing to
the Engineer, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The
Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action.
2.10.05 The Engineer shall however not be responsible for provision of additional
labour and or materials or supply or any other services to the Contractor
except for the co-ordination work between various Contractors as set out
earlier.
2.10.06 The works under execution shall be open to inspection & supervision by the
Owner's engineer at all times. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to
the Owner before covering up or otherwise placing beyond the reach of
inspection any work in order that same may be verified, if so desired by the
Owner.
Page 443 of 630

2.10.07 Every effort shall be made to maintain the highest quality of workmanship by
stringent supervision and inspection at every stage of execution.
Manufacturer's instruction manual and guidelines on sequence of erection
and precautions shall be strictly followed. Should any error or ambiguity be
discovered in such documents, the same shall be brought to the notice of the
Owner's engineer. Manufacturer's interpretation in such cases shall be
binding on the Contractor.
2.10.08 The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of the local
authorities, all statutory laws including Minimum Wages, Workmen
Compensation etc. All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in
respect of the work executed by the Contractor shall be to his account.
2.10.09 All the works such as cleaning, checking, leveling, blue matching, aligning,
assembling, temporary erection for alignment, opening, dismantling of certain
equipments for checking and cleaning, surface preparation, edge preparation,
fabrication of tubes and pipes as per general engineering practice at site,
cutting grinding, straightening, chamfering, filling, chipping, drilling, reaming,
scrapping, shaping, fitting-up bolting/welding, etc., as may be applicable in
such erection and are necessary to complete the work satisfactorily, are to be
treated as incidental and the same shall be carried out by the Contractor as
part of the work.
2.10.10 In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification as laid
down in the contract such as, blue matching, welding of stainless steel parts,
etc., the work shall be carried out in accordance with the instructions and
requirements of the Engineer and as per the Standards.
2.10.11 It may sometimes be necessary to remove some of the erected structural

members to facilitate erection of bigger/pre-assembled equipment. In such
cases, the removal and re-erection of such members, which are essential,
and if so agreed by the Engineer, will have to be done by the Contractor.
2.10.12 Attachment welding of necessary instrumentation tapping points,

thermocouple pads, root valves, condensing vessels, flow nozzles and control
valves etc., both for regular measurement and performance testing to be
provided on equipment, its auxiliaries or pipelines covered within the scope of
this tender, will also be the responsibility of the Contractor and the same will
be done as per the instructions of Engineer. The erection and welding of all
above items will be the Contractor's responsibility, even if :
a) Product groups under which these items are re-leased are not
covered in the scope of this tender.
b) Items are supplied by an agency other than the Contractor.
2.10.13 Preservation of all materials/equipment under custody of the Contractor

during storage, pre-assembly & erection, commissioning etc., shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. All necessary preservatives and consumables
like paints, etc., shall be arranged by the Contractor. Necessary touch up
painting, periodic application of preservatives/paints on pressure parts/other
equipment even after erection until completion of work shall be carried out by
Page 444 of 630

the Contractor. The Contractor shall fabricate piping, install lub oil systems
and carry out the acid cleaning of fabricated piping. The Contractor shall also
service the lub. oil system, carryout the hydraulic test of oil coolers, etc.
2.10.14 It is responsibility of the Contractor to do the alignment etc. if necessary,

repeatedly to satisfy Engineer, with all the necessary tools & tackle,
manpower, etc. The alignment will be complete only when jointly certified so,
by the Contractor's Engineer & Owner. Also the Contractor should ensure that
the alignment is not disturbed afterwards.
2.10.15 Additional platforms for approaching different equipment as per site

requirement, which may not be indicated in drawings, shall be fabricated and
erected by the Contractor. The materials required for these works shall be
supplied by the Contractor and he will have to fabricate them to suit the
requirement.
2.10.16 Equipment and material which are wrongly installed shall be removed and
reinstalled to comply with the design requirement at the Contractor's expense,
to the satisfaction of the Owner/ Consultant.
2.10.17 Before erection of any equipment on a foundation, the Contractor shall check
and undertake if necessary rectification of foundation bolts, reaming of holes,
drilling of dowels, matching of bolts and nuts, making new dowel pin, etc.
2.10.18 Assistance for calibrating/testing the power cylinders, valves, gauges,

instruments, etc., and setting of actuators coming under various groups shall
be provided by Contractor.
2.10.19 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide ladders on columns

for initial works till such time stairways are completed. For this, the ladder
should not be welded on the column and should be prefabricated clamping
type. No temporary welding on any structural member is permitted except
under special circumstances with the approval of Owner.
2.10.20 Structural materials required for the supporting/operating platforms required

for the valves at various levels for the same operation of valves will be
arranged by the Contractor.
2.10.21 For civil, structural and architectural works, volume VII-A, VII-B, VII-C may be
referred. For Instrumentation and Electrical works Vol. VI, V-A and V-B may
be referred.
2.11.00 Safety
Safety and overall cleanliness of work site shall be given top priority.
2.11.01 The Contractor shall ensure the safety of all workmen, materials and
equipment either belonging to him or to others working at site. He shall
observe safety rules & codes applied by the Owner at site without exception.
2.11.02 The Contractor shall notify the Owner of his intention to bring to site any
equipment or material which may create hazard. The Owner shall have the right
to prescribe the conditions under which such equipment or material may be
Page 445 of 630

handled and the Contractor shall adhere to such instructions. The Owner may
prohibit the use of any construction machinery, which according to him is
unsafe. No claim for compensation due to such prohibition will be entertained by
the Owner.
2.11.03 Storage of petroleum products & explosives for construction work shall be as
per rules and regulation laid down in Petroleum Act, Explosive Act and
Petroleum and Carbide of Calcium Manual. Approvals as necessary from
Chief Inspector of Explosives or other statutory authorities shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2.11.04 The Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage of his and his
sub-contractor's radioactive sources.
2.11.05 All requisite tests & inspection of handling equipment, lifting tools & tackle
shall be done by the Contractor and certified copies shall be supplied to the
Owner. Defective equipment shall be removed from service. Any equipment
shall not be loaded in excess of its recommended safe working load.
2.11.06 All combustible waste and rubbish shall be collected and removed from the
worksite at least once each day. Use of undercoated canvas paper,
corrugated paper, fabricated carton, plastic or other flammable materials shall
be restricted to the minimum and promptly removed.
2.11.07 The Contractor shall provide adequate number of fire protection equipment of
the required types for his stores, office, temporary structures, labour colony
etc. Personnel trained for fire-fighting shall be made available by the
Contractor at site during the entire period of the Contract.
2.11.08 All electrical appliances used in the work shall be in good working condition
and shall be properly earthed. No maintenance work shall be carried out on
live equipment. The Contractor shall maintain adequate number of qualified
electricians to maintain his temporary electrical installation.
2.11.09 All workmen of the Contractor working in construction site shall wear safety
helmets, safety boots and safety belts. The Contractor shall take appropriate
insurance cover against accidents for his workmen as well as third party.
2.11.10 All the worksites shall be provided with adequate lighting facilities e.g. flood
lighting, hand lamps, area lighting etc. by the Contractor for proper working
environment during night times.
2.11.11 All safety precautions shall be taken for welding and cutting operations as per
IS-818.
2.11.12 All safety precautions shall be taken for foundation and other excavation
marks as per IS-3764.
2.12.00 Taking Delivery & Storage
2.12.01 The Contractor shall arrange issue of all equipment and materials to be
erected under the contract from the stores/open yard at site by signing on
standard indent forms. After completion of work, detailed auditing of the
Page 446 of 630

materials so issued shall be submitted to the Owner.
2.12.02 The Contractor shall arrange for proper and safe storage of materials till the
same are taken over by the Owner as per terms of the contract.
Manufacturer's instructions for preservation shall be strictly followed.
2.12.03 All empty containers, packing materials, gunny bags, transport frames and
also surplus and unused materials reconciliation prior to completion of
contract shall be the property of the Owner and returned to the Owner by the
Contractor.
2.13.00 Site Welding & Heat Treatment
2.13.01 Welding shall be done in accordance with IS-813, IS-816, IS-9595 & other
relevant IS/International standards and as per instructions of Contractor. Only
those welders, who are qualified as per IS-817 for ordinary welds and as per
IBR/ASME Section-IX for high pressure welds, shall be employed in the job.
2.13.02 All welders shall be tested and approved by Engineer before they are actually
engaged on the work even though they may possess the requisite certificates.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any welder without assigning any
reason. The welder identification code as approved by the Engineer shall be
stamped by the welder on each joint done by them. The Contractor will be
responsible for the periodic renewal, re-testing of the welders as demanded
by Owner.
2.13.03 The Engineer is entitled to stop Contractor's any welder from his work if his
work is unsatisfactory for any technical reason or there is a high percentage
of the rejection of joints welded by him, which in the opinion of Engineer will
adversely affect the quality of welding even though the welder has earlier
passed the tests. The welders having passed the tests do not relieve the
Contractor from his contractual obligations, to check the performance of the
welders.
2.13.04 All charges for testing of welders including destructive and non- destructive
tests if conducted by Owner or by the inspection authority at site shall have to
be borne by the Contractor. The necessary test materials and consumables
will have to be arranged by the Contractor and all testing facility made
available, as required.
2.13.05 All welded joints shall be subject to acceptance by Engineer. Inspection of

welds shall be in accordance with IS-822 or equivalent code.
2.13.06 Preheating/post heating and stress relieving after welding are part of
fabrication and erection work and shall be performed by the Contractor in
accordance with the instruction of Engineer. Contractor shall arrange to
supply heating equipment with automatic recording devices. Also the
Contractor shall have to arrange for the labour, heating elements,
thermocouples, compensating cables, insulation materials like mineral wools,
asbestos cloth, ceramic beads, asbestos rope, etc. required for the
heat-treatment and stress relieving works. During pre- heat/stress relieving
operations, the temperature shall be measured at one or more points as
required by attaching thermocouples and recorded on a continuous printing
Page 447 of 630

type recorder. All the record graphs for the heat treatment works carried out
shall be got signed by the Engineer prior to the commencement of each cycle
and handed over to Engineer on completion. The graphs will be the property
of Owner. The Contractor has to provide thermo-chalks temperature
recorders, thermocouple attachments, units, graph sheets, etc. required for
the job and maintain them in good condition.
2.13.07 All electrodes shall be baked and dried in the electric/electrode drying oven to
the required temperature and for the period specified by the Engineer before
they are used in erection work. The electrodes used shall be as per IS-814,
IS-815, IS-1442, IS-7280 and other codes as applicable, and shall be of
approved reputed manufacture. The electrodes shall meet the requirement of
the pipe material. No electrode manufactured more than 12 months ago and
the type covered under certificate issued after conducting tests more than 6
months ago shall be used. All electrodes shall be preserved at works and at
site as per manufacturer's recommendations.
2.13.08 Oxy-acetylene flame or Exothermic chemical heating for stress relieving is not
permitted. Heating shall be by means, of electric induction coil or electric
resistance coil.
2.13.09 It may become necessary to adopt inter layer radiography/MPT/UT depending

upon the site/technical requirement necessitating interruptions in continuation
of the work and making necessary arrangement for carrying out the above
work.
2.13.10 Gas tungsten arc welding process (TIG) shall be adopted for all root pass
welds except for structural works until 4.75 mm thickness is deposited.
Subsequent welding after root pass can be carried out by manual metal arc
welding with coated electrodes. For pipes of thickness less than 6 mm the
entire welding has to be carried out by TIG welding.
Fillet weld shall be made by shielded metal arc process as per applicable
codes.
However, the Engineer will have the option of changing the method of welding
as per site requirement. The method adopted for manual arc welding shall be
weaving technique and the width of weaving shall not exceed 1.5 times of the
dia. of the electrode.
In case of deviation from welding process and electrodes, the Contractor shall
take approval of the Owner prior to adoption of same.
2.13.11 The root pass for butt joints shall be such as to achieve full penetration with
complete fusion of root edges.
2.13.12 Each pass shall be cleared and freed of slag before the next pass is
deposited.
2.13.13 On completion of each run, craters, weld irregularities, slag etc. shall be
removed by grinding or chipping.
2.13.14 Each layer of welding shall have an even and smooth appearance.
Page 448 of 630

2.13.15 Welding sequence shall be adjusted in such a way that distortion due to
welding shrinkage is minimised. Further any movement, shock or vibration
during welding shall be avoided to prevent weld cracks.
2.13.16 Proper protection of welders and the work shall be taken during periods of
rain. No welding shall be carried out when surface to be welded are wet from
any cause.
2.13.17 Following will be stages of inspection during welding :
a) Two pieces to be joined shall be individually checked for the weld

edge preparation and profile dimensionally and to the template. Dye
penetrant check shall be carried out on edge prepared surfaces at
random. The percentage will depend upon on criticality as specified by
Engineer.
b) Joint fit up will be a stage of inspection. Misalignment after fit up may

vary from 0.3 mm to 1.6 mm depending on outside diameter and
thickness.
c) All joints shall be offered for visual inspection after root run.
Subsequent welding should be made only after the approval of root
run.
2.13.18 All welded joints shall be painted with anti-corrosive paint immediately on
completion of radiography and stress-relieving.
2.14.00 For further details on procedures of work at site on civil, architectural,

electrical and instrumentation & control services, refer Volume : V, VI & VII of
this specification.
3.00.00 PROJECT INFORMATION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, INCLUDING

DCOUMENT MANAGMENT SERVER (DMS)
3.01.00 Contractor shall submit as part of its Work Scope detailed documentation as
outlined in this section and / or required by the Technical Requirements. The
content and format of the documentation to be submitted are subject to
Owners approval.
3.02.00 Contractor shall utilise a computer based system for control and management
of project documentation. The system must be capable of producing
customized reports and information on demand. This control system should
have been successfully applied to similar projects and be familiar to the
project control personnel selected. Contractors detailed project
documentation plan shall identify all documentation requirements for the
project, the party responsible for production of the document, the basic
content of the document and the required timing for issue. This plan shall
include, but not be limited to the details of all Drawings to be produced, plant
specification / definition documentation, equipment orders and manuals. The
documentation identified shall be entered into the computer based control
system The database thus created shall be capable of being sorted and
Page 449 of 630

ordered on a variety of selected parameters such as document type, subject

description, responsible party, start date and finish date, to enable review and
update to be conducted only on those documents which are relevant.
3.03.00 Regular documentation control progress reports shall be prepared by the

Contractor to record the status of documentation. In the event either Party or
Engineer expresses concern with the content of such progress reports, the
accuracy of progress reports, status of documentation production and other
such matters, the concern will be identified to the Project Manager. Within five
days of notification of this concern, the Project Manager will attend a meeting
with relevant Owner Representatives and provide details of specific actions to
be initiated to satisfactorily overcome the difficulties identified. It will be the
Project Manger,s responsibility to initiate whatever action is necessary to
ensure that the production of documentation is completely in accordance with
Project Information Management System (PIMS).
3.04.00 Within 90 days after Effective Date of Contract, the Contractor shall establish
an integrated PIMS which will support the needs of Project and management,
detail design and engineering, procurement, construction and operation, and
maintenance.
PIMS shall utilise software which links various software and database
programs to form a composite system. The typical scope of PIMS shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Power plant systems and equipment data, from which Project specific flow
diagrams, data sheets and other integrated data are derived. The Power
plant systems and equipment data, from which Project specific flow
diagrams, data sheets and other integrated data are derived. This data
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(i) System descriptions and design requirements and design criteria
(ii) Equipment and material technical specifications for all engineering

disciplines
(b) Detail engineering data to create flow diagrams, plant arrangements,

piping configurations, equipment layout and design, electrical and
instrumentation systems, structures, and other systems. The software tool
used shall be capable of manipulation and storage of plant layout and
design information. The 3D model of the plant shall also contain details of
the various components like pipe, structural steel work, etc., and relevant
information shall be available on-line from relevant data base. Software
shall be multi-user, multi-access nature allowing the designers of
Contractor and major Sub-Contractors, if required, to work in interactive
real time environment and software shall be capable of interference
checking. The software shall allow access to different types of information
held in the database. It shall estimate the type and quantity of materials
required to build the plant and it shall be possible for such data to be
taken off the system at any time.
Page 450 of 630

(c) Construction data to monitor and manage site activities, including material
control, scheduling and progress, quality control, start-up and testing,
operation, maintenance, training, and all other site functions.
(d) Plant design and construction records to provide data for safe and
efficient maintenance and operation. Records to include may be
maintenance schedule, man power tracking, tools, spare parts, and test
equipment inventory, equipment list, drawing, control, technical
specifications, and equipment instruction manuals.
3.05.00 The PIMS shall be installed in a distributed processing array system and
operated through personal computer work stations at the Contractors site
office. A complete integrated system shall be implemented. This system shall
be utilised by Contractor during the Project execution.
Page 451 of 630

DM PLANT SECTION: D2
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION D2
ELECTRICAL

Telangana State Power Generation Corporation Ltd EPC Bid Document

VOLUME: V-A
SECTION-II
FOR
A.C. & D.C. MOTORS
(e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15/V-A/SEC-II)
Page 453 of 630


CONTENT
1.00.00 SCOPE
3.00.00 SERVICE CONDITIONS
4.00.00 TYPE AND RATING
5.00.00 PERFORMANCE
6.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
7.00.00 ACCESSORIES
8.00.00 TESTS
9.00.00 DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS
ATTACHMENT
ANNEXURE-A DESIGN DATA
Page 454 of 630


VOLUME: V-A
SECTION-II
FOR
A.C. & D.C. MOTORS
1.00.00 SCOPE
1.01.00 This section covers the general requirements of the drive motors for power
station auxiliary equipment.
1.02.00 Motors shall be furnished in accordance with both this general specification
and the accompanying driven equipment specification.
1.03.00 In case of any discrepancy, the driven equipment specification shall govern.
2.01.00 All motors shall conform to the latest applicable IS, IEC and CBIP Standards/
Publications except when otherwise stated herein or in the driven equipment
specification.
2.02.00 Major standards, which shall be followed, are listed below other applicable
Indian Standards for any component part even if not covered in the listed
standards shall also be followed:
i) IS-325
ii) IS-12615
iii) IEC-60034
3.01.00 The motors will be installed in hot, humid and tropical atmosphere highly
polluted at places with coal dust and/or fly ash.
3.02.00 Unless otherwise noted, electrical equipment/system design shall be based

on the service conditions and auxiliary power supply given in the annexure to
this specification.
3.03.00 For motor installed outdoor and exposed to direct sunrays, the effect of solar
heat shall be considered in the determination of the design ambient
temperature.
4.00.00 TYPE AND RATING
4.01.00 A.C. Motors
4.01.01 Motors shall be general purpose, constant speed, squirrel cage, three/single
phase, induction type.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.V-A/S-II: 1

Page 455 of 630


4.01.02 All motors shall be rated for continuous duty. They shall also be suitable for
long period of inactivity.
4.01.03 LT motor & HT motor name-plate rating at 50qC shall have at least 15%
margin and 10% margin respectively over the input power requirement of the
driven equipment at rated duty point unless stated otherwise in driven
equipment specification.
4.01.04 The motor characteristics shall match the requirements of the driven
equipment so that adequate starting, accelerating, pull up, break down and
full load torques are available for the intended service.
4.01.05 Motors efficiency class shall be IE1, IE2 as per latest version of IEC-60034.
4.02.00 D.C. Motors
4.02.01 D.C. motor provided for emergency service shall be shunt/compound wound
type.
4.02.02 Motor shall be sized for operation with fixed resistance starter for maximum
reliability.
Starter panel complete with all accessories shall be included in the scope of
supply.
5.00.00 PERFORMANCE
5.01.00 Running Requirements
5.01.01 Motor shall run continuously at rated output over the entire range of voltage
and frequency variations as given in the annexure.
5.01.02 The motor shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at full load for 5 minutes
without injurious heating with 75% rated voltage at motor terminals.
5.01.03 The motor shall be designed to withstand momentary overload of 60% of full
load torque for 15 second without any damage.
5.02.00 Starting Requirements
Motor shall be designed for direct online starting at full voltage. Breakaway
starting current as percentage of full load current for various motor rating shall
not exceed the given below-
Motors up to 1500kW - 600% subject to IS tolerance of plus

20%.
Motors above 1500kW - 450% not subject to any positive

tolerance.
5.02.01 The motor shall be capable of withstanding the stresses imposed if started at
110% rated voltage.

Page 456 of 630


5.02.02 Motor shall start with rated load and accelerate to full speed with 80% rated
voltage at motor terminals except mill motor. Mill motor shall start with rated
load and accelerate to full speed at 85% of the rated voltage at the motor
terminals.
5.02.03 a) Two hot starts in succession with motor initially at normal running
temperature.
b) Pump motor subject to reverse rotation shall be designed to withstand

the stresses encountered when starting with shaft rotating at 125%
rated speed in reverse direction.
5.02.04 The motors shall be designed to withstand 120% of rated speed for 2 minutes
without any mechanical damage.
5.03.00 Stress During Bus Transfer
5.03.01 The motor may be subjected to sudden application of 150% rated voltage
during bus transfer, due to the phase difference between the incoming
voltage and motor residual voltage.
5.03.02 The motor shall be designed to withstand any torsional and/or high current
stresses, which may result, without experiencing any deterioration in the
normal life and performance characteristics.
5.04.00 Locked Rotor Withstand Time
5.04.01 The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% rated voltage
shall be more than motor starting time by at least 3 seconds for motors up to
20 seconds starting time and by 5 seconds for motor with more than 20
seconds starting time.
5.04.02 Starting time mentioned above is at minimum permissible voltage of 80%

rated voltage.
5.04.03 Hot thermal withstand curve shall have a margin of at least 10% over the full
load current of the motor to permit relay setting utilising motor rated capacity.
6.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
6.01.00 Enclosure
6.01.01 All motor enclosures for outdoor, semi-outdoor & indoor application shall
conform to the degree of protection IP-55 unless otherwise specified. Motor
for outdoor or semi-outdoor service shall be of weather-proof construction
with canopy.
6.01.02 For hazardous area approved type of increased safety enclosure shall be
furnished.
6.02.00 Cooling
6.02.01 The motor shall be self ventilated type, either totally enclosed fan cooled IC
411(TEFC), totally enclosed tube ventilated IC 511(TETV) or closed air circuit
air- cooled IC 611(CACA).

Page 457 of 630


6.02.02 For large capacity motors not available with above type of cooling may be
accepted with IC 81W or IC 91W, closed air circuit water cooled (CACW)
subject to the approval of the owner.
6.03.00 Winding and Insulation
6.03.01 All insulated winding shall be of copper.
6.03.02 All motors shall have class F insulation but limited to class B temperature rise.
6.03.03 Windings shall be impregnated to make them non-hygroscopic and oil

resistant.
6.04.00 Tropical Protection
6.04.01 All motors shall have fungus protection involving special treatment of
insulation and metal against fungus, insects and corrosion.
6.04.02 All fittings and hardwares shall be corrosion resistant.
6.05.00 Bearings
6.05.01 Motor shall be provided with antifriction bearings, unless sleeve bearings are
required by the motor application. Bearings shall be rated for minimum
service life of 40,000Hrs.
6.05.02 Vertical shaft motors shall be provided with thrust and guide bearings. Thrust
bearing of tilting pad type is preferred.
6.05.03 Bearings shall be provided with seals to prevent leakage of lubricant or

entrance of foreign matters like dirt, water etc. into the bearing area.
6.05.04 Sleeve bearings shall be split type, ring oiled, with permanently aligned, close
running shaft sleeves.
6.05.05 Grease lubricated bearings shall be pre-lubricated and shall have provisions
for in-service positive lubrication with drains to guard against over lubrication.
LT motors 15kW and above shall be provided with external greasing
arrangement.
6.05.06 Oiled bearing shall have an integral self cooled oil reservoir with oil ring
inspection ports, oil sight glass with oil level marked for standstill and running
conditions and oil fill and drain plugs.
6.05.07 Forced lubricated or water cooled bearing shall not be used without prior
approval of Owner.
6.05.08 Lubricant shall not deteriorate under all service conditions. The lubricant shall
be limited to normally available types with IOC equivalent.
6.05.09 Bearings shall be insulated as required to prevent shaft current and resultant
bearing damage.
6.06.00 Noise & Vibration

Page 458 of 630


6.06.01 All HT motors shall be provided with vibration pads for mounting of vibration
detectors. Vibration monitoring devices shall be provided on DE and NDE
side in x&y direction with remote DCS monitoring, alarm and tripping.
6.06.02 The maximum double amplitude vibrations for HT motors upto 1500 rpm shall
be 25 microns and 15 microns upto 3000 rpm. For 415V motors, maximum
double amplitude vibrations upto 1500 rpm shall be 40 microns and 15
microns upto 3000 rpm.
6.06.03 The noise level shall not exceed 85db (A) at 1.5 meters from the motor.
6.07.00 Motor Terminal Box
6.07.01 Motor terminal box shall be detachable type and located in accordance with
Indian Standards clearing the motor base- plate/ foundation
6.07.02 Terminal box shall be capable of being turned 360 Deg. in steps of 180 Deg.
for HT motors and 90 Deg. for LT motors unless otherwise approved.
6.07.03 The terminal box shall be split type with removable cover with access to
connections and shall have the same degree of protection as motor.
6.07.04 The terminal box shall have sufficient space inside for termination/connection
of XLPE insulated armoured aluminium cables.
6.07.05 Terminals shall be stud or lead wire type, substantially constructed and
thoroughly insulated from the frame.
6.07.06 The terminals shall be clearly identified by phase markings, with

corresponding direction of rotation marked on the non-driving end of the
motor.
6.07.07 The terminal box shall be capable of withstanding maximum system fault
current for a duration of 0.25 sec.
6.07.08 For 11000V and 3300V motor, the terminal box shall be phase-segregated
type. The neutral leads shall be brought out in a separate terminal box (not
necessarily phase segregated type) with shorting links for star connection.
6.07.09 Motor terminal box shall be furnished with suitable cable lugs and double
compression brass glands to match with cable used.
6.07.10 The gland plate for single core cable shall be non-magnetic type.
6.07.11 Minimum clearances to be provided between phase to phase and phase to

earth shall be as under-
Voltage Rating of Motor Minimum Ph-Ph & Ph-Earth clearance
0.415 kV : 25 mm
3.3 kV : 65 mm
11.0 kV : 140 mm

Page 459 of 630


Note: In case it is not possible to maintain these clearances, the live parts
shall be totally insulated from earth and other Phases. Adequate clearances
shall be provided for cable connections.
6.08.00 Grounding
6.08.01 The frame of each motor shall be provided with two separate and distinct
grounding pads complete with tapped hole, GI bolts and washer.
6.08.02 The grounding connection shall be suitable for accommodation of ground

conductors as follows:
Rating Conductor Size
Above Up to
------- 5.5 kW : 8 SWG GI Wires.
5.5 kW 22 kW : 25mm X 4mm GS Flat.
23 kW 55 kW : 40mm X 6mm GS Flat.
56kW 174kW : 50mm X 8mm GS Flat.
175kW ABOVE : 75mm X 10mm GS Flat.
6.08.03 The cable terminal box shall have a separate grounding pad.
6.09.00 Minimum Cable Size for LT & HT Motors shall as be as follows-
a) For 415V, 3-Ph, LT Motors-
Rating : Cable Size
Above Up to
------- 5.5 kW : 1R X 3C X 6 Sq.mm

5.5 kW 11 kW : 1R X 3C X 10 Sq.mm
11 kW 22 kW : 1R X 3C X 35 Sq.mm
22 kW 37.5 kW : 1R X 3C X 70 Sq.mm.
37.5kW 55 kW : 1R X 3C X 150 Sq.mm

55 kW 75 kW : 1R X 3C X 300 Sq.mm
75 kW 110kW : 2R X 3C X 150 Sq.mm
110 kW 175kW : 2R X 3C X 300 Sq.mm
b) For 3.3kV & 11kV, 3-Ph, HT Motors-
Rating : Cable Size
Above Up to

Page 460 of 630


175 kW 1000 kW : 1R X 3C X 240 Sq.mm

1000 kW 2000 kW : 2R X 3C X 240 Sq.mm
2000 kW 4500 kW : 2R X 3C X 300 Sq.mm
4501 kW 10,000 kW : 9R X 1C X 1000 Sq.mm.
Note: During detail engineering if higher cable size is required same shall be
provided.
6.10.00 Rating Plate
In addition to the minimum information required by IS, the following

information shall be shown on motor rating plate :
a) Temperature rise in Deg.C under rated condition and method of

measurement.
b) Degree of protection.
c) Bearing identification no. and recommended lubricant.
d) Location of insulated bearings.
7.00.00 ACCESSORIES
7.01.00 General
Accessories shall be furnished, as listed below, or if otherwise required by

driven equipment specification or application.
7.02.00 Space Heater
7.02.01 Motor of rating 30 kW and above shall be provided with space heaters,
suitably located for easy removal or replacement.
7.02.02 The space heater shall be rated 240 V, 1 Phase, 50Hz and sized to maintain
the motor internal temperature above dew point when the motor is idle.
7.02.03 Minimum Cable Size for space heater shall be as listed-
i) For LT motors: 2.5 sq.mm, 2-Core copper cable complying with IS-
1554(Part-1).
ii) For HT motors: 6 sq.mm, 2 Core aluminium cable complying with IS-
1554(Part-1).
7.03.00 Temperature Detectors
7.03.01 All 11000V and 3300V motors shall be provided with twelve (12) nos. simplex
type winding temperature detectors, four (4) nos. per phase.

Page 461 of 630


7.03.02 11000V and 3300V motor bearing shall be provided with duplex type
temperature detectors.
7.03.03 The temperature detector mentioned above shall be resistance type, 3 wire,
platinum wound, 100 Ohms at 0qC.
7.03.04 Leads of all simplex type motor winding RTDS and motor bearing RTDS shall
be wired up to respective switchgear metering & protection compartment.
From which one set of RTDS will be connected to numerical protection relay
and another set shall be kept free for DDCMIS connectivity.
7.03.05 0.5 sq.mm annealed tinned copper conductor complying with IS-1554(Part-1).
shall be used for RTD/BTD wiring.
7.04.00 Indicator/Switch
7.04.01 Dial type local indicator with alarm contacts shall be provided for the
following:
a) 11000 V and 3300V motor bearing temperature.
b) Hot and cold air temperature of the closed air circuit for CACA and
CACW motor.
7.04.02 Flow switches shall be provided for monitoring cooling water flow of CACW
motor and oil flow of forced lubrication bearing, if used. CACW motor shall be
provided with water leakage detector with remote alarm and tripping.
7.04.03 Alarm switch contact rating shall be minimum 2.0 A at 220V D.C. and 10A at
240V A.C.
7.05.00 Current Transformer for Differential Protection
7.05.01 Motor 1000 kW and above shall be provided with three differential current
transformers mounted over the neutral leads within the enclosure.
7.05.02 The arrangement shall be such as to permit easy access for C.T. testing and
replacement. Current transformer characteristics shall match Owner's
requirements to be intimated later.
7.06.00 Accessory Terminal Box
7.06.01 All accessory equipment such as space heater, temperature detector, current
transformers etc., shall be wired to and terminated in terminal boxes,
separate from and independent of motor (power) terminal box.
7.06.02 Accessory terminal box shall be complete with double compression brass
glands and pressure type terminals to suit owners cable connections.
7.07.00 Drain Plug
Motor shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain the water, resulting
from the condensation or other causes from all pockets of the motor casing.

Page 462 of 630


7.08.00 Lifting Provisions
Motor weighing 25 Kg. or more shall be provided with eyebolt or other

adequate provision of lifting.
7.09.00 Dowel Pins
The motor shall be designed to permit easy access for drilling holes through
motor feet or mounting flange for installation of dowel pins after assembling
the motor and driven equipment.
7.10.00 Painting
For paint shade finish, refer Section-X of Volume: II-A : Lead Specification.
8.00.00 TESTS
Routine and Type Tests are to be conducted in presence of customers

representative as per IS:325 and in addition,any special test called for in the
driven equipment specification shall be performed and required copies of test
certificates are to be furnished for approval. In addition, following tests shall
have to be carried out on the motors in presence of OWNERs representative
on 3.3kV/11kV motors.
a. Impulse test by 1.2 / 50 micro sec. On sample coil of Stator winding

insulation as type test as per IEC-60034, part -15 test voltages as
under :
Voltage rating of motor Impulse Test Voltage

3.3 kV 18 kV peak
11 kV 49 kV peak
b. Tan delta, charging current and dielectric loss measurements on each

phase of motor stator winding as routine test.
c. Polarization Index Test as per IS: 7816 as routine test
d. Test for suitability of IPW 55(Weather proof) as per IS 4691 as type

test. Type test certificate for first numeral shall be acceptable in lieu to
test, provided the test motor is identical to motor being supplied.
Second numeral test shall be carried out on one motor of each type
and rating.
e. Fault Withstand Test for main terminal box as type test. Type test
certificate shall be acceptable, if the test is conducted on exactly
identical terminal box.
f. Test for noise level as routine test.
g. Test for vibration as routine test.

Page 463 of 630


h. Tan delta measurement on coils.
i. Surge withstand test for inter turn insulation.
j. Test to diagnose rotor bar failure during manufacture.
k. Over speed test as routine test.
l. Temperature rise test.
Temperature rise under normal condition above ambient temperature shall be

limited to-
Specified Design Thermometer Method Resistance Method

Ambient temperature
50 deg.C 60 deg.C 70 deg.C
Tests indicated at (h), (i), (j) shall be carried out during manufacture of the
coils and shall be furnished for verification.
9.01.00 Drawings, Data & Manuals shall be submitted in triplicate with the bid and in
quantities and procedures as specified in General Conditions of Contract
and/or elsewhere in the specification for approval and subsequent distribution
after the issue of 'Letter of Intent'.
9.02.00 To be Submitted with the bid
a) List of the motors
b) Individual motor data sheet as per format of the proposal data sheets.
c) Scheme & write-up on forced lubrication system, if any
d) Type test report
9.03.00 To be submitted for Owner / Purchasers Approval and Distribution
All relevant drawings and data pertaining to the equipment like GTP, GA
drawing, foundation plan, QAP, etc. shall be submitted by the Bidder for
approval of Owner/Owners consultant. Also refer clause no. 1.19.02(u) of
Section-I of Volume V-A: Technical Specifications for Electrical Equipment
& Accessories.

Page 464 of 630


ANNEXURE-A
DESIGN DATA
1.0 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Supply Description Consumer
H.V. Supply 11000 V, 3, 3W, 50 Hz, Motors 1500 kW & above

Non-effectively earthed
Fault level 44 kA symm.

for 1 sec.
M.V. Supply 3300 V, 3, 3W, 50 Hz, Motors 175 kW and

Non-effectively earthed Up to less than 1500 kW.

for 1 sec.
L.V. Supply (i) 415V, 3, 3W, 50 Hz Motors above 0.2kW

effectively earthed and below 175kW.

for 1 sec.
(ii) 240V AC/415V AC Motors upto 0.2kW.
240V, 1, 2W, 50 Hz Lighting, Space heat-

effectively earthed ing , A.C supply for Contr-
ol & protective devices.
D.C. Supply 220V, 2W, unearthed D.C. alarm, control

& protective devices
Fault level 25* kA.
for 1 sec.
* Indicative only, the actual value will be decided by the Bidder, after substantiating the
same by calculation.
Note-
x 415V or 3.3 kV may be adopted by the bidder for the drives in the range of 160-210
kW.
x 3.3 kV AC supply for CHP conveyor motors of rating above 160 kW is to be used.
x The voltage rating of the drives indicated above is for basic guideline. Minor
variations can be accepted on case to case basis based on techno-economic
considerations of the various sub-systems.
x Voltage rating for special purpose motors viz, VFD and screw compressors, shall be
as per manufacturer's standard. All the motors ratings on Stacker/ reclaimer shall be
415V ac supply only.

Page 465 of 630


2.0 RANGE OF VARIATION
A.C. Supply :
Voltage : 10%
Frequency : +3% to -5%
Combined Volt + frequency : 10% (absolute sum)
During starting of large motor, the voltage may drop to 80% of the rated voltage for a
period of 60 seconds. All electrical equipment while running shall successfully ride
over such period without affecting system performance.
D.C. Supply :
Voltage : 187 to 242 Volt

Page 466 of 630


VOLUME: V-A
SECTION-III
FOR
ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS
(e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15/V-A/SEC-IIII)
Page 467 of 630


CONTENT
1.00.00 SCOPE
2.00.00 STANDARDS
4.00.00 RATING
5.00.00 PERFORMANCE
6.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT
7.00.00 ACCESSORIES
8.00.00 TEST
ATTACHMENT
ANNEXURE-A DESIGN DATA
(e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15/V-A/SEC-IIII)
Page 468 of 630


VOLUME: V-A
SECTION-III
FOR
1.00.00 SCOPE
1.01.00 This Section covers the general requirements of Electric Motor Actuators for
valves/dampers.
1.02.00 All electric motor actuators shall be furnished in accordance with this general
specification and the accompanying driven equipment specification. All the
electrical actuators shall be INTEGRAL type only.
2.00.00 STANDARDS
2.01.00 All electrical equipment shall conform to the latest applicable IS, ANSI and
NEMA Standards, except when stated otherwise herein or in driven
equipment specification.
2.02.00 Major standards, which shall be followed, are listed below. Other applicable
Indian Standards for any component part even if not covered in the listed
standards shall also be followed
i) IS-9334
ii) IS-325
3.01.00 The actuator shall be suitable for operation in hot, humid and tropical
atmosphere, highly polluted at places with coal dust and/or fly ash.
3.02.00 Unless otherwise noted, electrical equipment/system design shall be based

on the service conditions and auxiliary power supply given in the general
specification.
3.03.00 For actuator motor installed outdoor and exposed to direct sun rays, the effect
of solar heat shall be considered in the determination of the design ambient
temperature.
4.00.00 RATING
4.01.00 For isolating service, the actuator shall be rated for three successive
open-close operation of the valve/damper or 15 minutes, whichever is longer.
4.02.00 For regulating service, the actuator shall be suitably time-rated for the duty
cycle involved with necessary number of starts per hour, but in no case less
than 150 starts per hour.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V.V-A/S-III: 1

(e-PCT/TS/K/02/2014-15/V-A/SEC-XIII)
Page 469 of 630


5.00.00 PERFORMANCE
The actuator shall meet the following performance requirements:
5.01.00 Open and close the valve completely and make leak-tight valve closure
without jamming.
5.02.00 Attain full speed operation before valve load is encountered and imparts an
unseating blow to start the valve in motion (hammer blow effect).
5.03.00 Operate the valve stem at standard stem speed and shall function against
design differential pressure across the valve seat.
5.04.00 The motor reduction gearing shall be sufficient to lock the shaft when the
motor is de-energised and prevent drift from torque switch spring pressure.
5.05.00 The entire mechanism shall withstand shock resulting from closing with
improper setting of limit switches or from lodging of foreign matter under the
valve seat.
6.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT
6.01.00 Construction
6.01.01 The actuator shall essentially comprise the drive motor, torque/ limit switches,
gear train, clutch, hand wheel, position indicator/ transmitter, in-built
thermostat for over load protection, space heater and internal wiring.
6.01.02 The actuator enclosure shall be totally enclosed, dust tight, weather-proof
suitable for outdoor use without necessity of any canopy. Degree of protection
of enclosure for motor actuator shall be IP-65.
6.01.03 All electrical equipment, accessories and wiring shall be provided with tropical
finish to prevent fungus growth.
6.01.04 The actuator shall be designed for mounting in any position without any
lubricant leakage or operating difficulty.
6.02.00 Motor
6.02.01 The drive motor shall be three phase, squirrel cage, induction machine with
minimum class B insulation and IPW-55 enclosure, designed for high torque
and reversing service. Canopy shall be provided for outdoor service.
6.02.02 The motor shall be designed for full voltage direct on-line start, with starting
current limited to 6 times full-load current.
6.02.03 The motor shall be capable of starting at 85 percent of rated voltage and
running at 80 percent of rated voltage at rated torque and 85 percent rated
voltage at 33 percent excess rated torque for a period of 5 minutes each.
6.02.04 Motor leads shall be terminated in the limit switch compartment.
6.02.05 Motor actuators for valves/dampers shall be with integral starter with
3phase/3wire, 415V AC and operable from remote.

Page 470 of 630


6.02.06 Earthing terminals shall be provided on either side of the motor.
6.03.00 Limit Switches
Each actuator shall be provided with following limit switches: -
6.03.01 2 torque limit switches, one for each direction of travel, self-locking,
adjustable torque type.
6.03.02 4 end-of-travel limit switches, two for each direction of travel.
6.03.03 2 position limit switches, one for each direction of travel, each adjustable at
any position from fully open to fully closed positions of the valve/damper.
6.03.04 Each limit switch shall have 2 NO + 2 NC potential free contacts. Contact
rating shall be 5A at 240V A.C. or 0.5A at 220V D.C.
6.04.00 Hand Wheel
Each actuator shall be provided with a hand wheel for emergency manual
operation. The hand wheel shall declutch automatically when the motor is
energized.
6.05.00 Position Indicator/Transmitter
The actuator shall have:
6.05.01 One (1) built-in local position indicator for 0-100% travel.
6.05.02 One (1) position transmitter, 4-20 mA current signal as position feedback, for
remote indicator.
6.06.00 Space Heater
A space heater shall be included in the limit switch compartment suitable for
240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz supply.
6.07.00 Wiring
All electrical devices shall be wired up to and terminated in a terminal box. All
wiring shall be done with 1100V grade fire resistance PVC insulated stranded
copper conductor of not less than 2.5 Sq.mm cross section. All wiring shall be
identified at both ends with ferrules. All the electrical actuators shall have
uniform wiring.
6.08.00 Terminal Box
The terminal box shall be weather proof, with removable front cover and cable
glands for cable connection. The terminal shall be suitable for connection of
2.5 Sq.mm copper conductor.
7.00.00 ACCESSORIES

Page 471 of 630


As required for the driven equipment, the actuator shall be furnished with
starting equipment mounted on the actuator. This shall include:
7.01.00 One (1) triple pole MCCB
7.02.00 One (1) reversing starter with mechanically interlocked contactors, 3 thermal
overload relays, 2 NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts for each contactor.
7.03.00 One (1) remote-local selector switch.
7.04.00 CLOSE-STOP-OPEN oil tight push buttons with indication lights.
7.05.00 415/240 V control transformer with primary & secondary fuses.
8.00.00 TEST
The actuator and all components thereof shall be subject to tests as per
relevant Standards. In addition, if any special test is called for in equipment
specification, the same shall be performed.
9.01.00 Drawings, Data & Manuals shall be submitted in triplicate with the bid and in
quantities and procedures as specified in General Conditions of Contract
and/or elsewhere in the specification for approval and subsequent distribution
after the issue of 'Letter of Intent'.
9.02.00 To be submitted with Bid
Data sheet for each type of actuator shall be furnished along with internal
wiring diagram, suggested control schematic and torque limit switch contact
development and manufacturer's catalogues. Drawings, Data & Manuals shall
be submitted in triplicate with the bid and in quantities and procedures as
specified in General Conditions of Contract and/or elsewhere in the
specification for approval and subsequent distribution after the issue of 'Letter
of Intent'.
9.03.00 To be submitted for Owner / Purchasers Approval and Distribution
All relevant drawings and data pertaining to the equipment like GTP, GA
drawing, foundation plan, BOM, control & schematics, QAP, etc. shall be
submitted by the Bidder for approval of Owner/Owners consultant. Also refer
clause no. 1.19.02(u) of Section-I of Volume V-A: Technical Specifications
for Electrical Equipment & Accessories.

Page 472 of 630


ANNEXURE-A
DESIGN DATA
1.0 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Supply Description Consumer
L.V. Supply (i) 415V, 3, 3W, 50 Hz Motors above 0.2kW

Effectively earthed upto less than 175kW.

for 1 sec.
(ii) 240V AC/415V AC Motors upto 0.2kW.
240V, 1, 2W, 50 Hz Lighting, Space heat-

effectively earthed ing , A.C supply for Contr-
ol & protective devices.
D.C. Supply 220V, 2W, unearthed D.C. alarm, control

& protective devices
Fault level 25* kA.
for 1 sec.
* Indicative only, the actual value will be decided by the Bidder, after substantiating the
same by calculation.
2.0 RANGE OF VARIATION
A.C. Supply :
Voltage : 10%
Frequency : +3% to -5%.
Combined Volt + frequency : 10% (absolute sum)
During starting of large motor, the voltage may drop to 80% of the rated voltage for a
period of 60 seconds. All electrical equipment while running shall successfully ride
over such period without affecting system performance.
D.C. Supply :
Voltage : 187 to 242

Page 473 of 630

TITLE : SPECIFICATION NO.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTs PE-SS-999-506-E101
VOLUME NO. : II-B
FOR
REV NO. : 00 DATE : 29/08/2005
LV MOTORS
SHEET : 1 OF 1
FOR
LV MOTORS
SPECIFICATION NO.: PE-SS-999-506-E101 Rev 00
Page 474 of 630


VOLUME NO. : II-B
FOR SECTION : D
REV NO. : 00 DATE : 29/08/2005
LV MOTORS
SHEET : 1 OF 4
1.0 INTENT OF SPECIFIATION
The specification covers the design, materials, constructional features, manufacture, inspection and
testing at manufacturers work, and packing of Low voltage (LV) squirrel cage induction motors
along with all accessories for driving auxiliaries in thermal power station.
Motors having a voltage rating of below 1000V are referred to as low voltage (LV) motors.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
Motors shall fully comply with latest edition, including all amendments and revision, of following
codes and standards:
IS:325 Three phase Induction motors

IS : 900 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of induction motors
IS: 996 Single phase small AC and universal motors
IS: 4722 Rotating Electrical machines
IS: 4691 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures for rotating electrical machines
IS: 4728 Terminal marking and direction of rotation rotating electrical machines
IS: 1231 Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors
IS: 8789 Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction motors
IS: 13555 Guide for selection and application of 3-phase A.C. induction motors for
different types of driven equipment
IS: 2148 Flame proof enclosures for electrical appliance
IS: 5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous areas
IS: 12824 Type of duty and classes of rating assigned
IS: 12802 Temperature rise measurement for rotating electrical machnines
IS: 12065 Permissible limits of noise level for rotating electrical machines
IS: 12075 Mechanical vibration of rotating electrical machines
In case of imported motors, motors as per IEC-34 shall also be acceptable.
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Motors and accessories shall be designed to operate satisfactorily under conditions specified in data
sheet-A and Project Information, including voltage & frequency variation of supply system as defined
in Data sheet-A
3.2 Motors shall be continuously rated at the design ambient temperature specified in Data Sheet-A and
other site conditions specified under Project Information
Motor ratings shall have at least a 15% margin over the continuous maximum demand of the driven
equipment, under entire operating range including voltage & frequency variation specified above.
3.3 Starting Requirements
3.3.1 Motor characteristics such as speed, starting torque, break away torque and starting time shall be
properly co-ordinated with the requirements of driven equipment. The accelerating torque at any
speed with the minimum starting voltage shall be at least 10% higher than that of the driven
equipment.
3.3.2 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with direct on line starting without
exceeding acceptable winding temperature.
Page 475 of 630


VOLUME NO. : II-B
FOR SECTION : D
REV NO. : 00 DATE : 29/08/2005
LV MOTORS
SHEET : 2 OF 4
The limiting value of voltage at rated frequency under which a motor will successfully start and
accelerate to rated speed with load shall be taken to be a constant value as per Data Sheet - A during
the starting period of motors.
3.3.3 The following frequency of starts shall apply
i) Two starts in succession with the motor being initially at a temperature not exceeding the
rated load temperature.
ii) Three equally spread starts in an hour the motor being initially at a temperature not exceeding
the rated load operating temperature. (not to be repeated in the second successive hour)
iii) Motors for coal conveyor and coal crusher application shall be suitable for three consecutive
hot starts followed by one hour interval with maximum twenty starts per day and shall be
suitable for mimimum 20,000 starts during the life time of the motor
3.4 Running Requirements
3.4.1 Motors shall run satisfactorily at a supply voltage of 75% of rated voltage for 5 minutes with full load
without injurious heating to the motor.
3.4.2 Motor shall not stall due to voltage dip in the system causing momentary drop in voltage upto 70% of
the rated voltage for duration of 2 secs.
3.5 Stress During bus Transfer
3.5.1 Motors shall withstand the voltage, heavy inrush transient current, mechanical and torque stress
developed due to the application of 150% of the rated voltage for at least 1 sec. caused due to vector
difference between the motor residual voltage and the incoming supply voltage during occasional auto
bus transfer.
3.5.2 Motor and driven equipment shafts shall be adequately sized to satisfactorily withstand transient
torque under above condition.
3.6 Maximum noise level measured at distance of 1.0 metres from the outline of motor shall not exceed
the values specified in IS 12065.
3.7 The max. vibration velocity or double amplitude of motors vibration as measured at motor bearings
shall be within the limits specified in IS: 12075.
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
4.1 Indoor motors shall conform to degree of protection IP: 54 as per IS: 4691. Outdoor or semi-indoor
motors shall conform to degree of protection IP: 55 as per IS: 4691and shall be of weather-proof
construction. Outdoor motors shall be installed under a suitable canopy
4.2 Motors upto 160KW shall have Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) enclosures, the method of
cooling conforming to IC-0141 or IC-0151 of IS: 6362.
Motors rated above 160 KW shall be Closed Air Circuit Air (CACA) cooled
4.3 Motors shall be designed with cooling fans suitable for both directions of rotation.
Page 476 of 630


VOLUME NO. : II-B
FOR SECTION : D
REV NO. : 00 DATE : 29/08/2005
LV MOTORS
SHEET : 3 OF 4
4.4. Motors shall not be provided with any electric or pneumatic operated external fan for cooling the
motors.
4.5 Frames shall be designed to avoid collection of moisture and all enclosures shall be provided with
facility for drainage at the lowest point.
4.6 In case Class F insulation is provided for LV motors, temperature rise shall be limited to the limits
applicable to Class B insulation.
In case of continuous operation at extreme voltage limits the temperature limits specified in table-1 of
IS:325 shall not exceed by more than 10qC.
4.7 Terminals and Terminal Boxes
4.7.1 Terminals, terminal leads, terminal boxes, windings tails and associated equipment shall be suitable
for connection to a supply system having a short circuit level, specified in the Data Sheet-A.
Unless otherwise stated in Data Sheet-A, motors of rating 110 kW and above will be controlled by
circuit breaker and below 110 kW by switch fuse-contactor. The terminal box of motors shall be
designed for the fault current mentioned in data sheet A.
4.7.2 unless otherwise specified or approved, phase terminal boxes of horizontal motors shall be positioned
on the left hand side of the motor when viewed from the non-driving end.
4.7.3 Connections shall be such that when the supply leads R, Y & B are connected to motor terminals A B
& C or U, V & W respectively, motor shall rotate in an anticlockwise direction when viewed from the
non-driving end. Where such motors require clockwise rotation, the supply leads R, Y, B will be
connected to motor terminals A, C, B or U W & V respectively.
4.7.4 Permanently attached diagram and instruction plate made preferably of stainless steel shall be
mounted inside terminal box cover giving the connection diagram for the desired direction of rotation
and reverse rotation.
4.7.5 Motor terminals and terminal leads shall be fully insulated with no bar live parts. Adequate space
shall be available inside the terminal box so that no difficulty is encountered for terminating the cable
specified in Data Sheet-A.
4.7.6 Degree of protection for terminal boxes shall be IP 55 as per IS 4691.
4.7.7 Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for space heaters.. If this is not possible in case of LV
motors, the space heater terminals shall be adequately segregated from the main terminals in the main
terminal box. Detachable gland plates with double compression brass glands shall be provided in
terminal boxes.
4.7.8. Phase terminal boxes shall be suitable for 360 degree of rotation in steps of 90 degree for LV motors.
4.7.9 Cable glands and cable lugs as per cable sizes specified in Data Sheet-A shall be included. Cable lugs
shall be of tinned Copper, crimping type.
4.8 Two separate earthing terminals suitable for connecting G.I. or MS strip grounding conductor of size
given in Data Sheet-A shall be provided on opposite sides of motor frame. Each terminal box shall
have a grounding terminal.
4.9 General
Page 477 of 630

VOLUME NO. : II-B
FOR SECTION : D
REV NO. : 00 DATE : 29/08/2005
LV MOTORS
SHEET : 4 OF 4
4.9.1 Motors provided for similar drives shall be interchangeable.
4.9.2 Suitable foundation bolts are to be supplied alongwith the motors.
4.9.3 Motors shall be provided with eye bolts, or other means to facilitate safe lifting if the weight is 20Kgs.
and above.
4.9.4 Necessary fitments and accessories shall be provided on motors in accordance with the latest Indian
Electricity rules 1956.
4.9.5 All motors rated above 30 kW shall be provided with space heaters to maintain the motor internal air
temperature above the dew point. Unless otherwise specified, space heaters shall be suitable for a
supply of 240V AC, single phase, 50 Hz.
4.9.6 Name plate with all particulars as per IS: 325 shall be provided
4.9.7 Unless otherwise specified, the colour of finish shall be grey to Shade No. 631 and 632 as per IS:5 for
motors installed indoor and outdoor respectively. The paint shall be epoxy based and shall be suitable
for withstanding specified site conditions.
5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
5.1 All materials, components and equipments covered under this specification shall be procured,
manufactured, as per the BHEL standard quality plan No. PED-506-00-Q-006/0 and PED-506-00-Q-
007/2 enclosed with this specification and which shall be complied.
5.2 LV motors of type-tested design shall be provided. Valid type test reports not more than 5 year shall
be furnished. In the absence of these, type tests shall have to be conducted by manufacturer without
any commercial implication to purchaser.
5.3 All motors shall be subjected to routine tests as per IS: 325 and as per BHEL standard quality plan.
5.4 Motors shall also be subjected to additional tests, if any, as mentioned in Data Sheet A.
6.0 DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
a) OGA drawing showing the position of terminal boxes, earthing connections etc.
b) Arrangement drawing of terminal boxes.
c) Characteristic curves:
(To be given for motor above 55 kW unless otherwise specified in Data Sheet).
i) Current vs. time at rated voltage and minimum starting voltage.

ii) Speed vs. time at rated voltage and minimum starting voltage.
iii) Torque vs. speed at rated voltage and minimum voltage.
For the motors with solid coupling the above curves i), ii), iii) to be furnished for the
motors coupled with driven equipment. In case motor is coupled with mechanical
equipment by fluid coupling, the above curves shall be furnished with and without
coupling.
iv) Thermal withstand curve under hot and cold conditions at rated
voltage and max. permissible voltage.
Page 478 of 630


17

1. Manufacturer & Country of origin.

(Shall be as per approved QA make)
2. Equipment driven by motor
3. Motor type
4. Quantity

1. Frame size
2. Type of duty
3. Type of enclosure /Method of

cooling/Degree of protection
4. Applicable standard to which

motor generally conforms
5. Efficiency class as per IS 12615
6. (a) Whether motor is flame proof Yes/No
(b) If yes, the gas group to which

it conforms as per IS:2148
7. Type of mounting
8. Direction of rotation as viewed

from DE END

9. Standard continuous rating at
40 deg.C. ambient temp. as per
Indian Standard (KW)
10. Derated rating for specified normal

condition i.e. 50 deg. C ambient
temperature (KW)
11. Maximum continuous load demand

of driven equipment in KW
12. Rated Voltage (volts)
13. Permissible variation of :

Page 479 of 630


27
a. Voltage (Volts)
b. Frequency (Hz)
c. Combined voltage and

frequency
14. Rated speed at rated voltage

and frequency(RPM)
15. At rated Voltage and frequency:
a. Full load current
b. No load current
16. Power Factor at
a. 100% load
b. NO load
c. Starting.
17. Efficiency at rated voltage

and frequrecy,
a. 100% load
b. 75% load
c. 50% load
18. Starting current (amps) at
a. 100 % voltage
b. 85% voltage
c. 80% voltage
19. Minimum permissible

starting Voltage (Volts)
20. Starting time with minimum

permissible voltage
a. Without driven
equipment coupled
b. With driven equipment

coupled

Page 480 of 630


37
21. Safe stall time with 100%

and 110% of rated voltage
a. From hot condition
b. From cold condition
22. Torques :
a. Starting torque at
min. permissible
voltage(kg-mtr.)
b. Pull up torque at
rated voltage.
c. Pull out torque
d. Min accelerating
torque (kg.m) available
e. Rated torque (kg.m)
23. Stator winding resistance per

phase (ohms at 20 Deg.C.)
24. GD2 value of motors
25. No of permissible successive

starts when motor is in
hot condition
26. Locked Rotor KVA Input
27. Locked Rotor KVA/KW
28. Vibration limit :Velocity (mm/s)
29. Noise level limit (dBA)

1. Stator winding insulation
a. Class & Type
b. Winding Insulation Process
c. Tropicalised (Yes/No)

Page 481 of 630


47
d. Temperature rise over specified

maximum ambient temperature
of 50 deg C
e. Method of temperature
measurement
f. Stator winding connection
2. Main Terminal Box
a. Type
b. Location (viewed from

NDE side)
c. Entry of cables(bottom/side)
d. Recommended cable size

(To be matched with cable
size envisaged by owner)
e. Fault level (MVA), Fault

level duration (sec)
f. Cable glands & lugs details

(shall be suitable for power cable)
3. Type of DE/NDE Bearing
4. Motor Paint shade
5. Weight of
a. Motor stator (KG)
b. Motor Rotor (KG)
c. Total weight (KG)
!"#$%%'"('

1. Space Heaters (Applicable
for 30 KW & above motor)
(Nos./Power in watts/supply
voltage)

2. Terminal Box for Space
Heater (Yes/No)
3. Speed switch (Yes/No)

No of contacts and contact
ratings of speed switch

Page 482 of 630


57
4. Insulation of bearing (Yes/No)
5. Noise reducer(Yes/No)
6. Grounding pads
i) No and size on
motor body
ii) Nos on terminal Box
7. Vibration pads
i) Nos and size
ii) Location
8. Any other fitments
!"#%)(*'

1. Torque speed characteristic
of the motor
2. Thermal withstand characteristic
3. Starting. current Vs. Time
4. Starting. current Vs speed
5. P.F. and Effi. Vs Load

++!",$-
$!$!".'#--'+
#"('$%/($!,0"#
"!"(
1. Rated armature voltage (Volt)
2. Rated field excitation (Amp)
3. Permissible % variation in voltage
4. Minimum Permissible Starting

voltage (volt)
5. At rated voltage
i) Full load Armature

current.(Amp)
ii) Full load Field

current (Amp)

Page 483 of 630


67
iii) No load Armature

current (Amp)
6. Full load Field current (Amp)
7. No load Aramature current (Amp)
8. Minimum permissible field

current(Amp) to avoid
overspeeding at
i) Maximum permissible voltage
ii) Rated voltage
iii) Minimum Permissible Voltage
9. Resistance (indicative
Values) in ohm
i) Armature winding
(Arm + IP + Series)
at 25 deg.C
ii) Field Winding at 25 deg. C
10. Inductance (indicative values)
i) Armature winding
ii) Field winding
11. Value of trimmer resistance (ohm)

to be connected in series with
the shunt field to obtain rated
speed at
i) 220 V DC
ii) 250 V DC
iii) 187 V DC
12. Value of the external resistance (ohm)

required to be connected in series with
armature during starting only
13. Technical data sheet for external

resistance box
14. GA drawing of motor
15. Starting time calculation

Page 484 of 630


77
16. Starter resistance design calculation
17. Electrical connection diagram of motor

Page 485 of 630

CUSTOMER TSPGCL PROJECT 1 X 800 MW KOTHAGUDEM TPS SPECIFICATION :

TITLE NUMBER :
QUALITY PLAN BIDDER/ : QUALITY PLAN SPECIFICATION
VENDOR NUMBER PED-506-00-Q-006, REV-01 TITLE
SHEET 1 OF 2 SYSTEM ITEM AC ELECT. MOTORS BELOW 55KW (LV) SECTION VOLUME III
SL. COMPONENT/OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS CAT. TYPE/ EXTENT OF REFERENCE ACCEPTANCE FORMAT AGENCY REMARKS
NO. CHECK METHOD OF CHECK DOCUMENT NORM OF RECORD
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1.0 ASSEMBLY 1.WORKMANSHIP MA VISUAL 100% MANUF'S SPEC MANUF'S SPEC -DO- 2 - -
2.DIMENSIONS MA -DO- -DO- MFG. DRG./ MFG. DRG./ -DO- 2 - -

MFG. SPEC. MFG. SPEC.
3.CORRECTNESS MA VISUAL 100% MFG.SPEC./ MFG.SPEC. -DO- 2 - -

COMPLETENESS RELEVANT IS RELEVANT IS
TERMINATIONS/
MARKING/COLOUR
CODE
2.0 PAINTING 1.SHADE MA VISUAL SAMPLE MANUFR'S BHEL SPEC. LOG BOOK 2 - -
SPEC/BHEL SAME AS
SPEC./RELEVANT COL.7
STANDARD
3.0 TESTS 1.ROUTINE MA -DO- 100% IS-325/ SAME AS TEST 2 1 NOTE -1

TEST INCLUDING BHEL SPEC./ COL.7 REPORT &
SPECIAL TEST DATA SHEET NOTE-3
AS PER BHEL
SPEC.
2.OVERALL MA MEASUREMENT 100% APPROVED APPROVED INSPN. 2 1 - NOTE -1

DIMENSIONS & & DRG/DATA DRG/DATA REPORT &
ORIENTATION VISUAL SHEET SHEET NOTE-3
& RELEVANT IS
BHEL PARTICULARS BIDDER/VENDOR

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 486 of 630


QUALITY PLAN TITLE NUMBER :
BIDDER/ : QUALITY PLAN SPECIFICATION :
VENDOR NUMBER PED-506-00-Q-006, REV-01 TITLE :
SHEET 2 OF 2 SYSTEM ITEM AC ELECT. MOTORS BELOW 55KW (LV) SECTION VOLUME III
SL. COMPONENT/OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS CAT. TYPE/ EXTENT OF REFERENCE ACCEPTANCE FORMAT AGENCY REMARKS
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3.NAMEPLATE MA VISUAL 100% IS-325 & IS-325 & INSPN. 2 1 -

DETAILS DATA SHEET DATA SHEET REPORT
NOTES:
1 ROUTINE TESTS ON 100% MOTORS SHALL BE DONE BY THE VENDOR. HOWEVER, BHEL SHALL WITNESS ROUTINE TESTS ON RANDOM SAMPLES. THE
SAMPLING PLAN SHALL BE MUTUALLY AGREED UPON
2 WHERE EVER CUSTOMER IS INVOLVED IN INSPECTION, (1) SHALL MEAN BHEL AND CUSTOMERS BOTH TOGETHER.
3 FOR EXHAUST/VENTILATION FAN MOTORS OF RATING UPTO 1.5KW , ONLY ROUTINE TEST CERTIFICATES SHALL BE FURNISHED FOR SCRUTINY.
Legends for Inspection agency
1. BHEL/CUSTOMER
2. VENDOR (MOTOR MANUFACTURER)
3. SUB-VENDOR (RAW MATERIAL/COMPONENTS SUPPLIER)
P. PERFORM
W. WITNESS
V. VERIFY

NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE BIDDER'S/VENDORS COMPANY SEAL
Page 487 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
QUALITY PLAN BIDDER/ : QUALITY PLAN SPECIFICATION :
SHEET 1 OF 9 SYSTEM ITEM: AC ELECT. MOTORS 55 KW & ABOVE (LV & MV) SECTION VOLUME III
SL. COMPONENT/OPERATION CHARACTERISTIC CAT. TYPE/ EXTENT OF REFERENCE ACCEPTANCE FORMAT AGENCY REMARKS
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1.0 RAW MATERIAL & BOUGHT OUT
CONTROL
1.1 SHEET STEEL, PLATES, 1.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - FREE FROM LOG BOOK 3 - -
SECTION, EYEBOLTS CONDITION BLINKS,
CRACKS,
WAVINESS
ETC
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANFR'S MANFR'S -DO- 3 - -

DRG./SPEC DRG./SPEC
3.PROOF LOAD MA MECH. TEST -DO- -DO- -DO- INSPEC. 3 - 2

TEST (EYE REPORT
BOLT)
1.2 HARDWARES 1.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% FREE FROM -DO- 3 - -

CONDITION CRACKS, UN-
EVENNESS
ETC.
2.PROPERTY MA VISUAL SAMPLES MANFR'S RELEVENT SUPPLIERS 3 - 2 PROPERTY CLASS

CLASS DRG./SPEC IS/SPEC. TC & LOG MARKING SHALL BE
BOOK CHECKED BY THE
VENDOR
1.3 CASTING 1.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% FREE FROM LOG BOOK 3 - 2

CONDITION CRACKS,
BLOW HOLES
ETC.
2.CHEM. & MA CHEM & MECH 1/HEAT NO. MANFR'S RELEVENT SUPPLIER'S 3 - 2 HEAT NO. SHALL BE
PHY. PROP. TEST DRG./SPEC IS/ TC VERIFIED
3.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT 100% MANUFR'S MANUFR'S LOG BOOK 3 - 2

DRG. DRG.
1.4 PAINT & VARNISH 1.MAKE, SHADE, MA VISUAL 100% MANFR'S MANFR'S LOG BOOK 3 - 2
SHELF LIFE & CONTINUOUS DRG./SPEC DRG./SPEC
TYPE

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 488 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1.5 SHAFT 1. SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - FREE FROM -DO- 3 - - VENDOR'S APPROVAL
(FORGED OR ROLLED) COND. VISUAL IDENTIFICATION SHALL BE
DEFECTS MAINTAINED
2. CHEM. & MA CHEM. & 1/HEAT NO. MFG. DRG. RELEVANT SUPPLIER'S 3 - 2
PHYSICAL PHYSICAL OR HEAT SPEC. IS TC
PROPERTIES TESTS TREATMENT
BATCH NO
3. DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT 100% -DO- MANUFR'S LOG BOOK 3 - 2

DRG.
4.INTERNAL CR UT -DO- ASTM-A388 MANUFR'S -DO- 3 2 1 FOR DIA OF 55 MM &

FLAWS SPEC. ABOVE
BHEL SPEC.
1.6 SPACE HEATERS, CONNEC- 1. MAKE & MA VISUAL -DO- MANUFR'S MANUFR'S -DO- 3 - 2
TORS, TERMINAL BLOCKS, RATING DRG. SPEC. DRG. SPEC.
CABLES, CABLE LUGS,
CARBON BRUSH TEMP.
DETECTORS, RTD, BTD'S
2. PHYSICAL MA -DO- -DO- - NO PHYS. DAMAGE, -DO- 3 - 2

COND. NO ELECTRICAL
DISCONTINUITY
3.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANUFR'S MANUFR'S -DO- 3 - 2

(WHEREVER DRG./ SPEC. DRG. / SPEC.
APPLICABLE)
4.PERFORMANCE/ MA TEST 100% -DO- -DO- INSP. 3 - 2

CALIBRATION REPORT

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 489 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1.7 OTHER INSULATING 1. SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - NO VISUAL INSPT. 3 - 2

MATERIALS LIKE SLEEVES, COND. ETC. DEFECTS REPORT
BINDINGS CORDS, PAPERS,
PRESS BOARDS ETC.
2. OTHER
CHARACTERISTICS MA TEST SAMPLE MANUF'S MANUF'S LOG BOOK 3 - 2
SPEC. SPEC. AND OR
SUPPLIER'S
TC
1.8 SHEET STAMPING 1. SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - NO VISUAL LOG BOOK 3 - -

(PUNCHED) COND. DEFECTS
(FREE FROM
BURS)
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANUFR'S MANUFR'S -DO- 3 - 2 FOR MV MOTOR INSULA-

INCLUDING BURS DRG. . DRG. TION/VARNISH THICKNESS
HEIGHT SHALL BE MORE THAN
THE BURS HEIGHT
3. ACCEPTANCE MA ELECT. & MECH -DO- MANUF'S RELEVANT SUPPLIER'S 3 - 2
TESTS TESTS SPEC./ IS TC
RELEVANT
IS
1.9 CONDUCTORS 1. SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - FREE FROM LOG BOOK 3* - 2* * MOTOR MANUFACTURER TO
FINISH VISUAL CONDUCT VISUAL CHECK FOR
DEFECTS SURFACE FINISH ON RANDOM
BASIS (10% SAMPLE) AT HIS
WORKS AND MAINTAIN
RECORD FOR VERIFICATION
BY BHEL/CUSTOMER.
2.ELECT. PROP, & MA ELECT. & SAMPLES RELEVANT IS/ RELEVANT IS/ SUPPLIERS 3 - 2
MECH. PROP MECH.TEST BS OR BS OR TC &
OTHER OTHER VENDOR'S
STANDARDS STANDARDS INSPN.
REPORTS

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 490 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 3 - 2
MANFR'S DRG./ MANFR'S DRG./

1.10 BEARINGS 1.MAKE & TYPE MA VISUAL 100% APPROVED APPROVED -DO- 3 - 2
DATASHEET DATASHEET
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE BHEL DATA BHEL DATA -DO- 3 - 2

SHEET SHEET BEARING
MANUF'S
CATALOGUES
3.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - FREE FROM -DO- 3 - 2

FINISH VISUAL
DEFECTS
1.11 SLIP RING 1.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - -DO- -DO- 3 - -

(WHEREVER APPLICABLE) COND.
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 3 - -

DRG DRG
3.TEMP.WITH- MA ELECT.TEST -DO- MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 3 - 2

SPEC./ BHEL
STAND CAPACITY SPEC./ BHEL SPEC.
SPEC.
4.HV/IR MA -DO- 100% -DO- -DO- -DO- 3 - 2
1.12 OIL SEALS & GASKETS 1.MATERIAL OF MA VISUAL 100% MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 3 - -
GASKET DRG/SPECS DRG./ SPECS.
2.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% - FREE FROM -DO- 3 - -

COND. VISUAL
DEFECTS
3.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 3 - -

DRG DRG

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 491 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2.0 IN PROCESS
2.1 STATOR FRAME WELDING 1.WORKMANSHIP MA VISUAL 100% -DO- GOOD FINISH LOG BOOK 3/2 2 -
(IN CASE OF FABRICATED & CLEANNESS
STATOR )
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT -DO- MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 2 - -

DRG DRG
2.2 MACHINING 1.FINISH MA VISUAL 100% -DO- GOOD FINISH LOG BOOK 2 - -
2.DIMENSIONS MA MEASUREMENT -DO- MANUF'S MANUF'S -DO- 2 - -

DRG DRG
3.SHAFT SURFACE MA PT -DO- RELEVENT MANUFR'S -DO- 2 - 1

FLOWS SPEC./ SPEC./
ASTM-E165 BHEL SPEC./
2.3 PAINTING 1.SURFACE MA VISUAL 100% MANFR'S BHEL LOG BOOK 2 - -

PREPARATION SPEC/BHEL SPEC.
SPEC./ SAME AS
RELEVANT COL.7
STAND
2.PAINT THICKNESS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE -DO- -DO- -DO- 2 - -

(BOTH PRIMER & BY ELCOMETER
FINISH COAT)
3.SHADE MA VISUAL -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
4.ADHESION MA CROSS -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -

CUTTING &
TAPE TEST

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 492 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2.4 SHEET STACKING 1.COMPLETENESS MA MEASUREMENT SAMPLE MANUFR'S MANUFR'S Log Book 2 - -
SPEC. SPEC.
2.COMPRESSION MA MEASUREMENT 100% -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -

& TIGHTENING
3.CORE LOSS & MA ELECT.TEST -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 1* 1 (FOR MOTORS OF 2MW AND
HOTSPOT ABOVE)
* ON 10% RANDOM SAMPLE
2.5 WINDING 1.COMPLETENESS CR VISUAL 100% MANUFR'S MANUFR'S Log Book 2 - -
SPEC./BHEL SPEC./BHEL
SPEC. SPEC.
2.CLEANLINESS CR -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
3.IR-HV-IR CR ELECT. TEST -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1
4.RESISTANCE CR -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1
5.INTERTURN CR -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -

INSULATION
6.SURGE WITH CR -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1 FOR MV MOTOR
STAND AND
TAN. DELTA
TEST
2.6 IMPREGNATION 1.VISCOSCITY MA PHY. TEST AT STARTING -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
2.TEMP. MA PROCESS CONTINUOUS -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -

PRESSURE CHECK
VACCUM
3.NO. OF DIPS MA -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1 THREE DIPS TO BE
GIVEN

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 493 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4.DURATION MA -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1
2.7 COMPLETE STATOR 1.COMPACTNESS MA VISUAL 100% -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
ASSEMBLY & CLEANLINESS
2.8 BRAZING/COMPRESSION 1.COMPLETENESS CR -DO- -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -

JOINT
2.SOUNDNESS CR MALLET TEST -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 1
& UT
3.HV MA ELECT. TEST -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 1
2.9 COMPLETE ROTOR 1.RESIDUAL CR DYN. BALANCE -DO- MFG SPEC./ MFG. DWG. Log Book 2 1 VERIFICATION FOR MV
ASSEMBLY UNBALANCE ISO 1940 MOTOR ONLY
2.SOUNDNESS CR ELECT. -DO- MFG. SPEC. MFG. SPEC. Log Book 2 1

OF DIE (GROWLER
CASTING TEST)
2.10 ASSEMBLY 1.ALIGNMENT MA MEAS. -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
2.WORKMANSHIP MA VISUAL -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - -
3.AXIAL PLAY MA MEAS. -DO- -DO- -DO- Log Book 2 - 1
4.DIMENSIONS MA -DO- -DO- MFG.DRG./ MFG. DRG/ Log Book 2 - -

MFG SPEC. RELEVANT IS
5.CORRECTNESS, MA VISUAL 100% MFG SPEC. MFG SPEC. Log Book 2 - -

COMPLETENESS RELEVANT IS RELEVANT IS
TERMINATIONS/
MARKING/
COLOUR CODE
6. RTD, BTD & SPACE MA VISUAL 100% MFG SPEC. MFG SPEC. Log Book 2 1
HEATER MOUNTING. RELEVANT IS RELEVANT IS

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 494 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3.0 TESTS 1.TYPE TESTS MA ELECT.TEST 1/TYPE/SIZE IS-325/ IS-325/ TEST 2 1* 1 * NOTE - 1
INCLUDING BHEL SPEC./ BHEL SPEC./ REPORT
SPECIAL DATA SHEET DATA SHEET
TESTS AS PER
BHEL SPEC.
$
2.ROUTINE MA -DO- 100% -DO- -DO- -DO- 2 1$ 1 NOTE - 2
TESTS INCLUDING
SPECIAL TEST
AS PER BHEL
SPEC.
$
3.VIBRATION & MA -DO- 100% IS-12075 & IS-12075 & -DO- 2 1$ 1 NOTE - 2
NOISE LEVEL IS-12065 IS-12065
4.OVERALL MA MEASUREMENT 100% APPROVED APPROVED INSPC. 2 1 -

DIMENSIONS & VISUAL DRG/DATA DRG/DATA REPORT
AND ORIENTATION SHEET SHEET &
RELEVANT IS
5.DEGREE OF MA ELECT. & 1/TYPE/ RELEVANT IS BHEL SPEC. TC 2 - 1 TC FROM AN INDEPENDENT

PROTECTION MECH. TEST SIZE AND DATA LABORATORY, REFER NOTE-3
SHEET
$
6. MEASUREMENT OF MA -DO- 100% -DO- -DO- -DO- 2 1$ 1 NOTE - 2
RESISTANCE OF RTD
& BTD
$
7. MEASUREMENT OF MA -DO- 100% -DO- -DO- -DO- 2 1$ 1 NOTE - 2
RESISTANCE, IR OF
SPACE HEATER
$
8. NAMEPLATE MA VISUAL 100% IS-325 & IS-325 & INSPC. 2 1$ 1 NOTE - 2
DETAILS DATA SHEET DATA SHEET REPORT
9.EXPLOSION MA EXPLOSION 1/TYPE IS-3682 IS-3682 TC 2 - 1 TC FROM AN INDEPENDENT

FLAME PROOF FLAME PROOF IS-8239 IS-8239 LABORATORY, REFER NOTE-3
NESS (IF TEST IS-8240 IS-8240
SPECIFIED)
10. PAINT SHADE, MA VISUAL & SAMPLE BHEL SPEC. BHEL SPEC. TC 2 1$ 1 SAMPLING PLAN TO BE
THICKNESS MEASUREMENT & DATA & DATA DECIDED BY INSPECTION
& FINISH BY ELKOMETER SHEET SHEET AGENCY
$
NOTE - 2

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 495 of 630


TITLE NUMBER :
CHECK P W V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
NOTES:
1 DEPENDING UPON THE SIZE AND CRITICALLY, WITNESSING BY BHEL SHALL BE DECIDED.
2 ROUTINE TESTS ON 100% MOTORS SHALL BE DONE BY THE VENDOR. HOWEVER, BHEL SHALL WITNESS ROUTINE TESTS ON RANDOM SAMPLES.
THE SAMPLING PLAN SHALL BE MUTUALLY AGREED UPON.
3 IN CASE TEST CERTIFICATES FOR THESE TESTS ON SIMILAR TYPE, SIZE AND DESIGN OF MOTOR FROM INDEPENDENT LABORATORY ARE AVAILABLE,
THESE TEST MAY NOT BE REPEATED.
4 WHEREVER CUSTOMER IS INVOLVED IN INSPECTION, AGENCY (1) SHALL MEAN BHEL AND CUSTOMERS BOTH TOGETHER.
Legends for Inspection agency
1. BHEL/CUSTOMER
2. VENDOR (MOTOR MANUFACTURER)
3. SUB-VENDOR (RAW MATERIAL/COMPONENTS SUPPLIER)
P. PERFORM
W. WITNESS
V. VERIFY

NAME
SIGNATURE
Page 496 of 630

Explanatory notes for filling up cable list for routing through WinPath, the cable routing program
(developed by Corporate R&D) being used in PEM.
1. For the purpose of clarity, it may please be noted that the information given in regard to the cables to
be routed through WinPath as per the system elaborated below is called Cable List, while the term
Cable Schedule applies to the cable list with routing information added after routing has been
carried out.
2. The cable list shall be entered as an MS Excel file in the format as per enclosed template
EXT_CAB_SCH_FORMAT.XLS. No blank lines, special characters, header, footer, lines, etc. shall be
introduced in the file. No changes shall be made in the title line (first line) of the template.
3. The field properties shall be as under:
a. UNITCABLENO: A/N, up to sixteen (16) characters; each cable shall have its own unique,
unduplicated cable number. In case this rule is violated, the cable cannot be taken up for
routing.
b. FROM: A/N, up to sixty (60) characters; the From end equipment/ device description and
location to be specified here. Information in excess of 60 characters will be truncated after 60
characters.
c. TO: A/N, up to sixty (60) characters; the To end equipment/ device description and location
to be specified here. Information in excess of 60 characters will be truncated after 60
characters.
d. PURPOSE: A/N, up to sixty (60) characters; the purpose (i.e. power cable/ indication/
measurement, etc.) to be specified here. Information in excess of 60 characters will be
truncated after 60 characters.
e. REMARKS: A/N, up to forty (40) characters; Any information pertinent to routing to be
specified here (e.g., cable number of the cable redundant to the cable number being entered).
Information in excess of 40 characters will be truncated after 40 characters.
f. CABLESIZE: A/N, 7 characters exactly as per the codes indicated below shall be specified
here. The program cannot route cables described in any other way/ format.
g. PATHCABLENO: Field reserved for utilization by the program. User shall not enter any
information here.
4. One list shall be prepared for each system/ equipment (i.e., separate and unique cable lists shall be
prepared for each system).
5. The cables shall be described as per the scheme listed below:
A NN A NNN
| | | |
Cable No. of cores Cable code Cable size
Voltage (e.g. 01,03,3H, 07) (See C below) (e.g. 035,185,2.5, 0.5)
Code (see B
below)
(A) SYSTEM VOLTAGE CODES:

(ac) A = 11KV, B = 6.6KV, C = 3.3KV, D = 415V, E = 240V, F = 110V
(dc) G = 220V, H = 110V, J = 48V, K = +24V, L = -24V
(B) CABLE VOLTAGE CODES:

A = 11KV (Power cables)
Rev 0 23 February 2015 Page 1 of 2
Page 497 of 630

Explanatory notes for filling up cable list for routing through WinPath, the cable routing program
(developed by Corporate R&D) being used in PEM.
B = 6.6KV (Power cables)
C = 3.3KV (Power cables)
D = 1.1KV (LV & DC system power & control cables)
E = 0.6KV (0.5 sq. mm. Control cables)
(C) CABLE CODES
PVC Copper
A = Armoured FRLS B = Armoured Non-FRLS
C = unarmoured FRLS D = Unarmoured Non-FRLS
PVC Aluminium
E = Armoured FRLS F = Armoured Non-FRLS
G = unarmoured FRLS H = Unarmoured Non-FRLS
XLPE Copper
J = Armoured FRLS K = Armoured Non-FRLS
L = unarmoured FRLS M = Unarmoured Non-FRLS
XLPE Aluminium
N = Armoured FRLS P = Armoured Non-FRLS
Q = unarmoured FRLS R = Unarmoured Non-FRLS
S = FIRE SURVIVAL CABLES

T = TOUGH RUBBER SHEATH
U = OVERALL SCREENED
V = PAIRED OVERALL SCREENED
W = PAIRED INDIVIDUAL SCREENED
Y = COMPENSATING CABLES
I = PRE-FABRICATED CABLES
Z = JELLY FILLED CABLES
Rev 0 23 February 2015 Page 2 of 2
Page 498 of 630

REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION D3
C&I


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I

CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION

1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

3/&63(&,),&$7,21

Page 500 of 630


# GENERAL
##

+ , / / :;
<< =
> +// ?

// / <
<= +
/

###
>/:/ >/

@>?!!?@ / @ B

:/B"! =BD = +

#%
<=
= B / / BB=B

>

/ / / /J/ B /? @= /
= :
K:=

/
> >
=B
<::==
:/
/+=
/

#$(: /
==
/ :
K:=

>

< = :

/
?
<
K:= / / '? +J ,//

/ )J
:> "M!! Q +
:= > / /
/ U
+ J
=

#V"

>:
/ == : :

/
+/B

: / /? / ?
=
WB

/=B :

#&B

JJ <
<=></ <<=B
>

?/ /
<= D <
<== : :
>
?///B
BBJ<=B ??
>
:<
?B / <<=

B J K:/J
<=

#*

/= B
< K:= = + @ B

= /

K:/

#*# /:/ :
+
?@ @ B <=?
> /

/:/ +>
/
BX=: >
(> >

>:/

/:/

#*%/:/ +
::
<:/
:?+

/><+
>= />:=

?/

#*$
Y@
> >
B ==B +
<=
@ B
:/B BJ
B>:
/:U=/ JB >:
/:U=/

#*VB ==B
K:
=:@
B ==B

J

> >
/ B ==BJ
)/ BJ B K:J =:
/ <
K:=/

#*&"
==BDBJB
BJ/J
:
JB
BU

> +
>

?@ ?
=!!?@?@

: !! ?@J
/= B /+/:
@ B

>
>
= Y@ + @ B
=
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V VI/S-VI/SS-B : 6

(e-PCT-TS-K-02-2014-15_V-VI_S VI_SS B.DOC)
Page 501 of 630



#**<=
= <B: )

/< = /
)/ B@
?
= B / /?:/ BB < K:=?: +B <

:>B
/

%GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
%#,// :
<

:/J>:
=/J' /><

D <

U=B<= , /
/J= /

@J
@J /:/ ? :
<= /:
J /:/ == : D ?@B /
>
J/:/ /==: /J/:/ +J
?@ DZJM
>
QJJ/:/ ?@B /? J<= >
J :J==BJ= / < /==// J/ ?BJ/:= / B
?X
/ +/?@

%%"

/?
:
/
@ B

//? @ B //< /+: !J
!"

%$ // /D:=BB?@ J,//

:
<!
> //
<:J
? /
@<MZQ,//

+/
==:=
=: > / @ B /?
/?
B: /
//?: >
BJ
B =
:/B
/ ?
> @: BB: = B ==B / B: This loaded laptop shall be
handed over by Bidder well in advance of FAT to Owners head office at Hyderabad.

%V<=
?// >

/ +
K:= /

>/B/ = ;=:=B< /
>
<B<
>= /><+/B /:

/:/ <= <=
+ >
<= / @ / >:/
: =

%&
U :=
> :B/ / / = > / J
==!!?@J <<= +
+B

:
K:= K:
J B:
<
J
@U J =BJ

=J/
BBB

%*
<
=
>
#

/
?+
==
/:/

>>:=
[ /
>?<
=
?&=

%\

+V] :
<=
= //
:
>
@
+ / >+=
=/
BD
:/?
/B/

%^(
/:D::
<=
=
?BD /K:== ;=:=:=> :D::

>/ < =/:

>
?

Q "
B:=/:
^
>Q "
B::=/:
^
Q , <:=/:
#*
/Q , <::=/:
#*


Page 502 of 630



%_==: <=

%_#,//

:/ /:
/:/ ==: <=

%_%/ B? </
>#>

%#

Y @ M YQD ZD
=
= B /

:;
D/+'?+J:>:
>+//?

%## ?==!!<=

J <
< =
> / ==!! ?@?

>/

@
@
>/:/

%#%
>
+ /
=/:

@
= /:
J ==:
=/:
J=/:
J /?@ =/:
J=/:

> = = =

<
/? / ? /
>:/ =,//XB

`?@

%#$
+
J>:
=/J
?BK:=J

%#$#D"/
>==:=&>)#,!="

%#$%D
> @> / /!

: >

%#$$ /D
> = =
<

%#$V! B !D!J"U"
>+//

%#$&"
D @?:

>/:/
<,:
@?:
</:/ <?

> >

%#$*

>:
+>
//= &] <=
/:B

%#$\=/:
M
>
Q=: = /%&b+ /
+

%#$^
B /
/> ?/ // :
/
B ?
B
/

%#$_=D @:/
=
>(>==:

<

%#$#
>

B
:/ B: /B =
/

%#V B ?@ =: > : =
D+
+ :
>

%#& ?@ =: +==:=#&] B /
B >
<

%#*"::B : !

+

> +
>


Page 503 of 630



%#\B ==B
<
> +
>
==

%#^
:==:=?+
<= /
B </:/
B:

%#_
/B B =
>>

%%
>'> @:

%%#" := < W = < D
? / <

D

%%%,:=
?+/ <D
?= <

%%$?:
<=/:
/:/ <
>:?:
</:/ <

%%V":= B = // K:
W = <D

%%&":= c(B,X:/ / <D
? <(B

/= < D
M( B , >

> =: >
:=
<</Q

%%* ?

+
<
/? @B ?

> :
/
<= ?

+
< ?/ < ? @ BY/?
> B<=
>+//<=
>=
<:B / /
::;
<
> +
>

"
? :/
>
/+
<"
? :

>+
/
?

+ < <:B

/:B: B/
<=

It shall be possible to upgrade the installed system with the latest available version of the software model
during the plant life.
%%$/:/ :/?:

MQ
>+//

> K:=/ /

Page 504 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

3/&'$7$6+((7

Page 505 of 630


()****)
("))V#)
,
DATA SHEET FOR PLC SYSTEM !
!"V$%#&
' #( #
!
Data Sheet A&B

!""'d"(h!""'d,(h
(TO BE FILLED BY PURCHASER) (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)

j
#p^Yq'"Z!

GENERAL
u"h !

" ! !
")"w
"qD! ,!!!"
PROCESSOR !!"Y''"!,h
!"",M'Q Y (,
!"",MD)Q Y (,
!"",MD)Q Y (,

(!"Z" %V!V^!##"
"Z
"(Z"h "

Yxxxxxxxxxx
YJY /
>
!q B: / B =
PLC EQUIPMENT !qYu"h Yq" /
?

u(Yh
u"hxxxxxxxx

#_y%Vy(D
!qh

Z'
qj"$xxx"Vxxx
",DY"$xxx"Vxxx

qj"$xx"Vxxx

""$x#x"Vxxx
"Q '"!'!" YJY /
>
,QZZ (Y" B: / B =
Z"ZD(Z"
Y /
?
("h
"Y
" :=> = / <
"(h"!"! )$)%

,uh
(

!"Z"!h
"UZ
"
SPARE LIST "!"h"!!
"""'! h
h
Yh h
REDUNDANCY " h
D"! h
' h As per vendor practice
Page 506 of 630


()****)
("))V#)
,
DATA SHEET FOR PLC SYSTEM !
!"V$%#&
' #( #
!
Data Sheet A&B

!""'d"(h!""'d,(h
(TO BE FILLED BY PURCHASER) (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)

""Z ^ #*
""Z ^ #*
No. of CHANNELS ,"h #* $%

PER CARD ,"h #* $%
!wwV
'ww^
"!" Z"""'
u"h, !!!"

"(M )V%
Q

D" h
"uh
z" \$%
PANEL ,"q)!q h

h

(hJ'
"!Z"h
, !"
'"!Y"
(""%& '
(""Z h
'"!Y! h

Z
! (,'
COMMUNICATION
WITH OTHER h{"Z" )V^&Z),
SYSTEM ("

(q !,
(!,')V^&'
"q "hxxxxxxxxxx
" ,!!!""!!""
POWER SUPPLY
INPUT FEEDER
D" ,!!!""!!""
M!"Z"!Q%V!
||
'"Z
,"hh )/ "!"!'

POWER SUPPLY
,"q) $*'
,"h(Z" #p#]%p#]%p&] ""p

<
"Z u! u!
CUSTOMER
(!"h $!"h
TRAINING
!XYqj
"
'

*IF THE LOCATION IS INDOOR,KINDLY SPECIFY IF PLC PANEL IS PLACED IN AC OR NON-AC ENVIRONMENT.
**SHALL NOT BE APPLICABLE IF TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS ARE ENVISAGED.
# PROJECT SPECIFICPAINT SHADES, IF APPLICABLE TO BE USED.
$$ CHECK & REPLACE WITH MAIN UPS SLD IF POWER SUPPLY IS NOT APPROVED BY CUSTOMER.

Page 507 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

3/&&21),*85$7,21

Page 508 of 630

(67") (67")
Page 509 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

3/&4XDOLW\3ODQ

Page 510 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
"!"!u"h" ,
( !
Z"",Z # !"%V^%\

U '# ( ^
* Type/Method Extent Format $
Sl. Component / Reference Acceptance Agency
Characteristics Checked Cate of of of Remarks
No. operation documents Norms
gory Check Check Records P W V

Materials
1.0
/Components
<

!=J BJ::J
BD@B" B=J " ,'

U

=J! ?B@J J /:= u:
<
## !@ ":
#] $D%% #
:B J
U "+/Z" <

" /J >
Z
/
J ! ?BJ,u / = B
' /? J'BJ:+U
(
J( U
=
?:
<D @J
<
" ,'
, <U, <
<
! = B u:
<
#% BJ =J ":
#] J $D%% #
!= /:=J
,u
:B"

/ B =J
"
": JJ
<
/:= ,'
/:JB

<
! = B <
u:
<
#$ +J ":
#] J $D%% #
!= / = BD
:=JB
,u
"
>

J <
/:
D=/:
J?
x / >

B:J! ,'
:
<=/:
J "
x <
! = B J u:
<
#V ==: ":
#] /:= $D%% #
x u: < "+/
=/:
J:B
x < B:
@J
/ B =J,u

$
Z! * )
)"B< =B # ),'
" ) Y )"B<YB % )/
) )"B< )+/
Page 511 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
"!"!u"h" ,
( !
Z"",Z # !"%V^%\

U '% ( ^

JJ
<

q<> /J:J
/ >
J J
!!+JJ " ,'
/:
J<= u:
<
#& <
! = B " :
#]
B:J $D%% #
? J /:=
" "+/Z"D
BB ?

B= B:

=
=:U / ?BJ,u
/!
$
Z! * )
)"B< =B # ),'
" ) Y )"B<YB % )/
) )"B< )+/
Page 512 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
"!"!u"h" ,
( !
Z"",Z # !"%V^%\

U '$ ( ^

2.0 Assembly
(:

'DY/+ "+/ ,'

: J B: u:
<
%# " (:
#] / %# #
q<> /J:J ! B =U,u
!+ '
/("
<=

"+/Z"
! ?BJ

,'
' /? (:
<
B=JYB YB! B =J
:
D u:
<
%% @U
>
BJ:< " #] U' %% #

@BJU'
+

/ /
,'
'

"
K:=
:
"+/? u:
<
%$ ?B =/:
DK:=J / " #] >
< %# #
D

:
<=
??B <= ?

'
=/:
,'
%V ,: ::B J :
D u:
<
" #]( "/: %% #
=/:
= :=

("

$
Z! * )
)"B< =B # ),'
" ) Y )"B<YB % )/
) )"B< )+/
Page 513 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
"!"!u"h" ,
( !
Z"",Z # !"%V^%\

U 'V ( ^

Factory
3.0 Acceptance Test
(FAT)
::: ,'
(:
:
D u:
<
$# D B: JD " #] ("/: "(" %# #

,'
B: J
u:
<
$% ?B:J />< " :
#] ("/: "(" %# #

M
>
Q / /B

,'
?:
</:

u:
<
$$ /:/ < "

#] ("/: "(" %# #

/:/ <
==: ,'
==: <=J
<= u:
<
$V := "

#] ("/: "(" %# #

=J==: ?/

<<=
! B ,'

! B : u:
<
$& " :
#] ("/: "(" %# #
<=

/+
,'

D!@ : <=J J
u:
<
$* :>:U
" :
#] ("/: "(" %# #

?J/ B
=

MQ
BMQ ,'
?
BB( :MQ' u:
<
$\ " :
#] ("/: "(" %# #
( :

$
Z! * )
)"B< =B # ),'
" ) Y )"B<YB % )/
) )"B< )+/
Page 514 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
STANDARD QUALITY PLAN ,
FOR !
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER # !"%V^%\
'& ( ^
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) PROCEDURE

/:=+/:/:D?<= :

//= =<: /
/BB
/:=
>/: / <=:

?@ <=
:

/:
:
> ==B( " / :

>= / +
>
/: B("/=: :
?B
+
/ ?BJ/:
< +/><,'BBJ /:B("

Q

>Q <= B:

Q Z
"=>
<! ?B

/Q
YB! B =

Q ,
u: < <=

Q B! B =

BQ' =

Q :D::

(:+/
:
>
/: J/ J

B:J) J /
/ >
( "/

:>=JB B<J / //:J
:
B+>
?[?+/X / / > /

APPLICABLE TEST PROCEDURE:

1. Input/Output Functional Verification.

@ //B @J
/D=/:

>
B: / B =" B
B

>:/=:

: /: :@ /
"= @

= /J J?
:
<

2. Processor Verification
B: / ?B> / B

Q/:/ <
Page 515 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
FOR !
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER !"%$$%&
'* ( ^
Q <M'

/Q /:/ <

, > @/

/:/ B: +/X / /
/:/ <J?+
== < /><

>/= / ::/

//
B +/X / / ?+
>
?/J><= :
? B= <
=:
B
: = <@B:
/>><?B

BB: X! = : :X/:
/ /
/
/= J /X / / J /K:

/BM <Q J =/

>/J><=:
B?
/ :
=/:
X
=
/ D= :==:

: /+ <
/>< @+?: <:

4. Communication System Verification

==: <= >
? +/
B: ! B = < >==: >:
//==: >?JD @J
Y>@/:B=:
:/ =:

>:
: ></ ?@B>: @
==: :?::
/

(
?B = > /= / + /X

/ / =

# :/ =
% D =
$
:=
V ! =?/ <<=:B==:

/ K: := /
+/B
; B

5. Diagnostic Verification

/:
B:D :
> / @B

/ B :' /?
:>=:
/><=+B D
Page 516 of 630

u"h"PE-QP-999-145-I036___
/:
JJ==:
/:
J?:
<=/:

FOR =: B<= /+ <
!
/B<=/ B
= B
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER !"%$$%&
'\ ( ^

6. Control Panel /Desk Verification
Q /+ : <= :

/>@/><
=
B
=:

Q :,: /
? :
/> @/><
+ /B B : ! ,

Q / B
=D:
/>@/></B!
, =:

7. Software Verification
Q
Bd ? ?J
= /"
B:

>:/ =:

//

B
>
@/ :
< +/
B=

QBB :)
Q
BB =J
>Q
=/
B! B =
Q
B: Z J/JBJ'

Q' :)
@ B: U Z J/JBJ
' /"
=J = !
< /:J><
=:
: +//:=

8. Burn in Elevated Temperature test

K:=
> :>/,:
+ / = :
/:/
/>
?

QMQ =/:
@ & !B:/::BW/
/ V^:

Page 517 of 630

STANDARD QUALITY PLAN u"h"PE-QP-999-145-

I036___
FOR
,
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
!
!"
%$$%&
'^ ( ^
QV^: /
>/+/ /VK:
=B=
#%:/: (+<#%:/: B=J

##:##] =
+
B
>
/

:/ / $ =:
?/><

_] =
+
B ;$=:

>Q"=>
/
?=
?B
> @:/::

BW// #%: => = := :

:
/>>
?#!B >+ =>

Page 518 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(
ACTUATOR SPECIFICATION

Page 519 of 630


VOLUME: V-A
SECTION-III
FOR

# SCOPE

## +B
K: =
":
+
+D/ =

#% "

= :
> :/ / ?B

/ = 
J" /
" / /J; ? / ? /+
K:=

%% / /J?
>
?/J
/>
?
>

/ / / < = + +/
/
/ /

>
?/

Q )_$$V

Q )$%&

$ SERVICE CONDITIONS

$# :
>: >

J:=/ /

=JB
<
:/
?
/: /D
<

$%
?/J

K:=D<=/B
>> /
+ / / :;
<?:
< B+ B

$$ ( : =
/:/ /;//: <J

> // /= /B =>

= :

V RATING

V# (
B+J :
> / :+

)
+
+D/ =#&=:J?+
B

V% (B :
B +J :
> : >

< =) / /:<
<
+
+/? <:=> :J>:

#& :

Page 520 of 630


& PERFORMANCE

:
=
?B = K:=

&# /
+
+ =

< /= @
@)B +
+
:
?: ==B

&% " :
/ > +

+
/:/ /=
: B>
? +
+=M ==>
? Q

&$ +
+ = / / =/ /
: B
/B/
: +
+

&V =/:B B
> :
@ ?
=/)B/ /+/ =K:?B:

&& = =
? /@ :

B =
B?
=B
=? =
/BB B= :/
+
+

* SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT

*# Construction

*## :

<=/+=JK:D
=?J
B J
:J /?
J / D =J)>:

= +
/J /
?B

*#% :
:
>
<
/J/: BJ ? )
: >
:/:?:< < <!B

: = :
>)*&

*#$ "

K:=J /?B
>+//?

+ :B:B?

*#V :
> /B/ =:B <?: <

:>
@ B B/ :
<

*% Motor

*%# /+=
> J K:
BJ/: = ?
==:=
,:
/Y)&&
:J/B/ BK:
/+B+ <
>+// :/+

*%% =
>/B/ :
+
B/ )
J? B
:
=/*= :
)
/:

*%$ =
> >
B ^& /+
B /
:B ^ /+
B /K: /^& /
+
B $$; /K: / &=:

*%V
/
>= /
=?= =

*%& : +
+D/ =
>? B
?
$ D$?JV#&" / >
==

Page 521 of 630



*%* B=

>+/// =

*$ Limit Switches

:
>+//?
?B
=?)

*$# %K:
= ?J / +
J
)
@BJ
/: >
K:<

*$% V/) ) +

=?J? / +

*$$ %
= ?J / +
J /: >

< = :
< :
<
/ +
+D/ =

*$V
=?
+% b %

B
>&" %V"&" %%!

*V Hand Wheel

:
>+// ? /?

=B< = :

/ ?

/
: :=
<?=
BW/

*& Position Indicator/Transmitter

:
+

*&# M#Q>:
)

/ )#] +

*&% M#Q =JV)%=":B
/> @J
=/

** Space Heater

"
>
://
=?= =: >

%VJ# J&'W:
<

*\ Wiring

"

/+
>?/: /= / =

>;"

?B
>/?## B / :

/ //
/:
%&K== "
?B
>
/ / >/? :
"

:
+
: =?B

*^ Terminal Box

=
>;
>? J?=+ >

+ / >

B
/ >
=

>: >

%&K==/:

\ ACCESSORIES

Page 522 of 630



" K:/ /+ K:=J :
> : /?

BK:==:/ :

:/

\# M#Q

,

\% M#Q+B ?=
<
@/ J$=

+
/
<J%b% :;
<

\$ M#Q=)

?

\V ))
B:>:?/
B

\& V#&D%V
=?= <U/ < :

^ TEST

: /
=
> :>

+ / / //J <

/ K:=

J =
> =/

_ DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS
_# ! ?BJ! U :

> :>=/
?>/ /
K: //: / Z
/
/D
? +
/:>K: />:
: ` `

_% To be submitted with Bid

! < :
> :/

B?

?B/ B =J :BB/
= / K:
= ?
/+
= /= : :`
B:! ?BJ! U :

>:>=/
? >/ /K: / /:
/Z
/ /D
?
+
/:>K: />: : `
`

_$ To be submitted for Owner / Purchasers Approval and Distribution

"

+ / ?B / / B K:=
@ZJZ"
/ ?BJ :/
J, J
U= J u"J
>
:>=/><,// +
?D?X:
"

: ##_%M:Q )
:=d)"

K:=U"


Page 523 of 630



ANNEXURE-A
DESIGN DATA

# "p"hYh

:
< ! :=

:
< MQ V#&J$J$YJ&'W >+%@Y
+
< / :
#\&@Y

( :

+
&@"<==
#

MQ %V"DV#&" :%@Y

%VJ#J%YJ&'W BBJ )
+
< / BJ":
< )

U+/+

!:
< %%J%YJ: / !
=J

U +/+
( :

+
%&w@"
#

w / +
<J :
+
:?
>///><,//J :> B

=><
:

% "Z(""

":
/
b K:< #]M >
::=Q

!:B B
B=J+
B= </^] /+
B
/ */"

K:= ?
:B
: :
< /
+:/?: B<= =

!:
<

B #^\%V%

Page 524 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(
Actuator Data Sheet

Page 525 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
SPECIFICATION NO.:
SPECIFICATION VOLUME
FOR SECTION
MOTORISED VALVE ACTUATOR
REV. NO. 00 DATE: 06.01.2015
SHEET 1 OF 3
Data Sheet A & B

DATA SHEET-A DATA SHEET-B
(TO BE FILLED BY PURCHASER) (TO BE FILLED-UP BY BIDDER)
* PROJECT 1 X 800 MW KOTHAGUDAM TPS

OFFER REFERENCE
* TAG NO. SERVICE
* DUTY ON / OFF INCHING
* LINE SIZE (inlet/outlet): MATERIAL
GLOBE GATE REG. GLOBE
* VALVE TYPE
BUTTERFLY
GENERAL* * OPENING / CLOSING TIME
* WORKING PRESSURE
SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR CONTINUOUS
AMBIENT CONDITION OPERATION UNDER AN AMBIENT TEMP. OF 0-55
DEG C AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY OF 0-95%
VALVE SEAT TEST PRESS BIDDER TO SPECIFY
REQUIRED VALVE TORQUE BIDDER TO SPECIFY
ACTUATOR RATED TORQUE BIDDER TO SPECIFY
TOTALLY ENCLOSED, DUST TIGHT, WEATHER
CONSTRUCTION PROOF,SUITABLE FOR OUTDOOR USE WITHOUT
CANOPY, IP:65
MECHANICAL POSITION INDICATOR TO BE PROVIDED FOR 0-100% TRAVEL
DOUBLE SHIELDED, GREASE LUBRICATED ANTI-
BEARINGS
FRICTION.
METAL (NOT FIBRE GEARS). SELF-LOCKING TO
GEAR TRAIN FOR
CONSTRUCTION PREVENT DRIFT UNDER TORQUE SWITCH
LIMIT SWITCH/TORQUE SWITCH
AND SIZING OPERATION
SPRING PRESSURE WHEN MOTOR IS DE-
ENERGIZED.
OPEN/CLOSE AT RATED SPEED AGAINST
DESIGNED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AT 90% OF
RATED VOLTAGE. FOR ISOLATING SERVICE
SIZING THREE SUCCESSIVE OPEN-CLOSE OPERATIONS
OR 15 MINS. WHICHEVER IS HIGHER. FOR
REGULATING SERVICE - 150 STARTS/HR
MINIMUM
* REQUIRED YES NO
HANDWHEEL * ORIENTATION TOP MOUNTED SIDE MOUNTED
*TO DISENGAGE AUTOMATICALLY DURING MOTOR OPERATION.

ACTUATOR MAKE/MODEL BIDDER TO SPECIFY
MOTOR MAKE / MODEL / TYPE / RATING
BIDDER TO SPECIFY
(KW)
SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR, STARTING
@ MOTOR TYPE CURRENT LIMITED TO SIX TIMES THE RATED
CURRENT-INCLUSIVE OF I.S. TOLERANCE
ENCLOSED
ACTUATOR APPLICABLE WIRING
DRG. NO. 3-V-MISC-24227 R00 (INDICATIVE)
DIAGRAM
ELECTRIC COLOUR SHADE
BLUE (RAL 5012), To be decided during detail
ACTUATOR engg.
PAINT TYPE (## Refer Notes) ENAMEL EPOXY .
SHAFT RPM BIDDER TO SPECIFY
OLR SET VALUE BIDDER TO SPECIFY
@ STARTING / FULL LOAD CURRENT BIDDER TO SPECIFY
NO. OF REV FOR FULL TRAVEL BIDDER TO SPECIFY
@ PWR SUPP TO MTR / STARTER 415V, 3PH, AC, 3 WIRE
TO BE DERIVED FROM THE POWER SUPPLY TO
@ CONTROL VOLTAGE REQUIREMENT
THE STARTER 230 V 110 V
@ ENCLOSURE CLASS OF MOTOR IP 65 FLAME PROOF
Page 526 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
SPECIFICATION NO.:
FOR SECTION
REV. NO. 00 DATE: 06.01.2015
SHEET 2 OF 3
Data Sheet A & B

@ INSULATION CLASS CLASS-F TEMP. RISE LIMITED TO CLASS-B

THERMOSTAT (3 Nos.,1 IN EACH PHASE)
@ WINDING TEMP PROTECTION
---------------------------------------------------------
SINGLE PHASE / WRONG PHASE
REQUIRED
SEQUENCE PROTECTION
INTEGRAL STARTER REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
TYPE OF SWITCHING DEVICE CONTACTORS THYRISTORS
TYPE CONVENTIONAL SMART (NON-INTRUSIVE)
NOT APPLICABLE
IF SMART
a) SERIAL LINK INTERFACE INTEGRAL FIELD MOUNTED
FOUNDATION FIELD-BUS PROFI-BUS
b) SERIAL LINK PROTOCOL
DEVICE NET
TWISTED PAIR Cu-CBL CO-AXIAL Cu-CBL

c) SERIAL LINK MEDIA
OFC
d) HAND HELD PROGRAMMER REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
e) TYPE OF HAND HELD
BLUETOOTH INFRARED ..............
INTEGRAL PROGRAMMER
STARTER f) MASTER STATION REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
g) MASTER STN INTRFACE WITH DCS MODBUS TCP/IP
h) DETAILS OF SPECIAL CABLE ENCLOSED NOT REQUIRED
STEP DOWN CONT. TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
OPEN / CLOSE PB REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
STOP PB REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
INDICATING LAMPS REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
LOCAL REMOTE S/S REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
STATUS CONTACTS FOR MONITORING REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED

REQUIRED (O/L RELAY OPERATED, CONT.
INTEGRAL STARTER DISTURBED
/POWER SUPPLY FAILED, S/S IN LOCAL, TORQUE
SIGNAL
SWITCH OPTD. MID WAY)
INTERPOSING RELAY OPTO COUPLER
TYPE OF ISOLATING DEVICE
EITHER
INTERPOSING QUANTITY 2 NOs. 3 NOs.
RELAY/OPTO
COUPLER DRIVING VOLTAGE 20.5 24V DC _____________V DC
(Applicable for DRIVING CURRENT 125mA MAX _____________mA MAX
integral Starter)
> 192 ohms - <25 k ohms
LOAD RESISTANCE
> _______ohms - < __________ohms
TORQUE MFR & MODEL NO. BIDDER TO SPECIFY

SWITCH OPEN / CLOSE 1 No. 2Nos. / 1 No. 2Nos
(Not Applicable
CONTACT TYPE 2 NO + 2 NC
for Smart
Actuator) RATING 5A 240V AC AND 0.5A 220V DC
($$ Refer CALIBRATED KNOBS(OPEN&CLOSE TS) REQUIRED FOR SETTING DESIRED TORQUE
Notes) ACCURACY +3% OF SET VALUE
LIMIT SWITCH MFR & MODEL NO. BIDDER TO SPECIFY
(Not Applicable OPEN : INT : CLOSE
1 No
2 Nos. (ADJ.)
1 No.
for Smart 2 Nos. 2Nos.
Actuator) ($$ CONTACT TYPE 2 NO + 2 NC
Refer Notes) RATING (AC / DC) 5A 240V AC AND 0.5A 220V DC
Page 527 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
SPECIFICATION NO.:
FOR SECTION
REV. NO. 00 DATE: 06.01.2015
SHEET 3 OF 3
Data Sheet A & B

POSITION TRANSMITTER REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
MFR & MODEL NO. BIDDER TO SPECIFY
POSITION ELECTRONIC (2 WIRE) R/I CONVERTER

TYPE
ELECTRONIC (2 WIRE) CONTACTLESS
TRANSMITTER
SUPPLY 24V DC
OUTPUT 4-20mA
ACCURACY + 1% FS
@SPACE HEATER REQUIRED
@ POWER SUPPLY (NON INTEGRAL) 240V AC,1 PH.,50 Hz
SPACE
HEATER @ POWER SUPPLY (INTEGRAL)
240V AC , 1 PH/415/240 V CTRL TRANSFORMER
WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUSES
@ RATING
ACTUATOR/MOTOR TERMINAL BOX REQUIRED
ENCL CLASS ACTUATOR/MOTOR T.B. @ IP 68 @

TERMINAL
BOX @ EARTHING TERMINAL REQUIRED
PLUG & SOCKET(9 PIN) REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
(FOR COMMD, LS/TS FEED BACK, PoT) 2 NOS. ----------------
@ POWER CABLE GLAND SIZE:-----------------------
@ SPACE HEATER CABLE GLAND SIZE:-----------------------
CABLE GLANDS
OTHER CONTROL CABLE GLANDS-1 INSTRUMENT CABLE
1No. for BFV SIZEPUMP(Cable
of CW FOR ON/OFF DUTY VALVES SHALL BE 8PXO.5 SQMM -
size 2Px1.5mm2)
ONE CABLE GLAND OF OD SIZE 20 MM.
OTHER CONTROL CABLE GLANDS-2 INSTRUMENT CABLE SIZE FOR INCHING
QUANTITY & SIZE: 1no., 2.5 sq. mm DUTY TYPE VALVES SHALL HAVE TWO NO. CABLES (ONE
NO. 8PXO.5 SQMM AND 2ND 2PXO.5 SQMM) - TWO NO. GLANDS OF OD SIZES 20 MM & 15 MM.
TOTAL WEIGHT (ACTUATOR +
WEIGHT ACCESSORIES)
BIDDER TO SPECIFY _________________ Kg.
NOTES:
1. SCOPE: DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, INSPECTION, TESTING AND DELIVERY TO SITE OF ELECTRIC ACTUATOR FOR INCHING OR OPEN / CLOSE DUTY.
2. CODES & STANDARDS: DESIGN AND MATERIALS USED SHALL COMPLY WITH THE RELEVANT LATEST NATIONAL AND INTERNATION STANDARD. AS A MINIMUM,
THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS SHALL BE COMPLIED WITH:
IS-9334, IS-2147, IS-2148, IS-325, IS-2959, IS-4691 AND IS-4722
3. TEMPERATURE RISE SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 70 DEG. C FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF 50 DEG C.
4. CABLE GLANDS OF DOUBLE COMPRESSION TYPE, BRASS MATERIAL, WITH NICKEL COATING SHALL BE PROVIDED.
5. THE TORQUE SWITCHES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MECHANICAL LATCHING DEVICE TO PREVENT OPERATION WHEN UNSEATING FROM THE END POSITIONS.
THE LATCHING DEVICE SHALL UNLATCH AS SOON AS THE VALVE LEAVES THE END POSITION. IF SUCH PROVISION IS NOT POSSIBLE, THE TORQUE SWITCHES
SHALL BE BYPASSED BY END-POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES WHICH OPENS ON VALVE LEAVING END POSITION.THESE LIMIT SWITCHES ARE ADDITIONAL TO THE
NUMBER OF LIMIT SWITCHES SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE.
6. THE MOTOR SHALL OPERATE SATISFACTORILY UNDER THE +/- 10% SUPPLY VOLTAGE VARIATION AT RATED FREQUENCY, -5% TO +3% VARIATION IN
FREQUENCY AT RATED SUPPLY VOLTAGE, SIMULTANEOUS VARIATION IN VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY THE SUM OF ABSOLUTE PERCENTAGE NOT EXCEEDING 10%.
7. THE MOTOR SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR DIRECT ON LINE STARTING.
$$ TORQUE SWITCH & LIMIT SWITCH SHALL ACT INDEPENDENT OF EACH OTHER. TANDEM OPERATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
## EPOXY PAINT IS RECOMMENDED FOR COASTAL AREAS.
VENDOR COMPANY SEAL
NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
NOTES* = TO BE FILLED BY MPL (LEAD AGENCY). @= TO BE FILLED BY ES
Page 528 of 630

Contactless
Page 529 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(
Drive Control Philosophy

Page 530 of 630

Page 531 of 630

Page 532 of 630

Page 533 of 630

Page 534 of 630

Page 535 of 630

Page 536 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

8366&+(0(

Page 537 of 630

Page 538 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

,167580(17$7,21'$7$6+((7

Page 539 of 630


1.00.00 SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC TRANSMITTERS
1.01.00 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
1. Working Principle : Smart (HART Compatible)
2. Type : Microprocessor based, 2 Wire
3. Output Signal : 4-20 mA DC along with superimposed

digital signal
4. Measuring Element : Capsule / Diaphragm
5. Element material : SS-316 (Stainless Steel) or better
6. Static Pressure : 150 % of maximum span continuously,

without affecting the calibration
7. Turn-down ratio : 100: 1
8. Span and Zero : Continuous, tamper proof, remote as

well locally adjustable with zero
elevation and suppression by 100% of
span
9. Enclosure Class : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC

Class-1, Division 1 area)
10. Output Indicator : LCD (Integral indicator of 5 digit

display)
11. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in SS

tag plate
12. Body : SS
13. Operating Voltage : 24V DC
14. Load : 600 Ohms (min.) at 24 Volts D.C.
15. Ambient Temperature : 0 - 50 OC
16. Performance: :
i. Accuracy r 0.075% of Span or better
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V VI/S-VII/SS-A: 2

(PCT-K-03-2013-14_V-VI_S VII_SS A.DOC)
Page 540 of 630


ii. Repeatability r 0.05% of Span or better
17. Sealing/Isolation : Extended diaphragm (Silicon oil/

Flurolub filled ) with 5 meters SS
armoured capillary for
corrosive/viscous/solid bearing or
slurry type fluid applications
18. Accessories : a. Universal mounting bracket

suitable for 2 pipe mounting
b. High tensile carbon steel U-

bolts
c. Siphon for steam and hot water

services
d. NPT 2-valve stainless steel

manifold, constructed from
SS316 bar stock
e. Companion flange with nuts,

bolts and gaskets
f. NPT cable gland
g. Handheld calibrator
19. Adjustment/Calibration/ : From handheld calibrator/ HART

Maintenance management system
Notes: For primary air/ secondary air/ flue gas applications, DP type
transmitters shall be provided for pressure measurement.
LVDT type is not acceptable.
1.02.00 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER / FLOW TRANSMITTER
1. Working Principle : Smart (HART Compatible)
2. Type : Microprocessor based, 2 Wire

digital signal
4. Measuring Element : Capsule / Diaphragm

Page 541 of 630


5. Element material : SS-316 (Stainless Steel) or better
6. Static Pressure : 150 % of maximum span continuously,

without affecting the calibration
7. Turn-down ratio : 100: 1
8. Span and Zero : Continuous, tamper proof, remote as

span
9. Enclosure Class : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC

10. Output Indicator : LCD (Integral indicator of 5 digit

display)
11. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in SS

tag plate
12. Body : SS
13. Operating Voltage : 24V DC
14. Load : 600 Ohms (min.) at 24 Volts D.C.
16. Performance:
i. Accuracy : r 0.075% of Span or better
ii. Repeatability : r 0.05% of Span or better
17. Sealing/Isolation : Extended diaphragm (Silicon oil/

Flurolub filled ) with 5 meters SS
armoured capillary for
corrosive/viscous/solid bearing or
slurry type fluid applications
18. Accessories : a. Universal mounting bracket

suitable for 2 pipe mounting
b. High tensile carbon steel U-

bolts

Page 542 of 630


c. Siphon for steam and hot water

services
d. NPT 5-valve stainless steel

manifold, constructed from
SS316 bar stock
e. Companion flange with nuts,

bolts and gaskets
f. NPT cable gland
g. Handheld calibrator

1.03.00 Displacer Type Level Transmitters
1. Type : Smart (HART Compatible)
2. Stages of operation : Continuous
3. Material :
4. i. Displacer SS-316
5. ii. Suspension wire SS-316
6. iii. Torque tube SS

housing
7. iv. Torque tube Inconel
8. v. Displacer SS
chamber
9. vi. Transmitter SS
Housing
10. Operating Voltage : 24 V DC
11. Transmission : Microprocessor based, 2-wire

digital signal
13. Static / overload : Maximum static pressure without

Page 543 of 630


pressure permanent deformation or loss of

accuracy
14. Turn-down ratio : 10 : 1 or better
15. Zero & Span : Continuous, tamper proof, remote as

span
16. Enclosure Class : IP-65
17. Output Indicator : LCD type (Integral indicator of 5 digit

display)
18. Nameplate : Tag number and Service engraved in

stainless steel tag plate
20. Load Impedance : 600 Ohms at 24 Volts (minimum)
21. Process Connection : 2 Flanged
22. Performance - : +
_ 0.075 % of span or better
Accuracy
23. Accessories : a) Counter Flange, nuts, bolts,
gaskets etc
b) Weights for 5 point calibration

of instruments
c) Vent and drain plugs
d) NPT Glands
e) Handheld calibrator
24. Preferred Features : a) Test plug connection and

cutout terminals physically
separated from other
electronics
b) Electronic Damping facility

(adjustable)


Page 544 of 630


26. Applications : During detail engineering on Owners

approval
1.04.00 MASS FLOW METER
1.04.01 SENSOR
1. Measuring Principle : Coriolis Mass flow
2. Primary Element : Flow Tube of 316SS or better
3. Heating Arrangement : Integral
4. Temperature Control : For heavy fuel oil application
5. Process Connection : Flanged of rating as per process

requirement
6. Drain : Self-draining facility
7. Enclosure : Stainless steel
8. Accessories : Counter flanges, Mounting nuts, bolts,

gaskets etc.
1.04.02 TRANSMITTER
1. Measured quantities : Mass Flow rate, Total Mass Flow,

Density
2. Input Signal Processing : Smart (HART compatible)
3. Display : LCD
4. Output : 2 nos. isolated output of 4-20mA DC

selectable from four measured
quantities
5. Load : < 750 ohms
6. Power supply : 240V AC, 50 Hz

Page 545 of 630


7. Turn Down : 100:1
8. Accuracy :
+
_ 0.2 % of measured value
9. Housing :
IP 65 (Explosion proof)
10. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in

11. Accessories : a) Handheld calibrator
b) Mounting U-bolts, nuts, bolts,

prefab cable etc
c) NPT cable gland

/Maintenance management system
13. Applications : Fuel Oil service
1.05.00 RADAR TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT
1. Type : Smart (HART Compatible)
2. Antenna : Co axial / guided wave radar / Overspill

protection
3. Principle : TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry)
4. Communication : Two wire 4-20mA DC with HART
5. Environmental : 0 50 C
temperature
6. Enclosure : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC
7. Calibration : a) Self calibration with internal
reference
: b) Zero & Span calibration
8. Process Connection : External cage mounting
Flanged /screwed
9. Electronic Housing : Epoxy painted Die-Cast aluminium

Page 546 of 630


alloy
10. Antenna / Flange : 316 SS or Hestalloy (as required)
assembly
11. Power supply :
24 V DC
12. Output Indicator :
LCD
13. Accuracy : 5 mm or 0.1% of probe length
14. Accessories : a) Handheld
calibrator
: b) Counter Flange,
nuts, bolts, gaskets
etc
:
c) NPT cable gland
:
d) SS Nameplate
16. Applications : Vessels under vacuum or low pressure

applications, solid levels
1.06.00 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
1. Type : Microprocessor based, 2-wire, Smart

(HART Compatible )
2. Operating Principle : Detection of reflected ultrasonic pulse

digital signal
4. Operating frequency : 10 KHz to 50 KHz (typical)
5. Display : LCD
6. Temperature : Built in Programmable

Compensati
on
7. Power supply : 24 V DC
8. Enclosure : SS, IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC


Page 547 of 630


9. Zero & Span : Continuous, tamper proof, remote as

well locally adjustable. It shall be
possible to calibrate the instrument
without any level in the sump/ tank
10. Accuracy & : 0.15 % of span or better

Repeatability
11. Resolution : 0.1 % of span
12. Operating temp. : Transmitter- 500 C and Sensor - 800 C

13. MOC Sensor : SS-316/Body- PVC and Face
Polyurethene
14. Mounting : 4 Flanged/ 2 NPT for sensor and

Transmitter on panel
15. Accessories : a) Handheld

calibrator
b) Weather canopy
for protection from
direct sunlight and
direct rain
c) NPT cable
gland
d) All mounting
hardware (SS-
316), Prefab cable
e) SS Nameplate
16. Diagnosis : On-line
17. Status Indication : Power On, HI, HI-HI, Lo, LO-LO, Fault
18. Output Contacts : 2 SPDT, 230V, 5A

20. Applications : Coal Bunker, Water Service etc.

Page 548 of 630


1.07.00 ULTRASONIC FLOW TRANSMITTER
1. Type : Ultrasonic Clamp On
2. Accuracy : +/- 1 % of reading
3. Repeatability : +/- 0.3 % of reading
4. Rangeability : 400 : 1
5. Output Signal : 4-20 mA DC with HART
6. Measured Parameter : Volumetric flow, Totalized flow and

flow Velocity
7. Display : LCD with internal Key Pad

(Flow rate & Totalization)
8. Power Supply : 24 V DC (2 Wire)
9. Enclosure : SS (IP- 68 Submersible)
10. Mounting : SS Chain or Strap
11. Accessories 1. Handheld calibrator
2. NPT cable gland
3. Transducer cable
4. All mounting hardware (SS-

316)
5. SS Nameplate

13. Applications : Plant water service
Note: Multi-path insertion type (minimum 4 path) Ultrasonic Flow meter shall
be provided for Raw water/ Cooling Water flow measurements.
2.00.00 HART HAND HELD CALIBRATOR

Hand held calibrators (5 nos. for each type) shall be provided for
adjustment/ calibration/maintenance of the HART compatible

Page 549 of 630


transmitters. The hand held calibrator shall be suitable for all types of
transmitters supplied in the package. If one type of hand held type
calibrator is not suitable for communicating with all types of transmitters
then separate hand held calibrator will be provided.
3.00.00 PROCESS ACTUATED SWITCHES
3.01.00 PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Type : i. Piston for high pressure

application
ii. Bellow / Diaphragm for low
pressure application
2. Sensing element : SS-316.
material All other wetted part SS316
3. Case Material : SSt
4. Setter Scale : Black graduation on white linear scale.
Graduation 0-100% with red pointer for
set points
5. Over range : 150 % of maximum pressure
6. Adjustments : a) Internal Set Point
: b) Differential adjustment
7. End Connection : 1/2" NPT bottom connected
8. Switch configuration : Two SPDT (240V, 5A AC/220V, 0.5A
DC)
9. Switch Type : Snap acting, shock & vibration proof
10. Terminal Block : Suitable for full ring lugs
11. Enclosure Class : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-1,
Division 1 area)
12. Performance : a) Repeat accuracy r 1.0%
: b) Accuracy of Setting Indication of
+ 1.5%
13. Ambient temperature : 0 50 Deg.C

Page 550 of 630


14. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in SS tag

plate
15. Accessories : a) Silicon oil/ Flurolub filled
Remote diaphragm seal with
SS-316 capillary for corrosive/
viscous/ solid bearing or slurry
type fluid applications
b) Snubbers for pulsating fluid
applications
c) Siphons for steam and hot water
services
d) Retention ring and screws for
surface mounting
e) 1/2 NPT 2 Valve SS-316
barstock manifold
f) NPT cable gland
16. Applications : During Detail Engineering on Owners
approval
3.02.00 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Type : i. Piston for high pressure

application
ii. Bellow / Diaphragm for low
pressure application
2. Sensing element : SS-316.
material All other wetted part SS316
3. Case Material : SS
4. Setter Scale : Black graduation on white linear scale.
set points
5. Over range : 150 % of maximum pressure

Page 551 of 630


6. Adjustments : a) Internal Set Point

: b) Differential adjustment
7. End Connection : 1/2" NPT bottom/ back connected
DC)
9. Switch Type : Snap acting, shock & vibration proof
10. Terminal Block : Suitable for full ring lugs
11. Enclosure Class : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-1,
Division 1 area)
12. Performance : a) Repeat accuracy r 1.0%
b) Accuracy of Setting Indication of
+ 1.5%
13. Ambient temperature : 0 50 Deg.C
14. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in SS tag
plate
15. Accessories : a) Silicon oil/ Flurolub filled
Remote diaphragm seal with
SS-316 capillary Diaphragm
seals for corrosive/ viscous/
solid bearing or slurry type fluid
applications
b) Snubbers for pulsating fluid
applications
c) Siphons for steam and hot water
services
d) Retention ring and screws for
surface mounting
e) 1/2 NPT 5 Valve SS-316
barstock manifold
f) NPT cable gland

Page 552 of 630


approval
3.03.00 LEVEL SWITCH
3.03.01 FLOAT OPERATED
1. Float material : SS-316

2. Wetted parts : SS-316
3. Float chamber : Stainless steel/Carbon steel,
construction welded
4. Float chamber : Side mounted
mounting
5. Fluid connection : Side Side
6. Fluid connection size : 1 ANSI RF Flange (rubber line, if
required)
7. Drain : inch NPT with Plug
8. Pressure rating of : Minimum 1.5 times of design pressure
chamber
9. Repeatability : +/- 1.5 mm or better
10. Switch housing : Stainless Steel
11. Switch housing type : IP- 65
12. Type of switch : Snap acting magnetically operated
hermetically sealed
13. Switch configuration : 2 SPDT (5A, 240 V AC, 0.5A, 220V DC)
14. Accessories : a) Counter flange, nuts
& bolts, suitable
gasket etc.
b) Steel globe type
drain valve
c) NPT cable gland

Page 553 of 630


d) Stainless steel
nameplate with
alpha-numeric
engraved for service
and tag
15. Application : During Detail Engineering on Owners
approval
3.04.00 FLOW SWITCH
1. Type : Paddle /Piston/Disk

2. Wetted part material : Stainless steel or Hastelloy for acidic
application
3. End connection : a) Threaded upto 1 line size with
integral Tee
: b) Flanged for line size > 1
4. Enclosure material : Stainless Steel
5. Enclosure class : IP 65
6. Switch configuration : 2 SPDT (5A, 240 V AC, 0.5A, 220V DC)
7. Repeatibility : 2%
8. Cable connection : NPTF
9. Accessories : a) Tee, Counter flange, nuts &

bolts, suitable gasket etc
b) NPT cable gland
c) Stainless steel nameplate with
alpha-numeric engraved for
service and tag
3.05.00 RF LEVEL SWITCH

Page 554 of 630


1. Type : RADIO FREQUENCY

Sensing probe
2. Material : SS-316
3. Mounting : Threaded
Application
4. : 250C (Max.)
Temperature
Electronic Controller
5. Input Supply Voltage : 240V AC 10%, 50 Hz.
6. Relay Output : 2 SPDT (240V AC, 5A)
7. Ambient Temperature : 50 C
8. Enclosure Protection : IP-66
9. Enclosure Housing : SS
Normal Level
Power On
10. Local LED Indication :
Alarm Level
Probe Healthy
11. Switching Repeatability : 0.5%
Co-axial cable for probe connection to
controller
12. Accessories :
SS Tag plate
NPT Cable Glands
13. Application : Solid level
3.06.00 CONDUCTIVITY TYPE LEVEL SWITCH
1. Type : Conductivity discrimination

2. Probe MOC : SS-316
3. Mounting : Flanged on external cage
Application
4. : 250C (Max.)
Temperature
5. Test Pressure : Two times rated pressure

Page 555 of 630


6. Input Supply Voltage : 240V AC 10%, 50 Hz.

Four independent channel with
7. Input : selectable switching threshold for water
conductivity
8. Relay Output : 2 SPDT (240V AC, 5A)
9. Ambient Temperature : 50 C
IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-1,
10. Enclosure Protection :
Division-1 area)
11. Enclosure Housing : SS
HI,LO, HIGH-HIGH, LOW-LOW
12. Local LED Indication : Power
Fault
Interconnecting cable from
13. Accessories : a)
probe to electronics
b) Mounting accessories
c) External cage
d) Washer & Gasket
e) NPT Cable Glands
f) SS Tag Plate
During Detail Engineering on Owners
14. Application :
approval
3.07.00 TEMPERATURE SWITCH
1. Type : Bimetallic or gas filled

2. Sensing Element : SS-316
Material
3. Bulb Material : SS-316
4. Capillary : Stainless Steel armored

Page 556 of 630


5. Movement Material : Stainless Steel

6. Case material : Stainless Steel with neoprene gasket
and clear glass where applicable cover
conforming to IP-65. (Explosion proof
for NEC Class-1, Division 1 area).
7.. Scale : Black graduation on white linear scale.
set points
8. Over range Protection : 120 %
9. Instrument connection : Bottom
DC)
11. Switch type : Snap acting, shock and vibration-proof
12. Adjustability : Internal Set point adjustable over span
range
13. Compensation : a) Capillary compensation with
invar wire throughout the
capillary length
b) Case compensation
14. Performance
a) Scale Accuracy : r1.0 % of full scale
b) Repeatability : < 0.5 % of full range
c) Response time : Less than 40 seconds with thermowell
15. Capillary length : 5 meters (minimum) for local
mounting/15 meters for local panel
mounting
16. Nameplate : Tag number, service engraved in
17. Accessories : Mounting accessories, NPT cable
gland

Page 557 of 630


approval
4.00.00 LOCAL INSTRUMENTS
4.01.00 PRESSURE GAUGE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE
1. Type : Bourdon/Bellows/Diaphragm
2. Sensing & Socket : SS-316
3. Movement Material : SS-316
Stainless steel. IP-65 (Explosion proof
4. Case Material :
for NEC Class-1, Division 1 area)
5. Dial Size : Generally 150 mm
6. Scale : Black lettering on white in 270 O arc.
7. Window : Shatterproof glass
Normal process pressure: 50~70 % of

8. Range Selection :
range
125% of maximum range by internal
9. Over-range Protection :
stop. External stop at zero
For Zero adjustment (Micrometer screw
external)
10. Adjustment :
For Range adjustment (Micrometer
screw internal).
11. Element Connection : Argon welding
1/2" NPT (M) Bottom for local, back for
12. Process Connection :
panel mounting
13. Performance : Accuracy of r 1.0 % of span or better
14. Operating ambient : 0 - 50 OC
15. Safety Feature : Blow out disc /diaphragm at the back
Snubbers for pulsating fluid
application.discharge
b) Stainless steel Diaphragm seals

Page 558 of 630


for corrosive/ viscous/ solid

bearing or slurry type fluid
applications
3-Way SS316 Gauge cock for
c)
pressure gauges
5-valve SS316 manifold from
d) barstock for differential pressure
gauge
Siphons for steam and hot
e)
water services
: Tag number, service engraved in
17. Nameplate
4.02.00 LEVEL INDICATOR (FLOAT & BOARD TYPE)
1. Type : Float and Board

2. Float Material : SS-316
3. Float Cable : SS-316
4. Indicator Assembly : Epoxy painted Aluminium
Guide wire spring SS-316 (2 Nos.)
5. :
assembly
6. Guide Wire Anchor : SS-316
Anodized Aluminium with engraved
marking ( Minimum graduation 10mm),
7. Scale Board :
mounting brackets and suitable
hardware required as per tank height
8. Elbow Assembly : Anodized Aluminium
9. Flanges : RF , ANSI 150 , SS (3 Nos.)
10. Accuracy : + 10 mm or better
All mounting accessories including
11. Accessories :
counter flange, nuts & bolts, suitable

Page 559 of 630


gasket etc. as applicable, SS Tag plate
4.03.00 GAUGE GLASS
1. Type : Reflex /Transparent

2. Material
Toughened borosilicate resistant to
Glass :
thermal shock
Carbon Steel Stainless Steel
Body Material :
IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-1,

Enclosure :
Division 1 area)
Integral cocks &
3. : i. SS 316
valves/Fittings
Rubber lined corrosion resistant
4. : ii. stainless steel (for DM/RO
service)
5. Vessel Connection : ANSI Flanged SS316
6. Accessories : i. Integral cocks
ii. Drain Valves
Companion Flanges, Bolts, nuts,
iii.
gaskets, SS Tag plate
Illuminating lamps, Mica shield as
iv.
required
v. Calibrated scale
7. Pressure rating : Twice the maximum working pressure
8. Temperature : 300 O C
For larger lengths (greater than
1200mm), additional gauge glasses
9. Other details :
shall be provided with minimum of 50
mm overlap.

Page 560 of 630


4.04.00 SLIGHT GLASS

1. Type : Flap-type.
2. End connection : Screwed / Flanged
3. Material
a) Body : SS- 304
b) Cover plate : SS- 304
c) Indicator : SS- 316
4. Sight Glass : Toughened Borosilicate
5. Gasket : Neoprene
6. Bolts & Nuts : High tensile steel.
Hydraulic Test
7. : 1.5 times maximum working pressure
Pressure
Companion Flanges, Bolts, nuts,
8. Accessories :
gaskets as required, SS Tag plate.
4.05.00 ROTAMETER
1. Type ON-LINE for line upto and including 50

mm NB.
:
Borosilicate BY-PASS for line size
above 50 NB
2. Metering tube : Toughened Borosilicate
3. Float : SS-316
4. End fittings : SS-316
5. Packing material : Teflon / PTFE
6. Casing : Stainless Steel
7. Gland Rings
Stainless Steel
/Followers/ Other :
wetted parts
8. Orifice Plate : Stainless Steel (for bypass type)
9. Operating
: 0-50 Deg. c
Temperature

Page 561 of 630


10. Test Pressure : 200% of maximum operating pressure

11. Scale : 250 mm nominal length
12. Graduation : Direct reading
13. Flanged (RF) to line size as per ANSI
Process Connection :
standards (150#)
14. Tapping : D & D/2
15. Accuracy : +/- 2% of full scale reading
16. Reproducibility : Within 0.5% of instantaneous reading
17. Accessories : SS Tag Plate, orifice plate
5.00.00 TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS & ACCESSORIES
5.01.00 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
1. Type : Platinum (Duplex), Ungrounded

Platinum (Duplex),
2. : 100 ohm at 0 OC
Ungrounded
3. Base : Wound on ceramic (anti-inductive)
3 Wire
4. Wiring :
5. Protecting Tube
a) O.D. : 6 mm
b) Material : SS-316, Seamless
c) Filling : Magnesium oxide (Purity above 99.4%).
6. Response time : a) 15 sec. (bare).
b) 30 sec. (with thermowell)
7. Calibration : DIN 43760
8. Accuracy : r 0.5%
9. Head
a)
Type : IP-65 universal screwed type

Page 562 of 630


b)
Material : Stainless Steel
c) Terminal Nickel plated Brass-screw type / silver

:
blocks plated
d) Cable
: NPT gland and grommet
connection
e) Others : Terminal head cover with SS chain and
suitable gasket.
Head of TE to be provided with sufficient

space and arrangement to mount head
mounted temperature transmitter (as
applicable).
Adjustable nipple-union-nipple
[1/2 Sch 80 X NPT] with
thermowell connection
Compression fittings/unions
b)
Flanges etc. (for flanged

c) connections only)
Thermowell (As specified

d) below)
Thermowell
11. : NPT (M) or 150 RF Flanged
connection
Tag number, service engraved in
12. Nameplate : stainless steel tag plate

Page 563 of 630


Note: The specifications for RTDs of winding/ bearing of motor/pump,

can be as per their manufacturer standards. The manufacturer
shall submit the adequate supporting documents for establishing
their standard practice. However, the type of RTD shall be Pt-
100.
5.02.00 THERMOCOUPLES
1. Type a) 16 SWG wire of Chromel

:
Alumel) (Type-K)
b) Duplex
c) Ungrounded
2. Protecting Tube
a) O.D. : 6 mm
b) Material : SS-316, Seamless
c) Filling : Magnesium oxide (Purity above 99.4%).
3. Response time : a) < 20 seconds for measurement
b) < 10 seconds for control
4. r 1.10 C up to 300 0
C & 0.4% of
Accuracy : measured temperature range above 300
0
C
5. Head
IP-65 universal screwed type

a) Type :
Stainless Steel
b) Material :
Terminal Nickel plated Brass-screw type / silver

c) :
blocks plated
Cable NPT gland and grommet
d) :
connection
6. Terminal head cover with SS chain and
e) Others :
suitable gasket.

Page 564 of 630


Head of TE to be provided with sufficient

space and arrangement to mount head
mounted temperature transmitter (as
applicable).
7. a) Adjustable nipple-union-nipple
Accessories : [1/2 Sch 80 X NPT] with
thermowell connection
b) Compression fittings/unions
c) Flanges etc. (for flanged

connections only)
d) Thermowell (As specified
below)
8. Thermowell connection : NPT (M) or 150 RF Flanged
9. Tag number, service engraved in
Nameplate :
5.03.00 TEMPERATURE GAUGE
1. Type : Expansion type (Liquid filled system)

Sensing Element
2. : Bourdon SS-316
Material
Bulb and Capillary
3. : SS-316
Material
Inner sheath - solid drawn Material
4. Capillary Tubing : copper tube
Outer sheath - PVC tube
Stainless Steel / Direct Bourdon tip
5. Movement Materials :
connection to pointer spindle
Stainless Steel stove enameled, black
6. Case Material :
finish, threaded bezel ring, clear glass

Page 565 of 630


cover conforming to IP 65.

7. Dial size : 150 mm
Black lettering on white background in
8. Scale :
270 Deg.C arc
9. Over range protection : 125 percent of FSD
1/2 NPT(M) x compression fitting (SS)
10. Capillary Glanding :
to suit capillary
Bottom connection for local mounting,
11. Instrument Connection :
back connection for panel mounting
12. Process Connection : NPT (M) or 150 RF Flanged
13. Extension Neck Length : 50 mm
14. Compensation : a) Capillary compensation
15. : b) Case compensation
Accuracy : + /- 1.0 percent of
16. Performance : a)
full scale Deflection
Repeatability : Less than 0.5
: b)
percent of full range
Response time: 15 seconds
: c)
(max.).
3.0 meters (local) / 15.0 metres (local
17. Capillary length :
panel)
18. Other features : Shatter proof glass
Tag number, service engraved in
19. Nameplate :
20. Accessories : SS316 Thermowell
5.04.00 THERMOWELL
1. Material : SS-316
2. Manufacture : Drilled from bar stock, Hex Head,
Tapered design (As per ASME PTC
19.3)

Page 566 of 630


3. Process connection : M33x2

4. Certification : Not applicable
5. Bore concentricity : +5% of wall thickness
6. Identification mark : Tag number punched on head
7. Surface treatment : Polish after machining
8. Element connection : NPT (M) or 150 RF Flanged
9. Head : Hex
10. Length of the hex head : 31.75 mm (min.)
11. Accessories : SS Plug and chain for test thermo wells
SS Nameplate, Flange with companion
flange & all required accessories for
flanged connections.
Note: Wake frequency calculations shall be furnished for all thermowells for
approval.
Thermowells shall be designed such that the resonant frequency is above

the exciting frequencies generated by vortex shedding in the process
fluid.
5.05.00 METAL TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE
1. Measuring medium : Metal temperature

2. Type : Chromel Alumel (Type-K)
Duplex, Ungrounded
3. Insulation : Mineral Insulation Magnesium Oxide
4. Wire gauge : 16 AWG
5. Protective sheath : SS
6. Protective sheath :
8 mm O.D.
diameter
7. Characteristics : Special limits of error as in ANSI
thermocouple MC 96.01
8. Accessories : BSP SS sliding end connector, weld
pad, clamps of heat resistant steel

Page 567 of 630


1. Type : Hydrometer Type

2. Mounting : On line
3. Accuracy : +/- 2% of range
4. Scale : Black letter on white scale
5. End connection : PVC flange
9.06.00 DENSITY/ CONCENTRATION METER
1. Wetted Part Stainless Steel

2. Enclosure Stainless Steel (IP-65)
3. Power Supply 24 V DC
4. Output signal : 4-20 mA DC (isolated) into 600 ohms
5. Accuracy 0.001 g/cc
6. Indication : LCD display
7. Temp. Compensation : Integral
8. Accessories Mounting hardware, integral amplifier
(if required), cable glands, tag plate
etc.
10.00.00 SOLENOID VALVES
1. Operating Principle : Electromagnetic (noiseless)

2. Coil voltage rating : 240 V AC /24 V DC (as required)
3. Ways : 2/3/4 way
4. Port size : 1/4" NPT all ports
5. Body : SS bar stock
Trim : SS-316
6. Duty : Suitable for continuous energization

7. Sealing : Airtight and leak proof
8. Ambient Temperature : 0 - 50 O C

Page 568 of 630


9. Fluid Temperature : 0-150 O C (approx.)

10. Coil Enclosure : Stainless Steel
11. Insulation : Class-H
12. Coil Casing : IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-
1, Division-1 area)
13. Mounting : On pipe or on panel
14. Cable Connection : NPT
15. Accessories : Cable glands, SS Tag plate

Page 569 of 630

THIS IS A PART OF TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION NO.-PE-TS-410-163-A001
()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

,QVWUXPHQWDWLRQ4XDOLW\3ODQ

Page 570 of 630

STANDARD CHECK LIST FOR C&I INSTRUMENTS (for Maux Pkgs)
CHECK LIST FOR PRESSURE SWITCH
Sl. Test / Checks Quantum of Reference Doc. / Agency ** Remarks

No. check Acceptance Norms M C B
1 CHECK FOR P V V
1.1 MODEL NO/TAG NO
1.2 RANGE
1.3 END CONN
1.4 NO. OF CONTACT SEE NOTE-1
2 CALIBRATION BELOW P V V
2.1 REPEATABILITY
2.2 SET POINT ADJUSTMENT
2.3 DIFFERENTIAL
3 OVER PR & LEAK TEST APPROVED SPEC./ P V V
4 ELECT. INSULATION/HV TEST ONE DATA SHEETS P V V
5 REVIEW OF TC FOR FOR LOT V V V
MATERIALS OF
5.1 SENSOR
5.2 MOVEMENT
5.3 PROCESS CONNECTION
5.4 HOUSING
6 REVIEW OF TC FOR DEGREE TYPE TEST V V V
OF PROTECTION
7 REVIEW OF TC OF FOR LOT V V V
MICROSWITCH
** M = Manufacturer / Sub-contractor, C = Contractor / Nominated Inspecting Agency, B = BHEL,
P = Perform, W = Witness, V = Verification
Note :
1. Quantum of check shall be as below :
100 % - By Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer to carry out ROUTINE TEST on 100 %.
3. Contractor to provide compliance certificate for tests/checks verifid by contractor and
the same alongwith test certificates to be verified by BHEL
Page 571 of 630

CHECK LIST FOR TRANSMITTER
Sl. Test / Checks Quantum Reference Doc. / Agency ** Remarks

No. of check Acceptance Norms M C B
1 P W V
CHECKS FOR
VISUAL.
MODEL/TAG No
2 PROCESS CONNECTION SEE NOTE-1 P W V
3 ACCURACY BELOW P W V
4 REPEATABILITY P W V
5 HYSTERESIS P W V
6 EFFECT OF TEMP VARIATION P W V
ON ACCURACY APPROVED SPEC./
7 SPAN / ZERO ADJUSTMENT DATA SHEETS P W V
8 EFFECT OF SUPPLY VOLTAGE P W V
VARIATION ONE / TYPE
9 EFFECT OF LOADING (500 OHM P W V
METERS)
10 SEE NOTE-1 P W V
HIGH PRESSURE TEST
BELOW
11 BURN-IN TEST P W V
ONE / TYPE
12 DEGREE OF PROTECTION P W V
13 SEE NOTE-1 V V V
ACCESSORIES AS APPLICABLE
BELOW
Legend :
Note :
2. Manufacturer to maintain calibrated instrument having better accuracy than the item
under test. Inspecting engineer shall check the same.
3. When material corelation are not available manufacturer's compliance to be provided.
submit the same alongwith test certificates to be verified by BHEL.
Page 572 of 630

CHECK LIST FOR PRESSURE & DP GAUGE

1 CHECK FOR P W V
SENSOR TYPE
DIAL SIZE
MODEL NO/TAG NO
RANGE/SCALE
SWITCH CONTACT RATING &
NOS. SEE NOTE-1
END CONNECTION BELOW
2 CALIBRATION P W V
ACCURACY
REPEATABILITY
SET POINT ADJUSTMENT APPROVED SPEC./
3 DATA SHEETS P W V
OVER PRESSURE & LEAK TEST
4 OPERATION OF PRESSURE. ONE P W V
RELIEF DEVICE
5 REVIEW OF TC FOR FOR LOT V V V
MATERIALS OF SENSOR
MOVEMENT
PROCESS CONNECTION
HOUSING
6 REVIEW OF TC FOR DEGREE TYPE TEST V V V
OF PROTECTION
7 SEE NOTE-1 V V V
ACCESSORIES AS APPLICABLE
BELOW
Legend :
Note :
4. When material corelation is not available, MFR's compliance to be provided
Page 573 of 630

CHECK LIST FOR LEVEL GAUGE

CHECK FOR P W V
TYPE
MODEL/ TAG NO.
1
DAIL SIZE
SEE NOTE-1
RANGE/SCALE BELOW
END CONNECTION
DIMENSIONS, PROCESS P W V
2 APPROVED SPEC./
CONNECTION
DATA SHEETS /
3 ACCURACY DRWGS P W V
4 MATERIAL TC FOR ONE / LOT P V V
BODY ISO.
VALVE
GAUGE GLASS
P W V
5 HYD. TEST SEE NOTE-1
BELOW
6 ACCESSORIES AS APPLICABLE P W V
Legend :
Note :
Page 574 of 630

CHECK LIST FOR ANNUNCIATORS

1 SEE NOTE-1 P W V
CHECK FOR
BELOW
TYPE/ MODEL
DIMENSIONS OF HARDWARE
MODULARITY
SEQUENCE
FACIA DETAILS APPROVED SPEC./
2 FUNCTIONAL TEST 100% DATA SHEETS P W V
3 IMMUNE TO STEP VARIATIONS SEE NOTE-1 P W V
IN THE POWER SUPPLY BELOW
4 DEGREE OF PROTECTION FOR TYPE TEST P W V
ENCLOSURE
5 SEE NOTE-1 P W V
I/R CHECK
BELOW
6 RESPONSE P W V
Legend :
Note :
Page 575 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
SPEC NO.: PE-TS-410-145-I

Technical specification for
CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION VOLUME
SECTION
1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
REV. NO. 00 DATE : 10.03.2015
SHEET OF
LCP and JUNCTION BOXES

SPECIFICATION
Page 576 of 630


1.00.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

1.01.00 ENCLOSURES FOR INSTRUMENTS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT
1.01.01 All panels, cabinets, distribution boxes, junction boxes, terminal boxes and all
other field mounted equipment / enclosures shall have suitable environmental
protection as detailed in Section-I of this volume of the specification.
1.02.00 SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING
1.02.01 All sheet metal panel/ desk exterior steel surfaces shall be sand blasted,
ground smooth and painted as specified below.
1.02.02 Suitable filler shall be applied to all pits, blemishes and voids in the surface.
The filler shall be sanded so that surfaces are level and flat; corners are
smooth and even. Exposed raw metal edges shall be ground burr-free. The
entire surface shall be blast clean to remove rust and scale and all other
residue due to the fabrication operation. Oil, grease and salts etc. shall be
removed from the panels by one or more solvent cleaning methods prior to
blasting.
1.02.03 Two spray coats of inhibitive epoxy primer surfacer shall be applied to all
exterior and interior surfaces, each coat of primer surfacer shall be of dry film
thickness of 1.5 mil. A minimum of two spray coats of final finish color
(Catalyzed epoxy or polyurethane) shall be applied to all surface of dry film
thickness 2.0 Mil. The finish colors for exterior and interior surfaces shall
conform to the following shades:
x Exterior Opaline green shade 275 of IS: 5 or equivalent
international code..
x Interior - Brilliant White.
1.02.04 Paint films, which show sags, cheeks, blisters, teardrops, fat edges or other
painting imperfections, shall not be acceptable.
1.03.00 WIRING
1.03.01 All spare contacts of relays, switches and push buttons shall be wired up to
the terminal blocks. All intercommunications between sections of
panels/desks shall be furnished.
1.03.02 Each wire shall be identified at both ends with wire designation as per
approved wiring diagram. Heat shrinkable type ferrules with indelible
computerized ink print shall be used with cross- identification.
1.03.03 All wire termination shall be made with insulated sleeve and crimping type
lugs. Wire shall not be spliced or tapped between terminals. Open-ended
terminal lugs will not be accepted. Wires shall not be looped around the
terminal screws or studs.
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANTS V VI/S-VII/SS-D: 1

(PCT-K-03-2013-14_V-VI_S VII_SS D.DOC)
Page 577 of 630


1.03.04 Internal wiring should be terminated uniformly on one side of the terminal
block leaving the other side available for termination of outgoing cables.
Internal wiring shall be grouped so that all outgoing wiring to each particular
remote location is terminated on adjacent terminal blocks. Interior wiring and
jumperings shall be arranged so that external connections can be made from
internal side of terminal blocks. Common connections shall be limited to two
(2) wires per terminal.
1.03.05 Wiring shall be arranged to ensure free access to all instrument or devices for
maintenance. No wire shall be routed across the face or rear of any device in
a manner, which will impede the opening of covers or obstruct access to
leads, terminals or devices
1.03.06 Wires shall be dressed and run in trays or troughs with clamp-on type covers.
Wirings may be neatly bunched in groups by non-metallic cleats or bands.
Each group shall be adequately supported along its run to prevent sagging or
strain on termination.
1.03.07 Shield wires shall be terminated on separate terminal blocks. Common

connections shall be limited to two wires per terminal. Signal circuit shields
shall be grounded at the power supply end only or as recommended by
manufacturer.
1.03.08 All low level signal cables shall be separately bundled to from control cable
and maintained at 300 mm minimum spacing from control bundles.
1.03.09 Panel internal wiring shall follow distinct color-coding to segregate different
voltage levels viz. 24V DC, 48V, 110V AC, 240V AC, 220V DC etc.
1.03.10 Thermocouple lead wires, analyzer measuring lead wires, or any other lead
wires carrying measuring signal of the order of low milli volt or micro volt shall
be electrically and physically isolated from other AC and DC wiring. Shielded
wires used in such cases for panel internal wiring shall be continuous and
ungrounded with the shield terminated individually and separately in panel
terminal block.
1.03.11 Wiring to door mounted devices shall be provided with multi-strand wires of
(49 strands minimum) adequate loop lengths of hinge-wire so that multiple
door openings will not cause fatigue failure of the conductor.
1.03.12 Internal wiring in factory pre-wired electronic systems cabinets may be

installed according to the Contractor's standard wire size, insulation, and
method of termination on internal equipment. Insulation for all wiring,
including circuit board wiring, back panel wiring, power supply wiring and
interconnecting cables between devices shall pass the vertical flame test per
IPCEAS-1981. Identification of conductors may be done by insulation color-
coding identified on drawings or by printed wiring lists.

Page 578 of 630


1.04.00 TERMINAL BLOCKS
1.04.01 All terminal blocks shall be rail mounted/ post mounted type, cage clamp type
with high quality non-flammable insulating material of melamine suitable for
working temperature of 105 Deg C. The terminal blocks in field mounted
junction boxes, instrument enclosures racks etc. shall be suitable for cage
clamp connections. The terminal blocks in Control Equipment Room
termination/ marshalling cubicles shall be suitable for post mounted cage
clamp connection at the field input end. The exact type of terminal blocks to
be provided by Bidder shall be subject to Owner.
1.04.02 All terminal blocks shall be provided complete with all required accessories
including assembly rail, locking pin and section, end brackets, small
partitions, transparent covers, support brackets, distance sleeves, warning
level, marking etc. For RTDs ring - tong type lugs shall be used at Junction
Boxes.
1.04.03 The characteristics of the terminal blocks shall be as follows.
i) High contact force, independent of conductor cross-section and large

contact surface area.
ii) Integrated self-loosening protection to avoid shifting of contact surface
that may allow contamination of connection point.
iii) Inspection and maintenance free (resistant to thermal aging and
vibration)
iv) Low and constant voltage drop
1.04.04 The insulation of the terminal blocks shall be of suitable thermoplastic

material.
1.04.05 The spacing between Terminal blocks channels in panels and cubicles shall
be adequate for routing the cable troughs and to allow adequate free
workspace for termination and removal of wires. The terminal blocks shall be
arranged with atleast 100 mm clearance between two sets of terminal blocks
and junction box walls.
1.04.06 Signals of different voltage levels shall be clearly segregated by providing

separate rows to each type of signal and by using terminal blocks of different
color for each type of signal and by providing barrier strips between them.
1.04.07 Terminal blocks shall be provided with white marking strips / self-adhesive
marker cards and where permitted by the safety codes and standards, shall
be without covers. Power terminals and high voltage (above 48 volts)
terminals shall have protection covers. All terminals shall be provided with
permanent terminal identification numbers on both sides.
1.04.08 At least 20% spare unused terminals shall be provided on each terminal block
for circuit modifications and for termination of all conductors in a multi-
conductor control cable.

Page 579 of 630


1.04.09 The bottom of the terminal block shall be at least 200 mm above the cable
gland for bottom entry type panels.
1.04.10 For extending 24 V DC supply to panels, the size of the terminals shall be
decided based on voltage drop and not based on current.
1.04.11 Other requirements of the terminal blocks are as follows:
i) The last terminal in a rail-mounted assembly shall be closed with an

end plate and end bracket.
ii) For visual and electrical separation of terminal groups, partition plates
shall be provided, which can be push fitted after forming an assembly.
iii) Design shall permit testing of incoming and outgoing signals by using
suitable test plug and socket without disconnecting the cable
connections.
iv) It shall be possible to use jumper plugs through the above test plug
socket to connect adjacent terminals. Adequate number of short circuit
jumper plugs shall be provided for the purpose.
v) Where more than one connection to a terminal block is required, two

tier terminals shall be used.
1.05.00 GROUNDING
1.05.01 Separate Protective and Electronic system ground as required shall be
provided.
1.05.02 All panels, desks, cabinets shall be provided with a continuous bare copper
ground bus (Frame ground), bolted to the panel structure at bottom on both
sides and effectively ground the entire structure. The bolts shall face inside of
panels.
1.05.03 For electronic system cabinets the electronic system ground bus (Electronic
ground) shall be similar but insulated from the cabinet and shall be separately
connected to the system ground .The same ground may be used to earth the
shield of shielded signal cables, otherwise a separate ground bus shall be
provided for connecting the signal cable shields. Cable shields shall be
grounded at the panel end only and shall never be left open .The electronic
ground between panels of a shipping section shall be firmly looped.
2.00.00 CONTROL DESKS & PANELS

2.01.00 GENERAL
2.01.01 All control desk, panels etc. shall be furnished fully wired with necessary
provision for convenience outlets, internal lighting, utility receptacles,
grounding, ventilation, space heating, anti-vibration pads, internal piping &

Page 580 of 630


accessories as required for completeness of the system.
2.01.02 The design shall conform to the EN ISO 11064 (Ergonomical design of
Control Room), Part 1, 2 and 3.
2.01.03 The exact dimensions, material, construction details, grounding, general

arrangement etc. shall be as per actual requirement and shall be finalized
during detail engineering and subjected to Owners approval.
2.01.04 Incoming power supply feeders shall be duplicated. Alarm shall be provided
for failure of a power supply feed.
2.01.05 For Control desk/ panel mounted instruments/ devices etc. which are to be
powered from UPS, all required conversion of interface equipments/
accessories to make such devices compatible with UPS supply shall be
provided. All necessary hardware like input switches/ fuse unit for each feeder
as well as switch fuse unit for each instrument/ device on the power supply
line shall be provided. From UPS redundant feeders shall be provided wih
suitably rated MCB and provision of fast auto changeover of UPS feeders.
2.01.06 Crating of the panels and desks shall be suitable for protection against shock,
vibration, inappropriate handling and inclement weather conditions during
transportation and warehousing. Mounted equipment shall have adequate
protection against damage during handling, transit and storage. Suitable
desiccant shall be used inside the packing case.
2.01.07 Nameplate
a) Nameplate shall be provided for instrument or device mounted on the
panel.
b) Nameplates for panels shall be provided both in front and rear.
2.02.00 CONTROL DESK

2.02.01 Control desk shall be free standing, floor mounting, table top type with doors
at back and shall be constructed of 3 mm thick (minimum) CRCA steel or
Aluminium extrusion. Aluminium structure shall be anodized or powder coated
paint finish. The top surface of control desk shall be 30 mm (minimum) thick
with the top 12 mm (minimum) of acrylic solid surface and the remaining 18
mm of laminated medium density fibre (MDF) board.
2.02.02 Monitors with retractable keyboard shall be provided on the desk. Desk shall
be arranged in arc-like shape without any sharp edges. Edges shall be
extruded PVC or rounded post-formed laminate.
2.02.03 Desks shall be of modular, scalable and industrially ruggedized design and
shall have connections for PA system handsets & telephone sets.
2.02.04 Desks shall have concealed cable trays for wire dressing. Both Horizontal &
Side Managers (2 separate horizontal cable routing wire baskets for power &
data cables) shall be provided.

Page 581 of 630


Each User station will be provided with 2 separate power distribution units (1
for Main line & 1 for UPS line). Each power distribution unit will have 6 points
of 5/13 Amp sockets, Mains MCB On/Off Switch & Indicator.
Adequate heat management provision for Exhaust of heat from within the
Console Desk Assembly shall be provided. There will be multiple fans
provided in the Main Control Desk. Each Fan will be of 230 VAC 250 CFM
Ball Bearing based. Ventilation louvers will be provided on both Front & Rear
Modesty with special Air Filters. Adequate space for CPU & Other
equipments placed with in the desk.
2.02.05 Design shall include Earthing bolts.
2.02.06 Back installed items shall be suitably concealed from front view.
2.02.07 All operator workstations for SG, TG, Auxiliaries & Off-site Plants shall be
mounted on this Control Desk. The cabling / wiring between OWS & CPUs,
power supply cables etc. shall be aesthetically routed and concealed from
view.
2.02.08 HARDWIRED DEVICES ON CONTROL DESK (DRAW OUT SECTION)
Release and Lamp Test push buttons shall be provided for a set of push
buttons (decided during detail engineering stage). Depending on the type of
control/ function, required number of push buttons/ indicating LEDs & their
color, push button stations shall be selected. The size of push button stations
shall be 24 x 48 mm or 25 x 50 mm and shall have service inscription details
at the front. Emergency push buttons (with cover) shall be mounted on top of
Control Desk.
2.03.00 BACK UP PANEL
2.03.01 Construction shall be from CRCA steel of thickness not less than 3mm.
2.03.02 Upright back-up panel shall be provided where hardwired devices shall be
mounted on a mosaic grid type console. The mosaic grid tiles shall be of 24
mm x 48 mm (or 25 mm x 50 mm) size, made of heat & flame retardant, self
extinguishing and non-hygroscopic material with flat matt finish without glare
and non reflecting type.
2.03.03 DDCMIS Back-up Panel (referred as Unit Control Panel-UCP) shall also
mount annunciation fascia (minimum 500 nos.) and the flame monitoring
cameras along with other hardwired devices as decided during detail
engineering stage by Owner. Color coding shall also subject to Owners
approval.
2.03.04 Colored Mimic for different Off-site plant control systems (as enumerated
elsewhere in this specification) and hardwired annunciation system shall also

Page 582 of 630


be mounted on the back up panels.
2.04.00 PANELS/CABINETS
2.04.01 All DDCMIS system modules, power supply components and other Local
Control panels (PLC/Relay based) shall be housed in cabinets as specified
below.
2.04.02 The cabinet mounted equipments shall be fully assembled, installed in

mounting racks, wired and fully tested as per specification requirements and
Owner approved drawings prior to shipment to the project site.
2.04.03 The Bidder shall ensure that the cabinets are complete & ready for installation
before dispatch from manufacturing works. The installation work at project
site for these cabinets shall only involve connections through multi-pair cables
from marshalling cabinets (wherever provided) to system cabinets and inter-
cabinet/cabinet to Control Desk/ Back up Panel.
2.04.04 All electronic cards, network components, power supply modules etc. located
shall be suitably housed in cabinets and shall be neatly arranged in sub-
racks. Network components shall be visible in door closed condition (e.g.
Glass doors etc.) as approved by Owner.
2.04.05 Bidder shall design the cabinet internal arrangement, floor cutout and cable
gland plate such that all the cables entering or leaving the cabinet can be
properly glanded in the gland plate.
2.04.06 The packaging density of panels shall be such that the temperature rise within
the panels shall never exceed 10C above ambient even under worst
operating conditions. Cooling Fans shall be provided wherever required and
this shall be of industrial grade.
2.04.07 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Material of Cold Rolled Coal Annealed (CRCA) steel

1. :
Construction sheet
2.0 mm for faces supporting

2. Thickness of Sheet : a)
instruments / terminals
: b) 1.6 mm for other sides and top
Welded throughout as per approved

3. Construction :
National Standards
Grounding of all welds to

4. Post welding operation : a)
smoothness
: b) Rounding of corners

Page 583 of 630


: c) Cleaning of weld spatters
5. Panel height : 2300 mm (approx)
6. Corners : 7 mm inner radius
Dimensional
7. : a) In height & length - 3 mm
Tolerances
In height between adjacent

b)
sections - 2 mm
c) Total for a group - 6 mm
Double, recessed, turned back edges, full

8. Doors :
height front & rear
Thickness of
i) : 2 mm
Sheet
ii) Hinges : Stainless steel
iii) Door latches : Three point type
Neoprene rubber on fixed frame to result

iv) Door gaskets :
dust proof/weatherproof enclosure
Opening of the
v) : Outward
doors
With removable wire mesh to ensure dust

vi) Louvers :
and vermin proof
Removable in sections
9. Gland plates :
4 mm thick (bottom)
10. Cable entry : Bottom
11. Hardware : a) Anti vibration pad- 15 mm
Predrilled base channel ISMC

b)
100 or equivalent for all sides
Stainless steel buff- finished 2 mm

c)
thick kick plate for all sides
Stainless steel scratch strips along

d) desk edges fixed with pan-head
recessed screws
e) Rubber strips to ensure air

Page 584 of 630


tightness between kick plate and

finished floor
f) Lifting hook / Eye bolt
g) Drawing pocket
Door switch, lamps, thermostat,

h) heaters and industrial grade
cooling fans,, illumination fixures
Both at front and back surface of the

12. Name Plate :
panel
13. Fixing of name plate : Stainless steel pan head screws
14. Name plate material : Laminated phenolic (3 layers)
15. Lettering : Black with white engraved
Vertical angle support bracket tack

Mounting of terminal
16. : welded on sheet steel plate, screwed on
blocks
internal wall of enclosure
2.05.00 FURNITURE
All the furnitures in the Central / Local control Room (s), Engineers rooms,
Instrument laboratory , SWAS Room & any other rooms with C&I equipments
located in different plant buildings under Bidders scope shall be included in
Bidders scope of supply. Bidder shall provide following industrial grade furniture
items as a minimum from reputed manufacturers/suppliers meeting International
Standards. The furniture shall be modular and latest with ease of operational
features. The furniture shall be modern, aesthetically designed, modular,
flexible, space saving and future safe.
2.05.01 WORK STATION FURNITURE
Modular work station furniture, suitable for mounting servers & historians,
programmer stations, PC based systems, printers (A4/A3 color laserjet) etc. shall
be provided.
2.05.02 PC RACK
PC Racks shall be provided to mount CPUs of workstations/PCs of OWS/LVS

etc. in control room. For each PC / workstation / monitor at least one chair shall
be included.
2.05.03 CHAIRS

Page 585 of 630


Industry standard revolving chairs with wheels and with provision for adjustment
of height (hydraulically/gas lift) shall be provided for the operators, unit-in-charge
& other personnel in control room area. These shall be designed for sitting for
long duration such that these are comfortable for the back.
2.05.04 TABLES
Industry standard computer tables shall be provided & shall be as approved by

Owner during detailed Engineering. Glass top teak wood horse shoe shaped
table with vertical file mounting arrangement (two layers to house approx. 40 Nos
of files and lockable drawers at both ends) for Engineering Room shall be
provided.
2.05.05 ALMIRAHS
Steel Almirahs shall be provided for keeping documents in the documentation

room. Glass doors for each rack shall be provided such that the documents are
visible from outside. Size of the rack shall be sufficient to easily fit technical
manuals. The exact details shall be approved by Owner during detailed
Engineering.
2.05.06 KEYPAD
One keypad per unit shall be provided for the storing of keys of relevant areas of
the unit in the control room.
2.05.07 LOCKERS
Suitable lockers shall be provided in the room adjacent to the control room for
storing of personal articles of control room personnel. Also, lockers of bigger size
shall be provided in documentation Room for storing of personal documents.
Details shall be finalized and approved by Employer during detailed engineering.
3.00.00 LVS PANEL
3.01.00 An arc shaped Large Video Screen (LVS) panel shall be supplied for mounting
large video screens in number of tiers in various Control rooms as specified
Biddr shall provide and fix ACP cladding around the LVS screen including
covering the LVS back side and LVS stand. The cladding will be from floor
finish to 600 mm above LVS screen like a self-standing partition with
necessary openings for system requirement. ACP paneling shall be with 304
grade & approx. 0.5 mm mirror finish SS strip.
3.02.00 The profile, dimensions and the general arrangement shall be finalized &
approved by Owner during detailed engineering. Recommendations, if any, for
the control room lighting in order to ensure continuous proper viewing of the
LVS screen by the operator & shift incharge (without any fatigue) shall be

Page 586 of 630


clearly brought out by the Contractor in his offer, alongwith all relevant
details/basis.
3.03.00 Any other requirement for proper LVS mounting & functioning & viewing shall
also be specifically brought out by the Contractor in his offer, along with all
relevant details.
4.00.00 LOCAL INSTRUMENT RACK (LIR) & LOCAL INSTRUMENT ENCLOSURE

(LIE)
4.01.00 GENERAL
4.01.01 Devices (Transmitters/ Switches) located in the field shall be suitably grouped
together to the extent possible and installed in the LIE (Closed Rack) and LIR
(Open Rack) in Boiler/TG Building and Off-site plant areas.
4.01.02 Racks and enclosure shall be factory prefabricated & painted and shall
complete with internal piping, tubing, manifold, isolation valves, blowdown
valves, integral junction box, illumination etc.
4.01.03 No more than six instruments shall be grouped in a single rack / enclosure.
4.01.04 Racks shall be installed above the tapping points for air, flue gas and coal air
mixture application whereas for applications such as for water and steam,
racks to be installed below the source point.
4.01.05 Attention shall be paid in the layout to avoid air traps in liquid piping and water
accumulation in air /gas piping.
4.01.06 Racks used for furnace, flue gas and air application shall be provided with
intermittent & continuous air purging
4.01.07 Welding of impulse lines shall comply with the provisions of the latest
applicable ANSI Code for Pressure Piping.
4.01.08 Earth stud shall be furnished at rack for safety grounding.
4.02.00 LOCAL INSTRUMENT ENCLOSURE (LIE)
4.02.01 Enclosure shall be free standing type. Racks shall be adequately reinforced to
ensure true surfaces and to provide support. Major load - bearing posts shall
be suitably supported by gusset plates or moment members.
4.02.02 Enclosure outer shall be constructed from at least 3 mm thick steel plate and
epoxy painted to shade gray. Base frame shall be made of ISMC 100 and
black colour finish.
4.02.03 2 NB galvanized pipes shall be laid horizontally and supported at two end
channels to mount transmitters at accessible height. Center posts or any

Page 587 of 630


member, which would reduce access, shall be avoided.
4.02.04 Double leaf interlocking front opening doors with three point locking shall be
provided and shall be arranged for maximum possible access to the interior.
Key shall be of identical for all enclosures.
4.02.05 Doors shall have concealed quick removal type pinned stainless steel hinges
and locking handles. Gaskets shall be used between all mating sections to
achieve dust and weather proof enclosure rated for IP-65 including the
internal junction box. All enclosures shall have access doors on front side.
4.02.06 Removable type bulkhead plates of thickness not less than 6 mm shall be
mounted at the racks with suitable high temperature gasket. Impulse lines
within the enclosures shall be properly clamped.
4.02.07 All internal wirings between the instruments and junction box shall run
through flexible conduits. No exposed wirings within transmitter racks both
open and closed type, is admissible.
4.02.08 Racks shall have a common blowdown drain header, which will connect
individual instrument blowdown line after suitable pressure breaking through
regulating globe type blowdown valves. Covered funnels shall be used for
saturated liquid and steam service, whereas, open funnels may be used for
cold liquid services. Header (2 NB ASTM A 106, Sch-80 Gr. C) shall be
suitably sloped and shall have one end flanged and extending beyond the
rack for connection to plant drain header..
4.02.09 Each rack shall be provided with one receptacle, light fixtures with wire guard
and one lighting switch each at instrument & Junction box compartments with
wire guard. Lighting switches may be door actuated & mounted inside the
panel. Outlet box, switch box and device covers shall be of galvanized
stamped steel. Light switches and receptacles shall be installed inside the
enclosure on the wall near the latch side of the enclosure door. Light fixtures
shall be installed on the ceilings of the enclosures.
4.02.10 Power supplies for miscellaneous devices shall be provided with MCB located
within the enclosures. MCB shall be mounted in fuse blocks. Nameplates
shall be furnished above the MCB blocks, identifying the devices being
served.
4.02.11 Vibration dampeners shall be installed for supporting each enclosure. The
loading at each corner of the enclosure shall be determined by actual test
weighting when construction is complete to determine the correct length of
each dampener for proper loading of the dampener in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations
4.03.00 LOCAL INSTRUMENT RACK (LIR)
4.03.01 Rack shall be free standing type constructed from 6 mm thick steel channel
frame provided with a canopy to protect the instrument from dripping water or

Page 588 of 630


falling objects and shall be epoxy painted. Canopy shall be of CRCA steel
sheet of at least 3 mm thickness.
4.03.02 Rack Major load-bearing posts shall be suitably supported by gusset plates or
moment members. Suitable fenders grill shall be welded to the end-posts of
the rack to outline a boundary beyond which no mounted equipment shall
project to protect instrument from accidental contact during personnel
movement. Center posts or any member, which would reduce access, shall
be avoided.
4.03.03 2 NB galvanized pipes laid horizontally and supported at two end channels
shall be employed at working accessible height for mounting of instruments.
4.03.04 All internal wirings between the instruments and junction box shall run
through flexible conduits. No exposed wirings are admissible.
4.03.05 Racks shall have a common blowdown drain header, which will connect
individual instrument blowdown line after suitable pressure breaking through
regulating globe type blowdown valves. Covered funnels shall be used for
saturated liquid and steam service, whereas, open funnels may be used for
cold liquid services. Header (2 NB ASTM A 106, Sch-80 Gr. C) shall be
suitably sloped and shall have one end flanged and extending beyond the
rack for connection to plant drain header..
Each rack shall be provided with one receptacle, one light fixture with wire
guard and one lighting switch. Outlet box, switch box and device covers shall
be galvanized stamped steel. Light fixtures shall be installed on the canopy
of the rack
4.03.06 Power supplies for miscellaneous devices shall be provided with MCB located
within the enclosures. MCB shall be mounted in fuse blocks. Nameplates
shall be furnished above the MCB blocks, identifying the devices being
served.
4.04.00 JUNCTION BOX
Dust tight & weatherproof conforming to

1. Type of Enclosure :
IP 65
3 mm sheet steel / fiberglass reinforced

2. Material :
polyester(UV stabilized)
Solid unhinged with retention chain /

3. Type of Cover :
Screwed at all four corners
i) Exterior : Opaline green shade 275 of

4. Paint : IS: 5
ii) Interior - Brilliant Glossy White.

Page 589 of 630


Surface / Two (2) inch Pipe stanchion
5. Mounting : (At a dry compartment at one side of the

enclosure / rack with front opening type
door)
6. Cable Entry : 3 mm (min) Bottom / side Gland plate
7. Gasket : Neoprene
Brass earth lug with green screw head

8. Grounding :
External-2 nos , Internal-1no. (M6)
Number of Drain
9. : Two at bottom capped
Holes
10. Identification : Label for JB and Tags for cable
Rail mounted cage clamp type

screwless terminals (suitable for
11. Accessories : a) conductor size up to 2.5sq.mm of
suitable voltage grade) with
markers and 20% spare terminals
b) Cable gland (Brass) & raceways
c) Ferrules & lugs (Brass)
d) Aluminum back panel
e) Canopy at top
f) Mounting brackets
g) bolts and nuts made of brass etc.

Page 590 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
SPECIFICATION NO.: PE-SS-999-145-054A
VOLUME
DATA SHEET FOR LOCAL PANELS SECTION
REV. NO. 02 DATE: 16.09.2013
SHEET 1 OF 3
TAG No. . Qty................. Data Sheet No.: PES-145A-DS1-0
Data Sheet A & B
DATA SHEET-A FOR LOCAL PANEL DATA SHEET-B
(TO BE FILLED BY PURCHASER) (TO BE FILLED-UP BY
BIDDER)
GENERAL MANUFACTURER
CONSTRUCTION FOLDED WELDED
FRONT 2.0 mm
ENCLOSURE SHEET THICKNESS OTHER 2.0 mm
(As per Section 8.13,Volume V of DOOR 1.6 mm

contract specification) HEIGHT 2365 mm for stand alone panels. Other
OTHER Load bearing sheet front shall have 3mm thickness
INPUT POWER SUPPLY * 240V 50 Hz AC 220V DC
TECHNICAL
(As per Electrical specification) 415V 3 PHASE 3W 400V 3 PHASE 4W
(ANY OTHER POWER REQUIREMENT
TO BE DERIVED FROM THIS SUPPLY ONLY)
NO. OF FEEDERS
ONE TWO
(As per Electrical specification)
STARTER WITH MCC REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
MCC RELAY PANEL

IPR POSITION
5 Amp, 230 V AC 0.25 Amp, 220V DC

CONTACT RATING OF RELAY
110V AC 220V AC
CONTROL SUPPLY 220V DC Other.
(As per requirement)
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR WINDOW

______NOS. (AS REQUIRED)
(EXCLUDING SPARES)
TEMP SCANNER
(IF REQUIRED NO. OF CHANNELS TO BE
REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
SPECIFIED UNDER SEC-C )
PAINT TYPE EPOXY ENAMEL
(As per Annex-1,Section 7.6,Voulme IV of EPOXY POWDER COATED

contract specification)
MIMIC (TYPE OF MIMIC- MATERAIL, THICKNESS REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED
TO BE SPECIFIED DURING DETAILED ENGG.)
PANEL COLOUR (EXTERNAL) LIGHT GREY

(As per Annex-1,Section 7.6,Voulme IV of
OPALINE GREEN
FINISH (EXTERNAL) MATT
(As per Annex-1, Section 7.6,Voulme IV of
contract specification) GLOSSY SEMI GLOSSY
PANEL COLOUR (INTERNAL) WHITE CREAM

(As per Annex-1,Section 7.6,Voulme IV of OFF WHITE
FINISH (INTERNAL) MATT
(As per Annex-1,Section 7.6,Voulme IV of
contract specification) GLOSSY SEMI GLOSSY
IP-55 (FOR INDOOR SERVICE)

CLASS OF PROTECTION IP-67 (FOR OUTDOOR SERVICE) ANY
OTHER
CONTROL HARDWARE RELAY BASED
FOUNDATION ARRANGEMENT FOUNDATION BOLTS ANCHOR

FASTENERS
WEIGHT OF PANEL (Kg.) ..(Vendor to specify )
Page 591 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0
VOLUME
REV. NO. 02 DATE: 16.09.2013
SHEET 2 OF 3
Data Sheet A & B
DATA SHEET-A FOR LOCAL PANEL DATA SHEET-B
(TO BE FILLED BY PURCHASER) (TO BE FILLED-UP BY
BIDDER)
PRESSURISED UNPRESSURISED
PANEL TYPE
As per Requirement
CABLE GLAND DOUBLE COMPRESSION
AMMETER (TYPE OF INPUT) * 1 Amp CT 4-20 mA
SCOPE OF SUPERVISION FOR

APPLICABLE NA
ERECTION & COMMISSIONING
* TO BE CO-ORDINATED WITH PEM ELECTRICAL
PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY COMPANY SEAL

NAME AANCHAL CHOUDHARY SACHIN SRIVASTAVA MA MANSOORI NAME:
DESIGNATION SR.ENGR DY.MNGR D. GM
SIGNATURE SIGNATURE:
DATE 16.09.2013 16.09.2013 16.09.2013 DATE:
Page 592 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0

VOLUME

REV. NO. 02 DATE: 16.09.2013
SHEET 3 OF 3
Data Sheet C
DATA SHEET-C FOR LOCAL PANEL
(TO BE FILLED BY CONTRACTOR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT)
GENERAL MANUFACTURER
FOLDED WELDED
CONSTRUCTION
(As per requirement EDN)
FRONT
OTHER
ENCLOSURE SHEET THICKNESS DOOR
HEIGHT
OTHER
TECHNICAL INPUT POWER SUPPLY
NO. OF FEEDERS
CONTACT RATING OF RELAY
TEMP SCANNER
CONTROL SUPPLY
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR WINDOW

(EXCLUDING SPARES)
PAINT TYPE
PANEL COLOUR (EXTERNAL)
FINISH (EXTERNAL)
TYPE OF MIMIC
MATERIAL OF MIMC
THICKNESS OF MIMIC
PANEL COLOUR (INTERNAL)
FINISH (INTERNAL)
CLASS OF PROTECTION
CONTROL HARDWARE
FOUNDATION ARRANGEMENT
WEIGHT OF PANEL (Kg.)
Page 593 of 630

FORM NO. PEM-6666-0

VOLUME

REV. NO. 02 DATE: 16.09.2013
SHEET 3 OF 3
Data Sheet C
DATA SHEET-C FOR LOCAL PANEL
(TO BE FILLED BY CONTRACTOR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT)
PANEL TYPE
CABLE GLAND
AMMETER (TYPE OF INPUT)
SCOPE OF SUPERVISION
PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY COMPANY SEAL

NAME AANCHAL CHOUDHARY SACHIN SRIVASTYAVA MA MANSOORI NAME:
SIGNATURE SIGNATURE:
DATE 16.09.2013 16.09.2013 16.09.2013 DATE:
Page 594 of 630

()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

/&34XDOLW\3ODQ

Page 595 of 630

STD QUALITY PLAN NO.: PE-QP-999-145-I056
STANDARD QUALITY PLAN VOLUME IIB
FOR SECTION D
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL REV. NO. 01 DATE: 22-02-2008
PEM :: C&I SHEET 1 OF 7
INCOMING
1.0 Sheet Steel (CRCA & 1. Chemical Composition MA Chemical Sample Relevant
IS:1079 Relevant
IS:1079 Test 3 --- 2
HR) analysis IS:513
standard standard
IS:513 Certificate
2. Bend Test CR Mech. test Sample IS:1079
Relevant IS:1079
Relevant Log Book 2 --- ---
IS:513
standard IS:513
standard
3. Surface finish MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- ---
Standard / Standard /
Sample Sample
4. Waviness MA Visual 100% Factory No Waviness Log Book 2 --- ---
Standard
5. Thickness MA Measurement 100% BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec. Log Book 2 --- ---
6. Mill marking MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1

Standard Standard
2.0 Flats / Angles / 1. Dimensions MA Measurement Sample Relevant
IS:2062 Relevant
IS:2062 Log Book 2 --- ---
Channels standard standard
2. Surface Defects MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- ---
Standard / Standard /
Sample Sample
3. Straightness MA Measurement 100% Factory Std. Factory Std. Log Book 2 --- ---
Relevant Relevant
4. Mill marking MA Visual 100% IS:2062 IS:2062 Log Book 2 --- 1
standard standard
3.0 Cables / Wires 1. Visual / Surface defects MA Visual 100% BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec. Log Book 2 --- ---
and
andIS:1554 or
Relevant and
and IS:1554 or
Relevant
IS:694 IS:694
standard standard
2. IR and HV MA Electrical 100% BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec. Log Book 2 --- ---
and IS:1554
Relevantor and
and IS:1554 or
Relevant
IS:694
standard IS:694
standard
$
LEGEND: * CR - Critical characteristics P - Agency Performing the Test. 1 - BHEL
MA - Major characteristics W - Agency Witnessing the Test. 2 - Vendor
Page 596 of 630

MI - Minor characteristics V - Agency Verifying the Test. 3 - Sub-vendor
FOR SECTION D
3. Conductor
a) Resistance MA Electrical 100% BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec.
b) Size MA Measurement 100% and IS:1554
Relevantor and IS:1554
and Relevantor Log Book 2 --- ---
c) Sheet colour MA Visual 100% IS:694
standard IS:694
standard
4. Type / Routine Test MA Verification 100% BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec. Log Book 3 --- 2
Certificates and
and IS:1554 or
Relevant and IS:1554
and or
Relevant
IS:694
standard IS:694
standard
4.0 Electrical 1. Verification at make and CR Visual Sample BHEL Spec. BHEL Spec. Log Book 2 --- ---
Components like Type and BOM and BOM
Annunciator
Transformers 2. Verification of Test CR Scrutiny of 100% Relevant
RelevantIS Relevant
Relevant IS Log Book 2 --- ---
Lamps Certificates Type / Routine standard standard
T.Cs.
Switches
PBs 3. Operation / Functional CR Electrical Sample+ Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Log Book 2 --- --- + for relay &
check 100%@ & Catalogue
Std & Catalogue &Std & Catalogue
Catalogue contactors
Contactors
only
Relays
4. I.R. MA Electrical 100% Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Log Book 2 --- --- @ for all
Timers
Catalogue
&Std & Catalogue &Std & Catalogue
Catalogue components
Space Heaters
except relays
Thermostat & contactors.
Indicating meters etc. 5. H.V. MA Electrical 100% Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Log Book 2 --- ---
Catalogue
&Std Std
& Catalogue & & Catalogue
Catalogue
6. Calibration MA Electrical 100% Relevant

Relevantstandard
Indian Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Log Book 2 --- 1
Catalogue
&Std Std
Catalogue
7. Pick up / Drop off Voltage MA Electrical 100% Relevant

Relevantstandard
Indian Relevant
Relevantstandard
Indian Log Book 2 --- ---
&Std
Catalogue Std
Catalogue
$
Page 597 of 630

FOR SECTION D
5.0 Misc. Components 1. Verification of Type / Make MA Visual Sample BHEL Spec. & BHEL Spec. & Log Book 2 --- ---
like Gaskets, Mfrs. Catalogue Mfrs. Catalogue
Terminal Blocks etc.
2. Surface defects MA Visual Sample BHEL Spec. & BHEL Spec. & Log Book 2 --- ---
Mfrs. Catalogue Mfrs. Catalogue
3. IR / HV on Terminal Blocks MA Electrical Sample BHEL Spec. & BHEL Spec. & Log Book 2 --- ---
Mfrs. Catalogue Mfrs. Catalogue
IN PROCESS
6.0 Blanking / Bending / 1. Dimensions MI Measurement 100% Approved Mfr. Approved Mfr. Log Book 2 --- ---
Forming drgs. drgs.
2. Surface defects after MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- ---
bending Standard Standard
7.0 Nibbling / Punching 1. Cutout Sizes MI Measurement 100% Approved Mfr. Approved Mfr. Log Book 2 --- ---
drgs. drgs.
2. Deburring MA Visual 100% Approved Mfr. Approved Mfr. Log Book 2 --- ---
drgs. drgs.
ASSEMBLY
8.0 Frame Assembly & 1. Dimensions MA Measurement 100% Approved drg. / Approved drg. / Log Book 2 --- 2
Sheet fixing Mfr. Standards Mfr. Standards
2. Alignment MA Measurement 100% Approved drg. / Approved drg. / Log Book 2 --- 2
Mfr. Standards Mfr. Standards
3. Welding Quality MA Visual 100% Approved drg. / Approved drg. / Log Book 2 --- 2
4. Surface defects MA Visual 100% Approved drg. / Approved drg. / Log Book 2 --- 2
$
Page 598 of 630

FOR SECTION D
9.0 Pre-treatment and 1. Pretreatment Process MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Painting Standard & Standard &
Relevant
IS: 6005 standard Relevant
IS: 6005 standard
2. Process parameters like MA Measurement Periodic Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
bath temp. concentration Standard & Standard &
etc. Relevant IS: 6005 standard
IS: 6005standard Relevant
3. Dipping / Removal Time MA Measurement 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Standard & Standard &
Relevant IS: 6005standard
4. Surface quality after every MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
dip Standard & Standard &
Relevant IS: 6005 standard
5. Primer after phosphating MA Visual, 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Thickness Standard & Standard &
Relevant
IS: 6005 standard
6. Putty Application & MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Rubbing after primer Standard & Standard &
Relevant
IS: 6005 standard
7. Paint first coat MA Visual, 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Thickness Standard & Standard &
Relevant
IS: 6005 standard
8. Putty Application and MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Rubbing after first coat of Standard & Standard &
paint Relevant
IS: 6005 standard
9. Paint second coat MA Visual, 100% Factory Factory Log Book 2 --- 1
Thickness, Standard & Standard &
Scratch test Relevant IS: 6005 standard
Colour
adhesion
$
Page 599 of 630

FOR SECTION D
10. Panel Wiring 1. Wiring Layout MA Visual 100% Approved drgs. Approved drgs. Log Book 2 --- ---
& Specs. & Specs.
2. Wiring Termination MA Visual 100% Approved drgs. Approved drgs. Log Book 2 --- ---
(Crimped Lugs) & Specs. & Specs.
3. Ferrule numbers MA Visual 100% Approved drgs. Approved drgs. Log Book 2 --- ---
& Specs. & Specs.
4. Colour of wiring MA Visual 100% Approved drgs. Approved drgs. Log Book 2 --- 1
& Specs. & Specs.
5. Size of Conductor MA Measurement 100% Approved drgs. Approved drgs. Log Book 2 --- 1
& Specs. & Specs.
11. Component Mounting 1. Correct components MA Visual 100% Approved drgs., Approved drgs., Log Book 2 --- ---
Specs. & BOM Specs. & BOM
2. Fixing MA Visual 100% Approved drgs., Approved drgs., Log Book 2 --- ---
Specs. & BOM Specs. & BOM
FINAL
12. Final Inspection 1. Workmanship MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Inspection 2 1 1
Standard Standard Report
2. Component layout MA Visual 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1 At Random
(neatness, accessibility & drg. / Spec. drg. / Spec. Report by BHEL,
safety) Mounting / Proper based on
fixing of all components 100 %
internal test
reports by
Mfr.
3. Components identification MA Visual 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1
Marking / Name plates drg. / Spec. drg. / Spec. Report
$
Page 600 of 630

FOR SECTION D
5. Dimensions MA Measurement 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1
drg. / Spec., drg. / Spec., Report
BOM BOM
6. Door functioning MA Functional 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1

drg. / Spec. drg. / Spec. Report
7. Paint Shade CR Visual 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1

8. Paint Thickness CR Measurement 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1

9. Workmanship of Gaskets MA Visual 100% Factory Factory Inspection 2 1 1

Standard Standard Report At Random
by BHEL,
based on
10. Wiring Layout MA Visual 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1 100 %
drg. drg. Report
internal test
reports by
11. Wire Termination MA Pulling Sample ----- Firm termination Inspection 2 1 1 Mfr.
manually Report
12. Continuity MA Electrical 100% ----- Continuity OK Inspection 2 1 1

Report
$
Page 601 of 630

FOR SECTION D
13. TYPE TEST Degree of Protection CR Mech. Sample BHEL approved BHEL approved Type Test 3 --- 1
Protection spec., drg spec., drg Certificate
relevant
relevant IS- relevant
relevantIS-
13947 Part-1,
IEC-60947, 13947 Part-1,
IEC-60947,
IS-2148.
IEC-60079 IS-2148.
IEC-60079
14 ROUTINE TEST IR before & after HV Test CR Electrical 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Test Report 2 1 1
spec., drg., BOM spec., drg., BOM
& relevant IS. & relevant IS.
standard standard
15 FUCTIONAL TEST 1. Control Logic Operation CR Electrical 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1
spec. / drg. spec. / drg. Report
2. Instrument Calibratio CR Electrical 10% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1

spec. / drg. spec. / drg. Report
3. Temperature rise CR Electrical 100% BHEL approved BHEL approved Inspection 2 1 1

spec/drg. & spec/drg & Report
relevant
relevant standard
IS. relevant
relevantstandard
IS.
$
Page 602 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

3&63(&,),&$7,21

Page 603 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I

=:
(

#p^Yq B:/=

!"\$%#&

'

(
SPECIFICATION FOR PC
a. CPU
#
&>J$%>
% " VZ,= /; / >

#*Z,
$ ' /!+ &Z,=
V =+ >

>:
@ B !!MDYQ
& Z

^,M==Q
* Z =< // /#Z,>
\ B<= Y/?\>
^ ":/
#*>
_ ==: %

J

J^,J!:
#>
#;
$
## &#%q,+

%
#%/ /
b. MONITOR
# < !
% ! B

%VyM ;Q

$ !
< pZ">
V
: #%V><\*^>
& !B )$
* ;

,BJ J'W
D
J =
U
\ :/:

Page 604 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I

=:
(

#p^Yq B:/=

!"\$%#&

'

(
c. KEY BOARD & MOUSE
# < (

==> +/<"
% ; < &=
<
@<
$ :/:

V :

=:
d. SOFTWARE
! B ? J":J J"> "/> ? /

?

Page 605 of 630

()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

)851,785(63(&,),&$7,21

Page 606 of 630


()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I

(
(

#p^Yq B:/=

!"\$%#&

'

(
SPECIFICATION FOR FURNITURE
a) 4 Nos. cushioned revolving, independently adjustable seat and back chairs.
b) Glass top Teak wood / MDF table for mounting Operator Station monitors.
c) Printer tables.
d) Glass top Teak wood / MDT table for System Engineering Room /
Engineering stations with drawer at end.
e) Glass top teak wood / MDF table with vertical file mounting arrangement
(two layer to house approx. 40 Nos of files and lockable drawers at both end)
for System Engineering Room / Engineers.

Page 607 of 630

()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

&$%/(%24

Page 608 of 630

CABLESIZESFOR1X800MWKOTHAGUDEMTPS
SIno. CableType

GTYPE
1 2PX0.5sqmm
2 4PX0.5sqmm
3 8PX0.5sqmm
4 12PX0.5sqmm
5 2PX1.5sqmm

FTYPE
1 4PX0.5sqmm
2 8PX0.5sqmm
3 12PX0.5sqmm
4 20PX0.5sqmm

CONTROLCABLE
1 3CX2.5sqmm
2 5Cx2.5sqmm
3 12Cx2.5sqmm
Page 609 of 630

()****)

PE-TS-410-145-I


1X800 MW KOTHAGUDEM
!"#$%#&

'

(

..63+,/2623+<

Page 610 of 630

!
( ) *# )
KKS NUMBERING PHILOSOPHY

1X800MW KOTHAGUDEM


(/ <BM BBBQ :=DK:=?
qq:=>B=:/
: B :K::=>+<K:=?
(UK:=
:K::=> >+//:B

+
:K::=>:D::;
! + #/B
):=/ /<
<

?B

p p p ""h h,,,

(/B/ :>)<=/ = <= B+
Annexure-#

(: /( /B Numerical Keys at System Code Level /:/ /B:
>?= <= +B ="
/

; /+/B Equipment / Apparatus / Measuring Circuit Code/
+ :K:=D" :D :B:?Annexure-2

BJ //B Numerical Keys at Equipment / Apparatus / Measuring Circuit
Code /:/ /B:>?+ ::= =:>)B::=
@<
<=DK:=D" :D :B:?Annexure-3

Page 611 of 630
!
( ) *# )

#p^Yq'"Z!

ANNEXURE-1
List of System / Sub-System Codes used in Power Plant:
1) Compressed air system : QEA, QEC
2) Ventilation System : SAA TO SAZ
3) Fire Detection & Protection System + Fire Water pumps : SGM, SGN, SGO, SGP
4) Sewage Treatment : SJA TO SJZ
5) Pre-treatment Plant : GBI, GBM, GBV
6) RO DM Plant : GCI, GCM, GBV
ANNEXURE-2
Standard Equipment Codes:
AA Valves including drives, also hand operated

AB Seclusions, Lock, Gates, Doors
AC Heat Exchanger
AE Turning, Driving, Lifting equipment
AF Continuous conveyors, Feeders
AG Generator Units
AH Heating and Cooling Units
AK Pressing and Packaging equipment
AM Mixer, Stirrer
AN Blower, Air Pumps / Fans, Compressor Units
AP Pump Units
AT Purification, Drying, Filter
AV Combustion Equipment e.g. grates
Standard Apparatus Codes:
BB Vessels and Tank

BF Foundation
BG Boiler Heating Surfaces
BN Injector, Ejector
BP Flow and throughput limitation equipment (Orifice)
BQ Holders, Carrying Equipment, Support
BR Piping, Ducts, Chutes, Compensator
BS Sound Absorber
BU Insulations, Sheatings

Page 612 of 630
!
( ) *# )

#p^Yq'"Z!

Standard Measuring Circuits Codes:
CD Density
CE Electrical Quantities
CF Flow, throughput
CG Distance, Length, Position
CK Time
CL Level
CM Humidity
CQ Analysis (SWAS)
CS Speed, Velocity, Frequency
CT Temperature
CY Vibration, Expansion
ANNEXURE-3
Numerical Keys
A) Numerical Keys at System Code Level
i) Use 10, 20, 30, . To distinguish between main systems having same
Alpha Codes. Examples:
a) Main Steam (Left) and Main Steam (Right)
b)BFP A/B/C
c) ID Fan A/B, FD Fan A/B, AH A/B
ii) For branch off from main system path having code say 10, keep the same
alpha code and use 11, 12, 13 etc. Similarly for other branch off from main
system path having code say 20, keep the same alpha code and use 21, 22, 23
etc and shall carry on further in the same way.
iii) If the branch off from main system / sub system path is used for some other
system, where different alpha codes can be applied, then in that case the said
branch line will be designated by the alpha codes of the system to which it is
providing the input.
B) Numerical keys at Equipment Code level:
There are three numerical keys available for each type of equipment code.
Following has been agreed upon considering present practice, better flexibility and
ease in sorting.
i) Valves and Dampers --- Equipment Code AA
N1 N2 N3

Page 613 of 630
!
( ) *# )

#p^Yq'"Z!

Motorised (on/off duty) - 0 01 to 50

Motorised (inching duty) - 0 51 to 99
Pneumatic (Control) - 1 01 to 50
Motorised (thyrestor Control) - 1 51 to 99
Sol. Operated - 2 01 to 99
(Open / Close duty (Valves, NRVs, Gate)
Hydraulic - 3 01 to 99
NRV (Without actuation) - 4 01 to 99
Manual - 5 01 to 99
Manual - 6 01 to 99
Relief & Safety Valves - 7 01 to 99
Reserve - 8 01 to 99
Reserve - 9 01 to 99
ii) Field Instruments
Field Transmitters & Analog Signals - 0 01 to 99

Field Switches & Binary Signals - 1 00 to 99
PG Test Point - 4 00 to 99
Gauges - 5 00 to 99
Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT)-HWR - 2 00 to 99
(Reserved for protection Signals used by Hardwar)
Example of Numerical Key Usage:
In line with the philosophy adopted for Valves / Dampers /instruments etc.
pumps and fans in the main systems (having different system code) can be
numbered as AP/N100 and as AP/N101, 102, . Where system code is
same.

Page 614 of 630
REV NO: 00 DATE:
STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SECTION D4
DRAWINGS

Page 616 of 630
Page 617 of 630
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR VOLUME III
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
VOLUME-III
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
SCHEDULE OF PRE-BID CLARIFICATION

All clarification from the Technical Specification shall be filled in by the BIDDER clause by clause in this format
only.
VOLUME SECTION CLAUSE PAGE SPECIFICATION CLARIFICATION REASONS FOR

NO. NO. REQUIREMENT CLARIFICATION
Note: Bidder to furnish all the pre bid in the above indicated pre bid clarification format only. General pre bid
clarification will not be considered.
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS WITH COST OF WITHDRAWAL

PROJECT:- 1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM TPS STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PACKAGE:-DM PLANT
TENDER ENQUIRY REFERENCE:-
NAME OF VENDOR:-
SL VOLUME/ PAGE CLAUSE TECHNICAL COMPLETE COST OF REFERENCE OF NATURE OF COST REASON
NO SECTION NO. NO. SPECIFICATION/ DESCRIPTION WITHDRAWAL PRICE SCHEDULE ON OF WITHDRAWAL FOR
TENDER OF DEVIATION OF DEVIATION WHICH COST OF OF DEVIATION QUOTING
DOCUMENT WITHDRAWAL OF (POSITIVE/ DEVIATION
DEVIATION IS NEGATIVE)
APPLICABLE
TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS
COMMERCIAL DEVIATIONS
PARTICULARS OF BIDDERS/ AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE
NAME DESIGNATIONS SIGN & DATE
NOTES:
1. For self manufactured items of bidder, cost of withdrawal of deviation will be applicable on the basic price (i.e. excluding taxes, duties & freight) only.
2. For directly dispatch able items, cost of withdrawal of deviation will be applicable on the basic price including taxes, duties & freight.
3. All the bidders have to list out all their Technical & Commercial Deviations (if any) in detail in the above format.
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
4. Any deviation not mentioned above and shown separately or found hidden in offer, will not be taken cognizance of.
5. Bidder shall submit duly filled unpriced copy of above format indicating "quoted" in "cost of withdrawal of deviation" column of the schedule above along
with their Techno-commercial offer, wherever applicable.
6. Bidder shall furnish price copy of above format along with price bid.
7. The final decision of acceptance/ rejection of the deviations quoted by the bidder shall be at discretion of the Purchaser.
8. Bidders to note that any deviation (technical/commercial) not listed in above and asked after Part-I opening shall not be considered.
9. For deviations w.r.t. Payment terms, Liquidated damages, Firm prices and submission of E1/ E2 forms before claiming 10% payment, if a bidder chooses
not to give any cost of withdrawal of deviation loading as per Annexure-VIII of GCC, Rev-06 will apply. For any other deviation mentioned in un-priced copy of
this format submitted with Part-I bid but not mentioned in priced copy of this format submitted with Priced bid, the cost of withdrawal of deviation shall be taken
as NIL.
10. Any deviation mentioned in priced copy of this format, but not mentioned in the un-priced copy, shall not be accepted.
11. All techno-commercial terms and conditions of NIT shall be deemed to have been accepted by the bidder, other than those listed in unpriced copy of this
format.
12. Cost of withdrawal is to be given separately for each deviation. In no event bidder should club cost of withdrawal of more than one deviation else cost of
withdrawal of such deviations which have been clubbed together shall be considered as NIL.
13. In case nature of cost of withdrawal (positive/negative) is not specified it shall be assumed as positive.
14. In case of discrepancy in the nature of impact (positive/ negative), positive will be considered for evaluation and negative for ordering.
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
DRAWING/DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION SCHEDULE
After award of LOI/LOA, following minimum drawing/documents shall be submitted by the bidder for BHEL/Customer
approval. However any additional drawing/document if found necessary for completion of the engineering, the same
shall be submitted by bidder without any commercial & delivery implication to BHEL.
For the Drawings/Documents Submission Procedure, please refer following Annexure-A. Bidder has to submit the
revised drawing/document along with the compliance sheet indicating enumerate reply to all BHEL and customer
comments or observations. Without compliance sheet the submission of the drawings/documents will not be
considered and the delay on this account will be solely on bidders side only. The number of drawing/documents to
be submitted by the bidder shall be as per Annexure-IV in Section C1 Volume IIB.
Every revised submission incorporating comments shall be resubmitted within 7 days.

BHEL shall provide observation / approval within 15 days from the date of document submission by bidder.
Bidder to note that drawings submitted shall be complete in all respects with revised drawing submitted incorporating
all comments. Any incomplete drawing submitted shall be treated as non-submission with delays attributable to
bidders account. Engineering meeting shall be held fort nightly, for which the bidder shall depute his concerned
engineers along with project manager to PEM office or at customer office without fail.
ANNEXURE A
NO. OF WEEKS APPR

OVAL SIZE OF
BHEL FOR DRAWING/
CATE DRAWIN
SL. DRAWING/ DOCUMENT
DRAWING/ DOCUMENT TITLE GORY G/
NO. DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
DOCUME
NUMBER AFTER PLACING
NT
LOI/LOA
PE-V0-410-163- P&I DIAGRAM FOR DM PLANT A
A001
1 4 A1
PE-V0-410-163- EQUIPMENT LAYOUT OF DM PLANT A

A002 ALONG WITH MECHANICAL GA OF DM
2 PLANT BUILDING 4 A1
PE-V0-410-163- PROCESS DESIGN AND SIZING A

A003 CALCULATIONS , RESIN DATA SHEET,
3 VESSEL THICKNESS AND PRESSURE 4 A4
DROP CALCULATIONS FOR DM PLANT
PE-V0-410-163- SUB-VENDOR LIST FOR DM PLANT A
A004
4 4 A4
PE-V0-410-163- OPERATION & CONTROL A

A005 PHILOSOPHY OF DM PLANT ALONG
5 WITH CONTROL SYSTEM PLC 4 A4
CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
PE-V0-410-163- GA DRAWING OF ATMOSPHERIC A
A006 TANKS OF DM PLANT
6 6 A2
PE-V0-410-163- GA DRAWING OF PRESSURE A

A007 VESSELS OF DM PLANT
7 6 A2
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PE-V0-410-163- TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR A

A008 VALVES OF DM PLANT
8 8 A4
PE-V0-410-163- TECHNICAL DATA SHEET OF A

A009 HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL
9 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OF DM PLANT 8 A4

A010 METERING PUMPS/EJECTORS OF DM
10 PLANT (AS APPLICABLE) 8 A4

A011 BLOWERS OF DM PLANT
11 8 A4
PE-V0-410-163- TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR MOTOR A

A012 OF DM PLANT
12 8 A4

A013 INSTRUMENTS OF DM PLANT
13 8 A4

A014 ANALYZER OF DM PLANT
14 8 A4
PE-V0-410-163- TECHNICAL DATASHEET OF RESIN A

A015 TRAP, CARBON TRAP, MEDIA TRAP,
15 ACTIVATED CARBON OF DM PLANT 8 A4

A016 HEATER & RESIN OF DM PLANT
16 8 A4
PE-V0-410-163- PIPING LAYOUT OF DM PLANT A

A017
17 10 A1
PE-V0-410-163- YARD PIPING LAYOUT OF DM PLANT I

A018
18 12 A1
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR VALVES OF DM PLANT A

A019
19 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL A

A020 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS WITH MOTOR
20 OF DM PLANT 6 A4
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR METERING PUMPS WITH A

A021 MOTOR/EJECTOR OF DM PLANT
21 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR BLOWERS WITH MOTOR OF A

A022 DM PLANT
22 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR ATMOSPHERIC TANKS OF A

A023 DM PLANT
23 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- QAP FOR PRESSURE VESSELS OF DM A

A024 PLANT
24 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- QAP / ICL OF DM PLANT (FOR A

A025 BALANCE OF ITEMS)
25 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- CIVIL ASSIGNMENT DRAWING FOR DM A

A026 PLANT
26 10 A1
PE-V0-410-163- ELECTRICAL LOAD DATA FOR DM A

A027 PLANT
27 12 A4
PE-V0-410-163- INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE OF DM I

A028 PLANT
28 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- VALVE SCHEDULE OF DM PLANT I

A029
29 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION/ HOOK A

A030 UP DIAGRAMS
30 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- FIELD JB TERMINATIONS /GROUPING A

A031 DOCUMENT
31 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- PLC PANEL GA (INTERNAL & A

A032 EXTERNAL) DRAWING
32 10 A1
PE-V0-410-163- CONTROL SCHEMES (BLOCK LOGIC) A

A033
33 12 A3
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PE-V0-410-163- PLC INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNAL LIST A

A034
34 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- UPS BATTERY CHARGER/ BATTERY A

A035 DATASHEET & SLD
35 10 A4
PE-V0-410-163- UPS SIZING CALCULATIONS A

A036
36 10 A4
PE-V0-410-163- BATTERY SIZING CALCULATIONS A

A037
37 10 A4
PE-V0-410-163- CONTROL DESK LAYOUT / GA A

A038 DRAWING
38 10 A1
PE-V0-410-163- PLC -OWS/PRINTER FURNITURE BOM A

A039
39 10 A4
PE-V0-410-163- PLC CATALOGUE A

A040
40 10 A4
PE-V0-410-163- PLC QUALITY PLAN & FAT A

A041 PROCEDURE
41 6 A4
PE-V0-410-163- LIST OF SIGNAL EXCHANGE WITH A

A042 DDCMIS (BOTH HARDWIRED & SERIAL
42 INTERFACE IN BHEL FORMAT) 12 A4
PE-V0-410-163- PROCESS GRAPHIC MANUSCRIPTS A

A043 PLC
43 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- PROCESS GRAPHIC MANUSCRIPTS A

A044 FOR DDCMIS
44 12 A1
PE-V0-410-163- CABLE SCHEDULE (IN BHEL EXCEL A

A045 FORMAT) & CABLE
45 INTERCONNECTION DETAILS 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- PANEL & ELECTRONIC EARTHING A

A046 REQUIREMENT
46 12 A1
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PE-V0-410-163- PANEL HEAT DISSIPATION DATA A

A047
47 12 A4
PE-V0-410-163- PLC EARTHING SCHEME A

A048
48 12 A1
PE-V0-410-163- CABLE TRAY/TRENCH & CONDUIT A

A049 ROUTING DIAGRAM AND EARTHING
49 LAYOUT OF DM PLANT 12 A1
PE-V0-410-163- CABLE INTERCONNECTION DRAWING A

A050 FOR DM PLANT
50 12 A3
PE-V0-410-163- PG TEST PROCEDURE FOR DM A

A051 PLANT
51 16 A4
PE-V0-410-163- ENGINEERING BOQ OF DM PLANT A

A052
52 16 A4
PE-V0-410-163- O&M MANUAL FOR DM PLANT A A4/A3/A2/

A053 A1 AS
53 24
APPLICA
BLE
Notes:
1. A= APPROVAL. I = INFORMATION.
2. Any additional drawings-documents required during detailed engineering stage shall be provided by
bidder without any commercial, technical and delivery implication to BHEL and customer.
3. Non-submission of the document as per attached schedule will attract LD.
4. Bidder to note that the successful bidder, during detail engineering, will submit the drg/doc through web
based Document Management System in addition to hard copies to be submitted as per the Annexure IV
of this specification. Bidder would be provided access to the DMS for drg/doc approval and adequate
training for the same. Detailed methodology would be finalized during the kick-off meeting. Bidder to
ensure following at their end
Internet explorer version Minimum Internet Explorer 7

Internet speed 2 mbps (Minimum preferred)
Pop ups from our external DMS IP (124.124.36.198) should not be blocked
Vendors Internal proxy setting should not block DMS applications link
(http://124.124.36.198/wrenchwebaccess/login.aspx)
DMS user manuals to be used by BHEL PEM vendors for uploading, viewing, revising, commenting
and tracking documents on PEMs DMS have been uploaded on PEM internet website
(www.bhelpem.com ) under the Vendor session.
For quick access bidder may refer the link http://bhelpem.com/DMSManuals/DMSManuals.html
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
COMPLIANCE CUM CONFIRMATION SCHEDULE
The bidder shall confirm compliance with following by signing/ stamping this compliance certificate and
furnishing same with the offer:
a.) The scope of supply, technical details, construction features, design parameters etc. shall be as per
technical specification & there are no exclusions/ deviations with regard to same.
b.) QP/ test procedures shall be submitted in the event of order based on the guidelines given in the
specification & QP enclosed therein. QP will be subject to BHEL/Customer approval in the event of order
& customer hold points for inspection/ testing shall be marked in the QP at the contract stage. Inspection/
testing shall be witnessed as per same apart from review of various test certificates/ Inspection records
etc.The charges for 3rd party inspection (Lloyds, TUV or equivalent ) for imported components shall be
included in the base price of the equipment by the bidder.
c.) All drawings/data sheets etc. to be submitted during contract shall be subject to BHEL/Customer
review/ approval. GA drawings, as submitted with offer at tender stage are for reference purpose only
and shall be subject to approval during contract stage.
d.) There are no other deviations with respect to specification other than those furnished in the Schedule of
Deviations.
e.) The offered materials shall be either equivalent or superior to those specified. Also for components
where material is not specified it shall be suitable for intended duty, materials shall be subject to approval
in the event of order.
f.) The commissioning spares (if any) are supplied on As Required Basis & prices for same included in the
base price (If bidders reply to this is No commissioning spares are required and if some spares are
actually required during commissioning same shall be supplied by bidder without any cost to BHEL).
g.) All sub vendors shall be subject to BHEL/CUSTOMER approval.
h.) Any special tools & tackles, if required, shall be in bidders scope.
i.) Demonstration parameters shall stand valid till the satisfactory completion of demonstration test and its
acceptance by BHEL/Customer.
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
PROJECT: 1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM TPS STAGE VII, PALONCHA

SUGGESTIVE PRICE SCHEDULE
DM PLANT
1.0 Total lump sum firm price on FOR site basis to cover design, engineering,
manufacture, fabrication, assembly, inspection & testing at vendor's & sub-
vendors works, painting, forwarding, supply and delivery at site including start
up and commissioning spares, mandatory spares, properly packed for
transportation, unloading / handling and storage at site, in site transportation,
assembly, erection and commissioning, trail run, preparation and submission of
As Built drawings, site testing, carrying out performance guarantee tests at
site and handover of DM PLANT as per the details in different sections /
volumes of this specification for 1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM
TPS,STAGE-VII, PALONCHA.
a) Bidder to note that total price indicated above at 1 shall be considered for evaluation and hence
should be complete in all respect for the full scope defined and considering all terms and
conditions agreed.
b) In case, price indicated above does not match with item wise break-up given at 2, the highest
price so calculated shall be considered for evaluation but in case of order, the same shall be
placed at the lowest price.
2.0 MAJOR BREAK-UP OF PRICES GIVEN IN 1 ABOVE
2.01 Total lumpsum firm price for EQUIPMENT (SUPPLY, DESIGN &
ENGINEERING) i.e. Manufacture, fabrication, assembly, inspection and testing
at vendor's & sub-vendors works, painting, spares for erection, startup and
commissioning as required, forwarding, proper packing, shipment and delivery
at site, inclusive of all taxes & duties for the complete scope of supply of DM
PLANT defined as per tender technical specification (PE-TS-410-163-A001).
2.02 Total lump sum firm price for all services including unloading, handling &
transportation at site, Erection & Commissioning, trial run, preparation &
submission of As Built drawings, etc, required for completion of DM PLANT
as per tender technical specification (PE-TS-410-163-A001).
2.03 Price for Performance Guarantee test and handing over the plant to the
customer.
2.04 Price for Mandatory spares (as per list indicated in Section C1 Annexure - VI of
Specification).
3.0 Recommended spares (optional item).
4.00 Break-up (%) of prices given at Sl No-2.1 above (To be used during contract
execution for payment).
4.01 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Pressure vessels 18% of sl no 2.01
inclusive of all taxes, duties and other levies as above.
applicable.
4.02 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Resin inclusive of all 12% of sl no 2.01
taxes, duties and other levies as applicable. above.
4.03 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Atmospheric tank 14% of sl no 2.01
applicable.
4.04 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Valves inclusive of 15% of sl no 2.01
all taxes, duties and other levies as applicable. above.
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
4.05 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Instruments & 10% of sl no 2.01
Analyser inclusive of all taxes, duties and other levies above.
as applicable.
4.06 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Rotary Equipments 11% of sl no 2.01
(Pumps,Blowers,Agitators etc.) inclusive of all taxes, above.
duties and other levies as applicable.
4.07 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Piping & Fittings 10% of sl no 2.01
applicable.
4.08 Lumpsum firm price for supply of Balance items 10% of sl no 2.01
applicable.
Bidder shall furnish this price schedule in his offer only
Particulars of bidder / authorised representative
Name Designation Signature Date Company seal
DM PLANT

STAGE VII, PALONCHA
DECLARATIONS
I ..certify that all the technical data and

information pertaining to this specification are correct and are true representation of the equipment/system
covered by our format proposal number Dated .. and there is no deviation to the specification.
I hereby certify that I am duly authorized representative of the Bidders company whose name appears above
my signature.
Bidders Company Name .
Authorized representatives
Signature ..
Name .
Bidders Name The bidder hereby agrees to fully comply with

the requirements and intent of this
specification for the price indicated

Technical Specifications For DM Plant - Kothagudem Tps

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specifications For DM Plant - Kothagudem Tps

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specifications For DM Plant - Kothagudem Tps

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the scope of the document?

What is the scope of the document?

What technical specifications are covered in the document?

What technical specifications are covered in the document?

1X800 MW TSGENCO KOTHAGUDEM TPS

STAGE VII, PALONCHA

VOLUME: II B & III

SPECIFICATION NO.: PE-TS-410-163-A001

BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LIMITED

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

SECTION B PROJECT INFORMATION 4-7

SECTION C SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 8-116

SECTION C1 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL) 9-20

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301

PLC SPECIFICATION 500-504

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 1 of 630

1. SCOPE OF INQUIRY/ INTENT OF SPECIFICATION

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 3 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 4 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 5 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 6 of 630

ANALYSIS OF CLARIFIED WATER (TO BE USED TO DESIGN THE DM PLANT)

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 7 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 8 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 9 of 630

2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (MECHANICAL)

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 10 of 630

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 11 of 630

40) Safety equipments as per Data Sheet-A.

53) Start-up and commissioning spares as required.

54) Mandatory spares as indicated elsewhere in the specification.

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 12 of 630

63) Instrument hook up material shall be in bidders scope.

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 13 of 630

4) 200 meter DM water piping from DM plant to DM Water storage tanks.

4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (ELECTRICAL)

5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY (C&I)

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 14 of 630

7.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES

1) Erection and Commissioning, unloading, storage and handling at site.

2) Arrangement of all instruments, reagents, monitoring gadgets for monitoring, pre-commissioning,

3) Monitoring gadgets, instruments and equipments required for maintenance.

6) Trial run for requisite period.

7) Performance guarantee test.

9) Final touch up paint at site.

8.0 TERMINAL POINTS

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 15 of 630

2) Instrument air & service air up to terminal points.

4) Air conditioning, ventilation & fire fighting facilities.

6) Drinking water (or potable water), service water up to terminal points.

10.0 QP AND SUB VENDOR APPROVAL

11.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST

The Performance guarantee test shall be as per Annexure-III/Section-C1.

12.0 DESIGN/ CONSTRUCTION

13.0 DRAWING/DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENT

For the Drawings/Documents submission schedule, please refer Vol-III.

BHEL PS- PEM-PPEI: NOIDA, SECTOR 16A, UP-201301 Page 16 of 630